NONRESIDENT

TRAINING
COURSE

June 2016

Aviation Ordnanceman

(AO)

NAVEDTRA 14313B
Notice: Naval Education and Training Professional Development Center (NETPDC)
is no longer responsible for the content accuracy of the Nonresident Training
Courses (NRTCs).

For content issues, contact the servicing Center of Excellence: Center for Naval
Aviation Technical Training (CNATT); (850) 452-8188 or DSN: 459-8188.

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT D: Distribution authorized to the Department of

Defense (DoD) and DoD contractors only; critical technology; 13 June 2014.
Other request shall be referred to PEO SUB (PMS-404) or higher DOD authority.
 PREFACE

By obtaining this rate training manual, you have demonstrated a desire to improve yourself and the
Navy. Remember, however, this manual is only one part of the total Navy training program. Practical
experience, schools, selected reading, and your desire to succeed are also necessary to successfully
round out a fully meaningful training program.
THE MANUAL: This manual is organized into subject matter areas, each containing learning objectives
to help you determine what you should learn, along with text and illustrations to help you understand
the information. The subject matter reflects day-to-day requirements and experiences of personnel in
the rating or skill area. It also reflects guidance provided by Enlisted Community Managers (ECMs) and
other senior personnel, technical references, instructions, etc., and either the occupational or naval
standards, which are listed in the Manual of Navy Enlisted Manpower and Personnel Classifications
and Occupational Standards, NAVPERS 18068(series).
THE QUESTIONS: The questions that appear in this manual are designed to help you understand the
material in the text. The answers for the end of chapter questions are located in the appendixes.
THE EVALUATION: The end of book evaluation is available on Navy Knowledge Online. The
evaluation serves as proof of your knowledge of the entire contents of this NRTC. When you achieve
a passing score of 70 percent, your electronic training jacket will automatically be updated.
THE INTERACTIVITY: This manual contains interactive animations and graphics. They are available
throughout the course and provide additional insight to the operation of equipment and processes. For
the clearest view of the images, animations, and videos embedded in this interactive rate training
manual, adjust your monitor to its maximum resolution setting.
VALUE: In completing this manual, you will improve your military and professional knowledge.
Importantly, it can also help you study for the Navy-wide advancement in rate examination. If you are
studying and discover a reference in the text to another publication for further information, look it up.

June 2016 Edition Prepared by

AOCM (AW/SW) Voris Soileau

AOCM (AW/SW) Darryl Burton
MSgt Kevin Glydewell
AOC (AW/SW) John Vincent
AOC (AW) Shane Pace
AOC (AW/SW) Migon Rodgers
AOC (AW) Stephen Leonard
AOC (AW/SW) Gregory Franklin
AOC (AW/SW) David Weaver
AO1 (AW/SW) Cassie Steele
AO1 (AW/SW) Amanda Roth

NAVSUP Logistics Tracking Number

0504-LP-115-7958
i
 NAVEDTRA 14313B COPYRIGHT MATERIAL
Copyright material within this document has been identified and approved and is listed below.

Copyright Date Chapter Pages Remarks

Owner

ii
iii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER PAGE
1. Bombs, Fuzes, and Associated Components.................................................... 1-1
2. Aircraft Rockets and Rocket Launchers ............................................................ 2-1
3. Air-Launched Guided Missiles and Guided Missile Launchers.......................... 3-1
4. Pyrotechnics...................................................................................................... 4-1
5. Air-Laid Mines and Torpedoes .......................................................................... 5-1
6. Aircraft Guns ..................................................................................................... 6-1
7. Ammunition Loading ......................................................................................... 7-1
8. Targets and Associated Equipment .................................................................. 8-1
9. Ammunition Handling Equipment ...................................................................... 9-1
10. Suspension, Arming, and Releasing Equipment ............................................. 10-1
11. Ammunition Storage and Handling Afloat........................................................ 11-1
12. Ammunition Storage and Handling Ashore ..................................................... 12-1
13. Weapons Assembly ........................................................................................ 13-1
14. Aircraft Loading and Unloading Procedures .................................................... 14-1
15. Aircraft Weapons Systems .............................................................................. 15-1
16. Weapons Systems Test Equipment ................................................................ 16-1
17. Ammunition Administration Ashore and Afloat ................................................ 17-1

APPENDIXES
I. Glossary and Acronyms ................................................................................... AI-1
II. References ...................................................................................................... AII-1
III. Answers to End of Chapter Questions ........................................................... AIII-1

Index ................................................................................................................... Index-1

iv
 CHAPTER 1
BOMBS, FUZES, AND ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS
Bombs must be manufactured to withstand reasonable heat and be insensitive to the shock of
ordinary handling. They must also be capable of being dropped from an aircraft in a safe condition
when in-flight emergencies occur.
Bomb detonation is controlled by the action of a fuze. A fuze is a device that causes the detonation of
an explosive charge at the proper time after certain conditions are met. A bomb fuze is a mechanical
or an electrical device. It has the sensitive explosive elements (the primer and detonator) and the
necessary mechanical or electrical action to detonate the main booster charge. A mechanical action
or an electrical impulse causes the detonator to explode, which fires the primer. The primer-detonator
explosion is relayed to the main charge by a booster charge, completing the explosive train.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
When you have completed this chapter, you will be able to do the following:
1. Describe the operation of mechanical fuzes.
2. Describe the operation of electrical fuzes.
3. Identify the special safety features that are inherent in bomb fuzes.
4. Identify the types of aircraft bombs.
5. Identify the purpose of aircraft bombs.
6. Identify the safety procedures to be followed during bomb shipment
7. Identify the methods used to carry bombs.
8. Identify the function of general-purpose bombs.
9. Identify the parts of general-purpose bombs.
10. Identify the different configurations of general-purpose bombs.
11. Identify the different types of guided bomb units.
12. Identify the purpose of guided bomb units.
13. Identify the different types of air-laid mines.
14. Identify the purpose of air-laid mines.
15. Identify the various configurations of cluster bombs.
16. Identify the purpose of cluster bombs.
17. Identify the different types of practice bombs.
18. Identify the purpose of practice bombs.
19. Recognize the safety precautions to follow while working with fuzes.
20. Recognize the safety precautions to follow while working with bombs.
21. Recognize the safety precautions to follow while working with the associated components of
bombs.

1-1
FUZE TERMINOLOGY AND BASIC FUZE THEORY
This chapter will introduce you to some of the common terms and acronyms associated with fuzes,
basic fuze theory, general classes of fuzes, and the various types of fuzes used in the Navy.

Fuze Terminology
Some of the most common fuze terms that you should know are defined as follows:
x Arming time—is the amount of time or number of vane revolutions needed for the firing train to
be aligned after the bomb is released or from time of release until the bomb is fully armed—
also known as safe separation time (SST)
x Delay—when the functioning time of a fuze is longer than 0.0005 second
x External evidence of arming (EEA)—a means by which a fuze is physically determined to be in
a safe or armed condition
x Functioning time—the time required for a fuze to detonate after impact, or a preset time
x Instantaneous—when the functioning time of a fuze is 0.0003 second or less
x Nondelay—when the functioning time of a fuze is 0.0003 to 0.0005 second
x Proximity (VT)—the action that causes a fuze to detonate before impact when any substantial
object is detected at a predetermined distance from the fuze
x Safe air travel (SAT)—the distance along the trajectory that a bomb travels from the releasing
aircraft in an unarmed condition

Basic Fuze Theory

Fuzes are normally divided into two general classes—mechanical and electrical. The two classes only
refer to the primary operating principles. They may be subdivided by their method of functioning or by
the action that initiates the explosive train—impact, mechanical time, proximity, hydrostatic pressure,
or long delay. Another classification is their position in the bomb—nose, tail, side, or multi-positioned.

Mechanical Fuzes
All mechanical bomb fuzes are activated by means of an arming wire or lanyard. Pulling the arming
wire or lanyard at weapon release frees a vane. Rotation of the vane in the air stream provides
mechanical energy to an internal mechanism to arm the fuze or unlock a powered mechanism so that
arming can occur. When a fuze is armed, the explosive train is aligned so that the mechanism that
determines the mode of fuze functioning is free to operate and the main explosive charge in the
weapon can be detonated. The arming time of a fuze can be fixed or variable. In the former case, the
arming time is determined at fuze manufacture. In the latter case, the arming time is either pre-flight
selected during the weapon build-up operation or aircraft loading sequence, or selected during flight
via Serial Data Interface (SDI) from the cockpit. The actual arming time is a function of the delivery
tactic employed during weapon delivery. For safe, effective operation, any fuze (mechanical or
electrical) must have the following design features:
x It must remain safe in stowage, while it is handled in normal movement, and during loading
and downloading evolutions
x It must remain safe while being carried aboard the aircraft
x It must remain safe until the bomb is released and is well clear of the delivery aircraft (arming
delay or safe separation period)
1-2
 x Depending upon the type of target, the fuze may be required to delay the detonation of the
bomb after impact for a preset time (functioning delay), which may vary from a few
milliseconds to many hours
x It should not detonate the bomb if the bomb is accidentally released or if the bomb is jettisoned
in a safe condition from the aircraft
To provide these qualities, a number of design features are used. Most features are common to all
types of fuzes.

Electrical Fuzes
Electrical fuzes have many characteristics of mechanical fuzes. They differ in fuze initiation. Electrical
fuzes can be activated either by means of a lanyard, or by means of electrical energy transferred from
aircraft carried equipment to the fuze as the weapon is released from the aircraft. If a fuze is activated
by means of a lanyard, its arming time and its function time delay are selected before flight (i.e., at
weapon buildup or aircraft loading). With electrical activation, the fuze arming time and functioning
characteristics can be determined in-flight to match changing conditions at the target area or
conditions at alternate target areas.
If a fuze is electrically activated, the electrical signal can both be a source of energy and contain
commands. An electrical pulse from the delivery aircraft charges capacitors in the fuze as the bomb is
released from the aircraft. Arming and functioning delays are produced by a series of
resistor/capacitor networks in the fuze. The functioning delay is electromechanically initiated, with the
necessary circuits closed by means of shock-sensitive switches.
The electric fuze remains safe until it is energized by the electrical charging system carried in the
aircraft. Because of the safety interlocks provided in the release equipment, electrical charging can
occur only after the bomb is released from the rack or shackle and has begun its separation from the
aircraft; however, it is still connected electrically to the aircraft's bomb arming unit. At this time, the
fuze receives the energizing charge required for selection of the desired arming and impact times.

Special Safety Features

Some fuzes incorporate special safety features. The most important safety features are detonator-
safe, shear-safe, and delay arming.

Detonator-Safe
Detonator-safe fuzes do not have the elements of their firing train in the proper position for firing until
the fuze is fully armed. The elements remain firmly fixed and out of alignment in the fuze body while
the fuze is unarmed; the out of alignment increases safety during shipping, stowing, and handling of
the fuze. The arming action of the fuze aligns the firing train.

Shear-Safe
A shear-safe fuze does not become armed if its arming mechanism is damaged or completely
severed from the fuze body. The arming mechanism of the fuze normally protrudes from the bomb
and it might otherwise be severed from the fuze body if the bomb is accidentally dropped; shear-safe
fuzes give additional security for carrier operations and for externally-mounted bombs.

Delay Arming
Delay arming mechanically or electrically slows the arming of the fuze. It keeps a fuze in the safe
condition until the bomb falls far enough away (or long enough) from the aircraft to minimize the

1-3
effects of a premature explosion; delay arming helps to make carrier operations safe because a bomb
accidentally released during landing or takeoff ordinarily will not have sufficient air travel, velocity, or
time to fully arm the fuze.

MECHANICAL FUZES
There are many fuzes in use by the Navy today. Some of the commonly used fuzes are discussed in
this manual. To keep up with current fuzes, the latest information can be found in Aircraft Bombs,
Fuzes, and Associated Components, Naval Air Systems Command (NAVAIR) 11-5A-17, and
Airborne Bomb and Rocket Fuze Manual, NAVAIR 11-1F-2.

Mark 339 Modification 1 Mechanical Time Fuze

The Mark (Mk) 339 Modification (Mod) 1 mechanical time fuzes (Figure 1-1) are used with dispenser
weapons and have the following characteristics:
x Nose-mounted
x Air-enabling
x Detonator-safe
The Mk 339 Mod 1 fuze is installed in the bomb clusters during assembly by the manufacturer;
therefore, the following information on this fuze is limited.

Figure 1-1 — Installed Mk 339 Mod 1 mechanical time fuze.

1-4
The purpose of the Mk 339 Mod 1 mechanical time fuze is to initiate the linear-shaped charges
located in the cargo section walls. The Mk 339 Mod 1 fuze provides the pilot with in-flight selection of
the fuze function time

Physical Description
The primary and option functional delays are preset during assembly at the factory. The fuze is preset
at 1.2 seconds for primary delay, and the option delay is preset at 4.0 seconds.
These time delays can be reset during weapon preparation to meet various tactical requirements. The
functional delays for both the primary and option modes of the Mk 339 Mod 1 fuze can be adjusted
from 1.2 to 100 seconds.
It is possible to tell if the fuze has shifted from the primary to the option mode by checking the time
setting in the observation window on the functional mode indicator. If the arming wire has been
accidentally pulled during handling, the fuze shifts to the option mode. Once the option wire is pulled,
the Mod 1 fuze can be reset to the primary mode by reinstalling the option time wire.
The fuze safe/arm indicator (Figure 1-2) provides EEA for the Mk 339 Mod 1 fuze. The fuze safe/arm
indicator is viewed through the indicator observation window in the upper nose fairing. There is a
layer of green foil at the base of the indicator bubble. The fuze is in a safe condition when the green
foil is intact (Figure 1-2, view A), and it is armed when the green foil is pierced by the indicator pin
(Figure 1-2, view B).

Figure 1-2 — Mechanical time fuze Mk 339 Mod 1 safe/arm indicator pin in safe
and armed positions.

Functional Description
The Mk 339 fuze utilizes two arming wires. If the pilot selects the primary mode of delivery when the
weapon is released from the aircraft, only the arming wire is pulled out and the primary mode of the
fuze is initiated. If the pilot selects the option mode of delivery, both the arming wire and the option
wire are pulled out, initiating the option time mode of the fuze. If only the option time wire is pulled out
on airborne release, the fuze will dud. Both the fuze arming wire and option wire must be pulled out
for the fuze to function in the option mode.

1-5
ELECTRICAL FUZES
The Navy uses fuze munition unit (FMU),
fuzing unit (FZU), and Doppler sensing unit
(DSU) fuzes in various tactical situations. For
more information on electrical fuzes refer to
the Aircraft Bombs, Fuzes, and Associated
Components, NAVAIR 11-5A-17, and
Airborne Bomb and Rocket Fuze Manual,
NAVAIR 11-1F-2.

FMU-143(Series) Electric Tail Fuze

The FMU-143(series) fuze (Figure 1-3) is
used with the guided bomb unit- (GBU-)
24(series) and GBU-31(V)4(series) weapons
and is initiated by the FZU-32B/B initiator,
which is used to generate and supply power
to arm the fuze. The safe condition is verified Figure 1-3 — FMU-143(series) fuze.
by the presence of a safety pin or arming wire
through the pop-out pin (gag rod).

FMU-139(Series) Electronic Bomb

Fuze
The FMU-139(series) electronic bomb fuzes
(Figure 1-4) are an electronic impact or
impact-delay fuze. The fuzes are solid state,
micro-computer, multi-option tail or nose fuze
used in the Mk 80/bomb live unit (BLU)
100(series) general-purpose bombs, including
laser-guided bombs. The fuzes are joint
service (Navy and Air Force) with multiple
settings. The arming times are in-flight
selectable and the functioning delay (high drag
arm or delay switch) must be set during
weapon assembly. Weapons can be delivered
in either high drag (retarded) or low drag
(unretarded) mode. There are three arming
times (2.6, 5.5, and 10.0 seconds) and four
functioning delay settings (10, 25, and 60
milliseconds, and instantaneous). Only 2.6/60,
2.6/25, 2.6/10, and 2.6/INST high drag Figure 1-4 — FMU-139(series) electronic bomb
arm/delay switch positions are authorized for fuze.
Navy/Marine Corps use.
The low drag arm time (LDAT) rotary switch is positioned at “X” for shipping, storage, and all fuze
function control set (FFCS) use. When the FMU-139 is utilized with the Mk 122 safety switch, the
LDAT rotary switch must be positioned at the "X" position for all FFCS use. When the FMU-139 is
utilized with the FZU-48/B initiator, the LDAT switch must be set to other than "X" position. If the
LDAT switch is set to "X" position when the FZU-48/B is utilized the weapon will dud. High drag arm
time must be less than low drag arm time in order for fuze to function.
1-6
Mk 122 Mod 0 Arming Safety Switch
The Mk 122 Mod 0 arming safety switch (Figure
1-5) provides an open circuit and a radiation
hazard (RADHAZ) shield to prevent
electromagnetic radiation from entering the fuze
circuits. When actuated and the lanyard pulled
free, the switch connects the bomb fuze control
circuits in the aircraft to the electric fuze circuits
in the bomb.
While the weapon is loaded, the coaxial cable
of the switch is plugged into the receptacle of
the aircraft's electrical arming unit. When the
bomb is suspended from the rack, the lanyard
is attached to a fixture on the rack or pylon.
Upon bomb release, the lanyard pulls the
lanyard pin and closes the fuze circuit. The
lanyard is long enough so the weapon
separates from the bomb rack suspension
hooks before the lanyard pin is pulled from the
switch, ensuring that the fuze does not receive
charging voltages in case of weapon release
failure. The coaxial cable is longer than the
lanyard, which permits sufficient time for the
Figure 1-5 — Mk 122 Mod 0 arming safety
charging voltage to pass from the electrical
arming unit on the aircraft to the fuze electric switch.
circuits on the bomb before the cable is pulled
free or breaks from the arming unit receptacle.

NOTE
The Mk 122 Mod 0 arming safety switch must be installed
and removed in a RADHAZ-free environment.

FZU-48/B Initiator
The FZU-48/B initiator (Figure 1-6) is a cylindrically shaped metal component that is installed in the
bomb charging well. It consists of a main housing with two electrical connectors and a cover
assembly with lanyard. The two electrical connectors located in the bottom of the housing are
protected during handling and storage by plastic caps. Connectors attach to the electrical cable in the
bomb. The cover assembly has an arrow to indicate proper orientation when installed in the bomb
and has a flexible lanyard with a swivel break link that attaches to the bomb rack. The power cable
assembly routes power from FZU-48/B to FMU-139(series) fuzes. The power cable assembly is a
coiled electrical cable with electrical connectors at each end. The appropriate power cable is
identified by the white backshell just aft of the fuze connector.

1-7
FZU-61/62(Series) Firing
Lanyards
The FZU-61/B firing lanyard is
a dual-legged lanyard with a
pull ring break-link. It is used in
conjunction with the FZU-48/B
initiator and FMU-139(series)
fuze to replace the existing
FZU-48/B lanyard with one that
will reach the aft arming unit of
the BRU-32 bomb ejector rack.
The FZU-61/B lanyard
eliminates the need for the Mk
3 arming wire for safe jettisons.
One of the two legs is
removed—depending on what
Mk/Mod bomb body is used.
The FZU-62/B serves the same
purpose as the FZU-61/B for Figure 1-6 — FZU-48/B initiator.
the BRU-33/36/55 racks.

NOTE
The DSU-33(series) and DSU-38(series) are classified
CONFIDENTIAL and shall be handled in accordance with
DOD 5200.1 R/AFI-31-401.

DSU-33(Series) Proximity Sensor

The DSU-33(series) proximity sensor (Figure 1-7) is an
adverse-weather, self-powered, active, radio frequency,
single mission device capable of operating in an
electronic countermeasures (ECM) environment. The
sensor interfaces with, and provides a proximity function
for, the BLU-110/111/117 and Mk 80(series) general-
purpose bombs. It is capable of both high and low drag
release and provides a stable height of burst (HOB)
above ground level (AGL) over all surfaces, in all
projected environments and all meteorological conditions Figure 1-7 — DSU-33(series)
encountered in air attack missions. proximity sensor.

DSU-38(Series) Proximity Sensor

The DSU-38(series) proximity sensor (Figure 1-8) will detect, acquire, and track the energy reflected
from a laser designated target. The DSU-38A/B integrates an adjustable proximity sensor (APS)
which provides selectable height of burst input to the weapon fuze system.

1-8
FMU-140A/B Dispenser Proximity
Fuze
The FMU-140A/B dispenser proximity fuze
(DPF) (Figure 1-9) is a self-powered, active,
radio frequency, range-gated radar fuze
capable of operating in a high ECM
environment. It is used with the cluster bomb
unit (CBU)-99 Rockeye and CBU-78 Gator
weapons. Fuze electronics are mounted in
aluminum support housing with antennas
protected by a plastic radome. Height-of-
function (HOF) and arming time control
switches are easily accessible. Arming times Figure 1-8 — DSU-38(series) proximity sensor.
on the FMU-140A/B DPF may be set at 1, 2,
4, 6, 8, and 10 seconds. The fuze also incorporates a 1.2
second arm-and-fire feature that permits the pilot to
override the groundset HOF so the fuze functions 1.2
seconds after weapon release. This feature is particularly
desirable in Marine Corps close-air-support missions.
The Navy’s FMU-140A/B DPF initiates a linear-shaped
cutting charge. The fuze initiates opening of a dispenser
at any one of ten ground-selectable, HOF altitudes
between 300 and 3,000 feet. In the proximity mode, the
fuze will arm at one of five ground-selectable arming
times between 1.2 and 10 seconds. Opening occurs only
during the downward trajectory of the munition or, if used
in the time mode, 1.2 seconds after release.
Figure 1-9 — FMU-140A/B
dispenser proximity fuze.
FMU-167/B Hard Target Void Sensing Fuze
The joint service (Navy/Air
Force) FMU-167/B hard target
void sensing fuze (HTVSF)
electronic bomb fuze system
(Figure 1-10) consists of an
FMU-167/B fuze, a FZU-60/B
initiator, retaining ring, and
lanyard. The fuze system is
designed for mounting only in the
tail fuze well of the weapon and
is only compatible with the GBU-
31. When installed, it is
completely enclosed within the
weapon and held in place with a
locking retaining ring. After
installation, the fuze face panel
remains accessible for the
required weapon interface
connections. External interface
connections to the FMU-167/B Figure 1-10 — FMU-167/B HTVSF with FZU-60/B initiator.

1-9
fuze are provided by the J1 connector on the aft end face-plate, and the J2 connector on the booster
end of the fuze.
The FMU-167/B fuze provides safing, ground setting, and multiple delay time arming and fuzing
functions. The fuze differs from other Navy fuzes in that it uses no moving parts and employs only
secondary explosives. These secondary explosives are used in a position leading to the initiation of a
high explosive main charge without physical interruption. The FMU-167/B fuze provides
programmable fuzing logic capable of making active decisions during penetration. These include void
detection, layer counting, path length calculation, primary time delay as well as an independent
electrically programmable backup time delay of 0 to 255 milliseconds.
The FMU-167/B fuze system uses the FZU-60/B initiator to provide operating power for the fuze. The
turbine alternator within the FZU-60/B initiator provides sustained power for all internal safety circuits.
FMU-167/B fuze does not have external safety features, such as a safing pin or gag rod; the fuze
remains in a safe condition until dropped from aircraft in actual use. The fuze cannot arm unless the
fuze receives both a power signal that indicates FZU power and the appropriate arming signal. In the
unlikely event that the fuze becomes armed (the high voltage capacitor is charged up) outside of
actual use, the charge will bleed down within 30 minutes once power is removed and the fuze will
then be safe to handle.

FZU-60/B Initiator
The FZU-60/B initiator is an air-driven, turbine-generator power supply and safety switch configured
for installation in the charging well of the bomb. It fits inside the weapon charging well and generates
power for the FMU-167/B fuze. The FZU-60/B initiator consists of a cylindrical metal housing with an
integral cable on the bottom end. The top end has a hinged cover with a short, attached lanyard.
When mounted on the aircraft, the short lanyard is attached to a longer, flexible lanyard with a swivel
break-link that attaches to the bomb rack. The cover assembly has an arrow to indicate proper
orientation when installed in the bomb. The FZU-60/B initiator connects to the FMU-167/B fuze via an
integral cable from the initiator connected to the J2 connector on the fuze.

AIRCRAFT BOMB AMMUNITION AND ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS

Aircraft bombs are released over enemy targets to reduce and neutralize the enemy's war potential.
This neutralization is done by destructive explosion, fire, nuclear reaction, and war gases. Aircraft
bomb ammunition is used strategically to destroy installations, armament, and personnel. Also,
aircraft bomb ammunition is used tactically in direct support of land, sea, and air forces engaged in
offensive or defensive operations.
For safety reasons, some bomb ammunition is shipped and stowed without the fuzes or arming
assemblies and associated components installed. This ammunition must be assembled before use.
Other types, such as cluster bomb units (CBUs), are shipped and stowed as complete assemblies,
with fuzes or arming assemblies and associated components installed.
Bombs are designed to be carried either in the bomb bay of aircraft or externally under the wings or
fuselage. The general characteristics and basic principles of operation of bomb ammunition and its
associated components are described in this chapter.

GENERAL-PURPOSE BOMBS AND FIN ASSEMBLIES

General-purpose (GP) bombs are used in most bombing operations. GP bombs have a slender body
made of steel with a well in the nose section for a nose fuze, adapter booster, proximity sensor, or
penetrator plug (ogive or MXU-735); a well in the aft section for a tail fuze; and wells centrally located
on the top of the bomb body—two for suspension lugs and one for the Mk 122 arming safety switch.
1-10
Their cases (bomb body) are aerodynamically designed and relatively light, and approximately 45
percent of their weight is made of explosives. The GP bombs are compatible with proximity sensors,
and mechanical and electronic fuzes. These GP bombs may be outfitted with either a conical or
retarding fin, laser/Global Positioning System (GPS) guidance airfoil kit, or underwater mine kit.
The GP bombs are olive drab or gray with stenciling on the side for identification. The size and weight
of each bomb and other unique information is provided in the following paragraphs. Some bomb
bodies have a thermal protective coat applied to the surface to extend the cook-off times (see Table
1-1). The nomenclature of the high-explosive filler, such as plastic bonded explosives (PBX) or plastic
bonded explosives Navy (PBXN), in the bombs is stenciled on the bomb body, stamped on the base
plug, and further identified by a yellow band around the nose. All Mk 80/BLU 100(series) GP bombs
currently used aboard ships are required to be thermally protected. Thermally-protected bombs are
identified by two yellow bands and the words THERMALLY-PROTECTED in the identification legend.
The lot number is stenciled in white on the forward end.
Table 1-1 — Mk 80/BLU 100 Series Cook-Off Times
ORDNANCE FUZE AVERAGE SHORTEST BOMB FUZE INITIATED
REACTION REACTION INITIATED REACTION (NOTE 1)
TIME (Minutes TIME REACTION
& Seconds)
Mk 82, 83, 84 All 3 + 30 2 + 30 Deflagration to Deflagration to detonation
non-thermally explosion (after 5 minutes)
protected (NTP)
Mk 82 Mods FMU-139 10 + 00 8 + 30 Deflagration Deflagration to detonation
(NOTE 2) BLU- (after 12 minutes)
111 A/B BLU- No fuze 3 + 04 --- --- Deflagration to detonation
126/B thermally (after 5 minutes)
protected (TP)
Mk 83 Mods/ FMU-139 10 + 00 8 + 49 Deflagration Deflagration to detonation
BLU-110A/B (after 12 minutes)
thermally
protected (TP)
Mk 84 Mods/ FMU-139 10 + 00 8 + 45 Deflagration Deflagration to detonation
BLU-117A/B (after 12 minutes)
thermally
protected (TP)
BLU-109 A/B FMU-143 12 + 18 12 + 00 Deflagration Deflagration
thermally
protected (TP)
PBXN-109
BLU-116A/B FMU-143 14 + 15 11 + 58 Deflagration Deflagration
PBXN-109
BLU-110C/B FMU-139 6 + 07 6 + 07 Burning Reaction - - -
BLU-111C/B FMU-139 11 + 30 11 + 30 Burning Reaction - - -
BLU-117C/B FMU-139 9 + 17 7 + 55 Burning Reaction - - -
BLU-126A/B FMU-139 11 + 30 11 + 30 Burning Reaction - - -
BLU-129/B --- 21 + 10 21 + 10 Burning Reaction - - -
NOTES
1. Fuze initiated reaction. Frequency of detonation reaction is small.
2. Chips in exterior coating and/or groove for retarding fin cut to bare steel do not change cook-off time.

1-11
The GP bombs currently in use are the GP Mk 80/BLU 100(series). The specifications for the
individual bombs are listed in Figure 1-11. The basic difference between the bombs listed is their size
and weight. The following description of the Mk 80/BLU 100(series) bomb is applicable to all bombs
within the Mk 80/BLU 100(series) unless otherwise noted.

Figure 1-11 — Specifications for GP bombs.

Mk 80/BLU 100(series) GP bombs have two suspension lugs threaded into lug inserts on the bomb
body. The high-explosive filler of the bomb is identified by yellow-stenciled nomenclature on the bomb
body and yellow bands around the nose.
The BLU-110/111/117A/B bombs are Mk 82/83/84 GP bombs loaded with PBXN-109. The BLU-
117C/B utilizes AFX-795 as the explosive filler. The BLU-111 replaces the Mk 82, the BLU-110
replaces the Mk 83 bomb and the BLU-117 replaces the Mk 84. Identification of a PBXN-109 loaded
bomb can be made by the stencil on the bomb body (front and rear) and by three yellow bands on the
nose. The BLU-110/111/117C/B are vented warheads for better insensitive munition (IM) reaction.
The BLU-126/B low-collateral damage (LOCO) bomb is identical to the BLU-111A/B with the
exception of the amount of PBXN-109 explosive filler. The aft end of the bomb is filled with
approximately 27 pounds of PBXN-109; the remainder of the bomb is filled with PBXN-109 inert
stimulant. There is an extra yellow stripe around the aft end of the bomb body for ease of
identification. The BLU-126A/B is a vented warhead for better IM reaction.

1-12
The BLU-129/B composite bomb body is a Mk 82 shape with very low collateral damage. The BLU-
129 has no thermal protective coating. It uses AFX-1282 as an explosive fill which utilizes tungsten
powder to match the mass properties of the Mk 82. It utilizes vented technology for better IM reaction.
BLU-129 is restricted to use with guidance kits only.
The BLU-109A/B bomb is a 2,000 pound class bomb designated as a hard target penetrator (HTP).
The GBU-24 components convert the bomb from a purely ballistic weapon to a guided weapon. The
BLU-109A/B is loaded with PBXN-109, thermally protected, and identified by three yellow bands on
the nose. The BLU-109C/B is a vented warhead for better IM reaction.
The BLU-116A/B consists of an explosive filled hardened steel penetrating case loaded with PBXN-
109 and surrounded by an aerodynamic airframe, fuzewell, and associated hardware. It has the same
external profile as the BLU-109, without thermal coating, with similar mass properties. The bomb
consists of two major subassemblies, the airframe subassembly, and the penetrator case
subassembly. The BLU-116A/B is identified by three yellow stripes on the nose.

Shipping
Configuration
The bomb body
(Figure 1-12) is
shipped with a
plastic plug installed
in the nose and tail
fuze well to prevent
damage to the
internal threads and
keep out moisture.
The aft end of the
bomb body has a
metal shipping cap
installed. Plastic lug
caps are installed in
the suspension lug
wells, and a plastic
plug is installed in
the fuze-charging
receptacle well.
Some bombs
contain a hoisting Figure 1-12 — Mk 80/BLU 100(series) bomb shipping configuration.
lug packaged in the
tail fuze well.
Bombs are shipped on metal pallets. The number of bombs loaded on each pallet depends on the
bomb size. For example, six Mk 82/BLU 111 bombs, three Mk 83/BLU 110 bombs, or two Mk 84/BLU
117 bombs can be shipped on a pallet. Refer to the Transportation and Storage Data for Ammunition,
Explosives and Related Hazardous Materials, Naval Sea Systems Command (NAVSEA) SW020-AC-
SAF-010 for more information on shipping configurations.

Fuze Wells
The bomb body is designed with a nose and tail fuze well. These wells are internally threaded to
receive electrical fuzes and associated components.
1-13
Fuze Charging Circuit
The forward and aft charging tubes are installed at the factory and contain the electric fuze wire
harness (Figure 1-13). When electric fuzing is used, the wire harness provides a path for the charging
current from the fuze-charging receptacle to the forward and aft fuze wells.

Figure 1-13 — Fuze charging circuit.

Suspension Lugs
There are two suspension lug wells
for the installation of suspension lugs.
The suspension lugs are spaced 14
or 30 inches apart, depending upon
the size of the bomb. Suspension
lugs (Figure 1-14) are used to attach
the weapon to the aircraft bomb
racks. An internally-threaded well for
the installation of a hoisting lug is
located between the suspension lugs,
at the center-of-gravity (CG) position
on the bomb. The hoisting lug is used
for handling purposes only.
Figure 1-14 — Suspension lug installation.
Nose Plugs
There are two basic nose plugs (Figure 1-15) used in GP bombs,
the solid nose plug (MXU-735/B and MXU-735A/B) and the ogive
nose plug. The ogive nose plug provides a pointed arch. A
support cup is used in the nose well with the ogive nose plug to
provide a solid structure to the bomb. The MXU-735 solid nose
plug is designed to provide better penetration of hard targets,
without the likelihood of nose plug shearing during oblique impact.
The MXU-735 replaces the ogive nose plug and support cup.

Arming Wire Assemblies

Arming wire, cable, and lanyard assemblies (Figure 1-16) are
used for arming procedures during ordnance evolutions. The
primary function of arming wire assemblies is to maintain
ordnance components in a safe condition until actual release of
the bomb from the aircraft.

Figure 1-15 — Nose plugs.

1-14
 NOTE
Dexter safety clips are used vice Fahnestock clips unless
otherwise specified.

Normally, the wires consist of one or two brass or steel metal strands attached to a swivel loop. The
MAU-166/MAU-182 swivel and ring assembly permits a method for indirect rigging of GP bombs so
that no arming wires will remain hanging from the bomb rack after weapon release. Safety
Fahnestock clips (Figure 1-16) or Dexter safety clips are attached to the ends of the arming wires
after installation. They prevent premature or accidental withdrawal of the arming wires from the
component.

Figure 1-16 — Arming wire assemblies.

Normally, arming wire assemblies are shipped in spiral-wound fiber tubes, over-packed in a wooden
box. Generally, the safety Fahnestock clips are packed in the tubes with the arming wires. The most
commonly used arming wire assemblies are listed in Table 1-2.

1-15
 Table 1-2 — Arming Wire Data
Arming Wires Type Material Diameter (in.) Leg Lengths (in.)
Mk 3 Mod 0 Single Steel 0.032 57.0
Accessory Data
Description Quantity
Ring and Swivel MAU-182/MAU-166 1 ea
Self-Adjusting Positive Arming Adapter – Reusable 1 ea
Self-Adjusting Positive Arming Adapter, package in M19A1 Ammo Can – Reusable 100 per pkg

Arming wire installation procedures are discussed in this manual where the use of arming wire
assemblies is required.
The F-35 joint strike fighter (JSF) aircraft uses unique lanyards and accessories. A Kevlar lanyard is
used in conjunction with the arming wire loop assembly to actuate the air foil group of a GBU-12. One
end of the lanyard consists of two lengths of rubber coated Kevlar. One end of the two lengths
attaches directly to the weapon lug; the other end attaches to and provides activation of the air foil
group.

Fin Assemblies
Fin assemblies, used with the Mk 80/BLU 100(series) GP bombs, provide stability to the bomb. The
fin assemblies cause the bomb to fall in a smooth, definite curve to the target, instead of tumbling
through the air. Each individual fin is crated in a lightweight, disposable metal crate (Figure 1-17) and
shipped on metal pallets. Some fin assemblies are shipped with bomb lugs attached to the shipping
crate, depending upon the particular Navy Ammunition Logistics Code (NALC)/Department of
Defense Identification Code (DODIC).

Figure 1-17 — Fin shipping configurations.

Two types of fins are described in this chapter—conical fins and retarding bomb fin assemblies. The
conical fin is used for the nonretard mode of delivery, and the retard/nonretard fin assembly can be
used for either the nonretard or retard mode of delivery.

1-16
Conical Fin
The typical BSU-33(series) conical fin assembly (Figure 1-18) is steel, is conical in shape, and has
four fins to provide stability. Access covers, attached by quick-release screws, are located on the
sides of the fin body, providing access for dearming and inspections. There is a drilled or punched
hole at the top and bottom of the forward end of the fin body. This hole is used to install an arming
wire when the bomb is being configured for electric tail fuzing. An index pin is located on the rim of
the conical fin for mating with the index hole in the bomb. The fin is attached to the aft end of the
bomb, and is secured in place by tightening the fin setscrews into the V-groove of the bomb.
The conical fin may be used with all Mk 80/BLU 100(series) bombs. The basic difference between the
types of conical fins is their physical size and the larger the bomb, the larger the fin.

Figure 1-18 — Typical bomb conical fin assembly.

BSU-85/B Air Inflatable Retarder

The BSU-85/B bomb fin (Figure 1-19) attaches to the Mk 83/BLU 110 GP bomb. It is an air-inflatable
retarder designed for very low altitudes. It can be dropped in either high-drag (retarded) or low-drag

Figure 1-19 — Typical BSU-85/B air-inflatable retardable fin with high- and low-drag
configurations.

1-17
(unretarded) mode. The BSU-85/B fin attaches to the bomb body by eight setscrews. It is a self-
contained unit that consists of a stabilizer assembly (canister housing) with four fixed fins (X-shaped)
and a lanyard assembly. The four fixed fins provide low-drag aerodynamic stability. The wedges
installed on the trailing edges provide stabilizing spin during both low-drag and high-drag release.

BSU-86/B Bomb Fin

The BSU-86/B bomb fin (Figure 1-20) is used with GP
bombs, Mk 82 Mods/BLU 111(series), or the practice bomb
BDU-45/B. The fin provides a retarded (high-drag) or
unretarded (low-drag) bomb delivery capability for the
aircraft. The BSU-86/B fin is attached to the Mk 82/BLU 111
or BDU-45/B bomb by eight setscrews. A 25-degree wedge
is located at the tips of each fin to impart spin. The air
stream drives the fin open rapidly, when the MAU-199/B
spring arming wire (SAW) is activated. The spring load Figure 1-20 — BSU-86(series)
under each fin blade initiates fin opening. bomb fin.
Principles of Operation
There are three modes of delivery available for the fin assembly. They are retarded, unretarded, and
in-flight selection (pilot option) of either mode.

Retarded Mode
In the retarded mode of delivery, the fins open to retard or slow down the weapon. Since the aircraft
and the weapon are traveling at the same speed when the weapon is released, the weapon and the
aircraft arrive at the target at the same time. Therefore, the retarded mode of delivery is used during
low-level bombing to prevent damage to the aircraft.
The fin assembly is positively armed in the retarded configuration. In this configuration, the fin release
arming wire is looped over a permanent structure on the bomb rack. As the weapon is released from
the aircraft, the arming wire is pulled from the fin release band, and the spring-loaded fins pop open.
The fins are forced to the full-open position by the air stream, which causes the weapon to rapidly
decelerate and allows the releasing aircraft sufficient time to safely clear the target area.

Unretarded Mode
In the unretarded mode of delivery, the weapon is released from the aircraft and the fins remain in the
closed position. The weapon free falls to the target. In the unretarded mode of delivery (without pilot
option), the cotter/safety pin installed in the fin release band is not removed or replaced with an
arming wire. However, the safety tag that reads REMOVE BEFORE FLIGHT is removed.

In-Flight Selection
The most frequently used mode for delivery is the in-flight selection (pilot option) mode. The pilot can
drop the weapon in the retarded or unretarded mode. This mode is made possible by connecting the
swivel loop of the fin release arming wire to the tail arming solenoid of the bomb rack. If the pilot
energizes the arming solenoid upon weapon release, the arming wire remains connected to the
arming solenoid and is pulled from the fin release band at weapon release, which allows the fins to
pop open and results in a retarded delivery. If the pilot does not energize the arming solenoid upon
weapon release, the arming wire is pulled free of the arming solenoid. This release allows it to remain
in the fin release band, preventing the fins from opening, which results in an unretarded delivery.

1-18
GUIDED BOMB UNITS
The Guided Bomb Unit System utilizes bomb bodies of Mk 80 Series low drag general purpose
bombs to detect a target illuminated by a laser beam.

GBU-10/12/16
GBU-10/12/16 (Figure 1-21) are Mk 80/BLU-110/111/117(series) GP bombs modified to detect a
target illuminated by a laser beam. The modification consists of a munition auxiliary unit- (MAU-)
169(series), MAU-209(series) computer control group (CCG), or weapon control unit- (WCU-)
10(series) control section (CS) and the MXU-650, -651, or -667(series) air foil group (AFG). The CCG
and guidance fins are mounted on a forward adapter assembly and provide target detection and
guidance. The wing assembly is mounted aft.

Figure 1-21 — Typical GBU configuration.

The GBU-12F/B is a dual-mode weapon that incorporates GPS guidance using the WGU-53/B vice
the MAU-169, MAU-209 or WCU-10. Each AFG contains identical items; although they are different in
physical size, they perform identical functions. A typical AFG is composed of a folding wing assembly,
forward adapter assembly, guidance fins, and hardware required for assembly of laser-guided
weapons.
The CCG mounts on the nose of the bomb body, precluding the use of nose fuzing. The CCG detects
a laser-illuminated target and provides weapon guidance signals to the moveable guidance fins
(canards). The canards attach to the CCG and the forward adapter assembly. The canards react to
the signals received from the CCG to direct the weapon to the target.
The wing assembly is mounted on the aft end of the bomb body. It adds necessary aerodynamic
stability and lift for in-flight maneuvering. An electric tail fuze is installed in the tail of the bomb. Except
for the glass nose of the CCG, all components are painted olive drab and the bomb body has
standard GP markings.

GBU-51/B and GBU-52/B

The GBU-51/B and GBU-52/B GBUs are BLU-126(series) LOCO bombs modified to detect a target
illuminated by a laser beam. The GBU-51/B modification consists of a MAU-169(series), MAU-
209(series) CCG or WCU-10(series) Control Section and MXU-650(series) AFG. The CCG and
guidance fins are mounted on a forward adapter assembly and provide target detection and

1-19
guidance. The wing assembly is mounted aft. The GBU-52/B is a dual-mode weapon that
incorporates GPS guidance using the WGU-53/B vice the MAU-169, MAU-209, or WCU-10.

GBU-24(Series) Paveway III

The GBU-24(series) Paveway III (Figure 1-22) is a converted BLU-109A/B or BLU-116A/B 2000-
pound-class bomb designated as an HTP. The associated components required for conversion are
fuze, airfoil group, FZU initiator, adapter group, and guidance control unit. The heavy-walled case of
the bomb provides the penetration capability of 4 to 6 feet of reinforced concrete. The BLU-109A/B
and BLU-116A/B have identical characteristics, except the BLU-109A/B has a thermal protective
coating applied to the surface to extend the cook-off time. Prior to assembly, verify the BLU-109A/B is
not missing more than 20 square inches of thermal coating in a single area or more than 40 square
inches total to be acceptable for use.

Figure 1-22 — GBU-24(series) Paveway III configuration.

Joint Direct Attack Munition (JDAM)/Laser JDAM Series

The JDAM GBUs (Figures 1-23 and 1-24) are Mk 82/83/84, BLU-109, or BLU-110/111/117/126/129
bombs modified with GPS guidance sets. The guidance sets for these weapons are functionally the
same but not interchangeable because of the guidance software and physical interface with the
warhead. Guidance set control fin actuators contain either electrically released motor “friction” brakes
(designated KMU-55X/B) or a fin lock device (designated KMU-55XX/B and KMU-572X/B) that unlock
the tail control fins in flight. New production variants of the fin lock device guidance sets will be
equipped with either selective availability anti-spoofing module (SAASM) (designated KMU-55XB/B
and KMU-572B/B) to provide capability of decoding new GPS cryptography or anti-jamming (AJ)
(designated KMU-55XC/B and KMU-572C/B) equipment consisting of a new antenna and associated
electronics in the tail assembly. The AJ variant allows the JDAM to navigate with precision using GPS
signals in regions containing active GPS jammers. Laser JDAM (LJDAM) adds a laser detector, DSU-
38(series), to the GBU-38(series) (500 pound) weapons. With the DSU-38 series, the weapons are
redesignated as GBU-54(series).

1-20
 Figure 1-23 — Typical JDAM configuration.

Figure 1-24 — Typical Laser JDAM configuration.

1-21
MINES
The Mk 62 mine is a 500-pound weapon and the Mk 63 mine (Figure 1-25) is a 1,000-pound weapon.
Mk 62 and 63 mines are aircraft-laid and can be utilized as land mines or may be laid in shallow to
deep water as bottom mines. The component interchangeability concept of the mine permits defective
components to be quickly and easily replaced without greatly affecting the operational readiness of
the weapon. This concept also allows the Mk 62 and Mk 63 mines to be identical to their bomb
counterpart in appearance, external configuration, weight, CG, ballistics, handling, and loading.
The Mk 62 mine consist of Mk 82 or BLU-111 bomb body, and the Mk 63 mine consist of Mk 83 or
BLU-110 bomb body. A bomb/mine conversion kit, Mk 130 Mod 1, contains the Mk 32 arming device,
Mk 59 booster, and the Mk 57 target detecting device (TDD), which requires an Mk 130 battery to be
installed. The bomb/mine conversion kit also has the necessary hardware (less battery and fin
assembly) to convert a GP bomb to an air-laid mine.
The Mk 65 Mods mines (Figure 1-26) are 2,000-pound, aircraft-laid, all modular, influence actuated,
bottom mines used against submarines and surface targets. PBXN-103 is used as the explosive
payload. Through use of specific components, Mk 65 Mod 0, Mod 1, and Mod 3 mines can each be
assembled in two operational assemblies (OAs). The Mk 65 mine consists of a Mk 65 mine case, a
Mk 45 safety device arming group with an Mk 2 arming device, a Mk 57 target detecting device, and a
Mk 7 tail assembly.

Figure 1-25 — Mk 63 mine.

1-22
 Figure 1-26 — Mk 65 mine.

CLUSTER BOMB UNITS

CBUs are weapons that dispense smaller weapons over a large area. The method of dispensing
provides for release of the entire CBU, which separates, by fuzing action, at a prescribed altitude. The
smaller weapons are scattered when the CBU separates.

CBU-99B/B Antitank Bomb Cluster (Rockeye) and Dispenser Bomb Stores

Suspension and Releasing Unit-76C/B
The antitank bomb cluster is a free-fall, folding fin, airburst weapon. The bomb consists of a Mk 7 Mod
3 bomb dispenser loaded with Mk 118 Mod 0 antitank bombs and a Mk 339 mechanical time fuze or
retrofitted with the FMU-140/B DPF. The bomb cluster is delivered to operating activities completely
assembled with 14-inch suspension lugs, arming wires, extractors, fuze, and a removable fuze
protective cover installed. Fins are held in the folded position with a fin retaining band secured by an
arming wire and a ground handling safety pin. When the ground handling safety pin and arming wire
are removed, the spring loaded fins open to a 34.2 inch span.
The dispenser bomb stores suspension and releasing unit (SUU)-76C/B is configured as a CBU-
100/B (Figure 1-27) that has had the Mk 118 bomblets removed and has a payload sleeve and
spacers installed. When the payload sleeve is filled with leaflets and inserted into the dispenser, the
All-Up-Round (AUR) is redesignated PDU-5/B. Information on decanning, preparation for use, and
recanning procedures are found in Airborne Weapons Assembly Manual Cluster Bombs Units,
NAVAIR 11-140-9.
1-23
 Figure 1-27 — CBU-100/B with FMU-140.

CBU-78C/B Bomb Cluster (GATOR)

The CBU-78C/B bomb cluster is an antipersonnel/antitank, free fall, folding fin, airburst weapon. The
weapon consists of an SUU-58/B dispenser, loaded with BLU-91/B and BLU-92/B mines, BRU-42/B
kit modification unit, and a FMU-140A/B DPF. The weapon is delivered to operating activities
completely assembled with 14-inch suspension lugs, arming wire extractors, and a removable fuze
cover installed. Fins are held in the folded position with a fin retaining band secured by an arming
wire and a ground handling safety pin.

Mk 7 and Mods Bomb Dispenser

The cargo section of the Mk 7 bomb dispenser is the main structure of the weapon and contains the
bombs/bomblets. A nose fairing is attached to the forward end of the cargo section for aerodynamics
and fuze installation. It has an observation window for viewing the safe/arm indicator on the installed
fuze. The dispenser has two linear-shaped charges (LSCs) secured longitudinally inside the walls.
When initiated, these shaped charges cut the dispenser in half (from front to rear) and the
bombs/bomblets spread in free-fall trajectories.
To stabilize the weapon after release from the aircraft, a tail cone assembly is attached to the aft end
of the cargo section. The tail cone assembly houses four spring-actuated folding fins. The fins are
spring-loaded to the open position and secured in the closed position during ground handling by a fin
release-band assembly. The fin release band is secured in the closed position by a safety cotter pin
and by the fin release wire.
A yellow band around the forward end of the cargo section indicates the explosive content of the
weapon.
The CBU-99B/B consists of the thermally protected Mk 7 Mod 6 bomb dispenser loaded with 247 Mk
118 bomblets. The LSC is secured to the inner wall of the bomb dispenser. FMU-140A/B DPF
initiates the LSC.
1-24
The Mk 7 Mod 6 bomb dispenser is the same as the Mk 7 Mod 3 except that the outside of the Mod 6
cargo section is coated with a thermal protective coating and has an additional yellow band around
the forward end of the cargo section. The addition of the thermal coating increases the overall weight
of the Mod 6 to 505 pounds.

SUU-58/B Subsonic Free-Fall Dispenser

The SUU-58/B consists of a cargo section with a nose fairing assembly attached, a tail cone
assembly, and fuze arming wires with extractors. There are two observation windows—one for
viewing the safe/arm indicator and the other to observe the fuze time-setting dials. The cargo section
houses the BLU-91/B and BLU-92/B mines. The tactical weapons have two yellow bands around the
nose cone fairing.

SUU-76C/B (PDU-5/B) Dispenser Bomb

The SUU-76C/B (PDU-5/B) dispenser bomb (Figure 1-30) consists of the aluminum Mk 7 Mod 3
bomb dispenser. A LSC is secured to the inner wall of the bomb dispenser. A mechanical dispenser
fuze, Mk 339, initiates the LSC. The dispenser consists of a SUU-75 bomb dispenser loaded with
leaflet material and an Mk 339 mechanical time fuze.
The SUU-76C/B (PDU-5/B) is delivered to operating activities completely assembled with 14-inch
suspension lugs, arming wires, extractors, fuze, and a removable fuze protective cover. Fins are held
in the folded position with a fin retaining band secured by an arming wire and a ground handling
safety pin. When the ground handling safety pin and arming wire are removed, the spring loaded fins
open to a 34.2 inch span. The leaflet dispenser contains an in-flight fuze option that requires the use
of an option time wire and extractor, and has a fuze observation window for verifying settings and
safety. The dispenser has fin and fuze tethers incorporated to retain release bands when the
dispenser is released.

BLU-91/B and BLU-92/B Mines

The target sensors are the primary difference between the two mines. The BLU-91/B uses an armor-
piercing warhead and a magnetometer type of sensor; the BLU-92/B has a fragment type of warhead
with trip wires as the primary target sensor.

Mk 118 Mod 0 and Mod 1 Antitank

Bomblets
The antitank bomblets Mk 118 Mod 0 (Figure 1-28)
consists of an Mk 1 Mod 0 fuzing system, a shaped-
charge warhead, and fixed stabilizing fins.
When the Mk 118 bomb separates from the dispenser
case, the base fuze-arming vane rotates and the fuze
is armed. If the bomb strikes a hard target, such as
concrete or armor, the electric detonator ignites the
shaped-charge warhead immediately. If the bomb
strikes a soft target, such as earth or sandbags, the
bomb penetrates the targets until deceleration lets the
inertia firing pin strike and initiate the stab detonator,
causing warhead denotation. Figure 1-28 — Antitank bomblets
Mk 118 Mod 0/Mod 1.

1-25
Functional Description
When the bomb cluster is released from the aircraft, the arming wires (primary and/or optional
arming) are pulled sufficiently to arm the Mk 339 mechanical fuze or FMU-140A/B DPF and release
the fins. After the positive armed fin release arming wire frees the fin release band, the movable fins
snap open by spring force.
Functioning of the fuze initiates the linear-shaped charges in the dispenser cuts the dispenser case in
half and disperses the bombs/bomblets. When the Mk 339 Mod 1 primary fuze arming wire is pulled,
the fuze will function 1.2 seconds after the arming wire has been extracted. If the pilot selects the
option time (4.0 seconds), both the primary and option arming wires must be pulled. If the pilot selects
the option time and the primary arming wire is not pulled, the fuze will be a dud.

SHIPPING AND STORAGE CONTAINERS

Shipping containers store and ship various thermally protected weapons. The configuration of each
container is unique for each weapon. The containers have customized shipping cushions, bracing,
carrying handles, and lifting rings to facilitate handling and protection of the weapon.

CNU-319/E Shipping and Storage Container

The shipping and storage container, CNU-319/E, is used to ship and store two each CBU-78, CBU-
99, or SUU-76C/B bomb clusters. The container, made of welded steel, consists of a cover and lower
body assemblies. The container is free-breathing with holes in the bottom. The cover assembly has
four stacking angles—one at each corner—that allow air circulation (when stacked as many as five
high) as well as protection from container scrapes and gouges. Two stationary handles on each end
of the cover are provided to lift off the cover.

CNU-238/E Multipurpose Shipping and Storage container

The multipurpose shipping and storage container, CNU-238/E, is used to ship and store two each
CBU-78, CBU-99, or SUU-76C/B bomb clusters. The container consists of a welded steel cover
assembly and a lower body. The cover assembly has four stacking lugs and four lifting handles for
removing the cover assembly.

PRACTICE BOMBS
Practice bombs are used to simulate the ballistic properties of service bombs. Practice bombs are
manufactured as either solid or cast-metal bodies. Since practice bombs contain no explosive filler, a
practice bomb signal cartridge (smoke) can be used for visual observation of weapon-target impact.
The primary purpose of practice bombs is safety when training new or inexperienced pilots and
ground-handling crews. Other advantages of practice bombs include their low cost and an increase in
available target locations.
Although not classified as practice bombs, the Mk 80(series), inert filled, GP bombs are used for full-
scale practice bombing. These bombs are physically the same as the Mk 80(series) GP service
bombs, but they do not contain explosive filler and are painted blue. These bombs provide full-scale
training for assembly and loading crews and pilots.
The general types of practice bombs are subcaliber or full-scale practice bombs. Subcaliber means
that the practice bomb is much smaller in size and weight than the service bomb it simulates. Full-
scale practice bombs are representative of service bombs in their size and weight.

1-26
Subcaliber Practice Bombs
There are two types of subcaliber practice bombs—the Mk 76 Mod 5 and BDU-48/B. The two types
are used for practice and are quite different in design and appearance from each other.

Mk 76 Mod 5
The Mk 76 Mod 5 is a
25-pound, solid,
metal-cast, practice
bomb (Figure 1-29).
Its body is teardrop
shaped and centrally
bored to permit the
insertion of a practice
bomb signal
cartridge. The after Figure 1-29 — Mk 76 Mod 5 practice bomb.
body, which covers
the tail tube, is crimped to the bomb body and has welded-on tail fins. The bomb is designed with
single-lug suspension, using the Mk 14 suspension lug.
The Mk 76 Mod 5 practice bomb is designed for impact firing only. It uses the Mk 1 firing pin
assembly to initiate the practice bomb signal cartridge. The bomb signal and the firing pin assembly
are held in the bomb by means of a cotter pin. The bomb is painted blue and the identification
nomenclature is stenciled in white letters on the bomb body.

BDU-48/B
The BDU-48/B is a
10-pound practice
bomb (Figure 1-30).
It is a thin-cased
cylindrical bomb used
to simulate retarded
weapon delivery. The
bomb is composed of
the bomb body, a
retractable Figure 1-30 — BDU-48/B practice bomb.
suspension lug, a
firing assembly, and box-type conical fins. The firing device consists of a firing pin assembly and a
cotter pin. The BDU-48/B is painted blue. Identification nomenclature is stenciled in white letters on
the bomb body. The bomb can use signal cartridge Mk 4 Mod 3, or CXU-3A/B. While handling or
transporting bombs, loaders should avoid placing their bodies in line with either end of the bomb.

Full-Scale Practice Bombs

Full-scale practice bombs have the same dimensions, weight factor, and configuration abilities as the
service bombs they simulate. The bombs are filled with inert material to obtain the proper weight.
The full-scale practice bombs currently in use are the Mk 80(series) inert bombs and BDU-45(series)
practice bomb (Figure 1-31). They include the Mk 82 inert, Mk 83 inert, and Mk 84 inert GP bombs.
These bombs are assigned a different NALC/DODIC than their service counterpart to differentiate
between inert and service bombs when requisitioning them through the supply system. They can be

1-27
configured with the same bomb components (fuzes, fins, lugs, and so forth) that are used to configure
service bombs. However, if the use of fuzes is not desired, a Mk 89 Mod 0 bomb-spotting charge
adapter can be installed in the tail fuze well of the practice bomb to provide visual observation of
weapon/target impact.

Figure 1-31 — BDU-45/B practice bomb.

The Mk 80(series) inert GP bombs are painted blue. The new Mk 80(series) inert GP bombs have an
olive-drab colored exterior and are thermally protected, but they can be distinguished from service
bombs by a blue band around the nose and by the 1-inch letters INERT stenciled on the outside of
the bomb body.
The Mk 89 Mod 0 bomb-spotting charge adapter (Figure 1-32) is designed for use in the tail fuze well
of the Mk 80(series) inert GP bombs. A practice bomb signal cartridge is installed in the Mk 89 Mod 0,
which provides visual observation (smoke) of weapon-target impact. The bomb-spotting charge
adapter is kept in a safe condition during ground handling by the installation of a safety cotter pin in
the safety pin sleeve. Once the arming wire has been installed through the arming wire hole in the
safety pin sleeve, the safety cotter pin must be removed.

1-28
 Figure 1-32 — Mk 89 Mod 0 bomb-spotting charge adapter.

BDU-59(Series) Laser Guided Training Round

The laser guided training round (LGTR) (Figure 1-33) provides a low cost training device permitting
aircrews to realistically practice the employment of Paveway II LGTRs. The LGTR duplicates the
release envelope and terminal guidance, and closely matches the time of flight characteristics of the
GBU-10/12/16.

Figure 1-33 — Laser guided training round.

1-29
The AUR LGTR has an aero-stabilized seeker to align
the seeker to the LGTR velocity vector. The seeker can
detect laser energy transmitted on one of twelve laser
frequencies (Figure 1-34). A screwdriver-operated switch
is provided to select one of the four to twelve prebriefed
laser code settings. The LGTR is 4 inches in diameter
and 75 inches long. The LGTR has a weight of 89
pounds. The AUR shall not be disassembled for any
maintenance inspection.
The guidance and control system uses pursuit navigation
logic to null out the line of sight errors observed by the
detector. Steering commands are provided to a
pneumatic actuator driven by stored, compressed gas to
deflect the canards.
The LGTRs single Mk 14 suspension lug interfaces with Figure 1-34 — LGTR laser code
the multiple-carriage bomb rack ejector unit's aft hook. frequency.
Two LGTR adapter brackets must be used to secure the
LGTR to the ejector unit. The LGTR adapter brackets are attached to the multiple-carriage bomb rack
ejector units forward and aft sway brace assemblies. The adapter brackets are sway-braced to
secure the LGTR to the ejector unit.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The following are general precautions that are not related to any specific procedures. These are
recommended precautions that personnel must understand and apply during many phases of aircraft
rearming.
x The hazards of bomb ammunition will vary, depending on the types and quantities of
explosives involved regardless of the particular weapons being handled, potential hazards are
always present; explosive bomb ammunition is hazardous because of its tendency, when
detonated, to set off all explosive material that is near it
x Most fuzes contain a charge of high explosives and must be handled carefully; when
compared to the booster charge, the amount of explosives is small; however, the explosives in
fuzes are much more sensitive; fuzes are manufactured to meet all safety requirements when
used properly, but the safety features designed in any weapon or explosive component are
only as reliable as the person using them
x Fuzes are packed in sealed, moisture-proof containers, and should not be unsealed until they
are required for use; fuzes that are unpacked and not used should be returned to their original
condition, repacked, and dated; once the hermetic seal is broken, these fuzes should be used
before those that are still hermetically sealed
x Fuzes must be handled carefully at all times and should never be dropped, tumbled, dragged,
or thrown; they should not be struck with a hammer or any tool, either to open the container or
to align them in a stowage rack
x When a fuze is unpacked, it should be examined to ensure that the shipping seals are intact
and that the arming stem is not unscrewed; safety cotter pins, shipping wires, and seals should
be left in place until the arming wire is assembled into the fuze; arming vane assemblies must
not be bent or distorted

1-30
 x Although bomb ammunition containing high explosives causes greater injury to personnel and
loss of equipment, the improper handling of practice bombs causes more frequent injury to
personnel; when handling practice bombs, the weight factor alone can cause severe injury or
even loss of limb; dropping a practice bomb (even a short distance) with a practice bomb
signal cartridge installed can cause the cartridge to detonate, resulting in severe and
permanent injury to personnel
x Accidents are prevented through good design, testing, and careful handling of ordnance.
Safety precautions must be followed; all personnel involved in weapons handling must be
briefed on particular safety precautions before actually handling weapons; all personnel who
handle ordnance must be qualified and certified, and newly assigned personnel—still in
training—are assigned as crewmembers and never permitted to work alone until they are fully
qualified and certified
For specific safety precautions regarding bomb ammunition refer to the specific ammunition and the
aircraft loading manuals.

1-31
 End of Chapter 1
Bombs, Fuzes, and Associated Components
Review Questions
1-1. What term describes the time or number of arming vane revolutions needed for the firing train
to align after a bomb is released?

A. Arming time
B. Delay time
C. Nondelay time
D. Safe air travel time

1-2. What means is used to initiate an electrical fuze?

A. Bomb release
B. Electrical impulse
C. Equipment release
D. Mechanical action

1-3. What mechanical time fuze is used with dispenser weapons?

A. FMU-139
B. FMU-143
C. Mk 1 Mod 1
D. Mk 339 Mod 1

1-4. By what means, if any, can the factory set primary and optional functioning delay of the Mark
339 be changed for tactical requirements?

A. Adjusting the primary and option time-setting dials

B. Pulling both the arming wire and option wire
C. The pilot selecting the option mode of delivery
D. None; the settings cannot be changed

1-5. What method is used to determine if the Mark 339 fuze has shifted from the primary to the
option delay?

A. By checking the time setting observation window of the fuze

B. By looking for the indicator pin
C. The arming wire has been pulled during handling
D. The fuze is in a safe condition

1-6. Which of the following weapons uses a fuzing munition unit (FMU)-143(series) tail fuze?

A. CBU-100
B. CBU-78
C. GBU-12
D. GBU-24(series)

1-32
1-7. What electronic bomb fuze is used in Mark 80/bomb live unit-100(series) general purpose
bombs?

A. FMU-139
B. FMU-140
C. FMU-143
D. FMU-152

1-8. What electronic bomb fuze is used for retarded delivery of the Mark 80/bomb live unit-
100(series) bomb?

A. FMU-139
B. FMU-140
C. FMU-143
D. FMU-152

1-9. What type of bomb is used in most routine bombing operations?

A. Cluster bombs (CBU)

B. General-purpose (GP) bombs
C. Low-collateral damage (LOCO) bombs
D. Special purpose bombs

1-10. What total number of yellow bands identifies a bomb live unit (BLU)-110/111/117A/B bomb
loaded with plastic bonded explosives Navy-109?

A. One
B. Two
C. Three
D. Four

1-11. A bomb body is shipped with a plastic plug installed in the nose and tail fuze wells to prevent
what occurrence?

A. Accidental arming
B. Damage to the internal threads and moisture from entering the fuze wells
C. Static charge build-up
D. The explosive filler from spilling out

1-12. When shipping bombs, what type of pallet is used?

A. Metal
B. Plastic
C. Shipping
D. Wood

1-33
1-13. When shipping, what factor determines the number of bombs that are loaded on each metal
pallet?

A. Quantity of bombs ordered

B. Size of the bombs
C. Size of the pallet
D. Type of bomb hoist used

1-14. Arming wire assemblies are used for what purpose?

A. Actuate the fin assembly

B. Initiate the arming sequence of electrical fuzes
C. Initiate the arming sequence of mechanical fuzes
D. Maintain ordnance components in a safe condition until the actual release of a weapon
from an aircraft

1-15. Premature or accidental withdrawal of an arming wire from a component is prevented by the
installation of which of the following devices?

A. C-clamps
B. Dexter safety clips
C. Metal crimps
D. Plastic retainers

1-16. What items are used to attach a conical fin assembly to the aft end of a bomb body?

A. Quick-release adapters
B. Quick-release clamps
C. Cam locks
D. Setscrews

1-17. What bomb fin is used with the Mark-82/bomb live unit-111 bomb to provide a retarded (high-
drag) bomb delivery for the aircraft?

A. BSU-33
B. BSU-45
C. BSU-85
D. BSU-86

1-18. What general-purpose bomb, if any, is used with the bomb stabilizer unit (BSU)-85/B Air
Inflatable Retarder?

A. Mk-82/BLU-111
B. Mk-83/BLU-110
C. Mk-84/BLU-117
D. General-purpose bombs do not use the BSU-85

1-34
1-19. If applicable, how do laser-guided bombs detect a target?

A. Laser beam illumination

B. Laser-guided bombs do not detect targets
C. Programmed target data
D. Remote guidance

1-20. In what location is the wing assembly mounted on the guided bomb units?

A. The aft end of the bomb body

B. The centerline of the bomb body
C. The nose of the bomb body
D. The right side nose and the left side aft of the bomb body

1-21. The computer-control group of a laser guidance kit is used for what purpose?

A. To detect laser-illuminated targets and to provide an attachment point for the guidance
fins
B. To laser-illuminate targets
C. To provide an attachment point for the guidance wings
D. To provide an attachment point for the wing assemblies

1-22. What modification kit is used to convert general purpose bombs into mines?

A. Mk 130 Mod 1 bomb/mine conversion kit

B. Mk 12 bomb conversion kit
C. Mk 32 arming device
D. Mk 9 mine conversion kit

1-23. What bomb body, if any, is used to make the Mark 63 mine?

A. Mk 82/BLU-111
B. Mk 83/BLU-110
C. Mk 84/BLU-117
D. Bomb bodies are not used to make mines

1-24. What is the purpose of the Mark 339 Modification 1 mechanical time fuze?

A. Initiate the linear-shaped charges in the cargo section wall

B. Provide movable fins
C. Provide the arming wires
D. Stabilize weapon during delivery

1-25. Which of the following items are components of the Mark 118 Modifications 0 and 1 antitank
bombs?

A. Laser guided seeker

B. Mk 10 Mod 0 fuzing system
C. Shaped-charge warhead
D. Variable stabilizing fins

1-35
1-26. Practice bombs are used for what purpose?

A. Provide full-scale bombing

B. Provide safety when training new or inexperienced pilots and ground-handling crews
C. Represent service bombs in their size and tumbling effect
D. Simulate bombing runs

1-27. What type of ammunition causes the most injuries to personnel?

A. Aircraft bombs
B. Missiles
C. Practice bombs
D. Rockets

1-36
 CHAPTER 2
AIRCRAFT ROCKETS AND ROCKET LAUNCHERS
The history of rockets covers a span of eight centuries, but their use in aircraft armament began
during World War II. Rockets answered the need for a large weapon that could be fired without recoil
from an aircraft. Because the airborne rocket is usually launched at close range and measured in
yards or meters, its accuracy as a propelled projectile is higher than a free-falling bomb dropped from
high altitude.
On ships and shore stations, the handling of ammunition and explosives (such as
assembly/disassembly and loading/unloading) requires certain restrictions, environmental conditions,
and designated areas where the operation is to be performed. As an aviation ordnanceman (AO), it is
important to be knowledgeable of the hazards of electromagnetic radiation to ordnance (HERO),
which affects the handling of rocket motors.
Radiation hazard (RADHAZ) is radio frequency (RF) electromagnetic field of sufficient intensity to
produce harmful biological effects in humans, cause spark ignition of volatile combustibles, or actuate
electroexplosive devices. During rocket motor handling or assembly operations, proper RADHAZ
must be controlled. For the safety of personnel and to maintain reliability of aviation ordnance, all
necessary precautions must be taken to ensure the prevention and accidental ignition of electrically
initiated devices (EIDs) due to RF electromagnetic fields.
To better understand, EIDs perform a variety of functions, such as initiating rocket motors, arming
and detonating warheads, and ejecting chaff and flares. The need for HERO control arises so that
these functions do not occur unintentionally or prematurely because of exposure to electromagnetic
energy.
HERO is discussed in later chapters of this manual. For more information on HERO, you should refer
to Electromagnetic Radiation Hazards to Ordnance, Naval Sea Systems Command (NAVSEA)
Ordnance Publication (OP) 3565/Naval Air Systems Command (NAVAIR) 16-1-529.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
When you have completed this chapter, you will be able to do the following:
1. State the principles of rocket propulsion.
2. Identify rocket components, to include motors, warheads, and fuzes.
3. Identify the purpose of service rocket assemblies, to include the 2.75-inch folding fin aircraft
rocket (FFAR) and the 5.0-inch spring-actuated fin rocket.
4. Recognize the shipping configuration for aircraft rocket launchers.
5. Identify common aircraft rocket launcher components.
6. Recognize the safety precautions to follow while working with aircraft rockets and rocket
launchers.

AIRCRAFT ROCKETS
Two rockets are used by the Navy. The first is the 2.75-inch FFAR (Figure 2-1). The second is the
5.0-inch spring-actuated fin rocket known as the Zuni (Figure 2-2).

2-1
 Figure 2-1 — Typical 2.75-inch aircraft rocket.

Figure 2-2 — Typical 5.0-inch aircraft rocket.

ROCKET AND ROCKET FUZE TERMINOLOGY

Some of the more common terms peculiar to rockets and rocket components used in this chapter are
defined as follows:
x Acceleration-deceleration—term applied to fuzes that use a gear-timing device in conjunction
with the setback principle; prolonged acceleration completes arming the fuze and deceleration
or proximity initiates detonation
x Igniter—the initiating device that ignites the propellant grain; it is usually an assembly
consisting of an electric squib, match composition, black powder, and magnesium powder
x Hangfire—an undesired delay in the ignition of the motor after the firing key has been closed
x Misfire—the result when a rocket does not fire when the firing circuit is energized
x Motor—the propulsive component of a rocket consisting of the propellant, the igniter, and the
nozzle(s)
x Propellant grain—the solid fuel used in a rocket motor, which upon burning, generates a
volume of hot gases that stream from the nozzle and propel the rocket (also known as the
propellant or propellant powder grain)
x Rocket—a weapon propelled by the sustained reaction of a discharging jet of gas against the
container of gas
x Setback—the term applied when internal parts react to the acceleration of the rocket; setback
is a safety feature designed into those fuzes that use a gear-timing device
x Thrust—the force exerted by the gases produced by the burning of the rocket motor propellant

PRINCIPLES OF ROCKET PROPULSION

Rockets are propelled by the rearward expulsion of expanding gases from the nozzle of the motor.
Burning a mass of propellant at high pressure inside the motor tube produces the necessary gas
forces. Rockets function even in a vacuum. The propellant contains its own oxidizers to provide the
necessary oxygen during burning.
To understand how a rocket operates, it will help to refer to Figure 2-3 and visualize a closed
container that contains a gas under pressure. The pressure of the gas against all the interior surfaces
is equal (Figure 2-3, view A). If the right end of the container is removed (Figure 2-3, view B), the
pressure against the left end will cause the container to move to the left.
2-2
-In the rocket motor, gases produced by the burning
propellant are confined to permit a buildup of pressure to
sustain a driving force. A Venturi-type nozzle (Figure 2-3,
view C) restricts the size of the opening. The Venturi-type
nozzle decreases the turbulence of escaping gases and
increases the thrust. In the design shown, gas pressure inside
the container provides about 70 percent of the force, and the
escaping gases provide about 30 percent of the force
necessary to move the container forward.

ROCKET COMPONENTS
A complete round of service rocket ammunition consists of
three major components—the motor, the warhead, and a
fuze. A general description of these components is given in
the following paragraphs.

Motor
The rocket motor consists of components that propel and
stabilize the rocket in flight. Not all rocket motors are identical,
but they do have certain common components. These
components include:
Figure 2-3 — Principles of rocket
x Motor tube propulsion.
x Propellant
x Inhibitors
x Stabilizing rod; igniter
x Nozzle and fin assembly
The rocket motors discussed in the following paragraphs are for the 2.75-inch mark (Mk) 66
modification (Mod) 4, and 5.0-inch Mk 71 Mods 1 and 2.

Motor Tube
The motor tube supports the other components of the rocket. All motor tubes are aluminum, threaded
internally at the front end for warhead installation, and grooved or threaded internally at the aft end for
nozzle and fin assembly installation.
The Mk 66 Mod 4 rocket motor tube is an integral bulkhead type of motor tube and is impact extruded
from aluminum stock. The forward end contains the head closure and threaded portion for attachment
of the warhead. The integral bulkhead closure does not rupture when accidentally fired without a
warhead and becomes propulsive when ignited. The center portion of the motor tube contains the
propellant. The nozzle and fin assembly attaches to the aft end by a lock wire in a groove inside the
tube.
The Mk 71 Mods 1 and 2 rocket motor tube is basically an aluminum tube with an integral bulkhead
closure. The forward end contains the head closure, igniter contact band, igniter lead,
electromagnetic radiation (EMR) barrier, and a threaded portion for attachment of the warhead. The
center section is the combustion chamber and contains the igniter, propellant grain, stabilizing rod,
and associated hardware. The aft end of the motor tube is threaded internally to accept the nozzle
and fin assembly.

2-3
Propellant
The propellant grain contained in the Navy's 2.75-inch and 5.0-inch rocket motors is an internal-
burning, star-perforation, double-base solid propellant. The star perforation is designed to produce a
nearly constant thrust level.
The Mk 66 Mod 4 rocket motor has the star points machined off (coned) to reduce erosive burning.

Inhibitors
Inhibitors restrict or control burning on the propellant surface. In the 2.75- and 5.0-inch motors, the
propellant grains are inhibited at the forward and aft ends, as well as the entire outer surface. The
forward and aft end inhibitors are molded plastic (ethyl cellulose) components bonded to the
propellant ends. The outer surface inhibitor is spirally wrapped ethyl cellulose tape bonded to the
propellant surface.
Inhibitors cause the propellant grain to burn uniformly from the center outward and from forward to
aft. If inhibitors are not used, the burning surface of the propellant grain would increase and result in
an increased burning rate, which could cause the motor tube to explode from excessive pressure. If a
motor is accidentally dropped and the propellant grain is cracked, the crack in the grain would
increase the burning surface and an immediate hazard would exist.

Stabilizing Rod
The stabilizing rod, located in the perforation of the motor propellant grain, is salt-coated to prevent
unstable burning of the propellant. It also reduces flash and after-burning in the rocket motor, which
could contribute to compressor stall and flameout of the aircraft jet engines. When the propellant
ignites, the stabilizing rod ensures that the grain ignites simultaneously forward and aft.

Igniter
The igniter heats the propellant grain to ignition temperature. The igniter used in the 2.75-inch motor
is a disc-shaped metal container that contains a black powder and magnesium charge, a squib, and
electrical lead wires. It is located at the forward end of the motor. The Mk 66 Mod 4 rocket motor
ignitor has electrical leads that extend from the squib through the wall of the igniter. They are routed
through the propellant perforation to the nozzle and fin assembly. One of the wires is connected to
the nozzle plate (ground), and the other passes through either one of the nozzles or the fin-actuating
piston to the contact disc on the fin retainer. In the Mk 66 Mod 4, both lead wires are connected
directly to the HERO filter wires, which extend out of the forward end of the stabilizing rod. When the
rocket is placed in the launcher, the contact disc is automatically in contact with an electrical terminal
that transmits the firing impulse to the rocket. The Mk 66 Mod 4 rocket motor is fully HERO safe.
The igniter used in the 5.0-inch motor (Figure 2-4) is a disc-shaped metal container that contains a
powder or pellets charge, two squibs, and electrical lead wires. It is located at the forward end of the
motor. A contact disc or a contact band transmits the firing impulses to the motor igniter. The 5.0-inch
motor igniter has an electrical lead wire post that protrudes through the forward bulkhead closure.
The electrical lead connects the igniter to the contact band. When the rocket is placed in the
launcher, the contact band automatically comes in contact with an electrical terminal, which transmits
the firing impulse to the rocket. Until the rocket is actually loaded into a launcher, a metal shielding
band (Figure 2-5) is always in place over the ignition contact band.

Nozzle and Fin Assembly

The nozzle assembly for the Mk 66 rocket motor consists of the nozzle body, carbon insert, fins,
contact band assembly, and weather seal.

2-4
The entire assembly is attached to the motor
tube with a lockwire. When folded, the fins lie
within the 2.75-inch diameter of the rocket. The
nozzle body is a leaded steel shell with the O-
ring and lockwire groove in the front end and a
recessed contact band groove in the extreme
aft end. The nozzle body contains a detent
flange on the forward end, by which the rocket
is held in position after it is loaded into the
launcher. The nozzle exit contains nine flutes.
The carbon insert is press-fitted into the nozzle
block and provides a lightweight, nonerosive
nozzle throat material.
The Mk 71 Mods 1 and 2 rocket motor has a
modified igniter and a modified nozzle and fin
assembly. The nozzle and fin assembly (Figure
2-6) contains four spring-loaded fins inside the
motor diameter. The steel nozzle expansion
cone has flutes that cause the rocket to spin
during free flight. This feature permits the rocket
to be launched from high-speed aircraft,
helicopters, and low-speed aircraft
The Mk 71 Mods 1 and 2 spring-loaded fins
deploy after emerging from the rocket launcher
tube. They lock in place (open) by sliding into a
locking slot in the flange at the aft end of the fin
nozzle assembly. When not actually installed in
the launcher, the fins are held in the closed
position by a fin retainer band, which must be
removed when the rocket is installed into the
Figure 2-4 — Typical center electrical lead
launcher tube. The fin retainer band is not
wire connection (5.0-inch motor).
interchangeable with the shielding band.

Warhead
Different tactical requirements demand that
different types of rocket warheads be used
with airborne rockets. Warheads are classified
as either 2.75- or 5.0-inch warheads. They
may be further classified as high explosive,
flechette, smoke, flare, or practice. Warheads
for 2.75-inch rockets are normally received
with the fuzes installed.
Many different warheads, fuzes, and motor
combinations are available. Therefore, the
following discussion is general. For specific
component information, you should refer to Figure 2-5 — Shielding band for 5.0-inch FFAR.
Aircraft Rocket Systems 2.75-Inch and 5.0-
Inch, NAVAIR 11-140-12.

2-5
 Figure 2-6 — Mk 71 Mods 1 and 2 motor, nozzle, and fin assembly.
High-explosive warheads contain high-explosive material (generally composition B) surrounded by a
metal case. An internally threaded nose fuze cavity permits the installation of a nose fuze or an inert
nose plug, depending on tactical requirements.
Some warhead configurations require the use of a base fuze. Base fuzes are installed at the factory
and should NEVER be removed. High-explosive warheads are painted olive drab and may have a
narrow yellow band around the nose. There are several types of high-explosive warheads, and each
is designed for a specific type of target.

High-Explosive Fragmentation Warheads

High-explosive fragmentation (HE-FRAG) warheads (Figures 2-7 and 2-8) are used against
personnel and light material targets, such as trucks and parked aircraft. Upon detonation, a large
quantity of metal fragments accelerates to a high velocity. This action damages the target. The types
of HE-FRAG warheads currently in use are listed in Table 2-1.

Figure 2-7 — High-explosive fragmentation (HE-FRAG) 2.75-inch warheads.

2-6
 Figure 2-8 — High-explosive fragmentation (HE-FRAG) 5.0-inch warheads.

Table 2-1 Service Warheads

TYPE 2.75-INCH 5.0-INCH
HE-FRAG Mk 146 Mod 0 Mk 63 Mod 0
M151
M152 Mod 0
AT/APERS ------- Mk 32 Mod 0
GP ------- Mk 24 Mod 0 and Mod 1
FLECHETTE WDU-4A/A -------
Mk 149 Mod 0
SMOKE M156 (WP) Mk 34 Mod 0
Mk 67 Mod 1 (RP) Mk 34 Mod 2
ILLUMINATION/IR FLARE M257
M278 IR

Antitank/Antipersonnel Warhead
The high-explosive antitank/antipersonnel (AT/APERS) warhead (Figure 2-9) combines the
effectiveness of the HE-FRAG and high-explosive antitank (HEAT) warheads.
The explosive shaped charge in the AT/APERS warhead detonates at the aft end, producing the jet
from the cone at the forward end. The booster in the aft end detonates the warhead by transmitting
an explosive impulse along a length of detonating cord. It connects the booster charge to the initiating
charge, which is next to the nose fuze. The combination of an instantaneous-acting nose fuze and
rapid-burning detonating cord permits detonation of the explosive load in time for the shaped charge
to produce its explosive jet before being disintegrated upon target impact. The only AT/APERS
warhead currently in use is the Mk 32 Mod 0.

2-7
 Figure 2-9 — Mk 32 Mod 0 AT/APERS warhead.

General-Purpose Warhead
The high-explosive general-
purpose (GP) warhead
(Figure 2-10) is a
compromise between the
armor-piercing and the
fragmentation designs. The
walls and nose section are
not as strong as those of an
armor-piercing warhead, yet
they are stronger than those
of a fragmentation warhead.
The explosive charge is
greater than that in the
armor-piercing warhead, but
less than that in the Figure 2-10 — High-explosive GP warhead Mk 24 Mod 1.
fragmentation warhead.
The GP warhead is used against a variety of targets. Maximum penetration is obtained by using a
solid nose plug and the delayed-action base fuze. Its maximum blast effect is obtained by using an
instantaneous-acting nose fuze. The only GP warheads currently in use are the Mk 24 Mods 0 and 1.

Flechette Warhead
The flechette warhead (Figure 2-11) is used against personnel and light armored targets. These
warheads contain a large number of small arrow-shaped projectiles. A small explosive charge in the
base fuze of the warhead dispenses the flechettes through the nose of the warhead after rocket
motor burnout. Target damage is caused by impact of the high-velocity flechettes.

2-8
 Figure 2-11 — Flechette warhead.
Smoke Warhead
The smoke warhead (Figure 2-12) is used to produce a volume of heavy smoke for target marking.
The warhead contains a burster tube of explosives (usually composition B), which bursts the walls of
the warhead, dispersing the smoke. This warhead is designated SMOKE, followed by the
abbreviation for the smoke producing agent it contains. For example, the abbreviation for white
phosphorus is WP; for plasticized white phosphorus is PWP; and for red phosphorus is RP. The types
of smoke warheads currently in use are listed in Table 2-1.

Flare

Figure 2-12 — Smoke warheads.

Warhead
A flare warhead (Figure 2-13) is used to illuminate tactical operations. It consists of a delay-action
fuze, an illuminating candle, and a parachute assembly. The fuze ignites the expelling charge, which
separates the case from the candle and parachute assembly. The wind stream forces the parachute
open, suspending the burning candle.

2-9
 Figure 2-13 — M257 illumination and M278 IR flare warhead.

Practice Warhead
Practice warheads are either dummy configurations or inert-loaded service warheads. In the inert-
loaded service warhead, the weight and placement of the filler give the practice warhead the same
ballistic characteristics as the explosive-loaded service warhead. A steel nose plug is assembled in
the practice heads in place of the nose fuze. The entire surface—except for the stenciled marking—is
painted blue. The practice warheads currently in use are listed in Table 2-2.

Table 2-2 — Practice Warheads

2.75-INCH 5.0-INCH
WTU-1/B Mk 6 Mod 7
Mk 32 Mod 1
WTU-11/B

Fuzes
Rocket fuzes are primarily classified by their location in the warhead; for example, a nose fuze or
base fuze. They are further classified by mode of operation, such as impact-firing, mechanical-time,
acceleration and deceleration, or proximity. All fuzes contain safety/arming devices to prevent
detonation during normal transporting, handling, and launching of the complete rocket.
A representative fuze from each class is discussed in the following paragraphs. The fuzes currently in
use (and their primary application) are listed in Table 2-3. For more detailed information on fuzes,
refer to Aircraft Rocket Systems 2.75-Inch and 5.0-Inch, NAVAIR 11-140-12.

2-10
 Table 2-3 — Rocket Fuzes
FUZE CLASSIFICATION APPLICATION
Mk 352 Mod 2 Nose impact (PD) 2.75- and 5.0-inch (Note 1)
M423 Nose impact (PD) 2.75-inch (Note 2)
M427 Nose impact (PD) 2.75-inch
Mk 435 Mod 0 Nose impact (PD) 2.75-inch
Model 113A Acceleration-deceleration 2.75-inch
M442 Acceleration-deceleration 2.75-inch
FMU-90/B Nose impact (PD) 5.0-inch (Note 1)
Mk 188 Mod 0 Nose impact (PD) 5.0-inch
Mk 436 Mod 0 Nose impact (PD) 5.0-inch
Mk 191 Mod 1 Base detonating impact (BD) 5.0-inch
Mk 193 Mod 0 Mechanical time 5.0-inch
Mk 93 Mod 0/M414A1 Proximity 5.0-inch
Note 1: Designed to be used with 2.75-inch but can also be used with 5.0-inch when the BBU-15/B
adapter is installed.
Note 2: Designed for use with 2.75-inch only.

Impact Firing Fuzes

Impact firing fuzes (Figure 2-14) function when the rocket strikes a target that offers sufficient
resistance to cause crushing or distortion of the fuze structure, or deceleration to occur during impact
(inertial).
All current impact firing rocket fuzes have the same type of safety/arming mechanism. This
mechanism consists of an unbalanced rotor, which, under setback forces, drives a gear-train timing
system. A given minimum acceleration over a given length of time is required to complete the arming
cycle. If rocket acceleration is too low or extends over too short a period of time, the arming
mechanism returns to the unarmed condition. The timing mechanism provides a safe separation
distance from the launcher before arming.
When located in the nose of the warhead, impact firing fuzes are known as point-detonating (PD)
fuzes. If they are located in the base of the warhead, they are known as base-detonating (BD) fuzes.
Nose and base fuzes function either instantaneously or after a short delay that gives the warhead
time to penetrate the target before functioning.

Mechanical Time Fuzes

Mechanical time fuzes (Figure 2-15) function by the action of a mechanical timer. These fuzes contain
a safety/arming device and a clock mechanism. The arming mechanism is similar to those in impact
detonating fuzes and requires a minimum acceleration over a given time to complete the arming
cycle. Upon arming, the mechanical timer is started, and after a set elapsed time, the fuze initiates
the firing train. It is permanently installed in the nose of the Mk 33 Mod 1 flare warhead.

Acceleration-Deceleration Fuzes
Acceleration-deceleration fuzes are similar to impact and time fuzes because they require
acceleration for a given time to complete the arming cycle. After the arming cycle is completed and
the rocket velocity begins to drop, deceleration causes the fuze to function.
2-11
 The Model 113A is the only acceleration-
deceleration fuze currently in use by the Navy. It is a
base-mounted fuze that is permanently installed in
the flechette warhead.

Figure 2-15 — Mechanical time fuze

Mk 193 Mod 0.

Proximity Fuzes
Proximity fuzes (Figure 2-16) sense, usually by
electronic means, the nearness or the proximity of a
target and function at some designed distance from
that target. Proximity fuzes are primarily used in air-
to-ground operations where air bursts above the
target are desired. They are not suitable for use
against targets that require penetration and
detonation within the target for effective destruction.
In general, proximity fuzes consist of an electronics
package in the forward end, a thermal battery, a
safety/arming device, and an explosive booster in
Figure 2-14 — Impact firing fuzes. the base. The arming mechanism is similar to those
in impact detonating fuzes, and requires a minimum
acceleration over a given time to complete the
arming cycle.

NOTE
Some rocket fuzes designed for use with 2.75-inch
warheads can be used with the 5.0-inch warhead by using
the BBU-15/B adapter booster (Figure 2-17).

2-12
 Figure 2-16 — Proximity fuze.

Figure 2-17 — BBU-15/B adapter

booster.

2-13
Advanced Precision Kill Weapon System II
The Advanced Precision Kill Weapon System II (APKWS II) (Figure 2-18) adds a mid-body
semiactive laser (SAL) WGU-59/B guidance unit to the current 2.75-inch rocket. The APKWS II all-up-
round (AUR) consists of three components—a rocket motor, a warhead, and a WGU-59/B guidance
unit. The optics for collecting laser energy are located on the leading edge of each guidance unit
wing. The wings are designed to be deployed immediately after launch. WGU-59/B is threaded
between the rocket motor and warhead, increasing the rocket’s length by 18.5 inches. The WGU-59/B
contains a battery ON/OFF switch and four laser switch assemblies (LSAs) that provide various laser
code options. The first LSA switch is identified with a black-and-white background. The black position
for the switch is the countermeasure OFF setting, and the white position is the countermeasure ON
setting (Figure 2-19).

Figure 2-18 — APKWS II.

Figure 2-19 — APKWS II LSA.

SERVICE ROCKET ASSEMBLIES

Airborne rockets, consisting of fuzes, warheads, and motors, are combined and assembled in various
configurations to meet specific tactical requirements. For example, a rocket assembly that consists of
a fragmentation warhead armed with a proximity fuze is entirely unsuitable for use against an
armored tank or bunker. Likewise, the GP warhead fuzed only with the Mk 191 base fuze is relatively
ineffective against personnel or unarmored targets. With each specific type of target, the right
combination of warhead, fuze, and motor is assembled from the wide variety of components
available.
2-14
2.75-Inch Folding Fin Aircraft Rocket
The 2.75-inch FFAR is an effective air-to-ground weapon against most targets. The 2.75-inch FFAR
is fired in large numbers to produce a shotgun pattern and is carried and launched from 7- or 19-
round tube launcher packages. These packages are described later in this chapter.
The 2.75-inch FFAR is accurately and safely launched from low-speed aircraft and helicopters. The
2.75-inch FFARs are received through the supply system in three configurations as follows:
x Complete rounds in 7- or 19-round tube launchers, or in metal containers
x Rocket motors in 7-round tube launchers, and the fuze-warhead combination in separate
shipping containers
x Separate components in authorized shipping containers
Aboard ship, the weapons department AOs will assemble the components according to the ship's air
and load plan. They deliver these assemblies to squadron AOs for loading onto aircraft.
For detailed information, such as authorized assemblies, safety precautions, and restrictions, you
should refer to Aircraft Rocket Systems 2.75-Inch and 5.0-Inch, NAVAIR 11-140-12. Specific aircraft-
loading and tactical manuals contain additional information.

5.0-Inch Rocket
Like the 2.75-inch rocket, the 5.0-inch rocket can be assembled in various warhead and fuze
combinations. The Mk 71 motor gives the additional advantage of one motor for all launch-speed
applications and is used with all configurations.
The 5.0-inch rocket is carried and launched from multiple-round launchers. Because of their large
size and weight, the number of rounds per launcher is reduced to four. The 5.0-inch rockets are
received through the supply system in the following two configurations:
x Rocket motors in a four-round launcher and fuzes and warheads in separate shipping
containers
x Separate components in separate shipping containers

NOTE
The Mk 191 and Model 113A fuzes are permanently
installed in the warheads.

AIRCRAFT ROCKET LAUNCHERS

Aircraft rocket launchers (pods) carry and provide a platform to fire rockets. Launcher design permits
multiple loading and launching of 2.75- and 5.0-inch rockets. Rocket pods let rocket motors (and, in
some cases, completely assembled rounds) stay in the same container from their manufacture,
through stowage, to their final firing.
Aircraft rocket launchers are classified as either 2.75- or 5.0-inch. They may be further classified as
either reusable or nonreusable. Launcher tubes that are constructed of metal are considered reusable
and are usually returned for reloading. Under certain conditions, they may be jettisoned at the pilot's
discretion.

2-15
The 2.75-inch rocket launchers currently in use are the launcher unit (LAU)-61C/A, LAU-61G/A, LAU-
68C/A, LAU-68D/A, and LAU68F/A. General characteristics and specifications for these launchers
are listed in Table 2-4.

NOTE
The LAU-68F/A is 11.25 inches longer than the LAU-68C/A
and LAU-68D/A.

The 5.0-inch rocket launchers are the LAU-10C/A and the LAU-10D/A. General characteristics and
specifications for these launchers are listed in Table 2-5.
For detailed information on the LAU-61(series), LAU-68(series), and LAU-10(series) launchers, you
should refer to Aircraft Rocket Systems 2.75-Inch and 5.0-Inch, NAVAIR 11-140-12.
Table 2-4 — 2.75-Inch Rocket Launchers
LAUNCHER TYPE NO. OF TUBE REUSABLE METHOD OF
TUBES MATERIAL FIRING
LAU-61C/A 19 Aluminum Yes Ripple or Singe
LAU-61G/A 19 Aluminum Yes Ripple or Single
LAU-68C/A 7 Aluminum Yes Ripple or Single
LAU-68D/A 7 Aluminum Yes Ripple or Single
LAU-68F/A 7 Aluminum Yes Ripple or Singe

Table 2-5 — 5.0-Inch Rocket Launchers

LAUNCHER TYPE NO. OF TUBE REUSABLE METHOD OF
TUBES MATERIAL FIRING
LAU-10C/A 4 Aluminum Yes Ripple or Single
LAU-10D/A 4 Aluminum Yes Ripple or Single

Shipping Configuration
The rocket launcher-shipping configuration, shown in Figure 2-20, is typical of all launcher-shipping
configurations, except for the RF barriers.

Center Section
The launcher tubes of both types of launchers are constructed of thin-walled, high-strength aluminum
alloy and are secured together with metal ribs. The entire package is covered with an aluminum skin.
The launchers have a thermal protective coating on the exterior surface and an RF/thermal barrier
that fits on the forward and aft end of the launcher. The center section houses or supports all other
components of the launcher.
The center section for the launcher allows for a 14-inch suspension system; two suspension lugs are
furnished with the launcher.

Shipping Ends
The shipping ends are a multipurpose arrangement that consists of a shockpan assembly, a
shockpan cover assembly, and/or locking ring assembly. An alternate hole and pin arrangement on
the top and bottom is arranged so that the shockpans interlock when the launchers are stacked. The
2-16
cover is equipped with a rubber seal ring that, when compressed by the locking ring assembly, forms
a watertight closure over the end of the launcher.

Figure 2-20 — Typical launcher shipping and storage configuration.

Radio Frequency/Thermal Barriers

The RF/thermal barriers for the LAU-61C/A and LAU-68D/A launchers consist of molded-alumina
silica fiber material covered with aluminum foil and afford both thermal and RF protection. These
barriers may vary slightly in color, thickness, or weight.
The RF/thermal barriers are used on 2.75-inch pods to increase the cook-off time. Equally important
is the barrier on the aft end of the pod. It prevents exposure of the igniter lead contact.
To reduce exposure of the rockets to fire or cook off during weather deck handling, the forward and
aft thermal electromagnetic shield barrier assemblies and the forward LAU-61/68 fairing assembly
shall be installed in the assembly area and shall remain in place until just prior to commencing aircraft
loading.
Use of the forward barrier is not required if the rocket warheads protrude beyond the forward edge of
the launcher. Barriers shall be reinstalled immediately following download of the AUR rockets from
aircraft.
The RF/thermal barrier should remain installed except during actual flight.

NOTE
RF/thermal barriers shall be used for all shipboard operations.
Remove all RF/thermal barriers before flight.

Common Components
Rocket launcher packages have several components that are common to all or most launcher
packages. Any notable differences are pointed out in the following discussion.
2-17
Fairings
Frangible fairings (Figure 2-21) are made of an
impregnated molded fiber designed with a waffle-
or grenade-type structure that shatters readily
upon rocket impact or from a blast. The fairings
fit flush with the outside surface of the center
section and form an aerodynamically smooth
joint. The forward fairing consists of a one-piece
molded section that disintegrates on rocket
impact. The tail fairing for the launchers is
molded in two sections (nose and base). The
rocket blast shatters the nose portion. The base
section remains on the launcher and acts as a
choke or funnel to direct debris away from the
aircraft. They are made of aluminum and are open
Figure 2-21 — Frangible fairings.
on both ends.
Fairings are not shipped with the rocket launcher packages. They must be ordered separately and
are received in sets packaged in cylinder-shaped cardboard fairing containers.
Fairings are not used in all applications. Review the specific tactical manual for any restrictions in the
use of fairings.

Safety Switch Assembly

A safety switch assembly is used on all rocket launchers. The safety switch assembly is a safe-arm
device that prevents loaded rockets from firing. It is usually located on the top of the center section of
the launcher between the aft end and the aft electrical receptacle.
With the safety pin installed in the safety switch assembly, the electrical system is grounded in the
safe position and the rockets will not fire. The safety pin has a REMOVE BEFORE FLIGHT red
streamer attached. The pin should be pulled immediately before the aircraft takes off and installed
immediately after the aircraft lands.
The safety pin must be installed in the safety switch assembly before the launcher is loaded with
rocket motors. The safety pin should remain installed—except during actual flight—until the launcher
is downloaded and verified empty.

Mode Selector Switch

The mode selector switch is used on all launchers except the LAU-61G/A. The LAU-61G/A contains
electronics that provide both single fire and ripple fire modes/capability that is selected by the pilot.
The switch is located in the aft bulkhead of the launcher. The switch permits preflight selection of
either ripple or single firing of the rockets by controlling the functioning of the pod intervalometer.

Intervalometer
The intervalometer for the LAU-61(series) and LAU-68(series) pods is located in the aft bulkhead of
the center section and in the forward bulkhead for the LAU-10(series) pods. Intervalometers, whether
installed in 2.75- or 5.0-inch launchers, perform the same function.
If the mode selector switch is in the SINGLE fire position, the intervalometer fires one rocket on each
firing pulse. If the mode selector switch in the 19-round tube launcher pod is in the SINGLE fire
position, the intervalometer fires rockets in pairs. If the mode selector switch is in the RIPPLE fire

2-18
position, the intervalometer converts the firing pulse into a ripple pulse and successively fires all
rockets at 95-millisecond intervals. Ripple firing operates the same on all pods.
The intervalometer used with the LAU-61(series) and LAU-68(series) pods has a shaft that extends
through the aft bulkhead of the launcher and a knurled knob with a reference (index) mark mounted
on the shaft. Intervalometer switch positions are marked on the aft bulkhead of the center section.
The intervalometer should NOT be manually rotated through the numbered positions except to check
an empty pod.
Intervalometers used in the LAU-10(series) pods cannot be manually rotated. When the
intervalometer has made a complete four-round firing cycle, it automatically homes in on the original
starting point (zero) and does not recycle without first de-energizing and then re-energizing the circuit.

LAU-61(Series) and LAU-68(Series) Launchers

The LAU-61(series) and LAU-68(series) launchers are intended for shipping (in some cases, with
warheads installed), stowing, and firing the 2.75-inch rockets. The weight of loaded launchers varies,
depending upon the number of rockets installed and rocket configuration.
The rockets are retained in the launcher tubes during shipping, handling, and flight by engagement of
a spring-actuated detent with integral blast paddles (Figure 2-22). During loading, the rocket motor
depresses the detent until the detent snaps into the detent groove located on the aft end of the motor.
To remove rocket motors, a detent lift tool is used to depress the detent.

Figure 2-22 — 2.75-inch rocket launcher detent.

A spring-loaded firing contact (Figure 2-23) is located in the end of each tube.
The principles of operation for the LAU-61(series) and LAU-68(series) launcher are basically the
same as the LAU-10(series) launcher. The LAU-61(series) and LAU-68(series) launcher can be
loaded with less than 7 or 19 rockets when tactical requirements exist. However, you should refer to
the specific tactical manual and aircraft-loading manual. Also, because the rockets are fired in a
definite sequence, the rockets must be loaded into the launcher tubes in the proper sequence. For
more information on loading the rocket launchers, refer to the applicable loading manual.

2-19
LAU-10(Series) Launchers
The LAU-10(series) launchers are reusable launchers
intended for shipping (without warheads), stowing, and
firing four 5.0-inch rockets. When loaded with four
completely assembled rounds, the total weight varies with
rocket configuration from 500 to 550 pounds.
The rockets are retained in the launcher tubes during
shipping, handling, and flight by engagement of a spring-
loaded detent pawl in the rocket detent groove (Figure 2-
24).
When the rocket is loaded and unloaded, a detent lift tool
is used to raise and lower the detent pawl by rotating the
detent lift handle, which is located at the forward end of
the launcher. The detent also supports the firing pin.
Each firing pin (Figure 2-24) is part of the detent
assembly and is raised and lowered concurrent with the Figure 2-23 — 2.75-inch launcher
pawl. The firing pin extends into the tube and contacts the firing contact assembly.
rocket firing contact band, which is located aft of the
rocket detent groove.

Figure 2-24 — LAU-10(series) detent pin and firing pin assembly.

When the switch in the aircraft firing circuit is closed, electrical current flows from the aircraft firing
circuit through the electrical receptacle, safety switch, mode selector switch, intervalometer, and firing
pin in the launcher to the contact band in the forward end of the motor. The current then travels
through the lead wire to the squib in the igniter. The current entering the rocket squib heats the squib
primer mixture, which, in turn, ignites the igniter charge.
Pressure within the igniter unseats a blowout plug, permitting the burning charge to ignite the
propellant grain. The whole process of ignition requires about 0.005 second. Pressure of the hot
propellant gases from the burning grain bursts the nozzle seal and provides the thrust to propel the
rocket. Thrust overrides the detent spring, releasing the pawl from the rocket detent groove. The
thrust then pushes the rocket out the forward end of the tube. The impact from the first rocket out
shatters the forward fairing, and the blast removes the tail fairing.

2-20
A/E-35T-35A Common Rack and Launcher Test Set
The A/E-35T-35A common rack and launcher test set (CRALTS) (Figure 2-25) is an
automatic/semiautomatic universal GO/NO-GO tester for various aircraft-specific bomb racks, missile
launchers, and other units under test (UUTs) that have been removed for maintenance
verification/repair. The CRALTS determines operational status of a launcher and provides fault
isolation to shop replaceable assemblies. The CRALTS and adapter assemblies provide all cables,
stimuli, and measurement equipment required for testing UUTs.

Figure 2-25 — A/E-35T-35A CRALTS.

Use the CRALTS to perform a complete electrical test on a launcher under test. A built-in-test (BIT) is
performed automatically when the test set is turned on. When an abnormal condition is indicated
within the test set, perform a complete CRALTS self-test. You should perform a complete CRALTS
self-test at the start of each day or shift.
The CRALTS employs both automatic and manual test modes. The automatic mode is designed to
execute an entire set of test functions for a particular launcher automatically, from start to finish. The
manual mode is designed to execute one step at a time as entered by the operator. In addition to the
two modes of operation, the CRALTS is equipped with a BIT capability. The BIT capability enables
the test set to perform a self-test before the launcher tests are performed.
Components of the CRALTS include test cables for performing self-test, power cables and accessory
case, and six adapter cables for various launchers.

AN/USM-715 Rocket Launcher Test Set

The AN/USM-715 rocket launcher test set (Figure 2-26) is a self-contained, multipurpose test set
powered by a nickel metal hydride (NiMH) (rechargeable) or alkaline (nonrechargeable) battery. The
test set is classified as Class 1 test equipment used in vicinity of aircraft and above-deck application,
as defined in the Test Equipment for Use With Electrical and Electronic Equipment, General
Specification, military performance specification (MIL-PRF-) 28800F and will be used as an
organizational (O-level) and intermediate level (I-level) test set. At the O-level, the test set may be
used when the rocket launcher is mechanically, but not electrically, attached to the aircraft.
2-21
 Figure 2-26 — AN/USM-715 rocket launcher test set.

ROCKET SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Safety precautions prescribe the minimum requirements and regulations that you should observe
when handling rockets and rocket launchers.
The aircraft rocket is no more dangerous than any other explosive weapon. However, it does have
certain peculiar hazards. A completely assembled rocket, if accidentally fired, takes off under its own
power in the direction it is pointed and threatens everything in its path. When fired, an assembled
rocket expels a blast of burning gas capable of injuring or killing anyone it strikes. Generally, rocket
motors without a head attached will not explode. A fire hazard exists because ballistite or cordite
ignites easily and burns readily. High-explosive heads, either fuzed or unfuzed, present the same risk
as gun projectiles under the same conditions. Whether completely assembled or disassembled,
rockets should be handled with extreme care to avoid damage to parts.
x Only personnel who are certified to handle rockets should be in the vicinity of assembly
operations; when handling airborne rockets, rocket components, and launchers, follow all
safety practices that apply to airborne armament and weapons; if practicable, perform all work
from the side of the rocket launcher
x Stow rocket motors in the same manner as smokeless powder and matches, and never allow
open flames in the stowage area; do not store rocket motors and electric or electronic fuzes in
the same compartment with, or be within 5 feet of, any unshielded transmitting apparatus or
unshielded antenna leads
x Smoking, including the use of electronic or vapor cigarettes, is not permitted in magazines or in
the immediate vicinity of operations involving ammunition or explosives; smoking is only
authorized in designated smoking areas approved by the commanding officer
x DO NOT use a rocket motor if it is dropped and any portion impacts on a hard surface after
falling any distance; cracks or breaks in the grain increase the carefully calculated burning
area and will cause excessive internal pressure buildup, which can cause the motor to blow up
after ignition
x Stow explosive heads and fuzes, except fuzes that are permanently installed in the head,
separately in the same manner as high-explosive projectiles

2-22
x Ready-service stowage of assembled rockets are authorized for the 2.75- and 5.0-inch aircraft
rockets according to Ammunition Afloat, NAVSEA OP 4 and Ammunition and Explosives
Ashore, NAVSEA OP 5
x To avoid possible injury to personnel and damage to equipment in any operation involving
assembly, disassembly, cleaning, or painting, perform the work in a designated area, safely
removed from other explosives and away from vital installations; the smallest number of rocket
components practical shall be exposed; only authorized personnel essential to the work shall
be in the vicinity
x Examination of the exterior of some fuzes will not show if they are armed; if, for any reason,
there is a chance a fuze might be armed, treat the fuze as an armed and sensitive fuze;
dispose of the complete fuzed round according to current directives; when available, explosive
ordnance disposal (EOD) personnel should dispose of such rounds

WARNING
DO NOT attempt to remove or install fuzes on warhead;
removal or installation may cause detonation.

x Personnel should not tamper with (or attempt to repair) any parts of the round; if the round is
damaged or defective, remove the head from the motor and mark the defective part for return
to the issuing agency; disassembly or alteration of rocket components is not authorized except
under specific instructions from NAVAIR
x Dispose of fuzes and/or warheads dropped any distance onto a hard surface, and rockets that
have been accidentally released from aircraft launchers upon aircraft landing, according to
current directives; if a loaded launcher is dropped, do not use the launcher until the launcher
tubes, latching mechanisms, and rockets are inspected for damage
x To prevent possible explosion, do not expose aircraft rockets or loaded launchers to exhaust
from jet engines; rockets should not be exposed to jet exhaust that is greater than a human
can endure; during taxiing, momentary exposure to jet exhaust can occur, but shall not be
prolonged enough to raise the weapon skin temperature above a level that is acceptable to the
touch; in the absence of specific information on the unit, a minimum distance of 10 feet shall
be maintained
x Do not use rockets or components that have exceeded temperature limitations; the
components shall be marked TEMPERATURE RANGE EXCEEDED
x Do not load or unload rockets from launchers while on the flight deck; all RF barriers should
remain in place on the launcher while on the flight deck
x The safety pin must be in the safety switch assembly at all times; the only exceptions are when
certain electrical checks are being made, or when the aircraft is ready for flight; DO NOT
perform, under any circumstances, an electrical test with rockets in the launcher

2-23
 End of Chapter 2
Aircraft Rockets and Rocket Launchers
Review Questions
2-1. The history of rockets covers a span of how many centuries?

A. Three
B. Five
C. Seven
D. Eight

2-2. What initiating device detonates the propellant grain of a rocket?

A. Igniter
B. Motor
C. Stabilizing rod
D. Venturi-type nozzle

2-3. What component of a rocket contains the propellant, igniter, and nozzle?

A. Contact disc
B. Crosshead
C. Motor
D. Nozzle insert

2-4. What type of force is created from the burning propellant of a rocket motor?

A. Lift
B. Molecular
C. Thermal
D. Thrust

2-5. Rockets are propelled by what means?

A. Jet engine
B. Turbo fan engine
C. Electrical discharge
D. Expulsion of expanded gases

2-6. Which of the following rocket components are part of the motor?

A. Directional wings and stabilizing flute

B. Fuze and wings
C. Propellant and nozzle and fin assembly
D. Warhead and fuze

2-24
2-7. What type of high-explosive fragmentation warhead is used with a 5.0-inch rocket?

A. Mk 1 Mod 0
B. Mk 32 Mod 0
C. Mk 63 Mod 0
D. Mk 64 Mod 0

2-8. What type of warhead combines the effectiveness of high-explosive fragmentation and high-
explosive anti-tank warheads?

A. GP
B. AT/APERS
C. Flare
D. Flechette

2-9. What type of warhead is a compromise between the armor-piercing and fragmentation
designs?

A. HE-FRAG
B. HEAT
C. AT/APERS
D. GP

2-10. A 2.75-inch rocket assembly can be carried and launched from which of the following launcher
packages?

A. 4-round
B. 6-round
C. 13-round
D. 19-round

2-11. All 2.75-inch rockets may be shipped in which of the following configurations?

A. Complete rounds in 4-tube launchers or in aluminum boxes

B. Complete rounds in 7- or 19-tube launchers or in metal containers
C. Rocket motors in 4-tube launchers and fuze-warhead combinations in plastic shipping
containers
D. Separate components in cardboard containers

2-12. Which of the following Naval Air Systems Command publications provides authorized
assemblies, safety precautions, and restrictions for airborne rockets?

A. 01-700
B. 11-140-12
C. 11-5D-20
D. 11-5A-17

2-25
2-13. What rocket component adds a mid-body semiactive laser guidance section to the current
2.75-inch rocket?

A. Advanced Precision Kill Weapon System II (APKWS II)

B. Detect, track, home, and destroy guidance control
C. Extended-Range Kill System (ERKS)
D. Laser-guided acquisition control

2-14. All 5.0-inch rockets should be received through the supply system in which of the following
configurations?

A. Rocket motors in a four-round launcher

B. Rocket motors in a seven-round launcher
C. All components in a shipping crate
D. Motors in cardboard boxes and fuzes in aluminum containers

2-15. What total number of feet, if any, can a rocket motor be safely dropped?

A. 2
B. 4
C. 8
D. None

2-16. When, if ever, should you attempt to remove the base fuze from a rocket warhead?

A. After the warhead has been dropped more than 4 feet

B. After external evidence of arming is evident
C. After receiving orders from your supervisor
D. Never

2-26
 CHAPTER 3
AIR-LAUNCHED GUIDED MISSILES AND GUIDED MISSILE
LAUNCHERS
Guided missiles are self-propelled objects. After launching, they automatically alter their direction of
flight in response to signals received from outside sources. They usually carry high-explosive charges
and are equipped with a means to explode them at or near a target. The majority of guided missiles
used in the Navy are essentially rockets that are maneuvered while in flight.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
When you have completed this chapter, you will be able to do the following:
1. Describe air-launched guided missile classifications.
2. Identify air-launched guided missiles.
3. Recognize the methods used to designate air-launched missiles.
4. Identify missile components, to include guidance and control, armament, and propulsion
systems.
5. Identify the guided missiles used in the Navy.
6. Describe the purpose of guided missile launchers.
7. Identify the components of guided missile launchers.
8. Identify the methods used in handling guided missiles.
9. Recognize the safety precautions to follow while working with guided missiles.

AIR-LAUNCHED GUIDED MISSILES

The purpose of a guided missile is to reach and destroy or damage its target. The type of target
involved influences the characteristics of the missile; however, each missile meets the following basic
requirements:
x Have sufficient speed to intercept or catch its target
x Be maneuverable in flight to correct its flight path as required to intercept the target
x Be capable of inflicting a satisfactory degree of damage to the target on intercept
x Have an acceptable operating envelope (range/altitude) within which it is effective
x Be capable of launching when required and at a satisfactory rate
x Be comprised of components that are safe to handle, store, and use
In general, a typical guided missile has a long, cylindrical shape, with an oval or a hemispherical
shaped nose. It is fitted with a series of stabilizing or maneuvering fins, wings, or canards around its
outer surface.

3-1
MISSILE CLASSIFICATION
Guided missiles are classified according to their range, speed, launch environment, mission, and
vehicle type.

Range
Long-range guided missiles are usually capable of traveling a distance of at least 100 miles. Short-
range guided missiles often do not exceed the range capabilities of long-range guns. The Navy has
air-launched guided missiles that function within these ranges; they are medium-range or extended-
range missiles.

Speed
The speed capability of guided missiles is expressed in Mach numbers. A Mach number is the ratio of
the speed of an object to the speed of sound in the medium through which the object is moving.
Under standard atmospheric conditions, sonic speed is about 766 miles per hour (Mach 1.0). Guided
missiles are classified according to their speed as shown below:
x Subsonic—Up to Mach 0.8
x Transonic—Mach 0.8 to Mach 1.2
x Supersonic—Mach 1.2 to Mach 5.0
x Hypersonic—Above Mach 5.0
When considering the speed of an air-launched guided missile, the speed of the launching aircraft is
added to the speed of the missile. For example, if a missile's speed is Mach 2.5 and the aircraft's
speed, at the time of missile launch, is Mach 2.0, the missile's speed is Mach 4.5.

Types of Guided Missiles

Guided missiles are divided into two types—service missiles and nonservice missiles.

Service Missiles
These missiles are generally referred to as tactical missiles. Service missiles are fully operational and
fully explosive loaded rounds, designed for service use in combat.

Nonservice Missiles
These include all types of missiles other than service or tactical. They are subdivided as captive air
training missiles (CATMs), dummy air training missiles (DATMs), special air training missiles
(NATMs), practice guided weapons (PGWs), and load drill trainer (LDT) missiles.
Some practice and training missiles are used for actual launching. They contain live propulsion and
guidance systems with inert loaded warheads. They are fitted with pyrotechnic fuze indicator signals
and/or tracking flares that give a visual indication of missile/target impact. These missiles can also be
fitted with a telemetry-type warhead, which transmits electronic signals to a monitoring station. The
monitoring station displays the missile's in-flight performance and missile/target hit. Some types of
exercise missiles contain explosive-destruct charges so the missiles destroy themselves in flight.
These explosive-destruct charges, when installed, are used as a safety measure so the missile does
not travel beyond the established target range.
The CATMs are used for pilot training in aerial target acquisition and aircraft controls/displays. They
have both tactical and training components.
3-2
The DATMs and LDTs are ground training missiles used to train ground personnel in missile
assembly/disassembly, uploading/downloading, and handling procedures.
The NATMs are used for pilot training during fleet weapon training exercises.
The PGWs are used for stowage procedures and techniques. All components are completely inert.
Service missiles are fired as practice or training missiles when approved by proper authority.
Normally, approval is restricted to missiles that are obsolete or missiles that have exceeded their
normal service life.
Guided missiles used in naval aviation include air-to-air and air-to-surface missiles. Air-to-air guided
missiles are fired by one aircraft against another aircraft. Air-to-surface guided missiles are fired from
an aircraft against a target on the land or water surface.
For further information on the classification of guided missiles, you should refer to United States Navy
Ammunition Historical and Functional Data, Commander, Naval Sea Systems Command (NAVSEA)
SWO10-AB-GTP-010, and Identification of Ammunition, NAVSEA SW010-AF-ORD-010.

MISSILE DESIGNATION
The Department of Defense established a missile and rocket designation sequence. The basic
designations (Table 3-1) of every guided missile are letters, which are in sequence. The sequence
indicates the following:
1. The environment from which the vehicle is launched.
2. The primary mission of the missile.
3. The type of vehicle.
Examples of guided missiles that are common to aviation ordnanceman (AO) are as follows:
Designator Meaning
AGM Air-launched, surface-attack, guided missile
AIM Air-launched, aerial-intercept, guided missile
ATM Air-launched, training guided missile
RIM Ship-launched, aerial-intercept, guided missile
A design number follows the basic designator. In turn, the number may be followed by consecutive
letters, which show a modification. For example, the designation of AGM-88C means the missile is an
air-launched (A), surface-attack (G), missile (M), eighty-eighth missile design (88), third modification
(C). In addition, most guided missiles are given popular names, such as Sparrow, Sidewinder, and
Harpoon. These names are retained regardless of subsequent modifications to the original missile.

3-3
 Table 3-1 — Guided Missile and Rocket Designations
FIRST LETTER DESIGNATING
DESCRIPTION
LAUNCH ENVIRONMENT
A Air Air-launched
B Multiple Capable of being launched from more than one
environment
C Coffin Stored horizontally or at less than a 45-degree angle in a
protective enclosure and launched from the ground
F Individual Carried and launched by one man
M Mobile Launched from a ground vehicle or movable platform
P Soft Pad Partially or non-protected in storage and launched from
the ground
U Underwater Launched from a submarine or other underwater device
R Ship Launched from a surface vessel, such as a ship or barge
SECOND LETTER
DESIGNATING MISSION DESCRIPTION
SYMBOL
D Decoy Vehicles designed or modified to confuse, deceive, or
divert enemy defenses by simulating an attack vehicle

E Special Electronic Vehicles designed or modified with electronics equipment

or communications, countermeasures, and electronic relay
missions
G Surface Attack Vehicles designed to destroy enemy land or sea targets
I Intercept-Aerial Vehicles designed to intercept aerial targets in defensive
roles
Q Drone Vehicles designed for target reconnaissance or
surveillance
T Training Vehicles designed to be modified for training purposes
U Underwater Attack Vehicles designed to destroy enemy submarines or other
underwater targets or to detonate underwater
W Weather Vehicles designed to observe, record, or relay data
pertaining to meteorological phenomena

M Guided Missile An unmanned, self-propelled vehicle with remote or

internal trajectory guidance

R Rocket A self-propelled vehicle whose flight trajectory cannot be

altered after launch

3-4
 Table 3-1 —Guided Missile and Rocket Designations (continued)
THIRD LETTER DESIGNATING
DESCRIPTION
VEHICLE TYPE SYMBOL
N Probe A non-orbital instrumented vehicle to monitor and transmit
environmental information
NOTE: The designations listed in the above table cover all the guided missiles and rockets
used within the Department of Defense. Therefore, the Navy may not use all designations
listed.

MISSILE IDENTIFICATION
The external surfaces of all Navy guided missiles, except radome and antenna surfaces, are painted
white or gray. The color white or gray has no identification color-coding significance when used on
guided missiles.
There are three significant color codes used on guided missiles and their components—yellow,
brown, and blue. These color codes indicate the explosive hazard in the missile component. If
components are painted blue on a practice missile and have a yellow or brown band painted on them,
the component has an explosive component that doesn't have a comparable part in a service missile.
Each component of the missile, besides being color coded, is identifiable by lettering stenciled on the
exterior surface of the component. The lettering on a component gives information such as the Mark
(Mk) and Modification (Mod); type and weight of explosive filler; loading activity symbol and date of
loading; temperature range restrictions; and unit serial number.
All missiles used in naval aviation are assigned missile serial numbers. These numbers are shipped
with the missile's logbook. The missile serial number is normally the serial number of the leading
component of the missile, such as the guidance and/or control components. The serial number is
important because it is the number used to track the missile from assembly at a weapons station until
it is fired or discontinued from service.
For further information concerning identification of guided missiles, refer to Identification of
Ammunition, NAVSEA SW010- AF-ORD-010/Commander, Naval Air Systems Command (NAVAIR)
11-1-117.

MISSILE COMPONENTS
Guided missiles are made up of a series of subassemblies (Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2). The various
subassemblies form a major section of the overall missile to operate a missile system, such as
guidance, control, armament (warhead and fuzing), and propulsion. The major sections are carefully
joined and connected to each other. They form the complete missile assembly. The arrangement of
major sections in the missile assembly varies, depending on the missile type.
The guidance section is the brain of the missile. It directs its maneuvers and causes the maneuvers
to be executed by the control section. The armament section carries the explosive charge of the
missile, and the fuzing and firing system by which the charge is exploded. The propulsion section
provides the force that propels the missile.

3-5
 Figure 3-1 — Typical air-to-air guided missile.

Figure 3-2 — Typical air-to-surface guided missile.

Guidance and Control Section

Missile guidance systems include the electronic sensing systems that initiate the guidance orders and
the control system that carries them out. The elements for missile guidance and missile control can
be housed in the same section of the missile, or they can be in separate sections. There are a
number of basic guidance systems used in guided missiles. Homing-type, air-launched, guided
missiles are currently used. They use radar or infrared homing systems.
A homing guidance system is one in which the missile seeks out the target, guided by some physical
indication from the target itself. Radar reflections or thermal characteristics of targets are possible
physical influences on which homing systems are based. Homing systems are classified as active,
semiactive, and passive.

Active
In the active homing system (Figure 3-3), target illumination is supplied by a component carried in the
missile, such as a radar transmitter. The radar signals transmitted from the missile are reflected off
3-6
the target and back to the receiver in the missile. These reflected signals give the missile information
such as the target's distance and speed. This information lets the guidance section compute the
correct angle of attack to intercept the target. The control section that receives electronic commands
from the guidance section controls the missile’s angle of attack. Mechanically manipulated wings,
fins, or canard control surfaces are mounted externally on the body of the weapon. They are actuated
by hydraulic, electric, or gas generator power, or combinations of these to alter the missile's course.

Semiac tive
In the semiactive homing system (Figure 3-4), the
missile gets its target illumination from an external
source, such as a transmitter carried in the launching
aircraft. The receiver in the missile receives the signals
reflected off the target, computes the information, and
sends electronic commands to the control section. The
control section functions in the same manner as
previously discussed.

Passive
In the passive homing system (Figure 3-5), the
directing intelligence is received from the target.
Examples of passive homing include homing on a
source of infrared rays (such as the hot exhaust of jet
aircraft) or radar signals (such as those transmitted by
ground radar installations). Like active homing, passive
homing is completely independent of the launching
aircraft. The missile receiver receives signals
generated by the target and then the missile control Figure 3-3 — Active homing system.
section functions in the same manner as previously
discussed.

Figure 3-4 — Semiactive homing Figure 3-5 — Passive homing

system. system.
3-7
Armament Section
The armament section contains the payload (explosives), fuzing, safety and arming (S&A) device,
and target-detector (TDs).

Payload
The payload is the element or part of the missile that does what a particular missile is launched to do.
The payload is usually considered the explosive charge, and is carried in the warhead of the missile.
High-explosive warheads used in air-to-air guided missiles contain a rather small explosive charge,
generally 10 to 18 pounds of H-6, high blast explosives (HBX), or plastic bonded explosives (PBX)
high explosives. The payload contained in high-explosive warheads used in air-to-surface guided
missiles varies widely, even within specific missile types, depending on the specific mission. Large
payloads, ranging up to 450 pounds, are common. Composition B and H-6 are typical explosives
used in a payload.
Most exercise warheads used with guided missiles are pyrotechnic signaling devices. They signal
fuze functioning by a brilliant flash, by smoke, or both. Exercise warheads frequently contain high
explosives, which vary from live fuzes and boosters to self-destruct charges that can contain as much
as 5 pounds of high explosive.

Fuzing
The fuzing and firing system is normally located in or next to the missile's warhead section. It includes
those devices and arrangements that cause the missile's payload to function in proper relation to the
target. The system consists of a fuze, S&A device, a TD, or a combination of these devices.
There are two general types of fuzes used in guided missiles—proximity fuzes and contact fuzes.
Acceleration forces upon missile launching arm both fuzes. Arming is usually delayed until the fuze is
subjected to a given level of accelerating force for a specified amount of time. In the contact fuze, the
force of impact closes a firing switch within the fuze to complete the firing circuit, detonating the
warhead. Where proximity fuzing is used, the firing action is very similar to the action of proximity
fuzes used with bombs and rockets.

Safety and Arming Devices

S&A devices are electromechanical, explosive control devices that maintain the explosive train of a
fuzing system in a safe (unaligned) condition until certain requirements of acceleration are met after
the missile is fired.

Target Detectors
TDs are electronic detecting devices similar to the detecting systems in variable time (VT) fuzes.
They detect the presence of a target and determine the moment of firing. When subjected to the
proper target influence, both as to magnitude and change rate, the device sends an electrical impulse
to trigger the firing systems. The firing systems then act to fire an associated S&A device to initiate
detonation of the warhead.
Air-to-air guided missiles are normally fuzed for a proximity burst by using a TD with an S&A device.
In some cases, a contact fuze may be used as a backup. Air-to-surface guided missile fuzing consists
of influence (proximity) and/or contact fuzes. Multifuzing is common in these missiles.

3-8
Propulsion Section
Guided missiles use some form of jet power for propulsion. There are two basic types of jet
propulsion power plants used in missile propulsion systems—the atmospheric (air-breathing) jet and
the thermal jet propulsion systems. The basic difference between the two systems is that the
atmospheric jet engine depends on the atmosphere to supply the oxygen necessary to start and
sustain burning of the fuel. The thermal jet engine operates independently of the atmosphere by
starting and sustaining combustion with its own supply of oxygen contained within the missile.

Atmospheric Jet Propulsion System

There are three types of atmospheric jet propulsion systems—the turbojet, pulsejet, and ramjet
engines. Of these three systems, only the turbojet engine is currently being used in Navy air-launched
missiles. A typical turbojet engine includes an air intake, a mechanical compressor driven by a
turbine, a combustion chamber, and an exhaust nozzle. The engine does not require boosting and
can begin operation at zero acceleration.

Thermal Jet Propulsion System

Thermal jets include solid propellant, liquid propellant, and combined propellant systems. An AO
comes in contact with all three systems. The solid propellant and combined propellant systems are
currently being used in some air-launched guided missiles.
The majority of air-launched guided missiles used by the Navy use the solid propellant rocket motor.
They include the double base and multibase smokeless powder propellants as well as the composite
mixtures. Grain configurations vary with the different missiles. Power characteristics and temperature
limitations of the individual rocket motors also vary.
In some guided missiles, different thrust requirements exist during the boost phase as compared to
those of the sustaining phase. The dual thrust rocket motor (DTRM) is a combined system that
contains both of these elements in one motor. The DTRM contains a single propellant grain made of
two types of solid propellant—boost and sustaining. The grain is configured so the propellant meeting
the requirements for the boost phase burns at a faster rate than the propellant for the sustaining
phase. After the boost phase propellant burns itself out, the sustaining propellant sustains the motor
in flight over the designed burning time (range of the missile).

SERVICE GUIDED MISSILES

Missiles have been operational for several years. Still, research on missiles continuously produces
changes in the missile field. The missiles discussed in this manual are presently operational.

AIM-7(Series) Sparrow III Guided Missile

The AIM-7(series) Sparrow III guided missile (Figure 3-6) is a supersonic, semiactive, medium-range,
all-weather, air-to-air guided missile that is designed to be either rail or ejection launched. The
missile's tactical mission is to intercept and destroy enemy aircraft in all-weather environments. It is
designed to be launched from the fighter/attack (F/A)-18 aircraft.
The AIM-7(series) missile guidance depends on radiofrequency (RF) energy radiated by the
launching aircraft and reflected by the target. Excluding the radome, the missile body has four
sectional tubular shells that house the major functional components. The four major functional
components are the guidance section, flight control, warhead, and rocket motor. The overall length of
the missile is approximately 142 inches with a diameter of 8 inches. It weighs approximately 510
pounds. The missile is issued to the fleet as an all-up-round (AUR). The only assembly required at
3-9
fleet level is the installation of the wing and fin assemblies, which are shipped in separate shipping
containers.
The radome is ceramic and forms the nosepiece of the missile. It does not obstruct RF energy. It
covers the RF head assembly of the guidance section and provides protection against environmental
damage.

Figure 3-6 — AIM-7M/P Sparrow missile.

The guidance section seeker receives and interprets the radar energy reflected from the target. Then
it produces signals that are sent to the flight control section to direct the missile to intercept the target
or come within lethal range of it.
The flight control consists of the autopilot and the hydraulic group. These function to provide control
signals and mechanical energy to move the external control surfaces that guide the missile toward
the point of intercept, and to stabilize the missile in pitch, yaw, and roll.
The warhead is located between the guidance and flight control section. The warhead is explosive-
loaded, and it contains the fuze, fuze booster charge, and the S&A device. It is a continuous-rod or
blast fragment type of warhead. With a continuous-rod warhead, target kill is accomplished by
collision of the continuous ring with the target. For a blast fragment type warhead, thousands of
fragments are propelled through the air, thereby killing the target. Detonation is triggered either by a
fuze pulse from the target seeker at the nearest point of intercept or a fuze pulse from the flight
control upon impact with the target.
The DTRM attaches to the aft end of the missile flight control section. It is equipped with a
SAFE/ARM igniter assembly that is manually locked in either the SAFE or ARMED position. This
switch can only be repositioned with an arming key. When in the SAFE position, the arming key
cannot be removed. This switch prevents accidental firing of the motor. It should not be moved to the
ARMED position until immediately before aircraft launch.
The control surfaces consist of four delta-shaped wing and fin assemblies. The wings and fins are
designed for quick attachment and release without the use of tools. The wing assemblies attach to
the flight control section, which controls their rotary motion to produce the desired pitch, yaw, and roll.
The tail fin assemblies attach to fittings on the rear of the rocket motor and provide stability to the
missile.

3-10
Another series of the Sparrow III guided missile is the RIM-7M and RIM-7P. These missiles are
surface-to-air guided missiles. They are used in some ships in the North Atlantic Treaty Organization
(NATO) Sea Sparrow Missile System (NSSMS). As an AO, responsibility for these missiles is in the
area of handling and stowage only.
For further information concerning the AIM-7(series) missiles, refer to publication Organizational,
Intermediate, and Depot Maintenance Instruction Manual with Illustrated Parts Breakdown, NAVAIR
01-265GMAD-9-3(series) and Airborne Weapons Assembly Manual, NAVAIR 11-140-6.1(series)
Airborne Weapons Assembly Manual.

AIM-9M(Series) Sidewinder Guided Missile

The AIM-9M(series) Sidewinder guided missiles (Figure 3-7) are supersonic, air-to-air weapons with
weapons with passive infrared target detection, proportional navigation guidance, and torque-balance
control systems.

Figure 3-7 — AIM-9M(series) Sidewinder guided missile.

They are capable of being launched from the F/A-18 aircraft. The AIM-9M(series) missiles are issued
to the fleet as AURs. The components of the ATM-9(series) are identical to the AIM-9M(series)
except that a training warhead is substituted for the tactical warhead in the ATM-9(series). The AIM-
9M(series) missile is used strictly for tactical purposes. The ATM-9(series) missile is used for pilot
training in target acquisition and missile firing.
The Sidewinder guided missile is approximately 113 inches in length, 5 inches in diameter, weighs
approximately 190 pounds, and consists of five major components. These components are the
guidance and control section, the TD section, the S&A device, the warhead section, and the rocket
motor section (Figure 3-8).
The guidance and control section consists of the following three major assemblies:
x An infrared seeker assembly, which is used for detecting the target
x An electronic assembly, which is used for converting detected target information to tracking
and guidance command signals
x A gas servo assembly (which consists of a gas generator, manifold, pistons, rocker arms,
electrical solenoids, and thermal battery), where the electrical guidance commands are
converted to mechanical movement of the control fins
3-11
 Figure 3-8 — AIM-9M(series) Sidewinder guided missile (exploded view).
Four bomb stabilizing unit (BSU)-32/B control fins are mounted on the guidance and control section to
provide aerodynamic lift and course alterations to the missile during free flight. They are movable
surfaces that are electrically controlled and pneumatically operated by the gas servo assembly. The
missile’s umbilical cable is also attached to the guidance and control section. A shorting cap/dust
cover must be installed on the umbilical connector at all times when the missile is not electrically
connected to the launcher unit (LAU)-7. The umbilical cable provides the necessary path for the
exchange of electronic signals between the missile and aircraft before missile launch. It also provides
a connection to the launcher-mounted cooling gas supply, which prevents the electronic components
of the guidance and control section from becoming overheated during operation before missile
launch. The umbilical cable is sheared off at missile launch.
The TD is a narrow-beam, active-optical, proximity fuze system. The purpose of the TD is to detect
the presence of an air target within the burst range of the missile warhead and generate an electrical
firing signal to the S&A device.
The S&A device attaches to the TD and is located between the TD section and the warhead section.
The S&A device contains an interrupted firing train that is aligned by an acceleration-arming device. It
contains the necessary high explosives, switches, and circuits to initiate detonation of the warhead.
The weapon derived uranium (WDU)-17/B warhead (used in the AIM-9(series) configuration) is an
annular blast fragmentation warhead that consists of a case assembly, two booster plates, an
initiator, high explosive, and fragmentation rods. The explosive output from the S&A device is
transferred through the initiator to the booster plates. The initiation is then transferred through the
explosive-loaded channels of the booster plates to the booster pellets at each end of the warhead.
Detonation of the booster pellets sets off the high explosive, causing warhead detonation.
3-12
The WDU-9A/B warhead (used in the ATM-9(series) configuration) is mechanically interchangeable
with the WDU-17/B tactical warhead. The WDU-9A/B contains a smoke-flash mix with CH-6 booster
to provide visual observation of the missile/target hit.
The Mk 36 Mods 11 and 13 rocket motor uses a single-grain propellant. The rocket propellant is cast
into the motor tube and case bonded to the tube wall, which is 0.060-inch thick. Due to the moisture
absorbing nature of the propellant grain, a phenolicsilica glass weather seal is bonded to the inside of
the exhaust nozzle to prevent moisture from contacting the propellant grain. The igniter is held in
place by a nonpropulsive head closure that blows out if the rocket motor is ignited and the warhead is
not attached. Should the head closure not blow out fully, an imbalance of thrust would occur, causing
rocket motor movement and possible hazard to personnel. The degree of movement would depend
upon the imbalance factor. The rocket motors are equipped with a coupling ring assembly for
attaching motor to warhead. The rocket motor has integral mounting ribs for the four wings.
Four Mk 1 Mods 2 or 5 wings are attached to the aft end of the motor tube. They provide
aerodynamic lift and stability during flight. Each wing has a rolleron assembly that provides pitch,
yaw, and roll stabilization during free flight. When
the missile is fired, the roller on is uncaged by
acceleration and is free to move through its
longitudinal axis during flight. The roller on wheel
is designed so that the passing airstream causes it
to spin at a very high speed, thus acting as a
gyroscope, which helps to stabilize the missile and
reduce roll during flight.
For further information about the AIM-9(series)
and ATM-9(series) Sidewinder guided missile, you
should refer to the Sidewinder Guided Missile
AIM-9 and Training Missile, NAVAIR 01-AIM9-2.1
and Airborne Weapons Assembly Manual NAVAIR
11-140-6.1.

AIM-9X(Series) Sidewinder Guided

Missile
The AIM-9X(series) Sidewinder is a supersonic,
air-to-air, short-range guided missile, capable of
both offensive and defensive counter-air missions
in day/night operations (Figure 3-9). This launch-
and- leave, air combat missile features passive
infrared (IR) guidance to detect, intercept, and
destroy enemy aircraft.

Principles of Operation
The AIM-9X(series) is launched from an aircraft
after target detection to home in on IR emissions,
intercept, and destroy enemy aircraft. The missile
interfaces with the aircraft through the missile
launcher using an umbilical cable, a mid-body
buffer connector, and three missile hangers. The
Figure 3-9 — AIM-9X(series) Sidewinder
AIM-9X(series) incorporates a dual umbilical
guided missile.
design (i.e. a modified AIM-9M(series) forward
3-13
umbilical cable and the AIM-9/120 mid-body umbilical). Using combinations of the missile’s forward
and mid-body umbilicals, AIM-9X(series) has two distinct interface configurations: digital and analog.
The digital interface configuration is invoked when the missile detects an active digital (i.e. Aircraft
Internal Time Division Command/Response Multiplex Data Bus military standard (MIL-STD)-1553)
interface at the mid-body umbilical aircraft/missile interface.
The analog interface configuration is invoked, in the absence of a digital interface, at both the forward
and mid-body umbilical aircraft/missile interfaces.
The digital interface configuration is considered the standard operational configuration. On LAU-
127(series) launchers, the AIM-9X operates in the digital interface configuration, using a dual (forward
and mid-body) umbilical digital interface.
On LAU-7(series) launchers, the AIM-9X(series) operates in the single umbilical digital interface
configuration through the forward umbilical only.
The AIM-9X(series) incorporates the AUR concept with attached wings and control fins. The AIM-
9X(series) missile consists of a sensor/electronic guidance unit (GU), DSU-37/B TD, WDU-17/B
warhead with internal electronic safe-arm device (ESAD), weapon processor unit (WPU)-17/B or
WPU-17A/B propulsion/steering section (PSS), four forward-mounted wings and four aft-mounted
control fins.
Forward composite material and aft composite material (WPU-17/B) or metal (WPU-17A/B) harness
covers running along much of the lower body length of the AIM-9X AUR protects the missile wiring
harness.
The tactical AIM-9X(series) is compatible with F/A-18C/D and F/A-18E/F aircraft equipped with the
guided missile launchers LAU-7D/A and/or LAU-127(series). The launcher LAU-7D/A features a
modified power supply and internal harness to accommodate MIL-STD-1553 communication.
The AIM-9X(series) GU features an internal electrically-driven closed cycle regenerator, called a
cryoengine. The generator eliminates the need for the high-pressure air-nitrogen charged receiver
(gas) bottle or high pressure pure air generator (HiPPAG) utilized by the AIM-9M(series).

Assembly Components

Guidance Unit
The weapons guidance unit (WGU)-51/B provides the missile tracking, guidance, and control signals.
The GU consists of three major subassemblies: an IR sensor assembly for detecting the target; an
electronics unit that converts the detected target information to tracking and guidance command
signals; and center section containing the cryoengine, contact fuze, two thermal-batteries, and
required harnesses and connectors.

Target Detector
The AIM-9X(series) design modifies the existing AIM-9M(series) TD. The TD is a narrow-beam,
active optical, proximity fuze system. The TD transmits pulsed IR energy through the four forward
windows and an IR detector through four aft windows receives the reflected energy.
The purpose of the TD is to detect the presence of a target at distances out to the maximum effective
range of the missile warhead and to generate an electrical firing signal so that the ESAD explosive
train and warhead are detonated at a point where the average kill probability is maximized.

3-14
The doppler sensing unit (DSU)-36/B or DSU-37/B is the same TD as the AIM-9M(series) with the
exception that the end “V” groove is removed. The forward coupling clamp, used to join the GU to the
TD has been replaced with 14 cruciform recess captive screws.

Warhead
The AIM-9X(series) uses the existing AIM-9M(series) WDU-17/B warhead. The warhead, with the
ESAD, is an integral part of the missile. The warhead is an explosive loaded, end-initiated, annular
blast, titanium rod, fragmentation-type warhead comprised of a case assembly, a transfer tube
assembly, a loaded warhead booster, a plastic bonded explosive (PBXN)-3 explosive charge, and an
enclosure. It detonates upon receipt of the explosive output from the ESAD.

Propulsion/Steering Section
The PSS WPU-17/B is composed of four major components: a modified Mk 36 Mod 11 rocket motor,
a fin actuator unit (FAU), control actuation system (CAS) electronics, and a jet vane control (JVC).

Rocket Motor
The AIM-9X(series) initial design modifies the existing AIM-9M Mk 36 Mod 11 rocket motor. The FAU
and JVC are mounted on the aft end of the Mk 139 Mod 0 modified rocket motor. The motor case
serves as a mount for the three missile hangers and seven CAS electronics and aft harness cover
clamp assemblies.
Two electrical contact buttons are in the forward hanger. When the missile is loaded on the launcher,
two striker points within the launcher are in contact with the two contact buttons on the forward
hanger. When the firing circuit is activated, the firing voltage is sent through the aft contact button and
fires the initiator on the arm-fire assembly.
The initiator ignites the rocket motor propellant grain, thrust is developed, and the missile is launched.
The forward contact button on the AIM-9X missile is not used and has no electrical connection. A
nonpropulsive weather seal to protect the propellant from the environment seals the motor nozzle.
When the weather seal in the nozzle ruptures upon motor ignition, the initial small amount of thrust is
insufficient to overcome the holding force of the launcher detent. The thrust then rises rapidly, driving
the missile free of the launcher.

Propulsion/Steering Section
The PSS WPU-17A/B is composed of four major components: an Mk 139 Mod 1 rocket motor, an
FAU, CAS Electronics, and a JVC.

Rocket Motor
The WPU-17A/B PSS is made with a newly cast rocket motor (Mk 139 Mod 1) instead of a modified
rocket motor (Mk 139 Mod 0). The new Mk 139 Mod 1 rocket motor incorporates a metal aft harness
cover in place of the composite cover. This new design eliminates the need for five harness cover
clamp assemblies. The new metal aft harness cover is attached directly to the rocket motor tube
using 18 screws and washers that mate with welded attachment points with “floating” nuts.
Improvements were also made to FAU and tail platform attachment methods. All other aspects of the
Mk 139 Mod 1 rocket motor remain unchanged from the Mk 139 Mod 0 design; i.e. hanger
attachment, SAFE-ARM handle, igniter.

3-15
SAFE-ARM Selector Handle
The SAFE-ARM selector handle is a manual safety device that prevents the inadvertent firing of the
rocket motor. The device is switched to the ARM position on the arming area by the ground crew prior
to flight. It is the same Mk 297 SAFE-ARM selector that is used on AIM-9M(series), although the
handle is modified to allow for the new harness cover.
The handle is a “PLUS” design with four extensions. This design provides a visual confirmation of the
arm/safe condition of the rocket motor. Three of the extensions are painted black and the fourth is
painted white. The safe or armed condition is indicated by the position of the white extension in
relation to the SAFE-ARM indication on the rocket motor harness cover decal/stencil.

Fin Actuator Unit

The FAU provides AIM-9X(series) flight control and connects to the aft end of the rocket motor. The
FAU is a thrust vector control system consisting of four movable aerodynamic tail fins and four jet
vanes that direct the flow of the rocket motor exhaust. An electrically powered direct-coupled
brushless direct current (dc) motor drives each tail fin of the actuator unit. Each jet vane is slaved to
the associated tail fin shaft on the same side of the missile at a 1:1 coupling ratio via a pushrod link.
Prior to launch, spring-loaded pistons lock the tail fins and jet vanes from moving. With missile battery
power available, the fin unlock command fires an Electronic Explosive Device (EED) into a manifold,
causing withdrawal of all four fin lock tabs by the squib/cartridge output gas-powered piston
movement. A wiggle test verifies the fins are unlocked and there is positive fin control, which must
occur in order for the rocket motor initiation command to be generated.
A dedicated 106 volts direct current (vdc) thermal battery in the guidance section powers the FAU. An
electronics module that mounts as a sealed unit attached to the exterior of the rocket motor case
controls the FAU. The electronic harness leads forward to the guidance section and aft to the FAU.
Control fin/jet vane position feedback is measured from both individual potentiometers attached to the
control fin shafts (primary) and electric motor rotation state counts sensed by Hall Effect sensors
(secondary). Primary feedback is provided by the absolute readings from the potentiometers. In the
event the potentiometers are not providing feedback, the Hall Effect sensors measure secondary
feedback.

Fins
The control fins are mounted on the aft end of the missile and work in conjunction with the jet vanes
located in the thrust chamber of the missile. Four double-delta-design titanium fins in conjunction with
the jet vanes are the aerodynamic control surfaces that translate servo torque into missile
maneuvers. The fins and vanes are attached to wing ribs located at the aft end of the rocket motor.
Each fin pair can rotate about its axis up to 30 degrees in each direction during free flight.

Jet Vane Control

The JVC is in the exhaust section of the missile aft of the rocket motor. The jet vanes are
mechanically linked through a shaft to the control fins and provide enhanced steering capability by
redirecting the exhaust gases.
The AIM-9X-2 variant contains modifications to the GU, TD, and Propulsion Section. All other
assembly components remain unchanged.
GU (WGU-57/B)—provides the missile tracking, guidance, and control signals. The GU is an
enhanced version of the WGU-51/B with improved Electronics Unit (EU) Circuit Card Assemblies
(CCAs) and increased system battery capabilities.

3-16
TD (DSU-41/B)—contains electronics targeting enhancements and adds a data link capability to
support Lock On After Launch (LOAL) capabilities. The DSU-41/B shares no similarities with the AIM-
9M or previous AIM-9X TD.
PSS WPU-18/B (AIM-9X(series))—is composed of four major components: an Mk 139 Mod 1 rocket
motor, an FAU, CAS Electronics, and a JVC. It has an electronic ignition safety device (ISD) that
replaces the SAFE-ARM selector handle. The ISD alleviates the requirement to manually safe and
arm the missile.
For further information about the AIM-9(series) and ATM-9(series) Sidewinder guided missile, you
should refer to the Sidewinder Guided Missile AIM-9M and Training Missile, NAVAIR 01-AIM9-2 and
Airborne Weapons Assembly Manual, NAVAIR 11-140-6.

AIM-120(Series) Advanced Medium Range Air-to-Air Missile

The AIM-120(series) Advanced Medium Range Air-To-Air Missile (AMRAAM) is an all-weather
missile (Figure 3-10). The F/A-18 aircraft currently carries the missile. The AIM-120(series) is an AUR
that consists of four sections; guidance, armament, propulsion, and control. The overall length of the
missile is approximately 144 inches with a diameter of 7 inches. The AIM-120A/B/C/C-4 weighs
approximately 348 pounds and the AIM-120C-5/C-6/C-7/D weighs approximately 356 pounds. The
wing span of the AIM-120A/B is 25 inches and the wing span for the AIM-120C/C-4/C-5/C-6/C-7/D is
19 inches. The missile is issued to the fleet as an AUR. The only assembly required at fleet level is
the installation of the wing and fin assemblies.

Figure 3-10 — AIM-120(series) AMRAAM guided missile.

The guidance section consist of a radome, seeker components, electronics unit, inertial reference
unit, target detection device, batteries, power converter, and related harnesses and hardware.
The armament section includes a WDU-33/B fragmenting warhead, Mk-44 booster, and a fuzing unit
(FZU)-49/B safe and arm fuze (SAF).
The propulsion section consists of a dual-thrust, solid propellant, low-smoke rocket motor, a blast
tube and exit cone, and an arm/fire device (AFD).
The control section includes four independently controlled electromechanical actuators, four thermal
batteries, a data link assembly, and associated hardware. Gas pressure-operated mechanical locks
during ground handling and captive carry lock the control surfaces in position. During launch, a
pyrotechnic gas generator creates enough gas pressure to unlock the control surfaces.
3-17
All Navy inventory AMRAAMs are equipped with a thermally initiated venting system (TIVS) to meet
Navy insensitive munitions (IM) requirements aboard ship. The TIVS is contained within the missile
wiring harness that also includes an indicator showing whether the system is either enabled or
disabled. AMRAAM does not require external arming or dearming. An indicator for the rocket motor
arm-fire device is provided.

AGM-154(Series) Joint Stand-off Weapon

The AGM-154(series) Joint Stand-Off Weapon (JSOW) (Figure 3-11) is a family of low-cost, air-to-
ground weapons which employ a global positioning system (GPS)-aided inertial guidance system and
a kinematically efficient airframe. The JSOW has an inherent range capability for the U.S. Navy, U.S.
Air Force, and U.S. Marine Corps, that satisfies the stand-off requirements for attacking interdiction
targets from outside enemy point defenses during day, night, and adverse weather conditions. The
JSOW is intended for use on a wide range of aircraft, including the F/A-18A++, F/A-18C/D, and the
F/A-18E/F.
There are currently three configurations of the JSOW vehicle: AGM-154A, AGM-154C, and AGM-
154C-1. All weapon variants are inexpensive, unpowered, and survivable. For payload delivery, they
are carried aloft by a host of aircraft and launched to the target area from a Stand-off Outside Point
Defense (SOPD).

Figure 3-11 — AGM-154(series) JSOW.

The JSOW baseline AGM-154A (Figure 3-12) is an air-launched, surface attack weapon that provides
an intermediate standoff attack capability against a wide variety of less-than-value land and sea
targets. It is an expendable air-to-ground weapon that can successfully accomplish pre-launch,
launch, mid-course, and terminal flight phases of a surface attack mission. The baseline weapon
body structure is composed of a main air vehicle assembly and payload assemblies.
The main air vehicle assembly is used in all JSOW configurations. Sub-assemblies of the air vehicle
assembly are used in all JSOW configurations.

3-18
Subassemblies of the vehicle assembly include the airframe structure, control section payload,
guidance electronics unit (GEU) (guidance section AN/DSQ-58), cable assembly, and wing
deployment driver.

Figure 3-12 — AGM-154A JSOW.

The control section incorporates four control fins, while the airframe structure strongback employs two
folding wings and two sets of folding (14-inch and 30-inch spaced) suspension lugs.
The baseline weapon payload used is bomb assembly
SUU-81/B which contains 145 BLU-97A/B bomblets
(Figure 3-13 and Figure 3-14). The assembly SUU-
81/B package fits within the lower midsection (payload)
of the baseline air vehicle. The AGM-154A will be used
to augment the current Rockeye II CBU-99/CBU-100
and APAM CBU-59/B weapon systems.
The JSOW unitary weapon system, AGM-154C,
(Figure 3-15) is an advanced version of the JSOW
family of weapons. It incorporates a warhead system
consisting of a penetrating shaped-charge augmenting
charge (AC) in front of the follow-through bomb (FTB).
It provides blast/fragmentation effectiveness, as well
as hardened target penetration capability (Figure 3-16)
that’s controlled with the 10 available selective fuze
settings (Table 3-2). It provides low and high altitude
launch capability outside target point defenses, and
can also be used against targets covered by area
defenses prior to neutralization of those defenses Figure 3-13 — BLU-97A/B bomblet.
when the launch aircraft does not have to enter the
protected airspace.

3-19
Figure 3-14 — BLU-97A/B bomblet operation.

Figure 3-15 — AGM-154C JSOW.

3-20
 Figure 3-16 — Hardened target capability.

Table 3-2 — Selectable Fuze Setting on FTB

Delay Time Value in Milliseconds
0
5
15
25
35
45
60
90
180
240
The AGM-154C variant incorporates an Autonomous Targeting Acquisitions System.
The AGM-154C-1 (Figure 3-17), JSOW C-1 is an air-to-surface glide weapon capable of being
delivered from standoff ranges at high or low altitudes, day or night, and in adverse weather
conditions. In addition to the features of a standard AGM-154C, which is capable of striking a
stationary land target (SLT), JSOW C-1 also provides capability against moving maritime targets
(MMT) by adding a Link 16 antenna and a strike common weapon data link (SCWDL). The SCWDL is
a Link 16 terminal designed to enable network enabled weapon (NEW) messages. The user can
launch, control, hand-off control, target, and re-target JSOW C-1 both before and after launch.

3-21
 Figure 3-17 — AGM-154C-1 JSOW.
The AGM-154(series) weapon and CATM-154 are issued as a ready-for-use AUR with no assembly,
testing, or reprogramming required. Weapon failure on the aircraft requires built-in test (BIT) testing in
accordance with Airborne Weapons Assembly Manual, NAVAIR 11-140-6.1. BIT and reprogramming
is required for technical directive (TD) compliance or surveillance testing as directed by the fleet
support team (FST).

AGM-65(Series) Maverick Missile

The AGM-65(series) Maverick missile (Figure 3-18) is a precision-guided, high-velocity, low visibility
standoff weapon possessing extreme accuracy and a high probability of target destruction. It is
designed as a highly accurate, reliable, low maintenance air-to-ground hardened target weapon
capable of launching from the F/A-18 and P-3 aircraft. Physical characteristics are described in Table
3-3.
The system is intended to be easy to load, launch, and maintain utilizing common launchers,
ordnance support equipment, and electronic systems interfaces currently used by U.S. Navy and U.S.
Marine Corps aircraft.
The tactical AGM-65(series) missile is an electrical optical-guided via laser or infrared signals, rocket-
propelled, air-to-ground missile. It is effective against a wide range of tactical targets, including armor,
air defenses, ships, ground transportation, and fuel storage facilities.
The AGM-65E/E2 Laser Maverick is designed to provide destruction of hardened targets at sufficient
standoff range of terminal defenses, in both day and night operations. The weapons system provides
automatic homing on coded laser energy reflecting from a target. The laser designator may be a
hand-held or tripod-mounted mobile ground device or may be a stabilized airborne device on the
launch aircraft or separate aircraft. The warhead provides sufficient kinetic penetration of earth-
barricaded or concrete fortification, naval ships, and armored targets. The fuzing system allows a
selectable detonation delay to optimize kill capability.

3-22
 Figure 3-18 — AGM-65(series) Maverick missile.

Table 3-3 — AGM-65(Series) Physical Characteristics

SIZE AND WEIGHT AGM-65E/E2 AGM-65F
Length 97.7 inches (248 centimeters) 97.7 inches (248 centimeters)
Diameter 12 inches (30.5 centimeters) 12 inches (30.5 centimeters)
Wing Span 28.5 inches (72.4 centimeters) 28.5 inches (72.4 centimeters)
Center of Gravity 47.8 inches (121.4 47.8 inches (121.4
centimeters) aft to nose centimeters) aft to nose
Weight (pre-launch) 641.9 ± 15 pounds (291.1 ± 669.0 ± 15 pounds (299.1 ±
6.8 kilograms) 6.8 kilograms)
PROPULSION
Type Solid propellant dual thrust (boost sustain) rocket motor
GUIDANCE SYSTEM
Type Biased integral proportional navigation and angle restoration
bias
Electrical power source Aircraft power while captive; internal thermal battery during
launch and in free flight
CONTROL SYSTEM
Control surfaces Four, one pitch-roll pair, one yaw-roll pair
Servo actuators Four hydraulic
The AGM-65E2 is a modernized variant of the AGM-65E, utilizing more advanced electronics and
system hardware. Use of the AGM-65E2 Maverick missile is identical to that of the AGM-65E
Maverick missile.
3-23
The AGM-65F IR Maverick is designed to provide destruction of hardened ground and water targets
at sufficient standoff range of terminal defenses, in both day and night operations. Guidance for the
missile is provided through automatic homing or IR radiation from the target. The warhead provides
sufficient kinetic penetration of earth-barricaded or concrete fortification, naval ships, and armored
targets. The fuzing system allows a selectable detonation delay to optimize kill capability.
The AGM-65E/E2 Laser Maverick missiles have two major sections—the guidance and control
section (GCS) and the center/aft section (CAS).
The AGM-65F IR Maverick missile has two major sections—the seeker section and the CAS. Four
fixed wings are integrated as part of the CAS, and four moveable control surfaces (fins) are located at
the aft of the missile.
The missile is issued to the fleet as a complete AUR. There is no installation or assembly required at
the organizational maintenance level.
For further information on the AGM-65(series) Maverick, refer to Laser Guided Missile AGM-65E
(Maverick), NAVAIR 11-120-58 or Airborne Weapons Assembly Manual, Volume 2, NAVAIR 11-140-
6.2-2.

AGM-84(Series) Harpoon/Standoff Land Attack Missile-Expanded Response

Guided Missile
The AGM-84(series) Harpoon surface attack guided missile, (AGM-84D Tactical) air-launched missile
(Figure 3-19), is an all-weather antiship attack weapon. The Standoff Land Attack Missile-Expanded
Response (SLAM-ER) (Figure 3-20), AGM-84H/K, is a standoff land attack missile.

Figure 3-19 — AGM-84(series) Harpoon missile.

The Harpoon can be delivered from the F/A-18 and P-3 aircraft. The SLAM-ER can be delivered from
the F/A 18 aircraft.
Both missiles are AURs and require no assembly other than installation of the wing and control fin
assemblies. The Harpoon missile consists of the four major sections; guidance, warhead, sustainer,
and control, with wings, and control fins. The missile is approximately 151 inches in length and
weighs approximately 1,160 pounds.

3-24
 Figure 3-20 — AGM-84H/K SLAM-ER missile.

The Harpoon missile has a low-level cruise trajectory with over-the-horizon range that makes it less
susceptible to radar detection. It uses active guidance and has counter-countermeasure capability.
The guidance section contains the seeker, radar altimeter, midcourse guidance unit, and power
supply.
A radome on the front of the guidance section provides the required aerodynamic shield to protect the
internal components of the seeker. During ground handling, a radome protector cap protects the
radome.
The warhead section contains a penetration blast type of explosive, the guided missile fuze, fuze
booster, and the pressure probe assembly. It also provides internal routing of the interconnecting
cable from the guidance section to other parts of the missile.
The sustainer section contains the fuel tank and fuel supply system, missile battery, pyrotechnic relay
panel, and the turbojet engine. Three BSU-42/B missile wings and one BSU-43/B missile wing are
attached to the sustainer section by quick-attach clevis-type fittings. These wings are attached to the
missile at the organizational level. They provide the aerodynamic lift required to sustain missile flight.
They are made of a framed aluminum honeycomb construction and are nonfolding.
The control section contains four control actuators, which control the control fins. Four identical
nonfolding missile control fins (BSU-44/B) provide directional control of the missile's airframe
proportional to the input signal received from the guidance section. The control fins are one-piece
aluminum castings, and are attached to the control fin actuators by means of an integral torque-
limiting, screw-type device.
The AGM-84H/K SLAM-ER is an evolutionary upgrade to the combat-proven SLAM. The SLAM-ER is
an air-launched, day or night, adverse weather, over-the-horizon, precision strike missile.
The missile provides an effective, long range, precision strike option for both preplanned and target of
opportunity (TOO) attack missions against land and maneuvering ship targets. Some of the
characteristics of the SLAM-ER include:
x Highly accurate, GPS-aided guidance system
x Imaging infrared seeker and two-way datalink pod for man-in-the-loop (MITL) control
3-25
 x Improved missile aerodynamics performance characteristics that allow both long range and
flexible attack profiles
x Ordnance section with good penetrating power and lethality
x User-friendly interface for both MITL control and mission planning
The SLAM-ER missile is approximately 172 inches in length and weighs approximately 1,478 pounds.
SLAM-ER has two wing fairings and four fin assemblies and is contained in the CNU-595/E container.
For further information concerning the air-launched AGM-84(series) Harpoon / SLAM-ER guided
missiles, refer to the publication Airborne Weapons Assembly Manual, NAVAIR 11-140-6.1.

AGM-88(Series) High-Speed Anti-Radiation Missile

The AGM-88(series) High-Speed Anti-Radiation Missile (HARM) (Figure 3-21) is used for detecting,
acquiring, displaying, and selecting a radiating threat and similar operations.

Figure 3-21 — AGM-88(series) HARM missile.

The HARM is a supersonic, air-to-ground, rail-launched guided missile. Guidance is provided through
reception of signals emitted from ground-based threat radar. It has the capability of discriminating a
single target from a number of emitters in the environment.
The AGM-88C version has an improved guidance section which incorporates improved tactical
software and an electronically reprogrammable memory. The missile has four major sections:
guidance, control, warhead, and rocket motor.
The HARM missile, in conjunction with the launching aircraft's avionics, detects, identifies, and
locates enemy radar, displays threat information, and computes target parameters. The HARM
missile is 10 inches in diameter, 194 inches long, and weighs 800 pounds. The missile operates in
three basic modes: (1) self-protect (which attacks targets that pose immediate threat to the aircraft),
(2) target of opportunity (which attacks discrete targets important to the tactical situation), and (3)
prebrief (missile programmed to the vicinity of known or expected targets, and to attack when lock-on
is achieved). Launch aircraft for the HARM are the electronic/attack (EA)-6B, F/A-18, and E/A-18.
The AGM-88E Advanced Anti-Radiation Air-to-Ground Missile (AARGM) (Figure 3-22) is an evolution
of the HARM weapon system that includes an improved guidance and control sections over the
HARM missile. The AARGM missile uses the BSU-103/E wing which is a modified BSU-59/E HARM
wing.

3-26
 Figure 3-22 — AGM-88E AARGM missile.

AGM-114(Series) Hellfire Missile

The AGM-114(series) Hellfire missile (Figure 3-23) is an antiarmor terminal homing weapon that uses
a variety of warhead configurations, including shaped charge, blast fragmentation, and thermobaric,
to defeat individual hard point targets with minimal exposure to enemy fire by the delivery platform.

Figure 3-23 — AGM-114(series) Hellfire missile.

The AGM-114(series) Hellfire missile is designed as a precision-guided, high-velocity, low-visibility

standoff weapon possessing extreme accuracy and a high probability of target destruction. It is a
highly accurate, reliable, low maintenance air-to-ground antiarmor weapon compatible with a variety
of airborne platforms in the U.S. Navy and U.S. Marine Corps inventory. Physical characteristics are
described in (Table 3-4).
3-27
 Table 3-4 — AGM-114(Series) Physical Characteristics
SIZE AND WEIGHT AGM-114B/K(series) AGM-114M/N(series) AGM-114P(series)
Length 65 inches 64 inches 64 inches
Diameter 7 inches 7 inches 7 inches
Weight (pre-launch) 100 ± 5 pounds 100 ± 5 pounds 100 ± 5 pounds
Hellfire missiles provide accurate fire on targets acquired and designated by ground observers or
airborne laser target designator. Hellfire is primarily used on helicopters against tanks, other armored
vehicles, and hardened fixed targets. The system is intended to be easy to load, launch, and maintain
utilizing common launchers, ordnance support equipment, and electronic systems interfaces currently
used by Army and Navy war fighters.
All versions of Hellfire missiles in the U.S. Navy and U.S. Marine Corps inventory are carried on the
M-272/M-299 guided missile launcher and can be launched from the H-60 series helicopter. The
Hellfire missiles may be launched in day or night operation in three launch modes and in four different
firing modes.
The AGM-114(series) Hellfire missile is composed of five unique sections or groups; the laser seeker
assembly, the guidance section, the control section, the warhead section, and the propulsion section
(Figure 3-23).
The laser seeker acquires and tracks targets designated with laser energy by using the energy reflected
from the target. The laser seeker section is packaged in two separate units—the seeker head assembly
and an electronics assembly. The seeker head assembly consists of a gyro-optics assembly, dome,
potted coil assembly, and the interface board, which attaches to the back of the gyro support. The gyro-
optics assembly is an inertial stabilized, spinning mass, gimbaled detector assembly made up of three
subassemblies: the rotor, gimbal, and the sensor. The dome is made of injection molded optical grade
polycarbonate. A purging operation is performed to remove any moisture within the seeker head by
replacing the air that is present with dry nitrogen under positive pressure. All AGM-114(series) Hellfire
missiles utilize an equivalent or similar seekers.
The guidance section group (GSG) consists of an autopilot electronics assembly, gyros, thermal
battery, and gas accumulator. The GSG receives information from the laser seeker and provides
commands to the control section. It also provides missile trajectory control prior to seeker lock-on
during the indirect firing mode. The GSG provides electrical and pneumatic power requirements for
the missile after launch. The only major difference between the AGM-114B and later series (AGM-
114K/M/N/P(series)) Hellfire missiles is the conversion from analog to digital electronics. The
guidance section functions in the AGM-114K and later series Hellfire missiles are 100% software
controlled, and they are reprogrammable to defeat future threats. The AGM-114K and later series
Hellfire missile autopilot functions reside in the control interface group (CIG), which is located in the main
warhead section. The AGM-114N-5 Hellfire missile utilizes a trajectory shaping software package
designed to optimize the missiles angle of attack to target.
The control section accepts commands from the guidance section auto pilot and positions control
surfaces as required for missile stabilization and control. All AGM-114(series) Hellfire missiles utilize
a similar control system, with the major difference being the use of analog components in the AGM-
114B(series) missile and digital components in later AGM-114(series) missile.
The propulsion section provides thrust to separate the missile from the launch rail, the acceleration
necessary to arm the warhead fuze, and the impulse, which enables the missile to be launched
outside the target's gun defense range with minimum flight time to target. There are three different
3-28
rocket motors: the reduced smoke, M120, used with the Army AGM-114A missile; the minimum
smoke, M120E1, which limits the exhaust signature and is used with the Army AGM-114C missile;
and the minimum smoke, M120E2, which adds a S&A device to meet Department of the Navy (DON)
shipboard safety requirements, used with the AGM-114B(series). None of the propulsion sections are
Insensitive Munitions (IM) compliant, but have been granted IM waivers for fleet use. All AGM-
114(series) Hellfire missiles utilize a common or equivalent propulsion section, which allows all
variants to meet Navy shipboard safety requirements.
The major differences between the variants of the Hellfire missile—aside from those noted above—
are in the warhead sections of the missiles.
The AGM-114B warhead is a High Explosive Anti-Tank (HEAT) type, using a shaped charge and is
detonated by an electromechanical fuze.
The AGM-114K and AGM-114P(series) incorporates a dual warhead concept, with a small precursor
warhead mounted forward in the guidance section. This precursor warhead is designed to explode prior
to the main warhead detonation after missile impact in order to defeat newer reactive armor.
The AGM-114K-2A/P-2A warhead has an external blast fragmentation sleeve located on the forward
end of the warhead section.
The AGM-114M is fitted with a blast fragmentation warhead designed to defeat a general class of
targets represented by ships, fast patrol boats (FPBs), deck-mounted weapons systems, light armored
vehicles, and light bunkers by a combination of fragmentation and blast effects. Land targets may
include buildings, communication/radar vans, parked aircraft, and self-propelled anti-aircraft artillery
(AAA).
The AGM-114N is fitted with a specialized thermobaric metal augmentation charge (MAC) warhead,
designed as a high heat explosive charge.
For further information on the AGM-114(series) Hellfire missile, refer to Airborne Weapons Assembly
Manual, Volume 2, NAVAIR 11-140-6.2-2.

AN/AWW-13 Advanced Data Link Pod

The AN/AWW-13 advanced data-link pod (Figure 3-24) is the communications link between the pilot
and the weapon. The pod is suspended from a standard configured bomb rack. It can be jettisoned in
an emergency.

Figure 3-24 — AN/AWW-13 advanced data-link pod.

3-29
The pod is designed to provide command and control functions to and receive video from a video or
imaging infrared (IIR) guided weapon. The missile data-link transmitter sends the seeker scene back
to the AWW-13 data link pod on the controlling aircraft. The AWW-13 pod then relays the scene up to
the cockpit video display. The weapon can be controlled, through command RF, by either the
launching aircraft or a remotely stationed pod-equipped aircraft. The pod-equipped aircraft can
monitor the flight of a weapon toward a target, change the target lock-on point, or select a different
target. In this way, the pod provides two-way data link communication between aircraft and weapon.
In addition, the pod contains an 8-millimeter video cassette recorder that records the video
transmitted by the weapon all the way to impact on the target. The recording allows low-cost weapon
performance monitoring, which can be played back for mission evaluation or for training purposes.

GUIDED MISSILE LAUNCHERS

Guided missile launchers are electro-mechanical devices designed to carry, launch, and in some
cases guide a missile during its first few inches of travel. The physical, mechanical, and functional
requirements vary for each particular missile-to-aircraft configuration. There are specific missile-to-
launcher applications (Table 3-5) and a brief description of each type of missile launcher discussed in
the following paragraphs.
Table 3-5 — Missile Launcher Application
LAUNCHER MISSILE TYPE AIRCRAFT
LAU-7B/A AIM-9M Sidewinder (except AIM-9X) and instrument pods Rail F/A-18
LAU-7C/A AIM-9M Sidewinder (except AIM-9X) and instrument pods Rail AH-1W, AH-
1Z
LAU-7D/A AIM-9X Sidewinder Rail F/A-18
LAU-7E/A AIM-9X Sidewinder Rail F/A-18
LAU-7F/A AIM-9X Sidewinder Rail F/A-18
LAU- AIM-7 Sparrow, AIM-9 Sidewinder, AIM-120 AMRAAM Rail F/A-18
115(series)
LAU- AIM-7 Sparrow, AIM-120 AMRAAM Ejector F/A-18
116(series)
LAU- AGM-65 Maverick Rail F/A-18, P-3
117(V)2/A
LAU- AGM-88 HARM Rail EA-6B, F/A-
118(V)1/A 18
LAU- AIM-9 Sidewinder, AIM-120 AMRAAM, and instrument Rail F/A-18
127(series) pods
LAU-147/A AIM-9X Sidewinder, AIM-120 AMRAAM Rail F-35
LAU-148/A AIM-120 AMRAAM Rail F-35
LAU-151/A AIM-9X Sidewinder Rail F-35

3-30
 Table 3-5 — Missile Launcher Application (continued)
LAUNCHER MISSILE TYPE AIRCRAFT
M272 AGM-114 Hellfire Rail AH-1
M279 AGM-114 Hellfire Rail AH-1
M299 AGM-114 Hellfire Rail AH-1, H-60

LAU-7(Series) Guided Missile Launcher

The LAU-7(series) guided missile launcher (Figure 3-25) is a reusable launcher that provides a
complete launching system for use with the AIM-9 Sidewinder missiles. The technical characteristics
can be found in (Table 3-6).

Figure 3-25 — LAU-7/A(series) guided missile launcher.

3-31
 Table 3-6 — LAU-7(Series) Technical Characteristics
CHARACTERISTIC APPROXIMATE VALUE
Length (overall) 111 inches
Height (overall) 5.4 inches
Width (overall) 4.187 inches
Weight (overall)
LAU-7B/A-1, LAU-7D/A 90 pounds (Approximate)
LAU-7C/A and LAU-7E/A 92 pounds (Approximate)
LAU-7F/A 93.2 pounds (Approximate)
Mounting Bolts (on center) 30.0 inches
Power Supply 8 to 11 pounds
Rails (clearance) 0.290 inches
Power Requirements
Volts alternating current (vac) 115 vac, 400 hertz (Hz),
Volts direct current Single Phase
28 vdc, 10 amperes
Nitrogen Receiver Assembly
(LAU-7B/A-1, LAU-7D/A)
Length 52 inches
Outside Diameter 3.5 inches
Weight (charged to approx. 3,200 psig) 17 pounds
Weight (empty) 12 pounds
Volume 360 cubic inches
PAGS
(LAU-7C/A, LAU-7E/A, LAU-7F/A)
Length 47.5 inches (Approximate)
Outside Diameter 3.875 inches (Approximate)
Weight 21.1 pounds (Approximate)
Working Pressure Charged to 1,800 to 3,900 pound
per square inch gage (psig)
Relief Valve Rating 4,500 to 5,000 psig

The launcher (Figure 3-26) has four major assemblies—the housing assembly, mechanism assembly,
power supply, and nitrogen receiver assembly/bottle ballast or Pure Air Generating System (PAGS).

3-32
 Figure 3-26 — LAU-7(series) guided missile launcher (exploded view).

Housing Assembly
The housing assembly is the main structural member of the launcher. It is an extruded, machined
aluminum member that provides structural rigidity to the launcher and includes provisions for
mounting all other assemblies.

Forward Fairing Assembly

The forward fairing assembly is an aluminum casting that mounts to the forward end of the housing to
provide an aerodynamic nose to the front of the launcher. It has two doors that are spring-loaded that
provide access to the umbilical hook support assembly. The LAU-7F/A forward fairing is a one-piece
fairing.

3-33
Umbilical Hook Support Assembly
The umbilical hook support assembly is a spring-loaded mechanism with spring steel side plates that
slip over a roll pin in the missile umbilical block, holding the umbilical hook support assembly down. At
missile launch, the mechanism snaps up, retracting the sheared end of the umbilical cable into the
launcher to prevent interference with the missile hangers.

Fin Retainer Assemblies

Two fin retainer assemblies are mounted to the forward end of the housing assembly beneath the
forward fairing assembly. The fin retainer snaps over the missile fins to prevent movement during
captive flight on the AIM-9M(series) missile. The fin retainers are not used when an AIM-9X(series)
missile is loaded on the launcher.

Snubber Fitting, Aft Fairing Assembly, and Aft Latch Assembly

The aft snubber mount fitting assembly, aft snubber assembly, and aft fairing latch are assembled
together as a group and mounted to the aft end of the housing assembly. On the LAU-7F/A launcher,
the aft fairing assembly and aft latch assembly are separate assemblies. When the aft fairing latch
assembly is in the open position, the nitrogen receiver assembly or the PAGS can be accessed. It
also releases the aft snubbers to allow missile loading. When in the closed position, it allows the
snubbers to spring over the aft missile hanger, locking it in place.

Mechanism Assembly
The mechanism assembly is an electro-mechanical device that holds the missile for takeoffs and
landings and releases the missile for launching. It mounts in the center of the housing assembly
forward of the nitrogen receiver assembly or PAGS.

Power Supply
One power supply is available for use in the launcher. The power supply is a self-contained single-
phase unit with connectors on each end. The aft connector links the power supply and the mechanism
assembly. The forward connector provides the connection to the missile's umbilical cable.

Nitrogen Receiver Assembly

The nitrogen receiver assembly stores the high-pressure nitrogen or air used to cool the missile's IR
detector in the guidance system, except for the AIM-9X which uses an internal cryoengine for cooling.
The nitrogen receiver assembly mounts in the aft section of the launcher subassembly and is secured
in place by a band-type retention assembly. All nitrogen receiver assemblies contain a charging valve
(for refilling), relief valve, and a pressure indicator mounted in the aft end of the cylinder (Figure 3-27).
The pressure indicator is color coded to ensure correct readings.

3-34
 Figure 3-27 — Nitrogen receiver assembly.

Pure Air Generating System

The PAGS is a modular constructed unit which mounts into the aft fairing of the launcher
subassembly. The PAGS compresses and filters ambient air to generate high-pressure pure air used
to cool the missile IR detector in the guidance system. The PAGS connects to the PAGS interface
harness assembly.
Two configurations of the PAGS exist; HiPPAG and Marotta Pure Air Compression Technologies (M-
PACT). Both configurations are completely interchangeable; however, slight variations exist between
the two.
For further information on the LAU-7(series) guided missile launcher, refer to Organizational and
Intermediate Level Maintenance with Illustrated Parts Breakdown Aircraft Guided Missile Launcher,
LAU-7(series), NAVAIR 11-75A-54.

LAU-115(Series) Guided Missile Launcher

The LAU-115(series) guided missile launcher (Figure 3-28) is a reusable launcher. It completes the
F/A- 18 aircraft suspension and launching system for the AIM-7(series) Sparrow, AIM-9(series)
Sidewinder, and AIM-120(series) AMRAAM missiles. The technical characteristics can be found in
(Table 3-7).
The forward T-slot on the bottom of the launcher, as well as the external rail flanges provide a guide
and support for AIM-7 carriage and launch. The launcher can be configured with LAU-7 or LAU-127
launchers bolted on each side to carry AIM-9(series) or AIM-120(series) missiles.
The detent cam mechanism has a forward restraint detent and aft restraint. The forward restraint
detent is spring loaded down and acts as a stop during missile loading. During normal missile firing,
the force created by the missile motor overcomes forward restraint detent spring tension, and permits
the missile button to push the forward restraint detent up. The mechanical lock prevents the forward
restraint detent from being pushed up during sudden deceleration. An electrical solenoid activated at
trigger pull releases the lock.

3-35
 Figure 3-28 — LAU-115(series) guided missile launcher.

Table 3-7 — LAU-115 Technical Characteristics

CHARACTERISTIC APPROXIMATE VALUE
Length 82 inches
Height 12 inches
Width 7.5 inches
Weight 117 Pounds (LAU-115C/A Steel Insert)
133 Pounds (LAU-115C/A Steel Rail)
133 Pounds (LAU-115 D/A Steel Rail)
The aft restraint is spring loaded to the down position and retains the missile during all periods of
airplane acceleration. The aft restraint has an indicator that is flush with launcher skin when the aft
restraint keeper is down or in latched position. The aft restraint indicator has a spring-loaded positive
latch mechanism to secure the aft restraint in down or latched position. The spring-loaded latch
mechanism must be manually released before loading or down loading of missile. If, during missile
loading, the missile button is not in its maximum forward position, the indicator extends past the
launcher skin and indicates the missile is not correctly latched in position.
During loading, the missile button slides past the aft restraint, stopping when contact is made with the
forward restraint detent. During unloading, the sway brace holdback detent flag is unlocked and the
snubbers are disengaged. The aft restraint detent pin is then retracted by turning the aft restraint
release wrench points, accessible from either side of the launcher.
The forward internal grooves of the rail provide a guide and support for the forward missile-mounting
button. The external rail flanges are a guide for the aft missile suspension lugs during firing. The aft
section of the rail consists of a removable fitting that provides mounting for aft missile suspension
lugs.
For further information on the LAU-115(series) guided missile launcher, refer to the Intermediate
Level Maintenance with Illustrated Parts Breakdown Aircraft Guided Missile Launcher, LAU-115C/A
and LAU-115D/A, NAVAIR 11-75A-115.

3-36
LAU-116(Series) Guided Missile Launcher
The LAU-116(series) guided missile launcher (Figure 3-29) is a reusable launcher of the F/A-18
aircraft suspension and launching system for the AIM-7(series) Sparrow and AIM-120(series)
AMRAAM missiles. The technical characteristics can be found in (Table 3-8).

Figure 3-29—LAU-116(series) guided missile launcher.

Table 3-8 — LAU-116 Technical Characteristics

CHARACTERISTIC APPROXIMATE VALUE
Length 44 inches
Height 16 inches
Width 9.5 inches
Weight 65 pounds
Cartridges (2) Gas Generating
The launchers are mounted internally in the fuselage structure. They are self-contained, gas-operated
mechanisms, capable of suspending and ejecting the AIM-7(series) Sparrow and AIM-120(series)
AMRAAM missiles. Two impulse cartridges—ignited by an electrical impulse applied by the missile-
firing switch—supply ejection force. The rapidly expanding gases actuate the ejector pistons and
release the missile from the launcher. Power is applied to the missile guidance control system through
the umbilical plug. An actuator-operated safety device prevents inadvertent firing of launcher
cartridges.
For further information on the LAU-116(series) guided missile launcher, refer to the Intermediate
Level Maintenance with Illustrated Parts Breakdown Aircraft Guided Missile Launcher, LAU-116
Series, NAVAIR 11-75A-116.

3-37
LAU-117(V) 2/A Guided Missile Launcher
The LAU-117(V)2/A guided missile launcher (Figure 3-24) is a reusable launcher that completes the
F/A- 18 and P-3 aircraft suspension and launching system for the Maverick, AGM-65, air-to-ground
missile. The technical characteristics can be found in (Table 3-9).

Figure 3-30—LAU-117(V)2/A guided missile launcher.

Table 3-9 — LAU-117 Technical Characteristics

CHARACTERISTIC APPROXIMATE VALUE
Length 94 inches max
Width 11 inches max
Height 11 inches max
Weight 135 pounds
The mechanical structure of the launcher is built around a box-section channel or rail, which supports
the missile. The missile hooks contact the rail surfaces or tracks, which are hard, anodized metal
treated with a dry lubricant. Two lug fittings and lugs provide mechanical interface with the bomb rack
and provide smooth surfaces for the bomb rack sway braces. The missile restraint device (MRD) is
recessed into the rail channel between the lug fittings. A rail stop on one side of the rail track engages
the missile aft hook to prevent damage to the umbilical connector during loading. The rear of the rail
channel provides mounting for the launcher electronic assembly (LEA) and the umbilical engaging
assembly. The LEA houses all electronic circuitry. Fairings at the front of the rail and the rear of the
LEA provide aerodynamic surfaces. Special built-in support brackets and bushings are provided for
the Navy's single hoist ordnance loading system (SHOLS). The launcher can be suspended from the
BRU-32 bomb rack on the inboard and outboard pylons. An electrically operated safety device
prevents inadvertent loss of the missile.
For further information on the LAU-117 guided missile launcher, refer to the Intermediate Level
Maintenance with Illustrated Parts Breakdown Aircraft Guided Missile Launcher, LAU-117, NAVAIR
11-75A-79.

3-38
LAU-118(V) 1/A Guided Missile Launcher
The LAU-118(V)1/A guided missile launcher (Figure 3-31) is a reusable launcher that completes the
F/A-18 and EA-6B aircraft suspension and launching system for the HARM, AGM-88, air-to-ground
guided missile. The technical characteristics can be found in Table 3-10.

Figure 3-31 — LAU-118(V) 1/A guided missile launcher.

The launcher consists of the launcher housing assembly, forward and aft fairing assemblies, forward
and aft launcher tracks, suspension lugs, and internal electrical components. The LAU-118 is
suspended from the BRU-32 bomb rack on the inboard and outboard pylons. An electrically operated
retention mechanism prevents inadvertent loss of the missile.
For further information on the LAU-118 guided missile launcher, refer to Intermediate Level
Maintenance with Illustrated Parts Breakdown Aircraft Guided Missile Launcher, LAU-118, NAVAIR
11-75A-78.
Table 3-10 — LAU-118 Technical Characteristics
CHARACTERISTIC APPROXIMATE VALUE
Length 69.5 inches
Width 12.0 inches
Height 8.0 inches
Weight 95 - 105 pounds
Center of Gravity 19.5 inches aft of the center of the forward
suspension lug
Operating Voltage Requirements 115 vac, 400 Hz 3 phase, 28 vdc

3-39
LAU-127(series)
Guided Missile
Launcher
The LAU-127(series)
guided missile launcher
(Figure 3-32) is designed
to carry and launch the
AIM-9(series) Sidewinder
and AIM-120(series)
AMRAAM missiles. The
technical characteristics
can be found in Table 3-
11.

Figure 3-32 — LAU-127(series) guided missile launcher.

Table 3-11 — LAU-127 Technical Characteristics

CHARACTERISTIC APPROXIMATE VALUE
Height 6.09 inches
Width 3.73 inches
6.43 inches (at retainer assembly)
Length (LAU-127D/A) 107.75 inches
Length (LAU-127E/A) 107.75 inches
Length (LAU-127F/A) 118.75 inches
Weight (LAU-127D/A) 95.9 pounds max (with full nitrogen receiver)
Weight (LAU-127E/A) 102.5 pounds max (with full nitrogen receiver)
101 pounds maximum (with bottle ballast)

3-40
 Table 3-11 — LAU-127 Technical Characteristics (continued)
CHARACTERISTIC APPROXIMATE VALUE
Weight (LAU-127F/A) 117.5 pounds max (with PAGS)
CENTER OF GRAVITY
(LAU-127D/A and LAU-127E/A) 13.16 ± 2.00 (aft from center of forward internal wrenching bolt)
(LAU-127F/A) 16.05 ± 1.00 (aft from center of forward internal wrenching bolt)
ELECTRICAL
Volts direct current +28 (+8, -10) Vdc
Volts alternating current 115 Vac, 400 Hz, 3-phase
PAGS ASSEMBLY
Length 36.71 inches
Weight 19.55 pounds
Outside diameter
Working pressure Charged to 1,800 to 3,900 psig
Relief valve rating 4,500 to 5,000 psig
Electrical requirements 115 Vac, 400Hz Nominal, 28 Vdc Nominal
The launcher is a dual rail launcher that provides a continuous inner rail to accept the three AIM-9
hangers and the AIM-120 forward and aft hangers, and an outer rail which accepts the AIM-120
center hanger.
The launcher contains a mechanical forward detent mechanism that is held down by spring tension
and mechanically locked down by a dc solenoid actuated in flight lock (IFL). The IFL is unlocked by
aircraft generated signals. When unlocked, the forward detent is free to rotate upwards, allowing the
missile to leave the launcher when the missile motor force reaches a forward load between 700 and
1,500 pounds. The aft detent, when engaged, prevents the missile from sliding backwards off the
launcher. The aft detent is mechanically linked to the forward dampeners to provide concurrent lock
and release for missile loading or unloading.
The LAU-127F/A incorporates the PAGS in place of the nitrogen receiver assembly. The PAGS is a
modular constructed unit which mounts into the aft fairing of the launcher subassembly. The PAGS
compresses and filters ambient air to generate high-pressure pure air used to cool the missile IR
detector in the guidance system. The PAGS connects to the PAGS interface harness assembly.
Two configurations of the PAGS exist; HiPPAG and M-PACT. Both configurations are completely
interchangeable; however, slight variations exist between the two.
For further information on the LAU-127(series) guided missile launcher, refer to Intermediate Level
Maintenance with Illustrated Parts Breakdown Aircraft Guided Missile Launcher, LAU-127 Series,
NAVAIR 11-75A-514.

M272 and M279 Hellfire(Series) Guided Missile Launchers

The M272 and M279 Hellfire(series) guided missile launchers (Figure 3-33) are designed to carry and
launch the AGM-114(series) Hellfire missiles. The technical characteristics can be found in Table 3-
12.
3-41
Figure 3-33 — Hellfire(series) guided missile launcher.
3-42
The M272 launcher provides a stable structure capable of carrying and launching one to four AGM-
114(series) Hellfire Surface Attack Guided Missiles. The M279 launcher provides a stable structure
capable of carrying and launching one or two AGM-114(series) Hellfire missiles. The M299 launcher
adds the capability to fire one to four MIL-STD-1760 capable AGM-114(series) Hellfire missiles.
Table 3-12 — Hellfire(Series) Launcher Technical Characteristics
M299 LAUNCHER
Length 59.4 inches
Width 22 inches
Height 21.5 inches
Weight 145 pounds
Voltage 115 V, single phase, 400 Hz, 28 vdc, 30 amperes
M272 LAUNCHER
Length 59.4 inches
Width 22 inches
Height 21.5 inches
Weight 139 pounds
Voltage 115 V, single phase, 400 Hz, 28 vdc, 30 amperes
M279 LAUNCHER
Length 59.4 inches
Width 22 inches
Height 10 inches
Weight 95 pounds
Voltage 115 V, single phase, 400 Hz, 28 vdc, 30 amperes
The launcher is attached to the aircraft by a bomb-rack-equipped pylon on an aircraft weapons
station. The launcher is suspended from the bomb rack by two hooks that engage the suspension
lugs on the top of the launcher hardback. Sway braces on the bomb rack are adjusted against the
launcher hardback to prevent lateral movement of the launcher.
The aircraft wiring harness provides the electrical connection from the aircraft to the launcher. The
cable runs from the aircraft pylon to the umbilical connector on the top of the Electronic Command
Signal Programmer (ECSP) or LEA and is part of the aircraft wiring harness. The electrical
connection to the missile is provided via the ECSP or LEA to the launcher rail wiring harnesses.
When the missile is loaded onto the launcher rail, the missile umbilical connectors engage the
launcher umbilical connectors.
The missile is restrained in position by the launcher holdback release mechanism. The holdback
release mechanism is overcome during the launch sequence by missile thrust, allowing the missile to
move forward and separate from the launcher. The launcher umbilical connector assemblies are
protected by the launcher umbilical connector doors, which are automatically pushed open by the
missile just prior to connector engagement. During launch, the launcher umbilical connector doors
close, protecting the launcher umbilical connectors from the rocket motor blast.
3-43
For further information on the Hellfire(series) guided missile launchers, refer to Aircraft Guided Missile
Launcher, M272 and M279, NAVAIR 11-75A-272 or Organizational and Intermediate Level
Maintenance with Illustrated Parts Breakdown Aircraft Guided Missile Launcher, M299, NAVAIR 11-
75A-299.

ADU-299(Series) Missile Launcher Adapter

The ADU-299(series) missile launcher adapter (Figure 3-34) is used to adapt the LAU-7 missile
launcher, providing AIM-9(series) missile capabilities. The technical characteristics can be found in
Table 3-14.

Figure 3-34 — ADU-299(series) missile launcher adapter.

Table 3-13 — ADU-299(Series) Missile Launcher Adapter Technical Characteristics

CHARACTERISTIC APPROXIMATE VALUE
Length 48-5/8 inches
Weight
14 inch suspension 23.6 pounds
30 inch suspension 24.3 pounds
Overall Width 11.25 inches
Type of racks designed for use with (ADU- BRU-20, BRU-21, BRU-22, BRU-23, BRU-36,
299A/A) BRU-59, Talley Rack
Type of racks designed for use with (ADU- AERO 7
299B/A)
Type aircraft used with (ADU-299B/A) EA-6B

Equipment Carried (ADU-299A/A) LAU-7 with AIM-9 Missile, Instrumentation

Packages
Equipment Carried (ADU-299B/A) LAU-7 with Instrumentation Packages

3-44
Mechanical attachment of the adapter to the ejector rack is provided by two suspension lugs on 30-inch
centers. Mechanical attachment of the adapter to the LAU-7 launcher is provided by two swivel nuts
positioned on 30-inch centers to mate with the launcher bolts. When the launcher and adapters are
electrically connected and mechanically mated, an adapter harness from the wing pylon to the aft end
of the adapter supplies electrical power.
For further information on the ADU-299(series) missile launcher adapter, refer to Intermediate Level
Maintenance with Illustrated Parts Breakdown Adapter Assembly, ADU-299 Series, NAVAIR 11-75A-
59.

GUIDED MISSILE HANDLING

The establishment of the AUR concept simplified the handling of guided missiles at the user level.
An AUR missile is defined as either:
x A missile which is provided to the fleet as a complete assembly in its end item configuration; or
x A missile which is provided as a complete assembly in its end item configuration, but requires
wing and/or fin installation by the user due to container constraints
The AUR concept has improved the reliability, availability, and logistics support of current guided
missiles used by fleet activities.

Naval Munitions Command/Naval Weapons Station/Naval Airborne Weapons

Maintenance Unit
The service life or serviceable in service time (SIST) of an AUR missile begins at a Naval Weapons
Station (NAVWEPSTA) or Naval Airborne Weapons Maintenance Unit (NAWMU). The NAVWEPSTA
receives the individual components of a missile from the manufacturer and assembles the
components to make up a complete round, performing the required operational checks and tests. The
AUR is then packed into a missile container and is stored as ready for issue (RFI). The missile
logbook is also packed inside the missile container. The missile logbook is compiled from the
operational records that are received with each component. The logbook remains with the missile
until the missile is either expended (fired) or disassembled.
When a fleet-issued AUR missile becomes non-RFI because the maintenance due date (MDD) is
due, service life expires, or malfunction occurs, it is returned to a maintenance facility for repair or
recertification. Missiles that are organizational to depot level maintenance (O to D) are shipped
directly to the respective depot.
For other missiles, in the Pacific Fleet, the AUR missile can be turned in to a commander, fleet
activity, naval air station, Marine Corps air station, or naval air facility for shipment to Naval Munitions
Command (NMC) East Asia division (EAD) Pearl Harbor, Hawaii, or NMC EAD Guam for further
transfer to NAWMU-1 for repair and recertification.
If the required repair actions are beyond the capability of NAWMU-1, the AUR missile is returned to a
west coast NMC NAVWPNSTA.
In the Pacific Fleet, the AUR missile may also be returned directly from the fleet unit to a continental
U.S. NMC NAVWPNSTA.
In the Atlantic Fleet, all non-RFI AUR missiles are returned directly to a continental U.S. NMC
NAVWPNSTA.
The AUR missiles returned to a maintenance facility are inspected, tested, and repaired in
accordance with the applicable approved procedures. Repaired and recertified AUR missiles are
3-45
again ready for fleet issue. The AUR missiles which fail testing at an NAWMU or Naval Weapons
Station are disassembled (except those under warranty) and the faulty sections and components are
transferred to a designated overhaul point for repair.
Depot-repaired AUR missiles are shipped directly from the vendor to a storage point where they are
entered into the Naval Supply System and are ready for fleet issue. Depot-repaired sections or
components are returned to an NAWMU or NAVWEPSTA where they will be available for missile
maintenance.
The NAWMU is assigned to areas close to overseas operating forces preventing the time-consuming
and costly procedure of shipping non-RFI missiles from overseas operating areas back to the U.S. for
component replacement or scheduled checks and tests. This quick turnaround time increases missile
availability to deployed operating units in the fleet.

Afloat
Under the AUR concept, missiles are received aboard ship in containers completely assembled
except for the wings and fins. Depending upon the particular missile and the type of container
involved the wings and fins may or may not be shipped in the same container as the missile. In some
cases, the wings and fins are shipped in separate containers that contain either one complete set of
wings and fins (four wings and four fins) or two sets of wings and fins (eight wings and eight fins).
When containerized missiles, wings, and fins are received aboard ship, the containers are inspected
for any obvious damage. When the inspection reveals a damaged container, it must be sent to the
decanning area to be opened for inspection of the missile or wings and fins. When a container,
missile, or wings and fins do not meet the inspection criteria listed in the appropriate technical
manual, they must be tagged non-RFI and kept separate from RFI material for later turn-in. Missiles,
wings, and fins can be either deep stowed in magazines still in their sealed containers, or they can be
decanned, inspected, and stowed in ready-service magazines or missile magazines. Missiles that are
deep stowed in their sealed containers can be off-loaded as RFI.
When missiles are decanned for ready service, the missile logbooks are removed from the empty
containers and turned in to the Aviation Weapons Movement Control Station (AWMCS), also known
as Aviation Ordnance Control Center (AOCC), where they are kept on file until the missile is fired
(expended) or off-loaded.
Upon missile expenditure the missile logbook will be destroyed by the intermediate maintenance
activity or Weapons Department in a manner to prevent reconstruction of its contents. In the event the
missile is the subject of a discrepancy report; i.e. Conventional Ordnance Deficiency Report (CODR),
Explosive Mishap Report (EMR), the logbook will be retained until closing action is completed and the
FST determines the logbook is not required. Activities that receive incomplete or missing air-launched
missile logbooks and records, or receive an air-launched missile without a log book or records, should
contact the originating NAWMU or NAVWPNSTA for the logbook. Missing missile log books can be
obtained by downloading them directly from the All Weapons Information System (AWIS) website by
personnel with approved access for their type/model/series missile.

Ashore
Guided missile handling functions for naval air stations or shore-based squadrons are the same as
shipboard functions except for the obvious difference in working environments. Space limitations are
not as critical ashore and allow for an increase in handling capability.

3-46
Other details of missile handling, missile testing, supply procedures, missiles firing reports, quality
deficiency reports, and loading procedures, are discussed in the appropriate chapters throughout this
manual.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Safety precautions have been established for each particular type of missile. All missile handling must
be carried out according to the approved local safety regulations of the ship, installation, or wherever
the work is being done. All of the safety precautions cannot be discussed in this chapter. However,
some of the general safety precautions are as follows:
x Observe detailed precautions; follow the specific instructions in the manual issued for each
particular type of aircraft
x Keep work areas clear of obstructions, loose cables, hoses, and any unneeded equipment
during missile assembly and testing; permit only assigned personnel engaged in the work in
the area or vicinity of the missile
x Use only the authorized handling equipment with any missile, or any missile section,
component, or related parts, including shipping crates and containers
x Make sure that all electrical equipment used in missile handling operations is adequately
shielded and grounded; avoid injury from sharp edges often present on nose assemblies,
wings, and fins; after assembly, cover all sharp edges with protective covers
x Use tools specified in the missile manual when uncrating missile components and for
assembling missiles; do not force any unit; if it does not fit or function properly, determine the
cause and correct it before proceeding
x Before connecting igniters in missile motors, check the firing leads for stray or induced
voltages and for static charges
x Before handling any piece of ordnance material, inspect the safety device to be sure that it is in
a SAFE position; if not, the unit must be made safe by experienced personnel before further
work is performed
x When testing for leaks in a gas container, use soapy water
x When cleaning hydraulic units, use only the cleaning solvents or other materials specified in
the particular missile publication
x Keep your hands and other parts of your body clear of exhaust vents when working with test
equipment that uses high pneumatic pressure
x When any hydraulic unit is disassembled for inspection or repair, make sure that the
workbench is thoroughly cleaned of dirt and metal filings
x Missile ordnance materials, including rocket motors, igniters, fuzes, warheads, and in some
cases boosters or auxiliary rockets, are potentially dangerous; handle each unit according to
the specific procedures authorized in the appropriate publication
x Load forward-firing ordnance in authorized loading areas only, with aircraft facing uninhabited
areas
x When loading/handling forward-firing ordnance, avoid working in front or behind the ordnance

3-47
 End of Chapter 3
Air-Launched Guided Missiles and Guided Missile Launchers
Review Questions
3-1. Long-range missiles are usually capable of traveling what minimum number of miles?

A. 100
B. 200
C. 300
D. 400

3-2. Speeds from Mach 0.8 to Mach 1.2 are referred to by what term?

A. Hypersonic
B. Subsonic
C. Supersonic
D. Transonic

3-3. Speeds above Mach 5.0 are referred to by what term?

A. Hypersonic
B. Subsonic
C. Supersonic
D. Transonic

3-4. A service missile is usually referred to as what type of missile?

A. Dummy
B. Practice
C. Tactical
D. Training

3-5. A training missile is classified as what type of missile?

A. Nonactive
B. Nonservice
C. Tactical
D. Service

3-6. What missile designator is assigned to an air-launched, aerial intercept missile in the 9th
design and the 13th modification?

A. AGM-91
B. AGM-9B
C. AIM-9G
D. AIM-9M

3-48
3-7. Which of the following descriptions identify the classifications of missile homing systems?

A. Active, Semiactive, and Passive

B. Radar, Infrared, and thermal
C. Semiactive, radar reflection, and thermal
D. Target illumination, infrared rays, and radar

3-8. Which of the following statements describes an AIM-7M guided missile?

A. Air-to-ground missile
B. Launched from an interceptor aircraft
C. Surface launched missile
D. Transonic missile

3-9. In an AIM-7M guided missile, the warhead is between what two assemblies?

A. Flight control section and autopilot

B. Hydraulic group and the autopilot
C. Target seeker and autopilot
D. Target seeker and flight control section

3-10. What section of a Harpoon missile contains the missile battery?

A. Control
B. Guidance
C. Sustainer
D. Warhead

3-11. An AIM-9M Sidewinder guided missile has what number of major components?

A. Five
B. Seven
C. Eight
D. Nine

3-12. The control fins should be attached to what section of a Sidewinder guided missile?

A. Warhead
B. Rocket motor
C. Target detector
D. Guidance and control

3-13. What modification of a Mark 36 rocket motor is equipped with a safe-arm ignition assembly?

A. Mod 6
B. Mod 7
C. Mod 8
D. Mod 9

3-49
3-14. What tool should be used to reposition the safe-arm ignition assembly of a Mark 36
Modification 8 rocket motor?

A. Hex-head T-handle
B. Screwdriver
C. Arming key
D. Allen wrench

3-15. An AGM-88C guided missile is designed to operate in what total number of modes?

A. One
B. Two
C. Three
D. Four

3-16. The designation AGM-65E identifies what missile?

A. Harpoon
B. Hellfire
C. Maverick
D. Sidewinder

3-17. Which of the following items are the major assemblies of the LAU-7 guided missile launcher?

A. Housing, nitrogen receiver, power supply, and electrical converter

B. Housing, mechanism, power supply, and nitrogen receiver
C. Housing, nitrogen receiver, and forward fairing
D. Housing, mechanism, and umbilical hook support

3-18. Which of the following guided missile launchers is a complete launching system used with
AIM-9(series) missiles?

A. LAU-7
B. LAU-9
C. LAU-116
D. LAU-118

3-19. In the LAU-7 guided missile launcher, the missile's infrared detector is cooled by what means?

A. Ram air turbine

B. Ambient air
C. Nitrogen receiver
D. Induction air

3-20. What two distinct interface configurations are used for the AIM-9X missile?

A. Digital and Interface

B. Analog and active
C. Digital and analog
D. Interface and active
3-50
3-21. What launchers are capable of carrying and launching the AIM-9X missile?

A. LAU-7 and LAU-118

B. LAU-7 and LAU-127
C. LAU-115 and LAU-117
D. LAU-117 and LAU-118

3-22. What missile is an antiarmor terminal homing weapon that uses a variety of warhead
configurations, including shaped charge, blast fragmentation, and thermobaric?

A. AGM-65
B. AGM-88
C. AGM-114
D. AGM-154

3-23. All versions of Hellfire missiles in the Navy and Marine Corps inventory are carried on what
type of guided missile launcher?

A. ADU-299 and LAU-114

B. LAU-117 and LAU-118
C. LAU-118 and LAU-127
D. M-272 and M-299

3-24. What reusable missile launcher completes the F/A-18 and P-3 aircraft suspension and
launching system for the AGM-65 Maverick missile?

A. LAU-7
B. LAU-115
C. LAU-116
D. LAU-117

3-51
 CHAPTER 4
PYROTECHNICS
Pyrotechnics are items that produce their effect by burning, and are consumed in the process.
Pyrotechnics, as used in the military, are items that produce a bright light for illumination or colored
lights or smoke for signaling and decoying.
All Navy pyrotechnic devices contain combustible chemicals. When ignited, these chemicals generate
a flame, flash, infrared (IR) radiation, smoke, sound display, or combinations of these effects for many
purposes. Some of these effects are visual and audible signaling, area and target illumination,
reference-point marking, indication of practice weapon impact or fuze action, tracking, decoying,
simulating, and smoke-screen generation.
Dye-marking devices are pyrotechnics and screening devices, even though their display is not the
product of combustion. They are classed as pyrotechnic or screening devices because their end
purposes are quite similar to those of the true pyrotechnic. Dye-marking devices are used to establish
reference points on the surface of the water. In some cases, the dye is spread on the surface by
explosive means.
Pyrotechnics generally function by means of an ignition train, similar to the explosive train of high-
explosive ammunition.
For further information on pyrotechnics, you should refer to Pyrotechnic, Screening, Marking, and
Countermeasure Devices, Naval Sea Systems Command (NAVSEA) SW050-AB-MMA-010/Naval Air
Systems Command (NAVAIR) 11-15-7.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
When you have completed this chapter, you will be able to do the following:
1. Identify the purpose of hand-manipulated signaling devices.
2. Describe the purpose of area and target illuminating devices.
3. Describe the characteristics of aircraft-launched smoke and flame marking devices.
4. Recognize the methods used to launch functional aircraft-launched smoke and flame marking
devices.
5. Identify the purpose of decoy devices.
6. Identify the purpose of practice bomb signal cartridges.
7. Recognize the safety precautions to follow when working with pyrotechnics.

HAND-MANIPULATED SIGNALING DEVICES

Hand-manipulated devices are used for various signaling purposes, such as identification,
recognition, warning, and distress.

Pyrotechnic Pistols
Pyrotechnic pistols Mark (Mk) 1 Modification (Mod) 0 (Figure 4-1) and AN-M8 (Figure 4-2) are breech
loaded, double-action, single-shot devices. The barrel is hinged to the frame and held in position by a
breech block or latch pin. All are fired by pulling a pistol-type trigger.
4-1
 Figure 4-1 — Pyrotechnic pistol, Mk 1
Mod 0.

Figure 4-2 — Pyrotechnic pistol,

AN-M8.

These devices are capable of firing various types of marine signaling devices. Refer to Table 4-1.
Table 4-1 — Pyrotechnic Pistols and Projectors
ITEM DEVICES LAUNCHED
Mk 1 Mod 0 Pyrotechnic Pistol Mk 2 Marine Smoke Signal
Mk 1 Marine Illumination Signal
AN-M8 Pyrotechnic Pistol Mk 1 Marine Illumination Signal
Mk 2 Marine Smoke Signal
Mk 50 Decoy Flare
AN-M37A2 through AN-M45A2 Aircraft
Illumination Signal
AN-Mk 1 Marine Location Marker
M11 Aircraft Illumination Signal
Mk 31 Mod 0 Surface Signal Projector Mk 80 Hand-Fired Signal
Mk 110 Hand-Fired Signal

Mk 124 Mod 1 Marine Smoke and Illumination

The Mk 124 Mod 1 signal is intended to be used for either day or night signaling, as appropriate, by
personnel on land or sea. The signal is a one-handed operable device, intended for rescue use. Its
light weight (237 grams) and small size permit it to be carried in life vests or flight suit pockets and on
life rafts. This signal (Figure 4-3) consists of an aluminum case approximately 5.376 inches long and
1.638 inches in diameter; each end is provided with a protective cap.
The case has three raised beads around its circumference on the flare (night) end. These
circumferential beads positively identify the flare end, by the sense of touch, for nighttime use. A label
adhered to the outer surface of the case further identifies the smoke (day) and flare (night) ends and
provides precise instructions for use. The case contains four subassemblies: smoke candle, smoke
igniter, flare candle, and flare igniter. The igniter is one-hand operable and consists of an arming lever
that must be extended before functioning and a mechanism that cocks (then releases) the firing pin.

4-2
For proper functioning of the Mk 124,
extend the lever to the armed position and
then depress it to cock and release the
firing pin. This action allows the striker on
the firing pin to hit the primer, which
ignites the flare candle (night) or the
smoke candle (day) depending on the
display desired. The signal emits an
orange smoke or red flare for
approximately 20 seconds.

Mk 79 Mods 0 and 2 Illumination

Signal Kit
The Mk 79 Mods 0 and 2 signal kit (Figure
4-4) consists of a Mk 31 Mod 0 Surface
Signal Projector, a plastic bandoleer that
holds seven Mk 80 Mod 0 signals, and an
instruction sheet. A 48-inch-long cord is
attached to the bandoleer and signal
projector. The Mk 79 Mod 2 kit contains
Mk 80 Mod 2 signals.
The Mk 80 Mod 0 Hand-Fired Signal
consists of an aluminum case
approximately 2.25 inches long and 0.50 Figure 4-3 — Mk 124 Mod 1 marine smoke and
of an inch in diameter. The case contains illumination signal.
a percussion primer on one end and a steel end cap on the other end. The primer end of the case is
threaded for attachment to the Mk 31 Mod 0 projector. The signal contains 3.0 grams of red
pyrotechnic flare composition, 1.0 gram of black powder ignition composition, and 250 milligrams of
black powder expellant charge. The Mk 80 Mod 2 signal is similar to the Mod 0 design. The Mod 2
design incorporates an expellant charge disc assembly and replaces the black powder ignition charge
with 1.0 gram of red lead/silicon ignition mixture.
In an emergency or during rescue operations, downed aircrew personnel use the distress signaling
device kits. Because it is small and lightweight, personnel can carry it in pockets of flight suits or in life
rafts. The projector aims and fires the signals. Each signal contains a single red star. On activation,
this star is propelled upward to a height of between 250 and 650 feet. The star burns for a minimum
of 4.5 seconds.

NOTE
This first step is very important because the signal is
threaded and screwed into the end of the projector. If you
do not cock the projector before screwing in the signal, the
firing pin could be forced into the primer of the signal,
possibly firing the signal prematurely.

To operate the device, cock the projector firing pin by moving the trigger screw to the bottom of the
vertical slot, and slip the screw to the right so it catches at the top of the angular slot. After cocking
the firing pin, remove a signal from the bandoleer and mate the projector with the signal. While
pointing overhead at a slight angle away from the body, rotate the projector clockwise until the signal
4-3
is seated. While firmly gripping the projector, fire the signal by slipping the trigger screw to the left, out
of the safety slot, and into the firing slot.

Figure 4-4 — Mk 79 Mod 0 and 2 Illumination Signal Kit.

Mk 108 Mod 1 Illumination Signal Kit

The Mk 108 Mod 1 Illumination Signal Kit is intended to be used as a signaling device. The kit is small
and light in weight so that it can be carried in the pocket of a flight suit or on a raft. The signals in this
kit produce a single green star display at a minimum altitude of 250 feet for a minimum time of 4.5
seconds.
This kit consists of one Mk 31 Mod 0 Surface Signal Projector, a plastic bandoleer holding seven Mk
110 Mod 1 Hand-Fired Signals, and an instruction sheet. A 48-inch-long cord is attached to the
bandoleer and signal projector.
The Mk 110 Mod 1 Hand-Fired Signal consists of an aluminum case approximately 2.25 inches long
and 1/2 inch in diameter. The case contains a percussion primer on one end and a steel end cap on
the other end. The primer end of the case is threaded for attachment to the Mk 31 Mod 0 projector.
The signal contains 3.0 grams of green pyrotechnic flare composition, 1.0 gram of red lead/silicon
ignition composition, and 250 milligrams of black powder expellant charge.
4-4
AREA AND TARGET ILLUMINATING DEVICES
The illuminating devices discussed in this chapter are designed to be launched or dropped from
aircraft. Aircraft flares are used to illuminate large areas for bombardment, reconnaissance,
emergency aircraft landing, or other purposes where a high-intensity light is required.

LUU-2B/B Aircraft Parachute Flare

The illumination unit (LUU)-2B/B flare is 36 inches long, 4.9 inches in diameter, and weighs about 30
pounds. The flare is supplied only as an all-up-round (AUR), and may or may not be shipped
assembled with drogue trays for dispenser launch. Drogue trays are no longer used because the
suspension underwing unit (SUU)-44 dispensers are no longer in service. The flare is hand launched
or configured for launching from Improved Multiple Ejector Rack (IMER) or Improved Triple Ejector
Rack (ITER) aircraft bomb racks or from the SUU-25(series) launchers.

Components
The LUU-2B/B flare (Figures 4-5 and 4-6) has four major components:
x Mechanical timer assembly
x Parachute suspension system
x Ignition system
x Case-candle assembly

Figure 4-5 — LUU-2B/B and LUU-19(series) aircraft parachute flare.

The mechanical timer assembly consists of a mechanical timer and related hardware in a Lexan
plastic housing. The mechanical timer is a three-gear timer, powered by a torsional mainspring. A
phosphorescent plastic decal with calibrated markings from 250 to 11,000 feet of fall is located on the
face of the timer cover. A white, plastic dial timer knob is used to set the desired drop distance.
Settings of 250, 500, and 1,000 to 11,000 feet can be selected. A safe setting is also provided.

4-5
 Figure 4-6 — LUU-2B/B and LUU-19(series) aircraft parachute flare cutaway.

An 18-foot diameter cruciform-shaped canopy parachute suspension system is used for good stability
of the LUU-2B/B flare. The riser cables connect the parachute to a bulkhead. The bulkhead separates
the parachute compartment from the remainder of the flare assembly. One cable is attached to an
explosive bolt for parachute dump at candle burnout.
In the ignition system, a lanyard is attached to one of the parachute riser cables. This lanyard is
threaded through the bulkhead and past the candle in an internal raceway along the side of the
aluminum case. The raceway leads to the ignition assembly in the ignition housing near the candle's
face. The lanyard is attached to a triggering mechanism, which consists of the out-of-line igniter (OLI-
2/A). Upon ignition, the firing pin initiates the pyrotechnic firing train.
The case-candle assembly contains a tamp-cast illuminating candle that consists of a composition of
magnesium, sodium nitrate, and a polymer binder. The flare is designed so that the outer aluminum
case is partially consumed during candle burning.

Operation
A lanyard is attached to the timer knob on the flare timer during flare uploading procedures. The
lanyard is also connected to the bomb rack or green arming cap, depending on the launch
configuration. At launch, the lanyard pulls the timer knob out of the timer (requiring approximately 30
pounds of force), starting the clock mechanism. After the preset time (drop distance) ends, the three
locking pawls in the timer assembly release, retracting and releasing the timer assembly. A spring,
located between the timer assembly and the packaged parachute, expels the timer assembly, which,
in turn, initiates removal of the parachute from the flare case. When the cord breaks, it separates the
timer assembly from the parachute. As the parachute system deploys and its main cables are pulled
taut, the ignition lanyard is pulled to activate the ignition system. The ignition lanyard must exert a pull
force in excess of 90 pounds to pull the slider assembly in line. This, in turn, releases the firing pin
against the primer. The primer ignites a propellant wafer that produces sufficient heat for candle
ignition. Pressure buildup during candle ignition blows off the igniter housing, and the candlepower
reaches a nominal value.
Just before candle burnout, the explosive bolt functions to release one of the suspension cables,
causing the parachute to dump.
The LUU-2B/B candle is not ejected from the case on the LUU-2B/B flare. Only the parachute is
removed from the case, which is accomplished by a mechanical timer and spring. Therefore, if the
timer knob should be accidentally pulled during handling when the timer is not on the safe setting, the
timer and release mechanisms can be forcibly hand held onto the flare housing to prevent ejection of
4-6
the timer and release mechanisms. When the timer completes its cycle, the timer mechanism can be
taped on the flare housing and marked for disposal. If the timer is ejected from the flare and a portion
of the parachute comes out of the housing, the parachute can be stuffed back into the housing, taped,
and marked for disposal.
If the parachute should accidentally deploy on the flight deck/line, the opening shock from deck winds
or jet blast is not sufficient to ignite the candle.

LUU-19(Series) Aircraft Parachute Flare

The LUU-19(series) aircraft parachute flare (Figures 4-5 and 4-6) consists of four major
subassemblies: the timer assembly, parachute suspension system, ignition system, and candle
assembly. The timer has a decal with calibrated markings from 250, 500, and 1,000 to 11,000 feet of
fall and a safe position.
The LUU-19(series) is IR spectrum variant of the LUU-2B/B paraflare. The LUU-19(series) has the
same physical dimensions as LUU-2B/B, but weighs 6 pounds more and provides IR illumination of
the target area for night vision goggle- (NVG-) capable aircraft. The flare is compatible with all
standard flare launching systems and can be deployed from aircraft wing-mounted racks and the
SUU-25(series) launchers. It can also be hand launched from an aircraft.
The LUU-19(series) has been developed to illuminate in the near IR region of the spectrum. This
illumination dramatically enhances the capability of the military's night vision devices used for covert
night operations while eliminating the need to use other flares that radiate bright illumination.

AIRCRAFT-LAUNCHED SMOKE AND FLAME MARKING DEVICES

Smoke and flame marking devices are pyrotechnic devices dropped on the ground or on the water's
surface to emit smoke and/or flame. Reference points established by these devices serve a variety of
purposes. They can be used to determine wind direction and approximate velocity, mark the location
on the surface for emergency night landings, establish an initial contact point for continued search for
a submarine, or locate target areas in antisubmarine warfare.

Mk 25 Mods 3 and 4 Marine Location Marker

The Mk 25 Mods 3 and 4 (Figure 4-7) Marine Location Markers (MLMs) are launched from aircraft or
surface craft. They are launched from aircraft to provide day or night reference points for marking the
course of enemy submarines in antisubmarine warfare operations. They are suitable for any type of

Figure 4-7 — Mk 25 Marine Location Marker.

4-7
sea-surface reference-point marking that calls for both smoke and flame for a period of 13.5 to 18.5
minutes. Mods 3 and 4 function identically. The differences include the configuration of the base
assembly arming procedure, the addition of a protective cap on the Mod 4, and the pyrotechnic
scuttling feature of the Mod 4.

Physical Description
The Mk 25 marker consists of a cylindrical outer tube about 18.5 inches long and 3 inches in
diameter. A valve assembly is fitted into the projecting chimney at the marker's nose end. The smoke
and flame are emitted from this opening. At the opposite end is a heavier aluminum base assembly to
which the outer tube is crimped. The heavy base end causes the marker to float in the water with the
chimney out of the water and the base in the water.
Within the base assembly is a Mk 72 Mod 0 seawater-activated battery. The Mk 25 Mod 3 battery is
shielded from water contact by two plugs fitted into 1/2-inch holes on two opposite sides of the base
assembly. A rigid cover (arming plate), held in place by a retainer ring, is recessed into the base end.
An arrow in the center of the arming plate indicates its safe or armed position. The words SAFE and
ARMED are stamped into the base rim. Also, a machined notch in the rim at the armed position helps
during night use.
When the arming plate is in the safe position, it physically blocks the base plugs internally to prevent
them from being accidentally pushed in.
When in the armed position, the arming plate no longer blocks the base plugs, allowing them to be
pushed in at the appropriate time. A black rubber G-ring circles the base assembly approximately 1/4
inch from the crimp, which holds the outer case.
The Mk 25 Mod 4 has an arming cap that is housed at the base under the protective cap. The arming
cap is rotated and removed to arm for deployment. If the marker is not deployed, the arming cap can
be replaced and rotated to safe and the protective cap reinstalled.

Functional Description
To activate the seawater battery, the base plugs on the Mod 3 are pushed in or the arming cap is
rotated and removed on the Mod 4 before the marker is actually launched. An electric squib ignites
the marker, and the seawater-activated battery supplies power.
When the marker enters the water, seawater enters the battery cavity and serves as an electrolyte,
causing the battery to produce a current that activates the squib. The squib ignites the starter mix,
which, in turn, ignites the red phosphorous pyrotechnic composition.
Gas buildup forces the valve assembly from the chimney in the nose, and yellow flame and white
smoke are emitted. Burning time averages 13.5 to 18.5 minutes. Although the Mod 3 marker is
normally used in seawater, it can be used in inland bodies of fresh water by using table salt and
following the procedures outlined in Pyrotechnic, Screening, Marking, and Countermeasure Devices,
NAVSEA SW050-AB-MMA-010/NAVAIR 11-15-7.

Launching Methods
Currently, there are two methods of launching the Mk 25 marker—by hand or by sonobuoy launcher.
To launch the Mod 3 by hand, rotate the base arming plate clockwise to the armed position. Next,
push the base plugs into the battery cavity, located in the marker base, and throw the marker into the
water. It functions as previously discussed. To launch the Mod 4 by hand, remove the protective cap,
rotate and remove the arming cap, and throw the marker into the water.

4-8
If the base plugs (one or both) of a Mod 3 marker are disturbed so that the watertight integrity of the
battery cavity is compromised and the marker is not launched immediately, install the Mk 34 Mod 0
marine marker adapter kit. Use the Mk 34 Mod 0 adapter kit when the marker is launched from a
sonobuoy launcher. The adapter kit fits over the base end of the marker, and, when properly installed,
seals the battery cavity. Install the adapter kit by rotating the marker base arming plate to the armed
position and pushing the base plugs into the battery cavity. Remove the black G-ring, and install the
adaptor kit around the marker base so that the seal plugs on the leaf-spring ends cover the holes into
the battery cavity. Install the U-pin to hold the adapter in place. To hand launch a marker with a Mk 34
adapter kit installed, remove the U-pin and the adapter and throw the marker into the water.
Before launching the Mk 25 marker from a sonobuoy launcher, install a Mk 34 adapter kit (Figure 4-
8) on the Mod 3 marker.
The adapter kit provides a safe environment for the marker until the last possible moment before
launch. Because of the physical difference in size between the Mk 25 marker and the sonobuoy
launch tubes, a sonobuoy launch container (SLC) and spacer assembly (Figure 4-8) is used to launch
the Mk 25 marker from a sonobuoy launcher.

Figure 4-8 — Spacer assembly and sonobuoy launch container.

4-9
Place the Mk 25 Mod 3 marker, with the Mk 34 adapter installed, in the cavity of the split foam spacer
assembly section with the U-pin in the up position. Remove the U-pin and install the other half of the
split foam spacer assembly enclosing the marker.
Remove the MK 25 Mod 4 protective cover and place the marker into the cavity half. The arming cap
is fully depressed and released to expose the word ARM, and the other foam spacer split section is
placed over marker. The foam spacer assembly containing the marker is then installed into the SLC
against the obturator. Foam pads are installed, and the end cap is locked into slots in the SLC,
retaining the assembly inside the SLC. A JAU-22 cartridge is installed in the SLC, and the loaded
SLC is installed in the sonobuoy launcher aboard the aircraft.
To launch the Mk 25 marker, the JAU-22 cartridge is initiated through the aircraft circuitry. It develops
sufficient gas pressure inside the SLC to force off the SLC end cap and expel the foam spacer
assembly containing the Mk 25 marker. Once out of the SLC, the split foam spacer assembly is
separated by the airstream, freeing the marker. The airstream then separates the Mk 34 adapter kit
from the Mod 3 marker, allowing them to fall to the water as separate units. Upon entry into the water,
the marker emits smoke and flame as previously discussed.

Mk 58 Mod 1 Marine Location Marker

The Mk 58 Mod 1 MLM (Figure
4-9) is designed for day or night
use in any condition calling for
long-burning smoke and flame
reference-point marking on the
ocean's surface. In addition to
being used for antisubmarine
warfare, it is used for search and
rescue operations, man-
overboard markings, and as a
target for practice bombing at
sea. The marker produces a
yellow flame and white smoke
for a minimum of 40 minutes and
a maximum of 60 minutes. It is
visible for at least 3 miles under
normal operating conditions.

Physical Description
The Mk 58 Mod 1 MLM consists
of a cylindrical tin can
approximately 21.78 inches long
and 5 inches in diameter. The
can contains two pyrotechnic
candles of a red phosphorus
composition. The ignition end of
the marker has three holes—two
for smoke and flame emission
and one for water to enter the
Mk 72 Mod 1 seawater-activated Figure 4-9 — Mk 58 Mod 1 Marine Location Marker.
battery. Adhesive foil disks
4-10
hermetically seal the two emission holes. A reinforced adhesive foil strip with a rectangular pull ring
hermetically seals the battery cavity hole. The adhesive foil seals are protected during handling and
shipping by a replaceable polyethylene protective cover.

Launching Methods
The Mk 58 Mod 1 marker may be hand launched, externally launched from suitable aircraft bomb
racks by using breakaway suspension bands, or launched from sonobuoy launchers by using an SLC
and the appropriate foam spacer. No matter how the marker is launched, the protective cover, the pull
ring, and reinforced adhesive foil strip over the battery’s cavity are removed.
When the marker is launched from suitable aircraft bomb rack, breakaway suspension bands
(BASBs) are used for external aircraft carriage. The BASBs and marker are secured to the bomb rack
and an arming wire is attached to the pull ring.
Attachment of a lanyard or the use of an arming wire between the pull ring of the marker and the
launching mechanism is to ensure removal of the tape sealing the battery.
When the marker is released from the bomb rack, the arming wire retains the pull ring and removes
the foil strip covering the battery's cavity. When submerged, the Mk 72 Mod 1 battery is activated by
seawater. Current from the battery initiates a Mk 13 electric squib, which ignites the starter
composition of the first pyrotechnic candle.
The composition ignites the starter pellet, which, in turn, ignites the first candle. When the first candle
is nearly burned out, its heat ignites the transfer time fuze, which carries ignition to the second candle
starter composition and initiates the second pyrotechnic candle.

DECOYING DEVICES
Decoy flares are dispensed from launching mechanisms on aircraft. They are fired during evasion
tactics when the aircraft is threatened by enemy heat-seeking missiles.

Infrared Decoys
All IR decoys generate heat and infrared energy, which is used to distract an infrared heat-seeking
missile away from the aircraft. Currently there are two different forms of IR decoys. One is composed
of a pyrotechnic composition that is ignited and burns while falling away from the aircraft. The other is
composed of a pyrophoric metal, shaped like thin wafers, that reacts with oxygen in the air once it is
dispensed. Basically, the material rusts so quickly that it gives off a heat signature, which is in the
sensing spectrum of the missile’s heat-seeking sensor.

MJU-27A/B and MJU-49/B Decoy Devices

The MJU-27A/B and MJU-49/B Decoy Devices are launched from the AN/ALE-39 Countermeasure
Dispensing System (CMDS), and AN/ALE-47 CMDS. A nonconventional pyrophoric metal payload is
utilized in each device to provide a tactical advantage over conventional decoys in some situations.
The MJU-27A/B and MJU-49/B Decoy Devices consist of a cylindrical aluminum case approximately
5.8 inches long and 1.4 inches in diameter (Figure 4-10). The base end of the flare is flanged to a
maximum diameter of 1.495 inches to fit the counterbore in the chamber of the dispenser blocks. The
end of the flare case opposite the flanged base is closed with an aluminum end cap with an O-ring
seal.
These devices consist of three major elements: the payload, piston, and end cap. The payload
consists of pyrophoric metal. The piston is located between the payload and the cartridge retainer.

4-11
The end cap has an O-ring seal for protection of the pyrophoric metal payload. The end cap is
crimped to the cartridge case. This device requires the CCU-136A/A Impulse Cartridge for
functioning.

Figure 4-10 — MJU-27 and MJU-49 decoy devices.

MJU-32/B, MJU-32A/B, MJU-38/B and MJU-38A/B Decoy Flares

These decoy flares are conventional pyrotechnic magnesium/teflon/viton (MTV) flares that are utilized
to decoy IR heat-seeking missiles. These flares are launched from the AN/ALE-39 CMDS and
AN/ALE-47 CMDS.
The MJU-32A/B and MJU-38A/B are form, fit, and function replacements for the MJU-32/B and MJU-
38/B. Improvements were made to ignition reliability. These decoy flares consist of a cylindrical
aluminum case approximately 5.8 inches long and 1.4 inches in diameter (Figure 4-11).
The base end of the flare case is flanged to a maximum diameter of 1.495 inches to fit the
counterbore in the chamber of the dispenser block. The end of the flare case opposite the flanged
base is closed with an injected molded polycarbonate end cap attached by a 360-degree crimp. The
MJU-32A/B and MJU-38A/B have a plastic cartridge retainer threaded and sealed into the base of the
flare case. These decoy flares consist of two major elements: the pyrotechnic composition (or flare
grain) and the igniter assembly.
In the MJU-32/B and MJU-38/B, the complete length of the grain is wrapped with adhesive-backed
aluminum foil that extends over part of the igniter.
In the MJU-32A/B and MJU-38A/B, the adhesive-backed aluminum foil is 1 inch wide and covers the
gap between the grain and igniter assembly. The igniter assembly contains a plastic body, two
ignition pellets, and bore-sensing sliders. A silicone rubber pad is located between the end of the flare
grain and end cap to provide for variations in longitudinal dimensions of the parts with time. It also
provides protection for the internal parts by damping vibration and shock forces. This device requires
the CCU-136A/A impulse cartridge for functioning.

4-12
 Figure 4-11 — MJU-32 and MJU-38 decoy flare.

MJU-55A/B and MJU-55/B Decoy Flare-Devices

The MJU-55A/B and MJU-55/B Decoy Flare-Devices are launched from the AN/ALE-39 CMDS and
AN/ALE-47 CMDS.
The MJU-55A/B and MJU-55/B flares consist of a cylindrical aluminum case approximately 5.8 inches
long and 1.4 inches in diameter (Figure 4-12). The base end of the flare case is flanged to a
maximum diameter of 1.495 inches to fit the counterbore in the chamber of the dispenser block. The
MJU-55A/B has a black plastic squib seal installed in the impulse cartridge cavity. The end of the flare
case opposite the flanged base is crimped 360 degrees around the aluminum end cap, which is
sealed with an O-ring.
These flares consist of two payloads: a pyrotechnic MTV grain with an igniter and a pyrophoric metal
payload. The igniter assembly contains a plastic body, two ignition pellets, and two bore-sensing
sliders. The two payloads are separated by a rubber separator disk.

4-13
 Figure 4-12 — MJU-55 Decoy Flare-Device.

MJU-57A/B and MJU-57/B Decoy Flares

The MJU-57A/B and MJU-57/B Decoy Flares are launched from the AN/ALE-39 CMDS and AN/ALE-
47 CMDS. The MJU-57A/B is a form, fit, and function direct replacement for the MJU-57/B,
incorporating design features to improve safety, producibility, reliability, and unit cost.
The MJU-57A/B and MJU-57/B Decoy Flares consist of a cylindrical aluminum case approximately
5.8 inches long and 1.4 inches in diameter (Figure 4-13). The base end of the case is flanged to a
maximum diameter of 1.495 inches to fit the counterbore in the chamber of the dispenser block. For
the MJU-57/B, the end of the flare case opposite the flanged base is crimped 360 degrees around the
payload stainless-steel end cap, which is inserted with a tungsten slug.
For the MJU-57A/B, the end of the flare case opposite the flanged base is crimped 360 degrees
around the plastic payload end cap. It also has a plastic cartridge retainer threaded and sealed into
the base of the flare case.
The MJU-57/B Decoy Flare consists of two major elements: the rocket motor assembly and the igniter
assembly. The pyrotechnic grain is housed in a stainless-steel tube/end cap and molded plastic
nozzle assembly. A tungsten slug, which is staked into the end cap, provides a forward weight in the
rocket motor assembly, which acts to stabilize the payload in flight. Spring-loaded fins, which deploy
once the payload is ejected from the case, also act to stabilize the payload in flight. The igniter
assembly contains a plastic body, two ignition pellets, and two bore-sensing sliders.
The MJU-57A/B Decoy Flare consists of two major elements: the rocket motor assembly and the
igniter assembly. The pyrotechnic grain is housed in a plastic nozzle/body assembly. The forward end
of the rocket motor assembly contains a tungsten ballast to help with aerodynamic stability, while the
other end contains a nozzle for the unit’s thrust. Wrapped around the body is a one-piece spring steel
fin.
The igniter assembly is attached to the nozzle end of the body. The igniter assembly contains a
plastic body and two bore-sensing sliders with ignition pellets.

4-14
 Figure 4-13 — MJU-57 Decoy Flares.
When properly installed in a chamber of the applicable dispenser, the case fits snugly around the
firing end of a corresponding CCU-136A/A Impulse Cartridge.
When the impulse cartridge is fired, the gas pressure shears out a thin disk in the case, which allows
the gas to exert a pushing force against the igniter/rocket motor assembly. At this time, hot particles
from the impulse cartridge ignite the ignition pellets.
The pushing force on the igniter/rocket motor assembly causes the end cap to open the case crimp,
and the igniter/rocket motor assembly ejects from the case. When the igniter clears the case, the
bore-sensing sliders move, allowing the flame from the ignition pellets to transfer to the grain. The
fins, which act to stabilize the ejected payload, fully deploy when the igniter/rocket motor assembly
clears the aluminum case (Figure 4-14).

4-15
SM-875A/ALE SM-
875B/ALE Flare Simulator
The SM-875A/ALE Flare
Simulator is launched from the
AN/ALE-39 CMDS and AN/ALE-
47 CMDS for training and
simulation purposes.
The SM-875A/ALE Flare
Simulator (Figure 4-15) consists
of a cylindrical plastic case
approximately 5.8 inches long and
1.4 inches in diameter. The base
end of the flare is flanged to a
maximum diameter of 1.495
inches to fit the counterbore in the
chamber of the dispenser block.
The end of the flare case opposite
the flanged base is closed with an
injection-molded plastic end cap Figure 4-14 — MJU-57/B Decoy Flare functional sequence.
pinned in place with two spring
pins and sealed with an O-ring.

Figure 4-15 — SM-875A/ALE Flare Simulator.

The SM-875B/ALE Flare Simulator (Figure 4-16) provides a low-cost training round that can be used
to familiarize pilots and ordnance technicians with the use and handling of decoy flares. It was
developed as a visually enhanced replacement for the SM-875A/ALE Flare Simulator.
The SM-875B/ALE Flare Simulator is identical in size to the standard MJU-32 and MJU-38 series of
flares and uses standard CCU-136A/A Impulse Cartridges. This size allows it to be used with the
AN/ALE-39 CMDS or AN/ALE-47 CMDS and their standard-length blocks.

4-16
 Figure 4-16 — SM-875B/ALE Flare Simulator.

MJU-50/B Infrared Countermeasure Flare

The MJU-50/B IR Countermeasure Flare is launched from a MJU-33/A Multiple Flare Magazine,
which is installed on a D-49/ALE-47 CMDS to decoy IR heat-seeking missiles.
The MJU-50/B IR Countermeasure Flare (Figure 4-17) consists of a 1- by 1- by 8-inch aluminum case
with an aluminum impulse cartridge cup glued into the base of the flare case. This cup has an O-ring
that provides a seal when the impulse cartridge is installed. A length of thread is stored in this cup
and held in place with a plastic plug. The opposite end is closed with a crimped aluminum disk and
sealed with epoxy.

Figure 4-17 — MJU-50 IR countermeasure Flare assembly.

4-17
The MJU-50/B IR Countermeasure Flare consists of a plastic piston and a payload of pyrophoric
metal. The piston is located between the payload and the cartridge retainer. The MJU-50/B requires
the BBU-35/B or CCU-145/A Impulse Cartridge for functioning.

MJU-61A/B and MJU-61/B Decoy Flares

The MJU-61/AB and MJU-61/B Decoy Flares are launched from an MJU-33/A Multiple Flare
Magazine, which is installed on a D-49/ALE-47 CMDS to decoy IR heat-seeking missiles.
These decoy flares (Figure 4-18) consist of a 1- by 1- by 8-inch aluminum case, with a cavity at the
base end for the impulse cartridge and an O-ring-sealed end cap crimped in place on the other end.

Figure 4-18 — MJU-61 Decoy flare.

The internal payload of these flares consists of a pyrotechnic flare grain with an igniter assembly
attached. The MJU-61A/B igniter assembly has an O-ring, and the MJU-61/B igniter assembly has a
polyethylene plastic piston. A silicone foam rubber pad is between the flare grain and end cap.
The function of these decoy flares is initiated when voltage is applied across the contacts of the
impulse cartridge in response to cockpit command. Hot gases from the impulse cartridge shear the
thin section in the base end of the flare case and enter the case. The hot gases then ignite the
ignition pellets in the igniter assembly and also pressurize against the payload, causing the
pyrotechnic payload to move. The moving payload causes the end cap to separate from the case. As
the payload assembly moves along the length of the flare case, two bore-sensing sliders contained in
the igniter inhibit ignition of the grain.
As the payload assembly exits the case, force from the springs located in the igniters move the
sliders. Flame from the burning ignition pellets can now pass through openings and ignite the flare
grain. The burning flare grain produces IR energy, which is attractive to advanced IR-seeking
missiles.

MJU-64/B and MJU-66/B Infrared Countermeasure Decoys

The MJU-64/B and MJU-66/B Infrared Countermeasure Decoys are launched from an MJU-33/A
Flare Magazine, which is installed on a D-49/ALE-47 CMDS to decoy IR heat-seeking missiles. These
decoys (Figure 4-19) consist of a 1- by 1- by 8-inch aluminum case. The base end of the case has a
receptacle with an O-ring for the impulse cartridge. The opposite end is closed with a plastic end cap
sealed with an O-ring. These decoys consist of a plastic piston and a payload of pyrophoric metal.
The pyrophoric metal payloads emit IR energy at slightly different temperatures. The piston is located
between the payload and the cartridge retainer.
These decoys require the BBU-35/B or CCU-145/A Impulse Cartridge for functioning. For use, an
impulse cartridge is inserted into the receptacle in the base of the flare. When the impulse cartridge in
the decoy is initiated by the firing pulse, the impulse cartridge receptacle cup’s frangible membrane
ruptures. Pressure inside the canister increases and pushes on the piston, breaking the end cap seal
and deploying the pyrophoric metal payload into the airstream. The pyrophoric metal reacts with the
air to emit IR energy.

4-18
 Figure 4-19 — MJU-64 Infrared Countermeasure Decoy.

MJU-68/B and MJU-69/B Infrared Countermeasure Flares

The MJU-68/B and MJU-69/B Infrared Countermeasure Flares are launched from the AN/ALE-70
CMDS used aboard the Joint Strike Fighter (JSF) F-35 Lightning II aircraft.
The MJU-68/B and MJU-69/B Infrared Countermeasure Flares consist of a square aluminum case
approximately 1.5 by 1.5 by 10.5 inches long (Figures 4-20 and 4-21). The base end of the case is
flanged to approximately 1.65 by 1.65 inches.

Figure 4-20 — MJU-68/B Infrared Countermeasure Flares.

For both flares, the end of the flare case opposite the flanged base is closed with an aluminum end
cap staked in place and sealed with room temperature vulcanization (RTV) silicone.
Both of these flares consist of two major elements: the flare assembly and the igniter assembly. The
pyrotechnic grain is housed in a graphite fabric/phenolic resin housing/body closed with a copper
tungsten nose assembly. The nose assembly provides forward weight in the flare assembly, which
acts to stabilize the flare in flight. The aft end of the flare assembly has an integral nozzle. An igniter
assembly is attached to the nozzle end of the flare assembly. The igniter assembly contains a plastic
body, an ignition pellet, and bore-sensing sliders.
4-19
 Figure 4-21 — MJU-69/B Infrared Countermeasure Flares.

When properly installed in a chamber of the applicable dispenser, the case fits snugly around the
firing end of a corresponding impulse cartridge; a CCU-145/A for the MJU-68/B and a CCU-168/A for
the MJU-69/B.
When the impulse cartridge is fired, gas pressure shears out a thin disk in the case, allowing the gas
to exert a pushing force against the flare assembly. At this time, hot particles from the impulse
cartridge ignite the ignition pellet in the igniter assembly.
The pushing force on the flare assembly causes the end cap to open the case crimp, and the flare
assembly ejects from the case. When the igniter assembly clears the case, the bore-sensing sliders
move, allowing the flame from the ignition pellet to transfer to the grain. As pressure from the burning
flare grain exiting the nozzle pushes the igniter assembly off the flare assembly, the gases produce
thrust, propelling the flare through the air. The weighted nose assembly and fins integral to the
graphite fabric/phenolic resin housing/body stabilize the flare in flight.

Radio Frequency Expendables Active and Passive

The active expendables generate radio frequency (RF) energy on their own, instead of reflecting the
radar energy back toward the radar.
The passive expendables are filled with chaff. Chaff is aluminum-coated glass fibers that are
dispensed by aircraft to mask or screen other aircraft or to cause tracking radar to break lock.
The materials are generally cut into small pieces for which the size is dependent upon the radar
interrogation frequency (approximately one-half the wavelength of the victim radar frequency). Being
one-half a wavelength long, chaff acts as a resonant dipole and reflects much of the energy back to
the radar.

RT-1489/ALE
This item is commonly referred to as Generic Expendable (GEN-X) (Figure 4-22). A GEN-X is a
microwave transmitter/receiver utilizing state-of-the-art microwave-integrated circuits. It is dispensed
by the AN/ALE-39 CMDS and AN/ALE-47 CMDS.
The security classification of the decoy is the result of resident programming within the electronic
modules of the decoy. Declassification may be accomplished by removing the battery and crushing,
mutilation, or burning of the modules. The decoy should be handled in accordance with instructions
for Class C explosives.
4-20
 Figure 4-22 — RT-1489/ALE (GEN-X) active payload.

RT-1646/ALE Series
This item is an active towed decoy developed for use with the AN/ALE-50(V) CMDS (Figure 4-23).
The RT-1646/ALE Series was designed to protect a variety of aircraft, including the Navy F/A-18E/F.
The decoy comprises a receiver, transmitter antennas (fore and aft), a power supply, traveling wave
tube, integrated solid state module, and a microcontroller module. It is enclosed in a canister that
comprises the cutter assembly and towline assembly.
The RT-1646C/ALE and RT-1646E/ALE function similarly to the RT-1646A/ALE Series decoy and are
commonly referred to as the RT-1646 series decoy.

Figure 4-23 — AN/ALE-50(V) CMDS dispenser with decoy target.

4-21
RR-129/AL
The chaff in the RR-129 (Figure 4-24) is cut into three lengths, resonant at 2.85, 5.062, and 9.294
gigahertz (GHz). This item is dispensed by the AN/ALE-39 CMDS and AN/ALE-47 CMDS.

Figure 4-24 — RR-129/AL and RR-129A/AL chaff.

RR-129A/AL
The chaff in the RR-129A/AL (Figure 4-24) is cut into three lengths, resonant at 2.85, 5.062, and
9.294 GHz. This unit has the improved case and end cap for reduced end cap loss during carrier
catapult-assisted takeoff and arrested landings. This item is dispensed by the AN/ALE-39 CMDS and
AN/ALE-47 CMDS.

RR-144/AL
The chaff in the RR-144/AL (Figure 4-25) is cut into a single length, resonant at 8.590 GHz. This item
is dispensed by the AN/ALE-39 CMDS and AN/ALE-47 CMDS and is generally used for training.

RR-144A/AL
The chaff in the RR-144A/AL (Figure 4-25) is cut into three lengths, resonant at 7.00, 9.32, and 15.06
GHz. This unit has the improved case and end cap for reduced end cap loss during carrier assisted
launching and recovery. The frequencies do not interfere with Federal Aviation Administration (FAA)
radar. This item is dispensed by the AN/ALE-39 CMDS and AN/ALE-47 CMDS and is used for
training.

4-22
 Figure 4-25 — RR-144/AL and RR-144A/AL chaff.

PRACTICE BOMB SIGNAL CARTRIDGES

Practice bomb signal cartridges are used for day and night operations and as a visual indication of
bomb impact and fuze function. Three types of signal cartridges are discussed in the following
paragraphs.

Mk 4 Signal Cartridge
The Mk 4 practice bomb signal
cartridge (Figure 4-26) consists of
an aluminum case. The rim end
has a percussion primer, and the
opposite end is sealed with an
aluminum disk.
The signal cartridge contains an
expelling charge (smokeless
powder) initiated by the primer and
red phosphorus. Upon impact, the
cartridge is driven forward against
the firing pin, initiating the primer
Figure 4-26 — Mk 4 signal cartridge.
at the base of the cartridge.
This action fires the 3 grams of expelling charge and propels it from the open end of the practice
bomb. The red phosphorus is a toxic powder that produces a bright flash (for night use) and large
volumes of white smoke (for day use) when ignited.
The signal cartridge will detonate upon impact, releasing volumes of smoke. Drops of 18 inches or
more can cause the signal to function. The smoke is produced by the combination of red phosphorus
and heat exceeding 2,500 degrees Fahrenheit (°F). The smoke can cause a choking sensation and
irritation of the eyes.

4-23
CXU-3A/B Signal Cartridge
The CXU-3A/B is a good-visibility, daytime use, fire-free signal cartridge designed for use with
practice bombs (Figure 4-27).

Figure 4-27 — CXU-3A/B signal cartridge.

The CXU-3A/B is an aluminum cylinder 6.05 inches long with a diameter of 0.927 inches. The
cylinder surrounds a glass ampule that contains approximately 1.0 ounce of titanium tetrachloride, a
mildly toxic liquid that produces large volumes of white smoke when exposed to air or moisture. The
signal cartridge weighs 2.50 ounces.
Upon impact, the cartridge is driven forward against the firing pin, initiating the primer in the base of
the cartridge. This action fires 3 grams of expelling charge, which, in turn, shatters the ampule and
propels it from the open end of the practice bomb.
The resulting cloud of dense white smoke clearly marks the
impact point of the practice bomb on the bombing range.

CXU-4A/B Signal Cartridge

The CXU-4A/B signal cartridge (Figure 4-28) is a fire-free
signal employed to provide visual indication of bomb
impact point and fuze function. The signal cartridge
contains titanium tetrachloride, a mildly toxic liquid that
produces large volumes of white smoke when exposed to
air or moisture.
The signal cartridge is 2.85 inches long with a 2.10-inch
diameter and weighs 6 ounces. The signal cartridge
consists of 52 cubic centimeters of titanium tetrachloride
inside four glass vials, which are encapsulated within a
plastic container. Two signals are used in the side wells of
practice bomb BDU-45/B. Figure 4-28 — CXU-4A/B signal
Signal cartridge function is dependent upon detonation of cartridge.
an associated electric fuze in practice bomb BDU-45/B. Detonation of the fuze shatters the signal
cartridge container and disperses titanium tetrachloride, which combines with moisture in the air to
form a white cloud.
4-24
HANDLING AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Pyrotechnic ammunition is one of the most widely used types of ammunition in naval aviation.
Pyrotechnics of one type or another are carried in almost every Navy aircraft, including unarmed
transport and training aircraft.
All pyrotechnic and screening devices, while designed and tested to be safe under normal conditions,
are subject to accidental ignition.

NOTE
You should be constantly aware that pyrotechnics contain
chemical components that are intended to burn with intense
heat, and you should act accordingly.

Pyrotechnic and screening devices are normally equipped with some type of safety pin, lock, or tape
that is designed to prevent accidental activation of the initiation mechanism. DO NOT tamper with
such equipment. DO NOT strike, bend, or otherwise remove the safety equipment until just before the
device is launched. Any devices that show signs of damage to the safety features are considered
unserviceable; carefully put them to one side and promptly dispose of them according to current
directives.
If a pyrotechnic device should accidentally ignite, it will result in a fire hazard. In a confined area, the
gases generated by this combustion could present a serious toxic hazard. Signaling charges that
contain propellant charges, designed to propel the pyrotechnic candle into the air, create an
extremely dangerous missile hazard.
Pyrotechnic compositions characteristically contain their own oxidants; therefore, they do not depend
on atmospheric oxygen for combustion. For this reason, exclusion of air, by whatever means, from a
pyrotechnic fire is usually ineffective. Many pyrotechnic mixtures, particularly illuminating flare
compositions, burn with intense heat (up to 4,500 °F). Normally, extinguishers are not useful in this
kind of fire.
Carbon dioxide extinguishers, in addition to being ineffective, are potential sources of danger
because they tend to produce oxygen, which supports the combustion. Foam-type extinguishers are
equally ineffective because they work on the exclusion-of-air principle.

NOTE
Water, in flooding quantities and at low pressure, should be
used to cool the surrounding area and to prevent the
spread of the fire. Properly controlled and directed, water is
the best fire-extinguishing agent for aircraft parachute flares
burning in the open.

Pyrotechnic hazards are frequently increased by such factors as age, improper storage conditions,
rough handling, moisture penetration, excessive temperatures, damage to shipping containers, and
other mishaps that cause the devices to become unserviceable. In most cases, immediate danger
does not exist. Unserviceable pyrotechnic and screening devices on ships at sea are put to one side
for normal return to an appropriate shore station for disposition according to the instructions and
regulations contained in NAVSEA OP 5, Volume 1.
Conditions may develop that demand emergency disposal of potentially hazardous devices. In such
cases, disposition is the responsibility of the commanding officer. Under NO circumstances, other
4-25
than an extreme emergency, should ammunition, explosives, or other related hazardous materials be
dumped at sea by a Navy vessel, aircraft, or activity without prior approval of the Chief of Naval
Operations (CNO). If, in the commanding officer's best judgment, immediate disposition is necessary
to protect lives and property, the commanding officer should order such disposition by the most
appropriate means available. In all cases, the commanding officer must notify Naval Sea Systems
Command, at the earliest practical time, of the facts and circumstances.

4-26
 End of Chapter 4
Pyrotechnics
Review Questions
4-1. For which of the following signaling purposes is a hand-manipulated signaling device NOT
used?

A. Identification
B. Countermeasure
C. Warning
D. Distress

4-2. Which of the following features do pyrotechnic pistols NOT include?

A. Breech-loaded
B. Single-shot
C. Double-action
D. Double-barreled

4-3. A Mk 124 Mod 1 marine smoke and illumination signal emits what color smoke for day use?

A. Blue
B. Green
C. Orange
D. Red

4-4. A Mk 124 Mod 1 marine smoke and illumination signal emits what color flame for night use?

A. Blue
B. Green
C. Orange
D. Red

4-5. The day or night end of a Mk 124 Mod 1 signal is marked in which of the following ways?

A. The day end is painted orange

B. The night end is painted red
C. The case has three raised beads around its circumference on the flare (night) end, and
a label adhered to outer surface of the case identifies the smoke (day) and flare (night)
end
D. The protective plastic cap on the day end is molded, and there are prominent
protrusions across the face

4-6. A Mk 79 Mod 0 Illumination Signal Kit consists of what total number of Mk 80 Mod 0 signals?

A. Five
B. Six
C. Seven
D. Eight
4-27
4-7. When fired, the star ejected from a Mk 80 Mod 0 signal burns for what minimum amount of
time?

A. 4.5 seconds
B. 10.5 seconds
C. 4.5 minutes
D. 10.5 minutes

4-8. Before loading a signal into a Mk 31 Mod 0 signal projector, you should first take what action?

A. Inspect the signal for damage

B. Make sure the signal projector is cocked
C. Clear all personnel from the immediate area
D. Make sure the signal projector is not cocked

4-9. The illuminating candle in the LUU-2B/B aircraft parachute flare is made from what materials?

A. Magnesium, sodium nitrate, and black powder

B. Magnesium, sodium nitrate, and a polymer binder
C. Magnesium, black powder, and a polymer binder
D. Black powder, sodium nitrate, and a polymer binder

4-10. Approximately how many pounds of force are required to pull the timer knob from the timer of
an LUU-2B/B aircraft parachute flare?

A. 10
B. 20
C. 30
D. 40

4-11. When a Mk 25 marine location marker is handled, what component physically prevents the
base plugs from being accidentally pushed in?

A. Locking block
B. Arming plate
C. Retainer ring
D. Spring-loaded plug retainer

4-12. When a Mk 25 Mod 3 marker is in the water, what liquid serves as an electrolyte to produce a
current in the battery?

A. Distilled water
B. Oil
C. Seawater
D. Acid

4-28
4-13. What is the average burn time, in minutes, of a Mk 25 Mod 3 marine location marker?

A. 3 to 8
B. 9 to 12
C. 13.5 to 18.5
D. 20.5 to 30.5

4-14. What are the two major elements of the MJU-68/B Infrared Countermeasure Flares?

A. Flare body and smoke igniter

B. Igniter nozzle and nose assembly
C. Flare assembly and igniter assembly
D. Stabilizer and nose assembly

4-15. Infrared decoys generate heat and infrared energy that is used to distract what type of missile?

A. Infrared heat-seeking
B. Radar-seeking
C. Pyrotechnic-seeking
D. Laser-seeking

4-16. Passive expendables are dispensed by aircraft to mask or screen other aircraft or to cause
what effect on tracking radar?

A. Break lock
B. Break silence
C. Loss of communication
D. Loss of sight

4-17. What signal cartridge produces a flash of light and large volumes of white smoke (for day use)
when ignited?

A. Mk 4 Mod 3
B. Mk 19
C. CXU-3A/B
D. CXU-4A/B

4-18. What color smoke is produced by a CXU-3 signal cartridge?

A. White
B. Blue
C. Orange
D. Red

4-29
4-19. To extinguish an aircraft parachute flare that is burning in the open, which of the following
methods should be used?

A. Chemical extinguisher
B. Carbon dioxide extinguisher
C. Water, in flooding quantities and at low pressure
D. Water, in flooding quantities and at high pressure

4-20. Pyrotechnic hazards are frequently increased by which of the following factors?

A. Age of pyrotechnic
B. Cool temperatures
C. Proper storage conditions
D. Serviceable shipping containers

4-21. The case of the MJU-69/B is constructed of what type of material?

A. Aluminum
B. Composite
C. Copper
D. Steel

4-22. When should the safety equipment of pyrotechnic and screening devices be removed?

A. 5 minutes before launching

B. 30 minutes before launching
C. Just before the device is launched
D. When time permits

4-30
 CHAPTER 5
AIR-LAID MINES AND TORPEDOES
Since World War II, the U.S. Navy has developed sophisticated air-launched torpedoes and air-laid
mines. These weapons incorporate components so sensitive that their operation is classified
information.
Therefore, the information in this training manual on air-launched torpedoes and air-laid mines is
limited. For more detail information consult the specific weapon assembly manual noted throughout
the chapter.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
When you have completed this chapter, you will be able to do the following:
1. Identify the purpose of the Mark (Mk) 46 and Mk 54 torpedoes.
2. Recognize torpedo configurations to include warshot, exercise, and aircraft-launched.
3. Identify the characteristics of Otto Fuel II and the symptoms of the human body that may occur
when exposed to the fuel.
4. Identify aircraft-laid mines.
5. Recognize the classifications of aircraft-laid mines.
6. Describe aircraft-laid mine components.
7. Identify operational aircraft mines.
8. Recognize the safety precautions for handling mines.
9. Recognize the safety precautions for handling torpedoes.

Mk 46 TORPEDO CONFIGURATIONS
The Mk 46 Modifications (Mods) torpedo can be configured as a warshot torpedo, an exercise
torpedo, and a recoverable exercise torpedo (REXTORP). REXTORPs provide additional exercise
firing opportunities to increase the proficiency level of operational unit personnel in the handling,
loading, preparation, and delivery (placement) of warshot torpedoes. The Mk 46 torpedo can be
launched from surface ships or from rotary- and fixed-wing aircraft against potential underwater
threats.

Mk 46 Warshot Configuration
The Mk 46 Mods torpedo warshot configuration (Figure 5-1) is a tactical configuration that consists of
a nose section, a warhead, a control group, a long fuel tank, and an after body. A tactical warhead
(containing explosives) is used in the warshot configuration.

5-1
 Figure 5-1 — Mk 46 warshot torpedo.

Mk 46 Exercise Configuration
The Mk 46 exercise torpedo (Figure 5-2) includes an exercise head with a buoyancy subsystem and
a short fuel tank. The buoyancy subsystem replaces what would be the warhead on a warshot and
occupies the space directly aft of the array nose assembly. Its purpose is to provide positive
buoyancy to the torpedo upon termination of the exercise run. The buoyancy section contains lead
dropped weights, which separate at the end of run and provides positive buoyancy to the exercise
torpedo to bring it to the surface.

Figure 5-2 — Mk 46 exercise torpedo.

5-2
Mk 46 REXTORP Configuration
The Mk 46 REXTORP is an inert, non-running, presettable exercise torpedo shape. The Mk 46
REXTORP matches the warshot torpedo’s external physical characteristics (e.g., length, center of
gravity, and hookups). The Mk 46 REXTORP can be launched ballasted (Figure 5-3) to simulate the
warshot weight but requires 180 pounds of lead ballast to be released in order to be recovered. The
Mk 46 REXTORP can be launched unballasted as well (surface vessel torpedo tube (SVTT) or rotary
wing only).

Figure 5-3 — Mk 46 REXTORP configurations.

Mk 54 Torpedo Configurations
The Mk 54 torpedo is the next-generation lightweight, variable-speed, anti-submarine torpedo that
combines the Mk 50 torpedo search and homing system with the propulsion system of the Mk 46
torpedo for optimized performance in shallow water. The Mk 54 torpedo can be configured as a
warshot torpedo, an exercise torpedo, and a REXTORP. The Mk 54 torpedo looks similar to the Mk
46 torpedo because it repurposes many of the Mk 46 torpedo parts. However, the Mk 54 torpedo
5-3
utilizes an enhanced sonar system. Because it is suitable for both deep water and littoral
environments, the Mk 54 torpedo can be launched from surface ships or from rotary- and fixed-wing
aircraft against potential underwater threats.

Mk 54 Warshot Configuration
The Mk 54 warshot torpedo (Figure 5-4) is a tactical configuration that consists of a nose section, a
warhead, a control group, a long fuel tank, and an after body. A tactical warhead (containing
explosives) is used in the warshot configuration.

Figure 5-4 — Mk 54 warshot torpedo.

Mk 54 Exercise Configuration
The Mk 54 exercise torpedo (Figure 5-5) includes an exercise head with a buoyancy subsystem and a
short fuel tank. The buoyancy subsystem replaces the warhead on a warshot and occupies the space
directly aft of the array nose assembly. Its purpose is to provide positive buoyancy to the torpedo
upon termination of the exercise run. The buoyancy section contains a gas generator propellant that
produces CO2 to fill a buoyancy bag and provide positive buoyancy to the exercise torpedo to bring it
to the surface.

Figure 5-5 — Mk 54 exercise torpedo.

5-4
Mk 54 REXTORP Configuration
The Mk 54 REXTORP (Figure 5-6) is an inert, non-running, presettable exercise torpedo shape. It
matches the warshot torpedo’s external physical characteristics (e.g., length, center of gravity, and
hookups). However, it does not represent the warshot weight and does not have ballast. The Mk 54
REXTORP is approximately 220 pounds lighter than the warshot in order to be positively buoyant for
retrieval.

Figure 5-6 — Mk 54 REXTORP.

AIRCRAFT-LAUNCHED TORPEDO CONFIGURATIONS

To air-launch torpedoes, launch accessory equipment is used. The accessory equipment includes
suspension bands to attach the torpedo to the aircraft and torpedo air stabilizers to ensure a
predictable air trajectory and water entry. Torpedoes are configured and issued to the fleet depending
on tactical or training requirements. An aviation ordnanceman (AO) is not responsible for the
assembly of the torpedo at the organizational level. However, the AO is responsible for the installation
of launch accessory equipment. The physical characteristics, such as weight, length, etc., of the Mk
46 Mods and Mk 54 Mods torpedo vary. These characteristics depend on the configuration of the
torpedo itself (warshot or exercise) and the configuration of the attached launch accessories. The Mk
46 and Mk 54 torpedo are configured with aircraft-launch accessories for either helicopter or fixed-
wing aircraft launching.
The basic items of accessory equipment used in launching torpedoes from fixed-wing aircraft and
helicopters are the torpedo air stabilizer and suspension band assembly. The torpedo air stabilizer
ensures a predictable air trajectory and water entry without structural damage to the torpedo. The air
stabilizer reduces the descent speed of the torpedo relative to the speed of the launching aircraft. A
static line or release lanyard deploys the parachute when the torpedo is dropped from the aircraft.
The deployed parachute stabilizes the torpedo during descent to the water, slows the descent speed
to an acceptable velocity for water entry, and assures the proper water entry angle.
For detailed information concerning aircraft launch accessories, refer to the U.S. Navy Aircraft
Torpedoes Accessories and Trajectory Data and Quality Assurance Test and Inspection Plan for
Installation of Torpedo Mk 46 Launch Accessories, NAVSEA SW512-AO-ASY-010.
5-5
Torpedo Air Stabilizers
Air stabilizers are used to arrest the launch speed of
the torpedo as well as to orient the torpedo such that
it enters the water at its specified water-entry angle.
Water-entry angle is important to make sure no
damage is done to the torpedo as it enters the water.
The stabilizers are different for fixed-wing and
helicopter launches, but their functionality is the
same.
The Mk 28 Mod 3 air stabilizer (Figure 5-7) is used for
air-launching from a fixed-wing aircraft. The Mk 28
Mod 3 air stabilizer is usable for Mk 46 torpedoes,
Mk 46 REXTORPs, Mk 54 torpedoes, and Mk 54
REXTORPs.
The Mk 31 Mod 1 (Figure 5-8) air stabilizer is used for
air-launching from rotary-wing aircraft. The Mk 31
Mod 1 air stabilizer is usable for Mk 46 torpedoes, Mk
46 REXTORPs, Mk 54 torpedoes, and Mk 54
Figure 5-7 — Mk 28 Mod 3 air stabilizer.
REXTORPs.

Figure 5-8 — Mk 31 Mod 1 torpedo air stabilizer.

Torpedo Suspension Bands

Suspension bands (Figure 5-9) are used in pairs to suspend the torpedo from the bomb racks or
shackles of the launching aircraft. The bands wrap around the torpedo and are secured by tension
bolts. After the bands are installed, the torpedo is loaded aboard by engaging the suspension band
lugs in the bomb racks or on the bomb shackles of the aircraft.
The torpedo is loaded internally into a weapons bay for fixed-wing aircraft launch and loaded
externally for helicopter launch. When the bomb rack/shackle hooks are released, the torpedo drops
away (or in the case of patrol (P)-8 aircraft, the torpedo is pneumatically ejected from the weapons
bay). Release wires unlatch the suspension bands, allowing them to break away from the torpedo as
it is launched from the aircraft.
5-6
The Mk 78 Mod 1 (Figure 5-9) suspension
band assembly is used for air-launching
from both fixed-wing aircraft and helicopters.
The Mk 78 Mod 1 is only usable for Mk 46
torpedoes and Mk 46 REXTORPs.
The Mk 89 Mod 1 (Figure 5-9) suspension
band assembly is used for air-launching
from both fixed-wing aircraft and helicopters.
The Mk 89 Mod 1 is usable for Mk 46
torpedoes, Mk 46 REXTORPs, Mk 54
torpedoes, and Mk 54 REXTORPs. Only Mk
89 Mod 1 suspension bands can be used for
the Mk 54 torpedo due to the increased
weight.
For detailed information concerning aircraft
launch accessories, you should refer to the
Description, Operation, Installation,
Removal, and Trajectory Data for Mk 46/Mk
54 Torpedo Flight Accessories, NAVSEA
SW512-AO-ASY-010.

Torpedo Propeller Baffles

Propeller baffles (Figure 5-10) lock the
propellers and attach to the front plate of the
Mk 28 air stabilizer for fixed-wing aircraft.
Their function is to keep the propellers from
windmilling in air and turning the engine,
which could destroy the engine due to lack
of engine oil. The metal baffle can be used
on either the Mk 46 or Mk 54 torpedo, but
must be used for the Mk 54 torpedo on the
P-8 aircraft. The plastic baffle can also be
used on either torpedo but can only be used
on the P-3 aircraft due to speed restrictions.
Figure 5-9 — Mk 78 Mod 1 and Mk 89 Mod 1
suspension band assemblies.

Figure 5-10 — Mk 46 and Mk 54 plastic and metal propeller baffles.

5-7
Torpedo Nose Caps
Nose caps (Figure 5-11)
serve two functions:
x To protect the
torpedo, by use of a
conductive coating,
from electromagnetic
energy entering the
weapon through the
transducer array
x To absorb shock loads
experienced during
water entry by
fracturing upon impact Figure 5-11 — Fixed-wing and helicopter nose cap.
The Mk 14 nose cap is used for fixed-wing launches, and the Mk 13 nose cap is used for rotary-wing
launches. The Mk 13 nose cap has ribs added to ensure proper breakup of the nose cap upon water
entry when dropped from a hovering helicopter. Nose caps are required on warshot and exercise
torpedoes, and are not used on REXTORPs.

OTTO FUEL II
Otto Fuel II is the propellant for the propulsion system of the Mk 46 Mods and Mk 54 Mods torpedo.
Otto Fuel II is first sprayed under pressure into a combustion chamber where it is ignited. The
exhaust gases from the burning fuel are used to drive the torpedo engine. The major advantage of
this system is the short turnaround time required for exercise weapons.
Otto Fuel II is a stable, liquid monopropellant composed of a nitrate ester in solution with a
desensitizing agent and a stabilizer. It is a bright red, free-flowing, oily liquid that is heavier than
water.

NOTE
When in a thin layer, such as a spill, stain, or leak, Otto
Fuel II is a yellow-orange color.

Otto Fuel II is noncorrosive. It has an extremely low vapor pressure, minimizing explosive and toxic
hazards. Otto Fuel II can detonate, but the conditions and stimulus required are so extreme that it is
considered a nonexplosive. The propellant has a high flash point and other safety characteristics. It is
classified as a low fire hazard material.
The ingredient of medical concern in Otto Fuel II is the nitrated ester. Nitrated esters are known for
their acute effects on the human body. Symptoms of exposure to Otto Fuel II include the following:
x Headache
x Dizziness
x Drop in blood pressure
x Nasal congestion

5-8
 NOTE
Depending upon the sensitivity of the individual, a
temporary symptom-free tolerance may develop during the
remainder of the working period. After exposure to a vapor-
free environment, the first contact with Otto Fuel II vapors
often causes the above symptoms to recur.

A stowage space is specifically designated for each type of torpedo stowed aboard a combat ship.
When handling Otto Fuel II, at least two crewmembers should handle the fuel. All personnel must
know the general characteristics of Otto Fuel II, the safety precautions for handling the fuel, and
protective equipment required. As an AO, handling Otto Fuel II is limited to emergency situations and
not a daily task.
To avoid hazardous situations when handling Otto Fuel II, personnel should be well trained and
supervised. For further information concerning Otto Fuel II, refer to Otto Fuel II Safety, Storage, and
Handling Instructions, NAVSEA S6340-AA-MMA-010.

AIRCRAFT-LAID MINES
Naval mines are used in offensive or defensive mining operations. The primary objective is to
effectively defend or control vital straits, port approaches, convoy anchorages, and seaward coastal
barriers.
Aircraft mine delivery is the principal method of making large-scale mining attacks on enemy coastal
and port areas. Aircraft-laid mines are usually carried and dropped in the same way as bombs, but
they have different ballistic flight paths. Air-laid mines usually require parachutes that are released
from the mine on water entry.

Classifications
Mines are classified by intended use, method of delivery, position assumed when laid, method of
actuation, or weight. Mines classified by their intended use are further classified as service, exercise
(recoverable), and training mines. Service mines are fully explosive-loaded mines assembled with
service components for use in wartime. Exercise and training mines are inert loaded to service
weight.
They have many uses, such as assembly and laying in fleet exercises. After exercise completion,
they are recovered, analyzed, and overhauled for reuse. When assembled, exercise and/or training
mines may contain minor explosive components.
Mines classified by method of delivery are submarine-laid, surface-laid, or air-laid. The classification
depends on the laying vehicle.
Mines classified by the position they take in the water after being laid are moored or bottom mines.
Moored mines are buoyant mines. They are connected by cable to an anchor resting on the bottom of
the sea (Figure 5-12). There are two important considerations in laying moored mines—stability and
moored depth. An anchor achieves mine stability with sufficient negative buoyancy to retain the mine
in its position (without moving) on the bottom of the sea.
Bottom mines rest on the bottom of the sea. Their effective depth is controlled by the amount of
charge they contain relative to the depth of the area in which they are planted. Their design includes
sufficient negative buoyancy to provide good stability on the bottom of the sea.

5-9
 Figure 5-12 — Aerial mine delivery sequence of moored mines.

Mines are also classified by the methods used to activate them. Methods of activation are contact and
influence, or a combination of both methods. Influence-actuated mines are the only mines used
tactically in an air-laid operation. Influence-actuated mines are further classified as magnetic,
acoustic, or pressure mines.
These classifications are generally combined to describe a given mine; for example, an air-laid,
pressure-fired, bottom mine or an air-laid, magnetic-fired, moored mine. Table 5-1 provides a list of
the air-laid mines currently in use by the U.S. Navy.
Table 5-1 — Air-Laid Mines Currently in Use
MINE WEIGHT TYPES OF POSITION IN RETARDED
DESIGNATION CLASS ACTUATION WATER
Mk 62 500 pound Influence Bottom Fin
Mk 63 1,000 pound Influence Bottom Parachute
Mk 65 2,000 pound Influence Bottom Parachute

Mine Components
The components used in a mine vary, depending on the type of mine and its specific use. In addition
to the mine case and explosive system, mine components provide mine arming, target sensing,
actuation, laying control, countermeasure resistance, firing power, and sterilization. Exercise
components are used in exercise (recoverable) mines.

Mine Case
The mine case is the main element of the mine. It contains or carries all other components. The mine
case is normally made of sheet steel, but aluminum, spun glass, or various plastics are used in some
types of mine cases. The case is watertight and strong to resist water pressure. Mine case openings
are carefully sealed with suitable gaskets.
5-10
Explosive Components
The explosive system of a mine includes the main charge, the booster, the initiating system, and
auxiliary explosive devices.

Main Charge
The main charge is the mine's payload. It is a high explosive cast directly into the mine case, or into
an explosive section attached to the mine case when the mine is assembled. The amount of
explosives used in air-laid mines ranges from 160 to 1,300 pounds. Types of explosives used include
composition B, trinitrotoluene (TNT), composition H6, or high-blast explosive (HBX) mixtures. The
HBX mixtures are most commonly used explosives.

Booster
The booster varies from a few ounces to several pounds of explosive. Generally, the smaller boosters
contain tetryl, and the larger boosters contain granular grade A TNT. The intermediate size booster
contains composition B. In some cases, the booster consists of a subbooster. The booster is housed
in a brass, terneplate, plastic, or fiber container. When assembled in the mine case, the booster is in
intimate contact with the main charge explosive.

Initiating System
An electric primer in an explosive fitting is used to set off a flash detonator. The flash detonator
initiates the leads to the booster or subbooster, causing the mine to detonate. Explosive fittings may
contain a primer or a detonator, depending on their design function.

Auxiliary Explosive Devices

Auxiliary devices are usually small explosives that blow or open a hole in the mine case to sink it. A
small explosive device, such as the explosive driver, is used during the mine planting or operating
sequence. For example, it is used to close or open electrical switches, unlock mechanical linkages,
open gas bottles, and jam cables from further pay out. Other types of auxiliary explosive devices are
used to cut cables and to release pyrotechnic signals from exercise and training mines.

Arming Components
An arming device is a combination of a hydrostatic switch piston and an explosive aligning piston.
They are internally mounted in a single assembly. The hydrostatic piston acts to open and close
electrical switches. The explosive piston aligns the explosive train when the hydrostatic piston and the
explosive piston are forced in by water pressure after the mine is laid. These pistons are held in the
retracted or safe position by safety pins during ground handling.
The safety pins are replaced by arming wire assemblies after the mines are loaded aboard the
aircraft.
After planting, a clock-delay mechanism prevents firing until the mine has been submerged for a
predetermined period of time. A switch in the detonator circuit of the mine controls the firing
mechanism. The switch remains open until the clock-delay device has run its predetermined time.
The time could vary from 8 minutes to 10 days, depending upon the type of clock installed.
Sometimes another clock is also used to sterilize the mine after a preselected period of armed life.

5-11
Firing Components
Firing components include elements that detect the target, analyze target information, and act to fire
the mine. In simple systems, a single device does these functions. However, in most systems, these
functions are performed by two or more components.
The types of firing mechanisms used in mines vary widely in appearance and configuration. In older
mines, the firing mechanism might be a circuit arrangement. In newer mines, the firing mechanism
might be a color-coded rectangular box.
Since influence-actuated mechanisms are the only type of firing mechanisms currently used in aircraft
mines, they are discussed in the following paragraphs. Influence-actuated firing mechanisms may be
subdivided into three general categories—acoustic, pressure, and magnetic.

Acoustic
An acoustic mine is fired by the initiation of an enclosed microphone. The microphone picks up the
sound waves generated by a nearby ship's rotating screws or other operating machinery. These
mines are equipped with an anticountermine device that prevents detonation of the mine from
explosions set off during minesweeping operations.

Pressure
The pressure mine firing mechanism is actuated by a decrease in water pressure immediately
surrounding the mine. Normally, the increase of pressure occurs only when a large ship passes over
it. The pressure mine firing mechanism is used in conjunction with a magnetic-influence mechanism.
The combination of these two mechanisms makes effective minesweeping operations nearly
impossible.

Magnetic
Magnetic mines are induction mines actuated by changes in the earth's magnetic field. Their
actuation depends primarily on the rate at which the field changes rather than the amount of change.
A change in the magnetic field induces an electromagnetic field in the winding of a coil. This
electromagnetic field and the resulting current are proportional to the rate of change of the magnetic
field. When the magnetic field increases to a predetermined level, a relay actuates and closes the
firing circuit.

Parachute Packs
Some mines laid from aircraft use parachutes to prevent them from building up too much speed
before entering the water. The parachute reduces the impact velocity and protects the mine
components from damage. The use of parachute packs permits the mines to be released from an
aircraft at high altitudes, which may be required when ports or sea passages are heavily armed.
The parachute pack currently used is the delayed-opening type. In this type of parachute pack, a
control mechanism is used to open the parachute at some point in the air trajectory of the mine. A
typical delayed-opening parachute pack contains a drogue type parachute, release gear, and a
control device. The parachute release gear consists of a metal ring that attaches the parachute to the
mine during air travel. It is released from the mine upon water impact by inertia weights, wipe-off
plates, or hydrostatic mechanisms. The control device opens the parachute during the mines descent.
An adjustable fixed-delay device usually controls the opening of the parachute. Since firing an
explosive fitting deploys the parachute, parachute pack control devices contain explosive
components.

5-12
OPERATIONAL AIRCRAFT MINES
Air-laid mines currently in operational use are discussed briefly in the following paragraphs.

Mk 62 and Mk 63 Mines
The Mk 62 (Figure 5-13) and Mk 63 (Figure 5-14) mines are 500- and 1,000-pound, aircraft-laid, all
modular, influence-actuated bottom mine for use against submarines and surface targets. The
detection system responds to either magnetic or magnetic and seismic target influences.
The Mk 62 mine consists of bomb body Mk 82 or bomb live unit (BLU)-111 and the Mk 63 mine
consists of bomb body Mk 83 or BLU-110. The bomb/mine conversion kit Mk 130 Mod 1 contains the
Mk 32 arming device, Mk 59 booster, and the Mk 57 target detecting device (TDD), which requires a
Mk 130 battery to be installed. The bomb/mine conversion kit also has the necessary hardware (less
battery and fin assembly) to convert a general-purpose (GP) bomb to an air-laid mine.

Figure 5-13 — Mk 62 mine.

5-13
 Figure 5-14 — Mk 63 mine.
Mk 65 Mine
The Mk 65 Mods mine (Figure 5-15) is a 2,000 pound, air-laid, all modular, influence-actuated, bottom
mine used against submarines and surface targets.

Figure 5-15 — Mk 65 mine.

5-14
PBXN-103 is used as the explosive payload. Through use of specific components, the Mk 65 Mod 0,
Mod 1, and Mod 3 mine can each be assembled in two operational assemblies (OAs). The Mk 65
mine consists of a mine case, a Mk 45 safety device arming group with a Mk 2 arming device, a Mk
57 TDD, and a Mk 7 tail assembly.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Handling torpedoes and mines is a specialized job. If the handler isn’t qualified, the torpedo, mine, or
their components should not be disassembled. You should follow the same safety precautions for
torpedoes and mines as you follow when handling bombs.
x The torpedo suspension bands, part of the air launch accessories, are under tension; the
bands present an impact and laceration hazard to personnel if a band is accidently released or
a band strap breaks; personnel should avoid the band area of the torpedo unless performing
specific maintenance actions involving the bands
x Safety bolts must be installed in the suspension band lugs after receipt of the torpedo at the
landing area
x All Otto Fuel II spills and leaks shall be kept to a minimum and shall be cleaned up at once; the
use of solvents to cleanse Otto Fuel II from the skin is prohibited (solvents tend to speed up
the absorption of the fuel into the skin and magnify the effects of the exposure)
x An Otto Fuel II spill kit must be readily available in the immediate area of the torpedo
magazine; refer to NAVSEA S6340-AA-MMA-010 for proper clean-up, firefighting, and
emergency procedures
x To conform to safety and ammunition stowage requirements, mines are normally received
aboard ship in assembly configurations C or D; AOs are not required to assemble mines, but
they are required to be qualified and certified in mine handling and aircraft loading procedures
x A Mobile Mine Assembly Unit (MOMAU), composed of personnel from the mineman rate, is
responsible for the proper assembly of all mines; it is the responsibility of the mine planting
activity to notify the MOMAUs of scheduled mine operations and the exact dates their
assistance will be required
x When a mine is jettisoned safe, the wires remain in the clock starter and booster extender,
preventing the operation of the mine after submerging; however, when the mine strikes the
water, the arming wires may pull free; hydrostatic pressure or countermining shock can cause
the wires to shear; also, after a mine is submerged for a long period, the wires can corrode and
break
x No mine is jettisoned safe in water that is less than 800 feet (243.8 meters) deep with positive
assurance that it is not a hazard; depths greater than 800 feet will crush or flood the mine
case, making the mine inoperative
x Open the vent located on the Mk 130 Mod 1 battery container prior to opening the container
itself; if caustic odor is present, do not open the container; vacate and secure the area and
notify the hazardous material response team immediately
x Do not bend the fin release band latch during handling as it may cause fin to malfunction
x When handling mines during preflight operations, the same general handling techniques used
for bombs or torpedoes should be followed

5-15
 End of Chapter 5
Air-Laid Mines and Torpedoes
Review Questions
5-1. What primary weapon is used in antisubmarine warfare?

A. Depth bomb
B. General-purpose bomb
C. Torpedo
D. Underwater bomb

5-2. The Mark 46 Modifications torpedo can be assembled into what number of recoverable
exercise configurations?

A. Two
B. Three
C. Four
D. Five

5-3. The Mark 54 modifications torpedo can be assembled into what number of configurations?

A. One
B. Two
C. Three
D. Four

5-4. What Naval Sea systems Command publication contains component location information for a
Mark 46 Modifications torpedo?

A. SW010-AF-ORD-010
B. SW050-AB-MMA-010
C. SW512-AO-ASY-010
D. TW010-AC-ORD-010

5-5. What means is used to ensure a predictable air trajectory and water entry without causing
structural damage to a torpedo?

A. Air stabilizer
B. Flat nose section
C. Floatation
D. Suspension

5-6. Which of the following suspension band configurations are used to suspend torpedoes from
the bomb racks or shackles of the launching aircraft?

A. One Mark 78 Modification 10

B. One Mark 87 Modification 11
C. Two Mark 78 Modification 1
D. Two Mark 87 Modification 1

5-16
5-7. Propeller baffles prevent the propellers from engaging in what type of movement?

A. Sliding
B. Slipping
C. Vibrating
D. Windmilling

5-8. Using Otto Fuel II in torpedoes has what major advantage?

A. Fast burning and non-toxic

B. Requires a short turnaround time for exercise weapons
C. Safe to handle onboard ship
D. Slow burning to allow sufficient drop time

5-9. What Naval Sea Systems Command publication contains Otto Fuel II safety, storage, and
handling instructions?

A. OP 2173
B. OP 5
C. S6340-AA-MMA-010
D. SG420-AP-MMA-010

5-10. What symptom could occur when a person is initially exposed to Otto Fuel II vapors?

A. An increase in blood pressure

B. Headache
C. Improved vision
D. Sneezing

5-11. Aircraft-laid mines are used in which of the following types of operations?

A. Defensive only
B. Offensive only
C. Nonservice
D. Offensive or defensive

5-12. Which of the following general classifications are magnetic, acoustic, and pressure mines
grouped into?

A. Influence only
B. Contact only
C. Influence and contact
D. Pressure and magnetic

5-13. Depending on the type of mine, the explosive system may contain which of the following
components?

A. Main charge only

B. Initiating system only
C. Booster only
D. Booster, a main charge, and an initiating system
5-17
5-14. Air-laid mines contain which of the following types of explosives?

A. Composition B, TNT, H6, or RDX

B. Composition B, TNT, RDX, or tritonal
C. HBX, composition B, H6, or TNT
D. TNT, H6, or tritonal

5-15. The arming device in an air-laid mine consists of what type of switch piston?

A. Acoustic
B. Electrical
C. Explosive
D. Hydrostatic

5-16. A Mark 63 service mine is classified as what type of mine?

A. Bottom
B. Floating
C. Moored
D. Surface

5-17. What safety device is used in a Mark 65 mine?

A. Mk 31
B. Mk 45
C. Mk 57
D. Mk 79

5-18. At what depth of water, in feet, must mines be jettisoned?

A. 400
B. 600
C. 800
D. 1,000

5-18
 CHAPTER 6
AIRCRAFT GUNS
Gun systems installed in high-speed aircraft must meet demanding performance requirements and
provide firepower. The General Electric M61A1 (heavy system) and M61A2 (light system) 20-
milimeter (mm) automatic gun systems are installed in the F/A-18 aircraft. The H-60 series helicopters
have the following Crew Served Weapons capability; GAU-21 .50 caliber, GAU-16 .50 caliber, GAU-
17 7.62 caliber and the M240D 7.62 caliber machine guns to meet these requirements.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
When you have completed this chapter, you will be able to do the following:
1. Identify the components of the M61A1 and M61A2 automatic gun.
2. Recognize the operating principles of the M61A1 and M61A2 automatic gun.
3. Identify the ammunition handling and gun drive systems of the M61A1 and M61A2 automatic
gun.
4. Describe the principles of operation of the M61A1 and M61A2 automatic gun.
5. Identify the interrelationship of the various systems of the M61A1 and M61A2 automatic gun.
6. Identify maintenance and testing procedures of the M61A1 and M61A2 automatic gun at the
organizational level.
7. Identify maintenance and testing procedures of the M61A1 and M61A2 automatic gun at the
intermediate level.
8. Identify safety precautions to follow when working with the M61A1 and M61A2 automatic gun.
9. Describe the characteristics of the GAU-21 machine gun.
10. Describe the characteristics of the GAU-16 machine gun.
11. Describe the characteristics of the GAU-17 machine gun.
12. Describe the characteristics of the M240D machine gun.

M61A1 AND M61A2 AUTOMATIC GUN

The M61A1and M61A2 (M61A1/A2) (Figure 6-1) is a six-barrel, rotary-action, automatic gun based on
the machine-gun design of Richard J. Gatling. The gun consists of a revolving cluster of barrels. Each
barrel is fired once per revolution. The M61A1/A2 automatic gun is hydraulically driven, electrically
controlled, and can fire M50 and PGU-series ammunition. As installed in Navy aircraft, the gun has a
pilot-selectable firing rate of either 4,000 (GUN LOW) or 6,000 (GUN HIGH) rounds per minute. It is
designed for either air-to-ground or air-to-air gunnery missions.
Ammunition is supplied to the M61A1/A2 gun by an ammunition handling and storage system that
functions within a specific aircraft. The system uses an endless conveyor that transports 20 mm
ammunition from the ammunition drum to the gun. The conveyor then returns the expended cases
and unfired rounds to the ammunition drum.
Although the physical location of components varies between different aircraft gun installations, the
function and description of the components are essentially the same. The primary parts of the gun are
the barrels, housing assembly, and rotor assembly. The following paragraphs contain a description of
6-1
the gun component and an explanation of how each component works. Figure 6-2 and Figure 6-3
show an exploded view of the gun components. Figure 6-4 shows the gun component locations.
These figures should be reviewed as each component is discussed.

Figure 6-1 — M61A1 and M61A2 automatic gun (typical).

Figure 6-2 — M61A1 gun components (exploded view).

6-2
Figure 6-3 — M61A2 gun components (exploded view).

Figure 6-4 — Gun component locations (typical).

6-3
Gun Components
The primary parts of the gun are described in the following paragraphs.

Muzzle Clamp Assembly

The muzzle clamp assembly is positioned at the outer end of the barrels. It restrains individual barrel
movement during firing. It is positioned against the flange on the barrels and secured by the pressure
of the self-locking nut assembly against the opposite side of the shoulders.

Mid-Barrel Clamp Assembly

The mid-barrel clamp assembly is positioned near the center of the barrels. The clamp tabs are
engaged in the slots of the stop shoulders on the barrels. This clamp should be secured in this
position by rotating the locating disk to the locked position. The direction of rotation of the gun and
barrel hue prevents the clamp from unlocking. As an additional safety measure, a cotter pin should be
inserted through the locking disk.

Barrels
The M61A1/A2 automatic gun has six rifled barrels. The stub rotor attached to the rotor body supports
them. The three rows of interrupted locking lugs on the barrel engage similar interrupted locking lugs
in the rotor to secure the barrel. There are three knurled bands near the center of the barrels. These
bands provide a gripping surface for easy installation and removal of the barrels from the rotor.

Recoil Adapters
The recoil adapters are mounted on the bearing retainer and provide the front mounting for the gun.
The adapters reduce the amount of recoil and counter-recoil forces transmitted to the supporting
structure when the weapon is fired.

Firing Contact Assembly

The firing contact assembly is mounted to the housing so that the connector is outside the housing,
and the spring-loaded cam is inside the assembly. The contact assembly provides the necessary path
for the current to enter the housing and reach the breech-bolt assembly. This path goes through the
connector to the conductor, to the insulated insert in the contact cam assembly, and then to the
breech-bolt assembly.

Clearing Solenoid Assembly

The clearing solenoid assembly is mounted near the back of the gun housing. It is linked to and
controls the movement of the clearing sector assembly.

Clearing Sector Assembly

The clearing sector assembly is linked to and controlled by the clearing solenoid assembly. When the
solenoid is activated, the sector arm diverts the bolt assemblies into the clearing cam path.

Guide Bar
The guide bar is located on the gun housing. It guides the rounds into and out of the extractor lip that
is located on each of the six breech-bolt assemblies.

6-4
Breech-Bolt Assembly
The breech-bolt assembly picks up a round as it enters the gun, transports it to the firing chamber,
locks it into the firing position, transmits the firing voltage to the primer of the round, and returns the
empty case to the guide bar, where it is cammed out of the gun. An extractor lip on the front of each
bolt assembly engages the rim of a round throughout these actions.
There are six breech-bolt assemblies in the gun. Guide slots or grooves on the side of the bolt body
permit it to slide on the rotor tracks. The bolt roller shaft determines the position of the bolt as it
follows the main cam path or the clearing cam path in the housing.

Rotor Assembly
The rotor assembly
(Figure 6-5) is a major
unit of the M61A1/A2
gun. The front section or
stub rotor supports the
six barrels. The main
body of the rotor
assembly contains the
rotor tracks, rotor drive
gear, and the locking
lugs to lock the barrels
in place.
The rotor tracks support
the breech-bolt
assemblies and provide
a guide for the forward
and backward
movement of the bolt. Figure 6-5 — Rotor assembly.
There are six sets of
rotor tracks attached to the ribs along the rotor body. Each set contains a front, center, and rear
removable track. The removable track lets you install or remove a bolt assembly for servicing or
replacement.
The front support for the rotor assembly consists of a double row of ball bearings. The rear is
supported by needle bearings located inside the
rotor body. The end plate provides the inner
race for the needle bearings, and it also
provides for the gun's rear support.
The rotor assembly is driven by an external
hydraulic drive. Drive is applied through a shaft
and drive assembly. The drive assembly is
bolted to the gun housing but is not a
component of the gun.

Rear Housing Assembly and Associated

Parts
The rear housing assembly (Figure 6-6 and
Figure 6-7) is a major unit of the gun. It consists Figure 6-6 — Rear housing assembly (external
of an upper section and a lower section view).
6-5
assembled as one unit. The rear housing assembly provides the main cam path that controls the
movement of the breech-bolt assemblies. The elliptical (oval) shape of the main cam path causes the
forward and backward movement of the bolt assemblies. The clearing-cam path is circular and
located at the rear of the housing. It provides a path for the bolt assemblies during the gun's clearing
cycle. The housing cover, when in the closed position, forms a part of the clearing cam path. The
housing cover may be removed to install
or remove the bolt assembly.
The locking and unlocking cams are part
of the housing assembly. The gun-
indexing pin (timing pin) is located on
the housing. It is used to time the gun
when it is mated with the ammunition
handling system, or when you perform
loading/unloading procedures.

Lubricator Assembly
A lubricator assembly is attached
externally to the gun housing assembly.
It is used to lubricate the bolt
assemblies during gun operation. During
gun acceleration/deceleration and when Figure 6-7 — Rear housing assembly (internal view).
the gun is firing, an inertia-actuated
pump located within the lubricator assembly pumps the lubricant through a metal tube to the gun
housing assembly. The lubricator can be refilled when performing normal maintenance procedures.

M61A1/A2 Gun Principles of

Operation
The operation of the M61A1/A2 gun is divided
into two distinct cycles—the firing cycle and
the clearing cycle.

Firing Cycle
The firing cycle begins when power is applied
to the firing contact assembly and the gun
drive unit simultaneously.
When the rotor is viewed from the rear, it
revolves in a counterclockwise direction. The
ammunition is received from an external
source. It is guided into the extractor lip on a
breech-bolt assembly by the fingers on the
transfer assembly and housing (Figure 6-8).
The bolt roller shaft follows the main cam path
and moves the bolt assembly forward along
the rotor tracks, chambering the round.
As the breech-bolt assembly enters the front
dwell area of the main cam path, the locking
Figure 6-8 — Round guided into breech-bolt
cam forces the bolt shaft down, locking the
assembly.
bolt in the front locking well of the rotor
6-6
(Figure 6-9). The insulated portion of the contact cam in the firing contact assembly depresses the
firing pin cam in the breech-bolt assembly. This moves the firing pin forward against the primer of the
round. The conductor portion of the contact cam makes contact with the firing pin cam, which allows a
firing voltage to pass through the firing pin to fire the round.

Figure 6-9 — Breech-bolt assembly in firing cycle.

The breech-bolt assembly remains locked throughout the locking cam period until the projectile
leaves the barrel. After the projectile leaves the barrel, the barrel pressure is reduced. The unlocking
cam lifts the bolt shaft, retracts the bolt-locking block, and unlocks the bolt.
The main cam path guides the breech-bolt assembly rearward. The empty case is removed from the
chamber by the extractor lip of the bolt assembly.
Then, the bolt assembly travels back along the rotor tracks until the guide bar removes the empty
case from the bolt extractor lip and ejects it from the gun (Figure 6-10). To complete the cycle, the
bolt assembly travels along the rear cam dwell area and into position to receive the next round.
Once the breech-bolt assembly has completed a full firing cycle through the elliptical main cam path,
it has performed seven actions or operations in the following sequence:
1. Feeding.
2. Chambering.
3. Locking.
4. Firing.
6-7
 5. Unlocking.
6. Extracting.
7. Ejecting.
All six breech-bolt
assemblies repeat this firing
cycle (Figure 6-11) until the
clearing solenoid is
actuated, and the gun starts
the clearing cycle.

Figure 6-10 — Ejection of empty case.

Figure 6-11 — Firing cycle.

6-8
Clearing Cycle
The clearing cycle starts when the clearing solenoid is energized. The clearing solenoid depresses
the clearing sector arm to the gun housing. This places the clearing sector arm in a ready position.
The first bolt assembly that passes the sector arm triggers the actuating pin that lets the sector arm
continue to the clearing mode position. This diverts the succeeding bolt assemblies into the clearing
cam path (Figure 6-12).
As the breech-bolt assembly picks up a round at the guide bar, the clearing sector arm depresses the
bolt roller shaft. This locks the bolt assembly in the rear locking well of the rotor. While locked in this
position, the bolt assembly cannot follow the main cam path, so it follows the clearing cam path. The
clearing cam path is not as deep as the main cam path, and it keeps the bolt roller shaft depressed.
This firmly locks the bolt assembly in the rear of the rotor body.

Figure 6-12 — Breech-bolt assembly in clearing cycle.

The M61A1/A2 gun continues to receive rounds during the clearing cycle. However, because each
bolt assembly remains positioned at the back of the rotor during rotation, the guide bar cam fingers
eject all unfired rounds. When the clearing solenoid is deactivated, the clearing sector arm pivots out
of the main cam path. This allows the leaf springs in the rear locking well to force the bolt-locking
block upward. The bolt roller shaft follows the main cam path that permits the gun to be fired.
If necessary, the gun may be cleared manually. To do this, the clearing sector cam should be
manually pivoted into the main cam path while turning the rotor by hand.

6-9
For further information on the M61A1/A2 automatic gun, you should refer to the M61A1 and M61A2
Automatic Gun, NAVAIR 11-95M61-1. NAVAIR 11-95M61-1 provides intermediate-level maintenance
procedures and includes associated special support equipment.

Ammunition Handling and Gun Drive Systems

The ammunition and gun drive systems (Figure 6-13 and Figure 6-14) are discussed in the following
paragraphs.

Figure 6-13 — M61A1 ammunition and gun drive system.

6-10
 Figure 6-14 — M61A2 ammunition and gun drive system.

Drum Unit Assembly

Live ammunition and expended cases are stowed in the drum unit assembly. This assembly has four
major parts—drum unit, entrance cover, exit cover, and scoop disk. Refer to Figure 6-15 as you read
about these parts.

Drum Unit
The drum unit is a cylindrical structure that consists of an outer drum and an inner drum helix. The
live ammunition rounds and expended cases are stored radially around the longitudinal axis of the
outer drum with their bases in an outward direction.
Their bases (in partitions) suspend the rounds. These partitions are mounted lengthwise with respect
to the inner surface of the outer drum. With the outer drum mounted to the aircraft's structure, the
rounds are moved along the length of the partitions by the rotation of the double-lead helix (inner
drum). It is easy to understand this movement if the inner drum helix is thought of as the threads on a
screw. The projectile end of the casing protrudes into the threads.
As the inner drum helix is rotated, it produces an auger-type motion, causing the rounds to slide along
the partitions from one end to the other end of the outer drum.

6-11
 Figure 6-15 — Drum unit assembly.

Entrance Cover
The entrance cover is mounted to the entrance end of the outer drum. The entrance cover contains a
retainer gear and 252 steel ball bearings that support the scoop disks and the inner drum helix. The
retainer partitions are mounted to the retainer gear that controls the position of the rounds as they are
passed from the entrance cover to the scoop disk. A spring-loaded timing pin on the entrance cover is
used to index the drum for installation of the entrance unit.

Exit Cover
The exit cover is mounted to the exit end of the outer drum. The exit cover is constructed like the
entrance cover. It controls the position of the rounds as they pass from the scoop disk to the exit
cover. A spring-loaded timing pin on the exit cover is used to index the drum for installation of the exit
unit.

Scoop Disk
A scoop disk is mounted on each end of the inner drum helix. Each scoop disk has two sets of
sprocket spur gears located 180 degrees apart. These spur gears mesh with the retainer gear in the
entrance/exit covers that provide rotating support for the inner drum helix. The sprockets attached to
the spur gear transfer rounds from the entrance cover retainer partitions to the drum partitions, and
from the drum partitions to the retainer partitions in the exit cover.

6-12
Exit Unit
The exit unit is attached over an opening in the exit cover and geared to the exit cover retainer gear.
The exit unit contains two gear-driven sprocket assemblies. The sprocket assemblies remove live
rounds or expended cases from the retainer partitions in the exit cover and place them in the
conveyor elements. Before the exit unit is installed into the exit cover, the exit unit timing pin and the
exit cover timing pin should be pressed and held to make sure there is proper gear alignment
between the two components. Once the exit unit is properly attached to the exit cover, the spring-
loaded timing pins must release.
The exit unit also contains a last-round switch that is electrically connected to the gun control firing
circuits. The projectiles of the 20 mm rounds actuate the switch. The switch prevents expended
rounds (empty cases) from being fed into the gun and jamming it. Before the gun will fire, the
ammunition must be cycled through the ammunition drum until the first round actuates the last-round
switch. When there is no more ammunition present or when expended rounds are present, the last-
round switch is released. This automatically initiates the gun clearing cycle and terminates gun firing.
Before the gun can be fired again, the ground loading crew, in order to actuate the last-round switch,
must manually position live ammunition.

Entrance Unit
The entrance unit is attached over the opening in the entrance cover and geared to the entrance
cover retainer gear. The entrance unit contains three gear-driven sprocket assemblies. The sprocket
assemblies remove live rounds or expended cases from the conveyor elements and place them in the
entrance cover retainer partitions. Before installation, the spring-loaded timing pin should be pressed
and the scoop sprocket stud pin aligned with the entrance unit timing mark. With the entrance unit
properly timed and aligned, the entrance cover-timing pin should be pressed and the timing mark on
the scoop disk aligned with the timing mark on the entrance cover. To ensure proper gear alignment
between the two components, the entrance unit and the entrance cover should be properly timed and
aligned.
Once the entrance unit is attached to the entrance cover, the spring-loaded timing pins must release.

Transfer Unit and Adapter Assembly

The transfer unit and adapter assembly are actually two separate components bolted together to form
one unit. They are never separated at the organizational maintenance level. The function of each
component is discussed in the following paragraphs.

Transfer Unit
The transfer unit is gear-driven by the gun and attached to the M61A1/A2 gun housing by quick-
release pins to make maintenance easier. The gear-driven sprocket assemblies and guides maintain
positive control of the rounds and conveyor elements passing through the transfer unit. The transfer
unit removes the rounds from the conveyor and places them into the extractor lip of the gun breech
bolts. The transfer unit also receives expended cases and unfired rounds from the gun breech bolts,
and places them in the conveyor elements. When the transfer unit and the adapter assembly are
installed as a single unit, the timing pin should be pressed and held on the transfer unit and the gun
housing.
Once the transfer unit/adapter assembly is properly attached, the spring-loaded timing pins must
release.

6-13
Adapter Assembly
The adapter assembly bolts directly to the transfer unit. During downloading and loading operations,
the adapter assembly interfaces with the linkless ammunition loading system (LALS).

Chute Assemblies
The chute assemblies are interlocking segments.
They provide a flexible path through which the conveyor elements transport live rounds and
expended cases around an aircraft structure. The bypass chute provides a path from the entrance
unit to the exit unit, through which the conveyor elements pass. The feed chute provides a path from
the exit unit to the adapter assembly, through which the conveyor transports live rounds or
unexpended cases. The return chute provides a path from the transfer unit to the entrance unit,
through which the conveyor transports expended cases or unfired rounds.
The construction of the chute assemblies lets the conveyor elements pass through in only one
direction.
If the system is rotated in the wrong direction, the element tabs will jam in the chute segments and
damage the system. The chute ends are color-coded red and green to key the right connection to
other components. Additionally, each end is clearly marked with a metal labeling plate. This identifies
the component to which a particular chute end must be connected. The ends of the chutes are
equipped with quick-release latches for ease of removal and installation.

Conveyor Assembly
The conveyor assembly consists of individual
conveyor elements shaped to cradle a 20 mm
case. The elements are mated together with
shouldered shear bolts and self-locking nuts
to form an endless conveyor assembly
(Figure 6-16).
During system operation, the conveyor
receives rounds of ammunition from the exit
unit and delivers them through the feed chute
to the transfer unit. The conveyor also
receives expended cases and unfired rounds
from the transfer unit and transports them
through the return chute to the entrance unit.
After receipt by the entrance unit, the
expended cases and unfired rounds are
removed from the conveyor elements and
stored in the ammunition drum. The empty
conveyor passes from the entrance unit to the Figure 6-16 — Typical conveyor element
exit unit through the bypass chute. Tabs on assembly.
the conveyor elements, which engage guides
in the chutes, exit unit, entrance unit, adapter assembly, and transfer unit, maintain positive control of
the conveyor elements. The total number of elements required for a system varies according to
aircraft application.

6-14
Gun Drive and Drum Drive Systems
A hydraulic drive unit run by the aircraft’s hydraulic system simultaneously drives the M61A1/A2 gun
and the ammunition handling system. The hydraulic pressure is supplied through a hydraulic fluid
manifold electrically controlled by a dual-rate solenoid valve. This solenoid valve is controlled from the
cockpit through the gun control unit (GCU), which results in the gun firing at 6,000 (GUN HIGH) or
4,000 (GUN LOW) rounds per minute. Attached to the hydraulic drive unit is a mechanical drive unit
that consists of a gear train with one input shaft (from the hydraulic drive unit) and, depending upon
the type of aircraft, one or two output shafts.
The F/A-18 aircraft uses a mechanical drive unit with one output shaft. Because the ammunition drum
is near the mechanical drive unit, a gear on the output shaft of the mechanical drive unit meshes
directly with the drum drive. A two-piece telescoping shaft transmits power from the same output shaft
of the mechanical drive unit to the gun drive. This, in turn, drives the gun rotor.
The aircraft has provisions to manually rotate the gun system by using a manual hand crank. During
ground maintenance, the gun system may be rotated hydraulically by actuating a manual control on
the hydraulic drive unit when the aircraft’s hydraulic system is operating.

Gun Gas Purge System

The M61A1/A2 gun is internally mounted in the aircraft's fuselage. When the gun is fired, the
temperature of the gun barrels increases rapidly, and the gun compartment is filled with gun gas from
the fired rounds. If the barrels are not properly cooled, the rounds may cook-off due to excessive
barrel temperatures. Gun gas, when confined to an enclosed area such as a gun compartment, is
highly explosive. The gun gas purge system cools the barrels and purges gas from the compartment
during gun firing operations.
The F/A-18 gun gas purge system uses engine bleed air and has an additional gas control provided
by a hydraulically actuated ram-air scavenge door that opens automatically during gun-firing
operations. The gun gases are vented through louvers in the lower mold line of the aircraft fuselage.

M61A1/A2 Gun System Installations

M61A1/A2 gun and ammunition handling system installations have the same basic components.
However, some components are peculiar to specific gun systems.

F/A-18 Gun System Installation

The F/A-18 M61A1/A2 gun system is internally mounted in the nose of the aircraft on the centerline.
The fired projectiles exit the aircraft through the gun blast diffuser assembly, located just forward of
the cockpit windscreen. Depending upon the mission objective, the gun can be operated in the air-to-
ground (A/G) or air-to-air (A/A) computer mode. There are two A/G modes—continuously computed
impact point (CCIP) and manual (MAN). There are three A/A modes—director, disturbed, and cage.
The pilot can select any one of the A/G or A/A modes while in flight.
The ammunition handling system holds a maximum of 578 rounds of ammunition. A round limiter,
located in the gun compartment, can be preset to limit the total number of rounds the pilot can fire.
The round limiter is used during training missions, and permits two or three gunnery missions from
one gun load-out.
For example, ground maintenance personnel set the round limiter at 200 rounds. When the pilot has
fired 200 rounds, the gun's electrical system automatically initiates the gun clearing cycle. This
prevents further firing until ground maintenance personnel manually reset the round limiter.

6-15
While in flight, the pilot has the option of selecting unrestricted firing or presetting the number of
rounds per burst. If the pilot selects unrestricted firing, the gun fires continuously as long as the
trigger is depressed and ammunition is available.
For example, if the pilot presets 50 rounds, the gun fires bursts of 50 rounds each time the trigger is
pulled and released. A display panel in the cockpit continuously indicates the number of rounds
remaining.
The clearing sector retainer assembly (Figure 6-14) is used to manually clear the gun. When the
manual clearing handle is in the cleared position, a wire rope assembly depresses the gun clearing
sector assembly against the gun housing. This directs the breech-bolt assemblies into the clearing
cam path when the gun is manually rotated. The manual clearing handle is held in the clearing
position by a locking tab.

NOTE
For safety reasons, the manual clearing handle should
remain in the cleared position until gun-arming procedures
are actually performed.

When the gun access door is closed, the position of the manual clearing handle can be determined
by the position of the indicator located on the door. If the indicator is flush with the door surface, the
manual clearing handle is in the firing position. If the indicator protrudes from the door surface, the
manual clearing handle is in the cleared position.
The entire gun system is handled as a single palletized unit. This includes the M61A1/A2 gun, drum
unit assembly, ammunition chutes, element chutes, and hydraulic motor. The system bolts directly to
the aircraft structure with four bolts, and does not require any other bore sighting or alignment. Other
than minor adjustments in the aircraft, all maintenance is performed at the intermediate-maintenance
level. The system is removed from the aircraft as a unit by using gun-handling adapters, a weapon
skid or trailer, and a bomb-hoisting unit. The bomb-hoisting unit is used to raise or lower the gun
system as it is being removed or installed. A gun system hoist adapter, designed to support the hoist
boom, is attached to the aircraft during the raising or lowering operation. A gun-handling adapter
attached to a weapon’s skid or trailer supports the gun system after it is removed from the aircraft.
For further information concerning the F/A-18 M61A1/A2 gun installation, you should refer to
Organizational Maintenance System Maintenance with IPB Gun System, A1-F18AC-750-300.

M61A1/A2 Gun System Maintenance

The maintenance and testing responsibilities of M61A1/A2 gun installations are distributed evenly
between the organizational and intermediate levels of maintenance. The basic responsibilities of
these two levels of maintenance are discussed in the following paragraphs.

Organizational Maintenance
Organizational maintenance includes servicing (loading and unloading), preflight inspection, postflight
inspection, minor periodic maintenance, malfunction troubleshooting, and removal and installation of
components on the aircraft. Also, maintenance of the aircraft system and controls must be included in
the aviation ordnanceman (AO) organizational responsibilities.
The gun firing record or log is kept at this level. The cumulative total of rounds fired is the basis for
most of the maintenance. The number of rounds fired per firing flight is obtained from a counter
located within the aircraft. For record accuracy, each time the gun installation is loaded, the counter
must be reset (usually to zero) according to the instructions applicable to the aircraft. The two primary
6-16
tasks that depend upon the round interval (rounds fired) are (1) torquing the two forward front track
bolts (30,000 rounds), and (2) changing the breech-bolt assemblies (15,000 rounds).
Organizational responsibilities are NOT included in NAVAIR 11-95M61-1. Organizational
responsibilities are outlined in maintenance requirements cards (MRCs), aircraft maintenance
instruction manuals (MIMs), and aircraft loading manuals.
If a component is being removed for sudden stoppage (jam) maintenance, care and extra precautions
should be taken. Loose propellant powder from ruptured cartridge cases may be scattered about the
gun compartment. This creates an extremely hazardous situation. The loose powder must be
removed in a radiation hazard (RADHAZ)-free environment before removing a component.

Intermediate Maintenance
Intermediate maintenance responsibilities are tasks associated with repair or replacement of
unserviceable or damaged assemblies, components, or parts of the gun installation that do not
require the special maintenance facilities of an overhaul depot. When the M61A1/A2 gun reaches a
round interval of 120,000 rounds fired or requires major repair or alteration, it is sent to a depot-level
maintenance activity. The ammunition handling and gun drive system maintenance procedures are
identical at both the intermediate- and depot-maintenance levels (with one exception—the depot level
removes bearings); therefore, such maintenance is generally performed at the intermediate level.
Intermediate maintenance may be divided into two categories—scheduled and unscheduled.
Scheduled maintenance includes inspecting, disassembling, replacing parts, lubricating, assembling,
and functionally checking components based on the round interval specified in technical manuals.
Scheduled gun maintenance begins at 7,500 rounds and proceeds through various interval states for
different parts replacement up to the 120,000-round overhaul interval. Scheduled maintenance for the
handling and drive system is set at an interval of 30,000 rounds.

GAU-21 .50-CALIBER AIRCRAFT GUN SYSTEM

The GAU-21 .50–caliber aircraft machine gun (Figure 6-17) is an air-cooled, recoil-operated, open-
bolt, alternate-feed weapon. It is capable of firing at a rapid rate of 950 to 1,100 rounds per minute
and provides medium-range suppressive fire. See Table 6-1 for additional GAU-21 characteristics.

Figure 6-17 — GAU-21 .50-caliber aircraft machine gun.

6-17
 Table 6-1 — GAU-21 .50-Caliber Aircraft Machine Gun Characteristics
ITEM WEIGHT
GAU-21 (empty weight of complete gun) 80 pounds
Weapon length 66.5 inches
Weight of barrel 11.0 pounds
Length of barrel 36 inches
RIFLING
Number of grooves 8
Twist and direction Right-handed
Twist (one turn in) 15 inches
Imposed feed belt load
Barrel life 10,000 rounds
Depot maintenance cycle 40,000 rounds
Ammunition* (.50 caliber) 12.7 mm
(*Includes cartridge case, projectile, powder, and link)
CHARACTERISTICS
RANGE: (air to ground)
Maximum (M-33 ball) 6,500 meters
Maximum effective 1,850 meters

FIRING RATE: (Rounds/min) 1,025 ± 75 rounds

Sustained 100 rounds per minute for 6 minutes

Rapid 200 rounds per minute for 3 minutes

Burst limit 600 rounds

Muzzle velocity Approx. 2,887 feet per second

Description
The eight major assemblies of the GAU-21 machine gun (Figure 6-18) consist of the barrel assembly,
receiver assembly, bolt assembly, barrel buffer assembly, feed cover assembly, back plate assembly,
auxiliary return spring assembly, and trigger assembly.
The GAU-21 weapon system is capable of being mounted on the MH-60S/R aircraft. The weapon
system includes compatibility with night vision device-capable targeting, pointing, and illuminating
laser systems. The operation of the weapon, along with the ammunition handling, feed, and storage
system, does not require electrical power from the aircraft or any other source. The MH-60 aircraft
can be configured with one or two GAU-21 machine guns.
Refer to Organizational Maintenance with Illustrated Parts Breakdown, GAU-21 .50-Caliber Aircraft
Gun System, NAVAIR 11-95GAU21-1 for detailed operation and maintenance.

6-18
 Figure 6-18 — GAU-21 major assemblies.

GAU-16 .50-CALIBER AIRCRAFT MACHINE GUN

The GAU-16 .50-caliber machine gun (Figure 6-19) is an automatic, recoil-operated, closed-bolt, belt-
fed, air-cooled machine gun designed for installation in aircraft. The gun uses a disintegrating metallic
link belt for all firing applications. By repositioning bolt and cover assembly components within the
receiver, ammunition can be fed into the gun from either the right or left side. The weapon system
includes compatibility with night vision device-capable targeting, pointing, and illuminating laser
systems. The GAU-16 consists of the following major assemblies (Figure 6-20): barrel and barrel
extension assembly, rod assembly, breech bolt assembly, recoil buffer assembly, cover assembly,
retracting slide assembly, receiver assembly, barrel jacket assembly, back plate assembly, and front
sight assembly.

6-19
Figure 6-19 — GAU-16 .50-caliber aircraft machine gun.

Figure 6-20 — GAU-16 major assemblies.

6-20
The weapon is used in the MH-60 aircraft. Gun characteristics are listed in Table 6-2.
Table 6-2 — GAU-16 Characteristics
ITEM WEIGHT
Gun
Weight of equipment 65 pounds
Retracting slide assembly 3.13 pounds
Back plate with spade grips 3.88 pounds
Weight of barrel 15.02 pounds (new)
11.12 pounds (old)
Length of barrel 36.00 inches
Length overall 56.25 inches
With flash suppressor 71.00 inches
RIFLING
Length 31.92 inches
Number of grooves 8
Twist (direction) Right-hand
Twist (one turn in) 15.00 inches
Operation Short recoil
Feed Disintegrating link belt
Imposed feed belt load 15 pounds max
Firing pin release:
Pressure applied to sear 23 pounds max
Pressure applied to sear slide 35 pounds max
Barrel life 5000 rounds (new)
3000 rounds (old)
Depot maintenance cycle 50,000 rounds
Cooling Air
Performance rate of fire 750 to 850 rounds per min

GAU-17/A 7.62MM AIRCRAFT MACHINE GUN

The GAU-17/A 7.62 mm aircraft machine gun (Figure 6-21) is an externally-powered, 28VDC, six-
barrel, air-cooled, multi-purpose weapon with a fixed rate of 3,000 rounds per minute. The major gun
assemblies (Figure 6-22) are the barrels and barrel clamp assembly, housing assembly, rotor
assembly, and clutch assembly. The weapon is used only on the HH-60 aircraft. Gun characteristics
are listed in Table 6-3.

6-21
Figure 6-21 — GAU-17/A 7.62 mm aircraft machine gun.

Figure 6-22 — GAU-17 major assemblies.

6-22
 Table 6-3 — 7.62MM GAU-17 Characteristics
ITEM WEIGHT
Gun 41 pounds
Gun, overall length 33 inches
BARREL
Length 22.0 inches
Weight 1 pound 10 ounces
Rotation of cluster Counterclockwise viewed from breech end
BURST LIMIT
In-flight 12 – 15 seconds, 1 minute cooling
Aviation trainer 6 seconds, 1 minute cooling
BARREL RIFLING
Grooves 4
Twist Right hand
Length 20.0 inches
One turn in 10 inches
Muzzle velocity 2,850 feet per second
Cooling Air
Rate of fire 3,000 rounds per minute
Operating temperature range -65 to +165 °F
Burst rate 2 – 3 rounds per second (min), no max
Refer to Organizational Maintenance with Illustrated Parts Breakdown, Aircraft Machine Gun 7.62MM,
GAU-17/A, NAVAIR 11-95GAU17-1 for detailed operation and maintenance.

M240D 7.62 MM AIRCRAFT MACHINE GUN

The M240D (Figure 6-23) is an air-cooled, gas-operated, automatic machine gun. It fires the standard
7.62 mm North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) cartridge from the open bolt position at firing
rates of 650 to 950 rounds per minute. The weapon barrel head-space and timing are fixed, allowing
quick barrel changes during cooling and maintenance. The M240D incorporates a rear sight leaf and
a barrel-mounted sighting system. The weapon system includes compatibility with night vision device-
capable targeting, pointing, and illuminating laser systems.
The weapon can be mounted in the MH-60 aircraft on a pintle and is held by a quick release pin. The
weapon mounts are attached to rotating arm assemblies, which allow the weapons to be locked
outboard in the firing position or stowed inside the aircraft when locked in the inboard position. The
weapon can be removed easily from the helicopter, and if needed, used for ground defense with the
egress kit installed. Refer to Organizational Maintenance with Illustrated Parts Breakdown 7.62mm
Aircraft Machine Gun M240D, NAVAIR 11-95M240D1-1 for a detailed discussion of the weapon
system. Table 6-4 shows the M240D characteristics.

6-23
Figure 6-23 — M240D 7.62 mm machine gun.

Figure 6-24 — M240D major assemblies.

6-24
 Table 6-4 — M240D Characteristics
ITEM WEIGHT
Gun weight
Air configuration 25.6 pounds
Ground configuration 26.2 pounds
Barrel weight 6.6 pounds (approx.)
Gun length
Air configuration 42.3 inches
Ground configuration 49 inches
Gun width 6.0 inches
Gun height 6.5 inches
Rate of fire
Cyclic 650 to 950 rounds per minute - Change barrel every minute
(gas plug position dependent).

Sustained 100 rounds per minute (4-5 sec between bursts) - Change
barrel every 10 minutes.

Rapid 200 rounds per minute (2-3 sec between bursts) - Change
barrel every 2 minutes.
Range:
Maximum 3,725 meters
Maximum effective range 1,200 meters

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The weapons systems described in this chapter are safe systems. Live rounds in the M61A1 and
M61A2 are isolated from the firing circuits except when the gun system is deliberately being fired. The
M61A1 and M61A2 gun systems are RADHAZ-safe and completely shielded from radiation fields.
The M61A1 and M61A2 guns are charged and cleared in flight, so the aircraft can take off and land
without live rounds in the firing position.
Although the sole purpose of all ordnance is to destroy an enemy, the equipment cannot identify
friend from foe. Therefore, all safety precautions must be followed at all times.
The following general safety precautions are not related to any specific equipment or procedure.
These precautions are recommended safety precautions that all personnel should follow when
operating and maintaining equipment.
x All persons who supervise or perform work in connection with ammunition handling should be
familiar with the United States Ordnance Safety Precautions, NAVSEA OP 3347
x When firing is conducted using live ammunition, observe all existing range regulations
x Before undertaking any operation for which a checkoff list exists, the checkoff list is read so all
personnel know what to do
x When provided, always use safety devices to prevent accidents; keep safety devices in good
operating order at all times

6-25
x Do not make changes, modifications, or additions to a weapons system without prior approval
and authorization from the appropriate authority
x A hazardous condition exists if a gun malfunction occurs and there is anything in line with the
gun muzzle; observe area clearance requirements during maintenance periods
x Percussion can fire electrically-primed ammunition; NEVER cycle live ammunition through a
gun for testing purposes
x The explosive elements in electric primers are highly sensitive to static electricity; make sure
the primer button does not come into contact with the human body
x Observe fire regulations and maintain good ventilation when using cleaning solvents and other
volatile maintenance materials
x Before performing maintenance actions involving pneumatic or hydraulic pressurized
components, ensure that all pressure is removed and the component is in the safest possible
condition

6-26
 End of Chapter 6
Aircraft Guns
Review Questions
6-1. The M61A1/A2 automatic gun is driven by what means?

A. Electrically
B. Hydraulically
C. Mechanically
D. Pneumatically

6-2. The M61A1/A2 automatic gun is controlled by what means?

A. Electrically
B. Hydraulically
C. Mechanically
D. Pneumatically

6-3. At what prescribed rate of rounds per minute does the M61A1/A2 gun fire M50 series
ammunition?

A. 1,000 to 2,200
B. 2,000 to 6,000
C. 4,000 to 6,000
D. 5,000 to 7,500

6-4. What components are the primary parts of an M61A1/A2 automatic gun?

A. Barrels, housing assembly, and muzzle clamp assembly

B. Housing assembly, muzzle clamp assembly, and clearing sector assembly
C. Barrels, housing assembly, and rotor assembly
D. Muzzle clamp assembly, rotor assembly, and barrels

6-5. What means are used to secure the gun barrels to the stub rotor of an M61A1/A2 automatic
gun?

A. Pipe threads
B. Standard threads
C. Interrupted locking lugs
D. Barrel retaining safety pins

6-6. On an M61A1/A2 gun, what component picks up a round as it enters the gun?

A. Clearing sector assembly

B. Guide bar
C. Breech-bolt assembly
D. Firing contact assembly

6-27
6-7. On an M61A1/A2 gun, a full firing cycle requires what prescribed number of actions?

A. Four
B. Five
C. Six
D. Seven

6-8. Which of the following two cycles describe the M61A1/A2 automatic gun operation?

A. Firing and clearing

B. Loading and unloading
C. Feeding and extracting
D. Clearing and loading

6-9. What component of an M61A1/A2 automatic gun ejects the empty case from the gun?

A. The ejector
B. The guide bar
C. The extractor lip
D. The ejection cam

6-10. On an M61A1/A2 automatic gun, what sequence of actions is performed by the breech-bolt
assembly during one full firing cycle?

A. Feed, chamber, ram and lock, fire, unlock, extract, and eject
B. Feed, chamber, lock and fire, unlock, extract, and eject
C. Ram and chamber, lock and fire, unlock, extract, and eject
D. Load and lock, fire, unlock, extract, and eject

6-11. A drum unit assembly of an M61A1/A2 automatic gun consists of the drum unit and what other
major parts?

A. Entrance unit, scoop disk, and exit cover

B. Entrance cover, transfer unit, and exit cover
C. Entrance unit, scoop disk, and exit unit
D. Entrance cover, scoop disk, and exit cover

6-12. The mechanical drive unit in an F/A-18 aircraft has what total number of output shafts?

A. One
B. Two
C. Three
D. Four

6-13. A gun gas purge system of an M61A1/A2 automatic gun is used for what purpose?

A. Provide gas to operate the gun

B. Cool the gun barrels only
C. Purge gas from the gun compartment only
D. Cool the gun barrels and purge gas from the gun compartment

6-28
6-14. The air required to operate the gun gas purge system in an F/A-18 aircraft is provided by what
air source?

A. Engine bleed air only

B. Ram air scavenge door only
C. Engine bleed air and the ram air scavenge door
D. Environmental cooling system

6-15. In an F/A-18 aircraft, the M61A1/A2 automatic gun system can be operated in what computer
mode?

A. A/A or A/B only

B. A/G only
C. A/C only
D. A/A or A/G

6-16. In an F/A-18 aircraft, what component is used to manually clear the M61A1/A2 automatic gun?

A. Clearing section clamp

B. Clearing sector holdback
C. Clearing sector retainer
D. Clearing solenoid

6-17. An M61A1/A2 automatic gun must be sent to a depot-level maintenance activity under which of
the following conditions?

A. When major repair is required

B. When an alteration is authorized
C. When 120,000 rounds have been expended
D. All the answers are correct

6-18. Which of the following gun maintenance procedures should be accomplished during scheduled
maintenance of an M61A1/A2 automatic gun?

A. Lubrication
B. Normal disassembly and parts replacement
C. A functional check of the components based on the round interval
D. All the answers are correct

6-19. Scheduled maintenance for an M61A1/A2 automatic gun handling and drive system should be
performed after what maximum number of rounds has been fired?

A. 15,000
B. 20,000
C. 30,000
D. 100,000

6-29
6-20. What is the rapid rate of fire in rounds per minute for the GAU-21?

A. 950 to 1,100
B. 1,000 to 1,200
C. 1,000 to 1,400
D. 1,400 to 1,500

6-21. What is the maximum air-to-ground range, in meters, of the GAU-21?

A. 5,000
B. 5,500
C. 6,000
D. 6,500

6-22. How is the GAU-16 cooled after firing?

A. By water
B. By air
C. By refrigerant
D. All the answers are correct

6-23. What is the performance firing rate in rounds per minute of the GAU-16?

A. 200 to 250
B. 500 to 600
C. 750 to 850
D. 850 to 950

6-24. The GAU-17 major gun assemblies include the barrels and barrel clamp, housing, rotor, and
what assembly?

A. Primer
B. Clutch
C. Timer
D. Feeder

6-25. What is the sustained firing rate in rounds per minute of the M240D?

A. 100
B. 200
C. 600
D. 800

6-26. What weapon can be removed easily from the helicopter and used for ground defense if
needed?

A. GAU-21
B. MG-17
C. M240D
D. M61A1

6-30
 CHAPTER 7
AMMUNITION LOADING
Aircraft gun ammunition is developed for specific types of aircraft-mounted guns. The M61A1/A2 uses
M50/projectile gun unit (PGU) series 20 millimeter (mm) ammunition. The M50/PGU series consists
of various types of cartridges developed for specific applications, including test, dummy, target
practice, target practice tracer, armor-piercing incendiary, high-explosive incendiary, semi-armor-
piercing, and high-explosive incendiary. Blank and dummy rounds are also used for practice and
maintenance.
The M50/PGU series 20 mm ammunition is loaded into the M61A1/A2 gun through the linkless
ammunition loading system (LALS) series. The LALS transports rounds from the transporter to the
aircraft system, and simultaneously transports spent cases and cleared rounds from the aircraft
system to the transporter.
The GAU-21 weapon system and the GAU-16 aircraft machine gun use the .50 caliber series
ammunition. The GAU-17 and M240D aircraft machine gun use the 7.62 mm North Atlantic Treaty
Organization (NATO) series cartridge. Like the 20 mm series ammunition, there are various types of
small arms ammunition developed and used for specific applications.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
When you have completed this chapter, you will be able to do the following:
1. Describe aircraft gun ammunition configuration.
2. Identify aircraft gun cartridges.
3. Describe the uses of aircraft gun cartridges.
4. Identify the components of the LALS, to include the following: ammunition loader components:
Storage container, conveyor assembly, transfer unit assembly, support frame assembly.
5. Identify the components of the ammunition replenisher to include the following: interchange
loading assembly, removable frame assembly, and table assembly.
6. Identify the operating procedures to follow when loading/downloading the transporter and
aircraft gun system.
7. Identify safety precautions to follow when working with the LALS.

AIRCRAFT GUN AMMUNITION

M50 Configuration Ammunition
M50 configuration ammunition (Figure 7-1) for the
M61A1/A2 Navy aircraft gun is issued in the form of
cartridges (rounds). A complete service cartridge
assembly consists of a cartridge case, electric primer,
propellant, projectile, and fuze. All service cartridges
Figure 7-1 — M50 configuration
have matched ballistics and are electrically primed.
cartridge.

7-1
Cartridge Components and General Description
The cartridge components for M50-configured ammunition, as used in a complete round, are
discussed in the following paragraphs.

Classification
The M50 configuration ammunition currently issued is classified as follows:
x Dummy cartridge M51A1B1, M51A2 (steel)
x High-pressure test (HPT) cartridge M54A1
x Target practice (TP) cartridge M55A2
x High-explosive incendiary (HEI) cartridge M56A3/A4
x Target practice-tracer (TP-T) cartridge M220
x High-explosive incendiary-tracer (HEI-T) cartridge M242

Cartridge Case
The M103 (brass) and the M103A1 (steel) cartridge cases (Figure 7-2) are marked longitudinally. The
lettering is stenciled in waterproof marking ink on the cartridge case. The caliber/case designation is
on the first line. The manufacturer symbol, interfix number, lot serial number, and year of manufacture
are on the second line. The M103 case is loaded for use with all service ammunition, and the
M103A1 is used with the M51A1B1/M51A2 dummy cartridges.

Figure 7-2 — M103 (brass) and M103A1 (steel) cartridge cases.

Propellant
All M50-configured cartridges are loaded with double-base ball (spherical) propellant WC 870 or WC
872.

M52A3B1 Electric Primer

The electric primer is used in all current M50 configurations. It consists of an open-ended brass cup
that contains a brass button insulated from the cup by a plastic liner. The firing pin of the gun contacts
the brass button. The ignition charge (a conductive explosive mixture) is in contact with the other side
of the button, and is retained by a paper disk and a metal support cup. The electrically initiated primer
ignites the propellant charge.

7-2
 NOTE
The primer explosive element is sensitive to
electromagnetic and electrostatic energy.

Projectiles
All projectiles, except the HPT, have
essentially the same external configuration.
The rotating band is a copper alloy swaged
into a circumferential groove near the aft end
of the steel body.

M505A3 Point Detonating Fuze

The M505A3 point detonating (PD) fuze
(Figure 7-3) consists of a body assembly, a
rotor assembly, and a booster assembly. The
fuze has a delayed arming distance of 20 to
35 feet after it leaves the muzzle of the gun.
Before firing the HEI projectile, the rotor and
the firing pin are locked in position by the rotor
safety spring. The rotor contains the
detonator, which is out of line with the firing
pin. Centrifugal force causes the spring to
open, allowing the rotor to move in line with
the firing pin. The fuze functions when the
nose of the fuze is crushed against the target, Figure 7-3 — M505A3 point detonating fuze
forcing the firing pin against the detonator. (unarmed).
The detonator, in turn, initiates the booster,
which detonates and initiates the projectile's
explosive charge.

Tracer
A tracer mix is direct-loaded into a cavity machined in the base of the TP-T and HEI-T projectiles. It is
used in assembling the M220 and M242 cartridges, respectively. The heat and pressure of the
propelling charge ignites the tracer. The tracer is visible for about 1,280 yards of projectile flight.

M51A1B1/M51A2 Dummy Cartridges

Dummy cartridges are completely inert assemblies and are used for drill and testing the feeder
assembly of a weapon. The dummy cartridge is assembled with the M51A1B1/M51A2 projectile and
M103A1 cartridge case to simulate the service cartridge. The two cartridges are the same except for
a change to the annulus/primer pocket. The cartridge contains approximately 635 grains of inert
material, which is an average overall weight equal to that of the other M50-configured ammunition.

M254 Dummy Cartridge

The M254 cartridge is made of plastic. It is an alternative to the M51A1B1/M51A2 steel dummy
cartridge. The M254 differs from live ammunition in its appearance and the feel of its nylon
composition. M50 configuration characteristics are shown in Table 7-1.

7-3
 Table 7-1 — M50 Configuration Ammunition Characteristics
Cartridge Approximate Unit Weight (grains)
Total Wt.
M52A3B1 (grains) Remarks
Designatio M103 Propellan Projectil
Type Electric (approx.)
n Case t e
Primer
M51A1B1/ Dummy 1,775 None 635 (Inert) 1,520 3,850 M103A1
M51A2 (min) steel case
M54A1 HPT 1,855 22 590 1,965 4,392
M55A2 TP 1,855 22 590 1,521 3,935
M56A3/ HEI 1,855 22 590 1,565 3,965 M505A3
M56A4 fuze
required
M220 TP-T 1,855 22 590 1,470 3,935
M242 HEI-T 1,855 22 590 1,535 3,865 M505A3
fuze
required
M254 Dummy n/a None None n/a 4,005 Plastic

M54A1 High-Pressure Test Cartridge

The M54A1 cartridge is used only for proof firing of the gun at the place of manufacture. The
projectile is made from a solid steel bar that has a standard rotating band. The M103 or M103A1
cartridge case is used with the M52A3B1 electric primer.

M55A2 Target Practice Cartridge

The M55A2 cartridge does not contain an explosive filler in the projectile. The solid nose is made of
aluminum alloy. The projectile shape and ballistic properties are similar to those of the other M50-
configured ammunition. The cartridge is used for practice firing, bore sighting weapons, and testing
new guns. The M103 cartridge case and M52A3B1 electric primer make up the cartridge.

M56A3 High-Explosive Incendiary Cartridge

The M56A3 or M56A4 projectile is used in the M56A3 cartridge. The projectile is loaded with an
incendiary and explosive composition, giving the combined effect of the blast of a high-explosive
charge plus a fire-starting ability. Both the M56A3 and M56A4 are loaded with aluminized composition
A-4 HEI charge. The major difference between the projectiles is their construction. The M56A3 has a
base plate to prevent ignition of the HEI charge by the propellant. The M56A4 does not have the base
plate. Both cartridges use the M103 case, M52A3B1 electric primer, and the M505A3 PD fuze.

M220 Target Practice-Tracer Cartridge

The M221 projectile is used with the M220 cartridge. The M221 projectile is similar to the M55A2
projectile, except it incorporates a tracer in the base of the projectile.

M242 High-Explosive Incendiary-Tracer Cartridge

The M242 projectile is used with the M242 cartridge. The projectile has a tracer in the base and
aluminized composition A-4 in the forward section. It has a combined effect of a high-explosive
7-4
charge plus a fire-starting ability. The projectile is assembled with the M505A3 PD fuze, the M103
case, and the M52A3B1 electric primer.

Identification
Ammunition is identified by the lettering on the body of the projectile and by the painted color of the
projectile.

Lettering
The lettering (Figure 7-4) is stenciled in
waterproof marking ink around the body of
the projectile. The first line of lettering
identifies the caliber and type of cartridge;
for example, 20 mm HEI, 20 mm TP, or
20 mm HEI-T. The second line gives the
cartridge designation; for example,
M55A2 or M220. The last line consists of
a code number that identifies the
manufacturer, interfix number, lot serial
number, and year of manufacture. The
color of the letters has no meaning.
Figure 7-4 — Example of color coding and marking
Color Coding for M50 configuration ammunition.
The color codes for the M50-configured 20 mm ammunition are listed in Table 7-2. You can see
exactly where colors are located on the projectile. The projectile (Figure 7-4) is divided into sections
marked A, B, C, and D. The corresponding column in Table 7-2 lists the color found in that location
for each projectile type.
Information contained in Table 7-2 identifies the high-explosive incendiary-tracer round M242. First, it
shows the projectile and its color code in column A. Then, section A of the projectile is not painted;
therefore, section A of the projectile remains the natural color of the metal (copper). Column B shows
the color for section B of the projectile. Section B area is painted yellow (high explosives), and section
B1 is painted red (incendiary). The same procedures are followed for sections C and D. Note the red
T markings in the section B area just outside of the B1 section. The red T, and in some cases an
orange T, shows the presence of an incendiary explosive (tracer).

7-5
 Table 7-2 — Color Coding and Marking for M50 Configuration Ammunition
Projectile Type and Color of Painting Color of
Designation Marking
Locations (See Figure 7-4)
(Except as noted)
A B C D
Dummy Chromate Chromate Chromate Chromate Black
M51A1B1/M51A2 finish finish finish finish
High-Pressure Test No paint Purple Purple Purple Black
(HPT) M54A1 (copper)
Target Practice (TP) No paint Blue Blue Blue White
M55A2/M55A2B1 (copper)
M55A3/M55A3B1
High-Explosive No paint Yellow; red No paint No paint Black
Incendiary (HEI) (copper) band in B1 (chromate) (chromate)
M56A3/M56A4 area
Target Practice-Tracer No paint Blue Blue Blue White with
(TP-T) M221 (M220 (copper) orange T
cartridge) (at location
B1)
High-Explosive No paint Yellow; red No paint No paint Black with
Incendiary–Tracer (HEI- (copper) band in B1 (chromate) (chromate) red T
T) M242 area (below B1)
Plastic Dummy No paint No paint No paint No paint Black
Cartridge M254 (white (white (white (white
plastic) plastic) plastic) plastic)

Projectile Gun Unit Configuration Ammunition

The improved 20 mm PGU configuration ammunition for
the M61A1/A2 aircraft guns is issued in the form of
cartridges (Figure 7-5). All service cartridges have
matched ballistics and are electrically primed. Initially
procured ammunition is not graded, and all accepted lots
are serviceable for issue and use in applicable weapons. Figure 7-5 — PGU configuration
cartridge.
Cartridge Components and General
Description
The cartridge components for PGU-configured ammunition, as used in a complete round, are
discussed in the following paragraphs.

Classification
The PGU configuration ammunition currently issued is classified as follows:
x TP cartridge PGU-27/B and PGU-27A/B
x Semi-armor-piercing high-explosive incendiary (SAPHEI) cartridge PGU-28/B and PGU-28A/B

7-6
 x TP-T cartridge PGU-30/B and PGU-30A/B
x Dummy cartridge PGU-39/B

Cartridge Case
The M103 brass cartridge cases (Figure 7-6) are marked longitudinally or circumferentially with the
caliber/case designation on the first line. The manufacturer symbol is on the second line. The interfix
number, lot serial number, and year of manufacture are on the third line.

Figure 7-6 — M103 brass cartridge case and markings.

Propellant
All PGU/B-configured cartridges are loaded with ball (spherical) WC 867 propellant. All PGU A/B
cartridges are loaded with ball (spherical) WC 868 propellant.

M52A3B1 Electric Primer

The electric primer is used in all current 20 mm PGU configurations. It consists of an open-ended
brass cup that contains a brass button insulated from the cup by a plastic liner. The firing pin of the
gun contacts the brass button. The ignition charge (a conductive explosive mixture) is in contact with
the other side of the button, and is retained by a paper disk and a metal support cup. The electrically
initiated primer ignites the propellant charge.

7-7
 NOTE
The primer explosive element is sensitive to
electromagnetic and electrostatic energy.

Projectiles
All projectiles have essentially the same external configuration. The rotating band is copper alloy
swaged into a circumferential groove near the aft end of the steel body.

PGU-27/B and PGU-27A/B Target Practice

The PGU-27/B and PGU-27A/B projectiles consists of a steel body with a solid aluminum nosepiece
swaged or crimped to the steel body.

PGU-28/B and PGU-28A/B Semi-Armor-Piercing High-Explosive Incendiary

The PGU-28/B and PGU-28A/B SAPHEI projectiles consists of a steel body with an internal cavity
filled with a sponge zirconium pellet, composition A-4, and RS 40 incendiary mix. The aluminum nose
contains RS 41 incendiary mix and is swaged to the steel body on the PGU-28/B and threaded on the
PGU-28A/B.

PGU-30/B and PGU-30A/B Target Practice-Tracer

The PGU-30/B and PGU-30A/B TP-T projectiles consists of a steel body with an aft cavity containing
the tracer pellet. The aluminum nose is swaged or crimped to the steel body.

Tracer
A tracer pellet is loaded into a cavity machined in the base of the TP-T projectile used in the
assembling of the PGU-30/B and PGU-30A/B cartridge. The heat and pressure of the propelling
charge ignites the tracer pellet. The tracer is visible for approximately 2.5 seconds during projectile
flight.

PGU-27/B and PGU-27A/B Target Practice Cartridge

The PGU-27/B and PGU-27A/B cartridges (Figure 7-7) have no explosive filler in the projectile. The
cartridge is used in practice firing, for boresighting weapons, and for testing new guns. The projectile
shape and ballistic properties are similar to those of other PGU-configured ammunition. PGU-
configured ammunition characteristics are shown in Table 7-3.

Figure 7-7 — PGU-27/B and PGU-27A/B target practice cartridge.

7-8
 Table 7-3 — PGU Configuration Ammunition Characteristics
Cartridge Approximate Unit Weight (grains)
Total Wt.
M52A3B1 (grains)
M103 Propellant
Designation Type Electric Projectile
Case (585 gr) (approx.)
Primer
PGU-27/B TP 1,855 22 WCC 867 1,550 3,900
PGU-28/B SAPHEI 1,855 22 WCC 867 1,580 3,900

PGU-30/B TP-T 1,855 22 WCC 867 1,554 3,900

PGU-27A/B TP 1,855 22 WCC 868 1,550 3,900

PGU-28A/B SAPHEI 1,855 22 WCC 868 1,522 3,900

PGU-30A/B TP-T 1,855 22 WCC 868 1,554 3,900

PGU-28/B and PGU-28A/B Semi-Armor-Piercing High-Explosive Incendiary Cartridge

The PGU-28/B and PGU-28A/B cartridges (Figure 7-8) are for use against aircraft and light material
targets, and functions with semi-armor-piercing, high explosive, and incendiary effect.

Figure 7-8 — PGU-28/B and PGU-28A/B SAPHEI.

7-9
PGU-30/B and PGU-30A/B Target Practice-Tracer Cartridge
The PGU-30/B and PGU-30A/B TP-T cartridges (Figure 7-9) are virtually the same as the PGU-27/B
projectile, except it incorporates a tracer in the base of the projectile.

Figure 7-9 — PGU-30/B and PGU-30A/B TPT.

PGU-39/B Dummy Round

The PGU-39/B cartridge consists of a projectile that has been screwed into a steel body that weighs
the same approximate weight as an actual 20 mm round. There is a hole in the base of the casing
that allows for the firing pin to protrude without damage while cycling the round through the gun
system under test. The PGU-39/B dummy round should be used for all purposes except for testing
the serviceability of the LALS prior to issue for use.

PGU Identification
Ammunition type is identified by the painted color of the projectile and by the lettering on the body of
the projectile. Figure 7-10 and Table 7-4 contain PGU configuration ammunition identification.
Table 7-4 — Color Coding and Marking for PGU Configuration Ammunition
Color of Painting
Color of
Projectile Type Locations (See Figure 7-10)
Marking
A B C D E
TP PGU-27/B PGU- No paint Blue Blue Blue Blue White
27A/B (copper)
SAPHEI PGU-28/B No paint Black Yellow Red No paint White
PGU-28A/B (copper) (chromate)
TP-T PGU-30/B PGU- No paint Blue Blue Blue Blue White with
30A/B (copper) orange T
(location D)

7-10
 Figure 7-10 — Color coding and marking for PGU configuration ammunition.

AMMUNITION CONTAINER M548

The M548 container (Figure 7-11) is made of metal. Quick-release latches at both ends attach the lid.
Required information about the ammunition contained inside is listed on the outside of the container.
The moisture-resistant seal between the lid and the container should NOT be broken until the
ammunition is to be used.

NOTE
M50/PGU series ammunition is normally packed in the M548
container as loose rounds (not pre-belted). The LALS
eliminated the requirement for pre-belted ammunition.

7-11
 Figure 7-11 — Ammunition container M548 (typical).
The rounds are packed in the container in layers. There are cardboard partitions between each layer
and between the rounds on all sides of the container. Each round has a cardboard protector around
the projectile. These cardboard partitions and tubular protectors should be used when repackaging
the ammunition in the containers.

SMALL ARMS AMMUNITION

There are numerous types of small arms ammunition available to the fleet for service use. The small
arms ammunition described below is a cartridge or a family of cartridges. Their intended use is in
various types of mounted, hand-held, or shoulder-fired weapons, .22 through .50 caliber. The
following paragraphs will provide information on cartridge terminology and cartridge components that
make up small arms ammunition.

Cartridges
A small arms cartridge is an assembly consisting of a cartridge case, a primer, a quantity of
propellant, and a bullet. A paper closure disk (instead of a bullet) seals rifle grenade and blank
cartridges. Dummy cartridges consist of a cartridge case and a bullet. Some dummy cartridges use
an inert granular material to simulate the weight and balance of live cartridges. Figure 7-12 illustrates
a typical cartridge and its component terminology.

7-12
Case
Steel, aluminum, zinc, and plastic materials have all been experimented with for manufacturing
cartridge cases. However, a brass composition of 70 percent copper and 30 percent zinc is the most
commonly used material for military cartridge cases.

Propellant
Cartridges are loaded with various propellant weights that impart sufficient velocity, within safe
pressure, to obtain the required ballistic projectile performance. The propellants are either a single-
base (nitrocellulose) or double-base (nitrocellulose and nitroglycerine) composition.

Primer
Center-fire small arms cartridges contain a percussion primer assembly. The assembly consists of a
brass or gilded metal cup. The cup contains a pellet of sensitive explosive material secured by a
paper disk and a brass anvil. The weapon’s firing pin strikes the center of the primer cup base,
compressing the primer composition between the cup and the anvil, causing the composition to
explode.

Figure 7-12 — Types of cartridge cases.

Bullet
Lead bullets were originally manufactured in the shape of a ball. With the advent of rifling in weapons,
the ball was replaced by a cylindrical lead bullet that engaged the rifling. Except in special cases, .22
through .50 caliber bullets are either lead (lead alloy) or assemblies of a jacket and a lead or steel
core. The lead used in lead-alloy bullets is combined with tin or antimony (or both) for bullet hardness.
The alloying reduces barrel leading and helps prevent the bullet from stripping (jumping) the rifling.
7-13
Jacketed bullets are used to obtain high velocities and are better suited for automatic and
semiautomatic weapons because the lead bullet may be damaged by the loading.
A bullet jacket may be either gilding metal, gilding metal-clad steel, or copper plated steel. In addition
to a lead or steel core, they may contain other components or chemicals that provide a terminal
ballistic characteristic for that bullet type.

Cartridge Classification
Ball Cartridges
The ball cartridge is for use in rifles, pistols, carbines, revolvers, machine guns, and sub-machine
guns against personnel and unarmored targets. The bullet (normally a metal jacket and a lead slug) is
for general-purpose combat and training purposes. The .50 caliber ball bullet and 7.62 mm ball bullet
contain soft steel cores.

Tracer Cartridges
The primary purpose of the tracer cartridge is to see the line of fire by means of a flame and smoke
trail. It permits visible observation of the bullet’s in-flight path or trajectory to the point of impact.

Armor-Piercing Cartridges
The armor-piercing (AP) cartridge is for use in machine guns or rifles against personnel, light armored
targets, unarmored targets, concrete shelters, and similar bullet resisting targets. The bullets have a
jacket and a core of hardened steel alloy (such as tungsten-chromium, tungsten carbide, manganese-
molybdenum, or tungsten alloy).

Armor-Piercing Incendiary Cartridge

The armor piercing incendiary (API) is a single combination instead of a combination of separate
armor piercing and incendiary cartridges for machine guns. The bullets have a jacket and a core of
hardened steel alloy (such as tungsten-chromium, tungsten carbide, manganese-molybdenum, or
tungsten alloy) and a point filler of incendiary mixture instead of lead.

Armor-Piercing Incendiary-Tracer (API-T) Cartridge

The armor piercing incendiary-tracer (API-T) cartridge is only for use in the .50 caliber weapon. It can
replace the AP and the API cartridges. The bullets have a jacket and core of hardened steel alloy
(such as tungsten-chromium, tungsten carbide, manganese-molybdenum, or tungsten alloy).

Spotter Tracer Cartridge

The spotter tracer cartridge is for use in coaxially-mounted .50 caliber spotting rifles. The bullet
trajectory is approximately the same as that of the 106 mm recoilless rifle. It serves as a fire control
device to verify weapon sight setting before firing the 106 mm recoilless rifle. The bullet contains an
impact detonator and an incendiary composition that will identify the point of impact by flash and
smoke.

Match Cartridge
The match cartridge is used in national and international match shooting competitions. The bullet
consists of a copper alloy jacket over a lead slug. The national match (NM) initials or the word Match
on the head face identifies the center-fire match cartridge. A 360 degree cannelure on the exterior of
the cartridge case near the base identifies 7.62 mm match (M852) cartridges. Markings on the
cartridge boxes identify rimfire match cartridges.
7-14
Blank Cartridge
The absence of a bullet distinguishes and identifies the blank cartridge. The purpose of the blank
cartridge is to simulate fire for gun salutes, and training maneuvers. Rifles and machine guns, as well
as revolvers and pistols, equipped with blank firing attachments are the weapons used to fire the
blank cartridge.

Grenade Cartridge
The purpose of the grenade cartridge is to propel rifle grenades, line-throwing projectiles, and ground
signals from launchers attached to rifles. The distinguishing features of rifle grenade cartridges are
the rosette crimp closure of the case mouth and the absence of a bullet.

Incendiary Cartridge
The incendiary cartridge bullet contains a core of incendiary mixture with a lead-antimony slug at the
base end. A hollow steel cylindrical body or clad steel container may be inserted within the jacket.
The purpose of the incendiary cartridge is for aircraft and ground weapon use to ignite combustible
targets such as vehicles and aircraft fuel tanks. The compressed incendiary mixture ignites upon
impact with the target.

Dummy Cartridge
The dummy cartridge consists of a cartridge case and a ball bullet. Distinguishing features are: two or
more holes drilled in the case, longitudinal corrugations in the case, and an empty primer pocket. The
dummy cartridge is used for training personnel in loading, unloading, and firing the weapon. The
dummy cartridge is completely inert.

.50 Caliber Ammunition

The .50 caliber machine gun fires various types of ammunition and each one is used for a specific
situation or mission. The information provided below will give you a general description and the
application of the .50 caliber cartridge (Figure 7-13) that is available for service use.

Figure 7-13 — .50 caliber cartridge.

7-15
M2 Armor-Piercing
The M2 cartridge is for use in .50 caliber machine guns against armored vehicles, armored aircraft,
concrete shelters, and similar bullet-resisting targets. The brass cartridge case has a gilded metal-
jacketed bullet that has a hardened core of manganese-molybdenum steel and a point filler of lead-
antimony. The bullet tip is black for identification.

M8 Armor-Piercing Incendiary
The M8 cartridge is used in .50 caliber machine guns against armored targets. Upon impact with the
target, the incendiary mixture bursts into flame and ignites the flammable material. The brass
cartridge has a gilded metal-jacketed bullet that has a hardened core of manganese-molybdenum
steel, a point filler of incendiary composition, and a base filler seal of lead-antimony. The bullet tip is
aluminum-colored for identification.

M20 Armor-Piercing Incendiary-Tracer

M20 cartridges are used in .50 caliber machine guns against armored targets. It is similar to the M8
API cartridge with the addition of a tracer element. The brass cartridge case contains a gilded metal-
jacketed bullet, similar to the M8 API bullet but with a tracer element. The bullet has a red tip and a
gray stripe for identification.

M2 Ball
The M2 cartridge is procured for use in all .50 caliber weapons against personnel and unarmored
targets. The brass cartridge case has a gilding metal jacketed bullet that has a soft steel core and
lead-antimony alloy point filler. The boat-tailed bullet has an unpainted tip.

M33 Ball
M33 cartridges are used in all .50 caliber weapons against personnel and unarmored targets. The
cartridge is a brass or steel case. A crimp secures the primer in the pocket and the joint has a
waterproofing material applied.

M1 Incendiary
The M1 cartridge is used in .50 caliber machine guns against combustible targets. It contains an
incendiary mixture that ignites upon impact with the target. The brass cartridge case has a gilding
metal-jacketed bullet the size and shape of the AP M2 bullet but has a hollow cylindrical steel body, a
lead-antimony base slug, and point filler of incendiary composition. The bullet has two knurled
cannelures rolled into the jacket and the tip is light blue.

M10 Tracer
The M10 brass cartridge case has a gilding metal-clad steel jacketed tracer bullet that is basically the
same as the M1 tracer bullet. The tip is orange for identification. When fired, the trace is dim or
invisible for the first 225 yards (205 meters) of flight, followed by a bright trace to a distance of not
less than a 1,600-yard (1,463-meter) range from the gun.

M17 Tracer
The M17 cartridge is used for firing observation. It was originally designed to replace the tracer M1
cartridge. It can substitute for the API-T M20 except that penetration is not as great. The M17 tracers
with deteriorated elements come linked together in groupings of four M17 tracers to one API-T M20.
The M17 tracer rounds serve as ball rounds in that configuration. The brass cartridge case has a
gilding metal-clad, steel jacketed bullet and the tip is brown for identification.
7-16
M1 Tracer
M1 cartridges are for use in .50 caliber machine guns for firing observation. Its only use is for training
in the continental United States. For combat use, the tracer M17 cartridge replaces the M1 tracer.
The cartridge is brass and the bullet has either a gilding metal or a gilding metal-clad steel jacket, a
lead-antimony slug that fits the forward end of the jacket, and a tracer and igniter composition. The tip
is red for identification. The bullet is cylindrical to the base (not boat-tailed), which is open to let the
propelling charge ignite the tracer composition.

Linked Configuration
The .50 caliber cartridge for use in machine guns is issued in metallic link belts. The belts are made
of unit cartridge links and cartridges—one link for each cartridge. Each link has two loops fitting
around one cartridge and a third loop fitting around an adjacent cartridge.

Closed Loop Link

The .50 caliber M2 and M9 cartridge links (Figure 7-14) are manufactured with closed loops. When
assembled in belts, the links sit on the cartridge shoulder to hold them in proper alignment for feeding
into the weapon. Weapons designed for the closed-loop link belts require additional space for
retraction in the rear of the receiver.

Open Loop Link

M15A2 links (Figure 7-14) are manufactured with partially open loops and have a positioning finger
on one side that snaps into the cartridge extractor groove. The weapon bolt pushes the cartridge
forward and out of the link into the weapon chamber. Weapons using the open-loop link belts are
manufactured with a shorter receiver.

Figure 7-14 — .50 caliber links.

M2 Link
These links are intended for use in linking cartridges for use in .50 caliber machine guns (Browning
M2HB, AN-M2 aircraft, and XM218). Weapons designed for use with these links require additional
space in the rear of the receiver for extraction of the cartridge from the link. M2 links are
manufactured with closed loops. When assembled with cartridges in belts, these links fit on the
cartridge shoulder. The tapered front loops of these links are positioned firmly on the cartridge
shoulder to hold the cartridge in proper alignment for feeding into the weapon. This design requires
the cartridge to be extracted from the rear and dropped into position for feeding into the chamber for
firing. The M2 link may be distinguished from the M9 link by a tab that protrudes from the top of the
7-17
single loop where it connects with the neck loop. In addition, the links are marked indicating if they
are M2 or M9.

M9 Link
These links are intended for use in linking .50 caliber cartridges for use in .50 caliber machine guns
(Browning M2HB, AN-M2 aircraft, and XM218). Weapons designed for use with these links require
additional space in the rear of the receiver for extraction of the cartridge from the link. M9 links are
manufactured with closed loops. When assembled with cartridges in belts, these links fit on the
cartridge shoulder. The tapered front loops of these links are positioned only on the cartridge
shoulder to hold the cartridge in proper alignment for feeding into the weapon. This design requires
the cartridge to be extracted from the rear and dropped into position for feeding into the chamber for
firing. The M2 link may be distinguished from the M9 link by a tab that protrudes from the top of the
single loop where it connects with the neck loop. In addition, the links are marked, indicating if they
are M2 or M9.

M15A2 Link
These links are open-looped and intended for use in linking .50 caliber cartridges for use with the
M85 machine gun. M15A2 links are manufactured with partially closed loops and have a positioning
finger on one side, which snaps into extractor grooves of the cartridge to retain the cartridge in proper
feed alignment. The M15A2 link design permits a portion of the bolt to ride through link loop openings
and push cartridges forward and
out of the link into the chamber
for firing.

7.62 MM Ammunition
The ammunition for the 7.62 mm
weapon (Figure7-15) was
developed with the intention of
replacing the .30 caliber carbine
and rifle ammunition. The intent
was to standardize the use and
ease the supply and
interchangeability within all
NATO countries. This
ammunition is commonly called
7.62 mm NATO ammunition.

M80 NATO Ball

M80 cartridges are used in the
M60 series, Mark (Mk) 43, Mk 25
(GAU-2B/A), GAU-17, and M240
machine guns and the 7.62 mm
M14 rifle against personnel and
unarmored targets. The cartridge
consists of a brass cartridge case
and an unpainted bullet. The
bullet is either gilding metal or
gilding metal-clad steel jacket
Figure 7-15 —7.62 cartridges.
with a lead-antimony slug.

7-18
M62 NATO Tracer
M62 cartridges are used in M60 series, Mk 43, Mk 25 (GAU-2B/A), GAU-17 and M240 machine guns,
and M14 rifles for signaling, incendiary, target designation, and range estimation. The cartridge
consists of a brass cartridge case and a bullet with an orange tip for identification.

M60 NATO Test High-Pressure

The M60 cartridge is procured for proof-firing rifles, machine guns, and barrels. The propellant
composition load results in a higher chamber pressure than other 7.62 mm cartridges. The excessive
chamber pressure and the consequent danger when firing the M60 cartridge require certain safety
precautions. These include test firing guns under a hood, from a fixed rest with a mechanical firing
device. Only authorized personnel carry out these tests.

M63 NATO Dummy

The M63 dummy cartridge is completely inert and is used to train personnel in handling and loading
7.62 mm rifles and machine guns. The cartridge simulates service ammunition in detail to meet drill
requirements. It is 2.80 inches (7.11 centimeters) long, weighs approximately 250 grains (16.20
grams), and contains neither primer nor propellant composition.

M64 NATO Grenade Rifle

M64 cartridges are used in M14 rifles. When assembled with the M76 grenade launcher, it projects
high-explosive, fragmentation, illuminating, smoke, and chemical grenades. Another use is to launch
ground signals and the projectile contained in the Mk 87 Line-Throwing Rifle Adapter Kit.

M82 NATO Blank

The M82 cartridge is used in rifles and machine guns for training programs with 7.62 mm weapons.
The cartridge consists of a 2.61-inch (6.63-centimeter) long brass cartridge case loaded with 14.5
grains (0.94 gram) of propellant composition (SR 8231) and a primer. The case is shaped
approximately to the configuration of the combat cartridge with no bullet. The propellant is held in the
case by a wad, and the mouth is sealed with purple lacquer and crimped (with more than five petals)
for protection against air and moisture.

M118 NATO Match/Special Ball

The M118 NATO match/special ball cartridges are used in the M14 rifle, as well as the Remington
700 and McMillan M86 sniper rifles for target practice and the Navy competitive match programs.

M118 NATO Special Ball Long Range

The M118 NATO special ball long range cartridge is used in the M14 rifle, as well as the Remington
700 and McMillan M86 sniper rifles. The cartridge is intended for practice and Navy competitive
match programs.

NATO 5 Round Clips

Cartridges for the 7.62 mm M14 rifles are assembled in five-round clips.
All cartridges are packed in bandoleers with separate magazine fillers. The clip, which consists of a
channel-shaped body containing a spring, facilitates loading of magazines. Loaded clips are fitted into
the top of the rifle receiver and cartridges are pressed into the magazine assembly. Magazine filler,
which adapts clips to the magazine, allows individual magazines to be loaded with clipped
ammunition.

7-19
M276 Dim Tracer
The M276 cartridge is used with night vision devices (NVDs) where the use of a standard tracer
cartridge would cause “blooming,” rendering the NVDs ineffective for a short time. The cartridge is
designed for use in M60 series, Mk 43 and M240 machine guns, and GAU-17 and GAU-2/B miniguns
for signaling, target designation, and range estimations. The cartridge consists of a brass cartridge
case and a bullet with identifying markings. On the older cartridge, the bullet has a green tip above a
white band. On the newer cartridge, the bullet has a purple band superimposed on a pink tip.

M80E1 Flash Suppressed

M80E1 cartridges are used with NVDs where the use of a standard M80 ball cartridge would cause
“blooming.” The cartridge is designed for use in M60 series, Mk 43 and M240 machine guns, and
GAU-17 and GAU-2/B minigun.

M993 Armor-Piercing
The M993 cartridge is loaded with flash-suppressed propellant designed for use with NVDs. Flash-
suppressed propellants reduce "blooming.” The M993 cartridge is designed for use in M60 series, Mk
43 and M240 machine guns, and GAU-17/A and GAU-2B/A aircraft "minigun" machine guns. The
cartridge consists of a cartridge case, primer, propellant, and bullet. The bullet has a black band that
is approximately 0.5 inch (1.27 centimeters) wide.

Belts and Clips

Typically .50 and 7.62 caliber small arms ammunition are packed and issued in two primary methods,
belts and clips.

Belts
The unit issue for ammunition used in
machine guns is metallic link. Ammunition
packed in web belts is no longer used. The
makeup of the metallic link belt is unit
cartridge links and cartridges—one link for
each cartridge. Each link has two loops fitting
around one cartridge and a third loop fitting
around one adjacent cartridge. A process
applied at manufacture of the steel links
prevents rusting. The 7.62 mm M13 belt links
(Figure 7-16) have partially open loops and a
positioning finger on one side. The
positioning finger snaps into the extractor
groove of the cartridge permitting the weapon
bolt to push the cartridge forward out of the
link and into the chamber. Weapons using Figure 7-16 — 7.62 mm link.
this type link come from the manufacturer
with a short receiver.

Clips
The five-round 7.62 mm cartridge clip consists of a channel-shaped body containing a spring and
holds five cartridges. The purpose of the clip is to facilitate loading the magazine of the 7.62 mm M14
rifle. The loaded clip fits into the top of the rifle receiver. The thumb is used to press the cartridges
into the magazine assembly.
7-20
LINKLESS AMMUNITION
LOADING SYSTEM
A/E32K-7
The LALS (Figure 7-17) consists of an
ammunition loader, ammunition
transfer system, or an ammunition
replenisher. The components of the
LALS allow a load of 1,800 rounds of
20 mm ammunition to be
simultaneously loaded, and download
the spent cases and unfired rounds.

Components
A brief description of the components
in the LALS is contained in the
following paragraphs.

Ammunition Loader Figure 7-17 — Linkless ammunition loading system

The ammunition loader (Figure 7-18) (A/E32K-7).
is a mechanical ammunition
storage and loading device
driven by a handcrank or a
pneumatic drive tool. It
consists of four weapons
replaceable assemblies
(WRAs): a storage container,
conveyor assembly, transfer
unit assembly, and support
frame assembly. The support
frame assembly consists of
three shop replaceable
assemblies (SRAs): a forward
housing assembly, aft housing
assembly, and base frame
assembly.

Figure 7-18 — Ammunition loader.

7-21
Ammunition Replenisher
The ammunition replenisher
(Figure 7-19) is a
mechanical ammunition feed
device, which interfaces with
the ammunition loader
during replenishment. It
consists of a load tray
assembly, dump tube chute
assembly, replenisher
interchange assembly, and
replenisher mounting base
assembly.

GFU-24A/E32K-7
Ammunition Transfer
System
The ammunition transfer
system (Figure 7-20) is used Figure 7-19 — Ammunition replenisher.
to load 20 mm rounds of
ammunition into and from the ammunition loader. The ammunition transfer system can be operated
by a handcrank or can be driven by pneumatic or electric tools.
The system has three major components, a table assembly, a removable frame, and an interchange
loading assembly. The system can be operated using the table assembly, or the removable frame
and interchange loading assembly can be used independently and attached to the loader directly.

Figure 7-20 — Ammunition transfer system.

Table Assembly
The table assembly is an assembly that supports both the removable frame assembly and
interchange loading assembly. The assembly is a welded frame with two large solid rubber tires, two
smaller swivel casters, a round collection bin, two ammunition container support plates, and two
7-22
adjustable rear shelf supports. All of the tires and caster have braking mechanisms. The large
diameter tires allow easy transport over rough terrain and the large tire footprint helps the unit to
remain stationary during loading operations.

Removable Frame Assembly

The removable frame assembly is a frame that supports the interchange loading assembly. The
frame is designed to be used either on the table assembly or used independently. When used
separately, the removable frame assembly is physically removed from the table assembly. Arms
located on the frame are raised and locked into position, prior to removal from the table. Once
removed, the frame and interchange assembly are mounted directly to the LALS loader using
mounting lugs located on the loader. The removable frame can be mounted on either of two positions
on the loader.

Interchange Loading Assembly

The interchange loading assembly is the main body of the ammunition transfer system. The
interchange loading assembly is the mechanism that transfers ammunition rounds to and from the
aircraft interface unit (AIU). The interchange loading assembly also includes a load tray assembly and
a download assembly. The system also has a rounds counter, a planetary reduction gear, and a
handcrank that can be stowed on the interchange assembly when not in use. The ammunition
transfer system incorporates an auto detection system that will automatically stop the system, should
an empty element space occur. In the event that an empty space is detected, the operator can place
a round into the empty element in the transfer system. Override of the automatic shutdown feature,
auto detection system, can be accomplished by using the pawl override. Pawl override permits
continued operation in either direction. The downloaded unfired rounds and spent cases are
separated into the rounds collection bin and spent case exit.

Operation
Operation of the LALS is divided into four
modes: replenishment mode, aircraft servicing
mode, transport mode, and storage mode.
Replenishment mode is an intermediate-level
function and aircraft servicing mode is an
organizational-level function.

Replenishment mode
To load the ammunition loader, the access
door is unlatched, folded up and back to the
open position, and secured. The ammunition
transfer system is used either with the table
assembly or attached directly to the loader
using the removable frame assembly (Figure
7-20). Remove the AIU from the stowed
(Figure 7-21) position and attach to the
ammunition transfer assembly.
One empty ammunition container is placed
beneath the ammunition transfer system. The
container collects the spent cases downloaded
from the ammunition loader.
Figure 7-21 — AIU stowed position.

7-23
Ammunition is hand-fed into the load tray assembly. The ammunition transfer system is driven either
by handcrank or using pneumatic or electric hand tools. The ammunition is transferred from the load
tray assembly and the rounds are transferred to the interchange system’s conveyor belt elements.
The ammunition rounds are then handed off from the conveyor belt elements to the AIU and conveyor
assembly ammunition chutes. In the ammunition loader transfer unit the single stream of ammunition
is divided into three streams, decelerated, and transferred into the three bays in the storage container
assembly. At the same time, the spent cases and unfired rounds are downloaded from the
ammunition loader through the lower half of the transfer system interchange assembly. The
ammunition is transferred from the download rotor on the AIU into the conveyor belt assembly located
in the interchange assembly. As the ammunition moves along the bottom of the conveyor belt
assembly, the spent cases fall into a spent case container. Unfired rounds continue further upstream
into the download ramp and into the rounds collection bin where they are then manually picked up
and placed into ammunition containers.

Aircraft Servicing
The M61A1/A2 aircraft gun system can be serviced while simultaneously removing expended casings
and unfired rounds. To service the aircraft gun system, the aircraft gun feed system (AGFS) must be
timed. The AIU is positioned to provide operator crew access. The AIU shift lever handle (Figure 7-
22) is placed in the down (BYPASS) position, the manual drive knob is rotated to align the AIU to the
timed position, and the timing pin is engaged. The AIU is then attached to the AGFS and the timing
pin is disengaged. The AIU shift lever handle is then placed in the up (LOAD) position. A hand crank
or pneumatic drive tool is attached to the AGFS gun drive socket and is used to cycle the ammunition
through the storage container assembly into the aircraft gun systems. As the rounds from the three
bays in the loader travel through the terminal drive sprockets, they are fed into the lower half of the
transfer unit. All three streams of ammunition are merged and accelerated into a single stream of
ammunition.
From the transfer unit assembly, the ammunition is driven through the lower half of the conveyor
chute assembly into the AIU and is passed into the aircraft gun system. At the same time, unfired
rounds and spent cases are downloaded through the upper rotor of the AIU into the upper half of the
conveyor chute assembly. At the transfer unit assembly, the single stream is decelerated, divided into
three streams, and transferred into the three bays of the storage container assembly.

Transport Mode
In the transport mode, the ammunition loader is used to transport ammunition from the magazine to
the aircraft. It can be mounted on a variety of transporters and trailers. A forklift truck can be utilized
to move the ammunition loader short distances. Forklift guides are an integral part of the mounting
base assembly. When ashore, the ammunition loader will be transported on an A/M32K-4A, MHU-
126/M, MHU-126A/M, MHU-151/M, or MHU-202/M trailer. Afloat, the ammunition loader will be
mounted on an MHU-191/M munitions transporter.

7-24
 Figure 7-22 — AIU shift lever handle.

Stowage Mode
The ammunition loader or ammunition transfer system (Figure 7-23) will be stored in a designated
storage area. The ammunition loader or ammunition transfer system must be empty of all ammunition
and spent cases.
To ensure the ammunition loader is empty, three marked dummy rounds are cycled completely
through the storage container assembly, transfer unit assembly, and conveyor assembly. A dummy
round will also be cycled through the ammunition transfer system prior to storing it. The ammunition
loader can be moved to the designated storage area with a forklift or a chain hoist and rail system. A
lifting beam mounted in the ammunition loader is used to attach the ammunition loader to the chain
hoist. The lifting of the ammunition loader should be accomplished by at least two personnel to
ensure the ammunition loader is under control at all times. Both the ammunition loader and the
ammunition transfer assembly are secured to the deck using tie-downs.
For further information on the LALS A/E32K-7, refer to Intermediate Operation and Maintenance
Instructions with Illustrated Parts Breakdown Linkless Ammunition Loading System A/E32K-7A,
Commander, Naval Air Systems Command (NAVAIR) 19-1-269.

7-25
 Figure 7-23 — Stowage mode.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The following general safety precautions are not related to any specific equipment or procedure.
These precautions are recommended safety precautions that all personnel should follow when
operating and maintaining equipment.
x All persons who supervise or perform work in connection with the ammunition handling should
be familiar with the Explosives Safety Accidents and Lessons Learned, Commander, Naval
Sea Systems Command (NAVSEA) SW020-AD-SAF-010
x Personnel must be certified for handling aviation ordnance in accordance with the
requirements of current instructions/directives
x Before undertaking any operation for which a checkoff list exists, you must read the checkoff
list to all personnel who will take part in the operation
x When provided, always use safety devices to prevent accidents; keep safety devices in good
operating order at all times
7-26
x Electrically primed ammunition can be fired by percussion; NEVER cycle live ammunition
through a gun for testing purposes
x The explosive elements in electric primers are highly sensitive to static electricity; make sure
the primer button does not come into contact with the human body
x Observe fire regulations and maintain good ventilation when using cleaning solvents and other
volatile maintenance materials
x Before performing maintenance actions involving pneumatic or hydraulic pressurized
components, ensure that all pressure is removed and the component is in the safest possible
condition
x No ammunition or explosive assembly shall be used in any gun or equipment for which it is not
designated, nor shall any explosive or pyrotechnic device be manufactured, purchased, or
assembled for use in displays, demonstrations, tests, or for any other purpose unless
authorized by NAVSEA
x When test firing is conducted using live ammunition, observe all existing range regulations
x Strict compliance with procedures and precautions in NAVSEA OP 3565/NAVAIR 16-1-
529/NAVELEX 0967-LP-624-6010 is mandatory when in a hazards of electromagnetic
radiation to ordnance (HERO) environment

7-27
 End of Chapter 7
Ammunition Loading
Review Questions
7-1. A complete M50 service cartridge consists of what total number of components?

A. Two
B. Three
C. Four
D. Five

7-2. Which of the following cartridge cases is made of steel?

A. M101
B. M102
C. M103A1
D. M105B

7-3. All projectiles have essentially the same configuration with the exception of which of the
following projectiles?

A. High explosive incendiary

B. High pressure test
C. Target practice
D. Target practice-tracer

7-4. Which of the following statements is one way to identify the type of 20 mm ammunition?

A. The color of the cartridge and the color of the letters

B. The painted color on the projectile and the lettering on the body
C. The shape, size, and lettering on the bullet
D. The weight of the cartridge and the bullet

7-5. The semi-armor-piercing high explosive incendiary (SAPHEI) cartridge has which of the
following projectile gun unit designations?

A. PGU-27/B and PGU-27A/B

B. PGU-28/B and PGU-28A/B
C. PGU-30/B and PGU-30A/B
D. PGU-31/A and PGU-32/B

7-6. The M50/projectile gun unit series ammunition is normally packed in what container?

A. M548
B. M549
C. M559
D. M600

7-28
7-7. A small arms cartridge is an assembly consisting of a cartridge, a primer, and what other
component?

A. Bullet
B. Firing pin
C. Link
D. Triple base propellant

7-8. Ball cartridges are used against what type of targets?

A. Armored and unmanned aircraft

B. Personnel and armored vehicles
C. Personnel and unarmored targets
D. Unarmored vehicles and aircraft

7-9. What type of .50 caliber cartridge is used against combustible targets?

A. Ball
B. Incendiary M1
C. Tracer
D. Tracer M10

7-10. Which of the following .50 caliber cartridge configurations is used in the aircraft machine gun?

A. Five-round clips
B. Loose rounds in cardboard boxes
C. Metallic link belts
D. Single rounds in ammo boxes

7-11. What cartridge is used in the GAU-17, M240, and M14 rifle for signaling, incendiary, target
designation, and range estimation?

A. NATO ball, M80

B. NATO match/special
C. NATO test, high-pressure M60
D. NATO tracer, M62

7-12. The linkless ammunition loading system A/E32K-7 consists of the ammunition loader,
ammunition transfer system, or what other component?

A. Ammunition delinking assembly

B. Ammunition replenisher
C. Case stowage assembly
D. Conveyor

7-29
7-13. What weapons handling equipment is used with the LALS when afloat?

A. MHU-126
B. MHU-151
C. MHU-191
D. MHU-202

7-14. What action must be done to ensure that the ammunition loader is empty?

A. One round must be cycled completely through the storage container assembly
B. Six marked dummy round must be cycled completely through the storage container
assembly, transfer unit assembly, and conveyor assembly
C. The storage container assembly must be cycled until the last round comes through
D. Three marked dummy rounds must be cycled completely through the storage container
assembly, transfer unit assembly, and conveyor assembly

7-15. In what type of environment must transporter loading or downloading operations be

conducted?

A. Hazard of electronic moisture content to ordnance-free

B. Hazards of electromagnetic radiation to ordnance-free
C. Noise-free
D. Vibration-free

7-16. To prevent explosive primers on gun ammunition from being exposed to static electricity, what
action should be taken?

A. Apply grease to the primer

B. Install the safety protective cover on all primer buttons to keep it safe
C. Keep the cardboard covers on the primer button
D. Make sure that the primer button of the ammunition doesn't come into contact with the
human body

7-30
 CHAPTER 8
TARGETS AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT
Aerial targets and associated equipment are used in gunnery and rocketry, and for missile practice by
ships and shore installations. They are also used in air-to-air firing exercises. Firing at targets that
simulate moving aircraft improves the battle efficiency of the Navy and provides useful information for
evaluating armament control/weapons systems under development for operational use by the fleet.
The weapons system community selects a target that closely simulates enemy threats. Target
selection must be carefully made to test the effectiveness of a particular weapons system. Emphasis
is placed on selecting suitable targets for weapons evaluation and fleet training as weapons become
more specialized and their performance evaluation more complex.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
When you have completed this chapter, you will be able to do the following:
1. Identify tow targets and associated equipment.
2. Describe the operating theory of the tow target.
3. Identify aerial targets and associated equipment.
4. Identify the purpose of the air-launched decoy.
5. Identify the purpose of target logbooks, aerial target expenditure reports, and the target
performance reporting system.
6. Identify safety precautions to follow when working with targets and associated equipment.

TARGETS, SYSTEMS, AND EQUIPMENT

Target systems are divided into three categories: tow targets, aerial targets, and land target systems
(Table 8-1). Within each category there are different types of targets, as described in the following
paragraphs.
Table 8-1 — Target Categories and Types
Subscale Aerial
Target Targets Land Targets Tow Target Systems
Subsonic Supersonic
AQM-37C X
BQM-34S X
BQM-74E X
GQM-163A X
MLT X
TDU-32A/B X
TDU-32B/B X

8-1
Tow Targets
The TDU-32A/B and TDU-32B/B targets are banner-type aerial tow targets used for air-to-air and
surface-to-air gunnery or missile firing training exercises.
The target is towed from a fighter and attack (F/A)-18 aircraft using a tow banner adapter as
authorized by the Naval Air Training and Operating Procedures Standardization (NATOPS) Flight
Manual, Command Naval Air Systems Command (NAVAIR) A1-F18AC-NFM-000, and the Naval
Tactical Reference Publication (NTRP) 3-22.4-FA18A-D. This aerial tow target banner is authorized
for ground launch only; shipboard launch is not authorized.
The TDU-32A/B and TDU-32B/B aerial tow target banner (Figure 8-1) consists of a 40-foot-long by 7-
foot 6-inch-wide rectangular fabric panel attached to a weighted steel tow bar. A 60-foot nylon
webbing safety bridle connects the tow bar and panel to the towline. The tow target tow bar is
counterweighted to hold the banner in a vertical position during flight. To enhance visual tracking,
targets have a 12-inch orange border and a 48-inch orange bull's-eye centered on the white portion.
The leading particulars are listed in Table 8-2.
The TDU-32B/B target is identical to the TDU-32A/B target except the panel assembly of the TDU-
32B/B is made of laser retro-reflective material that will reflect radiofrequency (RF) signals and retro-
reflect laser radiation.

Figure 8-1 — TDU-32A/B and TDU-32B/B aerial tow target banner.

8-2
 Table 8-2 — Leading Particulars
TDU-32A/B TDU-32B/B
Weight 87 pounds 87 pounds
Volume 5.3 cubic feet 5.3 cubic feet
Panel
Length 40 feet 40 feet
Height 7 1/2 feet 7 1/2 feet
Bridle Assembly
Length 60 feet 60 feet
Height 1 inch 1 inch
The TDU-32(series) targets are ground-drag launched from the runway (Figure 8-2) by the tow
aircraft and trailed in the air approximately 1,575 feet behind the tow aircraft. The target is designed
to operate from sea level to 30,000 feet at a maximum of 220 knots calibrated air speed (KCAS).
Recovery is accomplished by releasing the target in a recovery area at an altitude and speed
specified in the tow aircraft NATOPS flight manual.

Figure 8-2 — Tow banner staging configuration.

Radar Reflectivity
The TDU-32A/B panel assembly contains properties that will reflect RF signals compatible with fire
control radar systems.

Laser Retro-Reflectivity
The TDU-32B/B panel assembly contains properties that will reflect RF signals and retro-reflect laser
radiation.

8-3
Towline and Towline Wire Rope Leader
The towline is used to tow the TDU-32(series) tow target banner for air-to-air and surface-to-air
gunnery or missile firing training. The towline is composed of a 1,500-foot length of 11/64-inch-
diameter armored towline with various attaching components.
The towline wire rope leader is used to attach the towline to the tow aircraft via the towline banner
adapter. The towline leader is comprised of a 75-foot length of 3/8-inch steel wire rope with various
attaching components (Figure 8-3).
Aerial tow target towlines and towline wire rope leaders have been developed in cooperation with the
Naval Air Warfare Center, Aircraft Division Warminster (NAWCADWAR) Warminster, Pennsylvania,
and the Air Force Armament Laboratory at Eglin Air Force Base, Florida. Maintenance instructions for
the towline and towline leader are found in the Maintenance Instruction with Illustrated Parts
Breakdown Organizational, Aerial Tow Target Banner TDU-32A/B and TDU-32B/B, NAVAIR 28-10A-
23.

Figure 8-3 — TDU-32(series) aerial tow target banner operational configuration.

8-4
11/64-Inch-Diameter Armored Towline
The 11/64-inch-diameter armored towline is constructed with 1 strand of 19 wires (1 by 19), and it is
armor-wrapped and swaged. The armored towline has a breaking strength of 4,000 pounds and
weighs 75.7 pounds per 1,000 feet.

3/8-Inch-Diameter Towline Wire Rope Leader

The 3/8-inch-diameter towline wire rope leader is constructed with 7 compacted strands of 19 wires
each (7 by 19). The towline leader has a breaking strength of 13,000 pounds and weighs 243 pounds
per 1,000 feet.
The TDU-32(series) tow targets, towline, and towline wire rope leader are retrievable and reusable
when not expended during use. Certain inspections must be performed during their life cycle. These
inspections are not required on a periodic basis, but rather on a preflight/postflight schedule. Refer to
the aircraft and tow target preparation procedures for the TDU-32A/B and TDU-32B/B in Maintenance
Instruction with Illustrated Parts Breakdown Organizational, Aerial Tow Target Banner TDU-32A/B
and TDU-32B/B, NAVAIR 28-10A-23.

AERIAL TARGETS
The Navy uses the BQM-74E missile target and the BQM-34S missile target. A simplified discussion
of aerial targets is presented in the following paragraphs.

BQM-74E Missile Target

The BQM-74E missile target (Figure 8-4) is a recoverable, remotely controlled, subscale, subsonic
target capable of speeds up to Mach 0.75 and altitudes from 7 to 40,000 feet.
It is propelled during flight by a single J400-WR-404 turbojet engine, which produces 240 pounds of
thrust at full throttle at sea level. The target is designed to be surface launched from a zero-length
ground launcher utilizing dual Jet Assisted Takeoff (JATO) (Figure 8-5).

Figure 8-4 — BQM-74E missile target.

8-5
 Figure 8-5 — BQM-74E missile target with JATO.
When equipped with an air-launch kit, the target can be air launched from the G-1 commercial
aircraft. The target is controlled through normal flight maneuvers with the capability of performing 75-
degree angle banking turns. The target is normally controlled by a fixed or portable integrated
tracking and control system transponder (Figure 8-6).
The target is equipped with a parachute
recovery subsystem and an active flotation
subsystem. After water entry, these
subsystems keep the target afloat for a
minimum of 24 hours. The target has retrieval
attachments that are compatible with
shipboard or helicopter retrieval equipment.
Target recovery is executed by parachute
and can be accomplished either on land or at
sea by boat or helicopter.
The mission-peculiar equipment, installation,
and checkout procedures are listed in
Maintenance Instruction Manual, NAVAIR 01-
BQM-74E-2-1. For further information
concerning the basic BQM-74E target, Figure 8-6 — BQM-74E target control system.
consult the Maintenance Instructions Target
Drone Navy Model BQM-74E, NAVAIR 01-
BQM-74E-2-2.

BQM-34S Missile Target

The BQM-34S missile target (Figure 8-7) is a recoverable, remotely controlled, subscale, subsonic
target capable of speeds up to Mach 0.9 and altitudes from 10 to 50,000 feet. It is propelled during
flight by a single J-69 or J85-100 turbojet engine, producing 1,920 or 2,850 pounds of thrust at full
throttle at sea level, respectively.

8-6
The target is designed to be surface launched from short-rail or zero-length ground launchers using a
single JATO or air launched from DC-130 aircraft. The target is controllable through normal flight
maneuvers with capabilities of performing up to five times the gravity force turns. The system
transmits target telemetry on the tracking down-link signal. Target recovery is executed by deploying
a two-stage parachute. Recovery can be accomplished on land or at sea. When recovery is made at
sea, the target can be retrieved by boat or helicopter.

Figure 8-7 — BQM-34S missile target.

AQM-37C Missile Target

The AQM-37C missile target (Figure 8-8) is an air-launched, supersonic, preprogrammed, non-
recoverable aerial target capable of flying at various speeds and altitudes. The current launch aircraft
is the fighter (F)-16 Falcon. The target is capable of speeds from Mach 0.7 to 4.0 at altitudes of 1,000
to 100,000 feet and has a range of approximately 155 nautical miles.
The target is powered by an LR-64 liquid-propellant engine using mixed amine fuel and inhibited red
fuming nitric acid. The AQM-37C requires specific hypergolic storage and certification as described in
the Department of the Navy Explosive Safety Management Policy Manual, Office of the Chief of
Naval Operations (OPNAV) Instruction 8020.14(series)/Marine Corps Order (MCO) P8020.11. The
target can be flown with or without ultrahigh frequency (UHF) command control. When command
control is installed, limited control capability (right and left turns, dive, and pullout) is available to
increase profile accuracy. A number of mission-essential installation sets may be installed to augment
the target for radar cross section, scoring, tracking, and command destruct capability.

GQM-163A Supersonic Sea Skimming Target

The GQM-163A supersonic sea skimming target (SSST) (Figure 8-9) is a nonrecoverable, supersonic
aerial target capable of speeds in excess of Mach 2.5 and cruise altitudes from 15.0 to 66.0 feet. The
GQM-163A is surface (land) launched. The GQM-163A system target air vehicle is also capable of
operating with current augmentation, scoring, and range hardware. The GQM-163A program is in full
rate production (FRP) following engineering, manufacturing, and development (EMD) and a low initial
rate production (LRIP) phase. The basic contract was awarded in June 2000 for six EMD target
vehicles, which included the design, development, test, and delivery of a high-fidelity supersonic sea

8-7
skimming aerial target. This
contract included requirements for
target vehicle launch equipment,
support equipment, and technical
data. NAVAIR intends to continue
GQM-163A spiral
upgrades/evolutionary
development to keep pace with
evolving threat characteristics.

AIR-LAUNCHED DECOY
Air-launched decoys are air-
launched vehicles whose purpose
is to minimize, nullify, or confuse
enemy air defense systems. The
tactical air-launched decoy (TALD)
and the improved tactical air-
launched decoy (ITALD) are air-
launched, aerodynamic vehicles
that provide operating forces with
increased capability in the areas
of reconnaissance, surveillance,
and electronic counter-
countermeasures.

Figure 8-8 — AQM-37C missile target.

Figure 8-9 — GQM-163A supersonic sea skimming target.

8-8
The TALD (Figure 8-10) provides false imagery to defense acquisition systems by using chaff,
electromagnetic, and radar signature augmentation. There are three TALD vehicles: A/B37U-1(V) 1, a
chaff vehicle; A/B37U-1(V) 2, a radar passive/active RF vehicle; and ADM-141, a radar passive/active
RF vehicle. While form, fit, and function remain the same within each version, manufacturing
differences have produced variants.
The TALD consists of a nose cone, left and right antenna/wing assemblies, an empennage, a vertical
stabilizer, left and right stabilizers, a vertical fin, a flight computer, a pilot battery, and a main battery.
All versions are approximately 92 inches long, 10 inches wide, and 10 inches high. The chaff vehicle
weighs approximately 380 pounds, while all RF passive and active versions weigh approximately 400
pounds. A computer within each vehicle is preprogrammed with flight profile data prior to loading. It
provides flight management and control of the vehicle through a series of planned maneuvers after
launch.
All three versions of the TALD are compatible with and can be launched from the BRU-42 improved
multiple ejector rack (IMER) or a BRU-42 improved triple ejector rack (ITER).

Figure 8-10 — Typical TALD component locations.

The ITALD (Figure 8-11) is a preprogrammed, powered RF passive/active vehicle used to deceive
and saturate enemy integrated air defenses during strike aircraft operations. It is a preplanned
product improvement that adds turbojet propulsion; radar-controlled, low-level flight; and global
positioning system (GPS) navigational capability to the ITALD. Its official designation is ADM-141C.
The ITALD is approximately 92 inches long, 10 inches wide, and 10 inches high and weighs
approximately 375 pounds. The wing assemblies consist of fiberglass extrusions with receiver
antennas installed on the lower surfaces and a transmitting antenna located in each wing. When
deployed by the pressure actuation and wing actuator assemblies, the wings provide the decoy with
aerodynamic lift during flight. A computer within each vehicle is preprogrammed with flight profile data
prior to loading. It provides flight management and controls the vehicle through a series of planned
maneuvers after launch.

8-9
 Figure 8-11 — Typical ITALD component locations.

A nose cone assembly serves as the aerodynamic forward end of the ITALD vehicle structure. The
nose cone assembly contains the RF augmenter antenna and a Luneburg lens, which increases the
radar cross capability and an extended flight envelope for expanded missions.
The ITALD has enhanced terrain tracking capability, as well as GPS waypoint navigation and
extended flight envelope for expanded missions. The ITALD is only compatible with and can be
launched from the BRU-42 (ITER).

MOVING LAND TARGETS

The moving land target (MLT) (Figure 8-12) is
based on commercially available two- and four-
wheel drive pickup trucks of various
manufacturers. Design is based on, but not
limited to, the Chevrolet 1500 or S10 and
equivalent General Motors Corporation models,
Dodge 1500 or Dakota, and Ford F150 or
Ranger. The MLT will be capable of manned
and unmanned operation in off-road settings on
sand or solid, relatively flat ground, or on paved
roads at speeds up to 70 miles per hour. The
vehicle will be capable of autonomous
operation on a previously learned track and can
be remotely started with oversight remote
control. A complete MLT system includes a
vehicle with all essential navigation/command
and control (Nav/C&C) equipment installed and
a remote ground control station (GCS) capable Figure 8-12 — Moving land target.
of communicating and monitoring with the on-
board vehicle control system.
The MLT will be deployed to engage targets for training aviators and aircrew personnel on Navy and
Marine Corps tactical training ranges (TTRs), such as Naval Strike Air Warfare Center (NSAWC) and
Marine Aviation Weapons and Tactics Squadron One (MAWTS-1). Live ordnance, including .50-
8-10
caliber and 20-millimeter guns, laser-guided training rounds (LGTRs), enhanced LGTRs, and Hellfire,
are used at TTRs.

RECORD KEEPING AND REPORTING

Maintenance performed on targets is based on the concept that maintenance should be performed at
the lowest maintenance level capable of performing the work.
All maintenance is performed in accordance with approved NAVAIR maintenance plans, maintenance
instruction manuals, and maintenance requirement cards.
Organizational maintenance activities are responsible for maintaining target logbooks, target
discrepancy books, and target performance reports and should ensure that all maintenance is
documented on the Maintenance Action Form, OPNAV 4790/60, in accordance with Naval Aviation
Maintenance Program (NAMP), Commander, Naval Air Force Instruction (COMNAVAIRFORINST)
4790.2(series).

Target Logbooks
All activities that have reporting custody of target systems should maintain target logbooks and
associated records for their assigned target systems in a proper and up-to-date status. Target
logbooks provide a history of maintenance, operation, and configuration control of the target. The
logbook is a hardcover, loose-leaf ring binder containing separators and page insert forms.
The logbook should be maintained digitally by use of a disk that is included. The original accepting
activity, upon acceptance of the target, should initiate the target logbook. The logbook should be kept
in the maintenance or production control office, and any classified logbook information should be
safeguarded in accordance with applicable security regulations. When the target is transferred, the
logbook should be transferred with the target. The logbook should be brought up-to-date before the
transfer and be kept neat and clean. Entries should be printed in black ink (no felt-tipped pens should
be used) or typewritten. The target logbook is maintained throughout the target's life cycle.

Target Discrepancy Book

The target discrepancy book is designed to provide maintenance personnel with an accurate,
comprehensive, and chronological record of all operations, discrepancies, and maintenance
performed on a specific target. Maintenance control maintains a target discrepancy book for each
target assigned, with the exception of tow banners and towlines. The target discrepancy book—which
is set up by target serial number—must accurately reflect the status of all pending maintenance
requirements as shown on the maintenance control or workcenter visual information display system
(VIDS) board.

Target Performance Reporting System

NAVAIR has designated the Naval Air Warfare Center Weapons Division
(NAVAIRWARCENWPNDIV) as the central repository for electronic storage of all target inventory
data. The Target Performance Reporting (TPR) system user rights and profiles are constrained by
program job responsibilities and location. The target applications reside on a secured website. To
obtain a username and password, visit the All Weapons Information System (AWIS) website at
https://awis.navair.navy.mil.

8-11
The TPR system will provide the target community a method to track and manage target inventory
and performance. The system allows users to add and edit targets, target ancillary/auxiliary systems
(TA/AS), consumable inventories, and performance reports. The application comprises two sections:
x Inventory—section provides users a method to manage inventory at a location
x Performance—section provides users a method to report target performance information
The NAVAIRWARCENWPNDIV AWIS project team provides system administration for the target
reporting module. User administration is through the common AWIS user administration process.
Each target facility has the responsibility for the following tasks:
x Updating inventories within the target reporting system
x Updating TPR with target performance data within 48 hours of expenditure, excluding
weekends
The assistant program manager for logistics (APML) is responsible for ensuring that each target
facility is maintaining the inventory and performance databases within AWIS.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Many safety precautions are associated with target towing. Some of these safety precautions include,
but are not limited to the following list:
x Uncoil a cable by standing the coil on its edge, holding the end, and unrolling the coil;
personnel should NEVER attempt to take cable from either a coil or a roll by pulling the cable
when the coil or roll is lying flat; the cable will snarl and kink
x When cutting a nylon towline, bind the ends; otherwise, apply enough heat to the cut ends to
melt the nylon and prevent unraveling
x All personnel involved in target towing operations must know the standard hand signals for
controlling aircraft on the ground
x Perform a preflight inspection of all tow equipment
x Stand clear of the cable when a target is launched
x All hands should be kept clear of moving parts when the equipment is in operation
x Exercise caution when working in proximity of pneumatic, hydraulic, or spring- or cartridge-
operated components

8-12
 End of Chapter 8
Targets and Associated Equipment
Review Questions
8-1. What tow target is used for air-to-air and surface-to-air gunnery or missile firing training
exercises?

A. TDU-32A/B
B. TDU-33B/B
C. TOD-32A/B
D. TOD-32B/B

8-2. The Navy currently uses what two subsonic powered targets?

A. AQM-37C and SPT-74E

B. BQM-34S and BQM-74E
C. BQM-34S and SPT-47C
D. BQM-74E and AQS-47C

8-3. The BQM-74E missile target can be launched from which of the following launching
environments?

A. Aircraft
B. Slingshot
C. Submarine
D. Whip antenna

8-4. The BQM-74E target is controlled through normal flight maneuvers with the capability of
performing 75-degree angle banking turns by what means?

A. Dual JATO
B. Fixed or portable integrated tracking and control system transponder
C. Predetermined flight plan
D. Programmed flight profile before launch

8-5. The AQM-37C missile target has what approximate range?

A. 155 meters
B. 155 nautical miles
C. 511 kilometers
D. 511 nautical miles

8-6. The GQM-163A supersonic sea skimming target has what minimum cruising altitude?

A. 15 feet
B. 15 meters
C. 66 feet
D. 66 meters

8-13
8-7. How many types of tactical air-launched decoy vehicles does the Navy use?

A. Two
B. Three
C. Four
D. Five

8-8. What features does the tactical air-launched decoy use to provide false imagery to defense
acquisition systems?

A. Chaff, electromagnetic, and radar signature augmentation

B. Left and right antenna/wing assemblies
C. Radar passive/active radio frequency
D. Reconnaissance, surveillance, and electronic counter-countermeasures

8-9. What air-launched decoy has the product improvement that added turbojet propulsion, radar
control, low-level flight, and global positioning system navigational capability?

A. ALM-I
B. IALM
C. ITALD
D. TALD

8-10. Target logbooks provide a history of maintenance, operation, and what type of control of the
target?

A. Configuration
B. Custody
C. Maintenance
D. Security

8-11. What activity is responsible for updating the target performance reporting system?

A. All Weapons Information System project team

B. Assistant program manager for logistics
C. Naval Target Performance Maintenance Activity
D. Target facility

8-12. The target performance reporting system resides on what secured database system?

A. AWIS
B. DECKS
C. REPS
D. TARS

8-14
8-13. The target performance reporting system should be updated within what number of hours if the
target is expended?

A. 24
B. 36
C. 48
D. 60

8-15
 CHAPTER 9
AMMUNITION HANDLING EQUIPMENT
How aviation ammunition is handled depends on the time, place, and situation. The task of handling
ammunition and explosives is hazardous. Equipment is designed so ammunition can be safely
handled in any given situation. This equipment includes railroad, industrial, and automotive
equipment used for transporting ammunition. It also includes equipment used to manually handle
ammunition, such as skids, pallets, carriers, and aircraft loading equipment.
Often, the equipment used to handle ammunition afloat and ashore is the same. However, differences
in stowage accommodations, fixed installations, working areas, and space limitations require the use
of equipment and techniques especially designed for the job. Regardless of the situation, only the
equipment designed for a particular task and approved by Commander, Naval Sea Systems
Command (NAVSEA) or Commander, Naval Air Systems Command (NAVAIR) should be used.
The command that has control over a particular item of ammunition handling equipment is identified
by the item designation. If Mark (Mk) and Modification (Mod) number designations identify the item,
NAVSEA controls it. If the item is identified by designations, such as AERO, ADU, ADK, and HLK,
NAVAIR controls it.
The number and availability of different ammunition handling equipment configurations are extremely
large. The equipment that is routinely used by most of the operating units (ashore and afloat) is
discussed in the following paragraphs. You can find a complete listing and description of approved
handling equipment in Approved Handling Equipment for Weapons and Explosives, NAVSEA
Ordnance Publication (OP) 2173, Volume 1 (NAVAIR 19-100-1.1), Volume 2 (NAVAIR 19-100-1.2),
and Armament Weapons Support Equipment (AWSE) Configuration Manual, NAVAIR 11-140-25.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
When you have completed this chapter, you will be able to do the following:
1. Identify the categories and subcategories of armament weapons support equipment (AWSE).
2. Identify the purpose of pallets, to include safe loads.
3. Identify weapons carriers.
4. Recognize the purpose of weapons carriers.
5. Recognize the purpose of stands, to include the A/F32K-1A bomb assembly stand.
6. Recognize the purpose of hoisting bars.
7. Recognize the purpose of beams.
8. Identify the loads that each beam can carry.
9. Recognize the purpose of ammunition handling slings.
10. Recognize the purpose of bomb hoists.
11. Identify the loads for each bomb hoist.
12. Identify the purpose of skids, weapons transporters, and associated adapters.
13. Recognize the safe loads for skids, weapons transporters, and associated adapters.
14. Identify the trucks used for ordnance handling, to include ammunition handling.

9-1
 15. Recognize the safe loads for the trucks used for ordnance handling.
16. Identify trailers used for ordnance handling, to include the small munitions, rough terrain, and
munitions trailers.
17. Identify the purpose of the weapons loader.
18. Recognize the safety precautions to follow while using ordnance handling equipment.

ARMAMENT WEAPONS SUPPORT EQUIPMENT

Armament weapons support equipment (AWSE) is support equipment required on the ground. The
AWSE is classified as either common or peculiar and may be avionics or nonavionics. There are
three subcategories (Figure 9-1)—armament support equipment (ASE), weapons support equipment
(WSE), and logistics support equipment (LSE).

Figure 9-1 — Armament weapons support equipment breakdown.

Armament Support Equipment

The ASE includes all equipment whose primary function is to support the installed aircraft systems
and is used primarily by an aircraft intermediate maintenance department or squadron.
Armament handling equipment includes special tools used to support the aircraft in providing
handling, movement, installation, configuration, arming, loading, and downloading of air-launched
weapons, airborne armament systems, or weapon-related components. Armament handling
equipment includes bomb hoists, single hoist loading systems, weapon loaders, boresights, and
special tools used to remove, replace, repair, test, assemble, or service aircraft bomb racks, missile
launchers, installed machine guns, or gun pod units.

9-2
Weapons Support Equipment
The WSE includes all equipment whose primary function is to support explosive ordnance
components or weapons. The WSE is divided into two categories, weapons handling equipment and
weapons test equipment.
Weapons handling equipment includes both peculiar and common ordnance handling and
transportation equipment, as well as tools used for canning and uncanning, magazine handling, and
assembly of weapons or ordnance-related commodities. The WSE includes hoisting beams, weapons
carriers, strongbacks, handlift trucks, weapon skids, trailers, bomb trucks (nonself-powered), and their
associated weapons assembly tables, maintenance stands, and other weapon-related equipment.
The WSE supports both air- and surface-launched weapons.

Logistics Support Equipment

The LSE consists of equipment used for packaging, bulk handling, storage or stowage, and
transportation of weapons and weapon components within the weapon logistics cycle. LSE includes
weapons packaging equipment, ship loading or underway replenishment equipment, installed
shipboard or shore-based equipment, and industrial materials handling equipment.
Weapons packaging equipment consists of missile containers, pallets, boxes, and fleet-issue unit
loads that contain ordnance and ancillary equipment.
Ship loading and underway replenishment equipment consists of connected replenishment slings,
vertical replenishment pole pendants, spreader bars, beams, and missile transfer dollies.
Installed shipboard or shore-based equipment includes dunnaging, C-grabs, birail or monorail hoists,
tie-downs, davits, bomb elevators, conveyors, and other fixed or moveable handling equipment.
Industrial material handling equipment includes forklifts, warehouse tractors, pallet trucks, and
platform trucks.

ORDNANCE HANDLING EQUIPMENT

Ordnance handling equipment (OHE) includes specially designed mechanical equipment used for
assembling, disassembling, handling, transporting, lifting, positioning, rotating, or containing
conventional weapons, ammunition, explosives, and related components. While typically portable in
nature and not self-propelled, OHE can serve as a link between permanently mounted and mobile
lifting equipment (e.g., cranes, forklifts). OHE is used for dockside loading and offloading; intra-station
handling in production, maintenance, and storage areas; shipboard handling; and transfer-at-sea
operations. Examples include adapters, beams, carriers, dollies, hand trucks, restraint fixture slings,
and stands.

PALLETS
A pallet is a wood or metal platform used to stack material for movement from one area to another.
Pallets are used to store and handle bombs, cartridge tanks, projectiles, rocket containers, rocket
heads, rocket motors, and unit loads. When live ammunition and explosives are involved, metal
pallets must be used. Metal pallets are more durable than wood pallets, are not subject to warping,
and do not present a fire hazard.

Standard Four-Way Wood Pallet

The standard four-way pallet (Figure 9-2) is a nine-post wood pallet that provides four-way entry for
forklift and pallet trucks. The wings (overhangs) at each end allow sling installations. The slots in the

9-3
two top-deck members are used to install steel strapping, which provides load restraint. The pallet
measures 48 inches in length and 40 inches in width. It has a safe working load (SWL) of 4,000
pounds. It is a general-purpose pallet primarily used for shipment of domestic unit loads of ordnance.

Mk 3 Mod 0 Pallet
The Mk 3 Mod 0 pallet (Figure 9-3) is a steel wire
weldment. The deck is made of steel wire, formed into a
grid pattern of 2-inch squares, and is welded to the deck
supports. Nine steel deck supports are welded to the
bearing plates and to the deck. The complete pallet is
galvanized. The pallet measures 48 inches in length and
40 inches in width. It has an SWL of 4,000 pounds. The
Mk 3 Mod 0 pallet is a general-purpose, four-way pallet
used to handle unit loads aboard ship and at shore
stations. A forklift or pallet truck is used to transport and
stack loads. It is also used to hoist loads, by using pallet
slings. The Mk 3 Mod 0 pallet is used for fleet issue and
underway replenishment loads.
Figure 9-2 — Standard four-way
Mk 12 Mod 1 Pallet pallet.

The Mk 12 Mod 1 pallet (Figure 9-4) is a steel wire and formed sheet steel weldment. It consists of a
deck, supports, and runners. The deck is made of steel wire bent and assembled into a grid pattern of
2-inch squares. The deck is welded to supports and runners. Steel edge strips protect the wire
endings. The pallet measures 45.5 inches in length and 35 inches in width. It has an SWL of 4,000
pounds.

Figure 9-3 — Mk 3 Mod 0 pallet. Figure 9-4 — Mk 12 Mod 1 material

handling pallet.

The Mk 12 Mod 1 pallet is a four-way pallet used to palletize weapon components and containers for
storage, handling, and shipping. The pallet is used to transport and stack loads by using a forklift or
pallet truck and to hoist loads by using pallet slings. The Mk 12 Mod 1 pallet is used for fleet issue
unit loads.

9-4
Ammunition Pallet Crate
The ammunition pallet crate (Figure 9-5)
comes in three sizes with a capacity of 4,000
pounds each. It consists of a steel four-way
pallet on which steel wire sides and ends are
attached to form an open-top container. One
end of the pallet crate is removable and has
a hinge located in the center so the top half
folds down over the lower half for loading and
unloading operations. Twelve locks secure
the sides and ends, and four lifting eyes allow
it to be used with hooks on appropriate
slings. The deck supports are designed for
stacking.
The ammunition pallet crate is used at naval
shore activities to handle loose ammunition
and inert items during on-station handling
and transportation. The pallet crate is
particularly useful in combatant ship loadouts Figure 9-5 — Ammunition pallet crate.
or offloads at dockside or anchorage where
palletization is either impractical or inefficient.
Projectiles, cartridges, and powder tanks up
to 6 inches in diameter, boxed ammunition,
and various inert loads are typical items
handled with a pallet crate.

CARRIERS
Carriers are a quick and safe means of
attaching a crane cable or other hoisting
device to ammunition for movement from
one area to another. Some carriers are
designed for horizontal lifting and some for
vertical lifting. Others are used for both
horizontal and vertical lifting. Vertical carriers
are used for surface-employed ammunition;
therefore, only horizontal carriers are
discussed in the following paragraphs.

Mk 43 Mod 1 Weapons Carrier

The Mk 43 Mod 1 weapons carrier (Figure 9-
6) is made of a 5/8-inch steel plate with two
safety hooks attached by shackles. The
carrier has two sets of holes for attaching the Figure 9-6 — Mk 43 Mod 1 weapons carrier.
safety hooks—one set spaced at 16 7/8
inches and the other at 14 inches. It is used in conjunction with two Mk 49 Mod 1 weapon carriers to
lift Mk 82/bomb live unit (BLU) 111 bombs (500 pounds) in tandem off different skids and trailers. The
Mk 43 Mod 1 weapons carrier has an SWL of 2,000 pounds.

9-5
Mk 49 Mod 1 Weapons Carrier
The Mk 49 Mod 1 weapons carrier (Figure 9-
7) is constructed of two steel plates welded
together. It has four hoisting points and two
attaching studs. A fixed stud at one end of
the strongback is engaged in one of the
weapon suspension lugs. Then, the pivoting
stud at the opposite end is engaged in the
remaining lug and locked in place with a
quick-release pin. The Mk 49 Mod 1 weapons
carrier is used for horizontal lifting of
weapons with 14-inch suspension lugs, and it
has an SWL of 2,500 pounds.

Mk 51 Mod 1 Weapons Carrier

The Mk 51 Mod 1 weapons carrier (Figure 9-
8) is an aluminum channel that is plate fitted
with two steel hooks. A fixed position hook Figure 9-7 — Mk 49 Mod 1 weapons carrier.
with a spring-loaded pinned latch is located
at the aft end of the carrier. The forward hook
is adjustable to allow attachment of the carrier
to weapons or stores with 14- or 30-inch
suspension lugs. The forward hook is held in
place by a quick-release pin. Eight lifting eyes
allow the ability to handle weapons with
different centers of gravity.
Before attaching the carrier to the load, the
adjustable hook should be put in the
appropriate suspension placement hole,
which is held in place by a quick-release pin.
With the spring-loaded latch unpinned and
depressed, the carrier hooks are engaged
with the weapon lugs. The spring-loaded latch
should be released and the latch pinned in
place with a quick-release pin to secure the
load. An instruction plate, mounted on the
carrier, makes it easier to match the correct
lifting eye to the load. The Mk 51 Mod 1
weapons carrier is used for horizontal lifting. It
has an SWL of 4,000 pounds.
Figure 9-8 — Mk 51 Mod 1 weapons carrier.
STANDS
Stands are metal frameworks used to support a weapon that is being assembled or maintained.
Stands may be immobile or equipped with pivoting casters. The stands discussed in the following
paragraphs are of the immobile type.

9-6
A/F32K-1A Bomb Assembly Stand
The A/F32K-1A bomb assembly stand (Figure 9-9) consists of three interchangeable and interlocking
49-inch sections. The stand must be secured to the deck. It has four trays that are placed on top of
conveyor rollers to permit a 360-degree rotation of the weapon. Stops are located at each end to
prevent the trays from moving beyond the end of the conveyor. Each section is collapsible for
stowage purposes.
The top-mounted rollers on the tray assembly actually contact the skin of the weapon and support its
weight. The stand is designed to support Mk 80/BLU 100(series) general-purpose bombs during the
assembly process. However, the stand may be used to support various other weapons during the
assembly process. The SWL of each tray is 2,000 pounds.

Figure 9-9 — A/F32K-1A bomb assembly stand.

HOISTING BARS
Hoisting bars are used for carrying, lifting, and handling weapons. They are normally used during
weapons handling and loading evolutions.

HLU-256/E Manual Hoisting Bar

The HLU-256/E manual hoisting bar (Figure 9-10) consists of a round steel bar with a removable
bomb nose plug connector and tail stop plates on one end. A quick-release pin secures the nose plug
connector to the bar. When a tee configuration is desired, the nose plug connector can be relocated
to a position at the bar's midpoint.
The opposite end of the bar can be used as a lift point in the bomb's tail end. A tail stop is situated 18
inches from the end of the bar.

9-7
 Figure 9-10 — HLU-256/E manual hoisting bar.
The HLU-256/E manual hoisting bar is used to manually lift Mk 80/BLU 100(series) general-purpose
bombs that weigh up to 1,000 pounds during aircraft loading/unloading operations. It is also used for
weapons assembly purposes.

BEAMS
A beam is a rigid metal item that has an I, H, T, or circular cross section. The rigid portion is fitted with
a lifting eye, a sling or sling attaching points, and devices for attaching a load.

Mk 18 Mod 1 Handling Beam

The Mk 18 Mod 1 handling beam (Figure 9-11) is a structural steel weldment that consists of a
cylindrical beam with a lifting eye at its center of gravity and hook-extender assemblies with safety
hooks at each end. The Mk 18 Mod 1 is used during connected underway replenishment operations
for transferring palletized unit loads. The beam is designed for coupling with cargo hoisting assembly
Mk 20 Mod 0, and normally it is used with adjustable pallet slings for making the transfer. The Mk 18
Mod 1 handling beam has an SWL of 4,000 pounds.

Figure 9-11 — Mk 18 Mod 1 handling beam.

9-8
Mk 18 Mod 2 Handling Beam
The Mk 18 Mod 2 is identical to the Mk 18 MOD 1 with one exception: the Mk 18 Mod 2 contains
larger safety hooks to accommodate an SWL of 4,500 pounds.

Mk 37 Mod 1 Lift Beam

The Mk 37 Mod 1 lift beam (Figure 9-12) is an
aluminum beam with an adjustable lifting eye
secured to it by two quick-release pins. The
suspension lug adapters at each end of the lift
beam are used to engage the forward and aft
suspension lugs on the Harpoon air-launched
missile. A quick-release pin in the aft
Figure 9-12 — Mk 37 Mod 1 lift beam.
suspension lug adapter is used for securing
the beam to the missile.
The Mk 37 Mod 1 lift beam is used with an overhead crane or hoist to lift the Standoff Land Attack
Missile (SLAM) and the Harpoon air-launched missile. The Mk 37 Mod 1 lift beam has an SWL of
1,450 pounds.

SLINGS
Slings are lifting devices used to handle weapons. They are made up of various materials, reinforced
nylon, heavy cotton mesh, steel cables, welded rings, and safety devices.
Slings are made in two basic configurations: (1) a flexible section, or sections, which may be
connected to a lifting link, and (2) a beam with a flexible section, or sections, attached.

Mk 85 Mod 1, Mk 86 Mod 1, Mk 87 Mod 1, and Mk 100 Mod 2 Pallet Slings

The Mk 85, Mk 86, Mk 87, and Mk 100 pallet slings (Figure 9-13) are wire rope basket slings that are
adjustable for load height. These slings accommodate a full range of load heights (16 to 70 inches)
on 40- by 48-inch pallets. A section of colored tubing on the cross bridle indicates the sling type.
Table 9-1 lists physical data for the separate types of slings.

9-9
 Figure 9-13 — Mk 85, Mk 86, Mk 87, and Mk 100 pallet slings.

Table 9-1 — Physical Data for Pallet Slings

Mk/Mod Color of Load Height Capacity (pounds) Weight
Coded Tubing (inches) (pounds)
85/1 Red 16 2,800 13
20 3,350 13
24 4,050 13
26 to 31 4,500 13
86/1 Black 29 to 40 4,500 13
87/1 Green 36 to 50 4,500 14
100/2 Yellow 48 to 70 4,500 15

9-10
Mk 105 Mod 0 Hoisting Sling
The Mk 105 Mod 0 hoisting sling (Figure 9-14) is a
braided nylon rope that consists of a pendant and a
leg assembly. Each end of the pendent has a
spliced eye, one for the helicopter hook and one for
the legs. Legs are rated at 4,000 pounds; with two
or more legs, the assembly is rated at 6,000-pound
capacity. The shorter legs (91 inches) are orange in
color and are used for all pallet loads. The longer
legs (122 inches) are also available for long or
stacked containers and are green in color.

Mk 109 Mod 1 Container Lifting Sling

The Mk 109 Mod 1 container lifting sling (Figure 9-
15) consists of an adjustable wire rope and chain
assembly fitted with a lifting eye and spreader bars.
The spreader bars are modified turnbuckles that
permit adjustment of sling-leg width within the range
of 26 to 42 inches. Height adjustment of the bars is
provided by the swage stops. The Mk 109 Mod 1
container lifting sling is designed to fit most of the
containers and cradles currently in the military
system. The Mk 109 Mod 1 container lifting sling
has an SWL of 5,000 pounds.
Figure 9-14 — Mk 105 Mod 0 hoisting sling.

Figure 9-15 — Mk 109 Mod 1 container lifting sling.

9-11
BOMB HOISTS
A hoist is a mechanism that provides a mechanical advantage when raising or lowering heavy loads,
such as bombs, mines, and torpedoes.

HLU-196D/E Bomb Hoisting Unit

The HLU-196D/E bombhoisting
unit (Figure 9-16) is a
lightweight, portable unit
designed to load various
weapons/stores on naval aircraft.
The bomb hoisting unit consists
of a gear-driven mechanism,
battery-operated motor, cable
drum assembly, load brake
assembly, battery pack,
electronic controller, battery
charger, aircraft adapter,
removable boom assembly, and
19-foot cable assembly.
The entire unit weighs 123
pounds. It has a direct, single-
point lift capacity of 1,500
pounds. A double-point lift
capacity of 3,000 pounds is Figure 9-16 — HLU-196D/E bomb hoisting unit.
obtainable by using various
trolleys and rack adapters that
are available.

HLU-288/E Bomb Hoist

The HLU-288/E bomb hoist
(Figure 9-17) consists of a
gear train, drum and cable,
brake mechanism, extension
tube, and brake crank. The
cable drum rotates in the
direction opposite to that of
the cranks. The brake crank is
used to hoist and lower the
load. After a load is lifted, a
clutch-type brake locks the
gear train.
The HLU-288/E bomb hoist is
used with Single Hoist
Ordnance Loading System
(SHOLS) adapters to load
various weapons onto a Figure 9-17 — HLU-288/E bomb hoist.
variety of aircraft. The HLU-

9-12
288/E bomb hoist has a single lift capacity of 2,240 pounds and a double lift capacity of 4,480
pounds.

SKIDS, WEAPONS TRANSPORTERS, AND ASSOCIATED ADAPTERS

A skid or weapon transporter is a mobile piece of equipment with a welded frame-type construction
mounted on two or four rubber-tired wheels. It is used with various adapters to support a load for
movement from one area to another.
Wheeled skids or weapons transporters are generally equipped with a brake mechanism so the skid
will not move when unattended. Handles are attached to all mobile skids and weapons transporters to
provide a means of moving and controlling the units. The units are not self-propelled and require
either manpower or power equipment to move them. They are used for handling various weapons
and miscellaneous ammunition items during the aircraft rearming process aboard aircraft carriers and
at shore stations.
Skids and weapons transporters cannot be used without adapters. Adapters are an interface between
the skid or weapon transporter and the weapon or store to be supported. The adapters provide a
support surface and a means of securing the weapon or store to the skid or transporter, preventing
any inadvertent movement. Many different types of adapters are available for any one particular skid
or weapon transporter, or an adapter may be compatible with several different skids or weapons
transporters. Adapters are attached to the skids or weapons transporters by quick-release pins or
other types of quick-change devices.

AERO 12C Bomb Skid

The AERO 12C bomb skid (Figure 9-18) is a wheelbarrow-type skid. It consists of a cradle frame
mounted on two rubber-tired wheels and equipped with two supporting legs. The skid has two tubular
steel handles that can be quickly latched or unlatched. The handles can be repositioned or removed
by using the handle release on the aft end of each handle.
Braking is
accomplished by
means of two brake
shoes, which are
applied to the wheels
by the support legs.
The brakes are applied
by lowering the skid so
the supporting legs
come in contact with
the deck. The brakes
are released when the
skid is raised high
enough for the
supporting legs to clear Figure 9-18 — AERO 12C bomb skid.
the deck.
The skid is equipped with adjustable chocks on the bed of the frame. These chocks let the operator
properly position the load on the skid. Each side of the skid is equipped with two hold-down brackets.
One set of brackets accommodates the long or short handles. The other set of brackets is used for
attaching tie-down straps.

9-13
The skid is used to transport weapons and (when used with different adapters) to transport
miscellaneous items (e.g., wings, fins, nitrogen bottles) from the bomb assembly ordnance staging
area to the flight deck aboard ship. The bomb skid is utilized on the flight deck to transport ordnance
items in support of flight deck operations (e.g., cartridges, arming wire). The skid has an SWL of
1,250 pounds.

AERO 9C Bomb Skid

Adapter
The AERO 9C bomb skid
adapter (Figure 9-19)
consists of an aluminum
box-like frame with
collapsible walls. It is
constructed with stiffeners at
the sides and bottom. The
adapter is secured to the
skid by two spring-loaded
latches. Hand holes are
provided in the sides of the
adapter for manual handling.
The AERO 9C bomb skid
adapter is used with the
AERO 12C bomb skid to Figure 9-19 — AERO 9C bomb skid adapter mounted on an
handle and transport AERO 12C bomb skid.
miscellaneous ammunition
items. The adapter has an
SWL of 1,000 pounds.

AERO 39C Bomb Skid

Adapter
The AERO 39C bomb skid
adapter (Figure 9-20)
consists of seven
hexagonal aluminum tubes
welded together. It is flat on
one side and contoured
around the hexagonal tubes
on the other three sides.
The assembly has three
handles mounted on it for
lifting and a hinged door at
one end for loading.
The AERO 39C bomb skid Figure 9-20 — AERO 39C bomb skid adapter mounted on an
adapter is used with the AERO 12C bomb skid.
AERO 12C bomb skid to
transport and store nitrogen-filled bottles used as a coolant on the LAU-7A guided missile launcher.
The adapter has an SWL of seven nitrogen bottles.

9-14
AERO 64B Soft-Belt Adapter
The AERO 64B soft-belt adapter
(Figure 9-21) consists of a flexible,
neoprene-covered, woven-wire sling.
The adapter has slots at the ends for
attaching tie-down straps. The
adapter is also equipped with
brackets for attaching it to the skid.
Two AERO 64B soft-belt adapters
support or store a soft-skin weapon
up to 20 inches in diameter on the
AERO 12C bomb skid, which has an
SWL not to exceed 1,250 pounds.
Each AERO 64B adapter has an
SWL of 2,500 pounds.

ADU-488/E Wing, Fin, and Fuze

Adapter
The ADU-488/E wing, fin, and fuze Figure 9-21 — AERO 64B soft-belt adapter mounted on
adapter (Figure 9-22) is an aluminum an AERO 12C bomb skid.
container that contains different
features to transport a variety of ordnance components. Preformed urethane channels that provide
protection for wings and fins are installed in the base. Above the base are two hinged plates, which
are lowered onto the wings and fins to hold them in place. There are two cushioned plates that are
lowered from their stowed position and provide holes for fuzes.
The ADU-488/E wing, fin, and fuze adapter is used by ordnance personnel to transfer different
ordnance and ordnance components from weapons breakout areas to the flight deck/flight line.

Figure 9-22 — ADU-488/E wing, fin, and fuze adapter.

9-15
ADU-729/E Nitrogen Receiver Adapter
The ADU-729/E nitrogen receiver adapter (Figure 9-23) is an
aluminum container with seven hexagonal tubes. A welded
plate is fitted with contoured urethane pads to fit the nitrogen
bottles of the LAU-127 launcher. The hinged plate is spring-
loaded and dual-clasped for security. Two handles located
on the side aid in lifting and carrying. The ADU-729/E
nitrogen receiver adapter is used with the AERO 12C bomb
skid.

MHU-191A/M Munitions Transporter

The MHU-191A/M munitions transporter (Figure 9-24) is a
welded tubular frame equipped with a box section of drilled Figure 9-23 — ADU-729/E nitrogen
steel bars, which provide the mounting holes for attaching receiver adapter.
various adapters. It has two axles and four rubber wheels.
The two front wheels are equipped with drum brakes.
The brake lever located on the draw bar
actuates the brakes. The brakes are
applied automatically when the spring-
loaded brake lever is in the down
position. To release the brakes, pull the
brake lever upward toward the T on the
draw bar. The brake shoes are actuated
through the mechanical linkage located
inside the draw bar. The brake lever is
continually held in the upward position so
the skid can move. Care must be taken
when the brake lever is released; it is
spring-loaded and can cause the lever to Figure 9-24 — MHU-191A/M munitions transporter.
snap downward, causing damage to the
mechanical linkage system. The draw bar is attached to the skid by a quick-release pin. The pin also
connects the brake linkage between the skid and the brake lever on the draw bar.
Two draw bars are available for use with the MHU-191A/M munitions transporter. The short draw bar
should be used to transport short weapons or when working in an area where the long draw bar
handle cannot be used. The long draw bar should be used to transport long weapons, such as
missiles, flare dispensers, or rocket launchers. The MHU-191A/M munitions transporter has an SWL
of 5,000 pounds. It is used with various adapters to transport or load weapons, stores, and
equipment.

AERO 58A Skid Adapter

The AERO 58A skid adapter (Figure 9-25) has a front and rear section. These sections are similar in
design. The primary difference is the base—the front section has a 10-inch base and the rear section
has a 15-inch base. These front and rear sections fit on the rails of the MHU-191A/M munitions
transporter.
Each adapter section has two removable rubber rollers supporting the weapon. These rollers are
adjustable from one to six positions to accommodate weapons of different diameters. Nylon straps
hold the weapon in place.

9-16
One set of AERO 58A skid adapters has an SWL of 5,000 pounds. It holds a single weapon from 8 to
30.5 inches in diameter. The AERO 58A adapter can also be used with the MHU-126A/M munitions
trailer and the MHU-202/M small munitions trailer.

Figure 9-25 — AERO 58A skid adapter mounted on an MHU-191A/M munitions transporter.

AERO 64A Soft-Belt Adapter

The AERO 64A soft-belt adapter (Figure 9-26) consists of a flexible neoprene-covered, woven-wire
sling. The adapter has slots at the ends for attaching tie-down straps. The adapter is also equipped
with brackets for attaching it to the skid.

Figure 9-26 — AERO 64A soft-belt adapter mounted to AERO 58A skid adapters
and MHU-191A/M munitions transporter.

9-17
Two AERO 64A soft-belt adapters support a soft-skin store up to 30 inches in diameter. Each adapter
has an SWL of 2,500 pounds. The AERO 64A is designed for use with AERO 58A skid adapters, and
is used with various skids, transporters, and trailers.

AERO 71A Skid Flatbed Adapter

The AERO 71A skid flatbed
adapter (Figure 9-27) consists
of a welded aluminum angle
frame and sheet aluminum
deck. The adapter is secured to
a weapon skid by quick-release
pins.
When the AERO 71A is used,
two AERO 58A skid adapters
must be used in order to form a
flatbed conveyance for
transportation of the weapon
components, containers, and a
variety of other materials. The
AERO 71A can be used with
various skids, transporters, and
trailers. The adapter has an
SWL of 4,000 pounds. Figure 9-27 — AERO 71A skid flatbed adapter mounted to
AERO 58A skid on an MHU-191A/M munitions transporter.
AERO 83A Transport Adapter
The AERO 83A transport adapter (Figure 9-28) consists of a tubular aluminum frame with a system of
movable suspension assemblies. The adapter is equipped with four rack-attachment hooks adjusted
to accept 14- or 30-inch suspension lugs. The adapter is equipped with two tie-down straps to secure
the load against the rubber bumpers.

Figure 9-28 — AERO 83A transport adapter.

9-18
The AERO 83A transport adapter is used with the AERO 58A skid adapter on the MHU-191A/M
munitions transporter for transporting empty improved multiple ejector racks (IMERs), vertical ejector
racks (VERs), improved triple ejector racks (ITERs), and missile launchers LAU-115/117/118. One
adapter can handle two IMERs, two ITERs, or two launchers. The adapters can be stacked two high
so four racks/launchers can be transported. The adapters are stacked by inserting the support pins of
the upper adapter into the stacking sockets of the lower adapter. Then the adapter is mounted on the
skid by inserting the AERO 83A transport adapter support pins into the front and rear sockets of the
AERO 58A. The AERO 83A has an SWL of 5,000 pounds.

ADU-405/E Roller Height Adapter

The ADU-405/E roller height adapter (Figure 9-29)
consists of a rubber roller fitted between cast
aluminum housing. The opposite end of the
housing contains a spring and pin, which lock it
onto other adapters. The ADU-405/E roller height
adapter has an SWL of 2,500 pounds when used
in sets of four on the AERO 58A skid adapters for
handling Harpoon missiles and guided bomb units
(GBU)-24 Paveway III weapons with the MHU-
191A/M munitions transporter.

ADU-433A/E Aft Height Adapter and ADU-

434A/E Forward Height Adapter
The ADU-433A/E aft height adapter and ADU-
434A/E forward height adapter (Figure 9-30)
consist of machined steel end supports connected
by hollow steel tubes. The upper edges of the end
support a duplicate portion of the rail assembly of Figure 9-29 — ADU-405/E roller height
the associated skid, transporter, or trailer, and adapter.
provide for the attachment of various adapters
using quick-release pins.

Figure 9-30 — ADU-433A/E and ADU-434A/E height adapter.

9-19
The ADU-433A/E aft height adapter is used with the ADU-434A/E forward height adapter to alleviate
clearance problems with the wheels of trailers and the wings and fins of the weapons they transport.
The ADU-433A/E is used with 15-inch rails and the ADU-434A/E is used with 10-inch rails on
associated skids, transporters (including the MHU-191A/M munitions transporter), or trailers. The
ADU-433A/E and ADU-434A/E height adapters have an SWL of 1,800 pounds.

ADU-483/E Skid Adapter Assembly

The ADU-483/E skid adapter
assembly (Figure 9-31) consists of one
steel upper-frame section with two
removable rubber rollers and a nylon
tie-down strap with a buckle. A quick-
release pin is used to attach and
secure the two adapter assemblies
together at the top, forming a complete
load-bearing assembly that supports
two cylindrical weapons side by side.
The position of the outboard roller is
fixed. The inboard roller can be
positioned in either of two positions to
hold weapons of different diameters.
The ADU-483/E skid adapter
assembly is used in pairs with the
AERO 58A skid adapters. When
mounted on the top of two AERO 58A
skid adapters (front and rear) and
secured with quick-release pins, the Figure 9-31 — ADU-895/E interface adapter assembly.
ADU-483/E skid adapter assembly
supports two weapons from 9 to 16 inches in diameter.
Two pairs (total of four) of the ADU-483/E skid adapters
have an SWL of 4,000 pounds. When the skid adapter
assemblies are installed, the AERO 58A skid adapter is
limited to weapons with a maximum diameter of 16
inches.

ADU-895/E Interface Adapter Assembly

The ADU-895/E interface adapter assembly (Figure 9-32)
consists of one steel upper-frame section with two
removable rubber rollers and a nylon tie-down strap with
a buckle. A quick-release pin is used to attach and secure
the two adapter assemblies together at the top, forming a
complete load-bearing assembly that supports two
cylindrical weapons side by side. A second centerline
configuration can support GBU-16 weapons. The position
of the outboard roller is fixed. The inboard roller can be
positioned in either of three positions to hold weapons of Figure 9-32 — ADU-895/E interface
different diameters. adapter assembly.

9-20
The ADU-895/E interface adapter assembly is used in pairs with the AERO 58A skid adapters. The
adapter can support two weapons from 9 to 16 inches in diameter or a single GBU-16 weapon during
transport on the MHU-191A/M. Two pairs (total of four) of the ADU-895/E interface adapter
assemblies have an SWL of 4,000 pounds. The ADU-895/E is replacing the ADU-483/E skid adapter
assembly.

ADU-496A/E Single Store Adapter

The ADU-496A/E (Figure 9-33) consists of a steel
body and urethane pad bonded together to form a
single unit.
The adapter is used in sets of four to support a
single weapon, and 10-inch diameter and larger
weapons/stores during handling and transport on
the MHU-191A/M munitions transporter. The
adapter attaches to the AERO-58A and ADU-483/E
skid adapters.
The ADU-496A/E is used to support the AGM-88
High-speed Anti-Radiation Missile (HARM) missile
and 10-inch diameter and larger stores. The ADU-
496A/E has an SWL of 500 pounds and is used in Figure 9-33 — ADU-496A/E single store
sets of four to create an SWL of 2,000 pounds. adapter.
ADU-511A/E Adjustable Weapons Adapter
The ADU-511A/E adapter (Figure 9-34) consists of a steel support bar with adjustable chocks that
can be configured for different diameter weapons by using designated hole positions. Designed to
carry two stores side by side, the adapter may also be configured to carry single stores.

Figure 9-34 — ADU-511A/E adjustable weapons adapter.

The ADU-511A/E adapter is used in support of the AIM-7, AIM-120 Advanced Medium Range Air-to-
Air Missile (AMRAAM), AGM-88, and AGM-65 missiles for transporting and loading operations. The
ADU-511A/E attaches to the AERO-58A skid adapter on the MHU-191A/M munitions transporter. The
ADU-511A/E has an SWL of 2,000 pounds each.

9-21
ADU-514A/E Small Missile Adapter
The ADU-514A/E small missile adapter
(Figure 9-35) is an aluminum weldment
that consists of upper and lower frames
with support pads, two side blocks,
buckle, and strap. The adapter is used
in pairs and features a two-tier design.
The missile support pads attached to
the upper and lower frames are solid
rubber to provide cradling of missiles
and weapons.
The ADU-514A/E small missile adapter
is used on a variety of weapon skids,
transporters (including the MHU-
191A/M munitions transporter), and
trailers for transporting up to four each
of the following missiles: AIM-7(series),
AIM-9(series), AIM-120(series), and
AGM-114(series). The ADU-514A/E Figure 9-35 — ADU-514A/E small missile adapter.
small missile adapter has an SWL of
1,200 pounds.

ADU-566/E Bracket Adapter

The ADU-566/E bracket adapter (Figure 9-36) consists of a main beam with holes along each side
and two sleeves, which slide over the main beam and have similarly spaced holes along each side.

Figure 9-36 — ADU-566/E bracket adapter.

The complete assembly is placed on an AERO 58A skid adapter with the holes aligned and quick-
release pins inserted to secure the adapter. Strap tie-down points are provided at the end of each
sleeve, and spindle/lock assemblies are furnished. The bracket is adjustable to accommodate load
widths varying between 28 and 48 inches. The ADU-566/E bracket adapter has an SWL of 5,000
pounds when used in pairs.
The ADU-566/E bracket adapter attaches to the AERO 58A skid adapters on the MHU-191A/M
munitions transporter when handling unit loads. The adapter converts the transporter into a flatbed

9-22
vehicle capable of handling ordnance pallets, cradles, and containers. Two bracket adapters are
required for each transporter. The adapter is used during replenishment at sea operations for
transporting containerized missiles, weapons, and weapons components from the flight deck and
hangar deck to magazine spaces.

ADU-567/E Wing/Fin Guard Adapter

The ADU-567/E adapter (Figure 9-37) consists of a main tube weldment, tube extension, pivot tube,
two guards, and retractable spring-locking plungers. The tube extension can be retracted and locked
into the main tube weldment, and the two guards can be pivoted and locked in a flat position to create
a compact shipping and stowage package.

Figure 9-37 — ADU-567/E wing/fin guard adapter.

The ADU-567/E adapter provides protection for

the AIM-9(series) wings and fins when attached
to the ADU-514A/E small missile adapter during
transporting and handling on a MHU-191A/M
munitions transporter.

ADK-598 Transport Adapter

The ADK-598 transport adapter (Figure 9-38) is
shaped like a cradle and consists of sheet
aluminum, two angles, two attaching blocks with
quick-release pins, and two top belting strips.
The ADK-598 transport adapter mounts on
AERO 58A skid adapters (front and rear) with
rollers while on the MHU-191A/M munitions
transporter for transport of one Tactical Air
Launched Decoy (TALD) ADM-141. Three
transport adapters can also be used to transport
three TALDs by using the AERO 58A (front and Figure 9-38 — ADK-598 transport adapter.

9-23
rear) adapters and two ADU-483/E skid adapters with rollers on the MHU-191A/M munitions
transporter.

ADU-699A/E Sonobuoy Modular Carrier Unit Assembly Adapter and ADU-834/E Adapter
The ADU-699A/E VRQREXR\PRGXODUFDUULHUXQLWDVVHPEO\DGDSWHUis the base frame assembly. The
adapter is used in conjunction with the ADU-834/E to store and transport sonobuoys in launch
containers (Figure 9-39). The ADU-699A/E can hold and transport 12 sonobuoys. The ADU-834/E
can hold and transport 13 sonobuoys.
The ADU-699A/E with four ADU-834/E sonobuoy transport adapters can hold and/or transport up to
64 sonobuoys in launch containers. The ADU-699A/E is designed to adapt to the AERO 58A skid
adapters, which allow interface with the MHU-191A/M.

Figure 9-39 — ADU-699A/E with ADU-834/E sonobuoy carrier adapter.

ADU-775/E Transport Adapter Assembly

The ADU-775/E transport adapter assembly (Figure
9-40) consists of a molded polychloroprene (rubber)
cradle and four spring-loaded attached pins. The 6-
inch-wide rubber cradle conforms to the U-shape
underside body structure of the Joint Standoff
Weapon (JSOW) AGM-154(series).
The spring-loaded pins allow the ADU-775/E
transport adapter assembly (used in pairs) to be
attached/locked in place at holes number 5 of the
AERO-58A front and rear adapters on the MHU-
191A/M munitions transporter. The ADU-775/E on
MHU-191A/M and AERO 58A front and rear
adapters combination will allow handling and
transporting of one JSOW AGM-154(series) Figure 9-40 — ADU-775/E transport
baseline/variant missile shape (weapon nose toward adapter assembly.

9-24
transporter draw bar on MHU-191A/M). The ADU-775/E was designed and developed to meet the
JSOW AGM-154(series) missile transporter requirements. The ADU-775/E has an SWL of 1,500
pounds each.

ADU-800/E Tactical Air-Launched Decoy Forward Transport Cradle Adapter

The ADU-800/E TALD forward transport cradle
adapter (Figure 9-41) consists of a square
harness and a polyether urethane, casting
resin plastic, all-black saddle base. The
adapter also has a smooth, oil-resistant,
neoprene rubber pad equipped with two
lanyards containing quick-release pins
terminating at each end.
The ADU-800/E TALD forward transport cradle
adapter is designed to attach to the AERO 58A
skid adapters, which interface with the MHU-
191A/M munitions transporter. The adapter
provides a square cradle surface conforming to
the square fuselage shape of the TALD ADM-
141. The TALD requires the use of two ADU-
800/E adapters to support the forward and aft Figure 9-41 — ADU-800/E TALD forward
sections of the TALD. The ADU-800/E TALD transport cradle adapter.
forward transport cradle adapter has an SWL
of 600 pounds each.

ADU-801/E Transport Adapter

The ADU-801/E transport adapter (Figure 9-
42) is a machined aluminum adapter with a
sliding rubber chock used to transport the
AGM-84H/K Standoff Land Attack Missile-
Expanded Response (SLAM-ER) missile.
The adapter has a provision to attach a tie-
down strap and contains some acetal
(Delrin®) covered surfaces, which prevent
damage to the missile. The transport adapter
is used for both shipboard and shore-based
transport applications.
Four ADU-801/E transport adapters are
required to transport one AGM-84H/K SLAM-
ER missile. The adapter is designed to
attach to the AERO 58A skid adapters, which
interface with the MHU-191A/M munitions
transporter. For shore-based operations, the
ADU-801/E, used with the AERO 58A skid
adapters, attaches to the MHU-126(series)
or MHU-202/M trailers. The ADU-801/E has
an SWL of 600 pounds each. Figure 9-42 — ADU-801/E transport adapter.

9-25
ADU-814/E Improved Tactical Air-Launched Decoy Aft Transport Cradle Adapter
The ADU-814/E ITALD aft transport cradle
adapter (Figure 9-43) consists of a round
aluminum alloy saddle base with a smooth black,
oil resistant, neoprene rubber pad equipped with
two quick release pins attached to the adapter via
lanyards.
The ADU-814/E ITALD aft transport cradle
adapter is designed to attach to the AERO 58A
skid adapters, which interface with the MHU-
191A/M munitions transporter. The adapter
provides a rounded cradle surface conforming to
the round fuselage shape of the ITALD. The
ITALD requires the use of one ADU-800/E
adapter to support the square forward section,
and one ADU-814/E adapter for cradling the
rounded aft section. The ADU-814/E ITALD aft
transport cradle adapter has an SWL of 600
pounds each. Figure 9-43 — ADU-814/E ITALD aft
transport cradle adapter.
TRUCKS
The term truck applies to either a manually propelled or self-propelled vehicle. Gasoline engines,
diesel engines, or electric motors power self-propelled trucks.
Gasoline- or diesel-powered trucks are equipped with exhaust system spark-arresting devices. These
devices help ensure safe operation of the trucks in areas where there is danger of fire or explosion
caused by sparks. These vehicles must meet rigid mechanical and safety inspections.

NOTE
Do not use vehicles that fail to meet the minimum
established inspection and safety criteria in ordnance
handling evolutions.

Forklift Trucks
The forklift truck is a mobile four-wheel or three-wheel unit that lets one person pick up, transport, and
lift the load to different heights. The forklift truck is designed on the cantilever principle. The front
wheels act as a fulcrum. The load is counterbalanced because the weight of the truck is directly
behind the front wheels.
The forklift truck has two fork tines secured to the supporting frame. Both tines and the supporting
frame are located in the front of the truck. The tines are moved vertically on the supporting frame by a
hydraulic lift. The supporting frame may be either telescoping (to provide greater lift) or
nontelescoping. The tines and supporting frame can be tilted forward from the vertical position to pick
up the load. The frame can be tilted backward from a vertical position to help balance the load. The
tines can also be fitted with an adapter hook, Mk 91 Mod 0 (Figure 9-44), which converts a forklift
truck tine assembly into a fork/boom assembly, for lifting and transporting various loads.

9-26
The electric motor or diesel engine forklift
trucks are normally used during ordnance
evolutions. Forklift trucks are equipped with
braking systems and with either automobile-
or lever-type steering mechanisms. Forklift
trucks have solid rubber tires for use over
smooth and hard surfaces, such as paved
roads, magazine and warehouse floors, and
piers. Pneumatic tires are used for rough and
uneven terrain, in mud, or over soft, sandy
ground.

Diesel Engine Forklift Trucks

A wide variety of diesel engine forklift trucks Figure 9-44 — Mk 91 Mod 0 adapter hook.
are available for use throughout the Navy.
They range from a 4,000-pound
capacity to a 20,000-pound capacity
(Figure 9-45).
Figure 9-45 shows a typical 6,000-
pound capacity forklift truck. The truck
has a diesel engine and four
pneumatic rubber tires. It is typical of
the size and capacity ordnance
personnel usually use. A number of
different models of the forklift truck are
used at naval activities. Every model
has an adjustable two-tine fork. The
tines are secured to a vertical
supporting frame that can be
telescoped and tilted. The lifting and
tilting mechanisms are hydraulically
operated. An overhead guard is also
provided for the operator's safety.
Forklift trucks have either dual or Figure 9-45 — Typical 6,000-pound capacity diesel
single front wheels, diesel engines, forklift truck.
power-shifted transmissions, and
either pneumatic or cushion tires. The main difference between the 4,000- and 6,000-pound trucks is
in load-carrying capacity and in overall truck dimensions and weight. The exhaust systems of these
trucks have spark-arresting devices that are used when handling ammunition—even in the open.

Electric Forklift Trucks

Electric forklift trucks are frequently used by ordnance personnel. They are discussed in the following
paragraphs.

Electric Forklift Truck, 4,000-Pound Capacity

A typical 4,000-pound capacity electric forklift truck is shown in Figure 9-46. Many different models
are currently used at naval activities.

9-27
Every model has an adjustable
two-tine fork secured to a
vertical-supporting frame,
which can be telescoped and
tilted. An overhead guard may
be provided for the operator's
safety.
A rechargeable battery
provides power for the
operation of the truck and its
hydraulic lift and tilt
mechanisms. The electric
forklift truck can pick up,
transport, and lift loads
weighing up to 4,000 pounds.
It can also handle boxes of
ammunition and other
hazardous materials that can
be properly supported across
the fork tines. When Figure 9-46 — Typical 4,000-pound capacity electric forklift
ammunition is handled, the truck.
truck is spark-enclosed or
explosive proof.

Electric Forklift Truck (Reaching and Tiering), 4,000-Pound Capacity

A typical 4,000-pound electric (reaching and
tiering) forklift truck is shown in Figure 9-47.
Several different models of the electric forklift
truck are in use at naval activities. Every
model has an adjustable two-tine fork.
The tines are secured to a vertical-supporting
frame that can be telescoped and tilted. The
tines are elevated by a hydraulic-mechanical
lift mechanism. An overhead guard is not
normally provided on shipboard models for
the operator's safety. All models of the
reaching and tiering type forklift truck have
outriggers to provide a rigid structure. A
rechargeable battery provides the power for
the operation of the truck and its hydraulic lift
and tilt mechanisms. The forklift truck has
mechanical or hydraulic brakes that the
operator applies by using a foot pedal.
The electric forklift truck is used to pick up, Figure 9-47 — Typical 4,000-pound capacity
transport, stack, and unstack palletized unit (reaching and tiering) electric forklift truck.
loads weighing up to 4,000 pounds. It is
intended for use in warehouses that have narrow aisles or low floor-load ratings and aboard aircraft
carriers. When the truck is used to handle ammunition, it is spark-enclosed.

9-28
Pallet Trucks
The pallet trucks used most frequently by aviation ordnanceman are discussed in the following
paragraphs.

Electric-Powered Walkie-Type Pallet Truck

A typical 6,000-pound capacity electric-powered walkie-type pallet truck is shown in Figure 9-48.
Several different models of the pallet truck are used at naval activities. In order to use these pallet
trucks, the operator must walk behind the truck while steering by hand.
Each model of the pallet truck
has a two-tine fork that
supports a palletized load. The
tines are raised or lowered by a
hydraulic lift mechanism.
Depending upon the model, the
lift mechanism is either
electrically or manually
operated. The power source for
truck traction is a rechargeable
battery. It is steered by using
the steering handle, with a
possible right-angle turn in
either direction. The truck is
equipped with mechanical
brakes, which, when applied,
automatically shut off the
electrical power.
The pallet truck is used to pick
Figure 9-48 — Electric-powered walkie-type pallet truck.
up, transport, and deposit
palletized loads that do not exceed 6,000 pounds. The pallet truck is used on hard and smooth
surfaces, such as warehouse and magazine floors. The pallet truck is spark-enclosed when used to
handle ammunition.

Manual Pallet Truck

A typical 4,000-pound capacity manual pallet truck is shown in Figure 9-49. Many different models of
the manual pallet truck are used at naval activities. Since the trucks all operate in the same way, the
following general description applies to all models.
The 4,000-pound hand pallet truck has a two-tine fork that supports a palletized load. The tines are
raised or lowered by a hydraulic or mechanical lift mechanism. The height of lift differs from model to
model but is generally in the range of 2 to 4 inches. Depending upon the model, the lift mechanism is
operated by the tow handle, a foot pedal, or a hand lever. The truck is not self-propelled and requires
manpower for mobility. It is steered by the tow handle. A right-angle turn is possible in either direction
without moving the truck. The drive wheel is located directly beneath the tow handle. It is usually one
solid rubber tire. The load wheels, located approximately 6 inches from the ends of the fork tines, can
be arranged in a single or double (tandem) fashion under each tine.

9-29
The hand truck is used to
pick up, transport, and
deposit palletized unit loads
on single- or double-faced
pallets that do not exceed
4,000 pounds in weight. The
manual pallet truck is
particularly useful and
economical for moving loads
a short distance. It must be
used in areas that have hard
and smooth surfaces.

Mk 45 Mod 2 Handlift
Truck Figure 9-49 — Typical manual pallet truck.
The Mk 45 Mod 2 handlift
truck (Figure 9-50) body is mounted on two wheels equipped with polyurethane tires. The lifting
mechanism, which includes a lift arm and a mounting pin for engaging the load, is manually operated
by using a reversible, ratchet-type, cranking lever to raise or lower the lift arm assembly. A handlebar
is connected to the axle for steering the truck.
The Mk 45 Mod 2 is intended for use in lifting and maneuvering long, heavy containers and cradles
within the weight capacity of two trucks (6,000 pounds). These trucks are used in pairs, with one truck
positioned at each end of the container being handled.

Figure 9-50 — Mk 45 Mod 2 handlift truck.

TRAILERS
A trailer is a transport vehicle towed by another vehicle, such as a truck or tractor. All trailers are
equipped with load-supporting bodies or frames and with wheels for mobility. Trailers may be divided
into three categories—weapon trailers, weight handling trailers, and warehouse trailers. Only trailers

9-30
within the weapon trailer category are discussed in this training manual because they directly support
aircraft weapon loading operations ashore.
A weapon trailer consists of a heavy channel or tubular frame mounted on two axles and wheels that
are equipped with four pneumatic tires. The frame is supported by automotive leaf-type springs. The
front axle is steerable and the rear axle is fixed. The trailer is equipped with a tow bar or tow handle
that has a towing eye on its end. The towing eye should be used to couple the trailer to the towing
vehicle. Some trailers have draw heads at the rear to couple the towing eye of another trailer.
A weapon trailer has cradles or brackets that fit the contours of the weapon being transported. The
cradles or brackets on the trailer can be removed or adjusted for carrying loads of various sizes.
Hold-down devices, such as chains or straps, secure the load during transport. Some weapon trailers
have hydraulic systems to load weapons on aircraft, or for similar uses.
Weapon trailers are used to transport weapons, such as bombs, mines, missiles, and torpedoes of
various sizes. In general, the trailers are capable of operating over moderately soft or moderately
rough terrain. The short airfield tactical site (SATS) trailers operate over very rough terrain. Vehicles
such as the cargo truck (pickup) tow these trailers.

A/M32K-4A Rough Terrain Trailer

The A/M32K-4A rough terrain trailer (Figure 9-51) is a transport vehicle that consists of a chassis and
a lightweight, flatbed, aluminum body. The chassis has two axles and four single wheels that are
equipped with pneumatic tires. A torque box provides strength and rigidity to the body.
Two sections of the nonskid flatbed can be removed to use a forklift truck to load and unload the
trailer. The trailer is equipped with a tow bar, multiple leaf springs, service brakes, and parking
brakes. The trailer has 12 cradle tie-down fittings to hold the weapon cradles securely on the bed.

Figure 9-51 — A/M32K-4A rough terrain trailer.

The A/M32K-4A rough terrain trailer is used to transport air-launched weapons from an ammunition
dump to an airstrip. It can be operated over very rough terrain. The trailer holds weapons in cradles
that are two tiers in height when equipped with increased load-density weapon cradles. The cradles
are secured to the trailer bed by quick-release, positive-locking clips. The trailer can also be equipped

9-31
with stake sides and used as a utility vehicle for transporting weapon components. The A/M32K-4A
has an SWL of 8,000 pounds.

AERO 51D Munitions Trailer

The AERO 51D munitions trailer
(Figure 9-52) is a transport
vehicle that has an automotive
chassis and a flat-deck body. The
chassis has two axles and four
single wheels equipped with
pneumatic tires. The center
section of the nonskid flat deck is
hinged. It can be opened to
provide a hatchway across the
full width of the vehicle. It also
has hinged deck panels that have
double rails with holes at intervals
to provide a mounting base for
cradles and adapters.
The trailer has hydraulic surge
brakes and mechanical parking
brakes, a tow bar, and cable Figure 9-52 — AERO 51D munitions trailer.
harness. The cable harness
electrically connects the trailer to the towing vehicle for operation of the trailer lights. Accessory items
(chocks, tie-down straps, interconnecting electrical harness, etc.) are stored in toolboxes mounted
underneath the forward and aft decks.
The AERO 51D munitions trailer is used with a towing vehicle to transport and hold a variety of
weapons in ready storage. Adapters or cradles support the weapons on the trailer. The AERO 51D
munitions trailer is not used aboard ship. The AERO 51D has an SWL of 8,500 pounds.

MHU-126A/M
Munitions Trailer
The MHU-126A/M munitions
trailer (Figure 9-53) has a
low slung, channel steel
frame, which is mounted on
four single wheels equipped
with pneumatic rubber tires.
Lengths of drilled steel bars
welded to crossmembers of
the frame provide mounting
holes for the various
adapters. The front axle is
steerable and equipped with
a draw bar that has a towing
eye on its end to couple the
trailer to a towing vehicle. A
pintle hook on the rear of the Figure 9-53 — MHU-126A/M munitions trailer.
9-32
frame permits coupling with another trailer. The wheels are equipped with hydraulic service brakes.
Mechanical parking brakes are provided on two of the four wheels.
When it is equipped with adapters, the MHU-126A/M munitions trailer can be used to transport and
load various weapons, stores, and equipment. The recommended maximum towing speed is 5 miles
per hour for single or multiple trailers being towed in a train. The MHU-126A/M has an SWL of 5,000
pounds.

MHU-202/M Small Munitions Trailer

The MHU-202/M small munitions trailer (Figure 9-54) is an upgraded version of the MHU-126A/E and
MHU-171A/E. The trailer consists of a steel frame, tow bar, and electrical harness, which operates
stop, running, and directional lights.

Figure 9-54 — MHU-202/M small munitions trailer.

The trailer features four single wheels equipped with pneumatic tires, hydraulic brakes on all four
wheels, and mechanical parking brakes on the rear wheels. The rail configuration is the same as the
MHU-191A/M munitions transporter. The trailer is equipped for towing in up to three trailers. When
equipped with various adapters, the MHU-202/M small munitions trailer is used to transport weapons,
weapon components, and stores. The MHU-202/M has an SWL of 5,000 pounds.

LOADERS
Loaders are generally used to handle a variety of loads, such as weapons, ammunition, jet-assisted
take-off (JATO) bottles, rockets, pylons, or fuel tanks during naval aircraft loading operations. Some
loaders are capable of operating over rough terrain while others are built for smooth surfaces. The
types of loaders used to handle ammunition and explosives are equipped with flame- and spark-
arresting mufflers.

A/S32K-1E Weapon Loader

The A/S32K-1E weapon loader (Figure 9-55) is a self-propelled vehicle with a low, heavy-duty frame
supported by six small, high-capacity wheels. The vehicle has two main functional components—the
lifting mechanism and the drive mechanism.
9-33
The lift boom is operated by a
piston-type hydraulic cylinder
mounted in the mid-section of
the boom support. The
manipulating head is located at
the upper end of the lift boom
and is capable of limited lateral
and longitudinal motions as well
as tilt and yaw control. The head
is equipped with lifting forks,
which are secured with quick-
release pins and may be
mounted in three positions:
normal, inverted forward, and
inverted rear. The drive
mechanism includes a
hydrostatic drive system (drive
motor and directional valve),
drive shaft with universal joints, Figure 9-55 — A/S32K-1E weapon loader.
limited-slip differential,
axle/wheel disconnect hubs, and steerable rear drive wheels assisted by power steering. The power
to operate the drive and lifting mechanisms is supplied by a diesel engine.
The weapon loader is equipped with four-wheel hydraulic brakes, mechanical hydraulic-operated
parking brake, a spark- and flame-arresting muffler, nylon tie-down straps to hold the load securely
during handling, and lights for night loading operation.
The weapon loader is used to load externally carried munitions, weapons, and stores onto aircraft.
The loader is also capable of transporting a specific load over semi-improved terrain as well as hard,
smooth surfaces.
The weapon loader has an SWL of 4,500 pounds and is used with a variety of adapters and cradles.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING EQUIPMENT

The safety precautions and instructions that pertain to the safe operation and use of ammunition and
explosives handling equipment must be observed, both afloat and ashore. The task of ammunition
and explosives handling is hazardous. Accidents involving ammunition and explosives handling kill
and injure personnel, destroy essential supplies, and damage valuable equipment and property.
These accidents do not just happen. They are caused by carelessness or unfamiliarity with the use
and limitations of handling equipment, as well as relaxation or failure to observe safety precautions,
orders, and regulations pertaining to the handling and stowage of ammunition and explosives.
Accidents caused by misuse of handling equipment can be prevented if the operator takes the time to
understand the use and limitations of the handling equipment.
Many technical manuals and instructions contain information about safety, inspection, and tests for
OHE. For general information, refer to the following publications:
x Approved Handling Equipment for Weapons and Explosives, NAVSEA OP 2173, Volume 1
(NAVAIR 19-100-1.1) and Volume 2 (NAVAIR 19-100-1.2)
x Ammunition and Explosives Safety Afloat, NAVSEA OP 4
x Ammunition and Explosives Safety Ashore, NAVSEA OP 5, Volume 1

9-34
Only approved handling equipment should be used to handle explosive ordnance. Approved handling
equipment is described in NAVSEA OP 2173. Before anyone can be assigned to operate any
explosive OHE, the operator must receive a thorough indoctrination in general safety precautions
applicable to explosive ordnance. The operator must also be indoctrinated in the specific precautions
applicable to the equipment he or she will be operating. Additionally, operators must be qualified and
certified under OPNAVINST 8023.24(series) and other appropriate command directives.
To assure reliability, explosive handling equipment must be inspected and periodically tested.
Equipment, such as slings, bands, beams, strongbacks, and spreader bars, is static tested at 200
percent to 215 percent of SWL. If the date and the results of the latest static test are not marked on
the equipment or the test is out of date, the equipment should not be used.
Operators must possess a valid explosives driver’s license before operating industrial material
handling equipment, such as forklift trucks, pickup trucks, platform trucks, crane trucks, tractors, and
trailers.
The SWL of the equipment being used should never be exceeded. If adapters are used, the lowest
SWL of the equipment-adapter configuration cannot be exceeded. For example, if an AERO 12C
bomb skid (SWL of 1,250 pounds) is used with an AERO 9C bomb skid adapter (SWL of 1,000
pounds), the maximum capacity of the skid-adapter configuration is limited to 1,000 pounds.

9-35
 End of Chapter 9
Ammunition Handling Equipment
Review Questions
9-1. What command controls the ammunition handling equipment identified by mark and
modification numbers?

A. COMNAVAIRLANT
B. COMNAVAIRPAC
C. NAVAIR
D. NAVSEA

9-2. What command controls the ammunition handling equipment identified by ADU, ADK, and
HLK?

A. COMNAVAIRLANT
B. COMNAVAIRPAC
C. NAVAIR
D. NAVSEA

9-3. By what means can the command that has control over a particular piece of ammunition
handling equipment be identified?

A. Item cost
B. Item designation
C. Item security classification
D. Item usage

9-4. A standard four-way wood pallet has what maximum safe working load, in pounds?

A. 1,000
B. 2,000
C. 3,000
D. 4,000

9-5. A Mark 3 Modification 0 pallet has what maximum safe working load, in pounds?

A. 1,000
B. 2,000
C. 3,000
D. 4,000

9-6. A Mark 12 Modification 1 pallet is what width, in inches?

A. 35
B. 38
C. 45
D. 48

9-36
9-7. A Mark 43 Modification 1 weapons carrier is combined with what weapons carrier to lift Mark
82/bomb live unit 111 bombs in tandem?

A. Mk 18 Mod 1
B. Mk 49 Mod 1
C. Mk 105 Mod 1
D. Mk 109 Mod 0

9-8. The Mark 49 Modification 1 weapons carrier has what maximum safe working load, in pounds?

A. 2,500
B. 3,500
C. 4,000
D. 4,500

9-9. A Mark 51 Modification 1 weapons carrier has what total number of lifting eyes?

A. Two
B. Four
C. Six
D. Eight

9-10. What number of interchangeable and interlocking 49-inch sections make up the A/F32K-1A
bomb assembly stand?

A. Two
B. Three
C. Four
D. Five

9-11. What action is provided by the A/F32K-1A bomb assembly stand tray for the weapon during
assembly/disassembly operations?

A. Provides a total weight printout of the weapons being assembled

B. Permits a 360-degree rotation of the weapon
C. Collapses for stowage purposes
D. Provides tie-down locations during calm seas

9-12. What action should be performed to use an HLU-256/E manual hoisting bar in a tee
configuration?

A. Remove the tail fuze plug

B. Remove the tail stop
C. Relocate the nose plug connector to a position at the bar's midpoint
D. Relocate the tail stop to a position at the bar's midpoint

9-37
9-13. What beam is used to lift Harpoon missiles?

A. Mk 37 Mod 1
B. Mk 18 Mod 1
C. MHU-129/E
D. ADU-399/E

9-14. The Mark 85, 86, 87 Modification 1 and Mark 100 Modification 2 pallet slings can handle what
range of load heights, in inches?

A. 16 to 70
B. 25 to 40
C. 35 to 48
D. 40 to 68

9-15. What total number of pounds is the rated capacity of a Mark 105 hoisting sling with two leg
assemblies?

A. 1,500
B. 2,000
C. 3,000
D. 6,000

9-16. The brake crank on an HLU-288/E bomb hoist is used for what purpose?

A. Help hoist a load

B. Keep the cable firm in its groove
C. Maintain tension on the brake clutch
D. Swing the load

9-17. The HLU-196D/E has what double-point cable lift capacity, in pounds?

A. 1,500
B. 3,000
C. 4,000
D. 6,000

9-18. The AERO 12C bomb skid has what maximum safe working load, in pounds?

A. 1,250
B. 1,550
C. 2,500
D. 4,000

9-38
9-19. An AERO 12C bomb skid with an AERO 9C bomb skid adapter installed provides what
maximum safe working load, in pounds?

A. 1,000
B. 1,250
C. 2,000
D. 2,500

9-20. The AERO 64B soft-belt adapter provides what maximum safe working load, in pounds?

A. 1,000
B. 2,000
C. 2,500
D. 4,000

9-21. The MHU-191A/M munitions transporter provides what maximum safe working load, in
pounds?

A. 2,000
B. 2,500
C. 5,000
D. 6,000

9-22. Two pairs of ADU-483/E adapters provide what maximum safe working load, in pounds?

A. 1,000
B. 4,000
C. 5,000
D. 8,500

9-23. The AERO 71A skid flatbed adapter provides what maximum safe working load, in pounds?

A. 1,000
B. 2,000
C. 4,000
D. 5,000

9-24. Forklift trucks are powered by gasoline engines, diesel engines, and what other source?

A. Emergency hoists
B. Electric motors
C. 24-volt generators
D. Steam engines

9-25. An A/S32K-1E weapons loader provides what maximum safe working load, in pounds?

A. 2,500
B. 4,500
C. 6,500
D. 8,000

9-39
 CHAPTER 10
SUSPENSION, ARMING, AND RELEASING EQUIPMENT
The Navy uses complex suspension, arming, and releasing devices in combat aircraft and weapons.
The high speed and performance of potential targets and of our own aircraft require the electronic
operation of suspension, arming, and releasing equipment.
The equipment covered in this chapter is part of the aircraft search or kill stores systems. Generally,
these devices operate electrically and are controlled by aircraft electrical circuits. A circuit-closing
device actuates them manually by a hand switch or automatically in the system.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
When you have completed this chapter, you will be able to do the following:
1. Identify the purpose of bomb racks.
2. Recognize the bomb racks used for various configurations.
3. Identify the operation of bomb racks, to include electrical and manual release and arming.
4. Identify the purpose of bomb ejector racks.
5. Identify the principles of operations of bomb ejector racks.

BOMB RACKS
Aircraft bombs, torpedoes, mines, countermeasure devices, and other stores are suspended
internally or externally from the aircraft. The suspension equipment can carry, arm, and release those
weapons/stores. Suspension equipment includes AERO adapters, bomb release units (BRU),
suspension under wing units (SUU), or Army Navy air-launched expendable (AN/ALE)
countermeasure dispenser systems (CMDS).
Bomb racks are generally classified as ejection or freefall. A free-fall bomb rack allows the ordnance
item to fall from the rack when all the requirements of the launch sequence have been satisfied, while
release from an ejector-type bomb rack is accomplished by the firing of a cartridge-actuated device
(CAD), which then ejects the item or items.

AERO 1A/1B Adapter Assembly

The BRU-14/A and BRU-15/A bomb racks use the AERO 1A (Forward)/1B (Aft) adapter assemblies
(Figure 10-1) on the forward and aft end suspension hooks, which enables them to load and carry
weapons/stores that have suspension lugs spaced 30 inches apart and weigh up to 2,000 pounds.
The AERO 1A/1B adapter linkage attaches to the bomb rack, and the movement of the AERO 1A/1B
adapter suspension hooks corresponds to the movement of the bomb rack suspension hooks.
Operation and Service Instructions, AERO-1 Bomb Rack Adapter Assemblies, Commander, Naval Air
Systems Command (NAVAIR) 11-5E-17 contains more information about the AERO 1A/1B adapter
assembly.

10-1
 Figure 10-1 — AERO 1A/1B bomb rack adapter assembly.

BRU-12/A, BRU-12A/A Bomb Rack

The BRU-12/A and BRU-12A/A bomb racks (Figure 10-2) are designed for fixed mounting in a bomb
bay of the P-3 aircraft and can carry, arm, and release a weapon/store weighing up to 1,450 pounds.
Each has two hooks, spaced 14 inches apart.

Figure 10-2 — BRU-12/A, BRU-12A/A aircraft bomb rack.

Two solenoid actuated arming units at the bottom of the rack provide mechanical arming for the nose
and tail of a weapon/store. These units are electrically actuated to arm a weapons/store as it is
dropped. If the arming units are not electrically actuated, the weapon/store will drop unarmed. A linear
electro-mechanical actuator (LEMA) provides electrical release of a weapon/store. No in-flight manual
release mechanism is provided. A BRU-12/A bomb rack with improved positive arming latch
installation creates a BRU-12A/A.

10-2
BRU-14/A Bomb Rack
The BRU-14/A bomb rack (Figure 10-3) provides suspension and release of conventional and special
weapons/stores up to 2,200 pounds with 14-inch suspensions. At times, AERO 1A/1B adapter
assemblies are used to increase the bomb rack to 30-inch suspension capacity. The BRU-14/A may
be installed in the bomb bay of the patrol (P)-3C aircraft and in the weapon pylon of the rotary wing
(H)-60 aircraft.

Figure 10-3 — BRU-14/A aircraft bomb rack (left-hand configuration).

Sway braces are bolted to the rack frame. Installation of an in-flight operable bomb rack lock
(IFOBRL) allows remote locking and unlocking of the rack by applying electrical power to the aircraft.
The BRU-14/A bomb rack has an auxiliary unlock assembly. It releases the IFOBRL if the IFOBRL
fails to function in the normal release mode. The auxiliary unlock assembly is a CAD that provides a
mounting point for the aft end of the IFOBRL. When actuated, the unlock assembly releases the
IFOBRL and allows it to move forward, freeing the sear link from restraint, and permits the rack
linkage to function normally.
The BRU-14A bomb rack has a secondary release assembly. It initiates hook release if the LEMA
fails to function. The secondary release assembly is a CAD that consists of a housing, piston, and
release slider assembly mounted on the top of the bomb rack frame. When actuated, the secondary
release moves the sear link forward to release the bomb rack. The BRU-14/A doesn't have remote
manual-release capabilities.
Operation and Service Instructions, Bomb Rack BRU-14/A and BRU-15/A, NAVAIR 11-5E-18
contains more information about the BRU-14/A bomb rack.

BRU-15/A Bomb Rack

The BRU-15/A bomb rack (Figure 10-4) is installed on the wing stations of the P-3 aircraft. It is used
with the aircraft wing store launcher assembly, which is modified to launch a Harpoon missile.
Attaching AERO 1A/1B adapter assemblies can increase the bomb rack to 30-inch suspension
capacity.
10-3
 Figure 10-4 — BRU-15/A bomb rack.

The BRU-15/A bomb rack is a modification of the BRU-14/A bomb rack. The IFOBRL mechanism and
associated auxiliary unlock device are not included.
A safety mechanism positively locks the release mechanism of the bomb rack when a safety pin is
installed in the safety mechanism.
The cartridge-actuated secondary release mechanism is replaced by a cable-actuated manual
release mechanism that operates the primary release linkage through an added manual release cable
and lever.

BOMB EJECTOR RACKS

When in flight, today's high-speed fighter and attack aircraft create a vacuum under the fuselage and
wings. If a weapon/store is released from the bomb rack, the vacuum can prevent the weapon/store
from entering the airstream and falling to the target. If the weapon/store does not fall, it may
physically contact the aircraft structure, causing serious damage to or loss of the aircraft.
Bomb ejector racks are different from bomb racks. Bomb ejector racks use electrically fired impulse
cartridges to eject the weapon/store free of the bomb racks. Bomb ejector racks eject the
weapon/store from the bomb rack with sufficient force to overcome vacuum buildup and ensure a
safe weapon/store-launching environment.

BRU-32(Series) Ejector Unit Rack Assembly

The BRU-32(series) ejector unit rack assembly (Figure 10-5) is a non-jettisonable single carriage rack
used for carrying weapons or other external stores on the fighter and attack (F/A)-18(variants)
aircraft. The bomb rack is attached to the aircraft by four bolts and electrically connected to the
aircraft weapons system.
The BRU-32A/A can carry weapons/stores of 10 to 28 inches in diameter weighing up to 2,600
pounds, while the BRU-32B/A can carry weapons/stores of the same diameter weighing up to 4,200
pounds. There are two pairs of suspension hooks, 14 and 30 inches apart on the longitudinal
centerline of the ejector unit rack.

10-4
The BRU-32(series) ejector unit rack assemblies use a 14-WRLQFK suspension hook to suspend
the following:
x Single stores
x BRU-33/A vertical ejector racks (VER)
x BRU-33A/A canted vertical ejector rack (CVER)
x BRU-41(series) multiple ejector rack (MER) and improved multiple ejector rack (IMER)
x BRU-42(series) triple ejector rack (TER) and improved triple ejector rack (ITER)
x BRU-55/A ejector rack
x LAU-115(series), LAU-117(series), and LAU-118(series) missile launchers

Figure 10-5 — BRU-32(series) bomb ejector rack.

The BRU-32(series) bomb ejector rack has a safety interlock and two sway brace assemblies with
self-adjusting wedges. The safety interlock mechanically prevents the accidental opening of the
suspension hooks. It is also used to lock and unlock the suspension hooks during loading operations.
Control the automatic sway bracing by opening and closing the suspension hooks.
Sensing switches are incorporated within the rack to indicate to the aircraft weapon system that a
store is loaded. The primary ejection uses two cartridges to generate the required gas pressure for
rack operations. If the primary ejection fails, the auxiliary release unit provides emergency release.
10-5
The auxiliary release unit uses one cartridge that opens the hooks only. Nose and tail arming
solenoids are used with mechanical fuzing. A receptacle is provided for connecting the electric fuze.
The bomb rack is interchangeable with the centerline or the inboard and outboard pylons.

BRU-33(Series) Vertical Ejector Rack Assembly

The BRU-33/A VER assembly (Figure 10-6) and BRU-33A/A CVER (Figure 10-7) are suspended by
the BRU-32(series) bomb ejector rack. The BRU-33(series) vertical ejector rack assemblies use 14-
inch suspension hooks to carry two 10- to 16-inch diameter external stores weighing up to 1,000
pounds each. The VER/CVER feature a special safety interlock and self-adjusting wedges. The
aircraft electrically controls the safety interlock, which mechanically prevents accidental opening of
the suspension hooks.

Figure 10-6 — BRU-33/A bomb ejector rack.

Figure 10-7 — BRU-33A/A bomb ejector rack.

10-6
Sensing switches are incorporated to indicate to the store management system (SMS) that a store is
loaded. The rack has provisions for mechanical and electric fuzing. The ejection unit uses two
cartridges to generate the required gas pressure for rack operations.

BRU-55(Series) Aircraft Bomb Ejector Rack

The BRU-55(series) bomb ejector racks (Figure 10-8) allow for carriage of two smart weapons (up to
1,000-pound class) on a single aircraft station. Currently the BRU-55(series) ejector racks suspend
the Joint Stand-off Weapon (JSOW), and 1,000-pound Joint Direct Attack Munition (JDAM).

Figure 10-8 — BRU-55(series) aircraft bomb ejector rack.

The BRU-55(series) uses the Department of Defense Interface Standard, (MIL-STD)-1760 interface.
The BRU-55(series)—70 inches long, 29 inches wide, and weighing between 228 and 236 pounds—
is currently used on the F/A-18(variants) aircraft. Its aircraft interface is 30-inch lugs and a single
Department of Defense Interface Standard, MIL-STD-1760 umbilical, and its weapons interface is 14-
inch lugs and one Department of Defense Interface Standard, MIL-STD-1760 umbilical each. It is also
equipped with two weapon umbilical retaining brackets to prevent damage to the weapon umbilical
upon release.

BRU-75/A and BRU-76/A Bomb Rack Unit

The BRU-75/A bomb rack (Figure 10-9) suspends weapons and stores using 14-inch suspension
hooks and the BRU-76/A bomb rack (Figure 10-10) uses 14- and 30- inch suspension hooks. Each
BRU has electrical and pneumatic connections, a pneumatic release assembly, safety interlock, and
automatic sway bracing. They are electrically controlled by the SMS and pneumatically operated by
compressed air.

10-7
 Figure 10-9 — BRU-75/A bomb rack.

Figure 10-10 — BRU-76/A bomb rack.

BRU-41/A Improved Multiple Ejector Rack and BRU-42/A Improved Triple Ejector
Rack
The BRU-41/A IMER (Figure 10-11) and the BRU-42/A ITER (Figure 10-12) function in basically the
same manner. There are four major subassemblies—the structural adapter assembly, the electronic
control unit, the cable assembly, and the ejector unit. The electronic control unit and the ejector unit
are the same for both the BRU-41/A and the BRU-42/A.

Adapter Assembly
The adapter assembly is a hollow, hexagonal aluminum extrusion that forms the main support for the
rack assembly hardware. Attaching points on the adapter assembly provide 14 or 30 inch spacing of
the suspension lugs, which allows installation on the various types of aircraft.
The adapter assembly houses the electronic control unit and cable assembly and provides for
attachment of three or six individual ejector units. A nose-cone assembly and a tail-cone assembly
enclose the ends of the adapter assembly for aerodynamic purposes.

10-8
 Figure 10-11 — BRU-41/A IMER.

Figure 10-12 — BRU-42/A ITER.

Electronic Control Unit

The electronic control unit is a disposable solid-state electronic control unit in a sealed container. It
controls all the functions of the bomb rack and has the capability of releasing stores at 35 millisecond
intervals. If it malfunctions, replace it with a new one.

Cable Assembly
The cable assemblies are modular wiring systems utilizing electromagnetic interface (EMI) resistant
filter line wiring. The cable assemblies interface the aircraft with a quick-release connector and
provide routing of electrical power to the ejector unit assemblies for store sensing, arming, and
breech assembly firing. For rocket stores, the cable assemblies route electrical power to the rocket
harness assemblies to provide firing impulses to the stores. Three rocket adapter harness assemblies
electrically couple rocket stores to the BRU-41/A IMER or BRU-42/A ITER.

Ejector Unit Assembly

The ejector unit assemblies used on the BRU-41/A IMER and the BRU-42/A ITER are identical. The
only difference between them is the internal configuration of the release linkage. The ejector units are
configured for right-hand shoulder, left-hand shoulder, or centerline installation (Figure 10-13).

10-9
 Figure 10-13 — IMER/ITER ejector unit locations.

The shoulder stations are attached to the adapter assembly by ejector unit attach blocks. The
centerline stations are attached by ejector unit attach hangars.
The BRU-41/A IMER and BRU-42/A ITER ejector units (Figure 10-14) consist of a housing assembly
equipped with integral wiring, a breech and ejector mechanism, store suspension hooks, a store
sensing switch, electro-mechanical arming units, adjustable sway braces, and mechanical linkage
driven by the breech or manual release lever to open the suspension hooks.

Figure 10-14 — IMER/ITER ejector unit.

10-10
The suspension hooks are spaced 14 inches apart and are independently self-latching. A manual
release lever is used to open the hooks during ground operation. The safety stop lever safes the
ejector unit mechanically. Figure 10-15 shows the locked and unlocked positions of the ejector unit
safety stop lever.
When the safety lever is in the LOCKED position, the hook release rod is physically blocked from
rearward movement and prevents suspension hook release. If the hook release rod is not in the full
forward position, the safety stop lever cannot be rotated to the LOCKED position. A store-sensing
switch is located under the forward suspension hook, and is actuated by the opening and closing of
the hook.

Figure 10-15 — Ejector unit safety stop lever.

IMER/ITER Operational Description

The functional description of the BRU-41/A IMER and BRU-42/A ITER ejector rack has two
categories—ejector unit mechanical operation and electrical operation.

Ejector Unit Mechanical Operation

All ejector units on the BRU-41/A IMER and BRU-42/A ITER are operationally the same. An
electrically initiated gas-generating cartridge actuates the ejection mechanism. Figure 10-16 shows
the mechanical operation of the ejector unit.
When a store is loaded onto the ejector unit, the store suspension lugs force the suspension hooks to
the closed position. The suspension hooks are locked in the closed position by the over center
position of the hook toggle levers. The link stops, located over each of the hook toggle levers, prevent
the suspension hooks from opening until the cartridge is fired or the manual release lever is pulled,
even if the safety stop lever is in the unlocked position (Figure 10-16).
When the gas-generating cartridge is fired, the resulting gas pressure moves the breech aft. The aft
movement of the breech also moves the hook release rod aft, lifting the toggle hook levers from the
over center position, which forces the cranks are down and unlocks the suspension hooks (Figure 10-
16).

10-11
Figure 10-16 — Ejector unit operation.

10-12
Gas pressure from the cartridge acting against the gun piston, plus the weight of the store, forces the
unlocked suspension hooks to open, releasing the store. The hook toggle spring and helical spring
hold the hooks in the open position. The gun piston continues to act against the store to provide
positive separation from the ejector unit (Figure 10-16).

BRU-41/A IMER and BRU-42/A ITER Electrical Operation

Before discussing the electrical operation of the BRU-41/A IMER and BRU-42/A ITER, it is important
to understand the function of several electrical components. The following paragraphs briefly discuss
these components.
BRU-41/A IMER and BRU-42/A ITER ejector units are numbered according to their firing sequence
(Figure 10-17). For the purpose of discussion, assume a BRU-41/A IMER has stores loaded on
stations 1, 2, 4, and 6, and that the release mode selector is set for single release.

Figure 10-17 — IMER/ITER firing sequence.

When the pilot depresses the cockpit bomb button, a firing pulse is routed from the aircraft through
the rack safety switch and the release mode selector switch to energize the necessary rack circuits.
With a weapon loaded on station 1, the forward suspension hook is in the closed position,
automatically closing the stores sensing switch. The firing voltage is then routed to the firing circuit,
firing the cartridge and ejecting the weapon. Ejection of the stores from all remaining loaded stations
will occur in sequence each time the pilot presses and releases the bomb button. In this particular
load, stations 3 and 5 were not loaded; therefore, the forward hooks should be left open. If they are
closed, the stores sensing switch signals the rack that a weapon is loaded on that station and will not
automatically step to the next station.

Hardware Adapter Kits

Hardware adapter kits can adapt the BRU-41/A IMER and BRU-42/A ITER to various aircraft. The kits
include electrical harness assemblies, suspension lugs, sway brace pads and extensions, and the
attaching hardware required to configure the racks for a desired pylon station on a particular aircraft.
Additionally, practice bomb adapters can adapt the BRU-41/A IMER and BRU-42/A ITER for the
attachment of practice bombs or externally carried illumination unit (LUU)-2B/B aircraft parachute
flares and Mk 58 marine location markers. The adapter (Figure 10-18) has two separate
components—a bracket assembly, and a restrictor.
The hardware for practice bomb adapters is organizational-level equipment, to be maintained in the
custody of the organizational unit.

10-13
Consult the Organizational, Intermediate, and Depot Level Maintenance Improve Multiple Ejector
Rack (IMER) and Improved Triple Ejector Rack (ITER), NAVAIR 11-75A-603 for specific information
concerning the IMER and ITER.

Figure 10-18 — Practice bomb adapter kit.

DISPENSERS AND EJECTORS

Dispensers and ejectors provide additional offensive and defensive capabilities to the aircraft during
tactical situations. These units are usually detachable. The dispenser or ejector is suspended from
other installed suspension equipment or mounted directly to the aircraft. They suspend and release
ordnance items, such as aircraft parachute flares and sonobuoys. The following section will cover
basic characteristics of the dispensers and ejectors currently in use.

SUU-25F/A Dispenser
The SUU-25F/A dispenser (Figure 10-19) is an airborne, externally mounted, reusable four-tube,
rearward ejecting-launching device. The dispenser may be loaded on any aircraft weapons station
that has a 14-inch suspension and is authorized to carry the SUU-25F/A dispenser.
The SUU-25F/A has a cylindrical, all-metal body consisting of four aluminum tubes that can hold up to
eight LUU-2B/B aircraft parachute flares. The tubes are 5 inches in diameter, clustered together
inside an outer skin. There is an aluminum die-cast bulkhead at each end. When empty, the
dispenser weighs 260 pounds. When fully loaded with eight LUU-2B/B flares and eight impulse
cartridges, it weighs 490 pounds.
10-14
Figure 10-19 shows the shipping and flight configuration of the dispenser. The shipping configuration
(Figure 10-19, view A) has shock pan assemblies at either end of the dispenser for easier handling
during shipment and storage. A lock wire is attached to the two suspension lugs to prevent them from
becoming lost during shipment or storage. Remove the lock wire and shock pan assemblies before
using the dispenser. When the dispenser is configured for flight (Figure 10-19, view B), a phenolic or
metal cover (nose cone) is mounted on the forward flange. Covers are not shipped with the
dispenser; they are ordered as separate components.

Figure 10-19 — SUU-25F/A dispenser.

In the following section on the SUU-25F/A dispenser, Figure 10-20 contains information regarding the
location and identification of the components.
The breech, breech cap, breech lead, downloading breech, downloading breech cap, manifold, and
the stepper switch are located on the forward bulkhead.

10-15
 Figure 10-20 — SUU-25F/A dispenser, exploded view (forward end).
Manifold
The manifold has eight manifold breech lead receptacles for connection of the breech leads and two
test socket assemblies that are used during dispenser electrical test procedures.

Breech, Breech Cap, and Breech Lead

The dispenser has two breeches, two breech caps, and two breech leads for each tube. The breech
is screwed into the bulkhead so an impulse cartridge can be installed. The breech cap, containing the
firing pin, screws onto the breech. The breech lead connects to the breech cap and provides a path
for the 28 volt direct current (dc) required to fire the impulse cartridge.

Downloading Breech and Downloading Breech Cap

The dispenser has one downloading breech and one downloading breech cap for each tube. The
downloading breech mounts to the bulkhead. The downloading breech cap screws onto the
downloading breech. With the cap removed, the downloading breech allows insertion of the loading,
unloading, and cleaning push rod tool for easy store removal during downloading procedures. The
downloading breech also prevents air pressure buildup in the tubes when loading stores. Reinstall the
downloading breech caps after completing the loading or unloading procedures.

Stepper Switch
The stepper switch provides sequential firing of the impulse cartridges. The switch has ten functional
settings—one safe setting, one arm setting, and eight firing steps. Always place the stepper switch in

10-16
the SAFE position during dispenser loading and unloading. Move the switch to the ARM position
during aircraft arming procedures just before flight.

Forward and Aft Retaining Lock

Each of the four dispenser tubes contains a forward retaining lock, an aft retaining lock, and an
arming mechanism.
The forward and aft retaining locks, when in the locked position, protrude into the dispenser tube. The
retaining locks prevent loaded stores from being inadvertently ejected by the forces during aircraft
catapult launches.
The forward retaining lock is it located near the midpoint of the dispenser, between the dispenser
outer skin and the tube. The retainer lock can be moved from either the locked or unlocked position
through an access door located on either side of the dispenser. Rotate the retaining lock to the
unlocked position before loading a store. The unlocked position pivots the retainer lock out of the
tube. After loading the store, rotate the retaining lock to the locked position, and secure it by installing
a shear pin. The forward retaining lock retains the forward-loaded store only.
The aft retaining lock is attached to the aft bulkhead and retains the aft loaded store. Secure the aft
retaining lock in the locked position by installing a shear pin.

Arming Mechanism
The arming mechanism is located in the aft end of the dispenser tube (Figure 10-21). The arming
mechanism initiates the arming sequence of a store as it is ejected from the tube.
The dispenser is suspended by two screw-type lugs spaced 14 inches apart. The area around the
suspension lugs has a hardback reinforcement to permit sway bracing and forced ejection of the
dispenser. Two electrical receptacles, J1 and J2, are located forward and aft of the suspension lugs,
respectively. Both receptacles provide a way to electrically connect the dispenser to the aircraft
weapons control system. Only one receptacle is used at a time. The electrical configuration of the
rack determines which receptacle to use.
An electrical wiring harness is routed internally from electrical connectors J1 and J2 to the stepper
switch. A safety switch that is normally in the closed position interrupts the wiring harness. When the
safety pin and flag assembly are inserted, they hold the safety switch in the open position and ground
the electrical circuits, making the dispenser electrically safe.

Functional Description
When a dispenser tube is loaded with munitions, each pair of flares is configured with an ADU-381/A
flare adapter kit.
Press a yellow-colored sealing ring on each end of the munition as a seal between the munitions and
the tube body to prevent the gas pressure from escaping during ejection. Install a green-colored
arming cap on the timer end of a flare or on the rotochute end of a sonobuoy; connect the green
arming cap lanyard to the timer knob of the flare, and then press it on over the flange of the sealing
ring. Mount a white cross-shaped plastic spacer on the aft sealing ring of the forward munitions. The
spacer provides enough space between the forward and aft munitions to provide an expansion
chamber for ejecting the aft munitions. After installing the adapter, install the munitions in the
dispenser tube.

10-17
 Figure 10-21 — SUU-25F/A dispenser, exploded view (aft end).
When a SUU-25F/A dispenser is fully loaded and uploaded on the aircraft, the pilot may eject flares.
The pilot must first select the weapons control system and then trigger the dispensing switch. A 28-
volt dc electrical signal passes through an electrical cable from the aircraft to either receptacle J1 or
J2 of the dispenser. The signal is routed from the dispenser receptacle to the stepper switch, causing
the stepper switch to step from the preset ARM position to the number 1 position, firing the number 1
impulse cartridge. The gas pressure generated by the fired cartridge is ported through a gas tube,
internally along the side of the dispenser, into the aft expansion chamber ahead of the aft flare.
As the gas pressure increases, it cuts the aft retaining lock shear pin, allowing the aft flare to eject. As
the timer end of the flare approaches the rear of the tube, the arming finger of the arming mechanism
engages the yellow sealing ring. The sealing ring cams the arming finger down, which, in turn, cams
the arming hook up to engage the green arming cap, permitting the flare to extend the lanyard. The
lanyard extracts the timer knob and arms or starts the flare functioning sequence.
When the pilot triggers the system again, the stepper switch steps to the number 2 position and fires
the number 2 impulse cartridge. The gas pressure is directed into the forward expansion chamber. As
the gas pressure increases, it cuts the forward retaining lock shear pin, permitting the forward flare to
be dispensed in the same manner as the aft flare. If the aft flare failed to eject, the gas pressure
generated for ejecting the forward flare produces sufficient gas pressure to purge both flares out of
the tube.
The procedure for the remaining three tubes is the same. The firing sequence of the breeches is
stamped into the metal of the breech caps as shown in Figure 10-22.

10-18
Maintenance Requirements
Organizational-level maintenance is limited to
a visual inspection of the dispenser. Examine
the dispenser for damage, such as cracks or
breaks in the aft retaining locks or suspension
lugs, unburned pellets or obstructers in the
breech sleeve, and frayed or broken breech
leads.
For further information concerning the SUU-
25F/A dispenser, see Maintenance
Instructions with Illustrated Parts Breakdown
Organizational and Intermediate Level
Dispenser SUU-25F/A, NAVAIR 11-75AA-48.

AN/ALE-39 Countermeasures
Dispensing System
The AN/ALE-39 CMDS dispenses decoys to
confuse and jam enemy electronic tracking,
missile guidance, and homing systems. The
system ejects expendable payloads consisting Figure 10-22 — Breech cap identification
of chaff, flares, or radiofrequency (RF) jammers numbers.
singly or in groups from two 30-round dispenser
magazines.
Decoy flares are used during evasive maneuvers against heat-seeking missiles. Chaff rounds consist
of fine-shredded metal strips contained in a cylindrical metal container. When ejected from the chaff
dispenser, the metal strips are forced from the cylindrical container and dispersed into the
atmosphere. The chaff in the atmosphere jams ground controlled radar installations or radar-
controlled missiles.
The countermeasure dispensing system includes two dispenser assemblies, each of which consists
of a dispenser system block and printed wiring board (PWB), two dispenser housings, an electronic
countermeasure (ECM) control panel, an AN/ALE-39 programmer, and chaff/flare ECM dispense
switches.

Magazine Block and Printed Wiring Board

The dispensing system block and a PWB (Figure 10-23), has 30 holes for loading payload units.

NOTE
Installation of the impulse cartridges must be
accomplished in a designated RF-free area.

The PWB contains the circuitry and socket holes for installing 30 electrically-initiated impulse
cartridges.

10-19
 Figure 10-23 — AN/ALE-39 block and PWB.

Load the dispenser by putting the 30 payload

units into the block (Figure 10-24).

Figure 10-24 — Payload installation.

10-20
 WARNING
Do not hammer or force a flare into or out of a flare dispenser tube. Hand
pressure is adequate for seating or removing flares.

Install an impulse cartridge in each of the 30 socket holes on the PWB (Figure 10-25). Then, attach
the board to the block by two captive screws.

Figure 10-25 — Impulse cartridge installation.

Finally, install the loaded dispenser magazine

assembly in the dispenser housing (Figure 10-
26), securing it with the four positive-lock studs of
the dispenser block.
The gas pressure generated when the impulse
cartridges are fired forces the payload units from
their plastic or aluminum sleeves. Use the chaff
sleeve extractor (Figure 10-27) during dispenser
download procedures.

Dispenser Assembly
Remove the dispenser assembly from the
housing assembly by unlocking the four positive-
lock studs. Move the dispenser assembly to a
designated area and load it. Then, return it to the
aircraft and reinstall it in the dispenser housing.
Safety switches, installed in the aircraft near the
dispenser housings, make the dispenser's
assemblies electrically safe when the safety pin
or flag assemblies are installed. When the
dispensers are loaded, the safety pin or flag
assemblies must remain installed until just before Figure 10-26 — Dispenser magazine loading.
flight.
10-21
 Figure 10-27 — Sleeve and payload extractor.

The rear of the housing assembly has a dispenser interconnect that electrically connects the
dispenser assembly to the system. When installing the dispenser assembly into the housing
assembly, use a guide pin to ensure proper alignment of the electrical connectors.

AN/ALE-47 Countermeasures Dispenser System

The AN/ALE-47 CMDS provides an integrated, reprogrammable, computer-controlled system for
dispensing expendables/decoys such as chaff, flares, RF expendables, and others. The system
enhances aircraft survivability in sophisticated threat environments and is designed to employ
electronic and infrared countermeasures according to a program the aircrew develops and
implements.
The AN/ALE-47 CMDS provides the aircrew with a smart CMDS, allowing the aircrew to optimize the
countermeasures employed against anti-aircraft threats.
The AN/ALE-47 contains an MX-12023/ALE-47(V) block (Figure 10-28) and a breechplate (Figure 10-
29).
During magazine assembly, remove the breechplate from the block by loosening the four captive
screws (Figure 10-29) that secure the breechplate to the block. Place the block on its side in
preparation to receive expendables. After verifying inspection of the expendables, insert them into the
block from the breechplate side in accordance with (IAW) the applicable ALE-47 (V) mission data file
(MDF) magazine identification (ID) loadout configuration. Consult the appropriate technical manual for
loadout configuration data.
Prior to using the breechplate, inspect it for cleanliness or fired impulse cartridge residue—particularly
around impulse cartridge contacts. Before installing the impulse cartridge, clean all surfaces of the
breechplates. If needed, clean the breechplate surface IAW procedures outlined in Organizational
and Intermediate Maintenance Instructions with Illustrated Parts Breakdown Countermeasures
Dispensing Set AN/ALE-47(V), NAVAIR 16-30ALE-47-1.
It is important to verify that breechplate magazine ID switch settings of S1 and S2 are correctly set for
the selected MDF loadout configuration (Figure 10-30).
Next, install impulse cartridges onto the breechplate. Use appropriate assembly manuals for
dispenser/component compatibility and to identify which impulse cartridge types to use with loaded
expendables.

10-22
 Figure 10-28 — ALE-47 block.

Figure 10-29 — ALE-47 dispenser block assembly.

10-23
 Figure 10-30 — ALE-47 breechplate.
Use the following procedures to install the impulse cartridges:
1. Insert the impulse cartridge into the impulse cartridge alignment tool located on the
breechplate (Figure 10-30). Reject the impulse cartridge if the base does not seat firmly on the
breechplate.
2. Remove the impulse cartridge from the impulse cartridge alignment tool.
3. Insert the impulse cartridge into the appropriate breechplate firing location, remembering that
the corresponding positions between magazine dispenser block and impulse cartridge side of
breechplate are reversed (mirror image).
4. Repeat these steps until the breechplate is completely loaded.
Then install the breechplate on the dispenser block. With the loaded block on its side, bring the
breechplate with impulse cartridges installed up to mate with the block and then secure the
breechplate to the block using the four captive screws. The breechplate rotation method has the
advantage of not losing the impulse cartridge from the breechplate and also directs the expendable
away from the technician where an inadvertent ignition will produce a less hazardous situation.
The screws securing the breechplate to the block do not ensure a gas tight seal between the block,
expendable, and the breechplate. These screws simply secure the breechplate to the block until the
magazine is loaded into the dispenser. Tighten the four screws securing the breechplate to the block
using a torque wrench IAW applicable weapons assembly manual without overtightening. These
screws are for alignment of the breechplate to the block only and are not designed as structural
attachments. Finally, load the AN/ALE-47 magazine into the dispenser. Consult platform-specific
loading manuals for loading instructions.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
For an aviation ordnanceman (AO), safety is very important when working with suspension, arming,
and releasing systems. It is doubtful there is a second class petty officer in the Navy who has not
witnessed a minor mishap with suspension, arming, and releasing equipment. Accidents can be
prevented if personnel are trained, educated to work on the equipment, and follow the safety
precautions and maintenance instructions. As an AO, you must follow safety precautions and
10-24
maintenance instructions and train new personnel. A few safety precautions that technicians and
subordinates need to follow are listed below:
x Keep all components of all systems clean, well adjusted, and lubricated as prescribed
x Perform operational checks or periodic inspections of the system under the direct supervision
of fully qualified personnel
x Never insert your fingers or tools into a rack when the rack is cocked
x Check wiring and electrical fittings regularly; replace frayed or broken wiring; check plugs for
condition and proper installation
x Never bypass safety circuits or devices or make them inoperative; do not use any safety pin
other than the one prescribed
x When stores are loaded, install safety pins or other safety devices as prescribed while the
aircraft is on the ground
x Never install or arm an ejector rack unless the safety pin(s) and flag(s) are in place
x Do not perform resistance checks of an electrically-primed cartridge
x Remove or electrically disconnect all cartridges from the rack firing circuits before removing
any component
x Install only the prescribed cartridges in ejector devices
x Inspect all ordnance handling equipment prior to, during, and after use
x Do not use excessive force when seating or latching the weapon’s lugs in the suspension
hooks
x When loading stores, make sure that the store is in position and the rack is securely locked
before removing hoists
x Do not place any part of your body under stores being loaded or unloaded if it is possible to
accomplish the job without doing so
x When installing suspension equipment, torque all installation bolts or screws to the prescribed
torque value
x Make sure quality assurance personnel are familiar with the system; inspect all final work
performed on the armament system; ensure operational tests are made on repaired systems
where necessary
x Because empty expendable countermeasure dispenser blocks are subject to cracking when
dropped on corners, avoid rough handling, and under no circumstances hammer or force a
payload into the block
x Handle impulse cartridges according to the Electromagnetic Radiation Hazards (Hazards to
Ordnance), Commander, Naval Sea Systems Command (NAVSEA) Ordnance Publication
(OP) 3565/NAVAIR 16-1-529 manual
x Carefully examine expendables, impulse cartridges, and retainers for possible damage before
installation, and discard wet or cracked expendables, or expendables with damaged sleeves;
discard impulse cartridges with bent, deformed, or out-of-tolerance pins per applicable airborne
weapon assembly manual
x In the event that a decoy flare has visible damage or the device's pyrotechnic load is visible,
segregate the flares from other decoy devices and notify explosive ordnance disposal (EOD)
10-25
 for proper disposition; ensure decoy devices that have been dropped or roughly handled are
disposed of by EOD personnel
x Examine flares remaining in the magazine upon completion of a flight prior to downloading; if
the pyrotechnic load is visible, inspect the magazine and make sure it is disassembled by EOD
personnel

10-26
 End of Chapter 10
Suspension, Arming, and Releasing Equipment
Review Questions
10-1. Bomb racks are used for which of the following purposes?

A. To carry stores only

B. To release stores only
C. To arm stores only
D. To carry, release, and arm stores

10-2. What term defines the abbreviation LEMA?

A. Line Electronic-Magnetic Actors

B. Line Electronic-Magnetic Accelerator
C. Linear Electro-Mechanical Actuator
D. Linear Electro-Mechanical Ascending

10-3. What source provides the power required to operate the secondary release assembly of a
bomb release unit (BRU)-14/A bomb rack?

A. Cartridge-actuated device
B. Direct current generator
C. Electromechanical device
D. Manual-release cable

10-4. Which of the following bomb racks are installed in the weapon pylon of the H-60 aircraft?

A. BRU-12/A
B. BRU-14/A
C. BRU-32A/A
D. BRU-55/A

10-5. Which of the following types of aircraft has a bomb release unit (BRU)-32A/A bomb ejector
rack installed?

A. F-16
B. F/A-18
C. H-60
D. P-3

10-6. A bomb release unit (BRU)-33/A bomb ejector rack is used to carry two external stores each
weighing up to what maximum weight, in pounds?

A. 1,000
B. 2,000
C. 3,000
D. 4,000

10-27
10-7. A bomb release unit (BRU)-33(series) bomb ejector rack requires what number of impulse
cartridges to generate the required gas pressure for rack operations?

A. One
B. Two
C. Three
D. Five

10-8. The bomb release unit (BRU)-55 bomb ejector rack provides the interface from the aircraft for
carriage of which of the following weapons?

A. Two AIM-7 or two AIM-120

B. Two Harpoon or two SLAM-ER
C. Two JSOW or two 1,000 pound JDAM
D. Two 2,000-pound class weapon

10-9. When the gas-generating cartridge is fired in an improved multiple ejector rack or improved
triple ejector rack ejector unit assembly, which of the following movements is part of the
unlocking process of the suspension hooks?

A. The aft movement of the breech

B. The downward movement of the suspension hooks
C. The forward movement of the hook release rod
D. The upward movement of the cranks

10-10. Which set of components holds the suspension hooks of the improved multiple ejector rack or
improved triple ejector rack in the open position?

A. The coil spring and helical spring

B. The hook toggle lever and safety pin
C. The hook toggle spring and safety pin
D. The hook toggle spring and the helical spring

10-11. What maintenance level is responsible for maintaining both the hardware adapter kit and the
practice bomb adapters used with an improved multiple ejector rack or improved triple ejector
rack?

A. Organizational
B. Intermediate
C. Depot
D. Overhaul

10-12. What maximum weight, in pounds, is the suspension under wing unit (SUU)-25F/A dispenser
when it is loaded with eight aircraft parachute flares?

A. 260
B. 435
C. 490
D. 572

10-28
10-13. What maximum number of impulse cartridges are installed in a fully loaded suspension under
wing unit (SUU)-25F/A dispenser?

A. Two
B. Four
C. Six
D. Eight

10-14. Which of the following load configurations are ejected from the Army/Navy air-launched
expendable (AN/ALE)-39 dispensing system?

A. Chaff
B. Fire bombs
C. Radiofrequency enhancers
D. 1.25 inch rockets

10-15. The Army/Navy air-launched expendable (AN/ALE)-47 countermeasures dispenser system

provides an integrated, reprogrammable, computer-controlled system for dispensing what
items?

A. Bombs, fuzes, and bullets

B. Chaff, flares, and radiofrequency expendables
C. Flares, bullets, and rockets
D. Radiofrequency expendables, fuzes, and rockets

10-16. What manual should be referenced when handling impulse cartridges?

A. NAVAIR 11-140-25
B. NAVSEA OP 2173/NAVAIR 19-100-1
C. NAVSEA OP 3565/NAVAIR 16-1-529
D. SW030-AA-MMO-010

10-17. Which of the following personnel must be notified in the event a decoy flare has visible
damage or the device's pyrotechnic load is visible?

A. Chief of Naval Operations

B. Commander, Naval Air systems &ommand
C. Commander, Naval Sea Systems Command
D. Explosive 2rdnance 'isposal

10-29
 CHAPTER 11
AMMUNITION STORAGE AND HANDLING AFLOAT
The ammunition used by the U.S. Navy must be maintained in a state of readiness at all times.
Improper, rough, or careless handling, storage, and shipping can result in malfunctioning ammunition,
material damage, and loss of life.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
When you have completed this chapter, you will be able to do the following:
1. Identify the purpose of the Navy Personnel Ammunition and Explosives Handling Qualification
and Certification Program.
2. Describe the types of ammunition stowage afloat.
3. Identify the types of stowage spaces afloat, to include types of magazines, magazine
designations, ammunition stowage requirements, environmental control systems, sprinkler
systems and auxiliary equipment, and magazine temperature requirements.
4. Identify ammunition handling equipment used aboard ship.
5. Recognize the purpose of ammunition handling equipment used aboard ship.
6. Identify the purpose of weapons elevators.
7. Recognize the hazards of electromagnetic radiation to ordnance (HERO) classification
standards.
8. Identify HERO hazards.
9. Identify the uses of the emission control (EMCON) bill.
10. Recognize the importance of safety precautions while working with ordnance.

AMMUNITION AND EXPLOSIVES HANDLING QUALIFICATION AND

CERTIFICATION
The Navy Personnel Ammunition and Explosives Handling Qualification and Certification
(QUAL/CERT) Program was established by the Chief of Naval Operations (CNO) as a result of the
catastrophic Mark (Mk)-24 parachute flare accident on the USS Oriskany in 1966 that led to
significant loss of life and major ship damage. The Flag Board of Inquiry concluded that the accident
was attributed to a lack of training, the absence of direct supervision, and no method in place to
determine personnel qualifications prior to being authorized to handle explosives. The Navy’s
QUAL/CERT program, with proper oversight and management, can prevent similar accidents.
Although QUAL/CERT has been in effect since the late 1960s, improper handling, loading,
processing, or testing of explosive devices continues to result in death, injury, and extensive high-
dollar damage to property and the environment. Research continues to show that the majority of
explosive mishaps are caused by personnel error due to inadequate training, lack of adequate
supervision, lack of or inadequate standard operating procedures (SOPs), complacency, or just plain
failure to follow the governing technical directives. The Navy Personnel Conventional Ammunition and
Explosives Handling Qualification and Certification Program, Office of the Chief of Naval Operations
Instruction (OPNAVINST) 8023.24(series), is the governing document that provides the guidelines to
establish and maintain an effective QUAL/CERT program.
11-1
The QUAL/CERT program is intended to:
x Provide each command having a mission or task involving ammunition and explosives (AE)
with an effective administrative tool for assisting the command in maintaining a successful
explosives safety program
x Ensure that the command’s QUAL/CERT process can be validated through documentation
x Define a process that will prepare personnel to safely perform tasks involving AE, with each
person being trained found qualified by the command’s QUAL/CERT board, and subsequently
certified by either the commanding officer (CO) or the designated QUAL/CERT board chair
x Provide guidance for administering the QUAL/CERT program
Each Navy command or activity having the task to manufacture, handle, transport, store, or assemble
AE should establish an explosives handling QUAL/CERT program. The program will be subject to
periodic reviews by explosives safety officers (ESOs), explosives safety inspectors, and other
Department of the Navy (DON) personnel who are conducting an assessment of the command’s or
activity’s explosives safety management program (ESMP).
The term commanding officer, as used throughout this chapter, is synonymous with commanders;
COs; directors; supervisor of shipbuilding, conversion, and repair (SUPSHIP); and officers-in-charge
(OICs) of a command or activity.

Applicability
The QUAL/CERT program is applicable to personnel who are directly involved in or observe AE
handling evolutions. The QUAL/CERT program includes personnel listed below who physically
interact with the AE as well as personnel performing supervisor, quality assurance (QA), or safety
observer (SO) (pier side and aboard ship) functions:
x All Navy personnel under the scope of this program, including officers, enlisted, and
Government employees
x Government contractors providing direct support (i.e., contractor personnel performing tasks
with Navy personnel) at Navy commands or activities
x Command- or activity-appointed QUAL/CERT board members
x Dog handlers for handling the canine explosives scent kit
x Personnel performing the duties of QA and SO as defined in Naval Sea Systems Command
(NAVSEA) Ordnance Publication (OP) 5 and the NAVSEA OP 4 because they directly
influence the AE handling evolution
x Aircrew personnel who, during the performance of in-flight duties, are required to handle,
prepare, and launch explosive sonobuoys, explosive signal underwater sound (SUS),
explosive mine neutralization devices, marine location markers, or signaling and marking
devices, or who are involved with the ground handling of ordnance items
The following personnel meet the requirements of the program, provided individual records are
available to support or indicate the individual as being qualified by another suitable, recognized
program for the tasks noted:
x Personnel required to bear arms in the course of their duties; arms include all AE borne by
these personnel in the course of their duties; the following are qualified under this definition:
small arms crew-served weapons personnel and teams; security alert teams; reaction forces;
backup alert forces; auxiliary security forces; Naval Criminal Investigation Service agents; or

11-2
 other security personnel who are trained and qualified through a current, approved training
program and who do not perform logistical functions of receipt, segregation, storage, and
issue (RSSI) or otherwise handle AE except as an end user
x In-flight aircrew, and 7.62 millimeter (mm) and .50 mm caliber operators and door gunners who
are trained and qualified through a current, approved training program
The following personnel do not require QUAL/CERT per the OPNAVINST 8023.24(series) instruction,
but are not exempt from ensuring the required standards of explosives safety are in place:
x QUAL/CERT board chair, provided the chair does not handle AE or perform in the capacity of
QA, SO, team leader (TL), or team member (TM)
x Board advisors

NOTE
Thorough training must be provided by a qualified and
certified individual at the TL level or above for the explosive
device and work task. A record of this special training shall
be maintained and used for watch assignment.

x Ship's lookouts, in port and underway watch standers, visit boarding search and seizure
(VBSS) members, connected replenishment (CONREP) station operators, and shore station
runway wheels watches required to handle, prepare, and launch marine location markers or
fire signaling devices, including safety of life at sea (SOLAS) devices, while underway
x Working party personnel used to supplement qualified and certified personnel for the purpose
of ammunition (AMMO) loading or offloading, or during replenishment operations; the TL or SO
of the evolution should provide all working party personnel with a thorough safety brief before
and as necessary during the operation; direct and constant supervision from a qualified and
certified TL and SO is mandatory
x Personnel whose sole responsibility, when working in and around AE, is to conduct tests or
inspections of magazine sprinkler systems, grounding, bonding, and lightning protection
systems
x Personnel whose sole responsibility, when working in and around AE, is to use pneumatic
nailers to secure dunnage to explosive conveyances, or to inspect and certify the blocking and
bracing of AE loaded in a ship’s cargo hold, magazine, locker, railcars, or trucks prior to
movement
x Operators of material handling equipment (MHE), cranes, weapons elevators, and conveyors
who are qualified by other means (e.g., personnel qualification standards (PQS))
x ESOs and explosives safety specialists provided they do not handle or physically interact with
AE
x Naval Ordnance Safety and Security Activity (NOSSA) representatives (conventional ordnance
safety review (COSR) inspectors and explosives safety inspectors (ESIs)), fleet weapons
support teams (FWSTs), mobile ordnance training teams (MOTTs), weapons safety assistance
teams (WSATs), mine readiness certification inspection teams, shipboard weapons integration
teams (SWITs), ammunition and hazardous (AMHAZ) material review board members,
ordnance handling safety assistance teams (OHSATs), board of inspection and survey
(INSURV) weapons inspectors, and other personnel who are required to review and inspect as
part of official duties

11-3
 x Aircrew personnel whose only association with explosive devices is during the use of personal
survival devices and life-saving equipment (e.g., pencil flares, distress signals, and life rafts)
x Guards, electricians, carpenters, and other personnel who are not regularly employed in
handling AE, but may come in contact with these materials; these personnel shall be
thoroughly briefed regarding hazards to which they are exposed; the possible causes of fires
and explosions should be carefully explained to them
x Navy divers who are part of the mobile diving and salvage units (MDSUs); sea, air, and land
(SEAL) personnel; explosive ordnance disposal (EOD) personnel; special warfare command
(SPECWARCOM)/special warfare combatant-craft crewmen (SWCC); and personnel who do
not perform logistical functions of RSSI or otherwise handle AE except as an end user
x Personnel who are required to handle and prepare bird and wildlife aircraft separation hazard
(BASH) nonlethal control devices, such as launchers, blanks, and cartridges

Certification
Procedures, Guidance, and Requirements
The CO, QUAL/CERT board chair, and board members shall use the guidance contained in the
applicable enclosures of the OPNAVINST 8023.24(series) instruction for training personnel,
administering the QUAL/CERT program, and conducting an annual self-assessment of the
QUAL/CERT program utilizing the Ammunition and Explosives Qualification and Certification Self-
Assessment, Office of the Chief of Naval Operations (OPNAV) 8020/7. Each activity will establish a
training plan (TP) to codify the training required for qualification of individuals.

Certification and Recertification

Certification and recertification, unless revoked for cause, is valid to the last day of the 12th month
following the certification or recertification. Individual certification and recertification must be
documented using the Personnel Ammunition and Explosives Handling Qualification and Certification,
OPNAV 8020/5 (Figure 11-1). Lapsed certifications, regardless of duration, are invalid. In cases
where a certification has lapsed, the individual must be recertified.

Initial Certifications
When activities or commands are assigned a new or upgraded AE process or task, weapon, or major
modification to a weapons capability or platform, the CO must initially certify a board member for this
new capability.

QUAL/CERT Transfers
Although qualifications may be transferred, transfer of certification for military or civilians from one
command to another for purposes of permanent change of duty station is prohibited. However, the
receiving CO may use the previous qualification documentation from the transferring command for
certification at the gaining command.

Decertification and Revocation of Certification

The CO is responsible for decertification and/or revocation of individual certification whenever such
action is considered to be in the best interest of safety.

11-4
Figure 11-1 — Personnel Ammunition and Explosives Handling Qualification
and Certification form.
11-5
Training Documentation Requirements
The purpose of the training documentation requirements is to standardize the AE handling
QUAL/CERT program documentation, the use of training devices, and the training record
requirements.

Training
All personnel involved with handling AE must have a rigorous explosives safety training program. The
training necessary to achieve the qualifications for certification must be formalized, both for the
individual requiring certification and for the QUAL/CERT board to assess during its decision or
recommendation process. Individual training and documentation will be accomplished using the
Ammunition and Explosives On-the-Job/Informal/Professional Training Record Sheet, OPNAV 8020/4
(Figure 11-2).

Formal Training
Use formal training to the maximum extent possible. Personnel can attain an understanding of the
theory and hazards associated with handling AE through formal classroom courses, where certified
instructors present material; through self-paced instruction manuals; or while learning from computer-
based programs, such as Navy Knowledge Online (NKO) or Defense Ammunition Center (DAC)
AMMO courses. Certificates (or copies) of formal training will be retained and included as part of the
individual’s training jacket.

Informal Training
Informal training is needed by an individual but has not been identified as a formal training
requirement. Informal training can be documented when an individual demonstrates a satisfactory
understanding of a subject through research, practice, rehearsal, and/or participation in question-and-
answer periods with subject matter experts.

On-the-Job Training
An aggressive on-the-job (OJT) training program must be established. OJT ensures that personnel
being trained achieve and maintain the level of expertise necessary to ensure an accident-free
explosives safety program.

11-6
Figure 11-2 — Ammunition and Explosives On-the-Job/Informal/Professional
Training Record Sheet.
11-7
Training Plan
Commands and individuals should attempt to use every training means available to achieve and
maintain the desired level of QUAL/CERT. A formal QUAL/CERT TP should be developed and used
as a guide for qualification.
The TP shall include all applicable training necessary to achieve and maintain QUAL/CERT of
personnel to the required explosive devices or family group consistent with the missions and tasks of
the command, as applicable, to include lists of the following items:
x Required training and lectures
x Required OJT
x SOPs, qualification cards, or check sheets
x Formal schools and education
The type commander (TYCOM) or regional commander (RC) will establish baseline community and
class standard TPs as appropriate to achieve community and ship class consistency. The TP should
be developed and approved in writing by the activity CO. Contractor TPs should be developed and
approved in writing by CO or contractor management, as appropriate.
The TP shall be reviewed annually for accuracy to ensure processes and procedures are consistent
with approved technical manuals and higher directives for ordnance handling, maintenance,
assembly, transportation, and storage operations.

Training Devices and Inert Ordnance

Training devices and inert ordnance shall be used as the primary means of training to achieve
qualification. Inert items should be requisitioned or requested in a similar manner used to obtain live
items.
Where a training device or inert ordnance does not exist for an explosive or explosive device
requiring QUAL/CERT, a similar family type inert device is the preferred alternative.
In the event that no similar family type inert device is available, mock-ups, pictures, manuals, films,
etc., of the explosive ordnance may be used with the written approval of the TYCOM or RC, as
appropriate.
The TYCOM or RC, as appropriate, must provide written approval for the breakout and use of live AE
for training to achieve qualification. The written approval should be retained as part of the individual
training record for a period of 2 years.

Maintenance of Training Records

AE handling qualification training records should include, at a minimum, documentation of the
following and shall be maintained at the activity or command:
x Formal training
x Informal training
x OJT and PQS (if applicable)
x Copy of explosives driver’s license (if applicable)
x Copy of MHE license (if applicable)
x For board members, a copy of QUAL/CERT board member designation letter

11-8
 x Any special TYCOM or RC authorizations for use of live ordnance for the purposes of training
or qualification
x Arms, Ammunition and Explosives (AA&E) Personnel Screening, OPNAV 5530/1
x Copy of Personnel Ammunition and Explosives Handling Qualification and Certification,
OPNAV 8020/5s from current command
x Copy of Personnel Ammunition and Explosives Handling Qualification and Certification,
OPNAV 8020/5s from previous commands (if applicable)
x Current Handler/Explosive Material Handling Equipment Medical Examiner’s Certificate,
OPNAV 8020/2 stating date of last medical examination and signed by competent medical
authority; use of a digital signature is authorized
x Current Department of the Navy Explosive Operator/Department of Transportation Medical
Examiner’s Certificate, OPNAV 8020/6 (if applicable); use of a digital signature is authorized

QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION GUIDELINES

The following QUAL/CERT guidelines provide guidance for conducting a standard and effective
QUAL/CERT program.

QUAL/CERT Board Membership and Responsibilities

The QUAL/CERT board administers a process that will prepare and enable personnel to safely
perform tasks involving AE.

Board Chair
The CO is responsible for the command’s QUAL/CERT program and should act as board chair or
designate, in writing, a competent commissioned officer, or civilian equivalent, who has both the
knowledge and understanding of AE safety needed to perform and administer the duties as the
QUAL/CERT board chair.
A senior site manager should perform the administrative duties of CO for Government contractor
QUAL/CERT programs.

Board Chair Responsibilities

The board chair oversees the command QUAL/CERT program and ensures the provisions of the
OPNAVINST 8023.24(series) instructions are carried out. The board chair also serves as the principal
advisor to the CO on all matters involving the QUAL/CERT board and its actions.
The board chair should be aware of all AE operations at the activity or command and ensure involved
personnel are in full compliance. The board chair should also establish and maintain a QUAL/CERT
board and ensure sufficient numbers of qualified and certified board members are maintained on the
board at all times. Adequate preplanning before transfer of key board member(s) will eliminate
problems with the lack of qualified board members.
It is important for the board chair to ensure that members of the QUAL/CERT board review the
qualifications of the candidate prior to making a determination for certification.

Board Members
Board members should be in the grade of E-6 or higher, or civilian equivalent, and designated by
name, in writing by individual letter, by the CO or OIC. Board members should be certified in the

11-9
same AE and work task codes (WTCs), and possess the same certification level(s) for which they are
qualifying and recommending for certification.

Board Member Responsibilities

Board members should observe and evaluate the skill and proficiency of personnel being considered
for certification or recertification. A board member must personally witness a skill and proficiency
demonstration (PD) on a specific AE or task, by the person being considered for certification or
recertification. There must be at least one board member observing for any AE task or evolution.
Board members must ensure that qualification training requirements have been met prior to
recommendation for certification. The board member must review and verify the accuracy of all
pertinent training documentation of personnel being nominated for certification and make
recommendations to the board chair during the QUAL/CERT board.
Board members should review the command’s TP and submit changes via the chain of command.
Inform the division officer, military or civilian supervisor, and board chair when personnel who are
being considered for certification require additional training or experience before being certified.

QUAL/CERT Board Responsibilities

The purpose of the QUAL/CERT board is to provide the CO with the primary means of ensuring
adequate training and qualification of personnel assigned duties involving AE.
The QUAL/CERT board will consist of the board chair, one or more board members, and the
candidate(s) being considered for training or certification. There is no limit on the total number of
board members who can participate on the QUAL/CERT oral board. However, a QUAL/CERT board
will have at least one board member who is fully qualified and certified in the same AE and WTCs,
and possess the same certification level to which the candidate is being certified.
Evaluate all explosives safety-related infractions, incidents, events, mishaps, and accidents that occur
within their respective or like commands (e.g., ship class, type/model/series aircraft, and naval
installations). Apply the lessons learned to the activity’s TP, QUAL/CERT exams (oral and written),
and PDs. The QUAL/CERT board should ensure that applicable reports reflect the QUAL/CERT level
of personnel involved, and whether or not to retain, decertify, or revoke the individual(s) certification,
as appropriate.
The QUAL/CERT board should consult the CO on all issues of culpability, decertification, or
revocation.

Qualification Procedures
The candidate must meet the physical qualification and medical examination requirements for
explosives handler and explosives vehicle operator.
The QUAL/CERT board must review and verify that the individual has completed required reading,
received applicable lectures covering general ordnance safety training, completed specific device
training, and possesses adequate knowledge of ordnance safety precautions and procedures, which
are essential standards that will allow a PD and subsequent certification.
Prior to certification or recertification, qualification should be verified through PDs observed by a
board member for each explosive, explosive device, WTC, and recommended certification level to be
performed (e.g., assembly, testing, and fuzing) with the specific explosive, explosive device, or similar
device.

11-10
It should be verified, by oral or written means, that the candidate clearly understands applicable
documentation, such as technical, assembly, and maintenance manuals, ordnance publications, and
SOPs, and has knowledge of ordnance safety precautions and procedures.

Certification Procedures
The certification process begins with the identification of all billets requiring certification and a
determination of the WTCs required of each billet, the certification levels, and the AE to be handled.
When the division officer or civilian supervisor determines that an individual is fully qualified and
recommended for certification, the following steps are required:
x Individual's Personnel Ammunition and Explosives Handling Qualification and Certification,
OPNAV 8020/5 is annotated with recommended certifications and forwarded to the board for
review
x Board members review the training record per the applicable TP to ensure adequate training
on AE, WTCs, and certification levels have been properly conducted within the past year
x If certification or recertification is to be granted, the individual, a board member, and the board
chair should sign in all appropriate blocks of the Personnel Ammunition and Explosives
Handling Qualification and Certification, OPNAV 8020/5
x Recertification, whether issued at the time of expiration or before, should be granted only after
the individual has been validated by the QUAL/CERT board
x Certification is valid to the last day of the 12th month

Medical Standards and Physical Qualifications

Because the medical standards and physical requirements are intended to cover the full spectrum of
AE handling evolutions, all physical qualification requirements may not apply to every position.
Some cases may require SOPs, training, or job control modification to avoid or accommodate medical
or physical restrictions. A waiver may be granted when there is sufficient evidence that a person, with
or without reasonable accommodation, can perform the essential duties of the position without
endangering the health and safety of that person or others.
On a case-by-case basis, personnel determined by the physician to be not physically qualified (NPQ)
because of a permanent medical condition may be given administrative relief, in the form of a waiver
of the individual medical standards and/or physical qualifications leading to certification. The waiver of
medical standards and physical requirements for handlers and MHE operators must be approved by
the CO or OIC.
The QUAL/CERT board chair should coordinate the review of all waivers of medical standards and
physical requirements requests.
The CO or OIC shall grant any waiver of medical standards or physical requirements in writing, and
the waiver letter must include a provision stating that the worker must notify the supervisor of any new
or changed physical or medical conditions. The waiver letter and supporting documentation from the
waiver request should be maintained in the applicant’s medical record.

Revocation and Decertification

The CO is responsible for decertification and revocation of individuals.
Revocation of certification is mandatory if:
x An explosive mishap is caused by gross personal negligence or carelessness
11-11
 x Reckless operation of equipment is used to handle AE
x Flagrant disregard of procedural and/or safety precautions occurs
x Behavior indicating incompetence or unreliability, including unresolved drug abuse and/or
alcohol dependence, occurs
x There are other instances where the CO or board chair deem the individual to be a detriment
to maintaining a safe handling environment
Decertification is applicable if:
x An explosive mishap is caused by an individual who is subsequently determined to be NPQ
due to a previously unidentified disqualifying medical condition; when considering
decertification relating to a medical condition, the following guidelines apply:
o If the medical condition is determined to be temporary, decertification may be required
until the medical condition is resolved
o If the medical condition is determined to be permanent, but not causally associated with
the mishap, then the individual should be decertified pending review and approval of
any request for waiver of medical standards and physical qualifications
o Permanent decertification is mandatory if the disqualifying condition is considered
permanent and a waiver is not recommended or the medical condition is determined to
be causally associated with the mishap
x The individual is determined to be NPQ and a waiver of medical standards or physical
qualifications is not possible
x There are other instances where the CO or board chair may deem the individual to be a
detriment to maintaining a safe handling environment
For guidelines and procedures on decertification or revocation, consult the applicable personnel AE
handling and certification program instruction.

Work Task Codes

The WTCs standardize the use and definition of each applicable task. The WTCs are applicable to
family groups for specific commands.

WTC 1 Handling
The WTC 1 is the physical act of breaking out, unpacking, counting (inventory control), inspecting,
sentencing, segregating, lifting, transporting, repositioning, or packaging of AE by hand or with the
use of powered or pneumatic equipment. WTC 1 handling does not include explosives drivers
qualified in accordance with Motor Vehicle Driver and Shipping Inspector’s Manual for Ammunition,
Explosives and Related Hazardous Materials, NAVSEA SW020-AF-HBK-010.

WTC 2 Storage and Stowage

This WTC is the physical act of storing or stowing explosives and explosive devices in designated
and approved locations, such as holding areas, explosive magazines, and ready-service lockers. This
WTC includes the physical act of inspecting magazines and ready-service lockers for improperly
secured storage and stowage, unsatisfactory packaging, compatibility, abnormality of protective
sprinkler and alarm systems, unusual odors or fumes, and other abnormal conditions, to include
appropriate maintenance requirement cards (MRCs).

11-12
WTC 3 Assembly and Disassembly
This WTC is the physical act of mating or unmating components to or from an all-up-round (AUR)
configuration. This WTC is used when assembly and disassembly is authorized in applicable
weapons assembly manuals, technical manuals, SOPs, and checklists.

WTC 4 Load and Download

This WTC is the physical act of mating an AUR with its launching device, to include racks and
launchers, fixed gun systems, automatic loading systems, torpedo tubes, etc., from which delivery
and initiation can be accomplished. WTC 4 also includes the installation and removal of cartridge-
activated devices (CADs) used as part of the weapon release system. The process includes all
operations incidental to aircraft loading, clearing, and downloading included in those portions of the
governing technical manuals, SOPs, checklists, and MRCs.

WTC 5 Arm and De-Arm

This WTC applies to those procedures contained in the arm and de-arm section of the applicable
governing technical manuals, checklists, and MRCs that place an explosive, explosive device, or
system in an armed or safe condition.

WTC 6 Install and Remove

This WTC is the physical act of installing and removing explosive devices, such as aircraft egress
systems, cable cutters, fire extinguisher cartridges, nonaircraft support cartridges, and CADs.

WTC 7 Testing
This WTC is the physical act of conducting a test on AUR or AE components. Built-in-test (BIT),
programming, reprogramming, and presetting are included in this WTC.

Qualification Standards and Certification Levels

The following certification levels are universally applicable.

In Training
The in training (IT) level is used to document a process by which the individual is learning how to
perform the associated certification level. Direct supervision is mandatory. Individuals in an IT status
can only perform the function to which he or she is being qualified to do while under supervision of an
individual who is qualified and certified to that level.

Team Member
A TM level is aware of basic safety precautions for the task and AE concerned; has received either
formal training, informal training, or OJT; and has been recommended by his or her immediate
supervisor. A TM performs only under direct supervision of a TL.

Individual
The individual (I) level is the same as a TM described above, with the following additions: personnel
in the I level have sufficient knowledge, have demonstrated the proficiency to be entrusted with
performing the work task alone in safe and reliable operations, and must be capable of interpreting
the requirements of applicable checklists, assembly and operating technical manuals, and SOPs.
QA oversight is required when applicable (e.g., a checklist step that requires a QA witness for
validation of a step or procedure being performed by the individual).
11-13
Team Leader
This level is the same as TM and I above, including having sufficient knowledge and being able to
demonstrate the proficiency to direct others in performing the work task safely and reliably.

Quality Assurance

NOTE
This definition of QA personnel for purposes of explosives
safety QUAL/CERT is not the same as quality assurance
personnel in the Naval Aviation Maintenance Program or
personnel performing other QA-type functions that are not
related to the certification and oversight of explosive work
tasks and operations.

QA is the same as TL, with the following additions: Personnel in this level must have detailed
knowledge to manage applicable AE, to include those personnel designated to determine AE material
condition; and must be able to determine that the necessary work task procedures have been
completed using applicable directives.

Safety Observer
An SO must have sufficient knowledge and experience of applicable safety procedures and
functioning of safety devices, and working knowledge of work task procedures to determine potential
outcomes and risks when safety procedures or devices are not properly used. This certification also
applies to personnel performing the duties of designated pier or wharf SOs.
An SO is defined as the person responsible for safety assurance during handling evolutions. The pier
safety loading officer, who is the individual assigned with overall responsibility for safety across the
entire pier, does not fall under this definition and is not required to be certified.
The qualification of SO is not restricted to the most senior member within a unit. A junior member who
possesses the foregoing standards and demonstrates maturity may be certified as an SO.
ONLY TM, I, TL, and QA are interrelated—SO stands alone.

Family Groups of Explosives and Explosive Devices

Family groups are AE with similar characteristics. Training record documentation is by specific
explosive device and task. This training will be documented and must support the level of certification
listed on the individual's certification form and must reflect all the individual's training.
Family groups for explosives and explosive devices are listed in the appropriate enclosure of the
instruction.

AMMUNITION STOWAGE
Stowing ammunition aboard ship presents problems that will not be found in other types of storage
facilities. When ships are underway, they are subjected to random motion. Ammunition is firmly and
securely fastened in place when it is not being handled. Adequate ventilation is a problem. Most
ammunition stowage spaces are located below the main deck. Normally, these areas require
extensive piping and venting to maintain proper temperature control and vent hazardous fumes.

11-14
Access to stowage spaces often requires specialized equipment for moving ammunition quickly and
efficiently. Stowage spaces are located close to other working spaces, which presents hazards to
others on the ship, especially if there were a fire or explosion.

Ammunition Stowage Spaces

NAVSEA designates the authorized spaces and provides storage plan templates where AE are
stowed, serviced, assembled, or temporarily held in readiness. Naval Air Systems Command
(NAVAIR) provides stowage plan templates for aviation magazines. No alterations or modifications to
magazines should be made without the approval of NAVSEA. A ship's magazines must be designed
and arranged with regard to facility of supply, ammunition-unique stowage requirements, ammunition
compatibility, and ship survivability.
Magazines are arranged so they are close to supply, have the best available protection, and the most
favorable stowage conditions. For safety reasons, various types of explosives and ammunition are
stowed in separate magazines or lockers.
The type of stowage varies with the type of ship, the space available, and the amounts of explosive
involved. Label plates that designate the compartment and the types of ammunition stowed in them
mark all magazines.
Magazines are marked with warnings that apply to specific special hazardous conditions and
operations. Additionally, paint-stenciled labels or painted signs are installed on the outside surfaces of
ammunition stowage spaces (except where the outside surfaces are visible from the exterior of the
ship or interior surfaces with special decorative material). The stenciled markings must be located on
the bulkheads 5 feet above the deck, and spaced 12 feet apart horizontally if possible. Markings on
decks and overheads should be spaced 12 feet apart if possible.
The ammunition far side sign (Figure 11-3) is a yellow rectangle, 5 inches high by 9 inches wide. The
sign has black slanted lines, 1/8 inch thick and 1 inch long not to obscure the letters. The letters are
1/8 inch thick and 3/4 inch high, with the words AMMUNITION FAR SIDE arranged as shown in
Figure 11-3.
Ships have several different
types of magazines. Each
magazine is designed for a
specific type of ammunition.
The magazine types include
ammunition cargo holds,
primary, universal, missile,
ready-service, lockers, and
chemical.
Ammunition cargo holds are
used to hold bulk AE.
Primary, universal, and
missile magazines are
designated to hold a ship’s
Figure 11-3 — Example of ammunition far side sign or label.
allowance of ammunition.
Ready-service magazines and lockers are used to stow readily accessible ammunition. These
magazines are large spaces designed to stow large quantities of ordnance. They should be located
below the ship’s waterline and should be fitted with dunnage, universal tie-down, wire rope shoring, or
chock-type stowage systems. Provisions must be made for securing bulk palletized or containerized
AE.
11-15
These magazines are adequately equipped with thermal insulation, temperature control, and
ventilation. Magazines are equipped with adequate sprinkler systems, and they are closed and locked
when unattended.

Missile Magazines
Missile stowage should be in a magazine as an integral part of the launching system on combatant
ships. Systems without integral magazines shall be provided with a magazine or locker convenient to
the launcher.
Magazines designed for the stowage of missiles, rockets, or other ammunition that produces high
volumes of gas should be equipped with specialized ventilation systems, such as plenum vents or
relief ports, to ensure that magazine air pressure does not reach dangerous levels if a missile motor
ignites. Restraining equipment may be provided to prevent movement of an accidentally ignited
motor. A hatch or cover that is subject to possible external tampering should be fitted with an internal
personnel obstruction grid made of welded steel or aluminum bars.
Air-launched missile magazines in aircraft carriers are usually located below the waterline and within
the armor box. Air-launched missile ready-service magazines may be located either above the
waterline or within the armor box. Missile magazines contain hydraulic and pneumatic power-
operated handling equipment.

Ready-Service Magazines, Lockers, and Staging Areas

Ready-service refers to ammunition stowage area in the immediate vicinity of the launcher, gun, or
aircraft where the ammunition is used. The amount of ammunition in ready-service should be
minimized to quantities required to support a planned reload of a gun, launcher, or aircraft.

Ready-Service Magazines
Ready-service magazines (Figure 11-4) are designated spaces located near the weapon or area to
be served. Normally, they are equipped with thermal insulation, ventilation, and a sprinkling system.
They are securely locked. Certain magazines located within the armor box of aircraft carriers and
used for stowage of completely assembled rounds of weapons and deployable targets are also
considered ready-service magazines.

11-16
 Figure 11-4 — Typical ready-service magazine.

Lockers
Certain compartments or lockers are used to stow special types of ammunition and ammunition
components, such as detonators, pyrotechnics, and chemicals. They are frequently located on the
weather deck and as conveniently as possible to the weapon or space to be served. They may not be
equipped with sprinklers, but they do have locking devices. Special flare ready-service lockers are
located at outboard locations on aircraft carriers for short-term stowage of aircraft parachute flares.
These flares have either been removed from the primary pyrotechnics magazines, prepared for
launching, or they have been returned intact after a mission. If necessary, these lockers are manually
jettisoned. A label is installed on the locker identifying the type of explosives that are stowed within
each locker. Where stowage for ammunition is provided by lockers, chests, or racks that are
permanently secured to the ship's structure, their location cannot be changed without prior approval
of NAVSEA.

Chemical Magazines
Chemical ammunition classified as lethal or incapacitating is not carried aboard ships unless
specifically authorized by NAVSEA or higher authority. If authorized, specific stowage instructions are
issued by NAVSEA, and personnel involved in handling procedures must receive appropriate training.
Specific spaces aboard ship may be designated as chemical magazines by NAVSEA. The decks and
bulkheads of a chemical magazine are coated with an impermeable material, and the magazine
contains a provision for sampling its internal atmosphere from an adjacent compartment. Facilities for
personnel decontamination should be located near the magazine.

11-17
Ammunition Stowage Requirements
Generally, there are magazines for each type of ammunition stowed aboard ship. Ammunition,
explosives, and explosive components are stowed in specifically designated stowage spaces.
Ammunition stowage spaces aboard ships are limited, and in certain classes of ships, extremely
limited. Therefore, ammunition stowed aboard ship should stay within authorized ammunition
allowances. It is important for shipboard ammunition to be stowed so that maximum effectiveness is
achieved. For these reasons, strict compliance with ammunition stowage by compatibility groupings
aboard ship, while desirable and observed when practical, may not be feasible. When mixed stowage
is used, it must conform to the stowage tables listed in Ammunition and Explosives Safety Afloat,
NAVSEA OP 4.

Environmental Control Systems

Magazines are fitted with environmental control and safety features to protect ammunition from
excessive temperatures and humidity. Most magazines have either mechanical cooling or ventilation
systems. However, there are a few magazines that do not have either of these features. If a
magazine without controls shows a temperature in excess of 100 degrees Fahrenheit (°F), use
portable ventilation systems to prevent overheating or condensation of moisture.

Supply and Exhaust Ventilation

Ventilation ducts and exhaust ventilation outlets to and from magazines provide forced-air ventilation.
Air is forced through the ducts by electric fans installed within the ductwork. Standard covers maintain
water tightness. These covers should always remain closed during combat (general quarters)
conditions, unless otherwise directed.

Exhaust Vents
Aboard ship, most magazines—particularly missile magazines—are vented to the atmosphere. When
missile motors burn, they rapidly produce large volumes of smoke and gas. To avoid spreading
smoke and gas to other areas of the ship if a missile motor in a magazine accidentally ignites, the
exhaust ducts are vented to the atmosphere. The area on the weather deck in the vicinity of an
exhaust vent is potentially hazardous, and it is marked to warn personnel not to loiter in the area.

Sprinkler and Alarm Systems

Primary and missile magazines, ammunition handling rooms, and ready-service magazines are fitted
with sprinkler systems. Sprinkler systems consist of spray heads or sprinkler-head valves arranged to
dash water directly on the munitions and completely cover the magazine's interior. Sprinkler systems
for spaces located below the damage control deck are arranged for local control at the valve and for
remote control from the damage control deck. On aircraft carriers, the remote controls are normally
divided into two groups—forward sprinkler control board and aft sprinkler control board. The forward
magazine group and the aft magazine group sprinklers can be remotely activated from the two control
boards. Sprinkler systems for spaces located on and above the damage control deck are arranged for
local control only from a position outside the access entrance to the space.

11-18
 NOTE
Some magazines are designed without sprinkler systems, so
water-activated ammunition can be stowed in them. Mk 25
and Mk 58 Marine Location Markers may be stowed in
sprinkled magazines or lockers only when their watertight seal
has not been broken and they are returned to their original
packaging. Weather-deck lockers and 20 mm and 40 mm
ready-service rooms do not require sprinkler systems.

Sprinkler Systems
Sprinkler systems are classified by the type or location of the control exercised over the valves that
restrain the flow of water. These valves may be operated manually or by remote control (manually or
automatically). There are three types of remote operation:
x Manual, by operating valves
x Hydraulic, by means of control valves and water from the fire system by use of the energy of
either the pressure from sea water at firemain or from manually generated hydraulic oil
pressure to obtain rapid actuation or securing of the magazine sprinkler system
x Automatic, by means of a rate of rise or combined rate of rise and fixed temperature thermo-
pneumatic control system

Alarm Systems
Three alarms are commonly associated with all magazine sprinkler systems—a sprinkling (FH circuit)
alarm, a flooding (FD circuit) alarm, and a high-temperature (F circuit) alarm.
High-temperature alarm systems (F circuits) are installed in all of the following magazines or spaces:
x Ammunition and propellant stowage areas
x Ammunition handling spaces
x Ammunition assembly, disassembly, and checkout areas
x Cargo ammunition holds
The F circuit should not be confused with the FH circuit. The F circuit detects a high temperature,
while the FH circuit detects the sprinkler activation.
A minimum of two thermostats should be installed in each space. A minimum of one thermostat
should be installed for each 250 square feet of deck area, or fraction of a deck area. If high
temperatures occur in any of the spaces containing thermostats, the high-temperature occurrence is
indicated on an alarm switchboard installed in an area continuously manned when the ship is
underway. Usually, this area is damage control central.
Audible alarm systems are also installed in the pilothouse, officer-of-the-deck (OOD) area, secondary
damage control station, and each interior communications room. The audible alarm systems work in
conjunction with the F and FH circuits.
Tests and maintenance of the magazine sprinkler systems are performed periodically according to
NAVSEA and applicable preventive maintenance system (PMS) instructions.

11-19
Magazine Internal Arrangement
The internal arrangement of each
magazine may vary considerably.
The arrangement depends on the
stowage space available and the
type of ammunition stowed.
Weapons are loaded onto handling
equipment and ready for immediate
issue. Stanchions are also used to
divide a large magazine area into
smaller areas or bins (Figure 11-5)
to hold various sizes of ammunition
with a minimum loss of space. The
stanchions are fitted with slots or
have other means for receiving
battens.
The battens (which run horizontally)
provide the walls that form the bin.
No matter which stowage method is
used, the stowage area should be Figure 11-5 — Typical stanchions and bin configuration.
arranged so that access to as much
ammunition and as many containers as possible is provided, and so that adequate space is provided
for ventilation and handling operations. Stow AE stow on dunnage to provide airspace so all parts of
the magazine receive maximum ventilation and exposure to the sprinkler system.
Mk 3 or Mk 12 metal pallets are used as dunnage aboard ships. These pallets have the correct space
between the deck and stowed material. They also provide adequate grounding. Additionally, there
should be an air space of not less than 2 inches between any ammunition stowage stack and the
surface of adjacent plating or sheathing. The stacks of ammunition should be stacked so that
sprinkler systems, F-circuit sensors, or air escape lines are not obstructed.
When different lots and/or types of ammunition are stored in the same magazine, segregate the
ammunition by lot, size, and type. Where more than one type of ammunition is stowed in a magazine
and where portable battens or alternate stowage facilities have been provided to receive the various
types of ammunition, a stowage chart should be posted. The chart should show the stowage
locations, including ammunition types, quantities, and the arrangement of the stowed ammunition.
Ships at sea move randomly; therefore, all hazardous munitions and explosives should be securely
fastened in place, except when they are actually being handled. In some cases, stanchions and
battens provide adequate security. Other types of ammunition stow, such as palletized bombs or
missile containers, should be secured by tie-down chains especially designed for this purpose. The
tie-down chains should be connected to the load and the deck tie-down points, so even the slightest
movement of the ammunition is prevented.

Ammunition and Stowage Inspection

Ammunition and stowage inspection consists of two parts: the inspection of the ammunition and the
inspection of the magazine space. They apply to the inspection of magazines and their contents.
Aboard ship, these inspections are mandatory according to The Ships' Maintenance and Material
Management (3-M) Manual, OPNAVINST 4790.4(series), other Navy regulations, and NAVSEA
instructions.

11-20
Magazine inspections are part of the ship's PMS, and these inspections should only be conducted by
qualified personnel using an MRC to ensure that a hazard or abnormal condition is not overlooked.

Ammunition Inspection
Ammunition stowage inspection aboard ship will verify that ammunition in stowage has not been
affected by loss of environmental control, handling damage, ship's movement, or other factors.
Ammunition in stowage includes ammunition maintained in launch systems, such as torpedo tubes,
vertical launching systems, and gun systems.
The frequency and extent of the inspection of the ammunition shall be determined by weapon system
technical manuals or by ship's personnel and will be based on magazine environmental control
history, inventory control history, type of ammunition, ship's movement, etc. Notices of ammunition
reclassification (NARs), ammunition information notices (AINs), and overhead fire (OHF) information
messages are used to update Ammunition Unserviceable Suspended and Limited Use, Naval Supply
Systems Command (NAVSUP) Publication (P)-801. Prior to any receipt, stowage, and issue
evolution, verify AE material against NAVSUP P-801 and any recent NAR, AIN, or OHF message.

Magazine Inspection
Inspect the magazine itself daily and prior to securing the magazine after any loading, downloading,
or magazine maintenance.
Generally, the daily visual inspection of magazines consists of checking for the following conditions:
x Improperly secured stowage
x Unsatisfactory protective packaging
x Unusual fumes or odors
x Magazine cleanliness
x Other abnormal conditions
Abnormal conditions in a ship's magazine or ammunition stowage space include evidence of
tampering to gain access, evidence of theft, evidence of temperature or humidity fluctuations, and the
presence of unauthorized materials. Abnormal conditions also include evidence of localized
overheating from adjacent compartments on decks, bulkheads, and overheads indications of leaks
from sprinkler or flood pipes, nozzles, control valves, and regulators; and inoperable or damaged
reach-rods, linkages, automatic fire alarm devices, and other similar equipment in the specific hazard
stowages. Record the results of all magazine inspections on the appropriate PMS schedule.
An important requirement of the daily magazine inspection is observing, recording, and reporting
maximum and minimum temperature conditions in each stowage space. Magazines should be fitted
with thermometers and temperature record cards and holders, or temperature-sensing devices. They
must be capable of recording minimum and maximum temperatures.
Where no functional automated temperature indication system is present, at least one bimetallic
thermometer (Figure 11-6) should be placed in each designated ammunition magazine or locker. The
thermometer should be located in a readily accessible area where maximum variations of
temperature would normally occur. Where installation of the thermometer and bracket interferes with
stowed material or equipment, the thermometer should be mounted in a boss on the outside with the
stem projecting inside the stowage space.

11-21
 Figure 11-6 — Magazine thermometer.

These thermometers should be direct-reading, bimetallic

thermometers with maximum and minimum index pointers and
a reset knob. They should meet the specifications of Military
Specification: Indicators, Temperature, Direct-reading,
Bimetallic, (3 and 5 inch dial), MIL-I-17244. Thermometers
should have a temperature range of –40 to 180 °F, a 3-inch
back-connected dial, and a 4-inch stem. For applications that
do not require recording of minimum temperatures, a
bimetallic thermometer with a maximum index pointer only is
also acceptable. The thermometer should be mounted in an L-
shaped bracket in accordance with Naval Ship System
Command (NAVSHIPS) Drawing 810-1385917 and attached
to the supporting structure. Figure 11-7 — Magazine
temperature record card.
Magazine Temperature Log
A magazine temperature record card (Figure 11-7) should be located in each magazine and posted
near the thermometer for recording daily magazine temperatures. Replace these cards on the first
day of each month. Remove the completed cards from the magazine, and post the temperatures for
each month in a permanent log.
Retain the magazine temperature record cards on file for a period of 1 year. When recording
magazine temperatures in the permanent log, record temperatures that exceed 100 °F so that they
stand out, such as by using red ink. If the temperature exceeds 110 °F in smokeless powder, rocket
motor, and jet-assisted takeoff (JATO) magazines, check the temperature hourly and record it in a
separate notebook. Transfer these recorded temperatures to the permanent log on a daily basis.
Report any magazine with a temperature consistently above 100 °F to NAVSEA.

11-22
Magazine Security
Unless work is actually being performed within the space, all ammunition stowage spaces containing
ammunition or explosives should be secured and locked. Current directives and instructions require
this action. Properly securing an ammunition stowage space includes the following actions:
x Properly set all environmental controls
x Close all hatches, doors, or accesses
x Properly set all dogs on watertight closures
x Lock the space with an adequate locking device
Some ammunition and explosive items, such as small arms ammunition, small arms, and
pyrotechnics, are highly pilferable. Stow these items in high-security stowage spaces. These spaces
should be equipped with an unauthorized entry alarm system and a specially designed, high-security
locking device (Figures 11-8 and 11-9).

Figure 11-8 — High-security hasps.

The ship's gunner maintains and controls the magazine keys, including the high-security keys. The
keys must be logged out to authorized personnel only. During emergencies, such as fire and flooding,
the ship's gunner provides access, as
necessary, to locked ammunition spaces. If
the ship's gunner is absent, the weapons
department duty officer performs this
function.

AMMUNITION HANDLING
Handling ammunition requires detailed
planning, precise execution of details, and
strict compliance with safety regulations.
When ammunition aboard a ship is being
handled, these requirements cannot be
overemphasized. The working space is
limited, and a large number of personnel are Figure 11-9 — High-security padlock.
contained within the ship. All personnel (both
11-23
military and civilian) who handle ammunition must be qualified and certified in their areas of
responsibility.

Installed Handling Equipment

Aboard ship, weapons elevators service most large magazine and weapons assembly areas. These
areas have provisions for the use of hoists. A brief description of handling equipment and its purpose
is discussed in the following text.

Hoists
Hoists are used during weapons assembly to lift a weapon from the handling equipment or pallets to
the assembly stands and from the assembly stand to the handling equipment.
There are three basic types of hoists—manually powered, electrically powered, and pneumatically
powered (Figure 11-10).

Figure 11-10 — Typical pneumatically powered hoist.

A hoist may be attached to the overhead by a stationary fitting, or it may be mounted onto an
overhead monorail to move the load laterally. Use the correct sling, hoisting beam, and bomb carrier
when connecting the hoisting cable to the load. Hoists have an established safe working load (SWL)
that must be considered when a hoist is selected for a particular job. Also, the SWL of the interfacing
equipment (bomb carrier, sling, etc.) should be considered. For example, consider the following: A
hoist has been selected with an SWL of 4,000 pounds and a bomb carrier with an SWL of 2,000
pounds. The maximum weight this configuration can safely lift is 2,000 pounds.

11-24
Inspect hoists before they are used, periodically load test the hoist. Mark equipment that has
satisfactorily passed periodic load tests to indicate its SWL. As a minimum, the marking includes the
following information:
x The equipment or system designator
x The name of the testing activity
x The test expiration date
x The SWL
If the test period has expired or if documentation is not available to verify the latest load test status,
the equipment should be tested before it is used. If the equipment fails the load test specifications,
the equipment should be destroyed or, if economically feasible, repaired.

Weapons Elevators
The size, type, and location of these weapons elevators will vary among the different classes of ships.
These elevators are used to vertically transport ordnance and cargo to and from magazine spaces,
handling spaces, and ships’ holds to various decks in support of the ships’ mission.
Transported ordnance can either be moved in the AUR Ready-For-Issue (RFI) configuration or the
component configuration, or palletized as a Fleet Issue Unit Load (FIUL).
Personnel are not authorized to ride on weapons elevators except for certain PMS requirements, and
when evacuating personnel in a mass casualty or medical emergency situation. When elevators are
used in this manner, special operating procedures must be followed.
The following text contains a brief description of the two major classifications (lower stage and upper
stage) of weapons elevators. Regardless of the type of installation, a weapons elevator provides a
safe and efficient means for weapons and weapons components among the magazines and various
assemblies, staging, and arming areas within the ship to be handled.
An operator-attended control panel is located next to all elevator doors. All operator control panels
have a display of selector switches, push buttons, and indicator lamps suited for the control functions
required at the station served. All control panels have an emergency stop-run switch from which all
operations of the elevator can be stopped.

Lower Stage Weapons Elevators

The lower stage weapons elevator (Figure 11-11) services magazines and ammunition handling
areas from the seventh deck level up to and including the main deck (hangar deck).
The elevator system is controlled by a programmable controller that continually tracks the location of
the platform to within one-twelfth of an inch. Because of the complexity of the elevator system,
elevator operators and maintenance personnel are extensively trained in hydraulics, electricity, and
electronics.
Four cables attached at the corners lift the platform. The platform machinery is located at the third
deck level. The hatches are opened hydraulically. They are designed to automatically undog-open-
latch and unlatch-close-dog. The elevator doors are also operated hydraulically.
The system incorporates the following safety features:
x An over-speed governor slack-cable device
x An over-speed governor device
x A hydraulic interlock to prevent two hatches from being opened at the same time
11-25
 Figure 11-11 — Typical lower stage weapons elevator.

x A hydraulic interlock to prevent hatches from closing when dogs are in the dogged position
x An electrical interlock to prevent the opening of a magazine door unless the platform is at that
level
x An electrical interlock to prevent the opening of more than one magazine door at a time
x A pressure switch to prevent operation of the elevator when the hydraulic pressure is below
1,200 pounds per square inch
x An electrical interlock to prevent platform high-speed travel beyond the sequence-level
slowdown switch
x An electrical interlock to prevent platform travel beyond the sequence level until the main deck
hatch is opened and latched
x An electrical interlock to prevent movement of the platform until the lock bars are fully retracted
11-26
Figure 11-12 shows ordnance being
transported via lower stage weapons
elevator from the ship's hangar bay to
weapons magazines below decks aboard an
aircraft carrier.

Upper Stage Wire-Rope Elevators

The upper stage, wire-rope elevators (Figure
11-13) are the only weapons elevators in the
system that provide weapons transportation
to the flight deck.
The second deck is the lowest level served
by the upper stage elevators. The equipment
of upper stage, wire-rope elevators are
either similar or identical to those of lower
stage, wire-rope elevators. The following
discussion describes the differences
between upper and lower stage, wire-rope
elevators.
The elevator trunk enclosure extends from
the third deck to the underside of the flight
deck. Power-operated ballistic hatches in the Figure 11-12 — Lower stage weapons elevator.
main deck, 02 level, and flight deck allow
passage of the elevator platform, and they maintain ballistic integrity within the trunk. There are
power-operated doors in the trunk for elevator loading and unloading.
So that the elevator platform can be raised flush with the flight deck, the wire-rope attachment points
are on extensions of the platform structure, placing them below the main hoisting sheaves. An
arrangement of hoisting and idler sheaves in the upper end of the elevator trunk allows the platform to
be raised flush with the flight deck. Safety devices of upper stage elevators are essentially identical to
those for lower stage elevators.
Control equipment for upper stage elevators are essentially identical to those for lower stage
elevators. Operator control panels are located at each station served.

11-27
 Figure 11-13 — Typical upper stage, wire-rope weapons elevator.

Weapons Elevator Maintenance and Safety

The weapons department is responsible for maintaining all weapons elevators aboard aircraft
carriers. As an aviation ordnanceman (AO), you will perform preventive maintenance and repair
elevator systems. The same personnel are required to operate, maintain, and troubleshoot all types
of elevators, even though elevators differ significantly in design and level of sophistication.
Although the primary responsibility of elevator maintenance rests with the AO, some maintenance
procedures require the assistance of personnel within other ratings, such as machinist’s mate (MM)
and electrician’s mate (EM). When this requirement exists, it should be noted on the PMS card.
All electrical power requirements for the weapons handling system come from the ship's service 440-
volt, three-phase, 60-hertz power supplied throughout the system. Ship's service power is converted
to other alternating current (ac) and direct current (dc) voltages by either the controllers or control
panels to meet system equipment requirements.

11-28
For the safety of maintenance personnel, the tag-out and tag-in system has been established. The
steps within this system are standardized throughout the Navy. To ensure safety, operators should
comply with ship's tag-out procedures.
Ship's service sound-powered telephones are located at each operator control station. They are used
to supplement weapons handling system control indicators and coordinate operations between
various deck levels. An elevator must not be dispatched from one deck to another until
communications between the sending operator and receiving operator have been established.
In addition to OJT, most commands require that all personnel operating elevators possess a valid
operator’s license. The license should reflect the type(s) of elevator(s) the individual is authorized to
operate. For example, an operator may be authorized to operate all elevator systems at any control
station, or an individual with less training may only be authorized to operate the elevator system at
any station except the second deck main control station.

WEAPONS MOVEMENT
The movement of ammunition consists of routine operations, such as intramagazine movement and
movement of weapons and components in support of flight operations. It may also consist of major
evolutions, such as ship rearmament or major loading and offloading operations.
Regardless of the size of the operation, anytime weapons or explosives are removed from their
proper stowage environment; the opportunity for the occurrence of an ordnance mishap is much
greater. Therefore, one of the most important factors of any ordnance evolution is preplanning.
Additionally, a safety-first attitude must be paramount.

Weapons Movement in Support of Flight Operations

To enable squadron personnel to meet the short turnaround time of the flight schedule requirements,
weapons must be preassembled and located in staging areas on the hangar deck with sufficient lead-
time.
The area of the hangar deck that is to be used as a weapons staging area must be coordinated with
the hangar-deck officer. The weapons cannot interfere with the movement of aircraft or obstruct fire
lanes, but they must be positioned so they are protected by the hangar-bay sprinkler system. This
area should be located as close as possible to the aircraft elevator doors to provide a means for
jettisoning the weapons overboard in the event of an emergency. Anytime live ordnance is staged on
the hangar deck, a security watch must be posted to restrict the area to authorized personnel only
and to initiate movement of the weapons in case of an emergency.
The weapons staging area on the flight deck is located outboard of the island structure and inboard of
the catwalk or deck edge for aircraft carriers and behind the island on amphibious-class ships. This
area is commonly called the bomb farm. Anytime live ordnance is present, this area is manned by the
bomb-farm watch. Bomb-farm watch personnel maintain direct communication with the aviation
weapons movement control station (AWMCS), also known as aviation ordnance control center
(AOCC). In addition to security of the ordnance, the bomb-farm watch issues ordnance to squadron
personnel according to the ship's ordnance load plan.
The bomb-farm staging area also incorporates an emergency jettison ramp. The emergency jettison
ramp, when in the rigged position (down), forms a ramp from the flight deck edge to an opening in the
outboard bulkhead of the catwalk. The ramp provides a path for jettisoning weapons overboard during
an emergency. Additionally, jettison ramps are located fore and aft on the port and starboard sides of
the flight deck, so during an emergency, aircraft loading crews can jettison weapons. It is important
for personnel to be careful when the emergency jettison ramps are rigged; they bypass the catwalk

11-29
and safety net. When the ramps are in the stowed (raised) position, they form part of the catwalk
structure.
The bomb farm is routinely replenished with weapons from the hangar-deck staging area between the
launch and recovery of aircraft. The weapons are transported from the hangar deck to the flight deck
by the upper stage weapons elevators or deck-edge aircraft elevators.

Weapons Onload and Offload

There are three situations in which weapons onload or offload operations are normally conducted—
pier side, offshore at anchorage, or at sea. The location of the ship during onload or offload
operations affects manpower, equipment, time, and the degree of safety requirements.

Pier Side
Handling large quantities of explosive munitions at piers is limited to those designated by NAVSEA as
explosive piers. The pier area is restricted during ammunition and explosive loading and offloading
operations. Nonessential personnel (visitors) are not permitted access to the ship or pier area. All
privately owned vehicles, ship’s vehicles, and assigned Government transportation are prohibited on
a pier where ammunition is being handled. Before loading or offloading operations, the OOD is
notified. The OOD makes sure that a red flag is prominently displayed to indicate that an ordnance
evolution is in progress.
Pier-side ammunition handling operations are restricted to daylight hours. AE should not be loaded or
offloaded from a ship at night unless the ship’s CO or Master has approved the night ordnance
handling operations.
All AE operations on the pier must be approved by the installation or activity CO and the Naval
Munitions Command (NMC).
Operations can only be carried out at an adequately lighted pier. Situations that may affect pier-side
handling operations may include ship's sailing schedule or operational requirements. Therefore,
ammunition is not staged on the pier in large quantities. Close coordination is established between
the ship's weapons department and the station's NMC detachment to ensure that the rate of delivery
at the pier does not exceed the handling rate of the ship's ordnancemen.

Explosive Anchorage
At times, loading or offloading large quantities of AE at the pier is not practical or feasible. For
example, a ship may be located at a pier that has a restricted explosive load limit due to the
geographical location of other ships or occupied structures. It could also be due to the geographical
location of shore-based ammunition handling facilities. For example, an aircraft carrier may be
docked in Norfolk, Virginia, and the activity receiving or issuing the ammunition may be located in
Charleston, South Carolina. In this situation, the most practical method would be to locate the aircraft
carrier at a designated explosive anchorage (commonly called whiskey anchorage) and transport the
ordnance by lighters and/or barges. The transfer of ammunition between the ship and the lighters or
barges is normally accomplished by the use of a floating crane.
Even though a ship is located at an explosive anchorage, transferring ammunition is restricted to
daylight hours. Normally, the ship remains at anchorage until the entire evolution is completed, which
may vary from 1 to 5 days.

Transfer of Ammunition at Sea

The transfer of ammunition at sea (underway) presents problems not met by pier-side or anchorage
operations. Normally, replenishment at sea involves the transfer of fuel, supplies, stores, and
11-30
ammunition simultaneously. Obviously, available deck space, available handling equipment, and
manpower are used to the maximum efficiency. Every detail of the entire operation is preplanned and
coordinated between the departments involved within the ship and the individuals within the
departments.
Connected replenishment (CONREP) and/or vertical replenishment (VERTREP) methods at sea
accomplish the transfer of ammunition. The CONREP method consists basically of a steel cable
rigged between the supply ship and the receiving ship at the hangar-deck level. These points of
contact are called conning stations, and there may be more than one conning station in operation at
the same time. Cargo is attached to the cable by using approved handling equipment and conveyed
from one ship to the other. The AO is only responsible for ammunition items. Each ammunition load is
positioned at the conning station for transfer. As the ammunition loads are received at the conning
station, the load is moved to a designated staging area until it is struck below. The ship’s deck
department normally performs the operation of conning equipment.
In the VERTREP method, helicopters using slings and/or cargo nets transfer the ammunition to or
from the supply ship. VERTREP operations are conducted on the flight deck. The AO is responsible
for handling all ammunition and preparing and positioning empty slings and ammunition details for
transfer to the supply ship. A designated aircraft elevator transfers ammunition from the flight deck to
the hangar deck. The designated elevator is normally on the port side when CONREP and VERTREP
operations are being conducted simultaneously.

HAZARDS OF ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION TO ORDNANCE

Ordnance that presents a HERO problem includes cartridges, CADs, 20 mm ammunition, and rocket
motors. The ordnance electrically initiated devices (EIDs) may be accidentally initiated or their
performance degraded by exposure to radio frequency (RF) environments. Ordnance is more
susceptible to RF environments during assembly, disassembly, handling, loading, and unloading
operations.
The term radiation hazards (RADHAZ) applies to RF electromagnetic fields of sufficient intensity to:
x Produce harmful biological effects in humans
x Cause spark ignition of volatile combustibles or actuate electro-explosive devices
Although the effects of RADHAZ are important, this chapter limits discussion to HERO hazards.

Hero Ordnance Classifications

A testing program sponsored by NAVSEA determines the susceptibility of ordnance to RF
environments. Tests are conducted in the maximum RF environment the ammunition or ordnance
systems may be subjected to in its stockpile-to-launch sequence (Figure 11-14).
This data is the basis for the four HERO classifications assigned to ordnance—HERO safe ordnance,
HERO susceptible ordnance, HERO unsafe ordnance, and HERO unreliable ordnance.

HERO Safe Ordnance

An ordnance item is classified as HERO safe if it meets the following criteria:
x Ordnance is sufficiently shield-protected so that all EIDs contained by the item are immune to
adverse effects (safe and/or reliable) when the item is used in its expected RF environments
x Percussion-initiated ordnance is exempt from HERO requirements
x General HERO requirements are observed

11-31
 Figure 11-14 — Stockpile-to-launch sequence.

HERO Susceptible Ordnance

An ordnance item is classified as HERO susceptible if proved (by tests or analysis) to contain EIDs to
be adversely affected by RF energy to the point that the safety and/or reliability of the system is in
jeopardy when the system is used in its expected RF environments.

HERO Unsafe Ordnance

An ordnance item is classified as HERO unsafe if it meets the following criteria:
x Its internal wiring is physically exposed
x Tests are being conducted on the item that result in additional electrical connections to the
item
x EIDs that have exposed wire leads are handled or loaded when the item is being assembled or
disassembled
x When such ordnance items are damaged, it causes exposure of internal wiring or components
or the destruction of engineered HERO protective devices

HERO Unreliable Ordnance

Any ordnance item, including those having a HERO safe ordnance or HERO susceptible ordnance
classification, whose performance is degraded due to exposure to the RF environment, is defined as
being HERO unreliable ordnance when its internal wiring is physically exposed; when tests are being
conducted on the item that result in additional electrical connections to the item; when EIDs having
exposed wire leads are present, handled, or loaded in any but the tested condition; when the item is
being assembled or disassembled; or when such ordnance items are damaged, causing exposure of
internal wiring or components or destroying engineered HERO protective devices.

Hero Emission Control Bill

Ordnance items classified as HERO unsafe are protected from electromagnetic radiation by putting
them in a completely enclosed all-metal container. HERO unsafe ordnance should NEVER be
11-32
exposed to an RF environment. However, the requirement for assembly, disassembly, handling,
loading, and unloading exposes ordnance to some degree. If exposure cannot be avoided, ordnance
should be exposed only in essentially RF-free designated regions, such as below deck or in RF-
shielded buildings.
The HERO EMCON bill is a set of directions for mitigating the HERO restrictions on ships and shore
stations. An EMCON bill’s development and implementation are often the responsibility of the combat
system officer (CSO), electronic warfare officer (EWO), or for shore stations—the explosives safety
officer (ESO).
Its purpose is to prescribe, through advance planning, the easiest and most efficient method of
managing the conflict between the electromagnetic environment (EME) created by transmitting
equipment and HERO-classified ordnance.
The CO is responsible for making sure that HERO unsafe ordnance is not handled in RF
environments. Sometimes operational commitments require HERO unsafe ordnance to be exposed to
RF environments, such as the flight deck, hangar deck, or weather decks.
A degree of relief from HERO RF restrictions is obtained by following the command HERO EMCON
bill.
The HERO EMCON bill depends upon two factors—the amount and type of ordnance that is involved
and knowledge of the RF environment at locations where exposure occurs during presence, handling,
loading, storage, assembly, and transportation operation.
The HERO EMCON bill contains a list of all HERO susceptible and HERO unsafe ordnance items
onboard and their allowable RF environmental levels. It also includes a list of all transmitter-antenna
combinations on board and their output power. Reducing or securing certain transmitter-antenna
combinations can maintain allowable RF environmental levels.
Normally, to ensure that proper conditions are met in a given ordnance-handling situation, two actions
are taken:
x All on board transmitters are listed
x The operator follows appropriate steps when a given HERO EMCON condition is set
For example, in HERO condition 1, a transmitter operator may switch the transmitter to STANDBY. In
HERO condition 2, the same operator may restrict transmission to 100 watts, or perhaps there is no
transmission restriction at all.
The AO is the most important factor in avoiding a HERO unsafe situation. The AO determines if an
ordnance item is HERO safe, HERO susceptible, or HERO unsafe. Before moving a HERO unsafe
item from an RF-free environment, the proper HERO condition must be requested through strike
operations, AWMCS or AOCC. The AO must ensure that the ordnance item remains in an RF-free
environment until the word has been passed that the proper HERO condition has been set.
For detailed information concerning all aspects of electromagnetic radiation hazards, refer to
Electromagnetic Radiation Hazards, NAVSEA OP 3565/NAVAIR 16-1-529, volumes I and II.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Preplanning, ordnance training, and carefully handling ordnance prevent accidents caused by
explosives. The phrase "The life you save may be your own" is a good one, especially for ordnance
handling. It is the AO’s responsibility to make sure precautions and approved practices and
procedures are used when handling ordnance.

11-33
 End of Chapter 11
Ammunition Storage and Handling Afloat
Review Questions
11-1. The majority of explosive mishaps are caused by personnel error due to inadequate training,
lack of adequate supervision, and what other reason?

A. Complacency and failure to follow the governing technical directives

B. Failure to meet timelines and standards of personnel inspection
C. Limiting ordnance movements and magazine space
D. Following standard operating procedures

11-2. What instruction governs the Navy Personnel Ammunition and Explosives Handling
Qualification and Certification Program?

A. OPNAVINST 8023.24
B. OPNAVINST 8025.24
C. NAVSEAINST 8023.24
D. NAVAIRINST 8023.20

11-3. Other than officers and enlisted, what other Navy personnel, if any, are included under the
scope of the qualification and certification instruction?

A. Government employees
B. Civilian magazine construction engineers
C. Officers and enlisted who fall under the instruction
D. None

11-4. Which of the following personnel works under the qualification and certification program?

A. Security guards and magazine sprinkler maintenance crews

B. Weapons Safety Assistant Teams and Inspectors
C. Ammunition and explosives stowage/issue personnel
D. Crane operators and elevator operators

11-5. In addition to primary, which of the following types of magazines is provided on ships?

A. Ammunition cargo holds, universal, missile, ready-service, lockers, and chemical

B. Ready-service, locker, and miscellaneous
C. Miscellaneous, missile, small arms, and chemical
D. Chemical, locker, miscellaneous, and missile

11-34
11-6. Aboard an aircraft carrier, what type of magazines is capable of holding a ship's service
allowance of ammunition?

A. Ready-service
B. Primary
C. Secondary
D. Pyrotechnic

11-7. What type of magazine is located within the armor box and is used for the stowage of
completely assembled rounds of weapons?

A. Primary
B. Missile
C. Locker
D. Ready-service

11-8. Generally, each magazine on board a ship is designated to hold what total number of
ammunition types?

A. One
B. Two
C. Three
D. Four

11-9. What Naval Sea Systems Command publication provides the stowage tables that should be
referenced when mixed ammunition storage must be used?

A. OP 4
B. OP 5
C. OP 2165
D. OP 3347

11-10. What action should be taken when a magazine without environmental controls shows a
temperature in excess of 100 degrees Fahrenheit?

A. Notify the EOD

B. Use portable ventilation
C. Flood the magazine with water
D. Remove all ammunition from the magazine

11-11. Mk 58 Marine Location Markers NOT in an original watertight sealed container should be
stowed in a magazine with which of the characteristics?

A. With a sprinkler system

B. Located on the damage control deck
C. Without a sprinkler
D. With remote control valves

11-35
11-12. Sprinkler systems are fitted in which of the following magazines?

A. Primary only
B. Ready-service only
C. Missile only
D. Primary, ready-service, and missile

11-13. What minimum number of thermostats should be installed in each magazine?

A. One
B. Two
C. Three
D. Four

11-14. What minimum distance of air space, in inches, should be provided between any ammunition
stowage stack and the surface of adjacent plating or sheathing?

A. 2
B. 4
C. 6
D. 8

11-15. Aboard ship, magazine inspections are mandatory according to what Office of the Chief of
Naval Operations instruction?

A. 3120.32
B. 4790.2
C. 4790.4
D. 8023.2

11-16. The maximum and minimum temperature conditions in a magazine should be observed,
recorded, and reported at least how often?

A. Daily
B. Biweekly
C. Weekly
D. Bimonthly

11-17. How many basic type of hoist are available?

A. Two
B. Three
C. Four
D. Five

11-36
11-18. Any piece of handling equipment that has satisfactorily passed a periodic load test should be
marked with which of the following information?

A. Maximum testing weight

B. Name of the testing activity
C. Testing inspector’s name
D. Type of test conducted

11-19. What two major classifications of weapons elevators are used in the Navy?

A. Conventional and special

B. Lower stage and upper stage
C. Electrically operated and hydraulically operated
D. Manually operated and pneumatically operated

11-20. What weapons elevators provide weapons transportation to the flight deck?

A. Upper stage, hydraulic

B. Upper stage, wire-rope
C. Lower stage, hydraulic
D. Lower stage, wire-rope

11-21. An ordnance mishap is most likely to occur under which of the following conditions?

A. When seas are rough

B. When magazine hatches are not properly secured
C. When weapons or explosives are removed from proper stowage environment
D. When weapons or explosives are stored in magazines and elevator maintenance is
being performed

11-22. Pier-side ammunition handling operations may be conducted after daylight hours under which
of the following conditions?

A. When the pier is adequately lighted only

B. When the pier is adequately lighted and an emergency exists
C. When authorized by the supply officer
D. When authorized by the ship’s master or commanding officer

11-23. An ordnance item is classified as hazards to electromagnetic radiation to ordnance unsafe if

which of the following criteria have been achieved?

A. The external paint is chipped

B. The internal wiring is physically exposed
C. The maximum captive carry time is exceeded
D. The weapons assembly area is full

11-37
11-24. Which of the following publications contains detailed information pertaining to electromagnetic
radiation hazards?

A. NAVSEA OP 3347/NAVAIR 15-1-140

B. NAVSEA OP 4
C. NAVSEA OP 5
D. NAVSEA OP 3565/NAVAIR 16-1-529

11-38
 CHAPTER 12
AMMUNITION STORAGE AND HANDLING ASHORE
Ammunition storage ashore applies to the storage of explosives, ammunition, and ammunition
components in two different types of environments and operational conditions. When ammunition is
stored at permanently established storage locations, such as naval air stations, naval stations, or
other Department of the Navy (DON) ammunition activities, extensive safety and procedural
requirements exist. However, strategic operations may necessitate the establishment of ammunition
storage facilities at advanced bases. Although governing regulations exist for the storage of
ammunition at advanced bases, they are not as extensive as those governing permanent storage
requirements and regulations. The following text covers ammunition storage ashore and ammunition
storage ashore for advanced bases.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
When you have completed this chapter, you will be able to do the following:
1. Identify ammunition magazines used ashore.
2. Recognize the explosive safety quantity-distance (ESQD) requirements.
3. Recognize the hazards posed by various classes of ammunition.
4. Identify storage capability groups and their use.
5. Identify the facilities used to store ammunition at advanced bases.
6. Identify ammunition storage ashore for advanced bases to include facilities, magazines, and
handling requirements.
7. Identify the types of procedures used for magazine maintenance, storage, and handling to
include personnel requirements, lightning protection systems, magazine security, and
ammunition handling and shipping.

AMMUNITION STORAGE ASHORE

The safe storage of ammunition and explosives (AE) at DON shore activities, including tenant
activities (Coast Guard, Federal Bureau of Investigation, etc.), regardless of AE ownership, is under
the cognizance of Naval Ordnance Safety and Security Activity (NOSSA) as delegated by Naval Sea
Systems Command (NAVSEA). It also includes DON AE stored at other locations.
All DON shore activities should store only AE for which there is a clear audit trail and reason for
storage at the activity. DON shore activities should not store any AE that is in excess to their
ammunition storage allowance or to their research, development, testing, or manufacturing needs,
unless specifically directed to do so, in writing by the inventory control points or by the Designated
Disposition Authority (DDA).
All AE may deteriorate in storage. The method of packaging, magazine environment, the length of
time the material is stored, the nature of the deterioration, and the explosive compositions used are
factors in the rate and criticality of the deterioration. Any deterioration which decreases the stability of
the material, thereby increasing the risk of auto-ignition or a handling mishap, creates a safety
hazard. The longer material is retained in storage, the greater the likelihood that deterioration will
occur; therefore, activities shall assure that inventory management programs identify and prioritize
older stocks of AE for issue or use.

12-1
A red Bravo flag should be prominently displayed at a facility when explosives and personnel are
present. A Bravo flag should be prominently displayed by all ships and craft engaged in AE loading
and unloading operations. Also a Bravo flag should be prominently displayed by all barges, lighters,
and small boats while they are loaded with or are transporting AE. At night, a red light should be used
in place of a Bravo flag.

AMMUNITION IDENTIFICATION
Ammunition identification is an important part of ordnance handling and administration. Ammunition
identification identifies the type of ammunition, class of explosive contained in the round, Mark (Mk)
and Modification (Mod) numbers, lot numbers, and color codes representing the explosive hazards.
Ammunition items are most readily identified by size, shape, and weight. Specific characteristics of
these items are further identified by painting, marking, lettering, or combinations of these methods.

Service Ammunition
Ammunition intended for combat rather than for training is classified as service ammunition. This
ammunition has been approved for service use and contains explosives, pyrotechnics, or chemical
agent filler, and the propellant, if required, is of service or reduced charge weight. Aircraft service
ammunition is identified as either armament (kill stores) or ordnance (search stores).

Non-Service Ammunition
Ammunition used for training personnel in all aspects of a familiarization program is classified as non-
service ammunition. This ammunition may be of service quality or may be specifically modified or
loaded for practice ammunition inert training, inert dummy/drill, or exercise/recoverable ammunition.

Practice Ammunition
Practice ammunition is specifically designed or modified for use in exercises, practice, or operational
training. Practice ammunition may be either expendable or recoverable. Practice ammunition is not
inert and may contain all the explosive material normally contained in service ammunition. Practice
ammunition may contain additional explosive material such as pyrotechnics, spotting charges, or
flotation devices to assure destruction, location, or recovery.

Inert Ammunition
Inert ammunition and components contain no explosive material. Inert ammunition and components
include:
x Ammunition and components with all explosive material removed and replaced with inert
material
x Empty ammunition or components
x Ammunition or components that were manufactured with inert material in place of all explosive
material

Drill Ammunition
This type of ammunition is inert and may have working mechanisms or cutaways. Drill ammunition is
used for training.

12-2
Painting
Painting (Table 12-1) is the application of the final body coating to ammunition, ammunition
components, or ammunition containers by authorized activities. Usually, paint color identifies the use
or explosive hazards of the ammunition; however, sometimes it has no meaning.
Table 12-1 — Ammunition Color Code
COLOR INTERPRETATION
Yellow (1) Identifies high explosives
(2) Indicates the presence of high explosives
Brown (1) Identifies rocket motors and jet assisted take off (JATO)
(2) Identifies low explosive items or components, or
indicates the presence of a low explosive
*Gray Identifies ammunition that contains irritant or toxic agents
when used as an overall body color except for underwater
ordnance
Gray with Dark Red Band Indicates the ammunition contains an irritant (riot control)
agent
Gray with Dark Green Band Identifies the ammunition containing a toxic agent other
than binary agents
*Black Identifies armor-defeating ammunition, except on
underwater ordnance, dummy hand grenades, and when
used for lettering or marking
Silver/Aluminum Identifies countermeasure ammunition
Light Green Identifies screening or marking smoke ammunition
Light Red Identifies incendiary ammunition or indicates the presence
of highly flammable material for producing damage by fire
*White Identifies illuminating ammunition or ammunition producing
a colored light; exceptions are underwater ordnance,
guided missiles, dispensers, and rocket launchers, and
when used for lettering or marking
Light Blue Identifies ammunition used for practice
*Orange Identifies ammunition used for tracking or recovery such as
underwater mines and torpedoes
Bronze, Gold, and Brass Identifies dummy/drill/inert ammunition not for firing, but
only used for handling, loading, assembly and testing,
training, and display; some dummy hand grenades may be
painted black
Nonsignificant Colors
Olive Drab All ammunition items
Black For lettering
White (1) For lettering
(2) For guided missiles, dispensers, and rocket launchers
*NOTES: The following colors, when applied as stated, have NO identification color coding
significance:
1. The colors gray, black, white, or green on underwater ordnance, such as mines and torpedoes, and
the color white on guided missiles, dispensers, or rocket launchers.
2. The colors black and white when used for lettering or special marking.
3. Unpainted or natural color.
4. Colors specifically applied to identify the color produced by smoke ammunition or pyrotechnics.
12-3
Marking
Marking is the application of colored spots, bands, or symbols on ammunition, ammunition
components, or ammunition containers. Markings, by their color or shape, identify ammunition fillers
or the presence of specific ammunition components.

Lettering
Lettering is the use of letters, words, abbreviations, or numerals on ammunition, ammunition
components, or ammunition containers. Lettering is accomplished by die stamping, stenciling,
decaling, etching, or rubber-stamping. Lettering identifies the type, Mk and Mods, ammunition lot
number, and loading information of the ammunition item. Lettering applied in black or white has no
color-code significance.

Mark and Modification Designation

Each particular design of Navy ammunition, ammunition component, or ammunition container is
assigned a Mk and Mod designation. Rockets and guided missile are assigned Department of
Defense (DoD) designations.
The Mk number is an Arabic numeral and represents a basic design, followed by a Mod number to
represent a less than major change in design. For example, the Mk/Mod number assigned to a
general-purpose (GP) bomb without a change to the basic design is Mk 82 Mod 0. If a minor change
to the basic design is incorporated, it is designated as Mk 82 Mod 1. If further changes are
incorporated, the modification designations are assigned in sequence, Mod 2, Mod 3, Mod 4, and so
forth.
The Mk and Mods are assigned sequential Arabic numerals. Aeronautical support equipment,
including explosive devices and ordnance or armament, use groups of letters and numbers (e.g.,
BLU-110, BLU-111) to identify the type of unit and its serial.
U.S. Army ammunition retains the Army identifier that uses a letter; numeral; and letter and numeral
system. For example, the model is designated M23. The first modification of this model is designated
M23A1, and subsequent modifications are designated by M23A2, M23A3, etc. If the Navy and Army
jointly developed an item, the Army/Navy (AN) letters precede the model identifying designation. For
example, a model is designated AN-M173. The first modification of this model is designated AN-
M173A1. Later modifications are designated as AN-M173A2, AN-M173A3, etc.

Department of Defense Identification Code (DODIC), Navy Ammunition Logistic

Code (NALC) and National Stock Number (NSN)
The Department of Defense Identification Code (DODIC) is a four-digit code assigned by the Defense
Logistics Information Service Center (DLISC) or Naval Operational Logistics Support Center
(NOLSC). It identifies ammunition and explosive items (non-nuclear) within the supply system
applicable to all the Armed Forces. The Navy Ammunition Logistic Code (NALC) is a four-digit code
assigned by DLISC or Naval Operational Logistics Support Center Ammunition (NOLSC-AMMO),
respectively. It identifies Navy-unique items of ordnance. The DODIC and NALC are interchangeable
terms and are included as part of the letter identification contained on ammunition and ammunition
components. These codes are used specifically for logistic control and ammunition administration.
If an ammunition item or ammunition component has been modified, a DODIC/NALC code is
assigned to the modified item. For example, Mk 105 Mod 0 is assigned code A811 and Mk 105 Mod 1
is assigned code A894. A complete listing of DODICs and NALCs is contained in Navy Ammunition
Logistics Codes, NAVAIR 11-1-116B/TW010-AA-ORD-030.

12-4
For NALC Item/Family Reporting–even though each item has its own unique National Item
Identification Number (NIIN)/National Stock Number (NSN) for item management purposes, items
that are interchangeable as to form, fit, function, and use are assigned a four-digit, family-unique
DODIC or NALC.

Ammunition Lot Number

An ammunition lot is a quantity of ammunition assembled from uniform components under similar
conditions. A lot is expected to function in a uniform manner. Each ammunition lot (Table 12-2) is
assigned a code number (ammunition lot number) that identifies all ammunition items assembled as
part of that lot. Specific ammunition lot numbers can be found in Identification of Ammunition,
NAVSEA SW010-AF-ORD-010/NAVAIR 11-1-117.
Table 12-2 — Derivation of a Lot Number
KEY DEFINITION
a Lot sequence number
b Manufacturer’s identification symbol
c Month of production (two digit)
d Year of production (two digit)
e Month of production (single alpha)
JAN—A MAY—E SEP—J
FEB—B JUN—F OCT—K
MAR—C JUL—G NOV—L
APR—D AUG—H DEC—M
f Interfix number
g Lot suffix
Example:
Lot Number;
Method 1: 11 ABC 0588
Key: (a) (b) (c)(d)

(Note that (c) and (d) will be used to compute service life.)

Example:
Lot Number;
Method 2: XYE 88 E 001-011A
Key: (b) (d) (e) (f) (a)(g)

(Note that (d) and (e) will be used to compute service life.)

MAGAZINES
Explosives and ammunition are stowed in magazines or areas designated for the specific materials.
NAVSEA designs and designates all magazines or storage areas. The type and amount of material
that may be stowed in any magazine depends on the type of magazine in relation to the explosive
safety quantity-distance (Q-D) requirements.

Types of Magazines
Magazines located at naval air stations and other naval installations are of various sizes, types of
construction, and classes, depending upon the nature of the material to be stowed. Magazines are
designated as high-explosive magazines, smokeless-powder magazines, and ready-service
12-5
magazines according to their intended use. Magazines are further classified by type of design—
surface, subsurface, arch-type, earth-covered, or barricaded.
It is not practical to describe all the types of magazines here. Therefore, only selected types are
described in this chapter.

Magazines Currently in Navy Use

Magazines at naval ammunition storage activities are of various sizes and types of construction.
Existing magazines described by definitive drawings are approved for storage of AE. The following
represent several types found at most activities.

Earth-Covered Magazines
The earth-covered magazine (ECM) is any earth-covered structure that meets soil cover depth and
slope requirements of NAVSEA OP 5, Volume 1. An ECM has three possible structural strength
designations. The strength of an ECM’s headwall and door(s) determines its designation. The primary
objective of an earth-covered magazine is to provide protection for its assets.

Keyport
The keyport magazine is earth-covered and arch-type with a prefabricated concrete construction. It
has interior floor dimensions of 6 feet by 8 feet 8 inches. The height of the arch is approximately 6
feet.

Corbetta
A corbetta magazine is of concrete construction and is similar to the keyport type, but is shaped like a
beehive or dome.

Gallery
A gallery magazine is a tunnel or cave, and the dimensions will vary.

Temporary Arch-Type Magazines

These magazines are fabricated from steel and covered with earth, adopted for temporary outlying
overseas stations (and some air stations) for the storage of all types of ammunition or explosives.

Ready Service Magazines

When shore establishments require certain types of ammunition to be stored in a ready service
condition in order to reduce the arming time, the ammunition may be stored in designated ready
service magazines.

Ready Service Lockers

These lockers are generally used to store small quantities of belted or boxed small arms ammunition,
certain pyrotechnics, and similar material that present fire, but no blast, hazard. Ready service
lockers may be located in hangars or arming areas provided that construction and location are
approved by NOSSA or NOSSA Atlantic Division/Pacific Division Explosive Safety Support Office
(NOSSA LANTDV/PACDIV ESSO) and are compatible with the regulations of the commands
concerned.

12-6
Portable Magazines
These commercially built pre-engineered magazines may be used for storage of all class/division
(C/D) of AE, although their application is most efficient for storage of C/D 1.3 and 1.4 materials.
Commercial literature or specifications on the magazines do not qualify the magazines for a particular
type of storage or explosive limit.

Triple-Arch
The concrete triple-arch, earth-covered magazine was designed to economize uses of critical material
and to provide flexibility of stowage assignments. When combined, the arches constitute a single
magazine. The standard floor size of each arch is 25 feet by 80 feet, giving a total usable floor space
of approximately 3,650 square feet exclusive of aisle and inspection space. The arches are usually
separated at least 10 feet from each other at the floor and the space between is filled with earth.

Reinforced Concrete
An example of a reinforced concrete magazine is an arch-type ECM.

Open Storage
Open storage sites are undesirable. Even when determined to be necessary, they are considered a
temporary expedient and are not to be employed in place of standard methods for long term storage
unless specifically authorized by NOSSA.

Explosive Safety Quantity-Distance Requirements

All ESQD requirements apply to AE and other hazardous material (HAZMAT) at DON shore activities.
These requirements apply to all explosives development, manufacturing, testing, maintenance,
storage, loading and offloading of vehicles, railcars, ships and aircraft, disposal, and handling
operations where an energetic response (that is, detonation; burn) is not expected.
The requirements are based on records of actual fires and explosions involving AE, the American
Table of Distances, and the laws of the State of New Jersey. Standards of the Department of Defense
Explosives Safety Board (DDESB) that takes these factors into consideration are periodically
reviewed and updated.
The requirements are designed to provide the inhabitants of nearby communities, the personnel of
DON shore activities, and adjacent public and private property reasonable safety from serious injury
or destruction from accidental fires or explosions, and to minimize the loss of valuable ammunition
stores (including inert ordnance items), through accidental fires or explosions.
The DDESB standards and criteria, contained in DoD 6055.9-STD using the United Nations
Organization (UNO) hazard classification system, have been incorporated in NAVSEA OP 5
publications in compliance with DoD directives.
The DoD uses the UNO classification system for dangerous materials to identify the hazardous
characteristics of AE. The UNO classification system contains nine hazard classes identified in Table
12-3.

12-7
 Table 12-3 — Hazard Classes, Divisions, and Associated Hazards
DIVISION TYPE OF HAZARD
DESIGNATOR
Class 1. Explosives
1 Mass explosion
2 Fragment-producing; non-mass explosion
3 Mass fire, minor blast and/or minor fragment; non-mass explosion
4 Moderate fire, no significant blast or fragment; non-mass explosion
5 Very insensitive explosive substance with a mass explosion hazard
6 Extremely insensitive explosive article; non-mass explosion
Class 2. Gases
1 Flammable gas
2 Nonflammable, nonpoisonous compressed gas
3 Gas poisonous by inhalation
Class 3. Flammable Liquids
Class 4. Flammable Solids
1 Flammable solid
2 Spontaneously combustible material
3 Dangerous when wet material
Class 5. Oxidizing Substances and Organic Peroxides
1 Oxidizer
2 Organic peroxide
Class 6. Toxic and Infectious Substances
1 Poisonous material
2 Infectious substance
Class 7. Radioactive Materials
Class 8. Corrosive Materials
Class 9. Miscellaneous Hazardous Materials
The numerical order of the classes and divisions is not that of the degree of danger.

CLASS/DIVISIONS
Hazard classes are further divided into divisions that indicate the primary characteristic and
associated hazards. These divisions are indicated in Table 12-3.
Class and division are designated using decimal notation. A Class 1, Division 1 hazard, for example
is designated by C/D 1.1. Placards which identify the C/D are used to identify the material during
storage, handling, and transportation. In the event of an accident or a fire, the personnel who respond
will know what type of material is involved.
In reviewing Table 12-3, you can see that some items are placed in classes other than Class 1. An
aviation ordnanceman (AO) is involved with the storage of Class 1 material; therefore, the information
contained in this section only deals with Class 1 classifications.
DoD Hazard Class 1 is subdivided into divisions 1 through 6, based on the character and
predominance of the associated hazards and the potential for causing personnel casualties or
property damage. These subdivision are not based upon compatibility groups or intended use.

12-8
FIRE DIVISIONS
The fire divisions correspond to the explosive hazard C/D 1.1 through 1.6, and are numbered serially
by Arabic numerals from 1 to 6.
Fire division 1 indicates the greatest hazard. The hazard decreases with ascending fire division
numbers from 1 to 4; fire divisions 5 and 6 refer to explosion hazards from less sensitive substances
and extremely insensitive articles, respectively. The degree of hazard is based on the burning or
explosive characteristics of the materials involved.
The divisions are shown in Table 12-4:
Table 12-4 — Fire Division and Hazard Involved
Fire Division Hazard Involved
1 Mass explosion
2 Fragment-producing
3 Mass fire
4 Moderate fire
5 Mass explosion (very insensitive explosive substance)
6 Non-mass explosion (extremely insensitive explosive article)

Mass-Detonating Hazard Materials (Class/Division 1.1)

Damage from mass-detonating hazard materials is caused by concussion, blast, or by sympathetic
detonation. Prescribed distances listed in NAVSEA OP 5, Volume 1 between piles of these materials
and between magazines containing these materials must be maintained to minimize the possibility of
sympathetic detonation or propagation. Any AE that are considered mass-detonating hazards are
Hazard Class 1, Division 1.

Non-Mass-Detonating Hazard, Fragment-Producing Materials (Class/Division 1.2)

The principal hazards for items within this division are fragment and blast, either individually or in
combination, depending on such factors as storage configuration, type of packing, and quantity.
Events involving C/D 1.2 items lob large amounts of unexploded rounds, components, and
subassemblies, which will remain hazardous after impact. Such items are likely to be more hazardous
than in their original state because of possible damage to fuze safety devices or other features by
heat and impact. Many types of ammunition containing submunitions, such as cluster bombs, can be
expected to be projected out large distances. It is impractical to specify quantity distances which allow
for the maximum possible flight ranges of propulsive items.

Mass Fire Hazard Materials (Class/Division 1.3)

Items in this division burn vigorously. There is little or no possibility for extinguishing them in a storage
situation. Normally, explosions will be confined to pressure ruptures of containers and will not
produce propagating shock waves or damaging blast overpressure beyond specified distances. A
severe fire may result from the tossing about of burning container materials, propellant, or other
flaming debris. Toxic effects, such as burning pyrotechnic items, will not normally extend beyond the
inhabited building distances specified for this division.

Moderate Fire Hazard, No Blast Materials (Class/Division 1.4)

Items in this division present a fire hazard with minimal blast, fragmentation, or toxic hazard. Devices
that contain explosives are not considered Class 1 if an inadvertent or accidental ignition during

12-9
storage or transport will not result in fire, smoke, heat, loud noise, or visible damage to the outer
packaging.

Very Insensitive Substance (Class/Division 1.5)

Items in this division are substances that although mass detonating, are so insensitive that there is
negligible probability of initiation or transition from burning to detonation in transportation or storage.

Extremely Insensitive Explosive Article (Class/Division 1.6)

Items in this division contain extremely insensitive detonating substances (EIDS) that have been
demonstrated through tests described in NAVSEAINST 8020.8(series), that the mass and
confinement effects of the ammunition case are negligible on the probability of initiation or transition
from burning to detonation in transport or storage.
Normally, technical manuals do not present the hazard class, division, and compatibility group as they
are written in previous paragraphs. For example, an item classified as Class 1, Division 5,
Compatibility Group D, is written as Class 1.5D; or an item in Class 1, Division 4, Compatibility Group
S is written as Class 1.4S.

Storage Compatibility Groups

Different types of AE may not be stored together with dissimilar materials or items that present
positive hazards to the munitions. Thus, they cannot be stored with flammable or combustible
materials, acids, or corrosives unless they have been assessed to be compatible.
Different types of AE (by class and division) may be mixed in storage provided that they are
compatible. The AE are assigned to a storage compatibility group (SCG) when they can be stored
together without significantly increasing either the probability of an accident, or for a given quantity,
the magnitude of the effects from such an accident.
Thirteen groups are established (A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J, K, L, N, and S). Compatibility groups are
described as follows:

Group A
This group is described as initiating (primary) explosives; bulk initiating explosives that have the
necessary sensitivity to heat, friction, or percussion to make them suitable for use as initiating
elements in an explosive train; and materials in this group are prohibited aboard combatant ships.
Examples include bulk lead azide, lead styphnate, mercury fulminate, tetracene, dry cyclonite (RDX),
and dry pentaerythritoltetranitrate (PETN).

Group B
This group is described as detonators and similar initiating devices not containing two or more
effective protective features and items containing initiating explosives that are designed to initiate or
continue the functioning of an explosive train. Examples include detonators, blasting caps, small arms
primers, and fuzes.

Group C
This group contains bulk propellants, propelling charges, and devices containing propellant with or
without its own means of ignition. Examples include bulk single-, double-, or triple-base, and
composite propellants, rocket motors (solid propellant), and propelled ammunition and explosive with
inert projectiles.

12-10
Group D
This group includes bulk black powder; bulk high explosive (HE); and AE without a propelling charge,
but containing HE without its own means of initiation; that is, no initiating device is present or the
device has two or more effective protective features. Examples include bulk trinitrotoluene (TNT),
Composition B, and black power; bulk wet RDX or PETN; bombs, projectiles, cluster bomb units
(CBU), depth charges, and torpedo warheads.

NOTE
Where sufficient stowage space is available, it is desirable
to store bulk HE separately from ammunition containing HE
even though they are both in the same compatibility group.

Group E
This group is defined as AE containing HE without its own means of initiation; that is, no initiating
device is present or the device has two or more effective protective features, and either containing, or
with, a solid propelling charge. Examples include artillery AE, rockets, or guided missiles.

Group F
This group is defined as AE containing HE with its own means of initiation; that is, the initiating device
present has less than two effective protective features, and with or without a solid propelling charge.
Examples include HE grenades, sounding devices, and similar items having explosive trains with less
than two effective protective features.

Group G
This group includes illuminating, incendiary, and smoke (including hexachlorethane) or tear-producing
AE excluding those that are water-activated (without safety feature) or that contain White Phosphorus
(WP) or a flammable liquid or gel. Examples include flares, signals, and pyrotechnic substances.

NOTE
Some compatibility group G articles may contain air
activated (pyrophoric) material. These articles are assigned
a “G” only if they are designed such that the pyrophoric
properties in the storage and transportation configuration
do not present a special risk.

Group H
This group is defined as AE containing WP. The AE in this group contain fillers that are
spontaneously flammable when exposed to the atmosphere. Examples include WP and plasticized
WP.

Group J
The AE in this group contain flammable liquids or gels other than those that are spontaneously
flammable when exposed to water or the atmosphere. Examples include liquid- or gel-filled incendiary
AE, fuel-air explosive (FAE) devices, and flammable liquid-fueled missiles and torpedoes.

12-11
Group K
This group contains AE containing toxic chemical agents. The AE in this group contain chemicals
specifically designated for incapacitating effects more severe than lachrymation (tear-producing).
Examples include artillery or mortar AE (fuzed or unfuzed), grenades, as well as rockets and bombs
filled with a lethal or incapacitating chemical agent.

Group L
The AE not included in other compatibility groups are categorized as Group L. This group contains
AE having characteristics that present a special risk that does not permit storage with other types of
AE, or other kinds of explosives, or dissimilar AE of this group. Examples include water-activated
devices (without safety feature), pyrophorics and phosphides, and devices containing these
substances, prepackaged hypergolic liquid-fueled rocket engines, triethyl aluminum, plasticized
triethyl aluminum, and damaged or suspect AE of any group.

Group N
This group includes AE containing only EIDS. An example is hazard class/division 1.6 AE.

Group S
Any AE that present no significant hazard are classified as Group S, and includes AE packaged or
designed so that any hazardous effects from accidental functioning are limited to the extent that they
do not significantly hinder firefighting.
The mixing of storage compatibility groups is permitted by NOSSA, as shown in Table 12-5. The
mixing of storage compatibility groups other than those shown must be approved by NOSSA.
Table 12-5 — Storage Compatibility Chart for Shore Activities
GROUPS A B C D E F G H J K L N S
A X Z
B Z X Z Z Z Z Z X X
C Z X X X Z Z X X
D Z X X X Z Z X X
E Z X X X Z Z X X
F Z Z Z Z X Z Z X
G Z Z Z Z Z X Z X
H X X
J X X
K Z
L
N X X X X Z Z X X
S X X X X X X X X X X

12-12
 Table 12-5 — Storage Compatibility Chart for Shore Activities (continued)
NOTES:
1. The marking “X” at an intersection of the above chart indicates that these groups may be
combined in storage. Otherwise, mixing is either prohibited or restricted per note 2 below.
2. The marking “Z” at an intersection of the above chart indicates that, when warranted by
operational considerations or magazine non-availability, and when safety is not sacrificed,
logical mixed storage of some items of different groups may be authorized by NOSSA upon
written request. Mixing of limited quantities of some groups, as authorized by note 5 below,
does not require a written request. Authorization is not to be considered a waiver. Combinations
that violate the principles of OP-5 paragraph 3-9 require justification by waiver or exemption.
Examples of acceptable combinations of class 1 are:
a. Division 1, group A initiating explosives with division 1, group B fuzes not containing two
or more independent safety features
b. Division 3, group C bulk propellants or bagged propelling charges with division 3, group
G pyrotechnics without their own means of initiation
3. Equal numbers of separately packaged components of complete rounds of any single type of
ammunition may be stored together. When so stored, compatibility is that of the assembled
round; i.e., WP filler in group H, HE filler in groups D, E, or F, as appropriate.
4. Ammunition designated “practice” by NSN and nomenclature may be stored with the fully
loaded ammunition it simulates.
5. Mixing of compatibility groups (except items in groups A, K, and L) is authorized when the
total quantity does not exceed 1,000 pounds Net Explosives Weight (NEW). Mixed storage that
exceeds 1,000 pounds NEW must be approved by NOSSA.
6. Group K requires not only separate storage from other groups, but may also require separate
storage within the group. NOSSA shall determine which items in group K may be stored
together and those which must be stored separately.
7. Ammunition items without explosives which contain substances properly belonging to another
hazard class may be assigned to the same compatibility group as items containing explosives
and the same substance, and be stored with them.
8. For purposes of mixing, all items must be packaged in approved storage/shipping containers.
Items shall not be opened for purposes of issuing unpackaged munitions at storage locations.
Outer containers may be opened in storage locations for purposes of inventorying; for removing
munitions still inside an approved inner package in limited amounts, and for magazines storing
only hazard division 1.4 items, unpacking, inspecting, and repacking the hazard division 1.4
ammunition.
9. When using the “Z” mixing authorized by note 2, articles of compatibility groups B and F each
shall be segregated in storage from articles of other compatibility groups by means that prevent
the propagation of group B or F articles, to articles of other compatibility groups.
10. When ammunition or ammunition components are assigned to hazard classes 2 through 9,
they may be stored in accordance with the compatibility group assigned. The net explosive
weight of these items is not to be considered for Q-D computations, since the predominant
hazard is classes 2 through 9.
11. If dissimilar hazard class/division 1.6, group N munitions, such as Mk 82 and Mk 84 GP
bombs, are mixed together and have not been tested to assure non-propagation, the mixed
munitions are to be considered hazard class/division 1.2, group D for purposes of transportation
and storage.
12. Group L items presenting similar hazards may be stored together provided NOSSA
authorization is obtained. Mixing with other storage compatibility groups is forbidden.

12-13
IDENTIFICATION OF FACILITIES
Buildings and magazines of all types, including open storage sites, containing ammunition or
explosives or chemical and inert components normally associated with them, shall be marked to
provide rapid and positive identification of the facilities.
The identification system, as a minimum, consists of the Naval Facilities Engineering Command
(NAVFACENGCOM) building number in accordance with the Navy Comptroller Manual, Navy Staff
Office (NAVSO) Publication- (P)-1000, Volume 3. This number will be prominently displayed on the
facility or at the entrance of an open storage site. This number will be in addition to any other number
appearing on or near the facility as desired by the station or as required by other authority. The
number shall be at least 6 inches high. Any other markings which appear on or near a facility shall be
so displayed as to not confuse the identification of a facility.

Magazine Designator
The magazine designator system included in previous versions of NAVSEA OP 5 is not applicable to
new magazine designs and use. Continued use of the three group symbol of numbers and letters on
existing magazines is still authorized, but not required.
The following paragraphs describe the magazine identification system that may be in use at some
DON activities.
The magazine designator is a three-group symbol, composed of numbers and letters. It identifies a
magazine by location of the magazine group, the number of the magazine within the group, and the
type of magazine construction.
The magazine group number, the type of magazine and capacity letter(s), and the magazine
sequence number form the three-group symbol that makes up the magazine designator.

Magazine Group Number

The magazine group number is the first number of the magazine designator symbol. It shows the
magazine group in which the magazine is located. Each physically separated group of magazines or,
at smaller stations, each noncontiguous magazine area is assigned a number, making it easy to
identify the group. The group numbers begin with 1 and continue in ascending numerical order. If only
one magazine group exists, the number 1 is used. For example, the numeral 4 in the first position of
the magazine designator 4XTX4 indicates that this magazine is located within magazine group 4.

Magazine Type and Capacity Letter(s)

The magazine type and capacity letter(s) shows the type and capacity of the magazine. For this
reason, magazines of certain sizes are assigned a letter designation as indicated in Tables 12-6, 12-
7, 12-8, and 12-9.
To show the type of magazine, for example, the letter T is added if the magazine is earth-covered and
barricaded. If the magazine is earth-covered but not barricaded the letter C is added. If the magazine
is not earth-covered but is barricaded, the letter S is added. Therefore, in the magazine designator
4XTX4, the letter X in the second position indicates that the magazine size is miscellaneous or
nonstandard, and it is normally used for storing high explosives. Also, the normal explosive storage
limit depends on the magazine's size, location, and type of construction.

12-14
 Table 12-6 — Magazine Designators for Mass Detonating Hazard of High Explosives
(Bulk, Depth Charges, Mines, Warheads, Bombs, etc.), Fuzes, Detonators, Exploders,
and Black Powder
DIMENSIONS (nominal) NORMAL USE NORMAL LETTER
EXPLOSIVE LIMIT DESIGNATOR
25 by 80 feet, arch-type (igloo) High explosives 500,000 pounds A
25 by 50 feet, arch-type (igloo) High explosives 250,000 pounds B
25 by 40 feet, arch-type (igloo) High explosives 250,000 pounds B
39 by 44 feet or 32 by 44 feet, (warhead- High explosives 500,000 pounds W
type)
12 by 17 foot box-type Black powder 20,000 pounds E
Miscellaneous or nonstandard size High explosives Dependent upon X
size, location,
construction
Open storage High explosives Dependent upon R
size, location
25 by 20 feet, arch-type (igloo) Fuze and detonator 70,000 pounds F
52-foot dome (Corbetta-type) High explosives 500,000 pounds D
Dimensions vary (gallery or tunnel type) High explosives 250,000 pounds G
10 by 14 feet Fuze and detonator 15,000 pounds H
10 by 7 feet Fuze and detonator 7,500 pounds H
6 by 8 feet 8 inches (Keyport-type) High explosives 4,000 pounds K

52 by 97 foot box-type A High explosives 500,000 pounds A

62 by 76 foot box-type B High explosives 500,000 pounds A

The explosive limits contained in Tables 12-6 through 12-8 are maximum capacities. They are based
on magazine design and construction characteristics. These limits are further subject to the ESQD
considerations discussed previously. Additional limitations are shown in the magazine designator.
When the ESQD relationship, as indicated in the tables, does not permit using the explosive capacity
design of a standard magazine because of insufficient separating distances, the letter X, Y, or Z is
added to the designator. These letters indicate the magazine contains mass detonation hazards,
mass fire hazards, or fragment-producing hazards, respectively. For example, in the magazine
designator 4XTX4, the letter X in the fourth position tells you that the magazine does not have a
sufficient separating distance from other structures or magazines.
Table 12-7 — Magazine Designators for Fire Hazard of Powder (Bulk or Semifixed Ammunition),
Pyrotechnics, Ignition Fuzes and Primers, Small Arms, Smoke Drums, and Explosive-Loaded
Chemical Ammunition
DIMENSIONS (nominal) NORMAL EXPLOSIVE LIMIT LETTER DESIGNATOR
50 by 100 feet 1,000,000 pounds L
25 by 80 feet triple-arch 1,000,000 pounds L
52-foot dome (Corbetta-type) 1,000,000 pounds D
50 by 60 feet 300,000 pounds M
30 by 50 feet 125,000 pounds N
25 by 48 feet 125,000 pounds N
25 by 40 feet 125,000 pounds N
Miscellaneous or nonstandard size Dependent upon location, size, and construction Y

12-15
 Table 12-8 — Magazine Designators for Fragment Hazard of Projectile and Fixed
Ammunition
DIMENSIONS (nominal) MAXIMUM EXPLOSIVE LIMIT LETTER DESIGNATOR
50 by 100 feet 500,000 pounds P
25 by 80 foot triple-arch 500,000 pounds (total for three arches) P
25 foot dome (Corbetta-type) 500,000 pounds D
Miscellaneous or nonstandard size 150,000 pounds Z

Table 12-9 — Magazine Designators for Miscellaneous Magazines

DIMENSIONS (nominal) TYPE LETTER DESIGNATOR
Miscellaneous or nonstandard size All inert storehouses SH

Firefighting Hazard Identification

Fire Hazard Symbols
Each fire division and chemical hazard can be identified by a corresponding symbol. Four fire
symbols cover the six explosive divisions described. Because of similar firefighting hazards, the C/D
1.1 fire symbol is also used for C/D 1.5, and the C/D 1.2 fire symbol is used for C/D 1.6.
Each of the four fire symbols has a distinctive shape so that it is easily recognized by the firefighting
personnel approaching the fire scene. For the purpose of long range identification, the symbols differ
in shape as follows:
x Octagon shape Fire division 1 symbol
x Cross shape Fire division 2 symbol
x Inverted triangular shape Fire division 3 symbol
x Diamond shape Fire division 4 symbol
All four symbols are colored orange. The color of the fire division identification number is black. This
color scheme corresponds to that used by the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO), the UNO,
and the International Maritime Organization (IMO) to label class 1 explosives (Figure 12-1).

12-16
 Figure 12-1 — Fire division symbols.

Chemical Agent and Ammunition Hazard Symbols

Chemical agent and ammunition hazard symbols are used to identify operating buildings and storage
facilities that contain pyrotechnics, chemical munitions or agents, and other hazardous materials.
These symbols can be used by themselves or in conjunction with fire symbols, as appropriate.
These symbols are specifically for firefighting situations and are not necessarily applicable to normal
operating conditions.
Hazard symbols represent the type of agent being stored or processed. These symbols are illustrated
in Figure 12-2. The hazard is designated by each symbol and the applicable firefighting precautions
to be observed.

12-17
 Figure 12-2 — Chemical agent and ammunition hazard symbols.
Posting of Symbols
The symbol or symbols that represent the most hazardous material present shall be posted outside
hazardous materials storage sites and operating buildings unless security considerations make it
undesirable to identify the materials present at the site. In these cases, the posting of firefighting
symbols on nuclear and chemical sites will be at the discretion of the activity commanding officer
(CO). The contents of magazines not posted will be identified on the activity fire map.
A posted symbol should be situated so it is visible during daylight from a distance of 500 feet. If
visibility is obstructed by vegetation, curves in roads, etc., the symbol shall be placed on the roadway
so as to be visible from a distance of 500 feet. One symbol posted on or near the door end of an igloo
magazine, or on the headwall of a box-type magazine, is normally adequate.
One or more symbols may be required on other buildings. When all material within a storage area is
covered by one fire symbol, it may be posted at the entry control point or on the access roadway.
When different classes or divisions of explosives are stored in individual multi-cubicle bays or module
cells, they may be further identified by posting the proper symbol on each bay or cell. Placement of
symbols shall be coordinated with the station fire department.

Empty signs
Empty signs should be posted and fire division/chemical hazard symbols removed or covered on a
magazine where the contents have been removed, unless security considerations make it
undesirable to identify magazines in a high security area. If empty signs are not posted for this
reason, emergency procedures shall be established whereby firefighting agencies will be notified of
magazine contents, or lack thereof, in case of fire.

12-18
AMMUNITION STORAGE ASHORE FOR ADVANCED BASES
Advanced base is the general term for a temporary base that is in or near a forward area outside the
zone of the interior. The primary mission of an advanced base is to support wartime operations of the
Armed Forces. Advanced bases are established to perform one or more of the following functions: to
hold threatened strategic areas; to protect, or be part of, a line of communications and supply; to
serve as a base for supporting either offensive or defensive operations; and to serve as a base for
mounting or supporting further offensives.
If a valid reason for not complying with storage and handling regulations/instructions at advanced
bases is not contained in NAVSEA OP 5, Volume 1, then consult the Ammunition and Explosives
Safety Ashore for Contingencies, Combat Operations, Military Operations Other Than War, and
Associated Training, NAVSEA OP 5, Volume 3.

AMMUNITION STORAGE AND HANDLING FACILITIES OF AN

ADVANCED BASE
Ammunition storage and handling facilities of advanced bases are identified as Ammunition Supply
Points (ASP) and Airfield Ammunition Supply Points (Airfield ASP).
An ASP is normally established to facilitate the through-put for all class V (ammunition) materiel
received into the area responsible for consolidation and redeployment of this materiel. The Airfield
ASP is established at or near airfields to provide Class V logistical support required for aircraft and
defense of the aviation installation.
When an advanced base is established, the storing and handling facilities should be divided into
areas. These areas should correspond to the functions required by the mission of the base to make
ordnance-handling operations easier and smoother and to isolate hazards.

Ammunition Areas
Areas at advanced bases are designated as storage, segregation, staging, disposal, port, enemy
ammunition, administration/personnel, assembly, renovation, and embarkation/debarkation areas.
These areas are discussed briefly in the following paragraphs.

Ammunition and Explosives Storage Areas

Each advanced base contains two or more magazine or storage areas allowing the dispersing of
ammunition stows, and making it easier to receive and issue ammunition. The primary objective in
dispersing ammunition is to prevent the complete loss of a single type of ammunition because of fire,
accidental explosion, or hostile action. Ample provision should be made for expansion during the
initial planning of magazine areas.

Segregation Areas
Ammunition received in an unsegregated condition must be separated prior to storage by lot number,
type, and physical condition. A location for this purpose shall be provided within the ammunition
explosive area.

Ammunition and Explosives Staging Area

AE staging areas are normally used at advanced bases as a holding area for outgoing AE and for
ready access to combat aircraft loading areas. The AE staging area should be located near the
entrance of an ASP to allow accomplishment of administrative requirements. The ASP may also use
this area to safe haven vehicles. An AE staging area may also be located adjacent to, or in close

12-19
proximity to the combat aircraft loading area to provide a suitable holding area for all-up-round
weapons to meet daily operational requirements.

Demolition/Disposal Area
A demolition area is used for destroying unserviceable AE. This area may be selected within the
confines of the ASP provided that it is a minimum of 1,800 feet from any stored AE and 2,340 feet
from any other component areas. The minimum fragment distances in NAVSEA OP 5, Volume 1, will
be used when they exceed these distances.
Routine disposal operations, including burning or detonation of unserviceable ammunition,
explosives, and other hazardous materials, will be performed by qualified personnel and shall be
conducted in accordance with standard operating procedures (SOPs) approved by cognizant
ordnance group commanders and local activity commanders. A suitable shelter will be provided to
protect personnel during demolition operations. The disposal area shall be located within the Q-D
boundaries provided in NAVSEA OP-5, Volume 3.

Port Areas
An isolated and separate ammunition pier should be provided during the initial stages of construction
of an AE storage area at advanced bases. Such a facility should eliminate congestion, delay, and
hazards caused when a single pier is used for loading and/or unloading of general cargo, fuels, and
ammunition.

Captured Enemy Ammunition Area

A separate area should be provided for the storage of captured enemy AE. It should be isolated by
fire breaks and at public traffic route distance from other stocks based on the quantity of explosives
involved.

Administration and Billeting Areas

Administration and billeting areas not directly involved with routine ordnance or aircraft operations will
be sited at inhabited building distance (IBD) from any explosive hazard. Personnel directly related to
the ordnance operations can operate from facilities inside the IBD.

Weapon Assembly Areas

A weapons assembly area (WAA) is established at an airfield ASP to facilitate assembly and
disassembly of ammunition required to support the aviation mission. A WAA may also be established
at an ASP when all class V functions are supported by that activity. The WAA should be located away
from other areas to facilitate operations and to isolate hazards.

Ammunition Renovation Area

An area may be needed for maintenance and repair of AE, or their containers. Such an area can also
be used for surveillance, inspection, and a WAA provided that required grounding points are
available.

Point of Embarkation/Debarkation
Both airfields and piers can serve as points of embarkation/debarkation for AE. Storage areas
associated with points of embarkation/debarkation will be designated and should minimize risk to
personnel and property.

12-20
Ammunition Storage Facilities
The AE at advanced bases may be stored in existing magazines, buildings, and in dry caves and
tunnels. Ammunition may also be stored in the open, in quarries, pits, and similar areas. Ammunition
must not be put in caves, tunnels, quarries, or pits if there is not adequate drainage.
When possible, available magazines and buildings should be assigned for storing the more fragile
and perishable ammunition, such as guided weapons, pyrotechnics, ammunition containing
smokeless powder, fuzes, and similar components. The more durable ammunition, such as aircraft
bombs and separate loading projectiles, should be stored in the open, provided it affords maximum
protection against corrosion and deterioration. Existing magazines used for storing AE shall be as
prescribed in NAVSEA OP 5, Volume 1 and OP 5, Volume 3.

Existing Magazines
When the local situation allows, the magazine storage criteria and peacetime Q-D of NAVSEA OP 5,
Volume 1 should be followed. This level of protection limits the risk to the civilian and unrelated
military population from death or serious injury from blast overpressure and fragments due to an
explosion, protects vital facilities from serious damage, and protects ammunition from propagation.
When preservation of mission capability is essential, asset preservation distances should be selected.
Storage should be in magazines (aboveground or earth-covered) or in open stacks, which would be
considered aboveground (not earth-covered) magazines for determination of intermagazine distance.
Commercial shipping containers used for ammunition storage will be considered an aboveground
magazine unless 2 feet of earth cover can be maintained over the entire container to qualify it as an
ECM. Earth barricades may be used to reduce separation distances.

Existing Buildings
Existing buildings may be used for the storage of AE. Buildings should be of fire-resistant
construction, afford good protection against moisture and dampness, have means for adequate
ventilation, have substantial flooring to support the ammunition, and in all respects afford adequate
protection to adjacent areas. Intermagazine separation will be based on aboveground (not earth-
covered) distances.

Caves and Tunnels

Caves and tunnels may be used to store AE if they are dry and free of moisture seepage. In hot
climates, AE containing smokeless powder should not be stored in caves and tunnels unless they can
be ventilated to prevent the accumulation of ether fumes. In dry climates, AE stored in caves or
tunnels should be above the ground water level. Intermagazine separation distances based on ECMs
should be used to the extent possible. Primary concern for propagation is the front-to-front orientation
of the cave or tunnel opening.

Shipping Containers
Containers used for transporting ammunition, such as Commercial Intermodal Containers (CIC),
International Standard Organization (ISO) may be temporarily used as ammunition storage shelters to
provide protection from the elements.

Conversion of Shipping Containers into Earth-Covered Magazines

The skin of a shipping container is not designed to support the weight of 2 feet of earth without
causing deformation of the roof. Procedures in NAVSEA OP 5, Volume 3 provide a method to
reinforce the container, allowing the roof to support 2 feet of earth. When containers can be limited to
a maximum explosive limit of 8,820 pounds of hazard C/D 1.1, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, and 1.3 materials, and the
12-21
application of conventional earth cover is not practicable, they can be used as ECMs, using sandbag-
filled containers to provide fragment protection. C/D 1.4 material can be stored without being included
in the total weight. Figures 12-3 and 12-4 provide two options for using sandbag-filled containers for
overhead protection. Figure 12-3 uses conventional earth slopes on the sides and rear, while Figure
12-4 uses sandbag-filled containers on the sides and rear.

Figure 12-3 — Shipping container as earth-covered magazine.

When AE are stored in the open, as aboveground magazines, field storage units (FSUs), or
modulars, special considerations must be given to protect the material from the elements.

12-22
 Figure 12-4 — Shipping container as earth-covered magazine.

FIELD STORAGE UNITS

When it becomes impractical to manage ammunition separation distances by NEW, short tons
calculated on gross package weight may be used. This concept designates the storage areas as
FSUs consisting of one or more stacks of ammunition. The principal objective of the FSU concept is
the dispersion of ammunition to minimize the loss in case of fire, accidental explosion, or enemy
action.
Each type of ammunition must be stored in at least two widely separated FSUs to prevent the loss of
any one FSU from seriously handicapping military operations by the loss of the entire supply of any
item. The FSU concept does not provide the degree of protection from propagation afforded by
magazine storage arrangements.

Organization of Field Storage Units

The following criteria must be followed to establish an FSU:
x Short tons should be considered gross weight to include the weight of both ammunition and
packing material
x Each FSU is limited to a maximum of 400 short tons (800,000 pounds) with spacing between
units established by NAVSEA OP 5, Volume 3
x Each stack within an FSU is limited to a maximum of 20 short tons
x Stacks must be separated by a minimum of 50 feet; this distance only provides protection
against fire; it does not provide complete protection from propagation of detonation by blast
over pressure or fragments; the loss of stacks is viewed acceptable within an FSU; separation
12-23
 between FSUs provides viable protection against propagation; to ensure asset preservation,
apply distance between all storage sites using NEWs
x Only one type of ammunition should be stored in a stack; if more than one type is stored in a
stack, the ammunition should be arranged in a manner to facilitate inventory and inspection

Modular Storage
This type of open storage for conventional ammunition is storage on pads with earth-barricaded areas
called cells. These cells are joined to form modules, which in turn may be arranged to form blocks.
Modular storage reduces real estate, security, internal road network, and transportation requirements.
In addition, this system provides protection from direct hostile fire; however, modular storage sites
require additional engineering support for initial construction of barricades. The modular storage
system is limited to the storage of high explosive bombs and other similarly cased C/D 1.1 and 1.2
ammunition, 30 mm and smaller ammunition in non-flammable shipping containers, inert munitions
and components, and C/D 1.4 ammunition.
Authorization to store other ammunition or explosives in modular cells must be obtained as a waiver
from the area commander during wartime operations. Deviations from these restrictions at training
sites require a Chief of Naval Operations (CNO) waiver.
The danger of fire and explosions spreading from cell to cell because of heat or fragments, and the
danger from indirect fire and aerial bombs is increased by the minimal distance between ammunition
stacks and the storage of materials other than those listed above. Modular storage does not provide
the degree of protection afforded by magazine storage sited in accordance with NAVSEA OP 5,
Volume 3.

Signs
Signs should be used throughout advanced bases to indicate traffic routes to AE storage locations.
Enough signs should be erected to ensure that vehicles carrying AE will not have difficulty finding
storage locations and routes while passing through the area.

MAGAZINE MAINTENANCE, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

REQUIREMENTS
Proper AE storage facilities are only a part of the overall storage system. Among the most important
aspects of the storage of ammunition is the proper maintenance of magazines and magazine areas.

PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS
Normally, all personnel engaged in operations that involve ammunition, explosives, and other
hazardous materials are trained and qualified to perform their assigned duties. In addition to being
qualified and certified, personnel involved with hazardous explosive operations are certified by a
physician as physically qualified.
Personnel are not knowingly permitted or required to work when their ability or alertness is impaired
because of fatigue, illness, or other reasons, which would expose them and other personnel to injury.
Occasionally, manpower shortages cause a need for assistance by personnel from other Navy ratings
to join working parties to handle or transport AE. These working parties are referred to as
augmentation crews.
Before using augmentation crews, it is important to be sure that personnel in the working party are
trained so mistakes are not made or safety factors violated. Furthermore, enough ordnance-qualified
12-24
and certified representatives that are senior in rank to any member of the working party should be
present to detect or prevent violations of safety orders and other unsafe practices. They should take
whatever action is required to correct the situation.

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS

Lightning protection is required for all ordnance handling, operating, and storage facilities or areas.
The purpose of a lightning protection grounding system is to dissipate lightning current into the earth
by providing a low impedance path to earth.
A lightning protection system consists of an air termination network, down conductors, primary and
secondary grounding systems, and bonding conductors to interconnect conductive bodies attached to
or inside the structure.
There are two types of lightning protection grounding systems—primary and secondary. The primary
grounding system prevents damage from direct lightning strikes by diverting the strike and providing a
low-impedance path to ground. The secondary system maintains all metal objects within its system at
the same electrical potential, preventing the possibility of sparking between the objects.

Primary Grounding Systems

Air Termination Systems
An air termination system is that part of the lightning protection system designed to provide a primary
attachment point for a lightning strike. There are four types of air termination systems approved for
the protection of explosives areas: Faraday shield, mast, catenary, and integral systems.

Faraday Type System and Faraday Shield

The best method to protect extremely sensitive operations from all sources of electromagnetic
radiation (not just lightning) is to enclose the operations or facility inside a Faraday cage. However, a
Faraday cage is difficult to construct and is economically justified only for one-of-a-kind facilities
where extremely sensitive operations warrant the level of protection it provides.
A Faraday cage is a lightning protection system where the volume is enclosed by a heavy metal
screen or a continuous metal structure with all metallic penetrations bonded. The lightning current
flows on the exterior of the structure, not through the interior. A Faraday shield is a lightning
protection system that is not an ideal Faraday cage, but is formed by a contiguous conductive matrix
that is properly bonded and grounded. Examples include:
x Electrically continuous steel arches and reinforcing bars of the concrete end-walls and floors of
steel arch magazines
x Reinforcing bars of ECMs
x Metal shell of pre-fabricated portable magazines and metal buildings

Mast System
A mast-type lightning protection system uses masts (either metallic or wood) that are remote from the
structure to provide a primary attachment point for a lightning discharge. If the mast is constructed of
wood, an air terminal or metal cap connected to two down conductors must be installed. These down
conductors shall be placed symmetrically (on opposite sides, 180 degree separation ±10 degrees)
about the mast. The height (and spacing, if more than one is necessary) of the masts must be
adequate to ensure that the entire structure is enclosed within a zone of protection for a 100-foot

12-25
striking distance. The minimum diameter of the mast shall be 5/8 inch and must be sturdy enough to
withstand the expected wind and ice loads.

Catenary (Overhead Wire) System

A catenary lightning protection system consists of grounded, elevated, horizontal, metallic wires
stretched between masts that surround a structure. Each catenary wire shall be a continuous run of at
least American Wire Gauge (AWG) number 1/0 copper or copper-coated steel cable suspended
above the protected structure and connected at each end to the primary ground girdle (or ground rods
if a girdle is not necessary.
The overhead cable shall be supported by masts to ensure a minimum separation distance of 6 feet
from the protected structure, including any projections. This separation shall be increased by 1 foot
for every 10 feet after the first 50 feet of catenary wire run parallel to the structure. The supporting
mast shall be separated from the structure by at least 6 feet.

Integral System
An integral system uses air terminals and conductors mounted directly on the structure to be
protected. Minimum requirements for an integral system are:
x The design and installation of the system shall meet the requirements of Underwriters
Laboratories (UL) 96A
x All air terminal spacing described in UL 96A shall be modified as necessary to provide a zone
of protection defined by the 100-foot striking distance, including protection of lower roofs by
higher roofs on buildings less than 50 feet tall
x Since integral system material requirements differ for structures having a height greater than
75 feet, close attention to UL 96A requirements must be maintained to assure correct materials
such as thickness, diameter, or size, are used
x All air terminals must be provided with a two-way path to ground unless specifically exempted
by UL 96A
x A minimum of two down conductors shall be provided on all structures; structures exceeding
250 feet in perimeter length shall have an additional down conductor for every 100 feet of
perimeter length or fraction thereof; all down conductors shall be connected to the facility’s
secondary ground girdle

Down Conductors
Lightning protection system down conductors shall meet the minimum requirements of National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA) 780. They shall interconnect all air terminals and shall form a two-way
path from each air terminal horizontally, downward, or rising at a rate not exceeding three inches per
foot to connections with the primary ground system.

Secondary Grounding System

The secondary grounding system consists of a buried copper or copper-clad, steel conductor of AWG
number 1/0 or larger that interconnects all of the grounds and conductive bodies attached to, or inside
the structure that are to be bonded to a grounding system. A minimum of protection required for all
structures is provided from the effects of lightning by establishing a common grounding point for any
item in the structure that requires grounding. The secondary grounding system is connected to the
primary lightning protection system.

12-26
MAGAZINE AND MAGAZINE AREA SECURITY
Nonclimbable fences protect magazine areas. All the entrances should be locked unless guards are
posted. A sign should be posted at all the entrances to restricted areas. The sign indicates that every
vehicle must stop, that each person must present proper credentials to the guard, and that all articles
prohibited within the area must be given to the guard. The exact wordings of the signs are left to the
discretion of the CO. However, the word explosive should not appear on the sign, and the sign should
not be attached to the magazines.
Special precautions should be taken to guard or patrol the areas that are not protected by suitable
fencing. Magazine and explosives areas where ammunition, explosives, and other items of high-
security classification are stored must be adequately guarded at all times.
Unauthorized personnel should not be permitted to enter or remain in any magazine or explosives
area. Personnel involved in ammunition handling operations may be authorized in magazines or
buildings that contain explosives only as required, and they must enter and leave explosives areas at
designated points.
Additional information on the requirements for posting, fencing, unguarded facilities and vehicles,
emergency events, and security alarm systems is found in Department of the Navy Physical Security
Instruction for Conventional Arms, Ammunitions and Explosives (AA&E), OPNAVINST 5530.13.

MAGAZINE AND MAGAZINE AREA INSPECTIONS

The CO, or duly authorized representative, requires regular and frequent magazine inspections.
These inspections include ready-service lockers, ready-service magazines, and magazine areas.
Magazine inspections are conducted to make sure the following conditions are met:
x Ensure magazine repairs are made, if needed
x Ensure that safety regulations, particularly those that involve cleanliness and elimination of fire
hazards, are observed
x Ensure that magazine contents are not deteriorating into an unsafe condition, and they are
stored in an orderly, compatible, and approved manner
The magazine area inspections are designed to make sure the following actions are being
maintained:
x Firebreaks should be maintained
x Posting of fire, chemical hazard, safety information, and explosive limits
x Fire protection equipment, when required, must be available and serviceable
x Roads must be in good and usable condition
x Fences must be secure
x Security systems and alarm systems must be operable
At times, area inspections are performed more often than magazine inspections—particularly during
seasons when grass or brush fires are most likely to occur.

General Inspection Requirements

Some of the types of things that should be observed when conducting general magazine inspections
are security, safety, cleanliness, atmosphere (temperature and humidity), identification of contents,
and posting. A checklist covering all safety regulations and requirements of magazine operations is
12-27
used during magazine inspections, which helps to ensure violations or hazards are not overlooked.
The checklist provides an adequate and full description of any condition that is unsatisfactory and in
violation of requirements. The checklist should be properly authenticated and made a part of the
magazine log.

Frequency of Inspections
The inspection frequency is determined by the CO or duly authorized representative. The frequency
varies, depending on the number of magazines to be inspected, weather conditions, season of the
year, number of magazines requiring special attention (for example, environmentally controlled), and
security requirements of magazines/magazine areas. Inspections should be conducted during
daylight hours to be sure there is enough light to see that any substandard condition that exists is
seen and reported to the inspector. The exception to this procedure is security inspections; they are
conducted during the day and at night.

Temperature Control Considerations

The majority of the ordnance items in the naval inventory today have been designed to withstand high
temperature in the range of 130 to 160 degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
Studies have indicated that the temperature within conventional ordnance storage magazines seldom
exceeds 105 °F. It is no longer necessary to install thermometers and closely monitor the
temperatures within magazines except for situations where the program manager for specific
ammunition items has established temperature and/or humidity limits.

Report of Inspections
Substandard or abnormal conditions should promptly be reported to the officer or supervisor in
charge of correcting such conditions. A log should be maintained to document all deficiencies and
corrective actions taken. Mandatory log entries include the date of inspection, inspection SOP used,
deficiencies detected, and deficiencies corrected. All entries must be signed. If no deficiencies are
found during the inspection, the entry no deficiencies shall be made. Records shall be maintained for
four years.

AMMUNITION HANDLING
The AO must be familiar with handling ammunition. It is a repetitious task, whether at a shore station
or aboard ship. Repetitious work, no matter how dangerous, often becomes routine and leads to
carelessness. Therefore, attention must be paid to what is done to prevent accidents in operations
dealing with AE.
Whenever ammunition or explosives are received, transferred, or stowed, an ordnance
qualified/certified officer or petty officer should supervise the work. The supervisor should make sure
that all work personnel are aware of the need to be careful when they handle AE.
Handling equipment should be properly maintained and frequently inspected to make sure it is in safe
working condition. Also, the handling equipment must be the right equipment for the purpose.
Inspections should be made before and during loading/unloading operations.

AMMUNITION SHIPPING
Ammunition shipping is a phase of ammunition handling. Instructions for the preparation and
shipment of naval ordnance material are contained in Navy Transportation Safety Handbook for
Ammunition, Explosives and Related Hazardous Materials, NAVSEA SW020-AG-SAF-010. The
NAVSEA SW020-AG-SAF-010 instruction covers the preparation, flow, and use of all the documents
12-28
that are required to ship, receive, and report shipments. Instructions for the use of ordnance transport
equipment, materials to be transported, division of responsibility for carrying out inspections, and
criteria for accepting or rejecting equipment are also contained in this publication. NAVSEA SW020-
AG-SAF-010 contains the general information needed for personnel to safely perform the duties
required when shipping ordnance materials.

Explosives Driver
An explosives driver is often an AO with an excellent safe driving record, and a person fully qualified
according to Motor Vehicle Driver and Shipping Inspector’s Manual for Ammunition, Explosives, and
Related Hazardous Materials, NAVSEA SW020-AF-HBK-010. To become a qualified explosives
driver, an AO must meet the qualifications described in the manual. All Navy and Marine Corps
military, civilian, and contractor personnel must be qualified and properly licensed to operate motor
vehicles transporting AE.

State Operator’s License

An explosives driver must hold a valid state operator’s license—not necessarily issued by the state in
which the activity is located. The valid state operator’s license applies to operation of vehicles both on
and off-station.

Medical Examinations
The Manual of the Medical Department (MANMED) publication, Naval Medicine (NAVMED) P-117,
Article 15-107, contains comprehensive guidance on the necessary medical examinations and
standards for personnel to qualify as explosives drivers. The following regulations apply to all military
(active duty and reservists) and civilian (employee, contractor, and subcontractor) personnel. All
medical examinations shall be performed by a licensed medical examiner per NAVMED P-117
guidance.
x Military personnel must meet the standards of NAVMED P-117, Article 15-107 and comply with
the medical surveillance/certification requirements listed in program 721 of the latest edition of
NEHC-TM OM 6260, published by the Navy Environmental Health Center; a physical
examination is required every five years until age 50, and annually thereafter
x Civilian personnel must comply with the standards of NAVMED P-117, Article 15-107; physical
examinations shall be conducted every two years until age 60, then annually thereafter
This certificate (Figure 12-5), in addition to the explosives driver's permit, must be on the operator's
person while driving any vehicle transporting AE.

12-29
 Figure 12-5 — Medical examiner's certificate.

Alcohol and Drugs

Any applicant for explosives driver certification shall be screened for alcohol and drug use per the
requirements of NAVMED P-117, Article 15-107. In accordance with the DON Drug-Free Workplace
Program (DFWP), explosives drivers are considered to be in a testing designated position.
Explosives driver certification shall be revoked for any driver found to be under the influence of
alcohol or drugs while on duty. Temporary revocation of certification may be necessary when the use
of physician-prescribed drugs is likely to interfere with the ability to operate a motor vehicle safely.

U.S. Government Motor Vehicle Operator’s Identification Card, Optional Form 346
The U.S. Government Motor Vehicle Operator's Identification Card, Optional Form (OF) 346 (Figure
12-6), also called driver's permit, is issued to qualified personnel authorizing them to operate
government vehicles.
The OF 346 is issued by the designated representative of the CO when the applicant is qualified
according to requirements in NAVSEA SW020-AF-HBK-010. Possession of this permit alone,
however, does not constitute authority to drive vehicles transporting AE unless the notation
“*Explosives Driver - Must hold a current medical certificate.” appears on the permit as shown in
Figure 12-6. Without this notation, the driver cannot be assigned to transport AE.

12-30
Individuals holding an OF 346 should have
the permit on their person when operating a
vehicle. It is his or her responsibility to apply
every two years for renewal of the driver's
permit. Yearly endorsement of the driver's
permit is not required. It is recommended that
activities render all possible assistance to
explosives drivers to ensure that permits do
not expire. Refer to NAVSEA SW023-AH-
WHM-010 for Material Handling Equipment
(MHE) operator qualifications.

Age and Experience

Explosives drivers must be 18 years of age or
older to operate motor vehicles transporting
AE on-station, and shall be 21 years of age or
older for off-station operations. They must
have a safe driving record and must have had
training and experience with the type of
equipment being operated. Training may be
provided by the employer or other private or
public sources.

Ability to Read and Understand

Regulations Figure 12-6 — Motor Vehicle Operator's
Explosives drivers must be able to read, write, Identification Card, OF 346 (front and back).
and understand the English language, and to
complete the various forms for which they are responsible. They must be required to read and
understand the regulations pertaining to their duties as described in the publication.

EXPLOSIVE SAFETY TRAINING PROGRAM

The NAVSEA OP 5, Volume 1 provides in-depth guidance on the Navy’s explosives safety training
program. Military personnel (active and reserve duty) assigned to shore station positions involving
responsibilities for AE should attempt to complete the applicable explosives safety training prior to
reporting.

Ammunition and Explosives Driver 12-Hour Training Course

NOSSA maintains a course curriculum to assist activities in this training effort.
The course is available on the Explosives Safety Technical Manuals (ESTM) CD-ROM, distributed by
the Packaging, Handling, Storage and Transportation (PHST) Center. This course is used for drivers
of AE both on-station and over public highways. Instruction is provided in the following areas:
x Driving trucks, truck-tractors with semi-trailers, and other vehicles
x Regulations pertaining to the handling, loading, and transportation of AE
x Proper use of fire extinguishers and instruction in emergency response procedures
x Proper completion and filing of required forms and reports

12-31
Each activity should use this curriculum or their equivalent course to satisfy the 12-hour training
requirement and to develop a four-hour refresher course. Explosives drivers should take this
refresher course every two years in order to maintain qualification.

Driver liability
Personnel operating Navy-owned motor vehicles shall be responsible for compliance with all DoD
regulations, as well as state and local traffic laws. Any driver in violation of any such regulation or law
is subject to fines and/or imprisonment.

Disciplinary Action and Penalties

Drivers are subject to disciplinary actions and penalties for violation of civil and/or military regulations.
The degree of disciplinary action and penalty which may be imposed by naval authority is dependent
upon the individual’s past record and the discretion of the CO. Criminal penalties may also be
imposed.

Reporting Traffic Violations or Accidents

All traffic violations or accidents shall be reported to the supervisor, security officer, or safety officer,
and shall be noted on the operator’s driving record.

Suspension or Revocation of a Navy Driver’s Permit

The CO shall suspend or revoke a Navy driver’s permit if, in his/her opinion, it would be in the best
interest of the Navy.

Automatic Revocation of a Navy Driver’s Permit

A Navy driver’s permit should be revoked automatically for the following violations, and notice of such
action shall be filed in the driver’s personnel record:
x Driving while under the influence of alcohol, illegal drugs, a derivative of a narcotic drug, or the
misuse of a prescription drug
x The known transportation or possession of alcohol, illegal drugs, or a derivative of a narcotic
drug
x Failure to report an accident in which the driver was involved
x Leaving the scene of an accident in which the driver was involved
x Smoking while in or within 25 feet of a vehicle loaded with AE
x Revocation of state driver’s license

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Safety precautions prescribe the minimum requirements and regulations that should be observed
when handling ammunition. These regulations may be general in nature or step-by-step procedures.
Regardless of the situation, safety precautions must NEVER be ignored or bypassed, even during the
simplest ammunition-handling evolutions.

12-32
The general safety precautions listed below show some of the regulations contained in publications
referred to in this chapter.
x Properly stow all materials within a magazine and keep them in a safe condition; never let
trash resulting from decanning, depalletizing, or unpacking accumulate in a magazine; it
presents a fire hazard and unsafe working conditions for personnel
x Use only those tools specified in the SOP in the work area; COs shall adopt security
measures, including periodic inspections, to ensure that unauthorized tools are not introduced
into the workplace
x Before AE loading, or offloading operations, either at a shore activity or a ship underway,
inspect all fire mains to make sure they operate properly and efficiently
x Fire hoses must be laid out ready for use in the immediate area of operations; the hoses must
be laid out so those damage control and fire boundaries are not crossed, using all risers
available; additionally, keep the valves controlling these fires hoses open so that water is
readily available
x Flame, heat, or spark-producing devices are not permitted where explosives or flammable
materials, batteries, or battery charging lockers are located; cigarette lighters, heaters, fires,
welding tools, soldering irons, cutting torches, and uncovered lights are included in this
category
x When work requiring the use of flame, heat, or spark-producing devices is urgently required in
or adjacent to an ammunition stowage space, all AE must be removed from the adjacent
spaces
x Emphasize safety precautions applicable to in-service ammunition items or equipment by
using applicable signs
x Emergency drills requiring the use of the general alarm system, ship's bell or whistles are not
conducted aboard ship while moored to an ammunition activity pier, unless specific approval
for such drills has been granted by the CO of the ammunition activity
x Emergency drills shall not be conducted by ships nested together or at a pier where
ammunition handling operations are in progress or by a ship underway during an ammunition
handling evolution
x Ammunition evolutions involving direct contact with ammunition components are curtailed
during local atmospheric disturbances, such as thunderstorms or high winds; operations are
not resumed until nonhazardous conditions prevail
x Ships and craft entering commercial or naval shipyards for periods longer than 6 weeks are
completely offloaded of all ammunition, except the small arms ammunition that the CO
considers necessary for the maintenance of security aboard ship and inert ordnance items
such as bomb fins
x If a ship is expected to remain in the yard for less than 6 weeks, the ship offloads, as a
minimum, all ammunition or explosives that cannot be stowed in sprinkler protected or
floodable spaces
x The number of personnel engaged in ammunition and explosive handling operations is limited
to the minimum necessary for safe and efficient performance of the work; unauthorized
personnel are not permitted in a magazine, missile handling, or testing area, or at any handling
operation involving explosives or ammunition; a responsible escort accompanies visiting
personnel

12-33
 End of Chapter 12
Ammunition Storage and Handling Ashore
Review Questions
12-1. Magazines ashore are designated as high-explosive magazines, ready-service magazines,
and what other magazines?

A. Liquid-propellant magazines
B. Long-arms magazines
C. Smokeless-powder magazines
D. Sprinkler magazines

12-2. What type of magazine is made from concrete and is shaped like a beehive or dome?

A. Box
B. Corbetta
C. Gallery
D. Keyport

12-3. The United Nations Organization hazard classification system contains a total of how many
classes of hazardous materials?

A. Four
B. Six
C. Eight
D. Nine

12-4. What total number of storage compatibility groups is used in the Navy?

A. 7
B. 9
C. 11
D. 13

12-5. What storage compatibility group designates detonators and similar initiating devices not
containing two or more effective protective features?

A. A
B. B
C. C
D. D

12-6. What storage compatibility group designates items with White Phosphorus (WP) or plasticized
WP?

A. H
B. J
C. L
D. S

12-34
12-7. What command authorizes the mixing of storage compatibility groups?

A. NAVAIRLANT
B. NAVAIRPAC
C. NAVAIRSYSCOM
D. NOSSA

12-8. What statement best describes the use of magazine symbol-hazard placards?

A. To help firefighters determine what magazine has explosives

B. To help stow ordnance in the same compatibility group
C. To identify a magazine within the magazine group
D. To identify the applicable firefighting precautions to be observed

12-9. What term describes ammunition storage and handling facilities of advanced bases?

A. Ammunition Activity
B. Ammunition Stock Points
C. Ammunition Supply Points
D. Ordnance Annex

12-10. Each advance base should have what number of magazine or storage areas?

A. One
B. Two
C. Three
D. Four

12-11. At an advanced base, the disposal area should be what minimum distance, in feet, from the
nearest ammunition storage site?

A. 1,200
B. 1,400
C. 1,600
D. 1,800

12-12. At an advanced base, ammunition maintenance and repair should be performed in what area?

A. Disposal
B. Magazine
C. Pier
D. Renovation

12-13. Personnel engaged in operations that involve ammunition, explosives, and similar hazardous
materials must meet which of the following criteria?

A. Be explosive certified only

B. Be physically fit only
C. Be certified as a team member only
D. Be trained, qualified, and certified as physically qualified by a physician

12-35
12-14. The mast-type system and the overhead wire system are what type of lightning protection
grounding systems?

A. Direct
B. Indirect
C. Primary
D. Secondary

12-15. For specific requirements regarding posting, fencing, unguarded facilities, unguarded vehicles,
emergency events, and security systems, which of the following instructions should be used as
a reference?

A. COMNAVAIRFOR 5510.15
B. COMNAVAIRFOR 8010.4
C. OPNAVINST 5530.13
D. OPNAVINST 8010.12

12-16. Why is a regularly scheduled magazine area inspection conducted?

A. To ensure firebreaks are filled with water

B. To ensure fire protection equipment is available and serviceable
C. To verify roads are painted with a nonslip coating
D. To verify the street lights have amber bulbs

12-17. What Naval Sea Systems Command publication should be consulted for detailed instructions
on shipping, receiving, and reporting ammunition shipments?

A. OP 2136
B. OP 2142
C. SW020-AG-SAF-010
D. TW010-AC-ORD-010

12-36
 CHAPTER 13
WEAPONS ASSEMBLY
Weapons assembly must be done with care and safety; the procedures in this chapter are typical
assembly requirements. These procedures do not include authorization for flight or tactical doctrine.
The airborne weapons assembly manual (WAM) provides detailed information for weapon
uncanning/recanning and inspection, component unpackaging/inspection, repackaging and weapons
assembly, and inspection criteria for assembled weapons. Technical manuals provide procedures
and responsibilities for organizational and intermediate maintenance activities supporting or
performing uncanning, inspection, weapons assembly, weapons preloading, scheduled or
unscheduled maintenance, and recanning functions.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
When you have completed this chapter, you will be able to do the following:
1. Identify the purpose of conventional weapons assembly, to include a description of general-
purpose (GP) bombs and support equipment configurations.
2. Identify common procedures to follow while assembling conventional weapons.
3. Recognize the bomb assembly area arrangement.

WEAPONS ASSEMBLY PROCEDURES

The following paragraphs contain information about the assembly procedures for some of the most
commonly used weapons. This training manual does not include assembly procedures for every
available weapon in the Navy. However, the following procedures give basic information about
assembly procedures.
Regardless of how well trained an assembly crew may be, there must always be a team leader (TL),
a quality assurance (QA) inspector and a safety observer (SO). The TL is required to use a weapons
assembly checklist or WAM during all phases of the weapons assembly process. The QA inspector
inspects each completed round to ensure that it is correctly assembled and properly installed on the
handling equipment. The SO is responsible for safety assurance at each individual handling evolution
location.
Prior to any weapons handling and assembly procedures, ordnance personnel should verify that they
are in possession of the most recent edition of the WAM or checklist.

AIRCRAFT GENERAL-PURPOSE BOMBS

Aircraft GP bombs are assembled in a variety of configurations. Mission requirements dictate the way
a weapon is to be configured. This information is found in the ordnance load plan. A few of these
configurations are discussed in the following paragraphs.

Bomb Assembly Tools and Equipment Requirements

Tools and equipment listed in Table 13-1 are required for weapons assembly evolutions. The list is
provided to assist personnel in proper assembly procedures.

13-1
 Table 13-1 — Bomb Assembly Tool Requirements
BOMB ASSEMBLY TOOL/EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
Tool/Equipment Quantity
Allen wrench, 1/8 inch 4
Allen wrench, 3/16 inch 4
Apex tip for 1,000-pound bomb conical fins 6
Apex tip for 500-pound bomb conical fins 4
Apex tip for butt plate removal 3
Apex tip for nose setscrew 5/16 inch 6
Apex tip for retarding fin 6
Apex tip holder (with setscrew), 3/8-inch drive 6
Bar for rolling bombs, local manufactured 1
Cable insertion tool assembly (long) 2
Cable insertion tool assembly (short) 2
Cable knockout tool 1
Band cutters 1
Dowel, wooden 2
Driver, plastic handle, Snap-On F50A or equivalent 1
Face shield, full 2
Flashlight, explosion-proof 2
Kit, pneumatic gun 2
Lock ring tool 1
Low-voltage tester 1
Low-voltage tester (active and passive) 1
Nutdriver, 3/8 inch for fuze restraining clip (nutdrivers are 2
enclosed with case of clips)
Pick 4
Pliers, needle-nose 1
Pliers, vise grip 4
Plug, gauge P/N SK923AS503 1
Retaining clip removal tool assembly 1
Screwdriver, 8-inch straight slot 2
Screwdriver, Phillips 8-inch 2
Sleeve, gripper 4
Socket, 6-point magnetic, Snap-On MFIM161 or equivalent 1
Speed handle, 3/8-inch drive 2

13-2
 Table 13-1 — Bomb Assembly Tool Requirements (continued)
BOMB ASSEMBLY TOOL/EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
Tool/Equipment Quantity
Speed handle, 1/2-inch drive 2
Torque wrench adapter, closure ring 1
Vise grip pliers 4
Work gloves, heavy-duty 2
Wrench, closure ring 1
Wrench, crowfoot, Snap-On FC24B or equivalent 1
Wrench, Ogive nose plug 1
Wrench, spanner (spreader type) 4
Wrench, torque (capable of 0 to 350 inch-pounds) 1

Bomb Assembly Crew

Bombs are assembled only in designated areas that are on the fourth or fifth deck of an aircraft
carrier, or on the second deck (mess deck) if necessary. The designated assembly areas on the
amphibious assault ship (general purpose) (LHA) and the multi-purpose amphibious assault ship
(LHD) are normally located on the fifth deck (aviation ordnance/bomb assembly magazine) or other
designated assembly areas, depending on the class of ship.
The references to positions used with the bomb assembly crew shown here are for ease of
understanding only. Many personnel operate the bomb assembly stand (Figure 13-1) and support the
assembly evolution. The typical crew positions are:
x TL
x QA inspector
x SO
x Hoist operators
x Nose fuze/Target
detection device
(TDD) installer
x Tail fuze installer
x Tail fin installer
x Skid and hoist
operator
x Forklift operator
x Dunnage personnel
x Elevator operators
Figure 13-1 — Typical bomb assembly crew positions.

13-3
Preparation for Use
When GP bombs are used, the following preparations must be carried out.

Breakout
Breakout is the term used to define the physical removal of ammunition from the magazine. Weapons
are broken out, by direction of the ordnance handling officer (OHO), in accordance with the load plan.
When ordnance breakout is directed by the OHO, the breakout crew records the type, lot number,
and quantity of ordnance broken out. Then, the crew passes this information back to ordnance control
so that an accurate account and location of weapons and related material on board can be kept up to
date.

Unpacking
Depalletize the bomb body and place it on the appropriate bomb skid or assembly stand. Prior to
depalletizing, don gloves, steel-toe shoes, and face shields. When depalletizing a bomb body,
remove the banding straps and the top section of the metal pallet, the shipping cap on the rear of the
bomb body, and all plastic shipping plugs from the fuze cavities (Figure 13-2). Then, install hoisting
bars, as necessary, for manual handling of the bombs. Other suitable hoisting equipment may be
used when available. Finally, place the bomb on the appropriate bomb skid or assembly stand.

Figure 13-2 — General-purpose bomb components.

Inspection
Inspect the bomb for damage, stripped threads, cracks, or broken welds.
Remove the suspension lugs to ensure correct lugs are used.
Lug wells must be clean. It is important to verify that threads are not damaged and that no helical
coils are present in lug wells. If helical coils are present, notify the TL and QA.
The suspension lug should be screwed into lug well until the outer edge of the bottom of the center
space (eye) of the lug is flush with bomb body. The lug cross bar should be aligned 90 degrees to the
fore and aft axis of the weapon (Figure 13-3).

13-4
Check the bomb to see that the V-groove is clean and undamaged. Also check the fuze wells to
ensure that they are clean, dry, and not damaged.

NOTE
Tuffseal leakage occurs into and around fuze cavity and
appears as a thick black liquid. Explosive exudate appears
brown or silver in color, depending on the explosive filler.

If nose elements and/or electric tail fuzes are to be used,

check the electrical connectors to ensure that they are
not bent or corroded. To ensure that the connectors are
firmly seated, press them gently with a non-conductive
tool (wooden dowel).
Inspect thermally protected bombs for loose or chipped
coating. Mark (Mk) 80(series) bombs with more than 56
square inches of thermal coating missing—or one area
greater than 15 square inches—are not considered
thermally protected. They are restricted from use afloat
and should be returned to the Weapons Station
(WPNSTA)/Naval Magazine (NAVMAG) for storage and
renovation. Bomb live unit (BLU) 100(series) bombs with
more than 40 square inches of thermal coating missing—
or one area greater than 20 square inches—are not
considered thermally protected. They are restricted from
use afloat and should be returned to the WPNSTA for
storage and renovation. Figure 13-3 — Suspension lug.
Use the following steps to perform low voltage test on the
M70(series) cable:
1. Press the push-button switch on the active probe, the red light should illuminate. If the red light
does not illuminate, replace the batteries and repeat the check.

CAUTION
If the active probe lights when used alone, this indicates a
short in the cable and may cause the fuze to dud.

2. Insert the active probe only into one of the fuze cavities ensuring it makes contact with the
cable end and verify the red indicator does not glow. If indicator glows, remove and replace
M70 series cable. Insert one probe in each fuze cavity (nose and base). Ensure each probe
makes contact with the cable end.
3. Observe red indicator on active probe, indicator should glow. If not, replace M70 cable.
4. Remove the probes.

General Inspection and Installation Procedures

The following sections provide a brief description of the common inspection and installation
procedures for electronic fuzes, the Mk 122 arming switch, and GP bomb fins.

13-5
Electronic Tail Fuze
For the fuze munition unit 139 (FMU-139(series)) electronic tail fuze, verify that shelf/service life has
not expired. Prepare, inspect, and install the fuze as follows:
1. Ensure that the gag rod is secured by the safing pin (Figure 13-4).

WARNING
If the safing pin is removed from the FMU-139(series) and the red-
and-black striping is visible on the gag rod sleeve (sleeve extended),
the fuze is enabled and could be armed. Notify the proper authority
immediately.

2. Ensure that the red-and-black striping is not visible on the gag rod sleeve.
3. Use a 1/4-inch-wide straight slot screwdriver and rotate both switches through all settings.
4. Remove the plastic shipping plug and flag from the connector on the end of the fuze. Inspect
for foreign matter, cleanliness, damaged contacts, and compressed or missing spring.
5. Verify that the closure ring threads are clean and not damaged.

Figure 13-4 — FMU-139(series) fuze.

Install the FMU-139(series) fuze as follows:
1. Set the low drag arm/delay (top) switch to the X-position.
2. Set the high drag arm/delay (bottom) switch as directed.
3. Insert the fuze into tail fuze well (Figure 13-5).
4. With the fuze seated, thread the closure ring into the bomb fuze well. Tighten firmly until the
closure ring is against the fuze face.

13-6
 Figure 13-5 — FMU-139(series) electronic bomb fuze
installation.

CAUTION
Do not exceed the torque value; breakage of screws or
components is highly possible.

5. Remove the fuze safety pin. Using the closure ring torque wrench adapter and closure ring
wrench, tighten the closure ring to the prescribed torque in accordance with the assembly
manual.
Perform the following FMU-139(series) post-assembly inspection as follows:
1. Ensure that the closure ring is tight in the fuze well.
2. Make sure the fuze is in the safe position. Red and black should not be visible on the gag rod
sleeve.
3. Verify that the low drag arm/delay (top) is positioned to the X-position.
4. Verify that the high drag arm/delay time (bottom) is set as directed.

Arming Safety Switch

Remove, inspect, and install the Mk 122 arming safety switch as follows:
1. Remove the Mk 122 arming safety switch and retaining ring from the package.
2. Inspect the Mk 122 arming safety switch coaxial cable, connector, and lanyard are clean and
not damaged.
3. Verify the shelf/service life has not expired.

NOTE
Separation of coaxial cable plastic sheathing from the case
is acceptable. Any cut, broken, nicked, frayed or corroded
strands of the wire over-braid is cause for rejection of the
Mk 122 switch.

13-7
4. Check the coaxial cable for cracks and breaks in the insulation, and be careful not to stress the
coaxial cable.

WARNING
Do not pull the Mk 122 switch lanyard during handling. If
the lanyard pin breaks away from switch, discard entire Mk
122 switch so that it will not be used on a bomb. Do not
attempt to replace the lanyard pin.

CAUTION
The lanyard magnet wire is properly routed when it goes
through the holes of the arming safety switch and the ends
twisted together. If the magnet wire passes through or over
the lanyard pin, it is improperly routed and may cause the
weapon to dud.

5. Verify magnet wire holding the lanyard pin in the switch is properly routed and not broken.
6. Inspect retaining ring for damaged.
7. Install the Mk 122 safety arming switch as follows:
a. Plug the male connector of the switching unit firmly into the bomb charging receptacle,
piercing the diaphragm. Then, slide the switching unit retaining nut (threads down) over the
cable and lanyard.

CAUTION
Failure to properly orient the Mk 122 arming safety switch
can cause weapons to dud.

CAUTION
Do not pry tools or any other objects between the coaxial
cable and the lanyard pin to hold the orientation of the
safety switch while tightening the retaining nut. Doing so
may damage the safety switch, causing the bomb to dud.

b. Orient the coaxial cable aft of the lanyard pin on the longitudinal axis of the bomb body.
c. Ensuring the orientation of the Mk 122 arming safety switch, screw the retaining nut into the
bomb (Figure 13-6) and tighten with the spanner wrench provided with safety switches.

13-8
 Figure 13-6 — Mk 122 arming safety switch installation.

CAUTION
Take special care to prevent damage to the coaxial cable
and lanyard of the Mk 122 arming safety switch during
bomb moving and loading operations.

d. Insert the free end of the cable through the nearest bomb suspension lug to safeguard the
cable.

Assembly of Conical Fin to the Bomb Body

Prepare, inspect, and install a conical fin (Figure 13-7) as follows:
1. (Mk 80 series) Check that the setscrews are not damaged, corroded, or missing. Ensure that
setscrews are positioned so as not to interfere with the fin installation on the bomb.
2. (Bomb stabilizing unit (BSU)-33) Ensure that the clamping ring, nut, and bolt are not damaged
or corroded. Make sure the clamping ring is extended so as not to interfere with the fin
installation on the bomb.
3. The arming wire hole bushings should not be missing or plugged.
4. The arming wire guide should not be bent, damaged, or plugged.
5. The index pin should not be bent or damaged.
6. The cover plate must not be missing or damaged.
7. (BSU-33A/B) Inspect the cover fasteners for looseness. If loose, replace the speed nut.
8. Fins should not be damaged or corroded. Open the access cover. Verify that there are no
cracks in skin around access hole. Secure the access cover.

13-9
 Figure 13-7 — Mk 80(series) and BSU-33 conical fins.
9. (BSU-33) The fin wedge and rivets must not be loose, missing, or damaged. Fin drain holes
must not be plugged.
10. (BSU-33A/B) Ensure that airborne weapons bulletins (AWBs) have been incorporated. If not,
incorporate per applicable technical WAM.
Install the fin as follows:
1. Align the fin behind the bomb body with the fin in the X-configuration.

CAUTION
(FMU-139(series) fuze) If the safing pin has been
withdrawn from the gag rod or red-and-black striping is not
visible on the gag rod sleeve (sleeve not extended), the
fuze is safe.

2. Align the index pin on the fin with the hole in the bomb body and press the fin against the
bomb body.

WARNING
Setscrews must seat firmly in the V-groove of the bomb
body to ensure proper mating of the bomb fin.

NOTE
Bombs may be flown with one cracked setscrew as long as
all setscrews are seated in the V-groove of the bomb body.
If a setscrew is cracked during the fin installation, mark the
location of the cracked setscrew. If the bomb is not
expended, place the bomb in ready service and expend as
soon as possible.

13-10
 3. (Conical) Tighten setscrews into the V-groove in the bomb.

CAUTION
Do not exceed the torque value; breakage of screws or
components is highly possible.

NOTE
All BSU-33 fins prior to lot number EB 0870-002 through
EB 0870-025 require torqueing, unless the nut has been
replaced by a nylon nut which does not require torque.

4. (BSU-33) Tighten the clamp bolt; ensure that the fin clamping ring contacts within the V-groove
of the bomb body for a full 360 degrees.
5. Mark the following information on the fin:

NOTE
If installing an FMU-139(series) fuze, specify FMU-139B/B
or FMU-139C/B.

a. Type of fuze and date installed.

b. Fuze delay time.
c. That the fuze safety pin is removed.
d. Current date and inspector’s initials.
Perform post-assembly inspection as follows:
1. (Conical) Shake the fin to ensure that it is secured to the bomb. The fin should be in the X-
configuration, and the setscrews should be tight.
2. (BSU-33) Shake the fin and make sure it is in the X-configuration. The retaining band and
clamp bolt should be secure.
3. Make sure that the gag rod safety pin has been removed.
4. Ensure that the access cover is secure.
5. Make sure that the fuze data is marked on the fin.

Assembly of BSU-85 and BSU-86 Fins to GP Bombs

Inspect BSU-85 fin as follows:
1. If a component has been dropped, refer to applicable manuals for disposition.
2. Verify that the shelf/service life has not expired.
3. Make sure the safing pin assembly, safety latch pin, and lanyard clip are properly installed
(Figure 13-8).
4. Viewing the retarder from the open attachment end, check that the rubber boots are secure
and not damaged.

13-11
 Figure 13-8 — BSU-85/B air-inflatable, retardable fin.
5. Ensure that the fuze lanyard assembly is stowed and the pressure vent cap is closed.
6. Make sure the lanyard assembly is not damaged or corroded, and the lanyard swivel assembly
is attached to the stowage spring clip.

NOTE
The retarder lanyard clip fits loosely in the release latch
when the latch safing assembly is installed.

7. Check to be sure the safety latch is installed over aft cover tang, the release latch pivot pin is
not damaged, and the cotter pin is installed.
8. Check the service life by visual inspection. When a component is stored in original
shipping/storage container, the shelf life is 20 years. Service life is generally 1 year after
exposure to adverse environmental conditions; however, service life may be extended by
visual inspection prior to use. Shelf/Service life shall not exceed 20 years from the date of
manufacture under any circumstances. Inspection criteria for service life extension include the
following:
a. Check the condition of external surface for problems such as corrosion (e.g., red/brownish
rust), cracks, bent fins, or dents deeper than 1/4 inch. Pay special attention to the lanyard
assembly, wire cable, and aft end housing.
13-12
 b. Check for missing parts, such as screws, fin wedges, and lanyard assembly.
c. Check to see if the aft housing is removed from the stabilizer or if the nylon retainer is
extended/pulled from the housing.
Inspect the BSU-86 fin as follows:
1. Verify that the shelf life has not expired.

NOTE
The presence of rust and/or corrosion on the fin surface is
acceptable as long as it does not impair the fit or function
and the nomenclature is legible. Scratches and nicks
reduce fin safety, reliability, and use. Missing a lot number
or if the lot number is unknown is acceptable.

2. Inspect the fin for damage, improper installation, or missing parts and corrosion. If damaged,
improperly installed, missing parts, or corroded, exercise the fin as follows:
a. Ensure that retaining band and lanyard break link are free of corrosion (Figure 13-9).
b. Ensure that the fin release band knuckle rests firmly against release band lever cam with
no gap and that there is tension on the lanyard safety clip.
c. Remove the lanyard safety clip from the retention band latch.

WARNING
The fin retaining band and fin are spring-loaded. Release
the band with caution.

NOTE
All fins should open under the force of the fin spring
pressure and gravity alone until the aft end of the shock
absorber assembly rests against the clevis.

d. Remove the warning tag assembly from the fin latch and ensure that the latch opens freely.
e. If the latch does not open freely, open the latch manually to inspect and clean the fin. Do
not use inoperative fins.
f. Exercise the fin blades through their full motion several times to ensure that all loose dirt,
sand, and debris is removed from the parts.
g. Ensure that the fin release band is clean and not deformed.
h. Check that link pins and link pin retainers are present, not damaged, and properly
positioned in the drag links.
i. Close the fins and clamp together with vise grip pliers.
j. Relatch the release band and insert the warning tag assembly into the hole without the
brass grommet.
k. Remove the vise grip pliers.

13-13
 Figure 13-9 — BSU-86 bomb fin.
l. Ensure that the band, retainer, and release assembly are not damaged.

NOTE
Safety clips should not exceed 3/8 inch in length.

m. Check to see that the release lanyard and housing are not damaged; verify that the safety
clip is 3/8 inch in length from tip to spring and is not damaged. Ensure that the lanyard
swivel is installed in stowage clip.

NOTE
If aluminum setscrews (flat-blade drive) are installed, they
must be replaced with steel setscrews.

13-14
 n. Ensure that the setscrews are installed and flush within the side surface of the forward ring
so as not to interfere with fin installation on the bomb.
Install BSU-86 and BSU-85/B fins as follows:
1. Unless the BSU-86 fin is to be used on a Mk 82/BLU-111 live loaded tactical depth bomb,
ensure that the eight setscrews are made of steel.
2. (BSU-85) Open the vent cap.
3. Align the fin behind the bomb body with the fin in the X-configuration.

CAUTION
(FMU-139(series) fuze) If the safing pin has been
withdrawn from the gag rod-and-red or black striping is not
visible on the gag rod sleeve (sleeve not extended), the
fuze is safe.

4. (BSU-85) Align the index pin with the hole in the bomb body at the 12 o’clock position and
press the fin against the bomb body.
5. (BSU-86) Align the fin behind the bomb body in the X-configuration so that the index pin in the
fin support aligns with the hole at the 9 o’clock position.

WARNING
Setscrews must seat firmly in the V-groove of the bomb to
ensure the proper mating of the bomb fin.

NOTE
Bombs may be flown with one cracked setscrew as long as
all setscrews are seated in the V-groove of the bomb body.
If a setscrew is cracked during the fin installation, mark the
location of the cracked setscrew. If the bomb is not
expended, place the bomb in ready service and expend as
soon as possible.

6. Tighten the setscrews into the V-groove in the bomb.

7. (BSU-85) Remove the access cover and, if applicable, inspect the arming wire. Alternately pull
the wire from the top and bottom of the retarder.
8. (BSU-85) Reinstall the access cover.
9. (BSU-85) Ensure that the lanyard clip and safety latch pin are installed and that the safety pin
assembly is removed.
10. (BSU-86) Install the fin release safety clip into the retaining band latch and verify the 3/8-inch
length from tip to spring.
11. (BSU-86) Remove the fin safing pin assembly.

13-15
 12. Mark the following information on the fin:

NOTE
If installing an FMU-139(series) fuze, specify FMU-139B/B
or FMU-139C/B.

a. Type of fuze and date installed.

b. Fuze delay time.
c. That the fuze safety pin is removed.
d. Current date and inspector’s initials.
Perform post-assembly inspection as follows:
1. Shake the fin to ensure that the fin is secured to the bomb; the fin should be in the X-
configuration, and all setscrews should be tight.
2. Verify that the gag rod safety pin is removed.
3. (BSU-86) Ensure that the safety clip is properly installed into the retaining band latch and it is
not damaged.
4. (BSU-86) Ensure that the safety pin is removed from the release band.
5. (BSU-85) Be sure the lanyard clip and safety latch pin are installed.
6. (BSU-85) Make sure the fin safing pin assembly is removed.
7. (BSU-85) Ensure that the access cover is installed and secured.
8. Verify that the fuze data is marked on the fin.
For more information about the configuration and assembly procedures for GP bombs, consult the
Airborne Weapons Assembly Manual, Mk 80/BLU Series General Purpose Bombs, Mk 77 Fire Bombs
and Practice Bombs, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command (NAVAIR) 11-140-5.

SUBCALIBER PRACTICE BOMBS

The practice bombs normally used on a routine basis are the Mk 76 Modification (Mod) 5 and the
bomb dummy unit (BDU)-48. These practice bombs are discussed briefly in the following paragraphs.

Mk 76 Practice Bomb
The Mk 76 practice bomb (Figure 13-10) is prepared for aircraft loading as discussed in the following
steps:
1. Remove the bomb from the container.
2. Verify that the Mk 14 suspension lug is present and serviceable.
3. Inspect fins and welds for damage.
4. Inspect the bomb body for damage.
5. Remove the cotter pin and Mk 1 firing pin assembly from the nose. Inspect it for rust and
deformation. Ensure that the firing pin cup is not deformed and the firing pin point is below the
lip of its cup.

13-16
 WARNING
Be extremely careful when handling a practice bomb
loaded with a signal. Jarring or dropping the bomb may
detonate the signal. Do not, under any circumstances, point
either end of the bomb toward another person. Personnel
must not place their bodies in line with the nose or tail end
of a bomb.

Figure 13-10 — Mk 76 Mod 5 practice bomb.

6. Inspect the blast tube for rust and obstructions. Clean as required. When any obstructions are
noted, proceed as follows:
a. Insert a plug gauge into the center cavity. The gauge should slide into place until the
shoulder rests flush against the bomb. If the gauge shoulder does not rest against the
bomb, the cavity is not clear. If the obstruction cannot be removed, reject the bomb as
unserviceable, and dispose of it by following current instructions.

WARNING
A signal cartridge must not be swollen or deformed in any
manner. The primer must be flush with or slightly below the
base of the cartridge. If you attempt to install a deformed
signal, it can cause detonation. Use extreme care when you
handle a signal cartridge. When a practice bomb is not
used after the signal has been installed, gently remove the
signal and place it in the original shipping container. The
cartridge can be reloaded and used later. Do not apply
pressure to force the signal cartridge or the firing pin
assembly into the bomb because the assembly could
become deformed and fire the signal.

7. With the firing pin assembly removed, elevate the nose of the bomb. Insert the Mk 4 or CXU-
3A/B practice bomb signal (primer end up) into the nose of the practice bomb. Slide it gently
into place. Do not use force. The base flange of the signal cartridge must rest on the bore
shoulder, which is about 1 1/4 inches inward from the nose of the bomb.

13-17
 8. Carefully insert the firing pin assembly with the firing pin end toward the signal.
9. Rotate the firing pin assembly so that the two notches in the lip of the forward cup line up with
the cotter pin holes in the nose end of the bomb. Do not apply pressure to the firing pin during
this procedure.
10. Insert the cotter pin through the pinholes in the bomb body. Pass it through the notches in the
firing pin assembly. Spread the ends of the cotter pin just enough to retain it in place.

BDU-48 Practice Bomb

The BDU-48 practice bomb (Figure 13-11) is prepared for aircraft loading, as discussed in the
following steps:

NOTE
The warnings discussed for the Mk 76 Mod 5 also apply to
the BDU-48.

1. Remove the bomb assembly from the container.

2. Verify that the retractable lug is present and operable.
3. Inspect fins and fin welds for damage.
4. Inspect the bomb body for damage.

Figure 13-11 — BDU-48/B practice bomb.

5. Remove the cotter pin and firing pin assembly and inspect for rust or deformation.
6. Inspect the blast tube for rust and deformation. Insert plug gauge to make sure the cavity is
clear. Clean as required.
7. Insert the signal into the sleeve. With the firing device removed, elevate the nose of the bomb.
Insert the Mk 4 or CXU-3A/B practice bomb signal (primer end up) and slide it gently into
place. Do not use force. The base flange of the signal cartridge must rest on the bore shoulder.
8. Carefully insert the firing pin assembly into the nose of the bomb.
9. Align the firing pin assembly notches with the two holes in the nose end of the bomb. Insert the
cotter pin through the holes in bomb body, and spread the end of the cotter pin just enough to
remain in place.
For detailed information concerning the preparation of practice bombs for aircraft loading, refer to the
Airborne Weapons Assembly Manual Mk 80/BLU Series General Purpose Bombs, Fire Bombs and
Practice Bombs, NAVAIR 11-140-5.

13-18
FULL-SCALE PRACTICE BOMBS (BDU-45)
Preparation and inspection of BDU-45 (Figure 13-12) full-scale practice bombs are the same as the
GP bombs discussed earlier with the exceptions described in the following section.

Figure 13-12 — BDU-45/B (typical) practice bomb.

The spotting charge receptacles must be checked to ensure that they are clean, free of foreign
material and moisture, and not deformed.

CXU-4/B Spotting Charge

Prepare, inspect, and install the CXU-4/B spotting charge as follows:
1. Check the spotting charge for damage or leakage.
2. Ensure that the retaining ring and spring washer are present.
3. Install the spring washer at the base of the spotting charge receptacle.
4. Slide the spotting charge into the receptacle and secure with the retaining ring (pliers may be
required).

OGIVE/MXU-735 Nose Plug

Inspect and install the nose plug as follows:

CAUTION
Inert MK 80(series) and BDU-45/B practice bombs may be
flown without support cups and steel nose plugs; however,
plastic shipping plugs must also be removed due to
potential foreign object damage (FOD) hazard.

1. Ensure that components have been unpackaged and inspected. Inspect for corrosion and
ensure that the threads are not damaged.
2. (Ogive) Install the support cup.

13-19
 CAUTION
Do not exceed the torque value; breakage of screws or
components is highly possible.

3. (Ogive) Install the nose plug, tighten with a spanner wrench, and torque.
4. (MXU-735) The MXU-735 solid nose plug has a support cup attached. Install the nose plug,
tighten with a ratchet, and torque.
Perform the post-assembly inspection as follows:
1. Ensure that the Ogive/MXU-735 is tight in the nose fuze well.
2. Verify that the nose setscrew is tight.

Electric/Electronic Tail Fuzes

Procedures for inspection and installation of FMU-139(series) tail fuzes are the same as for GP
bombs, as outlined previously.

Mk 89 Mod 0 Spotting Charge Adapter

Prepare and inspect the Mk 89 spotting charge adapter (Figure 13-13) as follows:
1. Verify that the shelf/service life has not expired.

CAUTION
Do not remove setscrew or lockpin because parts could be
damaged or lost.

2. Remove the tape holding cotter pin with the instruction tag attached.
3. Remove the inertia sleeve and compression safety spring by unscrewing the firing pin head
from the adapter body.
4. Inspect all components, and reject adapter if any components are damaged.

13-20
 Figure 13-13 — Mk 89 Mod 0 bomb spotting charge adapter.

Mk 4 and CXU-3 Cartridge Installation

Install the signal cartridge in the spotting charge adapter as follows:
1. Insert the inertia sleeve into the cavity body.
2. Slide the cartridge through the inertia sleeve with the cartridge rim against the forward end of
the sleeve.

WARNING
Exercise extreme care when handling adapters with
cartridges installed. Drops of 18 inches can cause the
signals to function in improperly safed adapters. Do not
point the ends of the adapter toward personnel. Loading
personnel should work from the side and avoid standing in
line with either end of the adapter. Carry the loaded
adapters with the safety pins and instruction tags in a down
position to reduce the hazards if the units are dropped.

13-21
 3. Press the blocking pin inward until the safety pin presses through the second guide hole,
locking the blocking pin in place.
4. Insert the cotter pin through the outer set of holes in the head of the safety pin and safety pin
sleeve. Bend the leg of the cotter pin slightly to hold it in place.
5. Place the compression safety spring over the firing pin head into the adapter body and hand
tighten.

Mk 89 Spotting Charge Installation

Install the Mk 89 spotting charge adapter with the signal cartridge as follows:
1. Verify that the bomb tail well is clean.
2. Use a wooden dowel to bend over the electrical fuze connector in the fuze well to allow the Mk
89 to be installed.
3. Insert the adapter into the fuze well and tighten with a spanner wrench in the same manner as
electric fuzes.
Perform the post-assembly inspection as follows:
1. Verify that the safety pin is installed.
2. Ensure that the cartridge is installed in the adapter.
3. Ensure that the adapter is tight in the fuze well.
4. Ensure that the arming wire hole is vertically aligned with the bomb lugs (12 o’clock position).

NOTE
The procedures for inspection and installation of nose fuzes
and bomb fins are the same as those discussed previously
for GP bombs.

GUIDED BOMB UNITS 10/12/16/51(SERIES) (EXCEPT GBU-12F/B)

WEAPONS ASSEMBLY
Guided bomb units (GBUs) are Mk 80(series)/BLU-100(series) GP bombs with the physical
characteristics of GBU-10/12/16/51(series) which are GP bombs configured with a wing assembly
and a computer control group (CCG). The GBU-51 is configured in the same manner but uses the
BLU-126(series) low collateral damage (LOCO) bomb body.
Preparation and inspection of the GBU bomb body are the same as the GP bombs discussed earlier.
For training purposes, a brief list of the components that make up the type GBU is listed in Table 13-
2. Always verify the authorized weapons assembly by using the Laser Guided Bomb Weapon
Component Chart in the applicable WAM.
The following paragraphs describe typical weapons assembly for the GBU-10/12/16/51(series)
(except GBU-12F/B).

13-22
 Table 13-2 — Laser Guided Bomb Weapon Component Chart
AIRFOIL
WEAPON BOMB BODY CCG FUZE
GROUP (AFG)
Munitions adapter unit
(MAU)-169A/B
GBU-10D/B Mk 84/BLU-117 MXU-651(series) FMU-139(series)
Weapon control unit
(WCU)-10(series)
MAU-169(series)
(except MAU-169A/B)
GBU-12D/B Mk 82/BLU-111 MXU-650(series) FMU-139(series)
WCU-10(series)
MAU-209(series)
MAU-169A/B
GBU-16A/B Mk 83/BLU-110 MXU-667(series) FMU-139(series)
WCU-10(series)
MAU-169(series)
(except MAU-169A/B)
GBU-51/B BLU-126/B MXU-650(series) FMU-139(series)
WCU-10(series)
MAU-209(series)

MXU-667, MXU-650, and MXU-651 AFG Preparation and Inspection

Prepare and inspect airfoil groups (AFGs) as follows:
1. Verify that the AFG container anti-pilferage seal is installed and the locking ring is not
damaged.
2. Inspect for a broken or missing humidity indicator and/or pressure relief valve.
3. Verify that the humidity indicator is blue.

WARNING
Ensure that gloves and face shields are worn prior to de-
palletizing.

4. Cut and remove banding material using band cutters.

5. Inspect the container for dents, punctures, or cracks.
6. Ensure that container markings are not missing or illegible; stencil/restore markings per
Airborne Weapons and Associated Equipment Consumable Material Applications and
Hazardous Material Authorized Use List, NAVAIR 01-1A-75, prior to placing the container in
storage.
7. Open the pressure relief valve.
8. Cut and remove the anti-pilferage seal from locking ring bolt.
9. Remove the bolt, locking ring, and container lid.

13-23
 10. Remove the upper packing from the wing assembly and place the wing assembly on a suitable
support.
Inspect the AFG as follows:

WARNING
Wing assembly safety pins in latch release assembly and
collar of wing must remain in place during all maintenance.
Inadvertent release of wings can inflict serious personal
injury.

1. Verify that the safety pins and streamers are installed in the latch release lever and collar of
the wing assembly (Figure 13-14).
2. Verify that all parts and attaching hardware for the AFG are present (Figure 13-15). Use the
packing list that is included in the AFG container to verify parts and hardware.
3. Inspect components for dents, punctures, cracks, or other damage that can preclude its use.
Inspect all component threaded areas for damage.

Figure 13-14 — AFG forward adapter inspection.

13-24
 Figure 13-15 — AFG inspection.

NOTE
Do not treat a white, powdery coating on hardware in the
AFG (e.g., setscrews, fasteners, bolts, and helical spring)
as corrosion. Reject the AFG if the inner spring is corroded.

WARNING
If damper "C" clips are missing and the wing is released,
the damper rod can be shot from the wing.

13-25
 4. Reject the AFG if damper "C" clips (Figure 13-16) are damaged or missing.

Figure 13-16 — Damper “C” clips and wing clevis pin.

5. Reject the AFG if the wing clevis pins or clevis pin “C” clips (Figure 13-16) are missing or
damaged.
6. Inspect all airfoil setscrew threads for nicks and burrs. If nicks or burrs will prevent assembly,
reject the setscrew and replace. Install setscrews in the wing assembly.
7. Verify that the wing assembly is free of dents, which can prevent the proper function of the
wing assembly.
8. Inspect the arming cables for broken wire strands, kinks, sharp bends, corrosion, or frayed
ends. Reject when any of the above conditions are found. For MXU-650 use on the improved
triple ejector rack (ITER), ensure that the arming cable is available for fin release.
9. Insert packing material and retrograde material into the container.
10. Install the container lid and locking ring; close the pressure relief valve.
11. Inspect AFG components for cleanliness and surface corrosion.

Wing Assembly Installation

MXU-667, MXU-650 and MXU-651 Installation
Install the AFG as follows:
1. Ensure that the setscrews do not protrude beyond the inner surface of the wing assembly
annular ring. If required, back the setscrews out to ensure clearance.

13-26
 WARNING
Inadvertent release of wing can inflict serious personal
injury. The wing assembly is heavy. Two persons should lift
and support the assembly during installation. Injury may
occur from strain or from dropping.

2. (MXU-667, MXU-650 parent rack) Position the wings on the bomb body in the X-configuration
with the wing release latch mechanism at 9 o’clock (viewed from rear), with the bomb lugs at
12 o’clock (Figure 13-17).
3. (MXU-651 parent rack, MXU-650 ITER) Position the wing on the bomb body in the X-
configuration with the wing release latch mechanism at 12 o’clock (viewed from rear), with the
bomb lugs at 12 o’clock (Figure 13-17).

Figure 13-17 — MXU-667, MXU-651, and MXU-650 for ITER wing assembly.
4. Ensure that the safety pins are securely installed in the latch release lever and collar of
assembly (Figure 13-17).
5. Remove the safing pin from the gag rod.
6. Press the wing assembly so that it is tight against bomb body.

13-27
 7. Tighten the setscrews to the prescribed torque in accordance with the assembly manual.

CAUTION
Do not exceed the torque value; breakage of screws or
components is highly possible.

8. Mark the following information on the wing assembly:

NOTE
If installing an FMU-139(series) fuze, specify FMU-139B/B
or FMU-139C/B.

a. Type of fuze/decal and date installed.

b. Fuze functioning delay.
c. That the fuze safety pin is removed.
d. Current date and inspector’s initials.

Forward Adapter Assembly Installation

Retainer bolt installation
Install the retainer bolt as follows:
1. Ensure that the point of the setscrew does not obstruct the nose fuze well threads.
2. Place the O-ring on the external threads of the retainer bolt.
3. Install the retainer bolt only into the nose fuze well (Figure 13-18 and Figure 13-19).

Figure 13-18 — Forward adapter assembly with fuze retainer and bolt.

13-28
 4. Tighten the retainer bolt to the prescribed torque in accordance with the assembly manual
using a special torque wrench, torque multiplier ratchet adapter, and wrench adapter (Figure
13-20).
5. Reset and tighten the setscrew in the nose fuze well lock hole to the prescribed torque in
accordance with the assembly manual.

Figure 13-19 — Retainer bolt. Figure 13-20 — Torque multiplier ratchet

adapter.
Computer Control Group Installation
MAU-169(Series), MAU-209(Series), and WCU-10(Series) CCG Preparation and Inspection
Prepare CCGs as follows:
1. Visually inspect the container for damage.
2. Verify that the CCG has not been restricted from issue.
3. Position the loaded shipping container for convenient access.
4. Inspect the humidity indicator. A blue condition is normal. A pink condition indicates that the
CCG has been subjected to abnormal humidity conditions. Pay particular attention when
inspecting contents for moisture damage.

WARNING
Sealed container unit (CNU)-288/E and CNU-203/E
containers may contain internal air pressure; failure to
equalize internal/external pressure prior to opening the
container cover latches may result in injury.
The CNU-317/E container does not have a pressure relief
valve; use caution when opening cover to prevent injury.

13-29
5. (CNU-288/E and CNU-203/E) Depress the pressure relief valve until internal and external
pressures are equalized.
6. Remove the anti-pilferage seals from the container.
7. Release the container cover latches and remove the cover of container.

WARNING
(Except MAU-169H/B and later and MAU-209(series)) The
thermal battery firing pin assembly safety wire/clip must be
secure during all maintenance. Otherwise, the thermal
battery may be fired, causing the activation of the hot-gas
generator and the release of gases and heat, which can
cause injury. If inadvertently ignited, the hot-gas generator
will emit extremely high-temperature, high-pressure
exhaust gases, which will vent around the guidance fin
sockets and the control section fittings. The area around
the adapter collar and the internal components will be hot to
the touch. In the event of ignition, WALK AWAY from the
CCG until the venting stops. Allow the components to cool
before handling. The gas is non-toxic; however, avoid
breathing the vented gases.
(MAU-169H/B and later and MAU-209(series)) The thermal
battery firing pin assembly safety wire/clip must be secure
during all maintenance. Otherwise, the thermal battery may
be fired, causing the activation of the gas system and
system battery, which will emit extremely high
temperatures. Allow the components to cool before
handling.

8. Check to ensure that the thermal battery safety wire/clip is secure in thermal battery firing pin
assembly (Figure 13-21). Secure, if required. Verify that the brass shear pin(s) or epoxy seal is
present; if not, reject the CCG. Verify that the pull-out pin and safety wire/clip (Figure 13-21)
are installed in thermal battery firing pin assembly. If the safety wire/clip is missing, replace it. If
both the safety wire/clip and pull-out pin are missing, reject the CCG.
9. Check to ensure that the detector dome protective cover and protective packing ring are
present and installed. If required, replace the protective cover and packing ring.

CAUTION
The detector dome is made of a plastic material that is
easily damaged. Scratches or damage to the detector
dome may result in performance degradation.

10. Remove the CCG from the container and place it on a suitable support stand.
11. If the packing is wet, allow the packing and container to dry.
12. If the packing is damaged, replace the packing.

13-30
 Figure 13-21 — CCG in container.
13. Install the cover on the container and secure the latches.
14. If the container is not to be reused immediately, identify the container as empty, or identify the
actual contents in accordance with standard operating procedures; return the container to
storage.
Inspect the CCGs as follows:
For the following inspection procedures, refer to Figure 13-22 and Figure 13-23.
1. If the component has been dropped, refer to applicable instructions for disposition.
2. Verify that the shelf/service life has not expired.
3. Verify that the pull-out pin, brass shear pin(s) or epoxy seal, and safety clip are installed in the
thermal battery firing pin assembly. If the safety clip is missing, replace it. If both the safety clip
and pull-out pin are missing, reject the CCG. If the brass shear pin is missing, reject the CCG.
4. Verify that the detector dome protective cover and packing are installed. Replace the
components if missing.
5. Verify that the screws are installed and visually tight. Secure any loose screws. Reject the unit
if any screws are missing.

13-31
 Figure 13-22 — CCG inspection.

NOTE
If proper torque values are obtained on the computer
section screws and the computer section remains loose,
reject the CCG.

6. Inspect for punctures or cracks. Reject the unit if it is found deficient.

7. Inspect for dents. Reject any CCGs with dents.
8. Inspect for missing, loose, or corroded hardware. Remove corrosion. Reject if hardware is
missing.
9. Remove the detector dome cover and packing.
10. Verify that the detector dome moves freely on gimbals. Verify that the snap ring is present on
the pin-securing ringtail to gimbals. Reject the CCG if detector dome movement is tight or
binds, or if the snap ring is missing.
11. Inspect the detector ringtail. Reject the CCG if the ringtail shows any damage.
12. Ensure that the detector dome is clean and free of smudges or fingerprints. If the detector
dome is not clean and free of smudges or fingerprints, clean per the WAM.

13-32
 Figure 13-23 — CCG thermal battery firing pin and PRF switch inspection.

NOTE
A frosty optic dome is not cause for rejection unless the
internal parts cannot be seen.

13. Ensure that the optic dome does not have any cracks or breaks through the dome thickness.
Check to make sure no portions of the dome are missing and/or contain abrasions or pits that
prevent seeing the internal parts. Reject if defective.
14. (Except MAU-169H/B and later and MAU-209) Inspect the humidity indicator ring inside the
detector optic assembly for moisture. Ensure that the indicator sections match the green or
blue-green of the segment marked GOOD. If the indicator has turned yellow or tan, reject the
unit and return to the designated issuing activity.
15. Install the detector dome cover and packing.
16. Inspect helical coils in the guidance fin shaft sockets for presence and serviceability.
17. Ensure that the exterior surfaces of the CCG are free of dirt, grease, corrosion, fungus, or
mold. If the CCG exterior surfaces are dirty, clean per the WAM.
18. Remove the control section seal (dust cover).
19. Inspect the interior of the control section for corrosion, looseness, missing hardware, and
evidence of discoloration or heat damage to gas grain generator or thermal battery.
20. Reinstall the control section seal (dust cover).
21. Verify that the nitrogen plug is installed. Reject if missing.
13-33
 22. Verify that the O-ring under the nitrogen plug is not extruded, deformed, or missing. If so, reject
the CCG.
23. Ensure that the test receptacle cover is installed, secured, and not damaged. If damaged,
replace the cover.
24. (MAU-209) Verify that the electromagnetic interference (EMI) gasket is not missing, extruded,
or damaged.

CAUTION
Take care when exercising pulse repetition frequency
(PRF) (MAU-169, MAU-209, and WCU-10) and weapon
type (WCU-10) switches to ensure that the switch stop
limits are not exceeded. Exceeding switch stops limits will
damage the knob setscrew, causing loss of the switch knob
or inaccurate switch settings.

NOTE
(WCU-10 and MAU-169) Missing switch knobs are not
cause for rejection. Use the GBU-CCG switch key to
exercise switches.
(MAU-169H/B or later and MAU-209(series)) The PRF code
second switch has a long last pulse logic (LLPL) and a
short last pulse logic (SLPL) side. Use the LLPL side unless
otherwise directed.

25. (WCU-10(series)) Ensure that the weapon type switch is in the standard laser guided bomb
(STD LGB) position.
26. Rotate PRF switches to all positions to ensure that the contacts are clean. (MAU-169H/B and
L/B) If switch knobs turn freely, remove the knobs per the WAM and use the GBU-CCG switch
key to exercise switches.

CCG Installation Procedures

Install the forward adapter assembly on the nose of the bomb body as follows:

NOTE
The MXU-735 solid nose plug is an acceptable alternate for
the fuze retaining nut and the fuze seal nut.

1. Screw the fuze retainer nut into the retainer bolt until approximately 1/4 inch of the threads on
the retainer bolt are visible.

13-34
 WARNING
The fuze seal nut must be properly installed in the retainer
bolt to prevent bomb detonation when the hot-gas
generator in the control section is ignited.

2. Install the fuze seal nut in the retainer bolt (Figure 13-24). The nut must be flush with or below
the forward surface of the retainer bolt.
3. Tighten the fuze seal nut setscrew.

Figure 13-24 — Fuze seal nut.

4. Place the open end of the forward adapter (Figure 13-18) over the nose of the bomb body.
Align the arming wire guide with the suspension lugs on the bomb body.
5. Install the clamp ring onto the retainer bolt. Back out the setscrew to prevent assembly
interference.

NOTE
Ensure that the proper orientation of the forward adapter
assembly arming wire guide is aligned with the suspension
lugs and is maintained while the clamp ring is being
torqued.

13-35
 CAUTION
Do not exceed the torque value; breakage of screws or
components is highly possible.

6. Tighten the clamp ring to the prescribed torque, in accordance with the assembly manual,
using the wrench adapter (Figure 13-25).

Figure 13-25 — Clamp ring installation, torque clamp ring.

7. Verify that the arming wire guide is aligned with the suspension lugs of the bomb body.
8. Tighten the clamp ring setscrew to the prescribed torque in accordance with the assembly
manual (Figure 13-26).
Install the CCG on the forward adapter assembly as follows:
1. Remove the control section seal, if present.
2. Align the thermal battery firing pin assembly with the arming wire guide on the forward adapter.
3. Install four bolts through the CCG mounting hole and forward adapter.
4. Tighten the bolts to the prescribed torque in accordance with the assembly manual.
5. Spray the guidance fin retaining screw with the military lubricant standard (MIL-L)-23389, dry
film lubricant, per the Airborne Weapons and Associated Equipment Consumable Material
Applications and Hazardous Material Authorized Use List, NAVAIR 01-1A-75.

13-36
 Figure 13-26 — Clamp ring setscrew torque.

MAU-169(Series), MAU-209(Series), and WCU-10(Series) Final Post-Assembly Inspection

Perform the CCG post assembly inspection:
1. Ensure that the forward adapter assembly is secured to the bomb body and the CCG is
secured to the forward adapter assembly. Ensure that there is no excessive movement
between the CCG sections.
2. Make sure the arming wire guide is aligned with the suspension lugs on the bomb body.
3. Ensure that the thermal battery firing pin assembly is aligned with the arming wire guide on the
forward adapter.

CAUTION
Take care when exercising the weapon type switch to
ensure that the switch stop limits are not exceeded.
Exceeding the switch stop limits will damage the knob
setscrew, causing loss of the switch knob or inaccurate
switch settings.

4. (WCU-10(series)) Ensure that the weapon type switch is in the STD LGB position.
5. Inspect the CCG for a loose computer section. If the computer section is loose, perform the
following steps:
a. Loosen four (MAU-169/WCU-10) or eight (MAU-209) computer section screws 1/2 turn
each.

CAUTION
Do not exceed the torque value; breakage of screws or
components is highly possible.

13-37
 b. Using a crossing pattern, tighten each screw incrementally to the prescribed torque, in
accordance with the assembly manual, until the computer section is no longer loose.
c. If the computer section is still loose after reaching maximum torque value, remove the CCG
and replace with another CCG.
6. Install guidance fins and ensure that there is free movement with no binding. Remove
guidance fins and set aside in appropriate armament weapons support equipment (AWSE) to
be included with the weapon when the weapon is transported or issued for use.

GBU-12F/B and GBU-52/B Dual Mode Laser Guided Bomb (DMLGB) Weapons
Assembly
The following paragraphs describe the typical assembly information for the GBU-12F/B and GBU-
52/B DMLGB weapons.
Inspect and prepare the BLU-111 bomb body for GBU-12F/B configuration or the BLU-126 bomb
body for the GBU-52/B configuration as previously described.
Inspect and prepare the FMU-139(series) fuze as previously described.
Inspect and prepare the MXU-650 AFG as previously described.

Weapons Guidance Unit Preparation and Inspection

Prepare the weapons guidance unit (WGU)-53/B as follows:
1. Visually inspect the container for damage.
2. Verify that the WGU-53/B has not been restricted from issue.
3. Position the loaded shipping container for convenient access.
4. Inspect the humidity indicator. A blue condition is normal. A pink condition indicates that the
WGU has been subjected to abnormal humidity conditions. Pay particular attention when
inspecting contents for moisture damage.

WARNING
The CNU-317A/E container does not have a pressure relief
valve; use caution when opening the cover to prevent
injury.

5. Remove anti-pilferage seals from the container.

6. Release the container cover latches.
7. Remove the cover of the container.

CAUTION
Do not handle the WGU by the detector or ringtail. Such
handling can damage the detector, resulting in performance
degradation.

8. Remove the WGU from container and place on a suitable support stand. Remove the adapter
group components from the container (Figure 13-27 and Figure 13-28).

13-38
 WARNING
The thermal battery firing pin assembly safety wire/clip
must be secure during all maintenance. Otherwise, the
thermal battery may be fired, causing activation of the gas
system and the system battery, which will emit extremely
high temperatures. Allow the components to cool before
handling.

Figure 13-27 — WGU-53/B unpacking.

13-39
 Figure 13-28 — WGU-53/B adapter component unpacking.
9. Check that the thermal battery safety wire/clip is secure in the thermal battery firing pin
assembly. Secure, if required. Verify that the brass shear pin(s) or epoxy seal is present. If not,
reject the WGU. Verify that the pull-out pin and safety wire/clip are installed in the thermal
battery firing pin assembly. If the safety wire/clip is missing, replace it. If both the safety
wire/clip and pull-out pin are missing, reject the WGU.
10. Check that the detector dome protective cover and protective packing ring are present and
installed. If required, replace the protective cover and packing ring.

CAUTION
The detector dome is made of a plastic material that is
easily damaged. Scratches or damage to the detector
dome may result in performance degradation.

11. If not already done, install the safety clip on the battery firing device (BFD).

13-40
Refer to Figure 13-29 through Figure 13-31
for additional information pertaining to the
following paragraphs.
Inspect WGUs as follows:
1. If the component has been dropped,
refer to the applicable WAM for
disposition.
2. Verify that the shelf/service life has
not expired.
3. Verify that the pull-out pin, epoxy
seal, and safety clip (Figure 13-29
and Figure 13-30) are installed in
the thermal battery firing pin
assembly.
4. If the safety clip is missing, replace
it. If both the safety clip and pull-out
pin are missing, reject the WGU.
5. Verify that the detector dome
protective cover and packing is
installed. Replace if missing.
6. Verify that the screws are installed
and visually tight. Secure any loose
screws. Reject unit if the screws are
missing.
Figure 13-29 — WGU-53/B inspection.
7. Inspect for punctures or cracks.
Reject the unit if it is deficient.

Figure 13-30 — WGU-53/B epoxy seal and safety clip inspection.

13-41
 Figure 13-31 — WGU-53/B adapter group components.
8. Inspect for dents. Reject any WGUs with dents.
9. Inspect for missing, loose, or corroded hardware. Remove corrosion. Reject if hardware is
missing.
10. Remove the detector dome cover/packing.
11. Verify that the detector dome moves freely on gimbals. Reject the WGU if the detector dome
movement is tight or binds.
12. Inspect the detector ringtail. Reject the WGU if the ringtail is warped or bent.
13. Ensure that the detector dome is clean and free of smudges or fingerprints. If the detector
dome is not clean and free of smudges or fingerprints, clean per the applicable WAM.
14. Ensure that the optic dome does not have any cracks or breaks through the dome thickness.
Ensure that portions of the dome are not missing, and/or that the dome does not have
abrasions or pits. Reject if defective.
15. Install the detector dome cover/packing.
16. Verify that the global positioning system (GPS) antennas (Figure 13-29) are clean. Verify that
there are no cracks in the domes. Minor marking is acceptable.
17. Ensure that the exterior surfaces of the WGU are free of dirt, grease, corrosion, fungus, or
mold. If the WGU exterior surfaces are dirty, clean in accordance with the WAM.
18. Verify that the interior of the control section is free of corrosion, loose or missing hardware, and
evidence of discoloration or heat damage to the thermal battery.
19. Verify that the nitrogen plug is installed. Reject if missing.
20. Verify that the O-ring under the nitrogen plug is not extruded, deformed, or missing. If so, reject
the WGU.

13-42
 21. Ensure that the test receptacle cover is installed, secured, and not damaged. If damaged,
replace it.
22. Verify that Department of Defense Interface Standard, (MIL-STD)-1760 connector is clean and
not damaged.
23. Rotate the PRF switches to all positions to ensure that the contacts are clean.
24. Verify that the BFD O-ring is present and the firing pin not loose. Apply a thin coat of silicone
compound to the BFD O-ring per the Airborne Weapons and Associated Equipment
Consumable Material Applications and Hazardous Material Authorized Use List, NAVAIR 01-
1A-75.
Inspect the adapter group components as follows:
1. Ensure that the connector housing assembly (Figure 13-31) is present, clean, and not
damaged.
2. Ensure that the cable assembly is present, clean, and not damaged. Ensure that the cable
connectors are clean and not damaged.
3. Ensure that the four strap assemblies are present, clean, and not damaged to the extent that
can preclude use. Ensure that the buckle straps turn easily.
4. Ensure that the aft and forward conduit assemblies are present and clean. Ensure all conduit
assemblies are not cracked or deformed, and that they do not have any other damage that can
preclude use.
5. Ensure that the connector fairing is present, clean, and not damaged. Ensure that the captive
screw is present, clean, and not damaged. Verify that there are no cracks in the casting around
the screw and rear strap slot.
6. Ensure that the adapter ring is present, clean, and not damaged. Ensure that the captive
screws are present, clean, and not damaged.
7. (AV-8 only) Ensure that the
Mk 6 Mod 2 suspension lugs
(black in color) are present,
clean, and not damaged.
If applicable, perform initiated built-in
test (IBIT) per the applicable WAM.

MXU-650 Installation
Install the AFG as follows:
1. Install the adapter ring aft of
the bomb body with the guide
pin in the 12 o’clock alignment
hole (Figure 13-32).
2. Ensure that the setscrews do
not protrude beyond the inner
surface of the wing assembly
annular ring. If required, back
the setscrews out to ensure
clearance. Figure 13-32 — Adapter ring installation.

13-43
 WARNING
Inadvertent release of the wing can inflict serious personal
injury.
The wing assembly is heavy. Use two persons to lift and
support the wing assembly during installation. Injury may
occur from strain or from dropping.

3. Position the wings on the bomb body in the X-configuration with the wing release latch
mechanism at 9 o’clock (viewed from rear), with the bomb lugs at 12 o’clock (Figure 13-33).
4. Ensure that the safety pins are securely installed in the latch release lever and collar of
assembly.
5. Press the wing assembly so that it is tight against bomb body.

Figure 13-33 — MXU-650 wing assembly.

CAUTION
Do not exceed the torque value; breakage of screws or
components is highly possible.

6. Tighten the setscrews to the prescribed torque in accordance with the assembly manual.
7. Mark the following information on the wing assembly:

NOTE
If installing an FMU-139(series) fuze, specify FMU-139B/B
or FMU-139C/B.

a. Type of fuze/decal and date installed.

b. Fuze functioning delay.
c. That the fuze safety pin is removed.

13-44
 d. Current date and inspector’s initials.

WGU-53/B Installation
Install the retainer bolt, fuze seal nut, and forward adapter assembly as described previously.
Install the WGU on the forward adapter assembly as follows:
1. Align the thermal battery firing pin assembly with the arming wire guide on the forward adapter.
2. Install four bolts through the WGU mounting hole and forward adapter.

CAUTION
Do not exceed the torque value; breakage of screws or
components is highly possible.

3. Tighten the bolts to the prescribed torque in accordance with the assembly manual.
Install the adapter group (Figure 13-34) as follows:
1. Ensure that the Department of Defense Interface Standard, MIL-STD-1760 connector on the
housing is in the Y-position. Ensure that the connector locking plungers are completely
engaged.
2. Secure the connector housing assembly via the two captive screws in the mounting ring.
Tighten— but do not torque—at this time.
3. Run an umbilical cable to the WGU and engage the connector until the jack screw is seated
and the red engagement stripe cannot be seen. Tighten to the prescribed torque in accordance
with the assembly manual.
4. Couple the rear and forward conduits.
5. Install the conduit sections over the cable and align with the connector housing cable exit.

NOTE
The aft-most strap must pass over the cable. The forward
three straps must pass under the cable.

6. Ensuring that the strap passes over the cable and not under, pass the large strap through the
rear conduit from the lug side and around the forward lip of the housing. Snug the strap with
the buckle near the conduit with the hex facing away from the lugs to hold the conduit in place,
but do not torque at this time. Place excess strap material through the conduit. Orientate such
that the excess material exits the conduit 1/4 to 1/2 inch so that its edge does not induce
damage to the cable during flight or transport.
7. Ensuring that the strap passes under the cable and not over, pass the large strap through the
front slots of the rear conduit from the lug side. Snug the strap with the buckle near the conduit
with the hex facing away from the lugs to hold conduit in place, but do not torque at this time.
Place excess strap material through the conduit. Orientate such that the excess material exits
the conduit 1/4 to 1/2 inch so that its edge does not induce damage to the cable during flight or
transport.
8. Ensuring that the strap passes under the cable and not over, pass the large strap through the
aft slots of the forward conduit from the lug side. Snug the strap with the buckle near the
13-45
 Figure 13-34 — Adapter group.
conduit with the hex facing away from the lugs to hold the conduit in place, but do not torque at
this time. Place excess strap material through the conduit. Orientate such that the excess
material exits the conduit 1/4 to 1/2 inch so that its edge does not induce damage to the cable
during flight or transport.
9. Ensure that the conduit runs straight from the connector housing to the forward connector
fairing.
10. Install the forward connector fairing and engage the captive fastener. Do not completely tighten
at this point.
11. Ensuring that the strap passes under the cable and not over, pass the small strap through the
forward cover and conduit from the lug side. Snug the strap with the buckle near the conduit
with the hex facing away from the lugs to hold the conduit in place, but do not torque at this
time.

13-46
 12. Ensure that the conduit runs straight from the connector housing to the connector cover. In a
sequential pattern from back to front, tighten the straps to the prescribed torque in accordance
with the assembly manual. Tighten the fairing screw to the prescribed torque in accordance
with the assembly manual. Repeat torque to all straps.
13. Tighten the two rear connector housing screws to the prescribed torque in accordance with the
assembly manual.
14. (AV-8 only) Remove the MS3314 lugs and replace with Mk 6 Mod 2 lugs. Bottom the lugs
completely and adjust out so that they are perpendicular to the bomb body.
An overview of the weapons and component assembly for the GBU-12F/B DMLGB is illustrated in
Figure 13-35.

Figure 13-35 — GBU-12F/B DMLGB.

JOINT DIRECT ATTACK MUNITIONS

There are several configurations or variants of the Joint Direct Attack Munition (JDAM) weapon. For
training purposes, it is not practical to list each one. The JDAM is briefly discussed previously in this
manual. The weapon component chart table lists components authorized for assembly of JDAM
variants. This chart can be found in Airborne Weapons Assembly Manual Guided Bomb Units
(GBUs), NAVAIR-11-140-10.
The following paragraphs discuss a typical weapons assembly of a GBU-31 version (V)2(series)
JDAM variant weapon and are for training purposes only.

GBU-31(V)2(Series) (Mk-84/BLU-117) Weapons Assembly

Component Unpackaging Inspection

CAUTION
Only configurations listed in the WAM JDAM weapon
component chart are authorized.

13-47
 1. Ensure that the bomb bodies (and if applicable, nose plugs) have been unpackaged and
inspected.
2. Ensure that the fuzes and fuzing components have been unpackaged and inspected.
3. Ensure that the KMU-556 (Figure 13-36) has been unpackaged and inspected.

Figure 13-36 — KMU-556(series) guidance set inspection.

GBU-31 Weapons Assembly

Ensure that the M74 cable has been removed.

NOTE
Assemble the tail assembly and aerosurface assembly as a
complete guidance set.

If applicable, inspect and install the Ogive/MXU-735 nose plug as follows:

1. (Ogive) Install the support cup into the nose fuze well.
2. (Ogive) Install the nose plug and tighten with a spanner wrench; tighten the nose setscrew to
the prescribed torque in accordance with the assembly manual.
3. (MXU-735) Install the nose plug and tighten with a drive ratchet; tighten the nose screw to the
prescribed torque in accordance with the assembly manual.

13-48
Install the FMU-139(series) and fuzing unit (FZU)-48/B as follows:
1. Set the fuze arm time and delay time to the desired settings per mission requirements.
2. If the fuze does not have a power cable attached, remove the shipping plug from the bottom of
the fuze and continue with the following steps:
a. Attach the cable connector to the fuze connector by using a clockwise locking action.
b. Ensure a positive lock.

CAUTION
When proximity sensors are not installed in the nose fuze
well, install a nose plug and support cup to prevent
instantaneous functioning/low order detonation of the
warhead upon impact.
Do not exceed the torque value; breakage of screws or
components is highly possible.

3. Verify that the shipping cap/pull clip or equivalent is installed on the end of the power cable.
4. Thread a standard piece of arming wire through the aft bomb conduit from the charging well
until it appears at the aft fuze well.

CAUTION
To prevent damage to the cable, avoid excess cable
gathering between the fuze and conduit nut at the rear of
the aft fuze well.

5. Attach the arming wire to the initiator end of the power cable.

NOTE
One technician may perform the fuze installation; however,
two technicians are preferred for ease and speed of
installation.
The cable will properly guide into the bomb conduit if
constant tension is applied to the cable at the bomb
charging well.

6. Pull the power cable through the bomb conduit beyond the charging well and remove the wire.
7. Insert the fuze into the fuze well until it is firmly seated.
8. While holding the cable firmly, permit the cable to retract into the conduit and check that it will
store properly after attachment of the initiator.
9. Twist the plastic ring on the cable plug, removing shipping cap/pull clip. Tape the power cable
to the bomb body.
10. With the fuze seated, thread the closure ring into the bomb fuze well. Tighten firmly until the
closure ring is against the fuze face. Remove the fuze safety pin.

13-49
 11. Using the closure ring torque wrench adapter and tools and the closure ring wrench, tighten
the closure ring to the prescribed torque in accordance with the assembly manual.
To install a Doppler sensing unit (DSU)-33, perform the following steps:
1. If the power cable is not installed in the DSU-33, proceed as follows:
a. Remove the plastic shipping plug and flag from the connector on the end of the sensor.

CAUTION
When installing the power cable on the DSU-33 sensor, do
not use pliers or any other tools on the shell. The use of
tools can damage internal parts.

b. Insert the connector in the rear of the sensor and turn clockwise to lock in place.
2. Ensure that the shipping cap/pull clip or equivalent is installed on the power cable.
3. Thread a standard piece of arming wire through the bomb conduit from the charging well until it
appears at the nose fuze well.

CAUTION
To prevent damage to the cable, avoid excess cable
gathering between the sensor and conduit nut at the rear of
the nose fuze well.

4. Attach the arming wire to the initiator end of the power cable.
5. Pull the power cable through the bomb conduit and insert the sensor into the fuze well as slack
is taken up.

NOTE
The sensor will not fit flush with the fuze well.
Approximately 1/4 inch of space between the sensor and
the bomb fuze well is acceptable.

6. Screw the sensor into the nose fuze well and hand tighten.
7. Tighten the nose setscrew as follows:
a. (Preferred) Tighten to the prescribed torque in accordance with the assembly manual.
b. (Alternate) Tighten one-half to one turn after contact with the DSU-33.
8. Pull the cable plug through the charging well and remove the arming wire.

NOTE
If the cable will not retract into the conduit, twist the cable
several times to tighten the coils.

9. While holding the cable plug firmly, permit the cable to retract into the conduit and check that it
will store properly after attachment of the initiator.

13-50
 10. Twist the plastic ring on the cable plug; remove the shipping cap/pull clip.
11. Align keyways of the cable and FZU connectors and insert the cable connector into the front
initiator connector. Press (do not twist) until it engages. Verify the connection by slightly pulling
on the cable connector. Ensure a positive lock.
12. Untape the fuze power cable from the bomb body.
13. Align keyways of the cable and FZU connectors and insert the power cable connector into the
rear initiator connector. Press (do not twist) until seated. Verify the connection by slightly
pulling on the cable connector.
14. Align the embossed arrow on the initiator cover so that the arrow points toward the nose of the
bomb and insert the initiator into the charging well.
15. Evenly tighten the two Allen head screws on the top cover until the initiator is secured.

WARNING
Only use the FZU-61/B firing lanyard with an FZU-48/B-
powered FMU-139(series) fuze on BRU-32 racks.

Install the FZU-61/B firing lanyard (Figure 13-37) as follows:

1. Cut the existing FZU-48/B lanyard off directly above the lower swaging sleeve.
2. If the Mk 84 Mod 6/7 or BLU-117 bomb body is used, cut the long leg off the FZU-61/B. If the
Mk 84 Mod 1/2/3/4/5 bomb body is used, cut the short leg off the FZU-61/B (Figure 13-37).
3. Insert the remainder of the FZU-48/B lanyard through the loop of the remaining leg of the FZU-
61/B (Figure 13-38, view A). Holding the loop against the FZU-48/B lid, press the pull ring end
of the FZU-61/B lanyard thorough the loop of the remaining FZU-48/B lanyard (Figure 13-38,
view B). Pull the FZU-61/B lanyard all the way through, creating a figure eight cinch between
the two lanyard loops (Figure 13-38, view C).
4. Tape the FZU-61/B lanyard to the bomb body.

13-51
 Figure 13-38 — FZU-61 firing lanyard routing.

Figure 13-37 — FZU-61

firing lanyard.

Install the tail assembly as follows:

CAUTION
Tail assemblies dropped while out of the container shall be
considered unserviceable.
Do not stand or rest the tail assembly on the aft end, or
damage to the GPS antenna may occur. Use care when
standing the tail assembly on the forward end, or damage
to the index pin may occur.

1. Verify that all tail assembly mounting setscrews are retracted until screws are flush with the
inside of the tail assembly flange.

13-52
 WARNING
KMU-556 tail assemblies weigh approximately 98 to 103
pounds. Use an adequate number of personnel to lift and
support the tail assemblies during installation.

2. If applicable, remove the EMI cover from the Department of Defense Interface Standard, MIL-
STD-1760 wire harness connector and route the wire harness up through the cutout in tail
assembly. Reinstall the EMI cover.
3. Prior to lifting the tail, ensure that the fuze connector is connected to the stowage receptacle
located in the forward area of the tail assembly.
4. Using an appropriate number of personnel, align the tail assembly behind the bomb body with
the index pin on the top and the tail in an X-configuration, making sure the wire harness
assembly is in line with the suspension lugs.
5. Place the tail assembly in the aft end of the bomb body as follows:
a. Mate the index pin located at the 12 o’clock position on the inside face of the tail assembly
with the 1/2-inch hole located at the 12 o’clock position on the aft end of the bomb body. Fit
the tail assembly onto the aft end of the bomb body.

WARNING
Setscrews must seat firmly in the bottom of the bomb
groove to ensure proper mating of the tail assembly. Failure
to ensure the proper seating can result in the inadvertent
separation of the tail assembly from the bomb body.

NOTE
Tightening the top two setscrews first will hold the tail
assembly in place while the remaining setscrews are
tightened.
Proper alignment will result in the tail fins being in an X-
configuration.

b. Tighten eight setscrews into the groove in the bomb. Tighten the setscrews to the
prescribed torque in accordance with the assembly manual.
6. Mark the fuze type and settings on the tail assembly.
Install the umbilical cover as follows:
1. Remove the umbilical connector EMI cover from the wire harness Department of Defense
Interface Standard, MIL-STD-1760 umbilical connector and route the harness through the hole
in the top of the tail assembly.
2. Insert the wire harness umbilical connector into the correct hole position on the umbilical cover.
3. Reinstall the umbilical connector EMI cover on the wire harness umbilical connector.
4. Push any excess cable length down into the tail assembly while installing the umbilical cover.
13-53
 5. Insert the tab on the aft end of the umbilical cover into the wire harness exit hole on top of the
tail assembly. Push the umbilical cover full aft into the hole.
Install the aerosurface assembly as follows:
1. Adjust both suspension lugs as follows:
a. Adjust the forward suspension lug until the aft shoulder is flush with the surface of the
bomb body.
b. Adjust the aft suspension lug until the forward shoulder is flush with the surface of the
bomb body.
2. Untape the FZU-61/B lanyard from the bomb body and pass it through the arming well cutout
in the upper aerosurface.

CAUTION
Ensure that the upper aerosurface does not interfere with
the air intake assembly of the FZU-48/B initiator. If the
aerosurface interferes with the air intake of the initiator, it
may not open and the weapon will dud.

NOTE
Weapon orientation is viewed from the aft looking forward.

3. Position the upper aerosurface assembly centered over the bomb suspension lugs with the
angled leading edge forward.
4. Ensure that the upper aerosurface is centered over the suspension lugs to prevent binding the
suspension lugs when secured.
5. Tape the FZU-61/B lanyard to the upper aerosurface.

NOTE
The right-hand aerosurface assembly contains the T-bolts.
The left-hand aerosurface assembly contains the
aerosurface securing straps.

6. Position the right-hand aerosurface with the angled leading edge forward and attach to the
upper aerosurface by hooking the hooks into the slots on the upper aerosurface.
7. Position the left-hand aerosurface with the angled leading edge (Figure 13-39) forward and
attach to the upper aerosurface by hooking the hooks into the slots on the upper aerosurface.

NOTE
Due to the extreme variation of the thermal protective
coating on the Mk 80(series) bombs, it may be necessary to
mechanically assist the hooking of the T-bolts into the slots
on the aerosurface securing straps.

13-54
 Figure 13-39 — Aerosurface assembly.

8. Guide the aerosurface securing straps around the lower side of the bomb body and hook the
right aerosurface T-bolts into slots located on the left aerosurface securing straps.

CAUTION
Do not use lubricants on T-bolts. Lubricating T-bolts can
result in overloading the aerosurface securing straps during
the torqueing sequence.
Do not over-torque T-bolts. Over-torqueing can result in the
overloading of the aerosurface securing straps.

NOTE
As the T-bolts are tightened, the upper aerosurface will
tend to pull to the right, binding the suspension lugs. Sliding
the upper aerosurface to the left against the suspension
lugs may help to alleviate this problem.

9. Tighten the self-locking nuts on the T-bolts.

NOTE
When the T-bolt nuts are tightened, the socket may rub
against the aerosurface securing strap. This condition has
been accounted for in the definition of the torque
requirement.
Early model strakes have three securing straps; later
models have only two.

10. Torque the aerosurfaces T-bolt, adjusting the nuts as follows:

a. (If applicable) Tighten the middle strap nut to the prescribed torque in accordance with the
assembly manual.

13-55
 b. Tighten the aft strap nut to the prescribed torque in accordance with the assembly manual.
c. Tighten the forward strap nut to the prescribed torque in accordance with the assembly
manual.
d. Repeat the same torqueing sequence and increase the torque value to the prescribed
torque in accordance with the assembly manual.

NOTE
The torque on one T-bolt nut may decrease while the other
T-bolt nuts are tightened.

e. Repeat the final torqueing sequence until the prescribed torque value on each T-bolt nut is
maintained, in accordance with the assembly manual

NOTE
The torque on one T-bolt nut may decrease while the other
T-bolt nuts are tightened.

f. Repeat the final torqueing sequence until the prescribed torque value, on each T-bolt nut is
maintained, in accordance with the assembly manual.
11. Check that the suspension lugs do not bind against the upper aerospace.
12. Check that the upper aerosurface and side aerosurfaces are secure by shaking the left and
right aerosurfaces and verifying that the T-bolt adjustment nuts are tight.

WEAPON UNCANNING AND INSPECTION

The following paragraphs provide an overview on weapon uncanning and weapon inspection
procedures. Not all weapons are listed, and the following paragraphs are for familiarization of the
process that may be involved. The cluster bomb unit (CBU)-99B/B will be used for this training
manual.

CBU-99B/B Procedures
Prepare and inspect the CNU-319/E weapon container as follows:

WARNING
Weapons received in a severely damaged container may
also be damaged. A damaged weapon is potentially
dangerous.

1. Check fleet issue unit loads for damage (Figure 13-40). If any container is punctured or dented
greater than 2 inches, weapons may be damaged or unsafe. Notify the proper authority if the
container is damaged to the extent that the weapon may be damaged.
2. Cut straps that secure the containers in the unit load.
3. Remove the reusable wooden spacers from forklift guides.
4. Discard cut strapping.

13-56
 Figure 13-40 — CNU-319/E fleet issue unit load.
5. Ensure that the forklift guides and lifting eyes are not deformed to the extent that intended use
is impaired. If damaged, use an alternate method to hoist.
6. Lift the individual container away from the unit load, using appropriate equipment.
7. Check each individual container for damage. If the container is punctured or dented greater
than 2 inches, the weapon may be damaged and unsafe. Reject the container.
8. Cut and remove the two lead seals near the corners of the container.
9. Cut the safety wire and open the pressure relief valve.
10. Disengage the 16 latch assemblies that secure the upper shell to the lower shell and place the
latches in the extreme down position.
11. Remove the upper shell from the lower shell using the handles located at each end. Set the
cover aside.
12. If the gasket adheres to the upper shell, insert a putty knife or thin strip of metal between the
upper shell and gasket.

13-57
 WARNING
An armed fuze is potentially dangerous.

13. Verify that the fuze is not armed as follows:

a. Turn the protective cover counterclockwise and remove to inspect the fuze. If the fuze
radome is pierced by the red pitot tube or shows any red, the fuze is armed (Figure 13-41).
If the fuze is armed, notify the proper authority.
b. Install the fuze cover over the fuze and turn clockwise to lock it in position.

Figure 13-41 — FMU-140 dispenser proximity fuze pitot tube in safe and armed.
14. Compare the contents stencil on the container with the weapon identification markings to
ensure that the correct weapons were received. If weapons are not as marked on the
container, notify the issuing activity.
15. Inspect the visible portion of each weapon. If the dispenser is punctured or dented greater than
1 inch, reject the weapon.
16. If a replaceable part of the weapon is damaged, continue unpacking. When unpacked, replace
the defective part, as applicable.
17. Inspect the interior of the container for evidence that can indicate whether the weapon has
shifted during transit. If the weapon has hit either end of the container, the weapon should be

13-58
19. Ensure that the suspension lugs will fully seat. If the lugs will not fully seat, remove and replace
as follows:
a. Remove the defective suspension lug.
b. Install the replacement suspension lug as follows:
i. Apply silicone compound to the threads of the replacement lug per the Airborne
Weapons and Associated Equipment Consumable Material Applications and Hazardous
Material Authorized Use List, NAVAIR 01-1A-75.
ii. Insert the replacement lug and tighten until the lug bottoms in the threaded hole.
20. Back the lug out of the threaded hole until the lug eye is aligned with the longitudinal axis of
the weapon.
21. Install the bomb carrier or weapon carrier on the weapon suspension lugs. Adjust the carrier to
the weapon’s center of balance.

WARNING
Serious injury can result if personnel are struck by a fin or a
fin release band when hoisting the weapon.

22. Ensure that the fin release safety cotter pin/warning streamer is installed and the fin release
band is secure.
23. Attach the hoisting equipment to the bomb carrier or weapon carrier and lift the weapon from
the container. Place the weapon on support handling equipment and secure with hold-down
straps.
24. Repeat steps for the second weapon.
25. Inspect the container for the presence of water. If water is present, remove the water and wipe
the container dry.
26. Clean and prepare the container gasket per the Airborne Weapons and Associated Equipment
Consumable Material Applications and Hazardous Material Authorized Use List, NAVAIR 01-
1A-75.
27. Install the upper shell on the lower shell and secure the latches.
28. Mark the container’s upper shell with the word EMPTY at each end and on each side (four
places) per the Airborne Weapons and Associated Equipment Consumable Material
Applications and Hazardous Material Authorized Use List, NAVAIR 01-1A-75. Move the
container to inert storage.
29. Inspect the weapon for signs of water damage. If water damage has occurred, proceed as
follows:
a. If water intrusion is apparent inside the fuze fairing, remove the fairing and remove
corrosion from the fairing. If heavy corrosion exists, reject the weapon.
b. If corrosion is apparent on the fuze and cannot be removed with a clean, dry cloth, reject
the weapon.
30. If light corrosion is present on the weapon, clean, dry, and touch up with enamel paint per the
Airborne Weapons and Associated Equipment Consumable Material Applications and

13-59
 Hazardous Material Authorized Use List, NAVAIR 01-1A-75. The weapon is considered
acceptable.
31. If a heavy buildup of corrosion is present on the weapon, reject the weapon.
For detailed information concerning the preparation and inspection of the CBU-99B/B, refer to the
Airborne Weapons Assembly Manual Cluster Bomb Units, NAVAIR 11-140-9.

Weapon Inspection
Inspect the weapon as follows:
1. Remove the fuze cover by turning counterclockwise, and verify that the fuze is not armed
(Figure 13-41).
2. Inspect the fuze cover assembly. If the warning streamer is damaged or missing, repair or
replace the warning streamer.
3. Inspect the fuze radome for security and damage. If loose or damaged, reject the weapon.
4. Ensure that the ARM TIME secondary (SEC) switch is set at the SAFE position.
5. Remove the upper fairing and verify that the fuze arming lanyard is routed through the fuze
base slot marked primary (PRI).

CAUTION
Do not exceed the torque value; breakage of screws or
components is highly possible.

6. Verify that the option time fuze arming lanyard is routed through the fuze base slot marked
option (OPT). Install the upper fairing and tighten the screws to the prescribed torque in
accordance with the assembly manual.
7. Install the fuze cover over the fuze and turn clockwise to lock in position.

WARNING
A damaged weapon is potentially dangerous.

8. Verify the shelf/service life. If the weapon is dropped, refer to the applicable WAM. Check the
weapon for dents. If the dispenser is dented greater than 1 inch, cracked, punctured, or
gouged, reject the weapon.

13-60
 NOTE
(Except for the 1-inch band around the tailcone attaching
screws) If the thermal coating is missing in excess of 1
square inch in any one location, or an accumulation of more
than five chipped areas in excess of 3/8 inch each, or any
amount in the first 12 inches of the nose, the weapon shall
be considered not thermally protected. Reject weapons that
are not considered thermally protected, place them in
condition code F, and return them to the
WPNSTA/NAVMAG for repair. Weapons displaying areas
of missing thermal coating less than 1 square inch in any
one area, or an accumulation of five or less chipped areas
3/8 inch or less each and no missing coating on the first 12
inches of the nose, will be acceptable as long as the
thermal coating surrounding the bare area is suitably
bonded to the dispenser skin.

9. Check the thermal coating on the weapon for cracks, chips, and loose or missing coating
material.
10. Verify that the explosive content identification color code band or bands are present (Figure
13-42); if any bands are missing, notify the proper authorities.

Figure 13-42 — CBU-99.

11. Check the conduits for damage. If damage exists that can prevent extraction of the arming
wire, reject the weapon.

13-61
12. Inspect the lanyard stop assemblies. Verify that the lanyard stop assembly (Figure 13-43) is
present and secured. If not, reject the weapon.

Figure 13-43 — CBU-99 lanyard stop assembly.

13. Ensure that airborne weapon change (AWC) 422 revision (REV) A is incorporated. If REV A is
not incorporated, incorporate per the applicable WAM.
14. Inspect the fin release band for installation of the safety cotter pin (Figure 13-44). Ensure that
the safety cotter pin prong is bent to a 15- to 30-degree angle.
15. Verify that the warning streamer (Figure 13-44) is installed. If the streamer is missing, replace
it. If the warning streamer is unavailable, fabricate a replacement.

13-62
 Figure 13-44 — Fin release wire with safety pin arrangement.
16. Verify that the fin release band retention system is installed (Figure 13-45).
17. Verify that the fin release wire (Figure 13-44) extends 1/8 to 5/8 inch beyond the fin release
band stud. If the wire extends less than 1/8 inch beyond the stud, repair in accordance with the
applicable WAM. If the wire extends more than 1/8 inch, cut the wire to the correct
specification. Ensure that the wire end is free of burrs.

WARNING
Ensure that the safety pin with the warning streamer is
installed prior to attempting repair. Severe injury to
personnel may occur if tail fins are inadvertently released.

13-63
 Figure 13-45 — Fin inspection.
18. Check the tail cone assembly for damage that can prevent the fins from opening when
released. If the tail cone assembly is damaged, reject the weapon.

CAUTION
Do not exceed the torque value; breakage of screws or
components is highly possible.

NOTE
Weapon is acceptable if no more than two nonadjacent tail
cone attachment screws are missing or broken.

19. Verify that the screws attaching the tail cone assembly to the dispenser case are secure. If the
screws are loose or missing, replace and tighten to the prescribed torque in accordance with
the assembly manual.

13-64
 CAUTION
A misaligned fin release band stud can prevent the fins
from opening when released, resulting in potential damage
to the aircraft.

20. Check the alignment of the fin release band stud (Figure 13-45). The stud must be directly in
line with the keyway in the fin release band tabs. A misaligned fin release band stud can
prevent the fins from opening when released. If the stud is misaligned, loosen the stud nut and
realign. Retighten the stud nut.
21. Verify that the fins are securely fastened in the closed position. If the fins are in the open
position, recock them.
22. Press on all of the closed fins and plungers (Figure 13-46) to verify that they move easily. If
binding is noticed, perform maintenance as required.

Figure 13-46 — Fin lock configuration.

CAUTION
Do not torque or rotate dispenser cargo section screws to
verify tightness. Torquing or rotating the screws can break
the sealing compound.

23. Inspect the weapons for loose or missing screws and cracks in the dispenser skin between the
screw holes. If any screws are loose or missing or if the weapon skin is cracked, reject the
weapon.
a. Inspect the two longitudinal rows of 28 screws located approximately 4 5/8 inches to each
side of the suspension lug centerline.

13-65
 NOTE
Do not attempt to inspect screws located under the
conduits.

b. Inspect the transverse row of eight screws located approximately 10 1/2 inches forward of
the front suspension lug center (only seven of eight screws are accessible because one is
located under the conduit).
c. Inspect the transverse row of eight screws located approximately 9 3/4 inches aft of the
rear suspension lug center (only six or seven of the eight screws are accessible because
one or two are under conduits).
24. Verify that the correct extractors (Figure 13-47) are present. Inspect the extractors for fraying
or damage.

Figure 13-47 — Extractor configurations.

25. If the extractor is damaged or missing, replace as follows:
a. Cut or untie the defective extractor, taking care not to pull or cut the arming wire, and pull
the extractor loose.
b. Install the replacement extractor as follows:
i. For fuze arming or option time wires, tie off the extractors through the appropriate ring
assembly, as shown in Figure 13-47. Ensure that the correct extractor is installed on the
proper ring assembly to prevent possible damage to the aircraft.
ii. For the fin release wire, loop the extractor under the arming wire and tie off, as shown in
Figure 13-47.

13-66
Weapon Final Post-Inspection
Inspect the weapon as follows:
1. Remove the fuze cover and verify that the fuze is not armed.
2. Verify that the fuze cover is not damaged and the warning streamer is installed.
3. Install the fuze cover.
4. Ensure that the tail safety cotter pin is installed and the prong is bent 15 to 30 degrees.
5. Verify that the tail warning streamer is installed.
6. Verify that the fin release band retention system is installed and not damaged.

5.0-INCH AIRBORNE ROCKET ASSEMBLY PROCEDURES

The following 5.0-inch airborne rocket assembly procedures are used when the launch adapter unit
(LAU)-10 airborne rocket launcher is loaded. The LAU-10 airborne rocket launcher is discussed
previously in this manual. If the rocket launcher is being reused, it must be sent to the Fleet
Readiness Center (FRC) for electrical checkout prior to loading.
The components of the 5.0-inch airborne rocket are shipped and should be received with the rocket
motors preloaded in the four-round LAU-10 launcher. The fuze and warhead are packaged in
separate shipping containers, or all rocket components are packaged in separate authorized shipping
containers.

Unpacking Rocket Components

Unpack rocket motors and other rocket components as discussed in the following steps:

WARNING
Banding straps are under tension. Use care in cutting to
prevent injury. Wear safety glasses or face shields and
leather gloves. Stand clear of the strapping when cutting.
Sharp edges of the strapping can injure personnel when
tension is suddenly released.

1. Open wooden shipping crates by using hand tools, such as shears or steel strap cutters. Cut
or untwist the securing wires from the metal containers with shears or pliers. Remove the end
pans from the launcher shipping containers.
2. Keep all containers in a horizontal position while opening them. During the assembly
procedure, keep the rocket warheads and motors in a horizontal position to decreases the
possibility of accidents.
3. Remove all retrograde items, such as metal boxes, wooden boxes, spacers, and thread
protectors, from the components in preparation for assembly. Retain these retrograde items
and dispose of them according to current directives.

Inspecting Rocket Components

When removing the rocket components from their shipping containers, inspect them by performing
the steps listed below. Dispose of defective items according to current directives. The components
inspected include launchers, warheads, fuzes, and rocket motors, to include their fins.
13-67
 WARNING
To avoid personal injury and damage to equipment in an
operation involving assembly, disassembly, fuzing,
defusing, or cleaning, you must do the work in a designated
area. This area must be safely located away from other
explosives and vital installations. Only the smallest number
of rockets practical should be exposed. Only authorized
personnel essential to the work should be permitted in the
vicinity. Refer to the Electromagnetic Radiation Hazards
(Hazards to Ordnance), Commander, Naval Sea Systems
Command (NAVSEA) Ordnance Publication (OP)
3565/NAVAIR 16-1-529 for radiation hazard (RADHAZ)
procedures and precautions.

Warhead
Inspect the warheads as follows:

WARNING
Warheads that are cracked or have a gap between the fuze
adapter and the warhead are hazardous.

1. Remove shipping caps from the fuze cavity and base.

2. Verify that the warhead is not cracked and no gap exists between the fuze adapter and the
warhead.
3. Verify that the fuze is staked.
4. Verify that the base and fuze cavity threads are not damaged or corroded.

WARNING
Do not attempt to remove the Mk 191 base fuze used with
the Mk 24 Mod 0 service warhead. If the base fuze hole is
uncovered or has any other plug or cover other than the Mk
191 base fuze, dispose of the warhead in accordance with
current directives.

WARNING
Fuzes that are damaged are hazardous. Detonation may
occur.

13-68
 NOTE
Do not disassemble the base adapters form the warheads
to check for base plugs.

Fuze
Inspect the fuze as follows:
1. Verify that the fuze body is not damaged.
2. Check the fuze threads for damage or corrosion.

Advance Precision Kill Weapons System II

1. Inspect the Advance Precision Kill Weapons System II (APKWS II) as follows:
2. Verify that the WGU-59/B assemblies are not damaged. If so, reject.
3. Verify that WGU-59/B laser switch assembly (LSA) and ON/OFF switches are present and
operational.
4. Verify that the threads are not damaged, rusted, or corroded. If threads interfere with
assembly, reject.
5. Ensure that wing slot seals are present and not damaged. If damaged or missing, proceed to
wing slot seal removal and replacement procedures in the Airborne Weapons Assembly
Manual Aircraft Rocket systems 2.75-Inch and 5.0-Inch, NAVAIR 11-140-12.

Rocket Motor
Inspect the rocket motor as follows:

WARNING
Handle rocket motors carefully at all times and avoid jarring
or dropping. Cracked propellant grains can cause the motor
to explode on firing.
Rocket motors dropped from any distance or otherwise
damaged are hazardous and shall be disposed of.

1. Verify that the motor tube is not dented, deeply scratched, gouged, or corroded.

WARNING
Use a metal shielding band assembly only. Do not attempt
to substitute the Mk 71 motor plastic fin retainer band
because it affords no RADHAZ barrier.

2. Remove the plastic thread protector from the front of the motor and check the threads for
damage and corrosion.
3. Verify that the motor tube threads, motor contact band, and nozzle and fin assembly are clean
and free of grease or other lubricants.

13-69
 4. Verify that the shielding band and electromagnetic radiation (EMR) barrier are in place.
5. Verify that the nozzle closure plug meets one of the three following conditions. Request
disposition for any rocket motor not meeting one of these criteria:
a. The closure plug is in place. No dents or cracks that are 2 inches deep or more in the plug
shall be present.
b. The closure plug is in place. The closure plug has been slit (appearing as an “x” or cross-
shaped cuts).
c. The nozzle closure plug is removed. Verify that the weather seal is not broken.
For rocket motor Mk 71 Mods, verify that the fin retainer band is in place, fins are not bent or broken,
and fin pins are clean and free of foreign matter.

Assembly of Rocket Components

Rocket components are assembled as discussed in the following paragraphs.

NOTE
Use a chain wrench or strap wrench to attach the warhead
to the motor.

To install a 5.0-inch warhead, hold the motor with a strap wrench and screw the warhead into the
motor. Tighten securely with a chain wrench until the warhead seats on the motor for a full 360
degrees.

Assembly of Fuze to Warhead or BBU-15/B Adapter Booster

Fuze to Warhead Assembly Procedure
1. Install the appropriate nose fuze and hand tighten.
2. Hold the warhead by either a strap or chain wrench.
3. Tighten the nose fuze with a torque wrench and a crowfoot adapter to the prescribed torque in
accordance with the assembly manual.

Fuze to BBU-15/B Adapter Booster Assembly Procedure

1. Install the appropriate nose fuze in the BBU-15/B adapter booster, and hand tighten.
2. Install the assembled fuze adapter assembly in the warhead.
3. Hold the warhead either by the strap or a chain wrench.

WARNING
Ensure that the launcher is grounded. Shielding bands
must be in place whenever the rocket motor is out of or
protrudes from the launcher. Ensure that the shielding band
covers the contact band but does not touch it.

4. Tighten the fuze with a torque wrench and crowfoot adapter to the prescribed torque, in
accordance with the assembly manual, using the slots on the base of the nose fuze.

13-70
Procedures for loading the assembled Mk 71 Mods rocket in LAU-10(series) rocket launchers are as
follows:
1. Perform detent procedures; place detent lift arm in load position.
2. Insert the aft end of the rocket motor into the forward end of launcher tube far enough so that
the tube prevents the rocket fins from deploying.

WARNING
Do not remove the fin retainer band from the rocket motors
without holding the fins closed. Fins are spring actuated
and will deploy with sufficient force to injure personnel if
unrestrained.

3. Remove the fin retainer band.

4. Push the rocket motor slowly into the
tube, being careful not to jam the
shielding band. Motion of the motor will
push the shielding band off (Figure 13-
48) as the motor enters the tube.
5. Push until the aft end of the motor
contacts the aft stop.
6. Rotate the detent lift handle to the FIRE
position with the detent lift tool. The
indicator will not turn completely to FIRE
because the detent pawl is resting on
the rocket motor slightly forward of the
detent groove.
7. Push forward hard on the aft end of the
rocket; the rocket will move ahead
approximately 1/8 inch, and the pawl will Figure 13-48 — 5.0-inch rocket shielding band.
engage the groove with an audible click,
indicating positive engagement.

2.75-INCH AIRBORNE ROCKET ASSEMBLY PROCEDURES

Unpacking and inspection of the warhead, fuzes, and motor are essentially the same as for the 5.0-
inch rocket components discussed earlier. Assemble rocket components as follows:
1. Place the forward end of the rocket motor body between the clamp fixture jaws of the holding
fixture assembly (Figure 13-49) so that the motor is clamped within 1 inch of the forward end.
2. Hand tighten the fuzed warhead to the motor.
3. Apply the specified torque to the warhead by using an adapter and torque wrench (Figure 13-
49).
4. Verify that there is no gap between the warhead and rocket motor.
5. Remove the assembled rocket from the holding fixture.

13-71
 6. Touch the nozzle end of the rocket to
the forward end of the launcher to
discharge static.
7. Ensure that the nozzle fin pin is not
lined up with the detent retainer.
8. Insert the nozzle end of the rocket
into the launcher tube up to the
shielding/fin restraint band. Remove
and retain the band. Verify that the
nozzle fins have sprung out to the
sides of the launcher tube.

Figure 13-49 — Holding fixture assembly.

NOTE
When loading the APKWS II, LSAs shall be at the 12
o'clock position to prevent inadvertent changes.

9. (APKWS II) Ensure that LSAs are at the 12 o'clock position.

10. Slowly push the rocket into the tube until the nozzle touches the rocket stop.
11. Immediately snap the launcher blast paddle into the vertical position, ensuring that the blast
paddle is pressed and seated tightly against the launcher. Using the rocket loading/unloading
tool, push forward on the nozzle of each motor approximately 1/8 inch until an audible click
indicates that the rocket is seated in the detent retainer.
For detailed information concerning the assembly procedures of airborne rockets, you should refer to
the Airborne Weapons Assembly Manual, Aircraft Rocket Systems 2.75-inch and 5.0-inch, NAVAIR
11-140-12.

FLARE DISPENSER
The following paragraphs describe the general procedures for loading the illumination unit (LUU)-
2B/B aircraft parachute flare in the suspension underwing unit (SUU)-25F/A dispenser.
Perform loading and unloading of the dispenser in authorized areas only.

Adapter Kits
Install adapter kits on flares as follows:
1. Make sure the timer knob is on safe.
2. Make sure there is no external damage.

13-72
3. Check the adapter kit (Figure 13-50) for two green arming caps with serviceable arming
lanyards—one white a two-piece spacer and four yellow sealing rings.

Figure 13-50 — ADU-381/A adapter kit.

4. Rotate the time knob counterclockwise to
the required setting.
5. Install the yellow sealing ring on each
end of the flare.
6. Connect the green arming cap lanyard
(Figure 13-51) to the timer knob.
7. Install the green cap on the yellow
sealing ring.
8. Ensure that the spacer is properly seated
in the yellow sealing ring.
9. Place the two halves of the white spacer
together and install on the aft end of the
forward flare (Figure 13-52).
10. Repeat steps for the remaining flares to
be loaded.

Figure 13-51 — Lanyard configuration.

13-73
 Figure 13-52 — Installation of spacer assemblies on flares.
Dispenser Preparation
Prepare the dispenser for flare loading as follows:
1. Ensure that the preparation inspection procedures have been performed.
2. Install the safety pin and flag in the safety switch (Figure 13-53).
3. Set the stepper switch on safe.
4. Ensure that the dispenser has been electrically checked.
5. Disconnect eight firing leads from breech caps.
6. Open the eight breech caps and ensure that the sleeves are clean.

13-74
Figure 13-53 — SUU-25F/A.

13-75
 7. Open the four downloading breech caps (Figure 13-54).

Figure 13-54 — SUU-25F/A breech caps.

Flare Loading Procedures

Load flares into the dispenser as follows:

WARNING
Do not pull a flare aft after it has been inserted in the tube
because the plastic arming cap can be pulled off. Injury to
personnel can occur if the time is actuated.

CAUTION
To prevent the sealing gland from curling back, insert the
flare into the tube until the sealing gland is about to enter
the tube. Center the aft end of the flare and sealing ring and
push the flare into the tube.

13-76
 NOTE
Loading sequence is: tube 1 (breeches 1 and 2), tube 2
(breeches 3 and 4), tube 3 (breeches 5 and 6), and tube 4
(breeches 7 and 8).

1. Install the forward flare into the tube with the green arming cap forward until approximately 4
inches of the flare extends out of the tube.
2. Ensure that the white spacer is properly seated on the yellow sealing ring and equally
centered.
3. Continue to push the flare into the tube until the white spacer is approximately 12 inches inside
the tube.

NOTE
Center the flares in the tube by carefully lifting on the yellow
sealing rings, allowing an even insertion.

4. Insert the aft flare into the tube with the green arming cap forward until the forward flare is
stopped against the expansion chamber.

NOTE
A gap between the aft retaining link and the flange of the
yellow sealing ring may occur due to item variances.

CAUTION
Do not reuse the shear pins.

5. Close the aft retaining link and insert the shear pin, with the head of the shear pin in the
upward position. Spread the shear pin tangs 30 to 40 degrees.
6. Rotate the applicable forward retaining lock to the LOCKED position.
7. Install the shear pin into the lock with the pinhead forward and spread the tangs to 30 to 40
degrees.

CAUTION
Ensure that the breech cap and downloading breech cap
retaining rings do not overlap each other. If the retaining
rings overlap, the breech caps may not be completely
tightened on the breech sleeves, causing the cartridge to
not fire.

8. Install the four downloading breech caps and tighten.

9. Mark on the dispenser placard the date loaded, munitions, lot number, timer setting, and
electrical test date.

13-77
 10. Deliver to or stage for the squadron.

STANDOFF LAND ATTACK MISSILE

The following paragraphs discuss typical
Standoff Land Attack Missile (SLAM) air-
launched surface attack missile (AGM)-84H-
1and SLAM-Expanded Response (ER)
AGM-84K-1 weapon uncanning procedures.

CNU-595/E Preparation/Inspection
Prepare the container (Figure 13-55) as
follows:

Figure 13-55 — CNU 595/E container.

WARNING
The receiving inspection and handling area should comply
with the procedures and directives in NAVSEA OP
3565/NAVAIR 16-1-529 when in a Hazards of
Electromagnetic Radiation to Ordnance (HERO)
environment.
The SLAM-ER tactical missile contains Hazard
Class/Division 1.1 explosives, and a full load of jet
propulsion (JP)-10 type jet fuel. Handle missiles with care
and observe all safety regulations governing the handling of
explosive ordnance and fuel.

WARNING
The pressure probe and guide missile fuze (S-A/CF)
contains small quantities of explosive and/or pyrotechnic
materials.

1. Inspect the missile container for evidence of rough handling.

WARNING
Relieve the shipping container of pressure before opening.

2. Equalize internal pressure by actuating the breather valve.

13-78
3. Remove anti-pilferage seals from opposite ends of the shipping container.
4. Two persons simultaneously release two latches with the same sequence number, in the
sequence shown in Figure 13-56.

Figure 13-56 — Container cover unlatching and latching sequence.

5. Using two persons, lift the cover assembly and carefully set it aside on the deck—sealing
surface up—where it will not interfere with unpacking operations.
6. Ensure that the arming wire assembly is installed through the pressure probe switch (Figure
13-57). If the arming wire assembly is not properly installed, refer to the applicable paragraph
in the WAM for installation. If the pressure probe is erected, the missile is considered armed.
Notify explosive ordnance disposal (EOD) personnel.
7. Ensure that the Department of Defense Interface Standard, MIL-STD-1760 umbilical connector
environmental cover is installed.
8. Remove the missile records from the records holder. Verify that the log book serial numbers
agree with the missile serial numbers. Retain the log book.
9. Inspect the interior of the shipping container (Figure 13-58) for any evidence of damage,
engine oil, fuel, battery electrolyte, or loose hardware. Refer to the applicable paragraph in the
WAM for fuel/engine oil cleanup. If the presence of battery electrolyte is suspected, inspect the
missile drain holes, in the vicinity of the warhead section and sustainer section mate line, for

13-79
 evidence of battery electrolyte leakage. If leakage is evident, perform the applicable battery
electrolyte cleanup procedure in accordance with the WAM.

Figure 13-57 — Pressure probe.

Figure 13-58 — Inside shipping container.

WARNING
If the pressure probe is erected, do not proceed. Notify
EOD personnel immediately.
Exercise caution when working in the area of the pressure
probe. Inadvertent activation of the probe can cause severe
injury to personnel.

10. Ensure that the air data probe (ADP) protective cover assembly is properly installed on the
ADP. If the ADP protective cover is missing, replace it with a serviceable ADP cover.
11. Ensure that a nose cover assembly is properly installed over the missile fairing panes. If the
nose cover assembly is missing, replace it with a serviceable nose cover assembly.
12. Ensure that the exit cover assembly is properly installed on the aft of the missile. If the exit
cover is missing, replace it with a serviceable exit cover.
13. Ensure that the pins are properly installed in the missile upload fittings. If any pin is missing,
replace it.
14. Disengage the two straps securing the insensitive munition (IM) shield to the cradle assembly
and position the straps outboard over the shipping container sidewall.
15. Using two persons, carefully lift the IM shield from the shipping container; move the IM shield
where it will not interfere with unpacking operations. (Figure 13-59).
16. Disengage the double-cam handles from the axial restraint.

13-80
 17. Rotate the axial restraint bar to the
open position.
18. Using the lanyard, lift the axial restraint
to the port side of the shipping
container. Lower the axial restraint
between the shipping container
sidewall and the cradle assembly.
19. Remove the quick-release pin from the
strap latch on three strap assemblies
and release the strap latch. Swing the
three strap assemblies outboard.

CNU-595/E Weapon Removal

Install a shackle to the Mk 51 Mod 1 weapon
carrier hole position 2.
To install the Mk 51 Mod 1 weapon carrier to
the missile forward and aft launch lugs,
proceed as follows:
1. Remove the Mk 51 Mod 1 weapon Figure 13-59 — IM shield lift with hoist.
carrier safety pin.
2. Move the handle to the open position.
3. Ensure that the forward launch lug is in the up position.
4. Install the Mk 51 Mod 1 weapon carrier over the forward launch lug and aft launch lug.
5. Slide the Mk 51 Mod 1 forward and move the handle to the closed position; reinstall the safety
pin.
6. Ensure that the Mk 51 Mod 1 weapon carrier has properly engaged the forward launch lug and
aft launch lug.

NOTE
An overhead hoist is the preferred equipment for unpacking
the missile. Use the Mk 91 Mod 0 hook adapter to unpack
the missile only if the overhead hoist is not available.

7. If using the overhead hoist, ensure that the shackle is attached to hole position 2 of the Mk 51
Mod 1 weapon carrier.
8. Lower the overhead hoist of suitable capacity and attach the hook of the overhead hoist to the
shackle already attached to the Mk 51 Mod 1 weapon carrier hole position 2.
9. Manually steady the missile at forward and aft ends during hoisting operations. Slowly lift the
missile from the cradle assembly and out of the shipping container (Figure 13-60).
10. Position the missile over the handling equipment.
11. Carefully lower the missile toward the handling equipment to a point where the aft transport
adapters can be rotated inboard to a position between the wings and the missile body (Figure
13-61).

13-81
 WARNING
Use care when positioning the transport adapters. Keep
hands and fingers out of a position where they may get
caught between the missile structure and transport
adapters.

NOTE
Position the missile onto the handling equipment, noting
that the front transport adapter will support the missile
directly under the forward missile stenciled hard point (near
the guidance warhead section mate line).
For new production AGM-84K-1 missiles, an 8-inch arrow is
stenciled on the missile, centered directly above the
forward hard point marking.
When lowering the missile to the handling equipment, you
will lose visibility of the hard point marking. To ensure that
the missile rests correctly within the missile forward hard
point marking area, center the arrow as a reference. The
rear transport adapter supports the missile just aft of the
wing fairings and may rest on the wings as the missile is
lowered.

Figure 13-60 — SLAM-ER hoist lift.

13-82
 Figure 13-61 — SLAM-ER hoist position.

12. Continue lowering until the missile contacts the transport adapters (Figure 13-62).

CAUTION
To prevent damage to the missile folding wings, maintain a
3/4-inch clearance between the missile folding wings and
the lower arm of the ADU-801/E adapters.

13. Secure the missile to the handling equipment and disconnect the hoist from the weapon
container.
14. Remove the Mk 51 Mod 1 weapon carrier safety pin, move the handle to the open position,
and remove the Mk 51 Mod 1 weapon carrier from the missile.

Unpacking Fins from Shipping Container

Unpack the fins from the shipping container as follows:
1. Disengage the hold-down straps securing the fin cushion assembly to the bottom of the
shipping container.
2. Remove the top cushion and remove the two fins from the center cushion.
3. Remove the center cushion and remove the two fins from the bottom cushion.
4. Ensure that all fins are stenciled SLAM-ER ONLY. Inspect the fins for damage and corrosion. If
any fins are missing, notify the appropriate type commander.

13-83
After the weapon has been removed from the
container and securely fastened to the
appropriate handling/transport equipment,
perform a weapon inspection using
procedures described in the appropriate WAM.
Stow all weapons that are serviceable and
ready for issue to operational or organization
units in the designated ready-service
magazine or handling areas for further use to
support mission or training requirements.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Safety precautions prescribe the minimum
requirements and regulations that you should
observe when handling ammunition. These
regulations may be general in nature or step-
by-step procedures. Regardless of the
situation, NEVER ignore or bypass safety
precautions, even during the simplest
ammunition-handling evolutions.
During weapons assembly, you should always Figure 13-62 — SLAM-ER munitions
review applicable safety precautions before transporter position.
beginning the evolution. A few of these
general safety precautions are as follows:
x Wear protective equipment, such as safety glasses or eye shields, safety helmets or hats, ear
protective devices, gloves, mittens, respirators, and safety shoes, as required to guard against
personal injury
x Establish and maintain positive communication during handling and stowage evolutions
x Keep all spaces or areas containing ammunition and explosives, regardless of duration, clean
and free of debris
x Install or remove bomb fuze in handling rooms or spaces specifically designed for such
purposes
x Unless specifically prescribed for the weapon, do not assemble in or remove from bombs
detonators, boosters, primers, or other firing devices
x Fuzes are not allowed to accumulate at the fuzing stations; never stockpile fuzes; they must be
withdrawn from stowage on an as-needed basis
x Never, under any circumstance, try to disassemble or repair a fuze; also, never try to render
inert a live, loaded item of ordnance
x Except as authorized by current directives, do not attempt to disarm a fuze
x Move assembled rocket ammunition to the designated storage area as soon as practicable
after completion of assembly operations
x Do not make changes or additions to any ordnance or ordnance components without explicit
authority from NAVAIR

13-84
x Exercise particular caution when handling rocket motors to avoid propellant grain damage or
fracture
x Do not connect electrical power or test equipment to a rocket launcher when rockets are
installed
x Assemble and fuze airborne rockets in a designated assembly area and as close to the time of
aircraft rearming as possible
x Handling equipment weight test certification shall be current

13-85
 End of Chapter 13
Weapons Assembly
Review Questions
13-1. What primary factor dictates the manner in which a weapon is to be configured?

A. Mission requirements
B. Target
C. Type of delivery aircraft used
D. Weapons weight

13-2. During which preparation time are the plastic shipping plugs removed from the nose well and
tail fuze cavity of Mark 80 general-purpose bombs?

A. Arming procedures
B. Depalletizing procedures
C. Assembly after fuze installation
D. Assembly prior to fuze installation

13-3. On the fuze munition unit-139(series), what fuze status is indicated when the safing pin is
removed and the red-and-black striping is visible on the gag rod sleeve?

A. Fuze is enabled and could be armed

B. Fuze needs to be reset
C. Fuze is in a safe condition
D. Service life has expired

13-4. The Mark 122 arming safety switch coaxial cable should have what orientation when it is
installed in the bomb live unit-110?

A. 45-degree angle to the lugs

B. Aft of the lanyard pin
C. Forward of the lanyard
D. Left angle to the lugs

13-5. What result should you ensure when tightening the clamp bolt of the BSU-33 fin to the bomb
body?

A. Fin clamping ring contacts the V-groove of the bomb body 180 degrees
B. Fin clamping ring contacts the V-groove of the bomb body 360 degrees
C. Fin is secured to the bomb by shaking it
D. Setscrews are not loosened when other screws are tightened

13-6. What component retains the firing pin assembly of the Mark 76 practice bomb?

A. Arming wire
B. Cotter pin
C. Retainer clip
D. Shear pin

13-86
13-7. At what bomb location is the Mark 89 spotting charge adapter installed in the bomb dummy
unit-45?

A. Charging receptacle
B. Nose well
C. Spotting charge receptacle
D. Tail well

13-8. Which of following terms best describes the abbreviation GBU?

A. Glided bomb unit

B. Guided bomb unit
C. Guided bomber unit
D. Guided box unit

13-9. After an MXU-667 airfoil group has been removed from the container, what step is
accomplished first?

A. Insert packing material and retrograde the material into the container
B. Inspect the AFG components for cleanliness and surface corrosion
C. Verify that the safety pins and streamers are installed in the latch release lever and
collar of the wing assembly
D. Verify that the wing assembly is free of dents, which can prevent proper function of the
wing assembly

13-10. What precaution should you observe when exercising the pulse repetition frequency switches
on the MAU-209 and the weapons control unit-10?

A. The switch stop limits are not exceeded

B. The switch can retract on its own
C. The switch knob can be safety wired to one setting
D. The switches can be turned a full circle

13-11. Other than a tail assembly, what other assembly makes up a complete Joint Direct Attack
Munition guidance set?

A. Aerosurface
B. Antenna
C. Nose fuze
D. Tail fuze

13-12. What safety caution pin condition should you ensure when inspecting the cluster bomb unit-99
fin release band for the installation of the safety cotter pin?

A. Safety caution pin is bolted to the dispenser

B. Safety caution pin is painted red
C. Prong is bent to 15-30 degree angle
D. Prong is screwed to the dispenser

13-87
13-13. Before a reusable rocket launcher is loaded onto an aircraft, the launcher should be sent to the
Fleet Readiness Center for which of the following reasons?

A. Cleaning
B. Mechanical checkout
C. Electrical checkout
D. Preloading inspection

13-14. When a rocket warhead is inspected, what maximum amount of gap, if any, is allowed
between the fuze adapter and the warhead?

A. 1/8 inch
B. 1/4 inch
C. 3/8 inch
D. No gap

13-15. Which of the following devices should be in place whenever a rocket motor is removed or
protrudes from a rocket launcher?

A. Safety clip
B. Safety lanyard
C. Shielding band
D. Shorting plug

13-16. When inspecting the Standoff Land Attack Missile-Expanded Response in the shipping
container, you should inspect the interior for any evidence of damage, engine oil, fuel, and
what other condition?

A. Loose hardware
B. Missile discrepancy book
C. Spare parts
D. Talcum powder

13-88
 CHAPTER 14
AIRCRAFT LOADING AND UNLOADING PROCEDURES
After aircraft ordnance and ordnance accessories have been tested, they are approved for carriage
and release by a particular model aircraft. Information about ordnance and ordnance accessories can
be found in the aircraft’s Naval Air Training and Operating Procedures Standardization (NATOPS)
flight/tactical manual. This manual provides basic information for the types of ordnance and ordnance
load combinations on each model aircraft. Deviation (change) from the basic authority must be
approved before it can be made. Commander, Naval Air Systems Command (NAVAIR) is the
approval authority for deviations.
The types of aircraft ammunition and armament equipment were covered in previous chapters of this
training manual. In this chapter, you will learn about loading and unloading ammunition and other
armament equipment on and off the aircraft.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
When you have completed this chapter, you will be able to do the following:
1. Identify requirements in airborne weapons/stores loading manuals as they pertain to loading
and unloading aircraft ashore and afloat.
2. Identify the requirements in the NATOPS manual as they pertain to loading and unloading
aircraft ashore and afloat.
3. Identify the procedures used to load and unload bombs.
4. Identify the procedures used to load and unload missiles.
5. Recognize the safety precautions to follow while loading or unloading aircraft.

AIRBORNE WEAPONS/STORES LOADING MANUAL

The Airborne Weapons/Stores Loading Manual, known as the loading manual, standardizes loading
procedures used throughout the Navy and Marine Corps. The manual improves safety and reliability
in the loading of conventional weapons and airborne stores. The loading procedures in the loading
manual must be followed. If there is a conflict between the loading manual and another publication,
the procedures in the loading manual should be followed until NAVAIR solves the conflict.
The procedures in the loading manual are followed during aircraft loading. However, the physical size
of the manual makes it impractical for use on the flight line. Therefore, the actual aircraft loading
procedures for a weapon/store are condensed into an airborne weapons/stores checklist. An
individual checklist is provided for each type of weapon/store to be loaded. The checklist includes
release and control system checks, retarded/nonretarded bombs, fire bombs, pyrotechnics, guided
bomb units, air-launched missiles, aircraft guns, practice bombs, and inert dummy ammunition. Each
member of the loading crew does not need a copy of a checklist during loading operations. However,
team leaders MUST use a checklist for the particular weapon/store being loaded. Checklists are not
complete guides. Only ordnance certified team leaders that have thorough knowledge and
understanding of the loading manual should use them.
Each checklist contains a required reading section that each member of the loading crew must
understand before starting loading operations. To keep these loading manuals and checklists current,
the Airborne Weapons/Stores Publication Index, NAVAIR-01-700 should be used. The index provides

14-1
activities with a guide that lists all existing changes or revisions for aircraft conventional weapons
loading, release, and control; airborne weapons support equipment (AWSE); chemicals; weapon
assembly or disassembly checklists; and manuals on hand. The publication index is updated
quarterly.

NATOPS Manuals
The Ashore, Amphibious Assault Ship General Purpose (LHA)/Amphibious Assault Ship Multipurpose
(LHD) manual, NAVAIR 00-80T-106, and Aircraft Carriers Nuclear (CVN) NATOPS manual, NAVAIR
00-80T-120, are issued by the authority of the Chief of Naval Operations (CNO) and under the
direction of the NAVAIR in conjunction with the NATOPS program. The NATOPS publications provide
the best available operating instructions for most circumstances. However, no manual can cover
every situation or be a substitute for sound judgment; operational situations may require modification
of the procedures contained in it. These publications should be read from cover to cover. It is the
users’ responsibility to have a complete knowledge of their contents.

Terms
When involved in weapons loading and flight deck or flight line operations, there are certain weapons
terms that must be known. Some of the more common terms are contained in the appendix section of
this training manual.

WEAPONS HANDLING PROCEDURES

Airborne weapons handling evolutions (loading/unloading) introduce a degree of risk into shore-based
and carrier-based operations. The weapons require careful planning and preparation. The necessity
to train for and conduct combat operations creates risks that cannot be avoided when explosive
weapons are handled.
Compliance with the weapon requirements contained in the ordnance load plan demands close
coordination between the aircraft handling group, ships ordnance group, and air wing ordnance
personnel.

Weapons Loading and Downloading

The flight deck of air-capable ships such as CVNs, LHAs, and LHDs is the preferred area to load or
download an aircraft.
Loading is permitted while recovery of aircraft is in progress. However, all efforts should be made to
ensure the movement of ordnance does not impede the safe and efficient recovery and movement of
aircraft. Only a minimum quantity of weapons should be moved toward the ship’s bow during recovery
operations.
The commanding officer (CO) may authorize loading limited amounts of weapons on the hangar deck
when operationally necessary. However, hangar deck loading adds an additional risk of fire because
there is both fuel and explosives in a confined area. Only aircraft scheduled for the next launch or an
alert condition are authorized for loading on the hangar deck. Authorization is also restricted to the
particular weapons shown in Table 14-1.

14-2
 Table 14-1 — Weapons Loading, Strikedown, Downloading, and Recovery Guide
WEAPON HANGAR DECK RECOVERY (8)
STRIKEDOWN/
LOAD UNEXPENDED HUNG
DOWNLOAD
General Purpose Yes (1) Yes (1)(3) Yes (1) Yes (1)
Bombs/Precision Guided (3)
Munitions
Guided bomb Unit (GBU)-24 B/B: Yes (1)
Yes (1) (3) No (5) No (5)
E/B (3)
Air-Launched Surface Attack
Yes (8)
Missile (AGM)-154(series) Joint Yes (3) Yes (3) Yes (8) (9)
(9)
Standoff Weapon (JSOW)
No No Yes Yes
Rocket Launchers: 2.75 Mod
(12)
4/5.0
(13)
Practice Bomb: Mark (Mk) Yes (3) Yes (3) Yes Yes
76/Bomb Dummy Unit (BDU)
48/BDU-33
Aircraft Parachute Flare Yes (3) Yes (3) (6) Yes Yes
(illumination unit (LUU)-2B/B) (6)
Yes (4)
20-millimeter (mm) Guns Yes (4) (7) (11) Yes Yes
(7)
Gun Aircraft Unit (GAU)-16 .50 Yes (7) Yes (7) Yes Yes
Cal/M240: 7.63 MM
Rockeye: Cluster Bomb Unit Yes (1)
Yes (1) (3) Yes Yes
(CBU)-100/Leaflet Bomb/PDU-5 (3)
Sidewinder: Aerial Intercept No (2) No (2) Yes Yes
Missile (AIM)-9(series)
Sparrow: AIM-7(series) No (2) No (2) Yes Yes
Maverick AGM-65(series) No (2) No (2) Yes Yes
Harpoon AGM-
84(series)/Standoff Land Attack Yes (8)
No (2) Yes (2) (9) Yes (8) (10)
Missile-Expanded Response (10)
(SLAM-ER) AGM-84H/K
High-speed Anti-Radiation Missile
No (2) Yes (2) Yes Yes
(HARM) AGM-88(series)
Hellfire AGM-114(series) No (2) No (2) Yes Yes
Yes (1)
Mines Mk 62 and Mk 63 Yes (1) (3) Yes Yes
(3)
Torpedoes Mk 46, Mk 50, and Mk Yes (1) Yes (1) (3) Yes Yes
54 (3)

14-3
 Table 14-1 — Weapons Loading, Strikedown, Downloading, and Recovery Guide
(continued)
Marine Location Marker Mk 25 Yes (3) Yes (3) Yes Yes
and Mk 58
JAU-22/B Cartridge No (3) No (3) Yes Yes
Decoy Flares (all) No No Yes Yes
Chaff (with cartridges) No (3) No (3) Yes Yes
Tactical Air-Launched Decoy
Yes (3) Yes (3) Yes Yes
(TALD)
Improved Tactical Air-Launched No (2) No (2) Yes (8) (9) Yes(8)
Decoy (I-TALD) (9)
Notes:
1. All applicable arming wires/safety clips/extractors/swivels intact.
2. Air-launched missiles shall not normally be loaded on the hangar deck except when
operational necessity so dictate. Commanding officers may authorize loading of
missiles on the hangar deck only up to the point of the mechanical attachment of the
weapon to the launcher/rack in accordance with the procedures prescribed in the
appropriate NAVAIR weapons/store loading checklists.
3. Ejector rack/jettison cartridges and/or nose fuzes shall not be installed on the hangar
deck.
4. The M61A1 gun ammunition is exempt from downloading requirement for up aircraft
temporarily spotted in hangar decks and aircraft undergoing limited maintenance as
defined in the CVN NATOPS Manual; that is, turnaround maintenance, providing
compliance with all gun dearm procedures of the applicable airborne weapon/store
loading manual and associated checklists have been accomplished.
5. Guidance provided in the CVN NATOPS Manual is subject to the individual Navy
Aircraft Tactical Manual (NATIP) limitations. In case of conflict between the CVN
NATOPS Manual and a specific aircraft NATIP, the NATIP shall take precedence.
6. The M16A1 and M61A2 gun may be exempted from complete downloading when
operations dictate that aircraft considered up and readily available for flight may be
temporarily spotted in the hangar deck (not to exceed seven days); and/or for aircraft
undergoing minor maintenance or servicing as defined in the CVN NATOPS Manual,
provided the following conditions are met:
a. All gun dearm procedures of the applicable airborne weapon/stores loading
manual and checklists have been accomplished.
b. Ammunition shall be cycled into the drum clear of feed chutes and feed
mechanisms of the gun system. If the quantity of rounds in the system exceed
the capacity of the ammunition drum, a minimum number of rounds may be
present in the return chute completely clear of the gun.
c. The aircraft gun access door shall be labeled with the upload date, quantity and
type of ammunition loaded (i.e., 01JAN00/50 RDS/20MM HEI).
7. Strikedown of aircraft with jammed 20MM/GAU-16/M-240 guns is prohibited.
8. If an intent to launch (ITL) signal has been initiated for a Harpoon/SLAM/JSOW, treat
the weapon as a hung ordnance during recovery, downloading, and strikedown.

14-4
 Table 14-1 — Weapons Loading, Strikedown, Downloading, and Recovery Guide
(continued)
9. An aircraft with ITL weapons shall not be removed from the flight deck to the hangar
deck until all ITL weapons have been downloaded.
10. When operationally feasible, aircraft shall be kept airborne for 35 minutes following
an ITL abort/failure. Respot of an ITL aircraft is prohibited during peacetime
operations until 2.5 hours for Harpoon/SLAM and 3 hours for JSOW have elapsed
from initial ITL abort/failure. Download prior to completion of the 2.5 hours for
Harpoon/SLAM and 3 hours for JSOW waiting period is authorized provided that the
missile is moved to a safe area on the flight deck with the nose oriented outboard
over the deckedge.

WARNING
Initiation of the ITL signal activates a battery within the
Harpoon/SLAM weapon. With battery power available
within the missile, electrical shorts occurring during aircraft
recovery and/or while disconnecting the missile umbilical
from the aircraft may actuate the missile
engine/pyrotechnics. Battery voltage will remain sufficiently
high to allow for engine start for up to 35 minutes following
ITL and to fire missiles launch squibs within Harpoon/SLAM
for up to 2.5 hours following ITL.
If an ITALD ITL is verified, do not remove the launch
adapter umbilical connector from the weapon. Move the
aircraft to a safe area, download the missile, and move it to
the missile to a safe area until 2.5 hours have elapsed from
the time of ITL. Remain clear of the aft end of the missile.

11. The A/A49E-27 gun ammunition is exempt from downloading requirements for up
aircraft temporarily spotted in the hangar decks and aircraft undergoing limited
maintenance; that is, turnaround maintenance, providing that compliance with all gun
dearm procedures of the airborne weapon/store loading manual, associated
checklists, and ammunition removal from the feed chute (ammunition in ammunition
container only) has been accomplished.
12. Helicopters with unexpended or hung ordnance shall fly shipboard recovery patterns
with weapons pointed away from the ship to the maximum extent practicable and
land in an off-set approach. Aircraft shall be dearmed in HERO-safe conditions with
weapons pointed clear of aircraft, personnel, and equipment during dearming
process. Helicopters with hung/misfired forward firing ordnance shall not
launch/recover on Spot 7.
13. Fixed wing aircraft are authorized for recovery with hung rockets. Prior to taxiing out
of the landing area, aircraft recovering with hung rockets shall have the launcher
safing pin installed and the firing connector umbilical disconnected. If it is apparent
that a rocket fired but failed to exit the launcher and/or damage to the rocket pod is
visible, recovery is not authorized and the pod must be jettisoned.
According to the CVN NATOPS Manual, fueling, loading and downloading weapons, and installing
fuzes and arming wires simultaneously are authorized. However, loading forward-firing ordnance that
14-5
requires simultaneous and/or prior electrical connections for loading is NOT authorized while aircraft
fueling is in progress. Electrical connections to weapons or removal/installation of impulse cartridges
should NOT be done while aircraft are being fueled. The fuel hoses should NOT be positioned under
the weapons/stores being loaded/downloaded.
When it is required, electrical power may be applied to the aircraft during a loading/downloading
evolution. However, power application should be held to a minimum, and should be consistent with
operational requirements. Electrical power should NOT be applied to the armament or weapon
release-and-control circuitry while weapons are being loaded/downloaded. Loading/downloading
weapons and oxygen servicing (other than the converter replacement at the aircraft) should be
conducted as separate evolutions.
According to the LHA/LHD NATOPS Manual simultaneous fueling, loading, and downloading of
weapons, preloaded improved triple ejector racks (ITERs) and installation of fuzes and arming wires
on the same aircraft is NOT authorized.

Arming and Dearming

Weapons/bomb racks/launcher arming functions to be performed after engine turn up are defined in
the individual weapons/store loading manual/checklists.
Final arming of forward-firing weapons should be conducted in the arming area just prior to launch. All
evolutions authorized in the rearming area may be accomplished after engine turn up and prior to
taxi.
These arming functions are normally performed by the squadron’s ordnance loading crew. Aircraft
loaded with forward-firing ordnance, such as aircraft guns, rockets, and missiles, are positioned in the
arming area to arm the weapons. When the aircraft is located in the arming area, optimum safety is
provided because the area directly in front of the aircraft is unobstructed by structures or personnel.
Arming functions are normally performed by the carrier air wing (CVW) arm and dearm crew (or
Marine aircraft group (MAG) personnel on LHA-/LHD-class ships) in the arming area under the
supervision of the CVW ordnance officer or designated air gunner. The crew is composed of
ordnance personnel from each squadron within the CVW. They are cross-trained and certified to arm
and dearm all types of aircraft aboard the ship. The crewmembers work in their respective squadrons
except during actual aircraft launch and recovery operations.
All forward-firing ordnance is dearmed by the CVW arm and dearm team at the dearming area
immediately after recovery of aircraft and prior to taxiing to rearming area or before engine shutdown.
All other ordnance is safed or dearmed by squadron ordnancemen in the rearming area before or
after engine shutdown.
When arming or dearming an aircraft, aircraft arming and safing signals (Figure 14-1, Figure 14-2,
and Figure 14-3) are used when crewmembers perform the arm and dearm procedures. These
signals are used by both the squadron and CVW arm and dearm crews. Arming or dearming aircraft
is conducted only when the aircraft is at a complete stop and control of the aircraft has been turned
over to the arming crew safety supervisor.

14-6
Figure 14-1 — Aircraft arming signals.
14-7
Figure 14-2 — Aircraft arming signals (continued).
14 8
14-8
Figure 14-3 — Aircraft safing signals.
14-9
Hung or Unexpended Weapons
The CVW aircraft dearming supervisor is always on the flight deck during recovery operations. By
being there, the supervisor makes sure that the aircraft directors and the dearming team coordinate
their actions. The dearming supervisor tells the aircraft director which aircraft requires safing before it
is taxied to the recovery spot.
At times, aircraft return to the ship with hung or unexpended weapons. When an aircraft returns with
hung or unexpended weapons, the flight leader advises cognizant personnel aboard ship as early as
possible of the amount and type and, when applicable, the Harpoon/SLAM/JSOW abort/failure
elapsed time of hung or unexpended weapons in the flight. As each of these aircraft approaches the
ship, the air officer (air boss) announces the model and type of weapon problem over the flight deck
announcing system.
When aircraft are landing with hung weapons, only required personnel are allowed to remain in the
vicinity of the landing area. All other personnel must take cover.
After landing with hung weapons and/or forward-firing weapons, the aircraft is normally safed after
taxiing clear of the landing area. However, at the discretion of the air officer, the weapons may be
safed in the landing area. Aircraft returning with unexpended weapons should be safed according to
normal procedures.

BOMB LOADING AND UNLOADING PROCEDURES

As an aviation ordnanceman (AO), ammunition will be loaded on many different models of aircraft.
However, the general loading and unloading procedures for most aircraft are similar. The procedures
contained in this chapter do not cover every step of weapon preparation and loading. Instead, the
procedures will give basic information about representative types of ordnance that might be loaded in
an operating squadron.
When loading practice bombs, they should be handled just like live ordnance, and the appropriate
checklist must be used.
Before loading weapons onto an aircraft, the aircraft must be prepared and inspected. Step-by-step
procedures must be carefully followed. These procedures are found in the applicable type, model,
and series aircraft airborne weapons/stores loading manual.

AIRCRAFT PREPARATION AND INSPECTION

Preparation/Inspection of aircraft for loading is as follows:
1. Verify aircraft preflight inspection has been completed and ensure all required safety devices
are installed.
2. Position the aircraft in designated rearming area and ensure aircraft is accessible for loading.
3. Verify armament preloading checks have been performed and that applicable systems are in
the UP status.
4. Ground aircraft and, if applicable, remove power and position all armament switches in
accordance with applicable loading manual.
5. Verify all loaded stations are safe as follows:
a. For BRU-32, BRU-33, and BRU-55, ground safety handles in LOCKED position.
b. For BRU-41/BRU-42, safety stop levers in LOCKED position.

14-10
 c. Gun electrical safety switch extended, manual clearing handle in CLEARED position, and
gun electrical cannon plug disconnected and stowed.
d. On the Fighter/Attack (F/A)-18(variants), verify the integrated countermeasures (ICM)
electrical safety switch is extended.
e. Launch adapter unit (LAU)-7 detent wrench safety pin installed.
f. LAU-115 and LAU-116 indicator in GREEN locked position.
g. LAU-117 launcher restraint pin engaged in missile.
h. LAU-118 launcher detent handle is fully seated and the retention mechanism is locked.
i. LAU-127 launcher in-flight lock (IFL) in LOCKED position.
6. Verify pylons, racks, and launchers are properly configured.
7. Remove cartridge retainers, auxiliary cartridge cap, and BRU-41/BRU-42 breech caps. Verify
that cartridges are removed from all stations to be loaded. Stow cartridge retainers to prevent
damage to the retainers during loading.
8. Verify that adapter cables are installed.
9. Open suspension hooks on empty pylons not to be loaded and stations to be loaded.

GROUNDING AND APPLICATION OF ELECTRICAL POWER

Ground and apply electrical power to the aircraft as follows:
1. Verify the electrical power is removed from aircraft.

NOTE
The proper grounding of the aircraft requires use of an
authorized grounding cable. The grounding cable must be
attached to a certified ground outlet or a common static
earth ground, then to an authorized grounding point on the
aircraft.

2. Attach the grounding cable to the certified ground outlet and authorized grounding point on the
aircraft.
3. Position all armament switches in accordance with loading manual. Set all other switches to
OFF, SAFE, or NORMAL.

WARNING
Prior to applying power, cockpit switches and controls must
be ready to receive power.

14-11
 NOTE
Electrical power may be applied to the aircraft during the
loading/unloading evolution but will be held to a minimum
consistent with operational requirements. The step “(if
applicable) power removed” may be omitted when
operational requirements dictate a power requirement, but
the armament circuits will NOT be energized under any
condition unless specified by a step procedure within the
aircraft loading manual. Power must be removed from the
aircraft if the step “power removed” is not preceded by “(if
applicable).”

WEAPON INSPECTION
All weapons must be inspected before they can be loaded. If they do not meet the inspection criteria,
they must be rejected and the proper authority notified.

WEAPONS LOADING
General-Purpose (GP) Bombs
The Mk 80(series) and bomb live unit (BLU)-100(series) bombs are general purpose bomb bodies
used in a variety of configurations. The method used to load retard or non-retard bombs depends on
the weight and configuration of the bombs and the operational commitments. For example, a 500-
pound bomb can be loaded onto the rack of a BRU-32 on the F/A-18(variant) aircraft by using the
HLU-196D/E bomb-hoisting unit or the HLU-288/E bomb hoist. As previously mentioned, personnel
are authorized to manually load most weapons or stores weighing 1,000 pounds or less with the HLU-
256/E manual hoisting bars. To meet rearming requirements of high-tempo cyclic operations, manual
hoisting bars would normally be used to load individual retarded or non-retarded bombs that weigh
1,000 pounds or less.
Weapons weighing over 1,000 pounds are normally loaded with the HLU-196D/E bomb hoisting unit
or HLU-288/E bomb hoist using the applicable loading hoist adapters and the prescribed hoisting
bands with anchor fittings or trolley adapters.

Manual Hoisting Bar Loading

Use the HLU-256/E manual hoisting bars as follows:
1. A manual hoisting bar should be installed for manual loading by installing the HLU-256/E
manual hoisting bar in the nose fuze well and in the tail fin. The solid nose plug or nose
fuze/proximity sensors must be removed, if authorized, to be able to install the manual hoisting
bar in the nose fuze well.

CAUTION
Do not use excessive force when seating/latching lugs in
suspension hooks.

2. Remove the weapon tie-down straps that secure the weapon to the handling equipment.

14-12
 3. Raise the weapon (Figure 14-4) (if applicable) to approximately 4 inches below the bomb rack,
and connect the fuzing cable. Continue to raise the weapon until both suspension lugs enter
the bomb rack suspension hooks and the hooks latch.

Figure 14-4 — Manual loading by HLU-256/E.

4. Visually inspect the rack to ensure LATCHED is indicated.

5. Ease the lifting pressure sufficiently to verify the weapon is supported by the bomb rack
suspension hooks.

WARNING
Maintain lifting pressure in weapon until it has been verified
that the weapon is supported by suspension hooks.

6. Gently shake the weapon to ensure it is supported by the bomb rack suspension hooks and
that the sway braces are properly seated.
7. Rotate the ground safety handle to the LOCKED position.
8. When the weapon has been loaded on the rack, the manual hoisting bar should be removed
and all support equipment should be removed from the station being loaded.

Bomb Hoist Loading

When the BRU-32/BRU-33/BRU-55 bomb rack is ready to be loaded, the hoist adapter and bomb
hoist should be installed on station to be loaded. Then the handling and loading equipment with
weapon would be positioned under station to be loaded and secure. The prescribed hoisting band
and single store trolleys must be installed on the weapon. Then, the hoist should be operated and the
slack removed from the cable. One person should be positioned at the nose and one person at the
tail of the weapon to steady the weapon while hoisting. Remove the AWSE straps securing the
weapon to the handling equipment.

14-13
Use the bomb hoist loading procedures as follows:

CAUTION
Do not use excessive force when seating/latching lugs in
suspension hooks.

1. The weapon (if applicable) should be raised approximately 4 inches below the bomb rack and
the Mk 122 switch connected (Figure 14-5); continue raising the weapon until both suspension
lugs enter the bomb rack suspension hooks and the hooks latch.

Figure 14-5 — Mk 122 arming safety switch.

2. The rack should be inspected to make sure it indicates LATCHED and the hoist should be
eased until the weapon weight is supported by the bomb rack suspension hooks.
3. Gently shake the weapon to ensure it is supported by the bomb rack suspension hooks and
that the sway braces are properly seated.
4. Rotate the ground safety handle to the LOCKED position.
5. When the weapon is loaded on the rack, the hoisting band and single store trolleys should be
removed from the weapon and then the bomb-hoisting unit removed.
6. If applicable, the Mk 122 arming safety switch cable should be electrically connected and the
safety switch lanyard attached to the positive arming latch. When connecting Mk 122 coaxial
cable to the bomb rack, the excess coaxial cable should be positioned opposite the ground
safety handle on the bomb rack.
7. If applicable, the solid nose plug should be installed as described in the weapons loading
manual.
8. Install the fuze/proximity sensors by screwing the sensor into the nose fuze well hand tight and
tightening the nose setscrew: (Primary) Torque set screw tightened to 30 to 35 inch-pounds.
(Alternate) Tightened one-half to one turn after contact with sensor.

14-14
 9. Install/connect the arming wires/lanyards to the aircraft.
10. Perform the weapon inventory/built-in-test (BIT) check.
11. Install the required cartridges in all loaded stations and tighten the cartridge retainers and
auxiliary cartridge caps.
12. Place the WEAPON LOADED sign in the cockpit and remove any tools and handling/loading
equipment from the area.

Practice Bombs
The next paragraphs briefly describe the preparation, inspection, and loading procedures for the Mk
76/bomb dummy unit (BDU)-48 practice bombs and the laser guided training round (LGTR) on the
F/A-18(variants) aircraft. Practice bombs and LGTRs are carried by the BRU-41.
Before loading, the aircraft should be prepared/inspected as outlined in the loading manual. Ensure
the following items have been verified:
x The BRU-32 sway braces are properly seated against the BRU-41
x The adapter cable is installed
x All suspension hooks must be open on stations to be loaded
x The restrictor and sway brace adapter brackets are properly installed and (as applicable) the
sway braces are preset
x The swaybraces are retracted and the jamnuts wrenched tight on stations not being loaded

BRU-41 Preparation/Weapon Loading

The BRU-41 should be prepared for loading as follows:
1. Verify aircraft preparation/inspection and weapon inspections have been completed and, if
applicable, verify power is removed from aircraft and aircraft is grounded.
2. Position all armament switches in accordance with loading manual.
3. Position handling equipment with practice bombs/LGTR near station to be loaded and secure.
4. Set proper code inputs in the weapons insertion panel for weapons/fuzes on stations being
loaded.

WARNING
Do not drop practice bomb/LGTR during loading, since the
signal cartridge can be detonated.

NOTE
Practice bombs utilize the forward latch; the LGTR utilizes
the aft hook; unused hook must be latched.

The BRU-41 should be loaded as follows:

1. Latch the unused suspension hook.

14-15
 2. (Practice bomb) Manually position the suspension lug in the forward suspension hook and
latch the hook.
3. (LGTR) Manually position the suspension lug in the aft suspension hook and latch the hook.
4. Gently shake the practice bomb/LGTR to ensure the weapon is supported by the suspension
hook.
5. Position the safety stop lever to the LOCKED position.
6. Position the suspension lug fully forward in the suspension hook.

NOTE
Improper tightening of sway brace screws may result in
hung ordnance.

The sway brace screws should be adjusted until the adapter brackets contact the weapon; adjust the
centerline and outboard shoulder station swaybraces as follows:
x Mk 76/BDU-33/BDU-48 (centerline)–three half turns of each forward sway brace screw with
the aft sway brace screws fully retracted
x Mk 76/BDU-33/BDU-48 (shoulder station)–six half turns of forward outboard swaybrace screw
with aft outboard sway brace screw fully retracted
x LGTR (centerline only)–three half turns of each sway brace screw (aft braces first), ensuring
LGTR is level with rack
All sway brace screws should be retracted on empty stations and all the jamnuts tightened to prevent
sway brace screw loss.
For LGTRs, the ejector rod cotter pin and wing nut must be removed and the ejector rod must be
positioned against the restrictor.

NOTE
The ejector rod wing nut requires considerable force to
remove. The ejector rod must contact the restrictor; the
ejector rod O-ring may extend no more than 1/4 inch above
the LGTR body.

Verify that the suspension hooks are open on unloaded BRU-32 and BRU-41 stations.
The weapon inventory/BIT check should be performed as required.

NOTE
Do not install auxiliary cartridge.

Cartridges should be installed in all loaded bomb racks and cartridge retainers; auxiliary cartridge cap
and BRU-41 breech caps should be tightened. Auxiliary cartridge should not be installed.
Place the WEAPON LOADED sign in the cockpit and remove any tools and handling equipment from
the area.

14-16
Weapons are loaded on a BRU-41/BRU-42 in much the same way as on a parent station. The major
differences are as follows:
x After the weapon lugs have engaged the rack suspension hooks, the safety stop lever must be
locked
x You must adjust the swaybrace screws and tighten the jam nuts as prescribed in the loading
manual
x The ejector foot must be positioned down against the weapon

Air-Launched Missile Loading

Air-launched guided missiles and guided missile launchers that are used in the Navy today were
discussed previously in this manual. The loading/unloading of each specific type of missile and
launcher cannot be covered in this chapter. The following paragraphs provide only an overview of air-
launched missile loading, preloaded accessory suspension equipment (PASE), and the brief loading
procedure for the Advanced Medium Range Air to Air Missile (AMRAAM) AIM-120(series) missile
carried on the F/A-18(variant) aircraft.
To facilitate loading and downloading, many air-launched missiles require wings and fins to be
installed after the missile is mounted on the suspension and release equipment and removed prior to
commencing the downloading evolution. These procedures are given as specific steps in the loading
checklists for each applicable missile. In other applications, I-level maintenance personnel install
some or all of the missile wings and fins prior to delivery to the user activities.
Some air-launched missiles are physically loaded by a crew/team working together to handle the
missile from the support equipment to the launcher and positioning the missile into the launcher.

Common PASE Weapons

The aircraft loading procedures for the HARM AGM-88(series) and the AGM-65(series) Maverick
missile require the missile launcher (LAU-117A(V)2/A and LAU-118(V)2/A) to be mated to the missile
by qualified weapon assembly personnel prior to delivery to the squadron personnel. The assembled
missile and launcher combination is loaded directly to the aircraft bomb rack (Figure 14-6). When
loading the PASE combination, the weapon loading hoist adapter must be used.
The weapon loading hoist adapter consists of two assemblies—the left adapter, which is installed on
the left side of the pylon, and the right adapter, which is installed on the right side of the pylon. The
adapters are installed on the pylon during loading and unloading operations when a hoist is used. The
adapter provides support for the boom of various bomb hoists for loading and unloading. For loading
and unloading the PASE combination, the applicable trolley adapters that are installed directly on to
the launchers ground support equipment (GSE) fitting should be used. The missile is then loaded by
hoisting the launcher and the weapon to the bomb rack following the same procedures described
previously for bomb hoist loading.

14-17
 Figure 14-6 — AGM-65 PASE load.

AIM-120 AMRAAM Weapon Loading

The launchers must be prepared for loading.
Verify that the aircraft preparation/inspection and weapon inspection have been completed. Verify
that the aircraft is grounded, and if applicable, the power is removed from the aircraft. In addition,
verify that all armament switches are positioned in accordance with the loading manual. Place the
WEAPON LOADED sign in the cockpit.

LAU-115(Series) Launcher
For the LAU-115(series) launcher, verify that the launcher is electrically connected and the launcher
and adapter are properly configured and secure.

LAU-116(Series) Launcher
Rotate the LAU-116(series) launcher safety release counterclockwise until yellow/black striping is
visible in the indicator window, the trigger is locked, and the missile stop pin is up (Figure 14-7 and
Figure 14-8). Verify the safety release indicator is in the SAFE position; the indicator will show green.
Verify that the serviceable AMRAAM buffer connector is installed and that the umbilical is retracted.
Manual loading—the handling equipment and weapon should be positioned under the station to be
loaded and secured, and the AWSE straps securing missile to handling/loading equipment removed.
The proper code inputs in the weapon insertion panel for weapons/fuzes should be set on stations
being loaded.
14-18
Figure 14-7 — LAU-116 launcher inspection.

14-19
 Figure 14-8 — LAU-116 launcher missile stop inspection.

CAUTION
Observe the NO LIFT areas indicated on the missiles.

LAU-127(Series) Launcher
Check the LAU-127(series) launcher to ensure the IFL is in the LOCKED position (Figure 14-9) and
verify the forward detent is in the ENGAGED position. Ensure the AIM-9 striker, aft detent, aft
dampener, and aft missile stop are retracted (Figure 14-10).

14-20
The serviceable AMRAAM buffer connector (Figure 14-11) should be installed and the AIM-120
umbilical should be retracted.
The nitrogen receiver cover on the LAU-127 should be opened and the nitrogen receiver assembly
must be installed, properly serviced, and secured. Then, the nitrogen receiver cover should be
closed.

Figure 14-9 — LAU-127 launcher IFL indicator position.

14-21
Figure 14-10 — LAU-127 launcher inspection.

Figure 14-11 — AIM-120 buffer connector.

14-22
Launcher Loading on the LAU-116(Series)
Missiles should be loaded on the LAU-116(series) launcher as follows:

CAUTION
Observe the NO LIFT areas on the missile.

1. Raise the missile and stabilize it on the main landing gear.

2. Remove the missile umbilical dust cover.

CAUTION
Use extreme care during loading to prevent damage to the
buffer connector.

3. Hold the umbilical handle in the fully retracted position.

NOTE
Prior to raising the missile into position, rotate missile so
that the umbilical and launch hooks are at 45 degrees
inboard.

4. Position the missile so that the missile umbilical and hooks align with the launcher cavities.

CAUTION
The aft missile stop indicator must be flush with the
launcher skin and the trigger locked or missile loss will
occur.

5. Slide the missile forward until the inboard missile hook bears against the forward launcher stop
and the aft missile indicator returns flush with the launcher skin.

NOTE
To verify the trigger is locked, grasp the trigger and pull
outboard. The aft missile stop indicator should remain flush
with launcher skin.

6. Verify the trigger is locked and the aft missile stop indicator is flush with the launcher skin.
7. Ensure the missile hooks are engaged and the forward and aft snubbers are pressing against
the missile launch hooks.
8. Verify the safety indicator shows GREEN.
9. Gently shake the missile to seat the snubbers and ensure the missile is supported by the
suspension hooks.
10. Verify no roll or pitch motion occurs.

14-23
 CAUTION
The buffer connector must be aligned with the missile
umbilical receptacle to prevent damage to pins.

11. Engage the buffer connector in the missile by closing the umbilical handle.
Install the missile wings as follows:

CAUTION
AIM-120C wings and fins are marked USE ONLY WITH
AIM-120C MISSILE. AIM-120C wings and fins are not
interchangeable with AIM-120A or AIM-120B missiles.

1. Depress the pin in the wing slot and push the wing post into the missile until seated; release
the wing slot pin (Figure 14-12).
2. Verify the wing is secure by pulling outward; the green indicator should be visible in the wing
slot.

Figure 14-12 — AIM-120 wing.

14-24
Missile fins should be installed as follows:

CAUTION
AIM-120C wings and fins are marked with USE ONLY
WITH AIM-120C MISSILE. AIM-120C wings and fins are
not interchangeable with AIM-120A or AIM-120B missiles.
Captive carry air-launched training missile (CATM)-120C
wings and fins are marked with USE ONLY WITH CATM-
120C MISSILE and are not interchangeable with CATM-
120A or CATM-120B missiles.

1. Unlock the fin locking release lever.

2. Align and install the fin in the fin mount (Figure 14-13).

CAUTION
Rotating the engagement nut clockwise with lock release
lever in LOCKED position will damage locking pin.

3. Gently shake the fin side to side while rotating the engagement nut finger tight.

Figure 14-13 — AIM-120 fin.

14-25
 CAUTION
Ensure the fin locking lever is in the LOCKED position. The
attachment lock pin must be engaged in the engagement
nut for the fin to be properly secured.

4. Using the fin installation/removal tool, rotate the engagement nut one-quarter to one-half turn
to fully engage the pin.
5. Rotate the fin lock release lever to LOCKED.
6. Verify the locking pin is engaged into the engagement nut slot.

Launcher Loading on the LAU-127(Series)

Missiles should be loaded on the LAU-127(series) launcher as follows:
1. Remove the umbilical dust cover.
2. Raise the missile until the missile hooks enter the loading slots in the launcher rail and slide
the missile forward until the missile hook contacts the forward launcher detent.

NOTE
The forward snubbers engage automatically when the aft
detent is engaged.

3. Maintain forward pressure on the missile and rotate the aft detent to ENGAGE.
4. Gently shake the missile and rotate the aft dampener to ENGAGE; ensure the missile is
secure.

CAUTION
The buffer connector must be aligned with the missile
umbilical receptacle to prevent damage to pins.

5. Rotate the AIM-120 umbilical to ENGAGE position.

6. Install the missile fins and wings as previously described.
After loading the missile on the launcher, the AMRAAM BIT and the data link test (AM TEST) check
must be performed on the missiles. After successful completion of the required test on the aircraft, the
electrical power must be removed from aircraft and the cooling air also removed, if applicable.
The required cartridges must now be installed in all loaded stations and the cartridge retainers and
(as applicable) the auxiliary cartridge caps must be tightened.
The WEAPON LOADED sign should be placed in the cockpit and any tools and handling/loading
equipment should be removed from the area.

14-26
Aircraft Gun Loading 20 mm
Previously in this manual, the Linkless Ammunition Loading System (LALS) components, a brief
explanation of the function, the interrelationship of the components, and the system operation were
discussed.
The ammunition loader interfaces with the F/A-18(variants) aircraft M61A1 and M61A2 gun systems
and simultaneously loads and downloads 20 mm ammunition spent cases and unfired rounds.
The following paragraphs provide an overview on the ammunition loader and how it is used at the
organizational level.

LALS III Loading Preparation

WARNING
20 mm ammunition is susceptible to the hazards of
electromagnetic radiation to ordnance (HERO). Refer to
Naval Sea Systems Command (NAVSEA) Ordnance
Publication (OP) 3565/NAVAIR 16-1-529 for specific HERO
restrictions.

Prepare the GFK-21A/E32K-7 (LALS III) as follows:

1. Position the loader near the aircraft, unlatch the forward housing multiple door assembly
latches, and fold doors up, back, and open.
2. Remove retaining strap from the stowed position, place over the forward multiple door, and
snap to aft housing.

NOTE
To properly tension chute, 20 mm ammunition shall not be
in the chute.

3. Verify no rounds are in the chute in order to properly tension chute.

4. Release and remove the aircraft interface unit (AIU) from the stowage position.

WARNING
Remain clear of the gears and rotors while cycling the AIU.

CAUTION
The declutch button must be depressed and held while
extending conveyor assembly. Excessive force when
extending conveyor assembly may damage chute
assembly.

5. Depress the AIU declutch button and extend the conveyor assembly to its fullest length.
6. Release the declutch button.

14-27
 7. Ensure that the AIU shift lever is in the BYPASS (down) position, and then manually cycle the
system until the shift gate shifts to BYPASS position.

CAUTION
Do not cycle the LALS from the transfer unit assembly
retract shaft. Cycling the system from this point is not
authorized.

CAUTION
Proper operation of the ammunition loader depends on
correct timing. The AIU must be properly timed prior to
installation.
Proper timing of the AIU is indicated when the white timing
mark (circle) on the load gear is in view through the timing
hole in the gear cover.

8. Rotate the manual drive knob on the right side of the AIU to align the timing holes. Press the
timing pin into the locked position and stow the AIU.

GFK-21A/E32K-7 (LALS III) Loading, Hand Crank/Power Drive Tool

The LALS III should be positioned for loading.
1. Lower the work platform for the munitions handling unit (MHU)-191/M and lock the stabilization
strut into position.

WARNING
When the LALS III unit is mounted on the MHU-191/M
transport, work platform stabilization struts must be
deployed for aircraft servicing.

NOTE
(LALS III) Latch pins on the aircraft transfer unit/adapter
must be in the IN position.

2. On the transfer unit, unlock and lower gate to the open position. Ensure the gate extends
below the loading tray.
3. Press, turn, and lock upper latching pins to the IN position.
4. Verify that the gun is in the timed position. Remove the AIU from the stowed position and
ensure the unit is timed and in the BYPASS position.

14-28
 CAUTION
During AIU installation, if the drive gear of the AIU does not
mesh properly with the gears of the gun transfer unit, rotate
the manual drive knob slightly in the SHIFT direction (while
both the AIU and gun system timing pins are still engaged)
to facilitate gear engagement.

5. Connect the AIU by positioning the lower lugs over the lower mounting points on the aircraft
transfer unit and rotate the AIU upward until the gears engage.
6. Ensure the latching levers are OUT.
7. Verify that the gun and the AIU are timed.
8. Release the AIU and gun timing pins.

CAUTION
Do not over tension the chute. Over tensioning of the
conveyor elements can lead to premature chute failure.
Tension should be equal in both chutes.

NOTE
The declutch button must be pressed and held while
extending the conveyor to ensure the proper tensioning of
the conveyor elements.

9. Press and hold the AIU declutch button.

CAUTION
Prior to repositioning the LALS, stow the work platform and
stabilization struts.

10. Stow the LALS work platforms and stabilization struts.

11. Slowly reposition the loader to apply tension to the conveyor assembly. Slight element play in
both chutes, up to 1/16 inch, is acceptable.
12. Release the declutch button.
13. Lower the LALS work platforms and stabilization struts. For the MHU-191/M, lock the
stabilization strut into position.

CAUTION
Do not attempt to rotate the gun system by hand or power
drive tool if the aircraft hydraulic system is pressurized.

14-29
14. Shift the AIU shift lever handle to LOAD.

CAUTION
The handcrank must be rotated clockwise. Reverse rotation
of the gun system can cause damage to the system and
should not be attempted.
The handcrank must be used to start rounds into the gun
system to ensure the proper feeding/transfer of
ammunition.

NOTE
Shift cycle should occur within one revolution of the
handcrank.

15. Manually cycle the system until the shifting gate shifts to the LOAD (up) position.

WARNING
If the gun system jams during loading or unloading, refer to
A1-F18AE-GJC-100, Gun Jam Clearing Checklist.

CAUTION
The torque limiter tool is required to be set to 25 foot-
pounds when using power drive tools to load/unload the
gun system. The torque limiter tool is optional when using a
handcrank to cycle the gun system.
The antijam pin must be pulled and locked when
simultaneously loading and unloading the gun.

16. Handcrank 25 rounds into the transfer unit to ensure proper transfer of ammunition occurs
between the LALS III and the gun system.
17. (If applicable) Pull the antijam pin, and using the power drive tool with torque limiter tool
installed or the handcrank, continue to cycle the system until the desired quantity of
ammunition is loaded and (if applicable) the spent cases/unfired rounds are removed from the
gun system.
18. Remove the torque limiter tool and power drive tool and reinstall the handcrank.
19. Shift the AIU shift lever handle to BYPASS.
20. Manually cycle the system slowly until the shifting gate shifts to BYPASS.
21. Remove the handcrank.

14-30
 CAUTION
Prior to repositioning the LALS, stow the work platform and
stabilization struts.

22. Stow the LALS III work platform stabilization strut.

23. Slowly reposition the loader to release tension on the conveyor assembly.
24. Lower the work platform and, for MHU-191/M, lock the stabilization strut into position.

WARNING
20 mm ammunition is HERO susceptible. Refer to NAVSEA
OP 3565/NAVAIR 16-1-529.
When removing the AIU, rounds may fall from the exposed
transfer unit.

25. Disconnect the AIU from the gun system by unlocking the latching pins; rotate the AIU
downward and lift it free from the lower mounting points on the aircraft transfer unit.

CAUTION
Use caution when placing AIU on to the storage mount to
prevent damage to AIU.

26. Stow the AIU on the storage mount.

27. Raise and lock the gate. Raise and lock the loading tray.
28. (If applicable) Using the handcrank, cycle the system until the first rounds appear in the feed
chute at the transfer unit entrance.
29. Set the rounds limiter switch as required.
30. Verify that the manual clearing handle is in the CLEARED position and (if applicable) position
the antijam pin to the UNLOCKED position.
31. Stow and lock the struts and work platforms. Unsnap the restraining strap from the aft housing.
32. Fold the retaining strap over the conveyor chute assembly and snap it to the forward housing.
33. Unfold the forward housing multiple door assembly forward and down to the closed position.
34. Secure the forward housing multiple door assembly latches in pairs.
Place the WEAPON LOADED sign in the cockpit and remove any tools and handling/loading
equipment from the area.

POSTLOADING QUALITY ASSURANCE INSPECTION

A qualified and certified quality assurance inspector (QAR) performs the postloading quality
assurance inspection after loading and fuzing is complete. A postloading quality assurance inspection
makes sure that weapons are properly loaded and no procedural steps were omitted.

14-31
REARMING AREA (BEFORE ENGINE TURN UP)
There are not many procedures to carry out in the rearming area (before engine turn up). The
WEAPON LOADED sign should be removed from the cockpit and the access doors closed and
secured. Normally, these procedures are performed at the same time as the pilot’s aircraft walk-
around inspection before manning the aircraft.

REARMING OR ARMING AREA (AFTER ENGINE TURN UP)

The procedures performed in the rearming area or arming area (after engine turn up) are
accomplished after the engine start and normally after the plane captain completes the pretaxi
signals. Stations loaded with bomb-type ammunition and other stores are normally armed in the
arming area. All forward-firing ordnance MUST be armed in the arming area. Final arming of certain
weapons requires that a safety person be positioned in view of the pilot. The safety person notifies
the pilot of the intention to remove safety pins (if applicable), and ensures that the pilot places his or
her hands in full view. When the pilot’s hands are in view, a member of the arming crew removes the
safety pins. Finally, a crewmember unlocks the improved multiple ejector rack (IMER)/ITER safety
stop levers.

DEARMING OR REARMING AREA (IMMEDIATELY AFTER ENGINE

SHUT DOWN)
Dearming procedures are performed after aircraft landing or ground abort. Aircraft bombs are
normally dearmed in the rearming area. However, if the aircraft has forward-firing ordnance such as
missiles, rockets, or loaded 20 mm guns aboard, they are safed in the designated dearming area.

WARNING
If any component is missing, loose, or damaged, notify the
proper authority. Do not attempt to disarm a partially or fully
armed fuze. Notify the proper authority (explosive ordnance
disposal). If an arming wire is not installed in the fuze or
arming device, the fuze or arming device may be armed.
Notify the proper authority.

NOTE
If an aircraft returns with unexpended ordnance, a
WEAPON LOADED sign must be placed in the cockpit.

1. Verify the fuzes are safe and arming wires/safety clips are installed.
2. Verify the fuze munition unit (FMU)-139(series) fuze pop out pin (gag rod) is not extended and
no red/black striping is visible.
3. If a BRU-41 or BRU-42 is involved, position the safety stop levers to the LOCK position on
loaded racks.
4. Inspect the weapons for missing, loose, or damaged components.
5. Verify the safety pins are installed on loaded stations, if applicable.
6. Verify the armament switches are in the OFF, SAFE, or NORM positions.

14-32
 7. Remove arming wires/lanyards from empty stations.
8. Report the status of the aircraft to proper authority.

UNLOADING PROCEDURES
Before a weapon is unloaded from the rack, the aircraft should be in the rearming area. Electrical
power to the aircraft must be removed, and the aircraft should be properly grounded. The following
must be verified: all cockpit armament switches are OFF, SAFE, or NORM; and safety pins are
installed as applicable.

WARNING
(FMU-139(series)) If red/black striping is visible on rod
sleeve, fuze may be armed. Do not attempt to depress gag
rod or insert safing pin. Notify proper authority immediately.

If a BRU-41/BRU-42 is being unloaded, verify the safety stop lever is locked on each loaded ejector
unit. If a BRU-41/BRU-42 (with a weapon) is unloaded from the rack, all breech caps must be
disconnected from the breech chambers and the cartridges removed from the breech chambers. The
breech caps should be positioned so as to prevent damage during unloading.

WARNING
(Mk 89) If arming wire is not installed in the pop-out pin, the
spotting charge adapter may be partially armed. Notify
proper authority.

Another action that should be taken when unloading weapons includes checking to see that the
arming wire is installed in the pop-out pin for applicable fuzes. If an electric fuze was used, the Mk
122 arming safety switch lanyard tab needs to be disconnected from the spring latch. The fin release
wires, lanyards, and arming wires should be disconnected from the aircraft.

WARNING
Do not remove a fuze or arming wire that was not installed
during loading procedures. Do not remove an arming wire
unless the fuze safety pin or device is installed.

If an electrically fuzed bomb is being unloaded, disconnect the Mk 122 arming safety switch quick-
disconnect connector from the rack.
Position the handling or loading equipment under the station to be unloaded. As applicable, a manual
hoisting bar or a bomb-hoisting unit should be installed.
On BRU-41/BRU-42, the ejector foot should be retracted to the full up position. Then, the swaybraces
should be retracted to the full up position. The required number of personnel should be positioned at
the front and at the tail of the weapon to steady and guide the weapon onto the bomb handling
equipment. To download a weapon, the weapon must be raised until the suspension lugs float in the
hooks. The BRU-41/BRU-42 safety lock lever should be moved from LOCK to UNLOCK, as
appropriate. The manual release should be operated to open the suspension hooks and the weapon
lowered onto the handling or loading equipment.
14-33
When unloading the PASE combination, the weapon loading hoist adapter (left adapter/right adapter)
must be installed on the pylon and the applicable trolley adapters should be installed on the launcher.
The missile is then unloaded by hoist on to the appropriate handling equipment and secured.
The weapon can be lowered to the handling or loading equipment. The weapon should be properly
secured to the handling or loading equipment.
When all weapons have been unloaded, the WEAPON LOADED sign should be removed from the
cockpit. Then, all weapons and handling or loading equipment should be removed from the area.
Report the status of the aircraft to the proper authority.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Safety precautions were given in this chapter as WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, and NOTES. However,
there are other safety precautions that should be observed when loading or handling aircraft bombs,
practice bombs, and missiles, or loading aircraft guns. A few of these safety precautions are as
follows:
x Weapon tiedown straps shall be maintained on the weapon as long as possible when loading,
and installed on the weapon as soon as possible when unloading
x The mechanical latching of weapons on aircraft racks/launchers shall be completed before the
engine(s) on that aircraft is/are started unless otherwise specified in loading publications
x Fuzes must not be disassembled or tested for proper functioning. No attempt shall be made to
repair any fuze or render any fuze inert
x Aboard ship, when the bombs and missiles are delivered to the aircraft for loading, they must
be positioned fore and aft to help prevent inadvertent movement of the handling equipment by
the side-to-side roll of the ship
x Once bombs and missiles have been delivered to the aircraft, a person must remain in the
immediate area. Bombs and missiles must not be left on the flight deck unattended
x Never attempt to load/download bombs or missiles without sufficient personnel
x When installing signal cartridges in practice bombs, never assemble more bombs than are
needed for the next event; when the day’s flight schedule has been completed, practice bomb
signals must be removed from practice bombs before returning them to storage
x Because of the nonexplosive nature of practice bombs, AOs have a tendency to be lax when
handling and loading practice bombs; remember, an Mk 76 practice bomb weighs 25 pounds
and could cause severe injury if dropped on a person’s foot or hand; additionally, when a
practice bomb signal is installed and the bomb is accidentally dropped, sufficient fire and metal
fragments can be ejected from the tube to cause severe personal injury
For further information concerning flight deck operational procedures, consult the CVN NATOPS
Manual, NAVAIR 00-80T-120, and the LHA/LHD NATOPS Manual, NAVAIR 00-80T-106.

14-34
 End of Chapter 14
Aircraft Loading and Unloading Procedures
Review Questions
14-1. Deviations to the Naval Air Training and Operating Procedures Standardization flight/tactical
manual must be approved by which of the following personnel?

A. Chief of Naval Operations

B. Commander in Charge Atlantic Fleet
C. Commander, Naval Air Systems Command
D. Commander, Naval Sea Systems Command

14-2. What manual standardizes aircraft loading procedures throughout the Navy and Marine
Corps?

A. Airborne Weapons/Stores Loading Manual

B. CVN NATOPS Manual
C. Maintenance Instructions Manual
D. NATOPS Flight/Tactical Manual

14-3. At what interval is the Airborne Weapons/Stores Publication Index, Naval Air Systems
Command (NAVAIR)-01-700, updated?

A. Monthly
B. Quarterly
C. Biannually
D. Annually

14-4. For most ordnance handling circumstances, what manual contains the best available operating
instructions?

A. Illustrated Parts Breakdown

B. Maintenance Instruction Manual
C. Naval Air Training and Operating Procedures Standardization
D. Naval Aviation Maintenance Program

14-5. A team leader must use an aircraft weapons checklist at which of the following times?

A. When the team leader is not qualified or certified for the particular weapons or store
being loaded
B. When the team leader is not familiar with the particular weapon or store being loaded
C. When the team is loading all ordnance
D. When the team leader has a thorough understanding of the loading manual

14-35
14-6. On aviation capable ships, what location is the preferred area to load or download an aircraft?

A. Hangar deck
B. Main deck
C. Flight deck
D. Aircraft elevator

14-7. Which of the following steps should be performed first when preparing and inspecting an
aircraft for weapon loading?

A. Ensure all loaded stations are safe

B. Ensure the aircraft is in the rearming area
C. Verify that preloading release and control system checks have been completed
D. Verify the aircraft preflight inspection has been completed

14-8. When manually lifting a weapon, the weapon should be lifted to what minimum distance, in
inches, below the rack to connect the Mark 122 arming safety switch?

A. 4
B. 8
C. 12
D. 16

14-9. After both suspension lugs enter the bomb rack suspension hooks and the hooks latch, what
condition should you look for when loading a weapon on to the bomb rack unit (BRU)-32 bomb
rack?

A. Bomb fins are aligned

B. Bomb nose is parallel to the ground
C. Rack indicates LATCHED
D. Weight is supported by bomb rack suspension hooks

14-10. What term describes the condition of a missile launcher mated to the missile combination?

A. Partial loaded suspension equipment

B. Preferred aircraft suspension equipment
C. Preloaded accessory suspension equipment
D. Preloaded armament equipment

14-11. To facilitate loading and downloading, what action do most air-launched missiles require after
the missile is mounted on the suspension and release equipment?

A. Installation of the radome

B. Installation of the rocket motor pin
C. Installation of the wings and fins
D. Torqueing of the screws

14-36
14-12. When preparing the launcher unit (LAU)-127 launcher for loading an air-launched aerial
intercept guided missile (AIM)-120 missile, what item must be retracted?

A. AIM-7 striker
B. Aft detent
C. Forward detent
D. Mid body dampener

14-13. Aboard ship, when the bombs are delivered to the aircraft for loading, they must be positioned
in what direction to prevent inadvertent movement of the handling equipment by the side-to-
side roll of the ship?

A. Forward and aft

B. Port and aft
C. Port and starboard
D. Starboard and forward

14-14. What action must be done to the practice bomb signal cartridges when the flight schedule has
been completed?

A. Retained in the practice bombs but must be used first on the next day
B. Retained in the practice bombs until they are expended
C. Removed from the practice bombs before returning them to storage
D. Retained in the practice bombs to prevent accidental firing

14-15. What type of bombs can cause aviation ordnanceman to be lax during handling and loading
evolutions?

A. BLU-100 series
B. Cluster bombs
C. Mk 80 series
D. Practice bombs

14-37
 CHAPTER 15
AIRCRAFT WEAPONS SYSTEMS
Strike fighter and attack aircraft engage their targets automatically and accurately. These aircraft are
designed and built as a complete integrated weapons system. The weapons subsystems are
interconnected and dependent on each other or on other aircraft systems. For example, the bomb
release system in some modes of operation depends on the aircraft's flight control system; the missile
system is interconnected with the aircraft's radio detecting and ranging (radar) system for missile
guidance. In addition to delivering weapons more accurately, computer-controlled weapons systems
provide a higher degree of safety by reducing human error.
The Navy currently uses the fighter/attack (F/A)-18 aircraft, electronic attack (E/A)-18 aircraft, as well
as the patrol (P)-3, P-8, aircraft and mine countermeasure helicopter (MH)-60 aircraft antisubmarine
warfare weapons systems. The weapons systems used in modern aircraft are complex. The
information on fighter, attack, and antisubmarine warfare weapons systems in this chapter is basic.
As you work in your rating, you will learn more about specific systems, and you will be trained in their
operation.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
When you have completed this chapter, you will be able to do the following:
1. Identify fighter/attack aircraft weapons systems.
2. Identify antisubmarine warfare weapons systems to include the basic system, the kill store
system, the release and control system, the release and control systems checks, and weapons
system maintenance.
3. Recognize the safety precautions to follow while handling aircraft weapons systems.

FIGHTER/ATTACK AIRCRAFT WEAPONS SYSTEMS

The following text discusses the F/A-18 aircraft. It introduces information on the available aircraft
armament systems, basic controls, and components common to these systems.

F/A-18A/B/C/D AIRCRAFT
The F/A-18A/B/C/D aircraft is a dual-role (fighter/bomber) and supersonic aircraft. External electrical
power can be applied at the external power receptacle on the left side of the forward fuselage. This is
easily accessible from the deck level. The external power connector connects 115-volt, three-phase,
400-hertz alternating current (ac) external power to the ac bus. When external power is not available,
the aircraft has an auxiliary power unit (APU) to drive either of the aircraft generators for functional
checkout of the aircraft system.

Aircraft Armament Systems

The systems and subsystems of the F/A-18A/B/C/D aircraft armament system are discussed in the
following text. The aircraft armament system, basic controls, and components all function in relation
to each other to release weapons/stores or fire rockets and missiles.

15-1
Air-to-Air Missile Control Systems
The air-to-air (A/A) missile control systems provide for the ability to select and launch air-launched,
aerial intercept guided missile (AIM), including AIM-7 Sparrow, AIM-9 Sidewinder, and AIM-120
Advanced Medium-Range Air-To-Air Missile (AMRAAM).
x A/A weapon select switches are located on the pilot cockpit control stick and aft cockpit control
sticks (in trainer-configured F/A-18B/D aircraft) (Figure 15-1); the A/A weapon select switch is
a four-position switch used to select A/A weapons and configure the right digital display
indicator (DDI) to the radar attack display; the forward position selects the AIM-7 Sparrow,
pressing the switch down selects the AIM-9 Sidewinder, pressing the switch to the right selects
the AIM-120 AMRAAM, and pressing the switch aft selects the guns
o A/A missiles are selected with the A/A weapon select switch; at that time, all A/A launchers
are unlocked and the right DDI is commanded to the radar attack display; provided the
selected weapon is ready (MASTER ARM, AIM-7 tuned, AIM-9 cooled), the priority weapon
is launched when the A/A missile trigger switch is actuated to the second detent
x A/A missile trigger switch is located on the pilot’s control stick (Figure 15-1), the A/A missile
trigger switch is a two-position switch; the first detent initiates actuation of the head-up display
(HUD) camera; the second detent initiates the firing of the gun

Figure 15-1 — Armament system basic controls.

15-2
x Infrared (IR) COOL switch is located on the MAP GAIN control panel (Figure 15-2) on the
pilot’s instrument panel; the IR COOL switch is a three-position switch that controls cooling to
AIM-9 Sidewinder seeker heads

Figure 15-2 — Pilot cockpit A/A missile control system.

x OFF position disables coolant to the seeker heads unless weight is off wheels; MASTER
switch is in the ARM position, and a station is selected; the NORM position applies coolant to
all seeker heads when weight is off wheels; the ORIDE position applies coolant to all seeker
heads when power is applied to the aircraft
x Weapon (WPN) volume control is located on the intercommunication amplifier-control on the
pilot’s left-hand console (Figure 15-2), and the volume control panel on the aft cockpit left-hand
console (Figure 15-3), the weapon volume control switch controls AIM-9 Sidewinder tone
volume
x Radar control switch is located on the sensor (SNSR) control panel on the pilot’s right-hand
console, the radar switch controls power to the radar system; the radar system is used to
control AIM-7 Sparrow and AIM-120 AMRAAM missiles

15-3
 Figure 15-3 — Aft cockpit A/A missile control system.

Air-to-Ground Weapon Control Systems

The air-to-ground (A/G) weapon control systems provide for the ability to select, launch, fire, or
release air-launched, surface attack missile (AGM), including AGM-65 Maverick, AGM-84 Harpoon/
Standoff Land Attack Missile-Expanded Response (SLAM-ER), AGM-88 High-Speed Anti-Radiation
Missile (HARM) or Advanced Anti-Radiation Guided Missile (AARGM), AGM-154 Joint Stand-Off
Weapon (JSOW), bombs, and rockets. The A/G weapon control system consists of the components
described in previous paragraphs which are common to all of the armament subsystems.
The following paragraphs describe additional controls and indicators of the A/G weapon control
system.
x CAGE/UNCAGE switch is located on the pilot cockpit right throttle grip and aft cockpit right
throttle grip (in trainer-configured F/A-18B/D aircraft) (Figure 15-4), cages and uncages the
selected seeker or designates the selected HARM or AARGM target
x Sensor control switch is located on the pilot cockpit control grip and aft cockpit control grip (in
trainer-configured F/A-18B/D aircraft), and on the left- and right-hand controllers in the aft
cockpit in F/A-18D night attack aircraft (Figure 15-4), the sensor control switch is used to
assign the target designator control (TDC) switch to the HUD or DDI
x A/G weapon release switch is located on the pilot cockpit control grip and aft cockpit control
grip (in trainer-configured F/A-18B/D aircraft) (Figure 15-4), the A/G weapon release switch,

15-4
 bomb button, or pickle switch initiates launch, fire, or release of selected A/G weapons; the aft
cockpit A/G weapon release switch is inoperative
x RAID/Forward-Looking infrared (FLIR) switch is located on the pilot cockpit left throttle grip and
aft cockpit left throttle grip (in trainer-configured F/A-18B/D aircraft) (Figure 15-4), the
RAID/FLIR switch sequences between HARM targets

Figure 15-4 — A/G weapon control system.

x TDC switch is located on the pilot cockpit right throttle and aft cockpit right throttle grip (in
trainer-configured F/A-18B/D aircraft), and on the left- and right-hand controllers in the aft
cockpit in F/A-18D night attack aircraft (Figure 15-5), the TDC switch slews the weapon video
crosshairs over the target
x Multifunction switch is located on the left- and right-hand controllers in the aft cockpit on F/A-
18D night attack aircraft, the multifunction switch is a three-position switch used for weapon
control (Figure 15-5)

15-5
 Figure 15-5 — A/G weapon control system.
o The forward position sequences between HARM target; the aft position cages and
uncages the selected seeker; the down position functions as the RAID/FLIR switch
x Electronic equipment control or up front control (UFC) (Figure 15-6) is located on the pilot and
aft cockpit instrument panel, the UFC enables pilot interface with the mission computer (MC)
system for selection of weapon moding and release parameters
x Electrical fuzing system is located in the left fuselage panel on non-stores management
upgrade (SMUG) aircraft and internal to the armament computer in SMUG aircraft, the
electrical fuzing system provides the means to arm electrically-fuzed A/G weapons; the
electrical fuzing system supplies selected (VT, INST, DLY 1, or DLY 2) fuzing voltage to
electrically-fuzed bombs at weapon release (when bomb rack hooks open)
x AN/AWW-4A(V) fuze function control system is located in the left fuselage panel on Non-
SMUG aircraft and internal to the armament computer in SMUG aircraft, the electrical fuzing
system provides the means to arm electrically-fuzed A/G weapons; the electrical fuzing system
supplies selected (VT, INST, DLY 1, or DLY 2) fuzing voltage to electrically fuzed bombs at
weapon release; when release is initiated, voltage will be supplied through an interconnecting
cable to the weapon during the first few inches of fall of the weapon

15-6
 Figure 15-6 — Up front control.

M61A1/A2 20 Millimeter Gun System

The M61A1/A2 20 millimeter (mm) gun system gives an aircraft the capability to fire this gun. The
system enables selecting, arming, and firing. Depending on the mission objective, the gun can be
operated in the A/A or A/G computer mode. No voltage is supplied to fire the gun until the trigger
switch is pulled and all landing gear is up and locked.

Stores Management System

The stores management system (SMS) provides the interface, control, and release functions of the
aircraft weapon stations and gun system. Two different SMS configurations exist: SMUG (F/A-18C/D
aircraft, 165207 and up) and baseline, or Non-SMUG (F/A-18A/A+/B/C/D 161353 through 165206).
The SMS consists of various components and will be discussed in the following section.

Armament System Basic Controls

The F/A-18A/B/C/D aircraft contain the following armament system basic controls (Figure 15-7) and
components.

Armament Computer
Located in the right fuselage panel, the armament computer is a digital computer that interfaces with
and is controlled by the MCs. The armament computer also interfaces with the weapon station
command signal encoder-decoders (Non-SMUG) or signal data converter-controllers (SMUG). The
armament computer contains a weapon insertion panel (WIP) for entering weapon and fuzing codes.
On Non-SMUG computers, the WIP codes are entered by rotating the ARMAMENT and FUZING
code switches. On SMUG computers, the WIP CODEs for station (STA) and nose or tail (NT) fuzing
are entered with the WIP pushbutton switches.

15-7
Mission Computers
Located in the left and right fuselage panels, mission computers 1 and 2, respectively, are two digital
data computers that make up the MC system and control the avionics systems (Figure 15-7). They
interface with the armament computer and allow the armament computer to route power to the
encoder/decoders for weapon release.

Figure 15-7 — Armament system basic controls.

Armament Override Switch

Located in the nose wheel well, the armament safety override switch in the OVERRIDE position
provides a parallel path for master arm power for ground operations (Figure 15-8).

Landing Gear Control Panel

Located on the pilot’s lower left instrument panel, the landing gear control handle in the DOWN
position disables normal weapon release, launch, and fire signals. In the UP position, 28 volts direct
current (dc) is directed from the main landing gear weight-off-wheels (WOW) relay to the master arm
circuit breaker.

15-8
 Figure 15-8 — Armament override switch.

Pilot Cockpit Armament System Controls and Indicators

Additional armament system basic controls located in the pilot cockpit are described in the following
paragraphs.

Ground Power Control Panel

The ground (GND) power (PWR) control panel is located on the pilot’s left-hand console (Figure 15-
9), the GND PWR control panel controls power to the aircraft and systems. The panel contains five
three-position switches. The EXT PWR switch controls application of external power to the aircraft.
The OFF position disables electrical power; the RESET position resets the external power monitoring
circuits; and the NORM, or normal, position allows external power to be supplied to the aircraft after
placing the switch to RESET.
The 1, 2, 3, and 4 switches control application of power to aircraft systems preventing excessive
equipment operating time because of other unassociated ground operations. The A and B ON
positions apply power to selected systems; the AUTO position disables power to selected systems.
Placing the EXT PWR switch to the OFF position returns all power control switches to AUTO.

15-9
 Figure 15-9 — Pilot cockpit armament system basic controls.

Mission Computer/Hydraulic Isolation Panel

The MC/hydraulic (HYD) isolation (ISOL) panel is located on the pilot’s left-hand console (Figure 15-
9), the MC/HYD ISOL panel contains the MC switch. The MC switch is a three-position switch that
controls power to the mission computers. The 1 OFF position disables MC1; the NORM, position
enables both MC 1 and 2; and the 2 OFF position disables MC2.

Digital Display Indicator

The DDI is located on the pilot’s instrument panel (Figure 15-9). The DDI allows for pilot interface with
and display from the SMS and MC systems. The DDI displays the SMS wingform, which displays
weapon type, quantity, priority, and status. The DDI controls also provide selected weapon video and
a means for weapon selection and moding, and control and display of BIT functionality. The DDI

15-10
controls consist of the OFF, NIGHT, DAY, and AUTO switches used to apply power to the DDI under
various lighting conditions; BRT switch to vary brightness of the display; and CONT switch to vary
contrast of the display. Twenty pushbutton switches around the face of the DDI allow for selection of
weapon modes and options, based on selected weapon type.

Head-Up Display
The HUD (Figure 15-9) is located on the pilot’s instrument panel. The HUD allows for weapon
displays. The OFF/BRT switch controls power and brightness of the HUD display.

Master Arm Control Panel

The master arm control panel (Figure 15-9) is located on the pilot’s instrument panel. The master arm
control panel allows for arming the armament systems, selecting A/A and A/G master modes, and
emergency jettison of weapons and stores.
The MASTER switch is a two-
position switch. ARM enables
arming and SAFE inhibits
releasing, launching, or firing of
the aircraft armament systems.
The A/A switch is a pushbutton
switch/indicator that selects A/A
master mode. This mode allows
for the selection, control, and
launch of air intercept weapons
and firing of the aircraft gun in
A/A mode. Additionally, this
mode commands the right DDI
to display the A/A radar attack
display.
The A/G switch is a pushbutton
switch/indicator that allows for
selection, control, launch, and
fire of A/G weapons and the
aircraft gun. Additionally, this
mode commands the left DDI to
display the stores wingform
display.

Aircraft Controller Grip

The aircraft controller grip is
located on the pilot’s control
stick (Figure 15-10). The aircraft
controller grip contains
numerous switches for
selection, launch, release, and
fire of weapons in both A/A and
A/G modes and actuation of the
HUD camera.
Figure 15-10 — Cockpit armament system basic controls.

15-11
Engine Throttle Grips
The engine throttle grips are located on the pilot’s left-hand console (Figure 15-10). The left and right
throttle grips contain numerous switches for control of weapons in both A/A and A/G modes and the
dispensing of expendable payloads.

Aft Cockpit Armament System Controls and Indicators

Additional armament system basic controls located in the aft cockpit are described in the following
paragraphs; refer to Figure 15-11 and Figure 15-12.

Digital Display Indicator

The DDIs (Figure 15-11) are located on the aft instrument panel and perform the same functionality
as those in the pilot cockpit. On aircraft 161354 through 163778, the aft cockpit DDIs are connected
in parallel with those in the pilot cockpit. On F/A-18D 163986 and up, the aft cockpit DDIs are
independent displays.

Figure 15-11 — Rear cockpit armament system basic controls.

Master Mode Select Panel/Rear Advisory and Threat Warning Panel

The master mode select panel/rear advisory and threat warning panel (Figure 15-11) is located on the
aft cockpit instrument panel. The master mode select panel contains the A/A and A/G switches for
F/A-18 161354 through 163778. The rear advisory and threat warning indicator panel assembly

15-12
contains the A/A and A/G switches for F/A-18D 163986 and up. The master mode switches perform
the same functionality as those in the pilot cockpit.

Left- and Right-Hand Controllers

The left- and right-hand controllers (Figure 15-12) are located in the aft cockpit on the left- and right-
hand consoles (Figure 15-6). The controllers contain numerous switches for control of weapons in
A/G mode and the dispensing of expendable payloads.

Figure 15-12 — Left- and right-hand controllers.

Jettison System
The jettison system provides methods for jettisoning weapons and stores from the aircraft.

Emergency Jettison
Emergency jettison is a mode of jettisoning all weapons/stores from the five pylon stations.
Conditions for jettison are weight-off-wheels or landing gear control handle in the UP position and the
EMERG JETT PUSH TO JETT switch pressed.
The EMERG JETT PUSH TO JETT switch is located on the master arm control panel on the pilot’s
instrument panel, the EMERG JETT panel on the aft cockpit instrument panel (F/A-18D trainer), or on
the EMERG JETT panel on the aft cockpit left vertical control panel (F/A-18D night attack) (Figure 15-
13 and Figure 15-14), the emergency jettison switch initiates jettison from all pylon stations.

15-13
Selective Jettison
Selective jettison is a mode of individually jettisoning left fuselage missile, right fuselage missile,
racks, launchers, and stores. Conditions for jettison are the landing gear control handle in the UP
position, all gear up and locked, MASTER switch to ARM, stations selected by the JETT STATION
SELECT switches, the SELECT JETT switch to the desired position, and the JETT pushbutton
pressed.

Figure 15-13 — Pilot cockpit jettison system.

x JETT STATION SELECT switches are located on the pilot’s instrument panel, the JETT
STATION SELECT switches are five pushbutton switches/indicators that correspond to the
aircraft left outboard (LO), left inboard (LI), centerline (CTR), right inboard (RI), and right
outboard (RO) pylon stations and are used to select the stations for selective jettison or
auxiliary release
x SELECT JETT switch is located on the pilot’s left vertical control panel, the SELECT JETT
switch is a five-position switch used to select the station or type of jettison to be accomplished;
the SAFE position inhibits all select jettison functions; the L FUS MSL and R FUS MSL, or left
15-14
 and right fuselage missile position, selects the respective fuselage station for selective jettison;
the RACK/LCHR position selects weapons and stores on bomb rack unit (BRU)-32s for
selective jettison; the STORES position selects weapons (on vertical ejection racks (VERs),
BRU-32, BRU-41, and BRU-42), Maverick launcher and weapon, A/A launcher and weapon,
drop tanks and data pods on BRU-32s for selected jettison with the exception of HARM, which
is fired off unguided
x The SELECT JETT, JETT switch is located in the center of the SELECT JETT switch, the
select jettison switch initiates selective jettison or auxiliary release of selected stations

Figure 15-14 — Aft cockpit jettison system.

Auxiliary Release
Auxiliary release is a gravity mode of jettison used on the five pylon stations when emergency and
selective jettison fails. Conditions for auxiliary release are a hung weapon, the landing gear handle in
the UP position, all gear up and locked, MASTER switch to ARM, stations selected by the JETT
STATION SELECT switches, SELECT JETT switch to RACK/LCHR, AUX REL switch to ENABLE,
and the SELECT JETT, JETT switch pressed.
The AUX REL switch is located in the pilot’s cockpit on the electronic countermeasures/infrared
countermeasures control panel. The auxiliary release switch is a two-position switch used to enable

15-15
or inhibit auxiliary release. The ENABLE position enables auxiliary release. The NORM position
inhibits auxiliary release.

Suspension and Accessory Equipment

The following data is intended to provide ordnance personnel with a brief description of suspension
and accessory equipment specifically used with the F/A-18A/B/C/D aircraft.

Fuselage Centerline Pylon

The suspension underwing unit (SUU)-62 fuselage centerline pylons provide the necessary
mechanical and electrical interface between the aircraft fuselage and the stores to be carried. The
BRU-32 bomb rack is contained internally and provides pylon/weapon interface.

Wing Pylon
The SUU-63 wing pylons provide the necessary mechanical and electrical interface between the
aircraft wing structure and the stores to be carried. It is capable of being installed at any of the wing
stations. The BRU-32 bomb rack is contained internally and provides the pylon/weapon interface.
Bomb Ejector Rack
The F/A-18A/B/C/D aircraft utilizes the BRU-32 bomb ejector racks as the parent rack. The BRU-32 is
used to suspend single weapons/stores, BRU-33s, BRU-41s, BRU-42s, BRU-55s, and launcher unit
(LAU)-115, LAU-117, and LAU-118 missile launchers using 14- and 30-inch suspension hooks.
Features of the bomb rack are safety interlock and automatic sway bracing. Sensing switches are
incorporated to indicate to the armament computer that a store is loaded. The primary ejection unit
uses two cartridges to generate the required gas pressure for rack operation. The auxiliary release
unit uses one cartridge, which opens the hooks only, should primary ejection fail. Nose and tail
arming units are provided for mechanical fuzes, and a receptacle is provided for connection of the
electric fuze. There are also provisions for positive arming by use of positive arming latches.

Accessory Racks
Accessory racks are used to expand the capability of a weapon system, and include the following:
x BRU-33A/A canted vertical ejector rack (CVER) is used to suspend and release two
weapons/stores and has 14-inch suspension hooks and is capable of carrying stores weighing
up to 1,000 pounds each; store ejection is accomplished by two cartridge-generated gas
pressure ejectors; the rack provides automatic sway bracing through the use of spring-loaded,
self-adjusting wedges; the rack has zero-retention force (ZRF) arming units to allow for in-flight
pilot release options, including provisions for positive arming by use of positive arming latches
x BRU-41 improved multiple ejector rack (IMER) is designed to carry and release up to six
weapons/stores; each ejector unit assembly is provided with a safety stop lever, arming units
and positive arming latches; a cartridge-activated mechanism is used to provide for store
ejection; the rack provides the necessary interface for store sensing, arming, and ejector
breech firing; sway brace adapter brackets are used with small-diameter practice bombs
(BDU-48, Mk 76, and BDU-59)
x BRU-42 improved triple ejector rack (ITER) is designed to carry and release up to three
weapons/stores; each ejector unit assembly is provided with a safety stop lever located on the
aft sway brace assembly
x BRU-55 bomb rack provides a multiple carriage capability for A/G weapons and is attached to
the BRU-32 bomb rack and has 14-inch suspension hooks and is capable of carrying two
15-16
 stores ranging from 10 to 16 inches in diameter and weighing up to 1,000 pounds each; the
BRU-55A/A variant carries either Aircraft/Store Electrical Interconnection System, Military
Standard (MIL-STD)-1760 or non-MIL-STD-1760 stores; store ejection is accomplished by two
cartridge-generated gas pressure ejectors; the rack provides automatic sway bracing through
the use of spring-loaded, self-adjusting wedges; the BRU-55A/A allows for in-flight pilot options
(e.g., low/high drag, primary/option mode); there are also provisions for positive arming by use
of positive arming latches

Launchers
Launchers are used to carry or suspend self-propelled weapons. Most launchers serve to guide the
self-propelled weapons on their first few inches of flight.
x LAU-7 series missile launcher is a rail-type missile launcher that carries and launches the AIM-
9(series) (Sidewinder) missiles; the launcher also carries various instrumentation pods
x LAU-115 guided missile launcher is a rail-type missile launcher that carries and launches AIM-
7(series) missiles; a jettison adapter is attached for improved jettison characteristics
x LAU-116 guided missile launcher is an ejector-type launcher for carrying and launching the
AIM-120 missile on the fuselage stations 4 and 6
x LAU-117 guided missile launcher is a rail-type launcher for carrying and launching the AGM-65
missile
x LAU-118 guided missile launcher is a rail-type launcher for carrying and launching the AGM-
88(series) missiles
x LAU-127 guided missile launcher is a rail-type launcher for carrying and launching the AIM-
9(series) and AIM-120 missiles; the launcher also carries various instrumentation pods
x LAU-68(series) aircraft rocket launcher is a reusable launcher for carrying and launching seven
2.75 inch rockets in SINGLE or RIPPLE firing modes

AN/ALE-39 Countermeasures Dispensing System

The AN/ALE-39 countermeasures dispensing system dispenses decoys to confuse and jam enemy
electronic tracking, missile guidance, and homing systems. The system ejects expendable payloads
consisting of chaff, flares, or radiofrequency (RF) jammers singly or in groups from two 30-round
dispenser magazines located on the lower fuselage under the engine intakes.

AN/ALE-47 Countermeasures Dispensing System

The AN/ALE-47 countermeasures dispensing system provides for threat-adaptive, reprogrammable
computer-controlled dispenses of decoys to confuse and jam enemy electronic tracking, missile
guidance, and homing systems. The system ejects expendable payloads consisting of chaff, flares, or
RF jammers singly or in groups from four 30-round dispenser magazines located on the lower
fuselage under the engine intakes.

Aircraft Armament Configuration Capabilities

The basic armament configuration of the F/A-18A/B/C/D aircraft consists of LAU-116 series missile
launchers, LAU-7 series missile launchers, SUU-63 series pylons, SUU-62 series pylons, BRU-32
series bomb racks, and an M61A1/A2 20-mm gun.
The F/A-18A/B/C/D basic armament configuration can be reconfigured to accommodate a variety of
weapons; Figure 15-15 shows the station configuration capabilities. The Navy Tactical Reference

15-17
Publication (NTRP) 3-22.4-FA18A-D should be consulted for authorization to load/fuze any weapon
or store for flight.
A general description of the F/A-18A/B/C/D armament systems and suspension or releasing
equipment is contained in the Airborne Weapons/Stores Loading Manual, A1-F18AE-LWS-000.

Figure 15-15 — F/A-18 aircraft station configuration capabilities.

F/A-18E/F AND EA-18G AIRCRAFT

The F/A-18E/F Super Hornet provides significant improvements in combat range, payload, and
survivability in comparison to legacy F/A-18 aircraft. There is commonality of weapons systems,
avionics, and software among F/A-18 variants. The following paragraphs will provide an overview of
the aircraft armament system and will focus on the armament systems and subsystems of the F/A-
18E/F Super Hornet.

15-18
Armament System Basic Controls
The aircraft armament system consists of controls, indicators, circuit breakers, systems, and
subsystems necessary to release weapons/stores from the aircraft.

Armament Computer
The armament computer (Figure 15-16) interfaces with and is controlled by the MCs. The armament
computer interfaces with and controls the weapon station signal data control converters; monitors and
controls gun fire rates; and provides electric fuzing voltage. The armament computer contains the
digital WIP used to enter the weapon type and fuzing requirements for each station loaded.

Figure 15-16 — Armament computer.

The weapon-type code entered for each loaded station must match the weapon loaded, and the
nose/tail fuze code entered must be compatible. Otherwise, the armament computer will not allow it to
release normally. For weapons without nose/tail fuzes, the codes in the armament computer must still
match the weapon loaded. In addition, the quantity of rounds loaded in the M61 gun system is also
entered using the WIP.

Armament System Circuit Breakers

The armament system circuit breakers are located on the power distribution panels behind the right-
and left-hand maintenance access doors.

Landing Gear Control Panel

The landing gear control handle in the DOWN position disables normal weapon release, launch, and
fire signals. In the UP position 28 volts dc is directed from the main landing gear weight-off-wheels
relay to the master arm circuit breaker.

15-19
Armament Safety Override Switch
The armament safety override switch is on the nose wheel well maintenance panel. In the
OVERRIDE position, it provides a parallel path for master arm power for ground operations.

Mission Computers
Two digital data computers (Figure 15-16) make up the MC system and control the avionics systems.
They interface with the armament computer and allow power routing to signal data convertor controls
for weapon release. Power to the digital data computers is controlled by the MC switch on the
MC/HYD ISOL panel.

Signal Data Converter Control

The signal data converter control provides interface with the armament computer and weapons
loaded. The seven pylon converter controllers are identical. The two fuselage converter controllers
are identical and also provide interface to the wing tip launchers. The converter controllers provide
release voltage and weapons/rack/launcher status to the armament computer.

Pilot Cockpit Armament System Controls and Indicators

Digital Display Indicators
Cockpit DDIs are located on the main instrument panel
(left and right). DDIs are identical and display the same
information, although not at the same time. The SMS
uses the DDIs to display weapon, function, and option
selection. The operator makes a selection on the DDIs by
using the 20 pushbuttons around the edge of the display
screen and by using the up front control display (UFCD)
for quantity, multiple, and interval selection. Upon
initiation of the stores display, number, station, master
arm status, and type of weapons loaded are shown in the
wingorm display.
The wingform (Figure 15-17) is an outline of the aircraft
that identifies type, station, number, and status of
weapons loaded on the aircraft. A weapon is identified by
entering a code on the armament computer WIP. Data is
transmitted to the MC system, which displays the entered
code as an acronym. The acronym is displayed in the
wingform for the station in which the code was entered.
The operator makes a weapons selection for A/G
weapons by pressing the pushbutton switch next to the
acronym of the desired weapon. When this switch is
pressed, a box appears around the weapon acronym, Figure 15-17 — Typical wingform
indicating that weapon is selected. display.

Up Front Control Display

The UFCD (Figure 15-18) is a touch-sensitive display that provides the keypad, option select,
scratchpad, and option displays. The option select display allows selection of quantity (QTY), multiple
(MULT), and interval (INT) options. After selecting an option, the operator uses the keypad option to

15-20
enter a number, which will be displayed on the scratchpad display. After verifying the number on the
scratchpad display as correct, the operator presses the keypad option enter (ENT) to transmit the
number to the MC system. The MC provides the data to the armament computer for storage and
display on the DDIs.

Figure 15-18 — F/A-18E/F/G armament systems controls.

15-21
Head-Up Display
The HUD is located on the pilot’s main instrument panel, HUD
allows for weapon displays and visual markers.

Master Arm Control Panel

The master arm control panel assembly (Figure 15-19) allows
the operator to select the A/A, A/G, and MASTER modes. The
panel also contains the emergency jettison (EMRG JETT) and
push to jettison (PUSH TO JETT) switches.

Rear Cockpit Basic Control

An overview of the rear cockpit armament basic controls of the
F/A-18F series aircraft is described in the following paragraphs.

Digital Display Indicators

The DDIs are located on the rear cockpit instrument panel
(Figure 15-20). The rear DDIs provide independent displays but
are also capable of providing the same display as the cockpit.

Rear Advisory and Threat Warning Indicator Panel

The rear advisory and threat warning indicator panel assembly
contains the A/A and A/G switches, and on lot numbers 166449
and up, the MASTER ARM annunciator and LASER arm
annunciator.

Figure 15-19 — Master arm

control panel.

15-22
Figure 15-20 — F/A-18E/F/G rear cockpit armament systems controls.

15-23
Left- and Right-Hand Controllers
The rear left- and right-hand controllers (Figure 15-21) contain numerous switches for weapons
control and on lot numbers 166449 and up, they contain selection, launch, and release of weapons.

Figure 15-21 — F/A-18E/F/G left- and right-hand controllers.

A/A Missile Control Systems

The A/A missile control systems provide the ability to select and launch A/A missiles including AIM-7,
AIM-9, and AIM-120. Some of the A/A missile controls are located on the aircraft controller grip, as
shown in Figure 15-22. The cockpit switches associated with the A/A weapons system are described
in the following paragraphs.

A/A Weapon Select Switches

These switches are located on the cockpit controller grip assembly, rear cockpit controller grip
assembly in trainer configuration; and on 166449 and up night attack configuration, the right-hand
controller. The weapon select switch is a four-position switch used to select A/A weapons. The
forward position selects the AIM-7; down selects the AIM-9; right selects the AIM-120; and aft selects
the gun (Figure 15-20).

15-24
Cage/Uncage Switch
This switch is located on the cockpit right engine
throttle grip—the rear cockpit right engine throttle
grip in trainer configuration, and the right-hand
controller on 166449 and up night attack
configuration. The cage/uncage switch cages and
uncages the selected AIM-9 seeker. On F/A-18F
165541 through 165934 night attack configuration,
the A/A cage/uncage function is performed in the
rear cockpit by the aft position of the multifunction
switch.

A/A Missile Trigger Switch

This switch is located on the cockpit controller grip
assembly and rear cockpit controller grip
assembly in trainer configuration. The rear cockpit
controller grip assembly A/A missile trigger switch
is inoperative. The cockpit A/A missile trigger
switch is a two-position switch. The first detent
initiates the HUD camera and the second detent
initiates A/A weapon launch.
Figure 15-22 — Aircraft controller grip.
A/A Weapon Release Switch
This switch is located on the right-hand controller on 166449 and up and is a single pushbutton switch
used to initiate A/A missile launch.

IR COOL Switch
The IR COOL switch is located on the spin recovery control panel (Figure 15-18). It is a three-position
switch that controls the flow of coolant/high pressure pure air to the AIM/CATM-9M seeker head. The
OFF position disables flow unless the aircraft is weight-off-wheels, the MASTER switch is in the ARM
position, and an AIM-9 station is selected. NORM enables flow to all seeker heads when weight-off-
wheels. ORIDE enables flow when power is applied to the aircraft.

WPN Volume Control

The WPN volume control is located on the cockpit Intercommunication Amplifier-Control and rear
cockpit volume control panel. This switch controls AIM-9 tone volume.

Radar Control Switch

The radar control switch is located on the SNSR pod control panel. The radar switch controls power
to the radar system. The radar system controls the AIM-7 and AIM-120 missiles.

A/G Weapon Control System

The A/G weapon control system provides the ability to select, launch, fire, or release A/G missiles,
bombs, and rockets. Some of the A/G weapons controls are on the left and right throttle grips, shown
in Figure 15-23. Cockpit switches and displays used in the A/G weapons subsystem are described in
the following sections.

15-25
Cage/Uncage Switch
This switch is located on the cockpit right
engine throttle grip—rear cockpit right engine
throttle grip in trainer configuration, and the
right-hand controller on 166449 and up night
attack configuration. The cage/uncage switch
cages and uncages the selected Maverick
seeker or initiates HARM functions.
On F/A-18F 165541 through 165934 night
attack configuration, the A/G cage/uncage
function is performed in the rear cockpit by the
aft position of the multifunction switch.

Throttle Designator Control Switch

This TDC switch is located on the cockpit right
engine throttle grip—rear cockpit right engine
throttle grip in trainer configuration, and on the
left- and right-hand controllers on F/A-18F
165541 through 165934 night attack
configuration. The TDC switch slews the
weapon video crosshairs over the target. Figure 15-23 — Left and right throttle grips.
Designator Control Switch
The designator control (DC) switch is located on the right-hand controller on 166449 and up night
attack configuration. The DC switch slews the weapon video crosshairs over the target.

HARM Sequence/FLIR FOV/RAID Switch

The HARM Sequence/FLIR FOV/RAID switch is located on the cockpit left engine throttle grip and on
the rear cockpit left engine throttle grip in trainer configuration. The switch sequences between HARM
targets. On F/A-18F 165541 through 165934 night attack configuration, the HARM target sequence
function is performed in the rear cockpit by the forward position of the multifunction switch.

HARM Switch
On 166449 and up night attack configuration, the HARM target sequence is performed in the rear
cockpit by the HARM switch, located on the right-hand controller (Figure 15-21).

Multifunction Switch
On F/A-18F 165541 through 165934 night attack configuration, the switch is located on the left- and
right-hand controllers. The multifunction switch is a three-position switch used for weapon control.
The forward position sequences between HARM targets. The aft position cages/uncages selected
seekers. The down position functions as the RAID/FLIR switch.

A/G Weapon Release Switch

This switch is located on the cockpit controller grip assembly (Figure 15-22)—rear cockpit controller
grip assembly in trainer configuration, and the left-hand controller on 166449 and up night attack
configuration. The cockpit A/G weapon release switch/bomb button/pickle switch initiates launch, fire,
or release of all selected A/G weapons. The rear cockpit controller grip assembly A/G weapon

15-26
release switch is inoperative. On 166449 and up night attack configuration, the left-hand controller
A/G weapon release switch is a single pushbutton switch that is armament computer-controlled, with
capability to release a limited type of A/G weapons.

Up Front Control Display

The UFCD is located on the cockpit and rear cockpit main instrument panel (Figure 15-18). The
UFCD enables the quantity, multiple, and interval options for A/G weapons to be entered into the
MCs.

Electrical fuzing System

The electrical fuzing system is located in the armament computer. The electrical fuzing system
provides the voltage to arm electrically-fuzed A/G weapons. The system supplies the selected VT,
INST, DLY 1, or DLY 2 voltage when the bomb rack hooks open for weapon release.

Jettison System
The jettison system provides a method of jettisoning weapons/stores from the aircraft. The following
paragraphs describe controls and indicators of the jettison system.

Emergency Jettison
Emergency jettison is a mode of jettisoning all
weapons/stores from the seven pylon stations.
Conditions for emergency jettison are weight-off-
wheels or landing gear control handle in the UP
position and the EMERG JETT PUSH TO JETT switch
(Figure 15-24) pressed.
The EMERG JETT PUSH TO JETT switch is located
on the cockpit master arm control panel and rear
cockpit EMERG JETT panel. The EMERG JETT PUSH
TO JETT switch initiates jettison from all pylon
stations.

Selective Jettison
Selective jettison is a mode of individually jettisoning
left fuselage missile, right fuselage missile, racks,
launchers, and stores. Conditions for selective jettison
are the landing gear control handle in the UP position,
all gear up and locked, MASTER switch to ARM,
stations selected by the JETT STATION SELECT
Figure 15-24 — Typical emergency
switches, SELECT JETT switch rotated to the position
jettison switch.
needed, and the JETT switch pressed.
x SELECT JETT switch is located on the cockpit left vertical control panel (Figure 15-18), the
SELECT JETT switch is a five-position switch that is used to select the station or type of
jettison needed; the SAFE position inhibits all select jettison functions; the L FUS MSL and R
FUS MSL positions select the left/right fuselage missile station
x The RACK/LCHR position selects weapons and stores on the selected BRU-32 stations; the
STORES position selects weapons (on BRU-33/55, BRU-41, BRU-42, and BRU-32), LAU-117
launcher with the AGM-65, LAU-115 launcher with A/A missiles, fuel tanks, and data pods on
15-27
 the BRU-32 for selected jettison with the exception of AGM-88 HARM, which is launched
armed and unguided
x The JETT STATION SELECT switches are located on the cockpit main instrument panel
(Figure 15-17) and are seven pushbutton switch/indicators that correspond to the aircraft LO,
LM, LI, CT, RI, RM, RO,used to select the pylon station for selective jettison or auxiliary
release
x The SELECT JETT, JETT switch is located in the center of the SELECT JETT switch, the
JETT switch initiates select jettison or auxiliary release of the selected stations

Auxiliary Jettison
Auxiliary release is a gravity mode of jettison used on selected pylon stations when emergency and
selective jettison fails. Conditions for auxiliary release are a hung weapon, landing gear control
handle in the UP position, all gear up and locked, MASTER switch to ARM, stations selected by the
JETT STATION SELECT switches, SELECT JETT switch to RACK/LCHR, AUX REL switch to
ENABLE, and the SELECT JETT, JETT switch pressed.
AUX REL switch is located on the cockpit electronic countermeasures (ECM) control panel. The AUX
REL switch is a two-position switch used to enable or inhibit auxiliary release. The ENABLE position
enables auxiliary release. The NORM position inhibits auxiliary release.

Gun System Controls (F/A-18E/F)

The gun system provides the means to select, arm, and fire the M61 gun in A/A and A/G modes.
Firing voltage, rounds count, and rate of fire are all controlled by the armament computer.

A/A Weapon Select Switch

This switch is located on the cockpit controller grip assembly—rear cockpit controller grip assembly in
trainer configuration and on the right-hand controller on 166449 and up night attack configuration.
The weapon select switch (Figure 15-22) is a four-position switch used to select A/A weapons. On
F/A-18E/F, the aft position selects the gun. On EA-18G, the aft position selects the ALQ-218 system.
Gun selection in A/G mode is made by selecting the GUN option on the wingform display. The GUN
option will be selected (boxed) and rounds remaining will be displayed. If another A/G weapon has
already been boxed and then GUN is selected, hot gun (gun fire available during A/G release) is
enabled. When the MASTER switch is positioned to ARM and RDY is displayed, firing voltage is
applied when the A/A missile trigger switch is positioned to the second detent.
Gun selection in the A/A mode is made from the aft position of the A/A weapon select switch.
Selecting A/A gun commands the right DDI to the A/A radar attack display and selects the high rate of
fire. When the MASTER switch is positioned to ARM and RDY is displayed, firing voltage is applied
when the A/A missile trigger switch is positioned to the second detent.

A/A Missile Trigger Switch

This switch is located on the cockpit controller grip assembly and rear cockpit controller grip assembly
in trainer configuration. The rear cockpit controller grip assembly A/A missile trigger switch is
inoperative. The cockpit A/A missile trigger switch (Figure 15-22) is a two-position switch. The first
detent initiates the HUD camera and the second detent initiates gun firing.

15-28
Integrated Defensive Electronic Countermeasures (IDECM) Dispensing Systems
IDECM dispensing systems include the AN/ALE-47 integrated countermeasures system and AN/ALE-
50A integrated countermeasures system. Dependent on aircraft configuration, countermeasure
systems contain numerous/different weapon replaceable assemblies.

AN/ALE-47 Dispensing System

The AN/ALE-47 system provides for threat adaptive, reprogrammed computer- or manual-controlled
dispenses of decoys to confuse and jam enemy electronic tracking, missile guidance, and homing
systems. The system ejects expendable payloads of chaff, flares, or RF jammers from four dispenser
magazines located on the lower fuselage aft of the engine intakes.

AN/ALE-50A Dispensing System

The AN/ALE-50A system provides for reprogrammable, computer- or manual-controlled dispenses of
an active RF transmitting towed decoy. The magazine with three decoys is installed in the lower
fuselage between the main landing gear doors.

ECM Control Panel

Located on the cockpit center console, the ECM control panel contains the AN/ALE-47/50A system
power switches. The DISPENSER switch ON position applies power to the AN/ALE-47 system. The
BYPASS position allows for AN/ALE-47 degraded mode dispenses. The ECM JETT, JETT SEL
switch is a pushbutton switch/indicator that enables jettison of all AN/ALE-47 payloads identified in
the Mission Data File (MDF) as being jettisonable, typically flares and IR payloads. The
DECOY/JAMMER switch ON position applies power to the AN/ALE-50A system. The CUT position is
a backup sever command to cut the towed decoy line from the AN/ALE-50A magazine.

Aircraft Armament Configuration Capabilities

The basic armament configuration of the F/A-18E/F and EA-18G aircraft consists of fuselage-
mounted LAU-116 missile launchers, wingtip-mounted LAU-127 missile launchers (F/A-18E/F),
wingtip-mounted AN/ALQ-218 pods (EA-18G), SUU-78 centerline pylons, SUU-79 inboard/mid-board
wing pylons, SUU-80 outboard wing low drag pylons (LDP), BRU-32 bomb racks, ADU-773 launcher
adapters, and an M61A2 gun (F/A-18E/F) (Figure 15-25 and Figure 15-26).
The F/A-18E/F/G basic armament configuration can be reconfigured to accommodate a variety of
weapons; Figure 15-27 shows the station configuration capabilities.
A general description of the F/A-18E/F and EA-18G aircraft armament systems and suspension or
releasing equipment is contained in the Airborne Weapons/Stores Loading Manual, A1-F18EA-LWS-
000. For specific weapons loading and flight authorization, refer to the NTRP 3-22.4-F/A-18E/F,
NTRP 3-22.2-EA18G, or the flight clearance message.

15-29
Figure 15-25 — F/A-18E/F/G basic armament configuration.

15-30
Figure 15-26 — F/A-18E/F/G basic armament configuration.
15-31
 Figure 15-27 — F/A-18E/F/G basic aircraft configuration.

ANTISUBMARINE WARFARE WEAPONS SYSTEMS

Antisubmarine warfare (ASW) is becoming a broad field. New developments are being made in
submarine detection as well as in the tactical deployment of the equipment. The search stores
(primarily sonobuoys)—launched at precise intervals and locations (and with the airborne electronics
equipment)—give accurate information in the detection of submarines. The kill stores consist of
torpedoes, mines, bombs, rockets, and guided missiles. The basic ASW search and kill store system
and its associated equipment are currently used in the P-3 and P-8 fixed-wing aircraft and the MH-60
rotary-wing aircraft.

15-32
P-3 AIRCRAFT
The P-3 is a four-engine, low-wing aircraft designed for patrol and ASW. The armament system
consists of equipment for loading, carrying, and releasing weapons and search stores. Weapons
include bombs, mines, torpedoes, missiles, and rocket launchers. Search stores include sonobuoys,
parachute flares, smoke markers, bathythermograph buoys, and signal underwater sound (SUS).

Armament Systems Basic controls

The basic P-3 (Figure 15-28) ASW weapons system consists of the equipment and accessories
necessary for carrying and releasing kill stores and search stores. Armament basic controls consist of
the following components: pilot armament control panel, armament control box, weapons release
switches, armament safety circuit disable switch, forward interconnection box, aft interconnection box,
and armament circuit breaker panel.

Figure 15-28 — P-3 ordnance stations.

Armament Control Box

In all series of P-3 Orion aircraft, the pilot armament control panel, wing jettison, and special weapon
armament panel have been replaced by an armament control box (ACB) (Figure 15-29). The ACB is
located on the center pedestal at the flight station. The ACB combines the functionality of the two
panels and provides the pilot with command control of all kill and search stores.
The switches and controls that are found on the armament control box are as follows:
x The ARM HAZARD warning light warns the pilot of a malfunction of any of the 18 weapon
release buffer relays
x The MASTER ARM switch controls power for enabling arming and normal release of the wing
and bomb bay stores
x The MASTER ARM cue light advises pilot to change the position of the MASTER ARM switch
in response to action by the tactical coordinator (TACCO) or computer
x The BOMB BAY door switch controls opening and closing of the bomb bay doors
x The BOMB BAY cue light advises the pilot to change position of the BOMB BAY door switch in
response to action by the TACCO or computer

15-33
 x The search power (SRCH PWR) switch allows the pilot
final control over the release of all search stores; the
computer monitors the position of this switch
x The SRCH PWR cue light, when illuminated, tells the
pilot to turn the SRCH PWR switch ON; it lights only
when the switch must be moved from OFF to ON; there
is no offline function of this light
x The KILL READY cue light advises the pilot that
preparations are completed for release of the
weapon/store
x The JETTISON switch initiates release of all wing and
bomb bay weapons/stores in a safe (unarmed) condition
x The manual armament select (MANUAL ARMT SEL)
panel provides the TACCO with controls necessary for
manual mode of operation

Weapon Release Switches

Both the pilot and copilot have switches for the release of
weapons (Figure 15-30). The switches are located on the
inboard side of the control wheels and are labeled stores Figure 15-29 — Pilot armament
release (STORES REL). Weapon release can also be made by control panel.
depressing the release (REL) switch located on the TACCO
manual armament select panel.

Armament Subsystems
The following paragraphs provide general
information on the aircraft armament
subsystems to include torpedo, Harpoon,
Maverick, jettison, and defensive
countermeasure systems and subsystem
components.

Torpedo System Basic Controls

The aircraft’s torpedo system consists of the
following basic controls:
x The torpedo presetter (TORP
Presetter) panel provides the controls
and indicators for manual or automatic
preset of Mk 46, Mk 50, and Mk 54
torpedoes
x Torpedo Mk 50 heater control panel Figure 15-30 — P-3 weapon release switches.
provides selection of Mk 50 heater
power
x DIRECTED SEARCH MODE selector panel (Figure 15-31) provides directed search capability
for Mk 46, Mk 50, and Mk 54 torpedoes

15-34
Harpoon System Basic Controls
The Harpoon missile system basic controls are described
below.
x The Harpoon aircraft command launch control
(HACLC) panel provides power application,
controls, and displays for the Harpoon missile; the
controls and displays are used for manually
defining missile selection/deselection, target
range, relative bearing, attack seeker modes,
aircraft true airspeed, and altitude inputs
x The data processor computer is a general-
purpose, stored program, digital computer that Figure 15-31 — DIRECTED SEARCH
provides the digital communications link between MODE selector panel.
the HACLC and the Harpoon missile; the data
processor computer serves as an interface unit to
obtain control and data information from existing
aircraft systems; it performs the launch interlocks
and prelaunch computations for missile
initialization and control of the launch sequence

Maverick Missile Control System Basic Controls

The Maverick missile control system (MMCS) provides
the capability to individually identify and track up to four
separate targets with missiles loaded on wing stations
10, 11, 16, and 17. The MMCS is composed of the
following basic controls.
x The missile interface box is the heart of the MMCS
and is the one component through which all
signals used to control the MMCS are routed
x The missile armament panel (Figure 15-32)
provides the TACCO with the status of the MMCS
and allows the TACCO to control various missile
functions; the TACCO can select up to four
missiles to enter the launch mode (land or ship),
initiate missile cooling, and activate the missile
x The missile/infrared detection set (IRDS) status
panel provides missile and IRDS control status
indicators
x The missile controllers are two identical and
interchangeable joysticks used to provide missile
and IRDS turret controls to the missile interface
box

Jettison System Figure 15-32 — Missile armament

All kill stores on the aircraft will be jettisoned in an panel.
unarmed condition when the pilot places the JETTISON

15-35
switch on the pilot armament control box in the ACTUATED position. The kill stores are jettisoned
from the aircraft within a 20-second period. Components and functions of the jettison system are
described below.
x WING ONLY JETTISON switch initiates jettison release of wing weapons/stores in a safe
(unarmed) condition. The WING ONLY JETTISON switch is a separate guarded (JETTISON)
switch located on the pilot armament control box.
x The jettison function can be terminated at any time before release by placing the JETTISON or
WING ONLY JETTISON switch to the OFF position

Defensive Countermeasures
The AN/ALE-39 and AN/ALE-47 countermeasures dispensing systems and controls are described
below.
x The AN/ALE-39 countermeasures dispensing system, in conjunction with the AN/AAR-47
missile warning set (MWS), is designed to protect the aircraft from infrared guided missiles; the
countermeasures dispenser (CMD) system installed in this aircraft was designed to only
dispense flare payloads
o The CMD control panel is located at the
base of the copilot overhead and provides
the functional interface to the ALE-39
countermeasures dispensing system
o The AN/ALE-39 CMD programmer is
located at the TACCO console in the upper-
right corner and generates control signals
for programmed or single ejection of
payload sequences controlled by the CMD
control and initiated manually or
automatically by the MWS
x The AN/ALE-47 countermeasures dispensing
system, in conjunction with the AN/AAR-47 MWS,
is designed to protect the P-3C anti-surface
warfare improvement program (AIP) aircraft from
surface-to-air and A/A missiles; the AN/ALE-47
system has the capability to automatically
dispense a combination of chaff, flare, or jammer
payloads. An example of the ALE-47 cockpit
Figure 15-33 — AN/ALE-47 cockpit
controls is shown in Figure 15-33
controls.
o The dispenser housings are located
underneath the aircraft and are designed to remain installed in the aircraft for quick
loading and unloading of the magazine assemblies; six dispensers are on the P-3 AIP
aircraft—two dispenser housings located on the nose of the aircraft and one on each
side of the nose wheel well door
o The magazine assemblies are loaded into each dispenser housing; each magazine is
partitioned into two sections, tubes 1 through 10 and tubes 11 through 30

15-36
Weapon System
The weapon system consists of the equipment and accessories necessary for loading, carrying, and
releasing of kill and search stores. The weapon system is composed of two subsystems, the
armament (kill store) subsystem and the ordnance (search store) subsystem.
The armament system refers to equipment used for carriage and delivery of weapons/stores from the
wing and bomb bay stations. The ordnance system refers to equipment used for carriage and delivery
of search stores.
A maximum of eight bomb bay stations and ten wing stations are available for carriage of weapons.
Forty-eight unpressurized sonobuoy launch tubes (SLTs), three pressurized SLTs, and one free fall
chute are used with the search store system.

Bomb Bay System

The bomb bay is designed to carry various arrangements of weapons with a maximum of eight
stations available at one time. The eight basic stations (Figure 15-34) are arranged in two layers; odd-
numbered stations in the upper layer and even-numbered stations in the lower layer. This
configuration places a limitation on the order of release of weapons in the upper layer; a weapon in
the upper layer cannot be released until the interfering weapon in the lower layer has been released.

Figure 15-34 — P-3 Bomb bay weapon stations.

Basic configuration permits mixed store loading to meet varied operational requirements. Bomb racks
are attached to removable pylons with two types of pylons being used (primary pylon and
1,000/2,000-pound class store pylon). Each bomb rack installation is assigned a number or a number
followed by a letter. Bomb rack weight limitations are determined by Tactical Manual (TACMAN)
station loading authorization.

15-37
Search Store System
The search store system provides the equipment and controls for selection and release of size “A”
sonobuoys from 48 unpressurized SLTs, three pressured SLTs, and one free fall chute. The 48
unpressurized SLTs are not accessible from inside the aircraft and must be loaded while the aircraft
is on the ground.
The three pressurized SLTs are accessible from inside the aircraft and may be loaded during flight.
Stowage is provided in the aft cabin for 36 size “A” sonobuoys. The unpressurized free fall chute is
provided for the release of size “A” and size “B” sonobuoys or other similar size search stores as may
be authorized.

Unpressurized SLTs
The 48 unpressurized SLTs are designated by letters A through G and numerals 1 through 8. These
launchers must be loaded while the aircraft is on the ground. The breech assembly is mounted at the
top of the launcher tube. Sonobuoy launch containers (SLCs) are retained by a quarter turn cam
retention device on the SLT which mates with the retention plate on the closed end of the SLC.

Suspension and Accessory Equipment

The following data is intended to provide ordnance personnel with a brief description of suspension
and accessory equipment specifically used with the P-3 aircraft. Detailed information is available in
the Airborne Weapons/Stores Loading Manual, NAVAIR 01-75PAC-75.

Bomb Bay Pylon Assemblies

The P-3 bomb bay is capable of being configured with the pylon assemblies described in the following
paragraphs.

Primary Pylon Assembly

Four primary pylon assemblies (Figure 15-35) are provided for carrying a maximum of eight bomb
bay stores. The pylon consists of two BRU-12/A bomb racks mounted between two pylon ends. The
racks are removable from the pylon ends and the assembly is removable from the bomb bay. A quick-
release diagonal strut is attached between the pylon ends to maintain rigidity. Sway braces are an
integral part of the pylon ends.

1,000/2,000-Pound Class Store Pylon Assembly

Three 1,000/2,000-Pound Class Store Pylon Assemblies are provided for carrying a maximum of
three 1,000-pound or one 2,000-pound class weapon. The assembly consists of a BRU-14/A bomb
rack with mounting adapters (or Aero 1A/1B adapters on station 4C), or mounted on a one-piece
pylon. The bomb rack is attached to the adapters and the adapters are attached to the pylon. Four
sway braces are used with each pylon assembly and attached to the bomb bay overhead. Three hoist
positions are provided on the pylon and are identified as HOIST POSITION A, B, and C. Their use is
determined by the relation of the weapon suspension lugs and the Center of Gravity (CG) of the
weapon.

15-38
 Figure 15-35 — P-3 Primary pylon assembly.

Bomb Bay Stations

Figure 15-36 and Figure 15-37 illustrate the bomb bay configurations for various loads. Each
configuration is identified by letter (A, B, C, etc.) or name (Basic, Special, etc.). See the P-3 Tactical
Manual for current authorized configurations/loads.

15-39
Figure 15-36 — P-3 bomb bay configuration.

15-40
 Figure 15-37 — P-3 primary bomb bay configuration

Wing Stations
Table 15-1 shows configuration capabilities for the wing stations. Figure 15-38 should be used with
Table 15-1 for various stores. The P-3 Tactical Manual should be consulted for current authorized
configurations and loads.
Table 15-1 — Wing Station Configuration Capabilities
Equipment Loading Stations
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Standardized
X X X X X X X X X X
Pylon
ADU-
X X X X X X
299/LAU-7
AN/ALE-37A X X X X
LAU-117 X X X X
AN/AWW-13 X

For more information on the P-3 aircraft, refer to Airborne Weapons/Stores Loading Manual, NAVAIR
01-75PAC-75.
15-41
 Figure 15-38 — P-3 wing station locations.

P-8 AIRCRAFT
The P-8A (Figure 15-39) is designed to
replace the P-3C aircraft as a long-range
ASW, anti-surface warfare (ASuW),
intelligence, surveillance and
reconnaissance (ISR) aircraft capable of
broad-area, maritime, and littoral
operations.

Aircraft Armament System

The aircraft armament system consists
of the following systems and
subsystems, which provide the common
circuits, basic controls, and components
necessary to launch Mk 54 torpedoes,
sonobuoys, and expendable
countermeasures or to safely jettison Mk
54 torpedoes or air-launched missiles
and expendable countermeasures
The following paragraphs provide a brief Figure 15-39 — P-8A aircraft.
description of the aircraft armament
systems.

Secondary Power Distribution System

The secondary power distribution system (SPDS) is an electronic power distribution and control
system for mission and weapons systems.

Secondary Power Distribution System Control Display Unit

The secondary power distribution system control display unit (SPDS CDU) allows for operator
interface with and the display of the status of the systems controlled by the SPDS as well as ground
or flight indications from the proximity switch electronics unit (PSEU).

15-42
Proximity Switch Electronics Unit
The PSEU is located in the forward equipment bay and monitors landing gear/WOW proximity
sensors to provide in air/on ground indications to aircraft systems and provides an interlock to aircraft
armament systems.

Mission Computing and Display System and Crew Workstations

The mission computing and display system (MCDS) manages the inventory, monitoring,
programming, presetting, selection, and release of all weapons and sonobuoys. This interface is
provided at any of the mission crew workstations and is primarily displayed with three separate
programmable entry panels (PEP). These panels are selectable from the STORES tab and are
labeled as follows: setup stores, search stores, and kill stores. The setup stores PEP is used primarily
to allow operators to manage the SMS (e.g. inventory reconciliation, command restart) and power
stores loads on and off.

Stores Management System

The SMS provides for the interface, control
and release functions of weapons and stores
from the aircraft weapon stations and
launchers.

Weapons Control Panel

The stores management weapons control
panel (Figure 15-40) provides a means for the
application of power to the armament and
search stores subsystems. It provides the
controls to release sonobuoys, select the type
of jettison desired, and execute the jettison
cycle.

Armament Subsystems
The following paragraphs describe the aircraft
armament subsystems and components.
Figure 15-40 — Weapons control panel.
Torpedo Release System
The torpedo release system provides for the carriage and launch of the Mk 54 torpedo and consists
of the following basic controls and indicators.
x A master arm switch arms the weapon selected for release using a guarded switch
x A KILL READY light is located on the weapons control panel and illuminates red to indicate
that the selected weapon is armed and ready for release and will extinguish when a weapon is
released
x Control wheel release switches (Figure 15-41) are located on the inboard handle of the pilot
and copilot control wheel and enables release of torpedoes; the switch is guarded to prevent
inadvertent releases
x The weapons bay is located below the cabin area just aft of the wing; stations 5 through 9 are
mounted directly to the aircraft structure, and interface with station control units labeled 8, 9,
and 10 and has the capability of releasing Mk 54 torpedoes

15-43
 Figure 15-41 — Weapons release switches.

BRU-75/A Bomb Rack Power Switch

The BRU-75/A bomb rack power switch is located
on the BRU-75/A bomb rack panel and provides
enabling or disabling of all bomb rack functions.
The ON position enables all bomb rack electrical
functions, thereby “arming” the bomb rack. The
OFF position disables all bomb rack electrical
functions and is the primary means of safing
loaded stations.

Sonobuoy Launch system

The sonobuoy launch system (SLS) provides for
the carriage and launch of sonobuoys and other
devices. The following paragraphs provide a brief
description of the SLS controls and indicators.

Sonobuoy Rotary Launcher

Three sonobuoy rotary launchers (SRLs) (Figure
15-42) are located in the aft section of the main
deck. Each SRL holds up to 10 size “A”
sonobuoys mounted in a rotary carousel. When
commanded by the station control unit (SCU), the
carousel rotates to the commanded position and Figure 15-42 — Sonobuoy rotary launcher.
pneumatically launches the sonobuoy downward
through an SLT and gate valve, then out of the
aircraft.

15-44
Single Sonobuoy Launcher
Three single sonobuoy launchers (SSLs) are located in the aft section of the main deck. The SSL is a
floor-mounted, pneumatically operated launcher designed for manual loading and launching of a
single sonobuoy.

Sonobuoy Free Fall Chute

The free fall chute allows for objects to be free fall dropped from the aircraft. When not in use, a lid is
secured in place by Velcro® to hook-and-loop straps.

Sonobuoy Storage Racks

Two sonobuoy storage racks (Figure 15-43) are
located in the aft section of the main deck forward
of the sonobuoy launchers. The storage racks
provide a structure to retain and locate the SLCs.

Countermeasures Dispenser Assembly

The P-8 aircraft has a total of four
countermeasure dispensers designated Fwd left
1A, Fwd right 1B, Aft left and Aft right 2B. Two
dispenser housings are located on the forward
underside section of the aircraft aft of the cargo
door. Two dispensers are located on the aft wing
to body fairings at FS 1013. The dispenser
housing is designed to remain installed in the
aircraft for quick loading and unloading of the
magazine assemblies.

AN/ALE-47 Countermeasure Dispensing

System
The P-8 uses the AN/ALE-47 countermeasures Figure 15-43 — Sonobuoy storage racks.
dispensing system to protect the aircraft against
anti-air threats. The AN/ALE-47 countermeasures dispensing system provides for threat-adaptive,
reprogrammable, computer-controlled dispensing of decoys to confuse and jam enemy electronic
tracking, missile guidance, and homing systems. The system ejects expendable payloads consisting
of chaff, flares, or RF jammers in manual, semiautomatic, or automatic modes based on software-
controlled programs from two 32-round dispenser magazines located on each side of the forward and
aft fuselage.

Jettison System
The jettison system provides for the safe jettison of weapon bay and external weapons and stores.
The following paragraphs describe additional components and controls of the jettison system.

Jettison Select Switch

The jettison select switch is located on the weapons control panel. Selective jettison is the process by
which the operator may individually jettison specific stores. For selective jettison, individual stations
must be selected by the mission crew before the flight crew executes the selective jettison function.

15-45
Jettison External Switch
The jettison external switch is located on the weapons control panel. External jettison is used to
jettison all external weapons/stores. The stores in the weapon bay are not subject to this process.

Jettison All Switch

The jettison all switch is located on the weapons control panel. In the jettison all process all stores
available are jettisoned in sequence. During execution, the weapons bay doors are automatically
opened and closed to allow the weapons bay to jettison stores. The flight crew commands the jettison
all mode by selecting ALL on the jettison mode selector and then pushing the execute switch.

Jettison Execute Switch

The jettison execute switch is located on the weapons control panel. The jettison execute switch is a
guarded switch that initiates the selected jettison mode.
Jettison release is accomplished by a series of switch selections and interfaces within the SMS
components. When an event occurs that requires jettison, the pilot must decide which type of jettison
is appropriate for the situation by moving the JETTISON rotary switch to SEL (selective), EXT
(external), or ALL position. If selective jettison is chosen, the operator (normally TACCO) will have
previously selected the weapon to be jettison on the MCDS kill store PEP. The jettison light on the
SMS mode indicator illuminates on the setup stores PEP. The pilot lifts the red guard cover and
activates the JETTISON switch to the EXECUTE position.

Suspension and Accessory Equipment

The following data is intended to provide ordnance personnel with a brief description of suspension
and accessory equipment specifically used with the P-8 aircraft. Detailed information is available in
the Airborne Weapons/Stores Loading Manual, NAVAIR A1-P8AAA-LWS-000.

SUU-92/A Wing Pylon

The P-8A has four wing pylon (Figure 15-44) stations. Each wing has two wing pylon stations located
outboard the engine nacelle. The pylon is attached to fittings on the lower surface of the wing. A pylon
fairing provides an aerodynamic cover around the fittings and electrical connectors for the pylon. The
wing pylons are identical and interchangeable among the four stations. The wing pylon has access
panels to provide access to electrical and pneumatic connections and to various components
installed in the pylon to include: SCU, high pressure air compressor system (HPACS), pneumatic
valve, and a BRU-76/A.

SUU-93/A Forward Fuselage Pylon

The P-8A has two forward fuselage pylon stations. The two fuselage pylons are mounted under the
forward fuselage centerline of the aircraft. Pylons are externally mounted structures that house
components for the carriage and release of weapons and stores. The BRU-75/A is installed within the
pylon. The fuselage pylons are attached to the aircraft by four bolts. Each bolt passes through the top
of the pylon and aircraft skin and is secured by internal hardware. The forward fuselage pylon has
access panels to provide access to electrical and pneumatic connections and to various components
installed in the pylon to include; SCU, HPACS, isolation valves, and a BRU-75/A.

BRU-75/A and BRU-76/A

The BRU-75/A suspends weapons and stores using 14-inch suspension hooks and BRU-76/A (Figure
15-44) uses 14- and 30-inch suspension hooks. Each BRU has electrical and pneumatic connections.

15-46
The BRUs have a pneumatic release assembly, safety interlock, and automatic sway bracing. The
BRUs are electrically controlled by the SMS, and pneumatically operated by compressed air. The
BRUs contain these components: pneumatic power module, ejector pistons nose, center and tail
electrical arming units, positive arming latches, and sway brace assembly.

Figure 15-44 — SUU-92/A wing pylon and BRU-76/A bomb rack.

Aircraft Armament Configuration Capabilities

The basic configuration of the P-8 aircraft (Figure 15-45) consists of BRU-75/A, BRU-76/A, SUU-
93/A, SRL, and SSL. For specific weapons configuration and capabilities consult the NTRP 3-22.4-P-
8A.

15-47
 Figure 15-45 — P-8 aircraft configuration.

MH-60 HELICOPTER
The MH-60 aircraft (Figure 15-46) provides for configured capabilities of ASW operations as the
primary mission. Secondary missions include anti-ship surveillance and targeting, search and rescue,
medical evacuation, vertical replenishment, and communication relay.
These following paragraphs provide a brief description of the aircraft armament systems, jettison
system, suspension, and accessory equipment required. Carriage or electrical connection of a single
load or mixed loads of conventional weapons on the aircraft is not permitted unless authorized by the
tactical manual.

Aircraft Armament System

The aircraft armament system consists of the following systems and subsystems, which provide the
common circuits, basic controls, and components necessary to release or jettison torpedoes,
sonobuoys, expendable countermeasures, and stores, or fire Hellfire missiles.

15-48
 Figure 15-46 — MH-60 aircraft.

Armament System Basic Controls

The MH-60R armament system basic controls consist of the following components: WOW switch,
disabling switch for armament safety circuit, data handling system, primary mission/flight computer,
SMS, and processing interface units.

Weight-On-Wheels Switch
The WOW switch functions as a safety interlock by disabling release and jettison circuits while the
aircraft is on deck.

Disabling Switch for Armament Safety Circuit

This switch functions as an override to disable the WOW switch when the aircraft is on deck. The
purpose of this switch is to allow operational testing of the armament system.

Data Handling System

The data handling system provides for the operator interface, processing, and display of all avionics
and weapons systems.

Primary Mission/Flight Computer

The primary mission/flight computer is a digital computer that interfaces with all weapons and
avionics systems and performs all processing for displays, built-in-test (BIT), and armament system
functions.

15-49
Stores Management System
The SMS provides the interface, control, and release functions of weapons and stores from the
aircraft weapon stations and launchers.

Processing Interface Units

The processing interface units provide the interface between the weapons/stores and the primary
flight/mission computer and other onboard avionics systems.

Cockpit Basic Controls

The following paragraphs provide a brief overview of the armament displays, controls, and
components to include armament control indicator (ACI), mission displays, and control indicators.

Armament Control Indicator

The ACI panel (Figure 15-47) is located on
the lower console and is a component of the
SMS. The ACI contains the covered
MASTER ARM and ARM SAFE indicators. In
addition, the ACI contains control functions
for the jettison, sonobuoy, and Hellfire
armament subsystems.

Mission Displays
The mission displays are located on both pilot
and copilot instrument panels and are
components to the data handling system. The
displays provide BIT, caution/advisory
indications, and other SMS selectable Figure 15-47 — Armament control indicator
information. Information and data are panel.
selectable with the 22 pushbutton switches
located around the display bezel.

Control Indicators
Control indicators are located on both the pilot and copilot lower console and are components to the
data handling system. Control indicators consist of three keyboards and are used to interface with
aircraft avionics systems.

Sensor Operator Station Basic Controls

The following paragraphs provide a brief overview of the displays located at the sensor operator
station.

Mission Display
The sensor operator mission display is located on the sensor operator console. The display performs
the same functions as the pilot/copilot display.

15-50
Control Indicator
The sensor operator control indicator is located on the sensor operator console and oriented
horizontally instead of vertically. This component provides interaction with avionics systems from the
sensor operator console.

Armament Subsystems
This section discusses the armament subsystems associated with the MH-60R platform and
describes the following subsystems: torpedo release system, sonobuoy launch system, AGM-114
Hellfire missile system, defensive countermeasures, and jettison system.

Torpedo Release System

The torpedo release system is capable of controlling and releasing up to four (growth provisions
provided by the right outboard station) torpedoes and consists of the basic components that are
common to all of the armament subsystems. The following paragraphs describe additional
components and controls of the torpedo release system.
x Signal Data Converter (SDC)—is located in the transition section on the starboard support
shelf and a component of the SMS, the SDC provides Mk 50 torpedo heater power
x Hand Control Unit (HCU)—is located on the starboard side of both pilot and copilot seats; the
HCU contains the RELEASE CONSENT switch, which allows the pilot or copilot to release
torpedoes

Sonobuoy Launch System

The sonobuoy launch system is capable of controlling and launching up to 25 sonobuoys. The system
consists of the following components.
x The sonobuoy launcher is located in the cabin on the port side aft of the sensor operator seat
and provides a housing and launch platform for 25 sonobuoys
x The pneumatic supply module and manifold is located under the sonobuoy launcher and
consists of a pressure bottle, pressure gauge, manual dump valve, and a SAFE/ARM lever;
the supply module provides the pneumatic charge that ejects the selected sonobuoy
x The distribution module connects the compressed air supply with the selected launcher tube
by way of a rotary valve; stepper motor drives the rotary valve to the selected tube and is
stopped by a position potentiometer; a selection knob on the distribution module provides
manual selection of a sonobuoy tube; a distribution valve lock allows the rotary valve to be
locked in any tube or vent position and indicator window
x The signal data converter is a component of the SMS that provides power to the sonobuoy
launch system
x The BUOY LAUNCH RDYAWAY switch and indicator are used to manually launch a sonobuoy
from a loaded launch tube; an example of the MH-60R sonobuoy launch system is shown in
Figure 15-48

15-51
 Figure 15-48 — MH-60R sonobuoy launch system.

AGM-114(Series) HELLFIRE Missile Control System

The AGM-114(series) Hellfire missile control system provides for the carriage and launch of the AGM-
114 Hellfire missile. The Hellfire missile system consists of the following basic components and
controls.
x The extended pylon is located on the port side aft of the aircraft (Figure 15-49), and provides
for the carriage of the Hellfire missile
x The AN/AAS-44 FLIR subsystem provides the capability to detect targets, determine target
range, and laser designate the target for Hellfire guidance; FLIR system displays are provided
on the mission displays
x The rotor overspeed and FLIR switch assembly panel contains the LASER and GIMBLE
ENABLE/DISABLE switches; the switches either enable or inhibit laser firing and FLIR turret
slewing; the FLIR laser can also be enabled and disabled from the sensor operator utility light
panel
x Sensor operator utility light panel contains the LASER ENABLE/DISABLE switch and is wired
in series and functionally identical to the rotor overspeed and FLIR switch assembly LASER
ENABLE/DISABLE switch

15-52
 x LASER SELECT switch and
ARM/SEL indicator is a two-
position switch; the SAFE
position safes the LASER,
while the SELECT position
provides for LASER arming;
the ARM indicator provides an
indication that the LASER is
selected, and that LASER
ENABLE and other interlocks
are completed; the SEL
indicator provides an
indication that the LASER is
selected, but LASER ENABLE
and other interlocks are not
completed
x The hand control unit, located
on the starboard side of both
pilot and copilot seats and on
the starboard side of the
sensor operator console,
provides the operator interface
for the FLIR and the ability to
launch Hellfire missiles
x The signal data converter
(SDC), located in the transition
section on the starboard
support shelf and a
component of the SMS, Figure 15-49 — MH-60R Hellfire missile control system.
provides MIL-STD-1760 power
control and interface for the
M299 Hellfire launcher
x The M299 Hellfire launcher is installed on the extended pylon and is used to mount and launch
the Hellfire missile; the launcher consists of four launcher rails and a SAFE/ARM switch, which
automatically arms as a function of Hellfire missile control system operation, but must be
manually placed in the SAFE position

Jettison System
The system is capable of jettisoning all weapons/stores or selected weapons/stores. The jettison
system will be armed when the aircraft is in a weight-off-wheels condition or by engaging the
armament safety bypass circuit. Activating the emergency jettison panel ALL STORE JETT switch will
jettison all weapons/stores with the exception of jettisonable AN/ALE-47 countermeasures dispensing
system expendables. Selecting the MASTER ARM switch on the ACI, then selecting the appropriate
weapon station or system, and actuating the SELECT JETTISON switch selectively jettisons
weapons, stores, or AN/ALE-47 countermeasures dispensing system expendables.

15-53
Defensive Countermeasure System
The MH-60R uses the AN/ALE-47 countermeasures dispensing system (Figure 15-50) to protect the
aircraft against anti-air threats. The AN/ALE-47 countermeasures dispensing system provides for
threat-adaptive, reprogrammable, computer-controlled dispensing of decoys to confuse and jam
enemy electronic tracking, missile guidance, and homing systems. The system ejects expendable
payloads consisting of chaff, flares, or RF jammers in manual, semiautomatic, or automatic modes
based on software-controlled programs from two 32-round dispenser magazines located on the tail
pylon. The AN/ALE-47 consists of the following components.
x The AN/ALE-47 programmer functions as the central processor for the AN/ALE-47 system; it
contains dispense programming software and controls dispensing for all modes of operation

Figure 15-50 — MH-60R AN/ALE-47 countermeasures dispensing system.

15-54
 x The dispenser magazine identification (ID) switches consist of two four-position (A–D and 1–4)
rotary switches that indicate specific expendable payload load outs for decoding and to be
used by the programmer
x The AN/ALE-47 safety switch/pin is opened by inserting AN/ALE-47 safety pin, which inhibits
AN/ALE-47 dispenses
Additional information on the MH-60R aircraft is contained in the Airborne Weapons/Stores Loading
Manual Navy Model MH-60R Helicopter, A1-H60RA-LWS-000.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The safety precautions that should be followed when dealing with aircraft, systems, and their
maintenance are outlined in various publications. The repetition of safety precautions in the manuals
ensures they are widely distributed and read. A few of the safety precautions applicable to the aircraft
discussed in this chapter are listed below.
x Do not open or close the bomb bay doors when personnel or equipment are in the vicinity of
the bomb bay; also, do not enter the bomb bay until the door safety pin is installed
x Beware of APU noise; it can cause permanent ear damage to the unprotected ear; wear ear
protection devices when working in the vicinity of an operating APU
x Provide adequate interphone communications between personnel inside and outside the
aircraft to ensure safety between personnel and to compensate for the size of the aircraft
x Before you apply external power to the aircraft, make sure that personnel are not performing
maintenance on electrical or electronic systems; you should make sure that all cockpit
switches and controls are ready to receive power
x Personnel working with or near high voltage shall be familiar with modern methods of
resuscitation
x Observe the aircraft external danger areas shown in the particular loading manual
x The mechanical latching of weapons on aircraft racks/launchers shall be completed before the
engine(s) on that aircraft is/are started unless otherwise specified in loading publications
x Properly adjust sway braces to avoid inadvertent release or hung weapons and may result in
loss of life and/or damage to property
x Do not unnecessarily work/stand directly in front of or behind forward firing ordnance
x Do not unnecessarily work beneath a weapon/store
x When loading/handling forward firing ordnance, working in front of or behind will be held to a
minimum

15-55
 End of Chapter 15
Aircraft Weapons Systems
Review Questions
15-1. What system provides the interface, control, and release functions of the F/A-18A/B/C/D
aircraft weapon stations and guns?

A. Armament override
B. Auxiliary
C. Master arm
D. Stores management

15-2. The IR COOL switch is a three-position switch that controls cooling to what missile?

A. AGM-65
B. AIM-120
C. AIM-7
D. AIM-9M

15-3. Which of the following selected fuzing voltages are supplied by the electric fuzing system in the
F/A-18E/F aircraft?

A. INST, DLY, DLY 2, and DLY 3

B. INST, DLY 1, DLY 2, and DLY 3
C. VT, INST, DLY 1, and DLY 2
D. VT, INST, DLY 1, and DLY 6

15-4. At what time will the electrical fuzing system in the F/A-18A/B/C/D provide the fuzing voltage to
electrically fuzed bombs?

A. After 1 second from release

B. After delay of two seconds
C. Three seconds before the bomb rack opens
D. When bomb rack hooks open

15-5. What launcher must be used to launch an AIM-7 Sparrow missile from the wing pylon station
of an F/A-18E/F aircraft?

A. LAU-113B/A
B. LAU-115C/A
C. LAU-117/A
D. LAU-118/A

15-56
15-6. On a P-3 aircraft, what panel provides the controls and indicators for manual or automatic
preset of Mk 46, Mk 50, or Mk 54 torpedoes?

A. Armament control box

B. Pilot’s armament control
C. Pilot’s search stores control
D. TORP presetter

15-7. On a P-3 aircraft, what maximum number of bomb bay stations is available for carrying
weapons?

A. 6
B. 8
C. 10
D. 12

15-8. What total number of sonobuoy rotary launchers are installed on a P-8 aircraft?

A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 4

15-9. On a P-8 aircraft, each sonobuoy rotary launcher will hold what maximum size “A” sonobuoys?

A. 5
B. 10
C. 15
D. 20

15-10. The P-8 aircraft has what total number of wing stations?

A. 4
B. 8
C. 12
D. 16

15-11. The MH-60R torpedo release system is capable of controlling and releasing up to what total
number of torpedoes?

A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 4

15-57
15-12. An MH-60R helicopter sonobuoy launch system is capable of controlling and launching up to
what total number of sonobuoys?

A. 10
B. 12
C. 18
D. 25

15-13. What condition must be ensured before opening or closing aircraft bomb bay doors?

A. Personnel or equipment are not in the vicinity of the bomb bay

B. Bomb bay door safety pin is installed
C. Aircraft is in the appropriate maintenance spot
D. Aircraft has come to a complete stop

15-14. What must be ensured before you apply external power to the aircraft?

A. Aircraft has already been loaded

B. Personnel are wearing ear protection devices
C. Personnel are not performing maintenance on electrical/electronic systems
D. Personnel are only performing maintenance on their assigned electrical systems

15-15. Improper adjustment of sway braces can cause inadvertent release or what other action to
weapons or stores?

A. Cause the weapons to dud

B. Hung weapons
C. Premature arming
D. Tumbling effect of the weapon

15-58
 CHAPTER 16
WEAPONS SYSTEMS TEST EQUIPMENT
Aviation ordnance personnel use test equipment in all phases of electrical testing of various weapons
systems. The testing procedures used are required at specific maintenance levels, such as
organizational, intermediate, and depot. Test equipment varies in complexity, from a small handheld
tester to a very large and complex unit. Regardless of size or complexity, the purpose of the test
equipment is to make sure that the weapon and the launching platform (aircraft) function correctly.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
When you have completed this chapter, you will be able to do the following:
1. Identify the test equipment used with aircraft weapons systems.
2. Recognize the purpose of test equipment used with aircraft weapons systems.
3. Recognize the safety precautions to follow while working with aircraft weapons systems test
equipment.

TEST EQUIPMENT
Not all test equipment used will be described in this chapter, but several common piloted aircraft,
countermeasures, maintenance/test assembly (ALM) and piloted aircraft, armament,
maintenance/test assembly (AWM) testing sets will be. Also, the step-by-step procedures required to
operate the test equipment are not listed. To perform a specific job, personnel need to be able to
identify the equipment, know what it is used for, and know how it is used. The specific step-by-step
procedures that should be followed when using test equipment can be found in applicable
publications.

77/BN Digital Multimeters

The 77/BN digital multimeter (Figure 16-1) is a
portable, multi-range, alternating current (ac) -
direct current (dc), volt-ohm multimeter used for
general electronic and electrical service.
Multimeters are used to measure resistance
(ohms) and voltage (ac or dc) in an electrical
circuit. They are used to test aircraft circuits
when no special test equipment is available, or
when reasonably accurate measurements are
required.

Figure 16-1 — 77/BN digital multimeter.

16-1
AN/ALM-286 Countermeasures Chaff Dispensing Set, Test Set Group
The Army/Navy (AN)/ALM-286 countermeasures chaff dispensing set, test set group consists of a
transit case containing two stray voltage/flight line payload simulators (SV/FLPS). The SV/FLPS
(Figure 16-2) is a portable load simulator used to count fire pulses and test for stray voltage in the air-
launched expendable (ALE)-47 countermeasure dispensing system (CMDS). A minimum of two
simulators is required for system testing.

Figure 16-2 — AN/ALM-286.

AN/ALM-290 Countermeasures Dispenser Test Set

The AN/ALM-290 is a portable load simulator used to count fire pulses and test for stray voltage in
the ALE-47 CMDS. The AN/ALM-290 consists of two SV/IFLPS, in one transit case. Test set modes
of operation include:
x Built-in-test (BIT)/stray voltage results—pass/fail
x Valid fire count—total valid fire pulses
x Valid fire list—dispenser pin numbers with valid fires
x Invalid fire list—dispenser pin numbers with invalid fires
x No fire list—dispenser pin numbers with no fires

16-2
AN/ALM-291 Countermeasure Dispenser Test Set
The AN/ALM-291 countermeasure dispenser test set (Figure 16-3) is a portable test set used at the
organizational maintenance level for preflight testing of the AN/ALE-39 CMDS. The test set permits
an end-to-end preflight check of the AN/ALE-39 CMDS and its associated equipment, including the
CP-1293/ALR-67 radar warning processor/ALE-39 interface. The test set provides the capability to
determine that the D-64/ALE-39 or D-65/ALE-39 dispenser housing does not have the potential for
hazardous energy prior to installing a loaded block and printed wiring board payload module.
Additional information on the AN/ALM-291 is contained in Countermeasure Dispensing System Test
Set AN/ALM-291, NAVAIR 16-30ALM291-1.

Figure 16-3 — AN/ALM-291.

16-3
AN/AWM-42A Fuze Function Control Test Set
The AN/AWM-42A fuze function control test set (Figure 16-4) is used to check the dc fuzing
capabilities of fuze function control circuits. It is used to check for continuity and resistance in the
electric fuzing. The test set has its own power source. The AN/AWM-42A fuze function control test set
is used on all Navy and Marine Corps aircraft that have electric fuzing capabilities.
More information on the AN/AWM-42A is contained in Fuze Function Control Test Set AN/AWM-42A,
NAVAIR 16-30AWM42-1.

Figure 16-4 — AN/AWM-42A fuze function control test set.

16-4
AN/AWM-102 Firing Circuit Test Set
The AN/AWM-102 firing circuit test set (Figure 16-5) is a solid-state electronic test set that is used for
flight line testing of the aircraft’s bomb release and missile firing circuits and for checking stray
voltages prior to arming. The test set provides a GO/NO-GO indication for the circuit being tested.
The AN/AWM-102 test set uses various test set adapters (Figure 16-6).
Additional information on the AN/AWM-102 is contained in Firing Circuit Test Set AN/AWM-102,
NAVAIR 16-30AWM102-1.

Figure 16-5 — AN/AWM-102 firing circuit test set.

16-5
 Figure 16-6 — AN/AWM-102 firing circuit test set adapters.

AN/AWM-103A Stores Management Subassembly Test Set

The AN/AWM-103A stores management subassembly test set is a weapon release and control test
set designed to perform release and control testing. The test set is comprised of an electrical unit
(EU) with case, and test set accessories with case. Through the use of various adapters, the test set
mounts on the launcher rail and interfaces with the launcher/aircraft via the umbilical connectors. It
provides signals to simulate a missile on the launcher/rack/pylon to provide indication of the
operational status.
The test set is a piece of support equipment (SE) designed to perform weapon release and control
testing on multiple aircraft platforms. Each designated platform should receive two test sets
accompanied by the interconnecting groups (IGs) of adapters and cables peculiar to the aircraft and
its weapon systems.

Electrical Unit with Case

The AN/AWM-103A consists of a transit case and the EU (Figure 16-7).
The case assembly stores and transports the EU.
The electrical unit contains the operational circuitry and software of the test set. It consists of an
upper rail and lower housing. The upper rail provides physical mounting to the aircraft weapon
station. The primary test interface (J1) and EU grounding point are located on the rail. The lower
16-6
housing contains the display and three front panel switches. The display provides readout of test data
and test set information. The switches are an UP/DOWN switch, POWER switch, and Enter/Escape
(ENT/ESC) switch. The UP/DOWN and ENT/ESC switches are used to select and display menu
items and test results. The POWER switch is a circuit breaker that applies +28 volts direct current
(Vdc) to the EU power circuitry.

Figure 16-7 — AN/AWM-103A stores management subassembly test set.

Test Set Accessories

The test set accessories are the cables and adapters common to all platforms (Figure 16-8).
The components of the test set accessories are described as follows:
x Case assembly—stores and transports the test set accessories
x Power supply—provides 28 Vdc power to the test set for use in shop spaces; may be used to
replace aircraft power when performing self-test, aircraft setup, test results review, software
loading, and test results printing
x W1 cable, power—connects J3 of the EU to the aircraft power adapter in the appropriate IG
during aircraft testing or J1 of the W6 wrap-around adapter during self-test
x W2 cable, RS-232—connects J2 of the EU to the serial port of a personal computer (PC); this
setup used to download and store test results information from the test set
x W5 cable, grounding—connects grounding point on upper rail of the EU to a certified aircraft
ground point
x W6 wrap-around test (WAT) adapter—connects to J1 of the EU and the W1 power cable to
perform self-test; for certain aircraft, also connects to the W10 breech adapter cable for self-
test

16-7
 Figure 16-8 — AN/AWM-103A test set accessories.

Interconnecting Groups and Associated Aircraft

Unique to each platform, IGs contain the necessary cables, adapters, and hardware that enable the
test set to perform weapon systems release and control checks. More information on the AN/AWM-
103A is contained in Test Set, Stores Management Subsystem AN/AWM-103A, NAVAIR 16-30AWM-
103-1.

Wrap-Around Test Adapter

The WAT adapter (Figure 16-9 and Figure 16-10) is a set of passive adapters and cables that allows
the aircraft avionics to perform release and control checks. The adapter used on the F/A-18E/F is for
the BRU-32/BRU-33, High-Speed Anti-Radiation Missile (HARM), Maverick, Sparrow, Department of
Defense Interface Standard (MIL-STD)-1760 interface Harpoon/Standoff Land Attack Missile (SLAM),
Advanced Medium Range Air-to-Air Missile (AMRAAM), and BRU-55 for MIL-STD-1760 and non MIL-
STD-1760 stores. The adapter used on the EA-18G is for the BRU-32, HARM, AMRAAM, and
Tactical Aircrew Combat Training System (TACTS) pod.

16-8
Figure 16-9 — F/A-18E/F wrap-around test adapter set.

16-9
Figure 16-10 — EA-18G wrap-around test adapter set.

16-10
A/E-24T-230 Test Set
The A/E-24T-230 test set (Figure 16-11) is designed and developed to meet the functional, firing, and
stray voltage testing requirements of the M61A1 and M61A2 20 millimeter (mm) gun firing systems.
The test set is a portable GO/NO-GO tester, which allows quick connection and disconnection of the
M61A1 and M61A2 gun firing connector via an adapter cable. The A/E-24T-230 test set checks two
ranges of voltages: 21 to 28 Vdc and 240 to 290 Vdc.

Figure 16-11 — A/E-24T-230 test set.

16-11
TTU-304/E Guided Missile Test Set
The TTU-304/E guided missile test set (Figure 16-12) is used as an infrared (IR) source when
performing AIM-9(series) Sidewinder missile tone checks. The TTU-304/E guided missile test set is
used on all Navy aircraft that have Sidewinder missile capabilities.

Figure 16-12 — TTU-304/E guided missile test set.

Force Retention Gauge

The force retention gauge (Figure 16-13) is used to
functionally check the bomb rack nose and tail arming
solenoids. The applicable maintenance instruction
manual should be used for the proper retention
readings.

Figure 16-13 — Force retention

gauge (typical).

16-12
AN/GYQ-79A Test Program Set
The AN/GYQ-79A common munitions built-in-test (BIT)/reprogramming equipment (CMBRE Plus)
test program set (TPS) (Figure 16-14) is used alone or in conjunction with the ADU-891(V)1/E and
ADU-892A/E adaptor group and its computer test set, the HRU-1128/U (W23) special purpose cable
assembly, and the MX-12307/GYQ-79 cable assembly set.

Figure 16-14 — AN/GYQ-79A test program set.

The AN/GYQ-79A (CMBRE Plus) TPS is portable munitions SE used to initiate munitions BIT,
provide munitions BIT status, reprogram munitions operational flight programs (OFPs), load mission
planning and Global Positioning System (GPS) crypto keys, and upload/download munitions data.
The AN/GYQ-79A is composed of three boxes of components as shown in Figure 16-14. The current
CMBRE-supported systems include Advanced Anti-Radiation Guided Missile (AARGM), air-launched
aerial intercept guided missile (AIM)-9X, AMRAAM, Dual Mode Laser Guided Bomb (DMLGB), Joint
Direct Attack Munition (JDAM)/Laser JDAM (LJDAM), Joint Standoff Weapon (JSOW), and SLAM
Expanded Response (SLAM-ER) weapons.

16-13
ADU-891(V)1/E Computer Test Set Adapter
The ADU-891(V)1/E computer test set adapter (Figure 16-15) is used in conjunction with the CMBRE
Plus TPS to perform a BIT or reprogram the AIM-9X and AMRAAM.

Figure 16-15 — ADU-891(V)1/E computer test set adapter.

16-14
ADU-892A/E Computer Test Set Adapter
The ADU-892A/E computer test set adapter (Figure 16-16) is used in conjunction with the CMBRE
Plus TPS to test the laser portion of the WGU-53/B guidance kit and to perform a BIT or reprogram
the DMLGB.

Figure 16-16 — ADU-892A/E computer test set adapter.

16-15
HRU-1128/U (W23) Special Purpose Cable Assembly
The HRU-1128/U (W23) special purpose cable assembly (Figure 16-17) is used in conjunction with
the CMBRE Plus TPS to perform a BIT or reprogram multiple JDAMs.

Figure 16-17 — HRU-1128/U (W23) special purpose cable assembly.

MX-12307/GYQ-79 (W24 and W25) Special Purpose Cable Assembly

The MX-12307/GYQ-79 (W24 and W25) special purpose cable assembly (Figure 16-18) is used in
conjunction with the CMBRE Plus TPS to perform a BIT or reprogram the AARGM.

Figure 16-18 — MX-12307/GYQ-79 (W24 and W25) special purpose cable

assembly.
16-16
A/E 37T-35A Common Rack and Launcher Test Set (CRALTS)
The common rack and launcher test set (CRALTS) (Figure 16-19) is an automatic/semiautomatic
universal GO/NO-GO tester for various aircraft specific bomb racks, missile launchers, weapon rails,
aircraft pylons, and other units under test (UUTs) that have been removed for maintenance
verification/repair. The test set determines operational status of a UUT and provides fault isolation to
defective shop replaceable assemblies (SRAs). The test set and adapter assemblies provide all
cables, stimuli, and measurement equipment required for testing UUT.

Figure 16-19 — CRALTS.

The test set allows the technician to test, diagnose, troubleshoot, and perform operational and
functional checkout, and acceptance of Navy and Marine Corps bomb racks, missile launchers, and
other weapon stores assemblies that have been removed from the aircraft.

Testing
The CRALTS is fully menu-driven and all testing is performed in an automatic or semiautomatic
(manual) mode. Initialization of CRALTS starts with system Warm-up and Auto Alignment/Turn-on
BIT. The CRALTS screen display provides complete hookup and operating procedures. In the event
abnormal condition is indicated within the test equipment, the Organizational Level Manual Test Set,
Common Rack and Launcher, NAVAIR 16-30AE37T-35-1, or Intermediate Maintenance Manual Test
Set, Common Rack and Launcher, NAVAIR 16-30AE37T-35-2, should be consulted for necessary
corrective actions.

TEST EQUIPMENT SAFETY SUMMARY

Many safety precautions are associated with weapons systems test equipment. Some of these safety
precautions are discussed in the following paragraphs.
Personnel should be warned that certain components of the test set can be dangerous and, if not
properly handled, could result in loss of life or serious injury to personnel and damage to equipment.
Personnel performing the checks must be thoroughly familiar with the electrical and ground handling
safety precautions pertaining to the aircraft.
16-17
The test equipment discussed in this chapter is designed to perform various functions. Two of the
most important functions are listed below:
x Ensuring the correct firing voltage is available at the appropriate station when the cockpit
switches are properly set
x Ensuring that voltage or stray voltage is not present before electrical connection of certain
launchers, such as rocket launchers, is made
These two functions are called aircraft release and system control checks. Normally, aircraft release
and system control checks are performed before the weapons are installed on the aircraft. However,
some checks require the weapons to be loaded on the aircraft.
Prior to and following the use of the AN/AWM-102 test set for checking any armament circuit, a self-
test should be performed to ensure the test set is functioning properly.
When performing aircraft release and system control checks, always use the step-by-step procedures
(checklist) provided in the aircraft loading manual. In addition, you must observe a few safety
precautions when performing aircraft release and system control checks. These precautions are listed
below.
x Before you begin an aircraft release and system control checks, make sure the aircraft is
parked in a designated area, secured, and electrically grounded
x Before you apply external electrical power to the aircraft, make sure all cockpit switches have
been positioned to OFF, SAFE, or NORMAL
x Release and control system checks will NOT be performed with weapons loaded on the
aircraft; checks may be performed with airborne stores (fuel tanks, empty improved multiple
ejector racks/improved triple ejector racks (IMERs/ITERs), vertical ejector racks (VERs), pods,
etc.) installed on the aircraft stations, provided cartridge retainers, breech caps, and ejector
cartridges are removed
x Test equipment should only be used by personnel who have become qualified through an
established qualification and certification program
Stray voltage checks are normally performed with the weapon loaded on the aircraft, but they are
made before making an electrical connection between the weapon and the aircraft. Additionally, this
check is normally performed after the aircraft's engines have been started and all aircraft preflight
checks have been completed. The stray voltage check is performed at the last possible moment
before the aircraft takes off. This is to ensure that no voltage has been induced in the aircraft firing
circuitry from external sources, such as the ship's radar. When performing stray voltage checks on
aircraft aboard aircraft carriers, you must not remove the launcher electrical safety pin until the aircraft
is positioned on the catapult for takeoff.

16-18
 End of Chapter 16
Weapons Systems Test Equipment
Review Questions
16-1. Which of the following digital multimeters is used for general electronic and electrical service?

A. AN/ALM-286
B. AN/ALM-290
C. 77/BN digital
D. LM-225 digital

16-2. What countermeasures chaff dispensing test set group consists of a transit case containing
two stray voltage flight line payload simulators used to test for stray voltage in the air-launched
expendable (ALE)-47 countermeasure dispensing set?

A. AN/ALM-286
B. AN/ALM-290
C. AN/ALM-291
D. AN/AWM-42A

16-3. Which of the following weapons system test sets permits an end-to-end preflight check of the
Army/Navy air-launched expendable (AN/ALE)-39 countermeasure dispenser set?

A. 77/BN
B. AN/ALM-291
C. AN/AWM-442A
D. TTU-304

16-4. What weapons system test set is used to check for continuity and resistance in the electric
fuzing system on Navy and Marine Corps aircraft with electric fuzing capabilities?

A. AN/ALM-291
B. AN/AWM-42A
C. AN/AWM-102
D. AN/AWM-103A

16-5. What weapons system test set is used on the flight line to check for stray voltages prior to
arming and provides a GO/NO-GO indication for the circuit being tested?

A. AN/ALM-291
B. AN/AWM-42A
C. AN/AWM-102
D. A/E-24T-230

16-19
16-6. What weapons system test set mounts on an aircraft launcher rail and interfaces with the
launcher/aircraft via the umbilical connectors?

A. AN/AWM-42A
B. AN/AWM-102
C. AN/AWM-103A
D. AN/ALM-291

16-7. What weapons system test is designed to test the functional, firing, and stray voltage for the 20
millimeter gun system?

A. AN/AWM-102
B. AN/AWM-103A
C. A/E-24T-230
D. TTU-304/E

16-8. Which of the following weapons system test sets is used to reprogram munitions operational
flight programs?

A. A/E-27-230
B. AN/ALM-286
C. AN/AWM-42A
D. AN/GYQ-79A

16-9. Prior to and following use, what should be performed to ensure that the Army/Navy piloted
aircraft, armament, maintenance/test assembly (AN/AWM)-102 test set is functioning properly?

A. Stray voltage test

B. Self-test
C. Electrical ground test
D. Nothing needs to be performed

16-10. Why are stray voltage checks performed on an aircraft weapons system?

A. To ensure that no voltage has been induced in the aircraft firing circuitry
B. To ensure release and control systems checks have been completed
C. To ensure the system is functional
D. To ensure the launcher safety pins have been installed properly

16-20
 CHAPTER 17
AMMUNITION ADMINISTRATION ASHORE AND AFLOAT
Ammunition is vital to naval operations. Because of its high cost and logistical characteristics, the
status of ammunition is carefully and continuously studied at the highest echelons of the defense
establishment. Ammunition is a high-priority consideration by operational and logistics commanders.
It is essential for logistics planning that current and accurate information concerning Navy ammunition
stock status is available at the appropriate time. This information must be available to commanders of
naval forces when planning their training and operational expenditures. For these reasons, accurate
and prompt reporting of individual ammunition transactions directly affects the Navy's ability to sustain
a high degree of readiness.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
When you have completed this chapter, you will be able to do the following:
1. State capabilities of the Ordnance Information System-Wholesale (OIS-W), and the Ordnance
Information System-Retail (OIS-R)/Retail Ordnance Logistics Management System (ROLMS).
2. State the terms and definitions associated with ammunition requisitioning and turn-in.
3. Describe the procedures to be followed while preparing requisition documents.
4. Identify the variables that affect requisitioning by fleet units.
5. Describe file maintenance procedures, turn-in procedures, and temporary custody of ordnance
ashore.
6. Identify transaction reporting procedures and describe the various types of transaction reports.
7. Identify the procedures to be followed while preparing the ammunition master stock record
card and the ammunition lot/location card.

ORDNANCE INFORMATION SYSTEM

The OIS is an integration of ordnance logistics systems used by the Navy and Marine Corps for
ordnance asset management and accountability. The OIS is comprised of integrated applications and
distributed databases providing controlled global access, where a single action results in a system-
wide update. OIS is the data repository and management tool for central inventory management and
local stock control of Navy ammunition.

Ordnance Information System-Wholesale

Classified OIS-W is the single repository for worldwide status of Navy expendable non-nuclear
ordnance. The system tracks requirements, assets, production, expenditures, costs, and technical
inventory management data, regardless of inventory management or ownership responsibilities.
OIS-W supports the ammunition management information needs of the stockpile managers (SMs),
acquisition/program managers, Office of the Chief of Naval Operations (OPNAV), systems commands
(SYSCOMs), Marine Corps (Aviation), fleet commanders (FLTCDRs), type commanders (TYCOMs),
and other major claimants.

17-1
OIS-W interfaces with other automated information systems (both interservice and intraservice) to
exchange inventory data and related information. All Navy ammunition assets, regardless of inventory
management or ownership responsibilities, are reported to and recorded in OIS-W.

Ordnance Information System-Retail/Retail Ordnance Logistics Management

System
The OIS-R/ROLMS is an integrated system of application software designed for retail ammunition
asset management and reporting. OIS-R/ROLMS is used by all Navy and Marine Corps ashore and
afloat activities and contractors designated with Navy cognizance ordnance to locally manage
ammunition inventory and report to OIS-W.

Ordnance Information System-Marine Corps

Ordnance Information System-Marine Corps (OIS-MC) is the single repository for worldwide status of
Marine Corps 0T Cognizant (0T COG) expendable non-nuclear ordnance requirements, assets,
production, expenditures, costs, and technical inventory management data. OIS-MC supports the
ammunition management information needs of the stockpile/item managers, the Program Manager,
and Marine Forces Headquarters. OIS-MC interfaces with other automated information systems (both
interservice and intraservice) to exchange inventory data and related information.

Ordnance Assessment Portfolio

The ordnance assessment portfolio (OAP) consists of a series of assessment displays that provide
statistics regarding data integrity, readiness, and other stockpile profiles.

Tomahawk Asset Inventory Management System

Tomahawk asset inventory management system (TAIMS) is an inventory control system that supports
traditional inventory management functions, as well as functions unique to Tomahawk cruise missiles
(2D cognizance material), required for the worldwide management and control of Tomahawk all-up-
round (AUR) missiles.

The Fleet Ordnance Support Model (FOS-M)

The fleet ordnance support model (FOS-M) provides the Navy’s fleet ordnance support (FOS)
workload and funding requirement projection. The underlying model requirements are to establish
resource requirements to support the Navy’s war fighting and training operational cost.
OIS is deployed on a multi-level security (MLS) infrastructure allowing unclassified systems on an
unclassified network and classified systems on a classified network. The unclassified network for OIS
will be the non-secure internet protocol routed network (NIPRNet). The classified network for OIS will
be the secret internet protocol routed network (SIPRNet). SIPRNet access is provided by the Defense
Information Systems Agency (DISA) and may be requested by contacting the SIPRNet Support
Center.

Defense Transportation Tracking System

The Defense Transportation Tracking System (DTTS) is a Department of Defense (DoD) system that
uses satellite positioning and communications technology to monitor the in-transit movement of all
DoD shipments of sensitive ammunition and explosives (AE) being transported in continental United
States (CONUS) by commercial motor carriers. DTTS is a component of the DoD master plan for total
asset visibility (TAV) capability for DoD material and provides increased safety and security for AE
being shipped via commercial carrier.
17-2
OIS-W Overview
OIS-W currently resides on a mainframe computer. Access to the applications and data is through a
worldwide secure remote network. Access to OIS and its subsystems will be limited, on a need-to-
know basis. OIS-W terminals are located in numerous geographical areas and are under the
cognizance of several different commands.

OIS-W Capabilities
OIS-W serves as a central repository of worldwide inventory and technical data providing the
following capabilities:
x Maintain a central record of stock status information (including serviceable and non-
serviceable assets) updated daily by transaction reports from all holders of Navy-owned assets
x Maintain a central record of worldwide asset positions and expenditures updated at
appropriate intervals in accordance with current requirements
x Maintain a central record of material in-transit between contractors and naval activities, and in-
transit among naval activities, updated daily
x Maintain a central stock status and configuration record of serialized weapons and
components, updated daily
x Maintain a central record of material in production, procurement, or under renovation, updated
daily
x Maintain a central technical data file for inventory management functions as a source for Navy
Stock Lists; change notice cards; AUR dictionary; packaging, safety, and transportation
management publications; for use in stratification, budgeting, readiness determinations, and
component requirement computations; and as a basis for selecting or recommending
substitutions or alternate items for requisitioning, stratification, or the budgeting process
x Maintain a central record of ammunition storage capabilities for use in measuring storage
capabilities against requirements
x Maintain a central record of actual and potential production capabilities of Navy and selected
commercial producers
x Access the OIS-W database from selected remote terminals, with adequate safeguards for
protection of classified data
x Provide for adequate protection of data against such contingencies as fire, inadvertent file
destruction, loss of power, etc.

Information Available In OIS-W

x National stock number (NSN), Navy ammunition logistics code (NALC), and Department of
Defense identification code (DODIC) assignments, and technical characteristics
x Quantity on hand, location (including in-transit and due-in), condition, receipts, issues, serial
number, and configuration data for serialized weapons/components, reservations, or
restrictions, etc.
x Tracking of due-ins based on scheduled delivery dates, generating prepositioned material
receipt cards, processing shipment/performance notification, and computing administrative and
production lead-time

17-3
 x Tracking of requisitions, modifications, referrals, follow-ups, shipping status, issues, receipts,
cancellations, material release orders (MROs), and results of the cross-decking of assets
x Serial and lot reporting of lead components for Sidewinder, Sparrow, Harpoon, Hellfire,
Standoff Land Attack Missile-Expanded Response (SLAM-ER), Stinger, Maverick, High-Speed
Anti-Radiation Missile (HARM), Tomahawk, Standard Missile, Advanced Medium Range Air-
To-Air Missile (AMRAAM), and Evolved Sea Sparrow Missile (ESSM)
x Financial inventory accounting and billing functions
x Receipt transactions from commercial procurement, receipt from storage locations, issue of
material from stock, increase/decrease adjustments, dual adjustment transactions, re-
identification of stock, asset status cards, for further transfer designation, and material
movement for repair/test, demilitarization, and disposal
x History of items, segments, or lots of explosives; also ordnance/material declared as a safety
hazard, unsuitable for use, or suspended for any reason
x Identification and document transfer of unserviceable or excess/surplus material from inventory
to disposal account
x Identification and tracking ammunition loads to support ship and organizational mission
x Distribution of major CONUS assets based on requirements and the assets held by the major
commands
x Monthly reporting of OIS-W assets by lot number
x Tracking and budgeting outside continental United States (OCONUS) transportation
requirements/shipments
x Comparison of ammunition to inventory assets requirements to determine excess inventory
x Processing, monitoring, reconciliation, and generation of physical inventory transactions for
current stock records
x Tracking of requirements, allowing users to group similar NALCs for asset and expenditure
retrievals/reports through control number processing
x Tracking of training requirements, allocations, and expenditures

OIS-W System Interfaces

OIS-W interfaces with other information systems to receive and exchange inventory and technical
data and related information. The systems include:
x Distribution Standard System (DSS)
x Federal Logistics Information System (FLIS)
x Commodity Command Standard System (CCSS)
x Standard Depot System (SDS)
x OIS-R/ROLMS
x OIS-MC
x Explosive Safety Technical Manual System (ESTMS)
x Marine Air Ground Task Force (MAGTF) Data Library (MDL)

17-4
 x Defense Logistics Agency (DLA) Transaction Services (DLA TS)

OIS-W System Customers and Users

OIS-W customers and users include: OPNAV Staff, Headquarters United States Marine Corps (HQ
USMC), acquisition/program managers from unified commands, SYSCOMs, FLTCDRs, TYCOMs,
Navy Munitions Command, weapons support activities, carrier strike groups (CSGs), aircraft carriers,
naval air stations (NASs), naval warfare centers, Marine air wings, and other customers requiring
access to the naval ammunition data.

Ordnance Information System-Retail/Retail Ordnance Logistics Management

System
The OIS-R/ROLMS is an integrated system of applications software designed to manage non-nuclear
expendable ordnance. The system provides for the automation of the receipt, issue, inventory record
keeping, reporting of ammunition assets, and movements, with the ultimate objective being the
enhancement of fleet readiness and stock point ordnance management. OIS-R will replace the
ROLMS application.
OIS-R/ROLMS replaced four legacy systems—Ordnance Management System (OMS), Fleet Optical
Scanning Ammunition Marking System (FOSAMS), The Standardized Conventional Ammunition
Automated Inventory Record (SCAAIR) and the Ammunition Logistics System (AMMOLOGS).
ROLMS was designed to operate as either a stand-alone system residing in a client/server network
environment or on a personal computer. The ROLMS application uses the Oracle relational database
management system (RDBMS) and operates in a client/server environment or standalone personal
computer (PC) mode under Windows (WIN) 95, 98, or 2000. In the client/server environments, the
Oracle RDBMS resides on a Windows 2000 server. Client PC workstations can run any of the MS
WIN 95, 98, or 2000 operating systems that use Oracle structured query language network software
to communicate with the RDBMS.

OIS-R/ROLMS Capabilities
OIS-R/ROLMS supports all ship and shore activity asset management and reporting requirements.
OIS-R/ROLMS automates many ammunition logistics management and reporting functions performed
by the stock points and end users, specifically:
x Inventory – to the specific grid location
x Requisitioning
x Issue/Receipt reporting
x Expenditure reporting
x Asset maintenance
x Notice Ammunition Reclassification (NAR) processing
x Transaction reporting (either ammunition transaction report (ATR) or transaction item report
(TIR))
x Space management – including net explosive weight (NEW) management for explosive safety
quantity-distance and explosive compatibility management
x Load plan management
x Excess/disposal processing

17-5
 x Department of Defense Form (DD Form) 1348-1A and shipping labels
x Automated information technology processing (linear and two-dimensional barcode)
x Software version tracking (SVT) for designated missiles and missile components

OIS-R/ROLMS System Interfaces

OIS-R/ROLMS interfaces with various systems to exchange data and information, specifically:
x OIS-W for Navy and Marine Corps aviation ordnance inventory data
x OIS-MC for Marine Corps ground ordnance inventory data
x Total Ammunition Management Information System-Redesigned (TAMIS-R)
x Automated planning system (APS)
x Standard Missile Engineering Production System (SMEPS)
x Virtual Fleet Support (VFS)

System Customers and Users

OIS-R/ROLMS is used by activities holding naval ammunition. Additionally, OISR/ ROLMS is used by
Marine Corps ammunition supply points (ASPs), which report to OIS-MC. Customers include activities
within Commander, United States Fleet Forces Command (COMUSFLTFORCOM), Commander,
Pacific Fleet (COMPACFLT), Commander, United States Naval Forces Europe (COMUSNAVEUR),
Commander, United States Naval Forces Africa (COMUSNAVAF), Commander, Naval Sea Systems
Command (NAVSEA), Commander, Naval Air Systems Command (NAVAIR), Marine Corps, Naval
Reserve Force (NAVRESFOR), Coast Guard, Naval Education and Training Command (NETC),
Military Sealift Command (MSC), and contractors.
The Conventional Ordnance Stockpile Management Policies and Procedures, Naval Supply Systems
Command (NAVSUP) publication- (P-) 724 contains detailed information on OIS-W and OIS-R.

AMMUNITION REQUISITIONING AND TURN-IN PROCEDURES

This chapter provides an overview of ammunition requisitioning and reporting. Basic instructions
containing the policy, scope, and procedures for processing Military Standard Requisitioning and
Issue Procedures (MILSTRIP) requisitions are contained in Naval Supply Procedures, Afloat,
NAVSUP P-485, Volume I and Naval Supply Procedures, Ashore, NAVSUP P-485, Volume III.
Due to the extensive amount of unique data element definitions required for data entry into and
retrievals from OIS-W and the OIS-R/ROLMS, only specific policies governing the utilization of
ammunition requisitions and documentation are discussed in this training manual.
The requisitioning and reporting policies and assignment of responsibilities described in the following
paragraphs are applicable to naval and non-naval in-service ordnance cataloged and stored at naval
activities, as well as other service/agency and contractor activities, within the following ammunition
cognizant symbols (COGs):
x 0T COG: Marine Corps ground ammunition
x 2D COG: Tomahawk missile/components
x 2E COG: Air ammunition
x 2T COG: Surface/Underwater ammunition

17-6
 x 4T COG: Torpedoes and components
x 6T COG: Mines
x 6Z COG: United States Special Operations Command (USSOCOM) specialized equipment
x 8E COG: Air-launched guided missiles
x 8S COG: Submarine rocket (SUBROC) material/mobile submarine simulator
x 8T COG: Surface launched missiles
x 8U COG: Sonobuoys
Supplying ammunition to the fleet is accomplished by the preparation and submission of MILSTRIP
documents such as requisitions, redistribution orders, and referral orders in accordance with
NAVSUP P-485, Volume I and any tailoring required for ordnance material.
These requisitions are supply action documents initiated in connection with:
1. Ammunition required for annual training exercises and/or as replacement for ordnance
expended during fleet exercise training within remaining allocations.
2. Stock point requirements for ammunition to fill or replenish load plan levels for Federal Law
Enforcement requirements.
3. Ammunition required in support of research development test & evaluation (RDT&E) programs
within an established allocation, maintenance program, or Quality Evaluation (QE).
4. Stockpile manager-directed relocation of ammunition.
5. Segregation of ammunition being transferred to a disposal account and/or movement to
disposal.
6. Replacement ammunition configured as aircraft installation assemblies such as cartridge
actuated devices (CADs) and propellant actuated devices (PADs) used in aircrew escape
applications whose demand pattern is based on predictable replacement schedules.

Terms and Definitions

Personnel that work with ordnance need to be familiar with the following ammunition terms and
definitions:

All-Up-Round
AUR are missiles, rockets, or torpedoes that are provided as complete assemblies.

Ammunition
Items that are ordered, stocked, and issued through the Navy Ammunition Distribution System, which
includes all items with cognizance symbols 0T, 2D, 2E, 2T, 4T, 6T, 8E, 8T, and 8U.
Categories of components and related ancillary items include small arms ammunition, small and large
caliber projectiles, rockets, bombs, pyrotechnics, cartridge actuated devices, missiles, torpedoes,
countermeasures, underwater mines, chaff, chemicals, underwater sound signals, demolition
explosives and materials, Marine Corps ammunition, gun ammunition, bulk explosives, solid
propellants, pallets, pallet adapters, shipping storage containers, and sonobuoys.

17-7
Ammunition Allowances
Ammunition allowances are established to maintain operational units in a mission-ready posture. The
different types and quantities of ammunition a unit is allowed to carry depend upon the unit's mission
assignment. Also, a unit's ammunition allowance reflects allowances for training, peacetime missions,
and wartime missions.
x Naval Supply Systems Command Global Logistics Support Ammunition (NAVSUP GLS
AMMO) Mechanicsburg, PA, loads NAVSEA 30,000 series allowance data in OIS-W;
allowance data includes: Provisional and Shipfill Allowance Lists and Mission or Cargo
Allowance Lists

Ammunition Detail
Hardware items used in packaging, handling, storage and/or transportation of ordnance, as well as
other ammunition or non-ammunition items that are needed to assemble an all-up-round of
ammunition. Examples: arming wires, bomb clips, fin assemblies, stacking racks, containers, etc.

Cargo Load Allowance List (34,000-34,999)

The cargo load allowance list is an approved listing of ordnance (all COGs) carried as cargo for
underway replenishment (UNREP) for issue to other fleet units in support of their assigned mission.
Cargo load allowances are normally carried by Military Sealift Command ships. Underway
replenishment ships would have this type of list in addition to their own shipfill allowance.

Cognizance Symbol
The COG is the two-digit numeric-alphabetic code symbol preceding an NSN, which identifies
ammunition, supply item, its inventory manager, and the stores account in which carried.
For example, in NSN 2E1425-00-940-1347-E075, the two-digit symbol 2E is the COG. COG symbols
are listed in NAVAIR 11-1-116B/TW010-AA-ORD-010.
NSN
2E1425-00-940-1347-E075
Breakdown
2E 1425 00-940-1347 E075
Cognizant Federal Supply National Item Department of Defense Identification
Symbol Classification Identification Code (DODIC) or Navy Ammunition
(COG) (FSC) Number (NIIN) Logistics Code (NALC)

Department of Defense Identification Code

The DODIC is a four character code centrally assigned by the Defense Logistics Information Service
(DLIS) to generically describe items of supply identified under the FLIS in Federal Supply Groups
(FSGs) 13 (AE) and 14 (Guided Missiles) with the following exceptions: items in FSCs 1395, 1398,
1430, or items with non-approved names of repair parts and industrial components. The four
characters may be one alpha character followed by three numerics (e.g., D548), or two alpha
characters followed by two numerics (e.g., PA38), or three alpha characters followed by one numeric
(e.g., PFF1). Whenever the same DODIC is used as a suffix on two or more NSNs, the items are
interchangeable as to function, issue, and use. DLIS does not assign DODICs containing W, X, Y, or
Z in the second position. The services use the letters to form codes, which serve internal
management functions.

17-8
The acronyms DODIC and NALC—or their respective meanings—are used interchangeably.

Expenditure
Expenditure is made when an item is permanently removed from the Navy inventory. A round that is
detonated, burned, fired, exploded, surveyed, or lost by inventory, emergency jettison, or transferred
to other services or another country, is posted and reported as expenditure. Transfers to other
Navy/Marine Corps/Coast Guard reporting activities are not considered expenditures.
The following types of expenditures are recorded in OIS-R/ROLMS and reported to OIS-W: combat,
training, test and evaluation, operational, disposal, loss by inventory, and transfers out of the Navy
reporting system.
Gain by Inventory
A gain by inventory (GBI) is an increase in the asset position based upon physical inventory of an
ammunition item.

Issue
An issue is the transfer of an item, regardless of its serviceability condition, to another activity,
including off-loads to shore activities and transfers to other ships.

Lead Time
Lead time is the time difference between the Julian date of the requisition and the required delivery
date (RDD). It consists of submission time, or the time to transmit the requisition from the
requisitioner to the stock point, plus processing and delivery time at the stock point.

Loss
Any disposition that reflects a permanent reduction in the asset position of the item and is not
recorded as an issue or expenditure.

Loss by Inventory
A loss by inventory (LBI) is a decrease in the asset position based upon a physical inventory of an
ammunition item.

Maintenance Due Date

The month/year that an ordnance end-item or component must be removed from service use and
placed in unserviceable status. An maintenance due date (MDD) is computed by adding the approved
serviceable-in-service time (SIST) to the date of last test (DOLT). The MDD of a weapon is predicated
on the date that the next component requires intermediate- or depot-level maintenance or testing.
MDDs vary from weapon to weapon and within configurations of weapons. They are used to
determine serviceability. Weapons with an expired MDD are not serviceable.

Mission Load Allowance List

The mission load allowance list is an approved war allowance listing of ordnance to be carried in
support of special support/operational requirements of nuclear aircraft carriers (CVNs) for aircraft
squadrons based aboard, and by ADs and ASs for ships and submarines assigned, as well as
ammunition required to be carried in support of the ship’s mission excluding the ship’s own
armament. Mission load allowances are issued for aircraft carriers, maritime prepositioning ships,
amphibious warfare ships, destroyers, and submarine tenders as separate and additional lists to their

17-9
shipfill allowance lists. The mission load includes special warfare (SPECWAR) loads, explosive
ordnance disposal (EOD) loads, or U.S. Marine Corps loads.

National Item Identification Number

The NIIN is a nine-digit number that uniquely identifies a specific item of supply. The NIIN includes
the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) code and is the primary sequencing element of the
NSN. Many catalogs, documents, and listings are in NIIN sequence.

National Stock Number

The NSN is the 13-digit stock number consisting of the 4-digit Federal Supply Classification (FSC)
code plus the 9-digit NIIN. The NSN is assigned to an item of supply by the Defense Logistics
Support Center (DLSC) Battle Creek, MI. The NSN is arranged as follows: 1305-00-892-4254. The
NSN also consists of a 2-digit National Codification Bureau (NCB) number designating the central
cataloging office of the NATO or other friendly country that assigned the number.

Navy Ammunition Logistics Code

A NAVSUP GLS AMMO assigned four-digit code consisting of alpha and/or numeric characters. The
second digit of the code will be W or X (e.g., 3W92, HX05) or the code may be all-numeric (e.g.,
1571). The NALC is similar to a DODIC except for its assignment by NAVSUP GLS AMMO to
conventional ammunition items, which do not meet established DoD criteria for DODIC assignment.
For detailed information on NALCs, refer to the Navy Ammunition Logistics Codes, NAVSUP P-802.

NAVSEA 30,000 Series and Fleet Allowances

The NAVSEA 30,000 series and fleet allowances are the Chief of Naval Operations- (CNO-)
approved full war allowance for shipfill, ship to shore rotational units, and shore stations. An individual
allowance list is prepared for each ship in the active and reserve fleets, for certain fleet groups,
detachments, units, and shore activities, and for initial outfitting. As changes and adjustments to
service allowances occur, revised NAVSEA lists are suffixed to indicate revisions. The list is updated
as system, tactics, or magazine configurations change. It provides the baseline for ordering,
budgeting, procuring, and positioning ammunition for fleet activities. Separate additional allowance
lists called cargo load or mission load allowances are issued for ships that carry ordnance in support
of other fleet units. Cargo and mission allowance quantities are determined by FLTCDRs or their
TYCOMs. TYCOMs are responsible for keeping the NAVSEA 30,000 series allowance current.

Non-Combat Expenditure Allocation

The non-combat expenditure allocation (NCEA) is the total of all Navy, including Marine Corps,
aviation, non-nuclear ordnance items authorized for expenditure for training, testing, operations, and
other peacetime uses.
Notice of Ammunition Reclassification (NAR)
A notice of ammunition reclassification (NAR) is a NAVSUP GLS AMMO notice advising stock points
and ammunition custodians of changes in the serviceability, status, or condition of ammunition,
components, and related material. A NAR directs changes to material condition identification
(condition codes) for in-service ammunition. NARs are issued to place restrictions or limitations on the
issue and/or use of ammunition populations, to declare it to be unserviceable, or to revise previous
NARs. Restrictions, limitations, and unserviceable classifications include identifying safety-related
conditions such as potential personnel hazards during handling and operational use and explosive
hazards during storage.

17-10
Notice of Ammunition Reclassification Program
The NAR program contains the policy and procedures that provide for the worldwide reclassification
of potentially dangerous ammunition and describes stockpile management procedures associated
with the dissemination of information pertaining to ammunition reclassification. The degree of
ammunition serviceability is identified by the assignment of appropriate ammunition condition code
(C/C). Conventional naval ordnance is designed and produced with a high degree of safety and
reliability built in.
During the course of its stockpile target-stockpile sequence, naval ammunition may be downgraded
such that the ammunition is restricted and/or unserviceable. The change is promulgated by a NAR,
which may be issued due to any one or a combination of factors including age degradation,
environmental effects, decreased performance, priority of issue implementation, etc. Malfunctions and
discrepancies reported by using units also prompt inputs to the reclassification program, as does the
declaration of material as obsolete/disposable.
The NAR program provides a standardized method to inform all DON and Coast Guard activities of
C/C changes and disposition of unsafe or unreliable ordnance items through rapid, worldwide
dissemination of NAR messages. NARs may also be used as an inventory management tool to place
usage restrictions or priorities on certain items. NARs are numbered consecutively within each fiscal
year and serve as supplements to the Ammunition, Unserviceable, Suspended and Limited Use,
NAVSUP P-801 until incorporated by a change or revision.

Provisional Allowance List

A provisional allowance list is a preliminary listing of an initial shipfill allowance of service ordnance
prepared and forwarded to the ship and the TYCOM by NAVSUP GLS AMMO for validation of
compatibility with armament systems and stowage capability. The provisional allowance list is
reserved for new construction ships or for major conversion/regular overhaul. Shipfill allowance lists
replace provisional allowance lists after validation by the FLTCDR.

Receipts
A receipt is a transaction that records the receipt of ammunition onboard a Navy reporting activity that
increases the on-hand inventory balance of an item for a given condition code.

Serial/Lot Item Tracking (SLIT)

OIS-W and OIS-MC for 0T COG material provide the capability for the reporting and control of
ammunition assets by lot and/or serial number. Activities holding naval conventional ammunition
designated for serial or lot number control are required to submit the appropriate serial/lot item
tracking (SLIT) transactions to OIS-W using procedures provided in the NAVSUP P-724. SLIT
reporting is supplementary to Military Standard Transaction Reporting and Accounting Procedure
(MILSTRAP). OIS-W is capable of tracking material location, C/C, purpose codes, ownership codes,
MDD, expiration dates, and type container codes that are required.

17-11
The material control ode (MCC) designates the type of tracking to be performed as follows:
MCC Type of Tracking
B Lot number
C Serial number
E Lot and serial number (lot and serial numbers are combined and reported as a
single number). The lot number is to precede the serial number with a period
separating the lot number from the serial number. If the lot/serial number is
greater than 21 characters, the last digit(s) of the lot number should be truncated.
K Lot number on a monthly basis

Service/Miscellaneous (Fleet Activity) Allowance List (38,000-39,999)

A listing of full war allowances authorized to an activity (shore station) for its own use, based on the
armament and mission of the activity.

Shipfill Allowance List (30,000-33,999)

The shipfill allowance list is an approved war allowance list of ordnance required to support the ship’s
own permanently installed armament, authorized small arms weapons, and distress and signaling
pyrotechnic requirements. Shipfill allowance lists contain full wartime allowances of service ordnance
designated to fill the ship's magazines to capacity without regard to ordnance item availability in
stock.

Suspended Ammunition
Suspended ammunition refers to ammunition that is:
x Temporarily identified and held in an undetermined or undecided status pending true condition
determination
x Temporarily identified and held in an unspecified status pending determination or completion of
subsequent action
x Withheld from issue except for emergency combat or contingent operational necessity
x Items identified with condition codes of J, K, L, M, and N, categorized as suspended

Tailored Allowances
Tailored allowances modify afloat ordnance loads for prescribed periods of time to satisfy missions
and/or threats of a very specific nature that cannot be adequately met by NAVSEA 30,000 series
ordnance loads. Allowances for shore activities cannot be tailored.

Temporary Custody
Temporary custody refers to a receipt of ammunition from fleet units, other Navy users, and
customers on an as-required basis for storage at an ashore facility with approval of a TYCOM, or with
approval of Commander, Marine Forces Atlantic/Pacific in the case of acceptance of landing force
operational reserve material (LFORM) and mission load allowance of class V (W) ammunition.

Temporary Storage
Temporary storage (TEMP STOW) is a receipt of ammunition by an ammunition support activity
(ashore), from a fleet unit (normally a ship), for temporary storage and return to the same unit.

17-12
Transaction
For reporting purposes, a transaction is any change in the reported asset posture of an ammunition
item. Examples of transactions are receipt, reclassification from suspended to serviceable,
expenditure, and issue.

Transfer
Transfer is the movement of assets from a Navy activity to an activity outside the Navy accounting
system such as the Army, Air Force, Coast Guard, or a foreign Government.

Type Maintenance Due Code

A type maintenance due code (TMDC) is a code that indicates what type of maintenance action is
due next for an individual item.

Unserviceable Ammunition
Unserviceable ammunition has one or more defects that would be expected to preclude or impair the
ability of the ammunition to perform as intended. Items identified with a condition code of E, F, G, H,
P, or V are categorized as unserviceable. Torpedoes and missiles that are not ready for unrestricted
use or are overdue for maintenance are considered unserviceable.

Ammunition Requisitioning Procedures

Stock points requisition ammunition in accordance with established load plans, policies, and direction.
Basic instructions containing the policy, scope, and procedures for processing MILSTRIP requisitions
are contained in Naval Supply Procedures, Afloat, NAVSUP P-485, Volume 1, applicable fleet
instructions, and specific conventional explosive ordnance requisitioning procedures ashore or afloat
contained in Conventional Ordnance Stockpile Management, NAVSUP P-724.
The standard method used for requisitioning ordnance is the ammunition MILSTRIP.

Allowance Development Procedures

Applicable TYCOM generates a shipfill allowance list for each new ship in the Navy prior to the
completion of ship construction. This allowance request will be routed to
COMUSFLTFORCOM/COMPACFLT for approval. Prior to the ship's commissioning, the TYCOM will
request NAVSUP GLS AMMO to transfer the ship's allowance from the precommissioning to the
commissioned unit identification code (UIC). This request may be made via electronic mail, an
ammunition condition report (ACR) is not required.
Operational commands provide mission or cargo allowance data to NAVSUP GLS AMMO, via the
appropriate chain of command with proper justification, to establish a new or revised allowance list in
OIS-W.
Type Commanders initiate a request to NAVSUP GLS AMMO via the FLTCDR; the
Acquisition/Program Manager; and NAVSEA Program Management Office for Navy 2T Conventional
Ammunition Systems to establish 2T COG mission or cargo allowances in OIS-W.

NAVSEA 30,000 Series Allowance Change Request Procedures

As platforms, armaments or weapons systems change, it may become necessary to modify existing
NAVSEA 30,000 series allowance data. Allowance change requests are processed the same
regardless of the type of allowance list.

17-13
Changes are initiated using the SIPRNet collaboration tool Enterprise Knowledge Management
(EKM) as directed in the Allowance Change Request Process Standard Operating Procedures and
Business Rules provided in the NAVSUP P-724.

NAVSEA 30,000 Series Change Request Approval and Processing

Processing and approval of allowance change requests are explained in the allowance change
request process standard operating procedures and business rules found in the NAVSUP P-724. The
ACR process:
1. ACR is initiated in EKM.
2. Reviewers conduct analysis of ACR.
3. TYCOM/Fleet approves ACR.
4. NAVSUP GLS AMMO completes its review of the ACR, verifies approval is annotated in EKM,
and updates OIS-W.
5. An alert will be sent notifying the EKM community that the ACR is complete.
NAVSUP GLS AMMO will release a naval message announcing the updated allowance list.

Military Standard Requisitioning and Issue Procedures

The MILSTRIP (Figure 17-1) should be used for ordering all material from the Navy supply system,
other military installations, the DLA, and the General Services Administration (GSA). MILSTRIP
requisitioning is based upon the use of a coded, single line item document for each supply
transaction. The normal requisitioning method for afloat activities is to prepare and submit
transactions to the supply source via defense automated addressing system (DAAS) in standard
MILSTRIP format.
MILSTRIP is designed to permit transmission and receipt of requisitions by electronic methods.
Telephone, mail, fax, and courier are the most labor intensive and error prone methods of submission
and should be avoided. To assure responsive and expeditious processing, the media of
communication used will be consistent with, and subject to, the limitations for use of media and status
codes.
Requisition in English (RIE) format may be used for requisitions with priority codes 01 through 03.
RIE requisitioning procedures are provided in NAVSUP P-724 and are explained in following
paragraphs.
NAVSUP GLS AMMOLANT and NAVSUP GLS AMMO PAC provide for economical sourcing of
ammunition. They generate, modify, or refer requisitions to the appropriate Command or Service for
handling and disposition, and coordination of shipments between stock points. They maintain daily
interface with fleet requisitioners in order to provide efficient response to operational contingencies.
Marine Corps System Command Program Manager for Ammunition (MARCORSYSCOM PM Ammo)
performs those functions identified above for 0T COG material.

17-14
 Figure 17-1 — Example of AMMO MILSTRIP format.

Preliminary Requisition Preparation Requirements

Prior to submitting an ammunition requisition, the following steps are required:
1. Verify current on-hand assets.
2. Verify the activity cited to receive material is an authorized receiver.
3. Verify the requisitioner's allowance or NCEA for the item being ordered.
4. Determine the RDD.
5. Determine the delivery destination or load-out point.
6. Determine the requisitioner’s authorized force/activity designator and urgency of need
designator in order to determine the appropriate priority.

Ammunition MILSTRIP Requisition and Follow-up Instructions

For training purposes, the following paragraphs provide brief explanations and data element formats
required to complete a standard 66-position ammunition requisition. The information is consistent with
NAVSUP P-485 for ammunition requisitions. Current directives, policies, and procedures should be
consulted for requisition procedures. Activities using OIS-R/ROLMS will requisition in MILSTRIP
format via a naval message. These messages are automatically routed to the OIS-W for processing.
17-15
Mandatory entries are annotated with an asterisk (*). The following paragraphs explain the data
elements illustrated in Figure 17-1.
x Document Identifier Code (DIC) – The DIC provides a means to identify each document type
(e.g., requisition, referral action, status document, and follow-up cancellation) to OIS-W and
further identify such data as to the intended purpose, usage, and operation desired; the DIC
enables OIS-W to select the appropriate program(s) and to mechanically perform operations
dictated by the data element or code; the DIC is a mandatory entry on all documents entering
and leaving the supply distribution system under MILSTRIP; examples of DICs are shown in
Table 17-1; refer to the NAVSUP P-485 Volume II for a complete list of applicable DICs; format
is provided below:
Position: 1-3*
Title: DIC-A0_
Explanation: A 3-digit code used to identify the purpose of the document. See
DICs most frequently used in ammunition requisitions as provided in
Table 17-1.
MILSTRIP:
AODNCBF1305A363 EA02000V215606168A060RN00188JY6 2T87613082
Table 17-1 — Example of Document Identifier Codes
DIC used to requisition ammunition for CONUS delivery
DIC Explanation
A0A Requisition for domestic shipment with NSN/NATO stock number
A0D Requisition for domestic shipment with part number
A0E Requisition submitted for domestic shipment with exception data (REMARKS)
DIC used to requisition ammunition for OCONUS delivery
A01 Requisition for overseas shipment with NSN/NATO stock number
A04 Requisition for overseas shipment with part number
A05 Requisition submitted for overseas shipment with exception data (REMARKS)
DIC used to modify ammunition requisitions
AMA Modify CONUS shipment with NSN
AM1 Modify OCONUS shipment with NSN
AMD Modify CONUS shipment with NALC
AME Modify CONUS shipment with exception data (REMARKS)
AM4 Modify OCONUS shipment with NALC
AM5 Modify OCONUS shipment with exception data (REMARKS)
DIC used to cancel ammunition requisitions
AC1 Requisition cancellation (by requisitioner)
AC2 Requisition cancellation (by supplementary address)
DIC used to follow up ammunition requisitions
AF_ To request the status of the requisition

17-16
 Table 17-1 — Example of Document Identifier Codes (continued)
DIC Explanation
ATA To request status for domestic shipment with NSN/NATO stock number;
process as a requisition if the original requisition was not received
ATB To request status for domestic shipment with part number; process as a
requisition if the original requisition was not received
ATD To request status for domestic shipment with other; process as a requisition if
the original requisition was not received
AT1 To request status for overseas shipment with NSN/NATO stock number;
process as a requisition if the original requisition was not received
AT2 To request status for overseas shipment with part number; process as a
requisition if the original requisition was not received
AT4 To request status for overseas shipment with other; process as a requisition if
the original requisition was not received
DIC used for status
AE_ Indicates supply status
AS_ Provides shipment status
AU_ Reply to cancelation request
x Routing Identifier Code (RIC) – A RIC is an address that either indicates the intended recipient
of the document or indicates the actual consignor (shipper) on supply type release/receipt
documents; for the purpose of submitting requisitions to OIS-W the RIC is NCB; a complete list
of applicable RICs for use in referrals is provided in NAVSUP P- 485, Volume II; format is
provided below:
Position: 4-6*
Title: RIC – NCB (for Requisitions)
Explanation: A 3-digit code used to represent the address of the intended receipt of
the document.
MILSTRIP:
AODNCBF1305A363 EA02000V215606168A060RN00188JY6 2T87613082

17-17
x The Media and Status (M&S) Code – The M&S code provides information indicating status
reporting requirements on MILSTRIP requisitions; M&S codes may indicate that status is to be
furnished to the requisitioner (card column (cc) 30-35) and/or the supplementary addressee (cc
45-50); a complete list of applicable M&S codes is provided in NAVSUP P-485, Volume II;
format is provided below:
Position: 7*
Title: M&S
Explanation: Media/Status F is the mandatory entry for signal codes other than A or
D. The F entry indicates the status will be automatically provided to the
requisitioner and the supplementary addressee and distribution code.
Media/Status S is the mandatory entry for signal codes A or D. The S
entry indicates the status will be automatically provided to the
requisitioner.
MILSTRIP:
AODNCBF1305A363 EA02000V215606168A060RN00188JY6 2T87613082
x Federal Supply Class and Navy Ammunition Logistics Code or National Stock Number – The
FSC and NALC or NSN identifies the ammunition being requisitioned; the FSC/NALC is the
preferred format; any remaining spaces should be filled with blanks; otherwise the NSN may
be used; format is provided below:
Position: 8-20*
Title: FSC/NALC or NSN
Explanation: The FSC with NALC in positions 8-15 is the preferred format for most
ammunition requisitions. For non-NALC items, the FSC in positions 8-
11 is used with the NIIN in positions 12-20. For sonobuoys, the
preferred format is NALC with NIIN in cc 8- 20. Any unused spaces
should remain blank.
MILSTRIP with FSC/NALC:
AODNCBF1305A363 EA02000V215606168A060RN00188JY6 2T87613082
Position: 21-22
Title: Leave two blank spaces.
Explanation: N/A
MILSTRIP with NSN:
AODNCBF1305005556783 EA02000V215606168A060RN00188JY6 2T87613082
x Unit of Issue (U/I) – Abbreviations are used throughout the Navy for requesting, issuing, and
recording of all material in the Navy Supply System; periods are not to be used with these
abbreviations and the plural of the abbreviation will be the same as the singular; a complete list
of applicable U/I abbreviations is provided in NAVSUP P-485, Volume II; format is provided
below:
Position: 23-24*
Title: U/I
Explanation: An abbreviation of the types of units under which the material is
issued, such as each (EA), box (BX), or skid (SD).

17-18
 MILSTRIP:
AODNCBF1305A363 EA02000V215606168A060RN00188JY6 2T87613082
x Quantity – A number of units required of the requested item; format is provided below:
Position: 25-29*
Title: Quantity
Explanation: The requisition quantity has to be preceded with zeros to fill in all the
positions. Example: To requisition 166, the quantity would be 00166.
The letter M may be used in position 29 to indicate thousands when
the quantity exceeds the five-digit field limitation. For example, a
quantity of 100,000 may be entered as 0100M. Do not use decimals.
Every attempt should be made to requisition to unit pack.
MILSTRIP:
AODNCBF1305A363 EA02000V215606168A060RN00188JY6 2T87613082
x Service Code – Service codes are designed to accommodate service identity in MILSTRIP
documentation; the service codes are used in conjunction with other codes to identify the
parent service of requisitioners and other addressees; format is provided below:
Position: 30*
Title: Service Code
Explanation: The service code R will be used by Pacific Fleet operating units; V by
Atlantic Fleet operating units; M by Marine Corps activities; N by
activities other than COMUSFLTFORCOM and COMPACFLT
operating units and precommissioned units; and Z for U.S. Coast
Guard units.
MILSTRIP:
AODNCBF1305A363 EA02000V215606168A060RN00188JY6 2T87613082
x Unit Identification Code (UIC) – Format is provided below:
Position: 31-35*
Title: UIC
Explanation: The requisitioner’s UIC. For a complete list of UICs, see the Navy
Comptroller Manual, NAVCOMPT Volume 2.
MILSTRIP:
AODNCBF1305A363 EA02000V215606168A060RN00188JY6 2T87613082
x Julian Date – The Julian date consists of two elements; the last digit of the calendar year and
the numeric consecutive day of the year, e.g., 9274 represents 1 October 1999; format is
provided below:
Position: 36-39*
Title: Julian Date
Explanation: Example: 6168, 6 indicates calendar year 2016, 168 indicates the
Julian date, 16 Jun in this case.

17-19
 MILSTRIP:
AODNCBF1305A363 EA02000V215606168A060RN00188JY6 2T87613082
x Requisition Serial Number – Format is provided below:
Position: 40-43*
Title: Requisition Serial Number
Explanation: An alpha/numeric field (alpha I and O are not used). Serial numbers
cannot be duplicated on the same Julian date. Special warfare
(SPECWAR) units must delineate QT__ for NCEA requirements or
QC__ for combat requirements. Requisition serial numbers for
Tomahawk redistribution must be constructed starting with TH.
MILSTRIP:
AODNCBF1305A363 EA02000V215606168A060RN00188JY6 2T87613082
x Demand Code – Requisitions contain demand codes that are entered by the activity creating
the request; the demand code is a mandatory entry of an alphabetic character to indicate to
the management element of a distribution system whether the demand is recurring or
nonrecurring; since all ammunition requisitions are considered recurring, a blank space or null
value may be placed in position 44; certain advice codes and reason codes are compatible
only with recurring demands and others only with nonrecurring demand; a complete list of
applicable demand codes is provided in NAVSUP P-485, Volume II; format is provided below:
Position: 44
Title: Demand Code
Explanation: Enter R for a recurring requirement or N for nonrecurring requirement if
your automated system requires entry.
MILSTRIP:
AODNCBF1305A363 EA02000V215606168A060RN00188JY6 2T87613082
x Supplementary Address – The supplementary address field may be used by the requisitioner
to denote that another activity is to receive material, status, or billing; when used for this
purpose, cc 45 will contain the applicable service code and cc 46-50 will contain the UIC of the
activity to receive any of this data; the field may also be used by the requisitioner for local
controls by entering a Y in cc 45 and any combination of alpha/numeric in cc 46-50 as well as
the distribution code; although the entry will be insignificant to other than the originator, it will
be perpetuated on all subsequent documents
Position: 45-50*
Title: Supplementary Address
Explanation: Using Signal Code J identifies the activity to receive the material for
you. If you will load via another ship, include remarks with your
requisition. For example, a ship receiving ordnance from an AOE class
of ship, which will load ordnance at Naval Munitions Command (NMC)
Yorktown; the NMC will use UIC as the supplementary address and in
the remarks indicate that the ordnance will be loaded on board the
AOE for further transfer to your ship.

17-20
 MILSTRIP:
AODNCBF1305A363 EA02000V215606168A060RN00188JY6 2T87613082
x Signal Codes – The signal code is a mandatory entry in cc 51 of MILSTRIP requisitions; the
signal code serves a dual purpose: it designates the activity to which material is to be shipped
and, it designates the activity to which material is to be billed, if billing is required; the bill to
activity for intra-Navy transactions also may indicate the chargeable or accountable activity
Position: 51*
Title: Signal Code
Explanation: Code A – Bill to and ship to requisitioner.
Code B – Bill to supplementary address and ship to the requisitioner.
Code C – Billing will be determined by funding code in 52-53, ship to
requisitioner.
Code D – For U.S. Coast Guard. No billing required. Ship to
requisitioner.
Code J – Bill to requisitioner and ship to supplementary address. (For
Navy afloat units, signal code J is mandatory when loading out a shore
activity.)
Code K – Bill to and ship to supplementary address.
Code L – Billing will be determined by funding code in cc 52-53 and
ship to supplementary address.
Code M – For U.S. Coast Guard. No billing required. Ship to the
supplementary address.
MILSTRIP:
AODNCBF1305A363 EA02000V215606168A060RN00188JY6 2T87613082
x Fund Code – Fund codes have been developed to properly bill an activity for material received;
master accounting records at issuing activities contain the complete accounting spread
corresponding to the two-digit fund code assigned by the requisitioner; all requisitions must
contain a two-digit fund code except when no billing is required, which are indicated by a signal
code D or M; a complete list of applicable fund codes, their uses, and meanings are provided
in NAVSUP P-485, Volume II; format is provided below:
Position: 52-53
Title: Fund Code
Explanation: A two-digit code used to cite accounting data on requisitions. Afloat
units enter Y6. Shore activities refer to NAVSUP P-485, Volume II. U.
S. Coast Guard will leave blank.
MILSTRIP:
AODNCBF1305A363 EA02000V215606168A060RN00188JY6 2T87613082
x Distribution Code – The distribution code is a two part field which is contained in cc 54-56; the
first part (cc 54) indicates the activity who will be furnished 100 percent supply and shipment
status on all priorities in addition to status furnished in accordance with the M&S code entry in
cc 7; the second part, cc 55 and 56, indicates the COG and is significant only to the service
initiating the requisition

17-21
 Position: 54
Title: Distribution Code
Explanation: Fleet activities normally leave blank. Shore activities refer to NAVSUP
P-485.
MILSTRIP:
AODNCBF1305A363 EA02000V215606168A060RN00188JY6 2T87613082
x Cognizance Symbol – The COG identifies the technical and management responsibility for the
category of material; it indicates the stores account in cc 55 (either appropriation purchase
account (APA) or Navy working capital fund (NWCF)) and the cognizant inventory manager in
cc 56; complete lists of COGs are provided in NAVSUP P-485, Volume II
Position: 55-56*
Title: COG
Explanation: 0T – Expendable Marine Corps ordnance
2D – TOMAHAWK sea launched cruise missile and associated
equipment
2E – Conventional air ammunition
2T – Conventional surface/underwater ammunition
4T – Torpedoes, components, and anti-submarine rocket (ASROC)
material
6T – Underwater mines and components
8E – Air launched missile material
8S – SUBROC and mobile submarine simulator (MOSS) material
8T – Surface launched guided missiles and components
8U – Sonobuoys and sonobuoy launch containers
MILSTRIP:
AODNCBF1305A363 EA02000V215606168A060RN00188JY6 2T87613082
x Project Code – Project codes identify requisitions, shipments, and related documentation to
special projects, operations, exercises, and maneuvers; the one-to-one correlation enables the
Navy to distinguish and track these special programs to performance and cost data; project
codes are perpetuated in all related documentation and may also appear as part of the
shipping container markings; project code 764 for maritime prepositioning ships (MPSs), 821
for CADs/PADs that are required to avoid aircraft from becoming non-operational, and 841 for
requisitioning SPECWAR material are examples of important project codes; project codes
most frequently used in ammunition requisitioning are shown in Table 17-2; additional project
codes are provided in NAVSUP P-485, Volume II; format is provided below:
Position: 57-59*
Title: Project Code
Explanation: The code identifies the intended use of the ammunition, e.g., 876 –
training, 840 - cargo load, etc. Project codes most frequently used in
ammunition requisitioning are shown in Table 17-2.

17-22
 MILSTRIP:
AODNCBF1305A363 EA02000V215606168A060RN00188JY6 2T87613082
Table 17-2 — Examples of Project Codes
Code Explanation
764 Requisition of ammunition for maritime prepositioning ships
811 Ammunition requisition in support of operational and contingency support ashore that is not
covered by an unique project code associated with the operations or contingency; this
project code applies to USMC tactical air (TACAIR) beddown and Marine Air Support
Package requirements
821 Requisition for expendable ordnance (CADs/PADs, etc.) without which aircraft would
become nonoperationally ready
825 WPNSTA or NMC load plan adjustment (FTE use only); conventional ammunition being
relocated as excess to activity load plan
830 Onload for Deployment of Exercise; USMC Class V (W) ground ammunition requisitioned
as LFORM cargo for loading aboard amphibious ships for deployment or fleet exercises
831 Offload (post deployment or exercise)
837 Load adjust (shipfill); onload/offload of shipfill ordnance to/from combatants or mobile
logistic support force (MLSF) to facilitate onload/offload of training ordnance
838 Mission load; ammunition requisitioned in support of Mission Load Allowance for ship
deployment
839 RDT&E; expendable ordnance required in support of RDT&E programs
840 Cargo load; ammunition requisitioned in support of cargo load allowance for ship
deployment
841 SPECWAR (used for both contingency and training)
853 Stock point requisitions for ammunition to support load plan, other allowances, and repair
(not for fleet use)
868 Malfunction investigations; expendable ordnance requisitioned as a result of malfunction
investigations
869 Requisition or turn-in of prepositioned war reserve stock (PWRS) service mine material
874 Requisition or turn-in of exercise and training mine material
875 Redistribution orders (nonload plan); logistics management specialist, fleet logistics agent,
or higher headquarters directed redistribution or referral of expendable ordnance (Cogs 0T,
2D, 2E, 2T, 4T, 6T, 8E, and 8U)
876 Training (NCEA); ammunition requisitioned for or turned in from annual training or fleet
exercise
877 Shipfill; ammunition requisitioned to support ship’s own armament
878 Ammunition exchange; ammunition requisitioned and/or turned in for exchange due to
NARs, overaged components, obsolescence, etc.
880 Quality evaluation testing; requisitions for expendable ordnance items and components for
testing under quality evaluation surveillance programs

17-23
 Table 17-2 — Examples of Project Codes (continued)
Code Explanation
883 OCONUS resupply/rollback; ammunition requisitioned for or by OCONUS storage sites;
includes turn-ins for rollback to OCONUS or CONUS storage sites
887 Segregation of expendable ordnance that is being transferred to a disposal account
890 Initial load (requisition) of ammunition for newly constructed or activated ships
x Priority Designator Code– Priority designator codes are derived from a combination of the
force/activity designator (F/AD) and the urgency of need designator (UND); complete details
are contained in NAVSUP P-485; priority designator codes govern requisition submission,
material allocation, and depot/storage site processing
Position: 60-61*
Title: Priority Designator
Explanation: The authorized priority designator code is derived by the requisitioner from
the following table by matching the assigned F/AD (I-V) with the applicable
UND (A, B, C).
Urgency of Need Designator Force/Activity Designator
I II III IV V
A Unable to perform 01 02 03 07 08
B Performance impaired 04 05 06 09 10
C Routine 11 12 13 14 15
MILSTRIP:
AODNCBF1305A363 EA02000V215606168A060RN00188JY6 2T87613082
x Required Delivery Date (RDD) – Requisitions with specific RDDs will be processed to meet
that date of delivery; specific RDDs indicating other than routine processing must contain a
priority designator code based on F/AD/UND as described above; NAVSUP P-724 provides
guidelines to assist in the determination of the correct priority and lead time for ammunition
requisitions
x Issue Priority Groups (IPGs) that determine the need and processing time of the requirement
are categorized as follows:
IPG 1 – requisitions with priority designator codes 01 through 03
IPG 2 – requisitions with priority designator codes 04 through 08
IPG 3 – requisitions with priority designator codes 09 through 15
Position: 62-64*
Title: RDD
Explanation: The three-digit Julian date indicating when the material is required.
Guidelines for establishing RDDs are provided in NAVSUP P-724.
MILSTRIP:
AODNCBF1305A363 EA02000V215606168A060RN00188JY6 2T87613082

17-24
 x Advice Code – Advice codes are numeric-alpha character or alpha-alpha characters and
provide coded instructions to supply sources when such data is considered essential to supply
action and entry in narrative form is not feasible; these codes are entered in cc 65 and 66
The requisition transaction advice codes flow from requisition originators to initial processing
points and are, thereafter, perpetuated into passing actions and release/receipt documents. A
requisition does not normally require an advice code entry. The requisitioner may use an
advice code for conditions that dictate that advice or restriction is applicable to the items being
requisitioned. A complete list of applicable advice codes, their uses, and meanings are
provided in NAVSUP P-485, Volume II. Format is provided below:
Position: 65-66
Title: Advice Code
Explanation: A two-digit non-mandatory code providing details of requisition request.
MILSTRIP:
AODNCBF1305A363 EA02000V215606168A060RN00188JY6 2T876130825A
Advice codes 5A through 5Z (except 5I and 5O) and 51 through 59 are assigned for intra-Navy
usage. Table 17-3 lists a few examples of advice codes for training purposes only. Not all advice
codes are listed.
Table 17-3 — Examples of Advice Codes
CC
Explanation
65-66
Replacement certification; requested item is required to replace a mandatory turn-in
5A
repairable, which has been surveyed as missing or obviously damaged beyond repair
Item is known to be obsolete but still required for immediate use; if item is not available and
5B there is no known substitute, local purchase is authorized for quantity indicated; charge fund
code (cc 52 and 53)
Do not centrally backorder or procure; a substitute is acceptable; reject unfilled quantity not
5C
available for delivery; fill or kill at inventory control point level
Initial requirement certification; requested item is a mandatory turn-in repairable required for
5D initial outfitting/installation or increased allowance/stockage objective; therefore, no
unserviceable unit is available for turn-in
Release of planned requirement or reservation for:
x Mandatory turn-in repairable, no unserviceable unit is available for turn-in
5E
x Field level repairable
x Consumable
The stock number has recently been assigned; do not cancel if unable to identify; refer the
5F
requisition to the inventory manager (cc 67-69)
Exchange certification:
x Requested item is a mandatory turn-in repairable for which an unserviceable unit will
be turned in on an exchange basis under the same document number as that used in
5G
the requisition
x Requested item is compressed gas for which an empty cylinder will be turned in on an
exchange basis

17-25
 Table 17-3 — Examples of Advice Codes (continued)
CC
Explanation
65-66
Furnish nearest package quantity to quantity requested; do not cut or alter materials other
5H than as shown in the stock list; applies to rope, electrical cable, pipe, tubing, lumber,
packaged petroleum products, wave guides, etc.
5J Use of nonstandard items in lieu of standard stock is certified necessary
Do not backorder; a substitute is acceptable; reject unfilled quantity not available for delivery
5K
fill or kill at point of entry
5L Do not backorder; a substitute is acceptable; issue total quantity requested or reject

Ammunition MILSTRIP Requisition Follow-Up Instructions

Initial status on all requisitions submitted will be provided via OIS-W. If initial status is not received
within 7 days, a MILSTRIP follow-up (document identifier AT_ (Table 17-2)) is submitted to Naval
Ammunition Logistics Support Center (NAVAMMOLOGCEN) Mechanicsburg using RIC NCB. All
other data fields are perpetuated from the original requisition. The AT_ will be treated as a new
requisition if the original requisition was not received and status will follow.
Requisition status must be monitored to ensure timely processing and delivery. Periods for submitting
follow-ups are in accordance with local standard operating procedures (SOPs). The MILSTRIP follow-
up (document identifier AF_) must be submitted to NCB. All other data fields are perpetuated from the
original requisition.
The requisitioning unit should submit an AF1, while the supplementary address should submit an
AF2. Requisition status is provided in response to the AF_ document. The status code (positions 65-
66) provides current information on the document.
The status of MILSTRIP requisitions that have been processed through the DAAS from activities can
additionally be tracked using a Web-based tool developed by the Defense Automated Addressing
System Center (DAASC). The Web-based Virtual Logistics Information Processing System (VLIPS)
provides details on requisitions and can track reports of excess material and the movement of those
excesses to the destination disposal activity. Queries can be made by document number, unit activity,
project code, or NSN.

Ammunition MILSTRIP Requisition Status Procedures

Upon receipt of RIE requests, Ammunition Management Office Atlantic (AMMOLANT)/Ammunition
Management Office Pacific (AMMOPAC) will input requisition and provide status to the requisitioner
and supplementary addressee within 5 working days. Status for urgent RIE requests will be provided
within 48 hours. Status provided to requisitioner and supplementary addressee will address
requisitions by serial number and initial action taken.
AMMOLANT/AMMOPAC will follow local office procedures by sending requisition status or ensuring a
COMUSFLTFORCOM/COMPACFLT ordnance handling activity publishes requisition status
approximately 30 days prior to the start of the load evolution. Complete status of all requisitions will
be provided in an easily understood format and will indicate the point of contact for coordinating the
sequence of material delivery and other administrative information.
COMUSFLTFORCOM/COMPACFLT ordnance handling activities will send requisition status 7 days
prior to the start of the evolution. If additional status is needed, AMMOLANT/AMMOPAC should be
contacted.
17-26
Ammunition MILSTRIP Requisition Modification Procedures
If one or more of the data elements of the requisition require modification, it should be submitted with
a document identifier of AMA or AM1 (Table 17-2) to NCB. Not all data elements can be modified.
The data elements that can be modified are:
x M&S code (cc 7)
x Supplementary address (cc 45-50)
x Signal code (cc 51)
x Fund code (cc 52-53)
x Distribution code (cc 54)
x Project code (cc 57-59)
x Priority designator code (cc 60-61)
x RDD (cc 62-64)
x Advice code (cc 65-66)

NOTE
RDDs requiring modification must be verified by the
requisitioner to determine if the priority also requires
modification.

The quantity field is not a modifiable field using AMA or the AM1. For an increase in quantity, a new
requisition is required to obtain additional material. If all or part of the requisition quantity is no longer
required, a MILSTRIP cancellation (document identifier AC1) must be submitted to NCB. The quantity
(cc 25-29) is entered for the cancellation. All other data fields are perpetuated from the original
requisition.
Modifications to priority 01-03 require approval by the appropriate certifying authority.

Ammunition MILSTRIP Requisition Cancellation

If a ship cannot accept ammunition that has been delivered, the ship must submit an AC1
cancellation. In the event a ship fails to cancel a requisition, the supplementary address activity is
authorized to send an AC2 cancellation.

Ammunition Requisition in English

When a requisition is a Priority 01 through 03, an RIE may be sent via classified naval message or
secure email to the appropriate AMMO Office. Ashore facilities may use unsecure channels. The
following information is required, as shown in Figure 17-2:
1. Activity Name/UIC. See NAVSUP P-724 for UIC.
2. Point of Contact – Include name, electronic address, and phone/fax numbers.
3. Load point and scheduled load date(s) for units afloat.
4. Priority and RDD.
5. Type in columns:
NALC Nomenclature Quantity Project Code ACC

17-27
Figure 17-2 — Example of Requisition in English.

17-28
 6. Include preferred suitable substitutes, telemetry frequencies, weapons system particulars, and
any additional information to validate/correct NIIN.
Submit a RIE modification in a plain language naval message, electronic message, or fax to the
appropriate AMMO Office, stating modifications desired for previously requisitioned ammunition.
Reference the original request and requisition serial numbers.
Submit a RIE cancellation in a plain language naval message, electronic message, or fax to the
appropriate AMMO Office, stating ammunition requirements to be canceled. Reference the original
request and requisition serial numbers.
Submit RIE follow-up in a plain language naval message, electronic message, or fax to the
appropriate AMMO Office, requesting status. Reference the original request and requisition serial
numbers.

Requisitioning of Cartridge Actuated Devices/Propellant Actuated Devices

The CAD/PAD program has completed a prototype requisitioning, shipping, and delivery process. The
new process, described in NAVSUP P-724, permits maintenance activities to order CADs/PADs via
internet or telephone. The MILSTRIP requisition, issue, receipt, shipping, and confirmation data is
automatically generated.
All commands with internet access must use the Web ordering system. When internet access is
unavailable, the customer should call Defense Switched Network (DSN) 430-3813, commercial
(COM) 717-605-3813, or DSN 430-2017, COM 717-605-2017. At the end of the ordering process, the
customer receives an order number and document numbers for tracking purposes.
Activities ordering for aircraft maintenance within CONUS must order 14 calendar days prior to day
the CAD/PADs are needed. For scheduled replacement orders, mechanics must target the day the
CAD/PADs are required as the material delivery date for aircraft installation.
Ships at CONUS ports must order their e-stock 21 days prior to the required dockside date for on-
load. Installed CAD/PADs required for maintenance while deployed must be ordered by the
maintenance activities separately from the ordnance load and coordinated with the ship’s Weapons
Department.

Requisitioning of Mine Exercise Training Material

Mine Exercise Training (MET) material and associated services will be requisitioned from the
appropriate mine assembly activity by naval message in accordance with reference to current
directives. Commander, Mobile Mine Assembly Group, Corpus Christi, TX, must receive requests at
least 45 days prior to RDD.

Requisitioning By Fleet Units

The unit’s mission assignment and geographical location determine the requisitioning procedures
followed by fleet units. Fleet units are composed of fast combat support ships, mission load ships
(CVN and amphibious assault ships), and aircraft squadrons. Since the majority of aviation
ordnancemen (AOs) are assigned to aircraft carriers or aircraft squadrons, the discussion that follows
concerning requisitioning procedures for fleet units is limited to these two units.

Stock Levels
Ships are required to maintain their shipfill ammunition allowance on board or on order. One
exception is that stock levels can be reduced to 90 percent to permit expenditures for training, or to

17-29
carry exercise ammunition. Individual waivers of this requirement must be requested from the ship's
operational commander.

Requisitioning Procedures for Aircraft Squadrons

Air wings and aircraft squadrons ashore in CONUS submit requirements for all items to the
supporting air station where the material will be loaded or expended. For example, a fixed wing fighter
attack (VFA) squadron located at NAS Oceana, Virginia that needs ordnance for local training should
submit its requirements to the NMC Detachment NAS Oceana, Virginia. An air wing and aircraft
squadron ashore OCONUS submits all requirements to their supporting NMC detachment at the air
station.
Air wings, aircraft squadrons, or squadron detachments afloat submit requirements to the ship's
weapons department according to current ship's instructions. Air wing/Aircraft squadron support
activities should first attempt to satisfy the requirements from on-hand assets (items already in stock).
For those requirements that cannot be satisfied from on-hand assets, the support activity will
requisition the requirement. Requisitions must contain the UIC of the support activity in the MILSTRIP
document number. The supplementary address must contain the UIC of the user air wing/squadron
and the signal code B. Ordnance should not be ordered by using the air wing/squadron's UIC as the
requisitioner.
Air wings, aircraft squadrons, and squadron detachments should submit requirements well in
advance. The air wing/squadron should also keep the ship or support facility NMC detachment fully
informed of their requirements, which will permit timely requisitioning to prevent shortfalls and
minimize expensive problems that arise from emergency requisitions.

Requisition File Maintenance

Thus far, the procedures for requisitioning ammunition have been covered. However, requisitions
cannot simply be submitted and all materials will magically be in place for loadout. Careful monitoring
of actions taken on requisitions by the ammunition supply system and judicious expediting action is
necessary to ensure the best possible loadout. The following paragraphs discuss actions required of
the requisitioner to ensure that requisitions are processed expeditiously and are not lost.

Requisition Processing
NAVSUP GLS AMMO provides fleet requisition processing, fleet interface, and coordination
scheduling for ordnance movements through management offices located at NAVSUP GLS
AMMOLANT, Norfolk, VA and NAVSUP GLS AMMOPAC, San Diego, CA.
AMMOLANT provides ammunition management for the Atlantic region, east of the Mississippi River
and Ingleside, TX. AMMOPAC provides ammunition management for the Pacific region, west of the
Mississippi River, in addition to Opportune Lift (OPLIFT), Vertical Replenishment (VERTREP) and
Navy Liaison Office (NLO) actions.
NAVSUP GLS AMMO provides logistics assistance officers (LAOs), who are permanently positioned
personnel, to assist fleet commanders with all ordnance logistic issues within their area of operations.
Specifically, they assist with the development of strike group load plans, the forecasting of fleet
combat/training expenditures, the positioning plan for munitions within their area of responsibility and
perform mobile fleet support team (MFST) duties. The LAOs are strategically located in Pearl Harbor,
Hawaii; Naples, Italy; Bahrain; and Yokosuka, Japan.

17-30
Ammunition Turn-In Procedures
Procedures for turn-in of ammunition, ammunition details, and the procedures for temporary storage
and custody ashore are briefly discussed in this chapter. It is impractical to cover every procedure for
every conceivable ammunition item. Therefore, the discussion is limited to the more routine
procedures. Regardless of the particular type of ammunition or ammunition details being turned in,
Ammunition and Explosives Safety Afloat, NAVSEA Ordnance Publication (OP) 4 and Ammunition
and Explosives Safety Ashore, NAVSEA OP 5, Volume 1, require that all inert components, details,
and cartridge cases be inspected and certified that the containers are inert. It is extremely important
that personnel strictly adhere to these regulations. It is imperative that all applicable personnel be
thoroughly familiar with the procedures required for inspection, certification, and marking of empty or
inert items.

Turn-in of Air-Launch Missile Material

Ships must turn in air-launched missiles (ALMs) and ALM material (including wings and fins) before a
regular overhaul. Upon return from deployment, CVNs are normally directed to turn in or transfer all
ALMs and ALM material to another ship or activity ashore. The transfer of all ALMs and ALM material
does not include inert rounds used for training missile-handling crews.
The present ALM maintenance policy permits ships to retain all serviceable deep stowed ALMs,
including ALMs on cargo load ships, until the MDD of the missile has been reached. Deep-stowed
ALMs are missiles that have not been removed from their sealed shipping container. When a CVN
turns in missiles that have remained in deep stowage and the MDD has not expired, the
accompanying paperwork is normally marked ready for issue (RFI). When the shipping seals on the
missile container are broken, or the missile is removed from the shipping container for any reason, or
the MDD has expired, the accompanying paperwork should be marked not ready for issue (non-RFI).
Serviceable assets from deep stowage that are turned in must be repackaged and tagged according
to current directives. Unserviceable assets, including captive-flown missiles, missiles in ready-service
stowage, and missiles carried on launchers must be segregated, packaged, and tagged according to
current directives, and then routed to the appropriate naval weapons station (NWS)/NMC
detachment. Documentation is prepared according to the procedures discussed in the following
paragraph.

Ship Offload Planning Procedures

Ships and other operational units must submit a classified offload planning message to the
NMC/OFFLOADING RECEIPT ACTIVITY listing all items with information copy to
NAVAMMOLOGCEN MECHANICSBURG PA //N45// and NAVAMMOLOGCEN AMMOLANT
NORFOLK VA //N45.2// or NAVAMMOLOGCEN AMMOPAC SAN DIEGO CA//45.2// at least 45 days
prior to the offload evolution to allow sufficient time for offload planning.
Disposition for Tomahawk assets shall not be requested prior to offload. NAVSUP GLS AMMO
logistics management specialist (LMS) will provide disposition instructions, if required, to the offload
site.
The offload message must include the following ammunition information:
x Activity classification code (ACC): Ensure SPECWAR (Q) and Coast Guard (Z) assets are
listed separately from Navy assets (A)
x NALC/DODIC/NIIN
x Nomenclature

17-31
 x Lot, serial, or lot and serial numbers
x MDDs/Expiration date(s) (EXPs)
x QTY
x C/Cs and D/Cs on all ammunition to be offloaded
x Any applicable NARs
x Extent of assistance required to properly sentence the ammunition for offload
x Packaging, handling, storage, and transportation (PHS&T) equipment that may be required to
facilitate the offload
x All sonobuoys by: NALC, stock number, lot number, quantity, and C/C
x Remarks (as required)
Offloading receipt activities will review their load plan to determine if serviceable material can be
retained as on-hand stock.
Disposition requests for excess serviceable material will be submitted by message or email directly to
NAVAMMOLOGCEN AMMOLANT NORFOLK VA//N45.2// or NAVAMMOLOGCEN AMMOPAC SAN
DIEGO CA//45.2// with information copy to NAVAMMOLOGCEN MECHANICSBURG PA//45//, 45
days prior to the offload evolution.
NAVSUP GLS AMMOLANT/PAC will provide disposition for all unserviceable material after receiving
inputs from NAVSUP GLS AMMO and the offloading receipt activity. Disposition will be provided by
naval message/email to the offloading unit with information copy to the offloading receipt activity and
all other activities receiving the material 7 days prior to the offload event. Offloading units will utilize
own ship document numbers to maintain data integrity.
When practical, the offloading receipt activity will host an offload coordination conference. Offload
receiving activities will provide guidance regarding planned ship offloads that will contribute to safe
offload operations and accurate accountability of offloaded ammunition.
Prior to a scheduled ship offload, the offload-receiving activity will send a message to the unit, with
NAVAMMOLOGCEN, Mechanicsburg and NAVAMMOLOGCEN AMMOLANT/AMMOPAC as info
addressees, identifying all safety, offload, documentation, and disk-to-disk requirements. During the
conference, a specific time will be established for handling security risk category (SRC) I and II
material.
Ships will provide representatives to conduct a 100 percent inventory of SRC material with offload
activity representatives. Quantity, lot number, and serial number discrepancies will be annotated and
immediately corrected during the 100 percent inventory count.
Quantity, lot number, and serial number discrepancies leading to missing SRC I and II AE will be
reported.
The Issue Release/Receipt Document (DD Form 1348-1A) (Figure 17-3) is used to document the
turn-in of ammunition and ammunition details. A separate DD Form 1348-1A is required for the
transfer of each item of ammunition NIIN, ACC, and C/C including ammunition details. Almost all
activities will have an OIS-R/ROLMS system that will print the DD Form 1348-1A directly from the
database.
Handwritten DD Form 1348-1As are strongly discouraged. They are the cause of many accountability
and identification problems.

17-32
Figure 17-3 — Example of a completed Issue Release/Receipt Document
1348-1A.

17-33
Return and Control of Reusable Ammunition Material Details and Non-Reusable, Expendable
Cartridge Cases
Ammunition detail(s) are hardware items used in packaging, handling, storage, and/or transportation
of ordnance, as well as other ammunition or non-ammunition items that are needed to assemble an
all-up-round of ammunition. Examples are: arming wires, bomb clips, fin assemblies, stacking racks,
containers, etc.
The ammunition master repairables list (MRL) provides the destination of those items that, when
serviceable or requiring limited restoration or repair, should be returned using the movement priority
designator code as outlined in the MRL. The ammunition MRL can be accessed on the NAVSUP GLS
AMMO Web site; select Asset Profile, then select Publications, (Access required). Normally, all
details pertinent to the end round should be placed in the end round container, tagged Inert
Ammunition Details Inside (using any type of plain tag or label available), and prepared for return to
consignee in accordance with the procedures provided.
An OIS-R/ROLMS-generated Release/Receipt Document; DD Form 1348-1A will be prepared as a
Material Turned into Stores Document in accordance with Single Manager for Conventional
Ammunition (Implementing Joint Conventional Ammunition Policies and Procedures), DoD 5160.65-
M. For activities not possessing OIS-R/ROLMS, the DD Form 1348-1A should be typed. Experience
has shown that handwritten or altered documentation results in numerous accounting errors and
wasted man-hours recounting ammunition and ammunition details.

Return of Reusable Ammunition Details Procedures

End user activities will accumulate reusable ammunition details derived from firing of an AUR and
initiate appropriate action to return ammunition details to the nearest NMC detachment or appropriate
ammunition activity in the proper condition code. Do NOT ship to FLC/DLA activities.
CONUS stock points will transship offloaded reusable ammunition details to the consignee as
designated on DD Form 1348-1A, record receipt of reusable ammunition details turned into stores on
accountable records, and report material in accordance with procedures contained in NAVSUP P-
724.
CONUS stock points will conduct a physical inspection of all received reusable ammunition details in
accordance with Navy and Marine Corps Conventional Ammunition Sentencing – Receipt,
Segregation, Storage, and Issue Sentencing, NAVSUP P-805 and submit appropriate transaction
reports to NAVSUP GLS AMMO as material is properly identified.
Consignees will record receipts on records for all reusable ammunition details turned into storage,
report material in accordance with procedures contained in NAVSUP P-724. Consignees will conduct
a physical inspection of all received reusable ammunition details in accordance with NAVSUP P-805,
and submit appropriate transaction reports to NAVSUP GLS AMMO as material is properly identified
and segregated.
All empty hazardous material (HAZMAT) containers should be inspected, certified empty, and
assigned a C/C in accordance with NAVSUP P-805 or Navy and Marine Corps Conventional
Ammunition Sentencing – Fleet Sentencing, NAVSUP P-807 as applicable. All containers being
returned must be complete with covers, (e.g., lids), assembled to the container. The covers are
required to prevent rusting of container interiors and entrance of foreign material into the containers,
which causes an increase in cost for decontamination and cleaning. Containers that are bent or
distorted so that the covers or lids cannot be replaced are not acceptable and should be disposed of
through normal property disposal channels. Fiber containers are to be placed in original box for
return.

17-34
Shippers should ensure that inert components and packaging material derived from ammunition and
hazardous chemical munitions are inspected for contamination by the activity generating the
returnable item. All packaging material should be opened to ensure that no hazardous chemicals or
ammunition items are present. Qualified responsible personnel conducting the inspection of material
should submit a certificate of inertness as part of the turn–in documentation in accordance with
Ammunition and Explosives Safety Ashore, NAVSEA OP 5.
Stock points should follow guidance in NAVSUP P-724 for disposal/demilitarization (DEMIL) of
ammunition details.
All Navy-owned ammunition details designated to be shipped to Army ammunition activities/plants
(AAA/AAP) are to be marked for routing identifier (NCB) account.

Turn-In Procedures for Cartridge Cases

All fired/expended cartridge cases are authorized to be transferred to a qualifying recycling program
(QRP), in accordance with the Defense Materiel Disposition Manual, DoD 4160.21-M. Prior to
transfer, the generating activity must inspect, certify, and verify the explosives safety status of the
material is safe according to the NAVSEA OP 5 and DoD 4160.21-M.
Report all unserviceable cartridge cases that are beyond economical repair, with the exception of
fired/expended cases, including 20 millimeter and larger, to the SM.
Activities holding fired or expended cartridge cases that cannot be certified inert should request
disposition from the Navy Designated Disposition Authority (DDA) at NAVSUP GLS AMMO.

Temporary Storage Offload

Ordnance offloaded from ships for TEMP STOW ashore in appropriate circumstances, such as short-
term emergency ship repair, is strictly accounted for as follows:
1. Offloaded ordnance must continue to be carried on the ship’s stock records while in TEMP
STOW. Therefore, an ATR is not required to transfer custodial responsibility to the TEMP
STOW activity. The receiving shore activity must store the ship’s ordnance load separately
from its own local stocks.
2. The ship is responsible for all ordnance maintained in TEMP STOW, to include the tracking
and application of NARs. If a NAR changes the C/C of ordnance being held at a TEMP STOW
location, the ship will send a naval message to the activity storing the ordnance directing them
to comply with the applicable NAR and if required submit disposition of ammunition via
appropriate chain of command. The naval message will include NAVAMMOLOGCEN
AMMOLANT Norfolk, VA or NAVAMMOLOGCEN AMMOPAC San Diego, CA to assist in
obtaining replacements for the affected ordnance and the ship will send a message to the
storing activity advising disposition of the material. OCONUS activities will also include the
immediate superior in command (ISIC) on all naval messages. Although the ship is responsible
for NAR application, the storing activity will include TEMP STOW material when screening
assets for NAR applicability.
3. The receiving shore activity will subsequently return the identical ordnance assets that were
turned in without receipt or issue transactions being reported, and without inspection or
sentencing being conducted.
4. For TEMP STOW at a fleet activity, a message request is forwarded to the appropriate
TYCOM.
5. TEMP STOW is not to exceed 30 days and must include the reason for the temporary storage.
Information copies of the requesting message are addressed to: COMUSFLTFORCOM,
17-35
 COMPACFLT, Commander U.S. Naval Central Command (COMUSNAVCENTCOM), or
COMUSNAVEUR for storage in their area of responsibility and the desired coastal weapons
activities or fleet storage activity, along with the appropriate chain of command.
6. TYCOMs will liaise with NAVSUP GLS AMMO AMMOLANT Norfolk, VA and NAVSUP GLS
AMMO AMMOPAC San Diego, CA on the feasibility of the request for storage at coastal
weapons facilities.
7. If approved, the requesting ship should advise the offload site what ordnance will be
temporarily stored and the period of temporary storage.
8. A DD Form 1348-1A is required for each type of ordnance to be stored. Each item of
ammunition (NIIN, ACC, and C/C) requires a separate DD Form 1348-1A. The storing activity
will receive TEMP STOW material into ownership code 3 citing the quantities, C/Cs, and
lot/serial number(s) as listed on the transfer documents. If the TEMP STOW material exceeds
the allowable TEMP STOW period, the activity owning the material will submit an ATR)/TIR
and storing activity will receive via ATR/TIR in ownership code 4 or 5.
9. If circumstances indicate the TEMP STOW period will exceed 30 days, TYCOM may grant a
30-day extension on a case-by-case basis to a maximum TEMP STOW period of 60 days.

AMMUNITION TRANSACTION REPORTING

Ammunition transaction reporting is a method of reporting transactions involving naval conventional
ordnance. ATRs are transmitted via formatted message for all transaction types, using variable length
transaction lines. These transaction types include an initial report to establish balances and
subsequent reports to submit receipts, issues, expenditures, inventory adjustments, and maintenance
transactions.
ATRs are used to report ammunition supply transactions by naval activities and commercial ordnance
handling and storage activities that do not have TIR capability. When responding to questions
concerning ATRs, NAVSUP GLS AMMO provides information copies to all addressees listed on the
incoming message.
All personnel involved in production, segregation, storage, movement, receipt, issue, and expenditure
of ammunition are responsible for the timely and accurate reporting of ATR and TIR actions that
affect the status of ammunition accountability.
Receipts, issues, and status changes mandate document posting and processing into OIS-R/ROLMS.
OIS-R/ROLMS will update the OIS-W database through a TIR (OISR/ROLMS full level users only) or
ATR. TIRs/ATRs are required to be submitted within the following timeframes:
All transactions for SRC I and II items (controlled item inventory codes (CIICs) 1, 2, 5, 6, 8, and S),
and urgent NARs should be reported within 24 hours after completion of the event.
All other transactions should be reported with 48 hours (2 working days) after completion of the event.
Exceptions to these reporting requirements include:
x During major combat operations (MCOs) or small-scale contingency combat, expenditures will
be reported via ATR/TIR within 12 hours
x Class V (A) ammunition utilized during a combined arms exercise (CAX) will be reported within
72 hours after completion of the exercise
x Naval SPECWAR units shall report MCOs or small-scale contingency combat expenditures via
ATR within 24 hours

17-36
 x Training commands that conduct daily training (Monday through Friday) will consolidate the
daily expenditures and submit an ATR at the end of the training week, or within 24 hours of the
last training evolution, whichever is earliest
ATR transactions are reported in accordance with the timeframes prescribed in Conventional
Ordnance Inventory Accountability, OPNAVINST 8015.2 series and in accordance with the policies
provided in NAVSUP P-724.

ATR Message Formatting

The following paragraphs provide a brief overview for a typical ATR format; not all ATR procedures
are described.
OIS-W and OIS-R/ROLMS generate formatted ATR messages for submission; activities that do not
have the available reporting system are still required to submit transaction reports. There may be
times that an activity may have to manually prepare and generate an ATR message. The format must
be followed precisely.
The following paragraphs will provide a brief explanation with an example of a typical ATR. Figure 17-
4 provides a sample ATR message for reporting the receipt and issue of non-SLIT items.

17-37
Figure 17-4 — Sample ATR message for reporting the receipt and issue of non-
serial and lot item tracking (SLIT) items.

17-38
A sample ATR message for reporting sonobuoy expenditures is shown in Figure 17-5.

Figure 17-5 — Sample ATR message for reporting sonobuoy expenditures.

ATR Format Instructions Manual Preparation

ATRs are limited to 6 pages in length with 20 lines per page. On the first page, the 20 lines begin with
the From line. Each line is limited to 69 characters per line and line breaks are indicated with a slash
(/). If transactions exceed one line, the second and subsequent lines will be indented at least three
spaces. If the number of transactions to be reported exceeds six pages, another ATR message will
be prepared with the next sequential serial number. Multiple ATRs may be included in one message
date time group (DTG).
ATRs will be transmitted as operational messages (message handling code OPS) with priority (P)
precedence. ATRs are authorized for transmittal during periods of MINIMIZE. The language media

17-39
format (LMF) code will be TT. (The LMF code is only on the first page of multiple-paged ATRs.) The
content indicator code (CIC) is NBAT. Ensure CIC block is NBAT to indicate direct processing into the
OIS-W database.
The addressee will always be NAVAMMOLOGCEN MECHANICSBURG PA//431//. Chain of
command, TYCOM, and the appropriate AMMO will direct information addressees. Informational
ATRs will not be addressed to Crane Army Ammunition Activity (CAAA).
The slash (/) is the symbol used to enable computer recognition of data. Four slashes are used to
indicate the beginning of an ATR and ending of an ATR. Three slashes are used at the beginning and
ending of each transaction line. Two slashes are used before the beginning balance, before each
transaction code, and before the ending total of a transaction line. One slash is considered a data
separator.

The letters for break transmission (BT) will be on the next line following the last information
addressee.

ATR Subject Line

ATR subject line is as follows:
x AMMO TRANS RPT Report Control Symbol (RCS) NAVSUP P-724, if unclassified
x AMMO TRANS RPT RCS NAVSUP P-724 (C); the (C) indicates ATR transaction is
confidential

Reference Line
Reference line is used to cite the last ATR or to reference a NAVAMMOLOGCEN message when
correcting an ATR. In referencing the last ATR, the DTG and security classification of the message
will be used when available. If not available, the previous ATR serial number and report date will be
the reference.

ATR Header Line

The header line is the first line of the ATR and begins on the line after the subject or reference line (if
any) and has a specific format as follows:
x Beginning Slashes – The format starts with four slashes (////), beginning at the left margin
x Reporter UIC – The service designator code and UIC of the reporter followed by one slash (/)
x ATR Serial Number – A three-digit sequential report serial number followed by one slash (/);
serial numbers range from 001 to 999, commencing initially with 001; upon reaching serial
number 999, the unit will revert to 001 and restart the sequence, which is the only time the
sequence is restarted; DO NOT restart serial sequence with the beginning of a fiscal year;
units that have been authorized to cease reporting will use serial 000 to denote the final report
x ACC – A single letter designating the account involved in the transaction followed by one slash
(/); each reporting unit is authorized specific ACCs; see Table 17-4 for applicable ACCs; a
separate ATR is required for each ACC having reportable transactions

17-40
 Table 17-4 — Activity Classification Codes
Fleet ACCs
ACC Definition
A Combatant ships, submarines, and miscellaneous nuclear fleet ships reporting shipfill
allowance transactions that include training/combat expenditures by ship force; this code
also includes training/combat expenditures of shipfill allowance ammunition (including
sonobuoys) in support of embarked LAMPS helicopter detachments (helo dets)
B Auxiliary ships and MCS-12 reporting shipfill allowance (own use) transactions, which
include training/combat expenditures by ship force; additionally, this includes training/combat
expenditures of shipfill allowance ammunition (including sonobuoys) in support of embarked
helo dets
C Aircraft squadrons or helo dets based ashore reporting transactions of ammunition and
sonobuoys; host ships other than CVs reporting detachment expenditures shall report under
ACC A or B as applicable
D Ships (CV, LPH, LHA, LHD, AS) reporting mission load allowance ammunition transactions,
excluding sonobuoys; also MLSF ships (T-AE, T-AOE, and miscellaneous CLF ships only)
reporting cargo allowance ammunition transactions, including sonobuoys, but not SPECWAR
ACC Q material; also financial OIS-R/ROLMS stations reporting PWRs mobilization reserve;
reports of receipts, expenditure, or returns by aircraft squadrons shall be reported under
ACC C
E Ashore activity reporting ammunition transaction (including sonobuoys) in support of USN
aviation squadrons or helo dets; report all ammunition held as ACC E, except that all class
USMC V(A) assets are to be reported under ACC J; overseas air stations and financial
reporting material for general issue utilize ACC E
F Any shore activity reporting ammunition transaction (including sonobuoys) in support of USN
ships/submarine/other shore activities; report all ammunition held as ACC F, except that all
USMC Class V(W) assets are to be reported under ACC W; overseas NMC and mobile mine
assembly group (MOMAG) units/detachments, naval stations (NAVSTAs), and submarine
base (SUBASE) Pearl, normally utilize this ACC
G Any shore activity reporting ammunition transactions for own use (i.e., local support, local
defense, non-combat expenditure)
H Ships reporting class V (A) ammo transactions supporting Marine aviation units
J Shore activities reporting Class V (A) transactions supporting Marine aviation units
K All ships/shore activities holding MET material; service mine material is to be reported under
ACC F
L For use by Navy expeditionary, naval, and amphibious construction forces reporting
ammunition transactions for their own use; additionally, all ship/shore activities reporting
transactions on behalf of the forces listed, i.e., dual UIC reporting
M All ammunition transactions concerning NTPF (near term prepositioned force) and MPF
(maritime prepositioned force)
N Not reportable to OIS-W

17-41
 Table 17-4 — Activity Classification Codes (continued)
ACC Definition
Q All ships/shore activities reporting ammunition (including SPECWAR cargo loads/SPECWAR
for further transfer (FFT)) reserved for naval special warfare forces (naval special warfare
groups/units; Sea, Air, and Land (SEAL)/SEAL delivery vehicle (SDV) teams; special boat
units/squadrons; and SPECWARCOM)
R All ships/shore activities reporting ammunition earmarked or dedicated for support of the war
reserve stock for allies (WRSA) program; financial and OIS-R/ROLMS activities reporting
material reserved for specific plans or projects
U Special categories of high intensive management items held in controlled areas or under
special processing procedures
V All ships/shore activities reporting ammunition earmarked or dedicated for support of USMC
TACAIR beddown; USMC aviation located afloat is normal class V (A) ammunition reported
under ACC H; ammunition afloat in transit to become TACAIR beddown for positioning in
country shall be reported as cargo load under ACC D
W All shore activities reporting USMC Class V (W) ammunition transactions (0T COG only);
reportable to MARCORSYSCOM (PM Ammo) (Not OIS-W)
Z All US Coast Guard ships/shore activities reporting ammunition transactions
CONUS ACCs
A Naval air training commands air stations/activities/units/squadrons
B Chief of naval reserve air stations/activities/units/squadrons
C Marine corps aircraft squadrons, training, and reserve
D Naval reserve centers/facilities
E Naval reserve ships/district craft (except destroyers and frigates)
F Naval reserve officers training corps units and high schools (located at colleges &
universities)
G Naval air stations/marine corps air stations
H Naval facilities, service schools, hospitals security groups communication and radio stations,
recruit-training centers, district intelligence offices
J Test/research/development activities
K Other activities, commands, offices, e.g., naval shipyards, naval supply centers, naval supply
depots
L Fleet commands (Atlantic/Pacific)
M Contractor activities reporting new production assets
Q All activities reporting ammunition reserved for naval special warfare forces (naval special
warfare groups/units, SEAL/SDV teams, special boat units/squadrons, and Naval Special
Warfare Center (NSWC) Coronado)
T Depot level maintenance facility (Navy owned material) – contractor activities reporting in
service assets
U Special categories of high intensive management items held in controlled areas or under
special processing procedures

17-42
 Table 17-4 — Activity Classification Codes (continued)
ACC Definition
V Depot level maintenance facility (military assistance program (MAP) owned material)
W All shore activities reporting USMC Class V (W) ammunition transactions (0T COG only);
reportable to MARCORSYSCOM (PM Ammo) (Not OIS-W)

x Transaction Date – The transaction date is the three-digit Julian date on which the reportable
transaction occurred followed by one slash (/); Julian dates may not be postdated in excess of
10 days; a separate ATR is required for each transaction date; dates need to follow in
sequential order
x Allocation UIC – The allocation UIC represents the service designator code and the five-digit
UIC of the activity or command registered with the NCEA if an expenditure transaction is
reported, followed by three slashes (///); transaction codes are F, G, H, R, and D; when using
transaction code D, a source code of EXERC will be used; Table 17-5 provides an example of
ATR transaction codes. For a complete listing of ATR transaction codes, consult the NAVSUP
P-724
Table 17-5 — ATR Transaction Code Summary
Transaction Code Description Transaction Transaction Source UIC Document
Type Code Code Number
Non-combat expenditures for fleet or Expenditure D EXERC No No
Higher Headquarters directed (NCEA)
exercises (torpedoes, VLA, exercise
mines, etc.), which are recoverable.
Chargeable UIC will be entered In the
Dual UIC field of the header line of the
ATR.
Combat expenditures for operations Expenditure E No No No
against a hostile force. Includes
material jettisoned by aircraft on a
combat mission. Munitions used for
anti-terrorism and force protection/civil
disturbance, and explosive ordnance
disposal munitions used for
emergency destruct.
Non-combat expenditure for training. Expenditure F No No No
Chargeable UIC will be entered In the (NCEA)
Dual UIC field of the header line of the
ATR.
Non-combat expenditure for research, Expenditure G No No No
development, test, and evaluation. (NCEA)
Chargeable UIC will be entered in the
Dual UIC field of the header line of the
ATR.

17-43
 Table 17-5 — ATR Transaction Code Summary (continued)
Transaction Code Description Transaction Transaction Source UIC Document
Type Code Code Number
Non-combat expenditure for Expenditure H No No No
operations as necessary during (NCEA)
peacetime natural disaster assist,
sea/air rescue, firepower
demonstration, explosive ordnance
disposal, underwater demolition team,
SEAL team, construction battalion
projects. Chargeable UIC will be
entered in the Dual UIC field of the
header line of the ATR.
Material destroyed/disposed of by the Expenditure I No No No
reporting unit/activity or shipped to a
non-reporting activity for disposal.
This transaction code shall be used
when a disposal release order (DRO)
(document identifier A5J, BGJ, or
BGD) is not required from the logistics
management specialist to perform
disposal action.
Material expended in fleet or higher Expenditure R No No No
headquarters directed exercises. (NCEA)
Chargeable UIC will be entered in the
Dual UIC field of the header line of the
ATR.
Physical serial or lot change (new). Maintenance C SLIPH No No
Re-identification (new NIIN) (due to Maintenance C REIDN No No
inspection).
Physical serial or lot change (old). Maintenance D SLIPH No No
Re-identification (old NIIN). Maintenance D REIDN No No
ACC change. (The single character of Maintenance D AAAAA No No
the ACC To is repeated five times as C EEEEE No No
the Source Code of the Issue
transaction. The ACC From is
repeated five times as the Source
Code of the Receipt. Each transaction
shall be on separate ATRs. Example
ACC E changed to A.)
Type container code change. Maintenance L No No No
MDD/EXP change. Maintenance M No No No
Reclassification (condition code Maintenance X No No No
change).
Receipt from another activity for stock. Receipt C No Yes Yes

17-44
 Table 17-5 — ATR Transaction Code Summary (continued)
Transaction Code Description Transaction Transaction Source UIC Document
Type Code Code Number
Receipt from another activity FFT. Receipt P No Yes Yes
Receipt of AURs from assembly of Receipt C ASSEM No No
components.
Receipt from a commercial contractor Receipt C COMCT No No
who is a non-reporter.
Receipt of components as result of Receipt C DSASM No No
AUR disassembly.
Receipt as result of Receipt C RCNFG No No
reconfiguration/change of components
resulting in a different NALC/NIIN.
Utilized when material is recovered in Receipt C GANCT No No
unserviceable condition after
expended for training (i.e., torpedoes)
or when mines are reclassified from
service to non-service.
Receipt of ammunition details Receipt C UNPAC No No
resulting from unpacking (pallets,
containers, etc.).
Receipt of material previously Receipt C INSTL No No
installed.
Receipt of material from renovation. Receipt C RENOV No No
Receipt of material originally furnished Receipt C GFMRI No No
to a contractor as GFM.
Receipt of material initially issued to Receipt C FMSRI No No
FMS.
Receipt of returns from disposal Receipt C DISPL No Yes
account on a document number
supplied by the IM.
Receipt of material from production. Receipt C PRODN No No
Receipt of material for which no other Receipt C OTHER No Yes
receipt source code applies.
Receipt of recovered serviceable and Receipt C TSTEV No No
unserviceable material such as AURs,
canisters, and grip stock, which are
reportable to OIS-W as a result of test
and evaluation (T&E) firings.
Receipt of items not previously Receipt C GANCE No No
reported as a result of a clerical or
accounting error.

17-45
 Table 17-5 — ATR Transaction Code Summary (continued)
Transaction Code Description Transaction Transaction Source UIC Document
Type Code Code Number
Gain for which no there is no other Receipt C GANOT No No
explanation.
Receipt of a NIIN due to an Receipt C REIDN No No
examination and discrepancy between
item and local records.
Receipt of material originally furnished Receipt C GRANT No No
as grant aid.
Receipt of serial/lot number when Receipt C SLIPH No No
physically changed.
Receipt when unit pack is changed, Receipt C NSNCH No No
when components are received back
into a kit, or when a NIIN is changed.
Example # 1:
USS ESSEX header line for ATR #453 reporting transaction from ACC D on Julian date 195.
Expenditures, if any, will be charged to the reporting UIC, R21533.
////R21533/453/D/195///
Example # 2:
USS ESSEX header line for another ATR, reporting transaction from ACC A on the same date.
////R21533/454/A/195///
Example # 3:
USS NASSAU header line reporting transaction from ACC D on ATR #323, on Julian date 197.
Expenditures, if any, will be charged to USS NASSAU allocation UIC, 20725.
////V20725/323/D/197/V20725///
Example # 4:
NMC CWD Detachment North Island (N61047) Header Line for ATR #584 reporting
transactions from ACC E on Julian date 196 charged to COMMASWINGPAC San Diego
(R09961) allocation. NMC CWD Detachment North Island is a financial reporter.
////N61047/584/E/196/R09961/F///

Transaction Lines
The transaction line is used to describe the actual transaction. A transaction line defines the NALC
and NIIN, C/C, beginning balance, transaction code (type of transaction), the transaction quantity,
SLIT data when required, the consignor UIC (UIC From) for receipts or consignee UIC (UIC To) for
issues, the document number, and ending balance. Some transactions require a source code instead
of a UIC To or From. These data elements are explained in further detail as follows:
1. Three slashes (///) followed by the NALC and NIIN of item being reported. If item has no NALC,
DO NOT use FSC in lieu of NALC. The NIIN only will be entered. Items with only one NIIN can
be reported by NALC only. Sonobuoys can be reported using the NALC and channel number,

17-46
 except sonobuoys 8W09 must be reported by NALC and NIIN. Ninety-nine-channel-selectable
sonobuoys can be reported by NALC only or NALC and NIIN.

NOTE
If you are using OIS-R/ROLMS, ATRs will be generated
with both a NALC and NIIN. Do not attempt to edit to only
reflect the NALC. Reporting with both the NALC and the
NIIN in these instances will not affect processing.

Example: ///A475003011685
2. One slash (/), followed by the condition code of item reported.
Example: ///A475003011685/A
3. Two slashes and the letter B (//B) followed by the beginning balance quantity of the item in the
condition code being transacted (before the transaction occurred). The letter B is used on all
transactions to report the beginning inventory.
Example: ///A475003011685/A//B500
4. Two slashes (//) followed by the transaction code and the quantity of the transaction being
reported (receipt, issue, etc.) is the next entry. Transaction codes are defined in Table 17-5
with corresponding source code or UIC TO/FROM requirement.
Example: ///A475003011685/A//B500//C200 (receipt quantity of 200)
5. ATR/TIR reporter activities are not authorized to use their own UIC in the UIC FROM or UIC
TO for reporting receipts or issues, as doing so would result in an error during OIS-W
processing. One slash followed by the consignor UIC is required on all receipts from another
activity. One slash followed by the consignee UIC is required for issues to another activity.
Source codes are reported in receipts and issues from the reporter's own activity, which is a
result of assembly, disassembly, reconfiguration, unpacking or repackaging ammunition, etc.
Source codes are identified in Table 17-5. The corresponding transaction code to be used with
the source code is listed.
Example: ///A475003011685/A//B500//C200/N00109
6. One slash (/) followed by the document number for receipts and issues to other activities.
Issues using transaction code D and source codes OTHER or DISPL also require a document
number. The receiving reporter will use the document number and the suffix code if assigned
to the DD Form 1348-1A by the shipper. A commercial contract number (including contract line
item number and sub-line number) must be used if document number is not on receipt from
commercial contractor. The issuing activity (shipper) must use the requisitioner's document
number when the issue is a result of a requisition. The issuing activity must assign a document
number with their UIC for roll back from OCONUS sites and offloads. Shipments received for
further transfer (transaction code P) will be received and re-issued on the document number of
the originator.
Example: ///A475003011685/A//B500//C200/N00109/V033650158015
7. Appropriate financial data is included in parentheses after the document number for those
activities identified as financial reporters. The data is systematically assigned by OIS-
R/ROLMS.

17-47
 8. Two slashes (//) followed by the letter T and the remaining quantity indicates the ending
balance. The letter T is used on all transactions to report the quantity on hand or the ending
balance of a transaction.
Example: ///A475003011685/A//B500//C200/N00109/V033650158015//T700
9. Three slashes (///) indicate the end of a transaction line.
Example: ///A475003011685/A//B500//C200/N00109/V033650158015//T700///
10. End of ATR – Four slashes (////) at the left margin designate the end of an ATR.
11. Remarks – The REMARKS sections must not be used for reporting transactions. The remarks
section should be used for amplification of transactions and must include current point of
contact phone number and email address.

SLIT Identification, Tracking, and Reporting

OIS-W and OIS-MC, for 0T COG material, provide the capability for the reporting and control of
ammunition assets by lot and/or serial number. Activities holding naval conventional ammunition
designated for serial or lot number control are required to submit the appropriate SLIT transactions to
OIS-W using procedures provided in NAVSUP P-724. SLIT reporting is supplementary to MILSTRAP.
OIS-W is capable of tracking material location, C/C, purpose codes, MDD, and containers that are
required for AUR missiles.

Identification of Serial and Lot Number Sources

Serial and lot numbers are obtained from the end item or lot identification number. Torpedoes are
reported by registry number. All alpha and numeric characters are significant and must be reported;
however, special characters and symbols are not to be included with exception of the dash and
period separator. AUR missiles are reported by the leading assembly serial number.
The leading components and examples of serial numbers are listed in Table 17-6. Not all missiles are
listed:
Table 17-6 — Example of Leading Component Serial Numbers
Missile Leading Component Example
Sidewinder AIM-9M Guidance and Control Section (GCS) DZX1234
Sidewinder AIM-9X None, serial number is located within 24 BGXXXXX
inches of the aft end of the rocket motor
Sparrow III Target Seeker R1208B2
Harpoon Warhead L021
Hellfire Warhead 220251
SLAM-ER Warhead 105259
Standard Missile ER None 7834E
Standard Missile MR None 7834M
Stinger Missile Round 355605
Maverick G&C R1116B5
HARM Warhead TKB83FD10000103

17-48
Container Tracking Procedures
The OIS-W SLIT system has the capability to track containers for selected ordnance items when the
containers are associated with AURs reported by serial number. The capability was developed in
response to SMs and custodians’ requirements for visibility of full containers. Containers will be
identified on a SLIT transaction by an alpha or numeric code. Table 17-7 provides an example of a
cross reference of containers and type container codes (TCCs) by COG. Refer to the NAVSUP P-724
for a detailed list that identifies those containers required for 4T/8T COG AURs. The matrix is revised
as additional containers are identified for tracking.
Table 17-7 — Type Container Code Matrix
4T COG
Container Codes Name/Mark/Modification Type NSN/NALC
A Mk 481-0 Container 8140-01-205-1589/QW88
B Mk 481-1 Container 8140-01-047-0928/QW42
C Mk 746-0 Container 8140-01-297-4602/5W88
D Mk 531-1 Container 8140-00-165-6691/TW95
E Mk 531-2 Container 8140-01-057-7870/SW53
F Mk 197-1 Container 8140-00-871-3636/TW74
G Mk 535-0 Container 8140-00-001-4411/TU49
H Mk 714-1 Container 8140-01-347-6883-CWAK
J Mk 792 Container 8140-01-517-2036/CWNX
L Mk 531-3 Container 8140-01-257-6189/3W93
M Mk 657-0 Container 8140-01-237-9866/2W64
Y Container Unknown Container
Z Missile/End item not in container/cradle.
8T COG
Container Codes Name/Mark/Modification Type NSN/NALC
A Mk 749-0 Container 8140-01-339-6878/CWEZ
A Mk 825-0 Container 8140-01-615-6648/5032
B Mk 372-8 Container 8140-01-421-3183/CWEL
D Mk 721-0 Container 8140-01-304-3230/BW98
E Mk 722-0 Container 8140-01-304-3228/BW99
P Mk 783-0 Container 8140-01-463-1716/CWIV
S Mk 372-2 Container 8140-00-877-8809/ZW11
T Mk 372-3 Container 8140-00-763-6266/ZW81
U Mk 372-5 Container 8140-01-003-1047/NW59
1 Mk 372-7 Container 8140-01-141-8960/6W29
C Wooden Box
Y Container Unknown

17-49
ATR/SLIT Reporting Procedures
SLIT data is required if the NIIN has an MCC of B, C, or E.
x If the NIIN has an MCC of B, quantity per lot number must be included; lot numbers must be
reported as they appear stenciled on the item; dashes may be part of the lot number and must
be included
x If the NIIN has an MCC of C, serial numbers must be included; the quantity is one for each
serial number; the quantity is not required after transaction code; serial numbers must be
reported as they appear stenciled on the item; dashes may be part of the serial number and
must be included
x If the NIIN has an MCC of E, lot number and serial number must be included in the transaction
line and will be separated by a period (.); the quantity is one for each lot and serial number; the
quantity is not required after transaction code; lot and serial numbers must not be more than
21 characters in length. If the lot/serial number is greater than 21 characters, truncate the last
digit(s) of the lot number
If the NIIN has an MCC of K, OIS-R/ROLMS must automatically generate a periodic lot report (PLR)
at the beginning of each month. Multiple serial numbers for one transaction are reported in a line
separated by a slash or vertically in a column preceded by a slash. An example with explanation of an
ATR showing the receipts and issues of lot-controlled items is shown in Figure 17-6.

17-50
 Figure 17-6 — ATR of lot-controlled items.

Ammunition Stock Point Issue Procedures

Navy ordnance stock points issue ammunition to various recipients including combatant and logistics
forces, NASs, Marine Corps air stations (MCAS), U.S. Coast Guard, and maritime prepositioning
force ships. Material issued to all recipients is inspected prior to issue for identification purposes and
to determine the material condition. Due to the hazardous nature of this material, unique and specific
policies and processes have been developed to preserve a safe environment.
All stock point personnel performing receipt, issue, production, segregation, storage, restow, or
inspection of ammunition material will ensure the timely and accurate reporting of completed actions
to meet the transaction reporting timeframes.

17-51
Issue inspection will be performed for all ammunition shipped or issued except for ammunition
received designated as for further transfer (FFT). Issue inspection is not required for FFT ammunition
but should be performed when reasonable doubt exists concerning the safety, security, or quality of
the ammunition. However, all issues of ammunition to other stations, manufacturers, other services,
and ammunition for ship onloads will be screened against all outstanding NARs to ensure proper
serviceability.
Issue inspection is performed in accordance with NAVSUP P-805 and will be performed at the most
efficient and effective point in the activity issue process.
Stock control personnel will prepare a shipment preparation document. Storage personnel will use the
document to prepare and select material for shipment. Stock control personnel are responsible for
following up with storage, planning, and transportation personnel to ensure material is available and
scheduled for shipment to meet the RDD.
Issue inspection is performed in accordance with NAVSUP P-805 to prevent the release of
unauthorized, unacceptable, or improperly identified ammunition and to ensure that all ammunition
issued is safe for shipment.
An OIS-R/ROLMS-generated DD Form 1348-1A and disk, for activities OISR/ROLMS capable, must
accompany all ammunition issued to fleet activities.
Procedures for the disk-to-disk (D2D) transfer process are located on the OIS Portal Web site
(Access required.) Activities capable of D2D transfer will deliver OIS-R/ROLMS-generated disks to
receiving activities to reflect due-in/due-out documents.
No changes are allowed on the DD Form 1348-1A document for shipments of SRC I and II material. If
changes are required, a new document will be generated. For other material, changes to information
on the document will be initialed during inspection.
Personnel responsible for the selection of material from the storage location for loading on the
conveyance, including loading material on railcars or barges for eventual loading on a ship, will sign
and date the DD Form 1348-1A document. When material physically leaves the station or is loaded
aboard a ship, the date will be entered on the DD Form 1348-1A.

Ammunition Stock Point Receipt Procedures

Naval ordnance stock points receive ammunition from naval activities, afloat or ashore, other DoD
activities, other Government agencies, contractors, and on-station production operations. The DD
Form 1348-1A is used to record and reconcile the receipt of conventional ammunition from off-station
DoD and Coast Guard activities.
NAVSUP GLS AMMO provides ammunition stock points with advance notification of material due in
from procurement or redistribution. NAVSUP GLS AMMO forwards a prepositioned material receipt
(PMR) transaction that contains the contract number for procurements or the MILSTRIP document
number for redistribution orders and the estimated date of delivery. For material being procured by
the single manager for conventional ammunition (SMCA), the PMR contains the military
interdepartmental purchase request (MIPR) number.
Ships offloading at Navy stock points will submit an offload planning message to the offloading receipt
activity 45 days prior to the event. The message is used by offload receipt activities in reviewing their
load plans to determine if serviceable material can be retained as on-hand stock.
Receiving personnel will obtain the offloading activity’s OIS-R/ROLMS disk, if requested, and
annotate DD Form 1348-1A shipping documents with signature and the date of receipt. With
exception of SRC CAT I and II material, adjustments are annotated on the DD Form 1348-1A and a

17-52
copy is forwarded along with the offloading activity’s diskette to the ordnance/weapons stock control
to establish an in-process receipt.
Inspection requirements of ammunition received by truck or rail are governed by applicable
references. Upon arrival of conveyances at the station, receiving personnel should obtain shipment
documentation and direct the conveyance to an appropriate location, e.g., magazine area, transfer
depot, barricade area. Receiving personnel will annotate all receipt documents with signature, date of
receipt, and location prior to forwarding a copy to the ordnance/weapons stock control to establish an
in-process receipt. Stations will ensure continuous visibility of current location for all material.
Receipt inspection of items received via truck or rail will be performed at the earliest opportunity,
which will generally be at the point where the conveyance will be unloaded, e.g., magazine area,
transfer depot, barricade.
Receipt inspection is performed for all ammunition received from any external source, including new
production, fleet return, FFT, and retrograde. NAVSUP P-805 provides stock point receipt inspection
procedures and criteria to identify ammunition physical condition and defect code (D/C) that
supplement C/Cs by identifying specific reasons for C/C assignment.
Containers that are properly sealed with traceable seals do not require opening for quantity and
lot/serial number verification provided the container markings and the transfer documents agree. If
receipt inspection is not performed at the time and place of physical receipt, it will be performed prior
to placement in storage and within the prescribed time limits for posting the receipt to record.

Manual Ammunition Stock Recording Procedures

All naval activities are required to use either OIS-R or ROLMS to report to OIS-W in accordance with
Conventional Ordnance Inventory Accountability, OPNAVINST 8015.2.
For activities that do not have automated reporting and inventory management capability, the manual
ammunition stock card procedures should be utilized. The use of ammunition stock cards does not
relieve ammunition custodians of the requirement cited herein to assure accurate and timely
ammunition accountability.
Activities not equipped with an automated capability are required to maintain a complete history of all
ammunition transactions and to maintain manual stock record cards. Stock records can be
maintained utilizing Ammunition Master Stock Record Cards, NAVSUP Form 1296, Ammunition
Lot/Location Cards, NAVSUP Form 1297, and Ammunition Serial/Location Cards, NAVSUP Form
1356.
Types of postings include issues, receipts (including gains by inventory), expenditures (including
losses by inventory), transfers of items from one condition to another, reclassification actions, and
requisitions. In addition, the use of ammunition stock recording cards provides ammunition storage
and handling activities with a tool for retail stock control and asset visibility.

NOTE
OIS-R/ROLMS USERS: If all systems are down, use of the
manual ammunition stock recordings procedure may be
used as a backup method ONLY.

Ammunition Stock Recording

An Ammunition Master Stock Record Card/automated data processing form and either a lot/location
or a serial/location supplemental card should be maintained for every NALC carried in stock.

17-53
Lot/location or serial/location supplemental cards should be placed with the appropriate Master Stock
Record Card. Another supplemental Master Stock Record Card by NIIN will be used if a second NIIN
is received. Ships carrying cargo or mission loads, in addition to shipfill, will maintain separate stock
record files for each category of ammunition. All entries should be posted promptly and in ballpoint
pen. When transferring to a new stock record card, the existing stock record card will be retained for
audit purposes. Information concerning stock record card retention is provided in NAVSUP P-724.

Ammunition Master Stock Record Card Preparation

The Ammunition Master Stock Record Card, NAVSUP Form 1296 (8-87) (yellow) (Figure 17-7),
should be used to record all pertinent data for each NALC or NIIN carried. Files will be maintained for
each NALC carried. The master card should be used to maintain balances by NIIN and C/C.
These cards are designed for filing in a ring binder or card reference file. They should be filed in
alpha/numeric sequence by DODIC/NALC. The Ammunition Master Stock Record Card is very
important as it provides a complete history of each DODIC/NALC from the day it was received.
However, the information on these cards is only as accurate as the information entered on them. It is
extremely important that the data be entered accurately on these cards.
The preparation of the Ammunition Master Stock Record Card, NAVSUP 1296, is discussed in the
following paragraphs.
Block 1 – Entry Date. Enter the five-digit Julian date on which the transaction occurs. The Julian date
consists of two elements: The last two digits of the calendar year and the numeric consecutive day of
the year, e.g., 16168 represents 16 June 2016.
Block 2 – Document Number. Enter the following information from the receipt document, issue
document, or outstanding requisition document as applicable:
Block 2a – Activity. Enter the service code and UIC
Block 2b – Date. Enter the Julian date
Block 2c – Serial. Enter the serial number
Block 3 – Transactions. Enter the type of transaction (receipt, issue, expenditure)
Block 3a – Type. Enter the appropriate code as shown below:
C – Receipts and gains by inventory of material, with the exception of FFT material
D – Issues of material that results in a decrease of a reporting unit’s assets but retains
the material in Navy stock with the one exception of issues to disposal
E – Expenditures of material in support of combat operations or against a hostile target,
including ammunition jettisoned in order to land during a combat mission
F* – Expenditure of material for training, including combat readiness assessment
exercises, operational readiness inspections, and fire power demonstration
G* – Expenditure of material for test and evaluation purposes
H* – Expenditures of material for noncombat operational purposes, such as:
x Execution of the assigned activity mission (e.g., search and rescue or contact
evaluation)
x Humanitarian or lifesaving missions

17-54
Figure 17-7 — Example of Ammunition Master Stock Record Card, NAVSUP
Form 1296.

x Firings for which no training allocation is established (i.e., test primers, types
of pyrotechnics, and markers)

NOTE
Expenditures F and G require a decrease in the
unexpected training allocation column if charged against
the main allocation. If charging another unit other than the
main allocation, insert the unit’s UIC to be charged.

I – Expenditure due to actual disposal of material by reporting unit or shipment to a

nonreporting activity for disposal (e.g., destruction, deepwater dump, or ammunition
jettisoned during a noncombat operational mission); transaction code will be used when

17-55
 a Disposal Release Order (DRO) (document identifier ASJ, BGJ, or BGD) is not
required from the LMS to perform disposal action
J – Expenditure of material due to loss by inventory
K – Expenditure of material due to transfer out of Navy reporting system (e.g., transfer
to Air Force or foreign Governments)
P – Receipts of FFT material
R* – Expenditure of material for fleet or higher headquarters-directed exercises
X – Changes in condition of material onboard
Block 3b – Quantity. Enter the quantity for the type of transaction indicated in Block 3a.
Block 4 – On-Hand Balances. Enter the on-hand balances for each condition onboard. C/C A material
will be in block 4a. Blocks 4b and 4c will be filled in with condition codes as appropriate when needed.
A second card (NAVSUP Form 1296) will be prepared when three conditions are exceeded.
Block 5 –ATR Serial Number. Enter the three-digit transaction report number.
Block 6 – Quantity Due-In. Enter the quantity on order but not yet received. Document the quantity
when requisition quantity or substitute item is received.
Block 7 – Unexpended Training Allocation. On the first NALC-NIIN card, enter the number of rounds
of the NALC available for the main allocation for training during the remainder of the fiscal year.
Subtract training expenditures of all NIIN cards associated with the NALC for any expenditure of
codes F, G, H, or R, which use the main allocation. When charging another allocation, put the UIC of
the activity to be charged in this column.
Block 8 – Packaging/Remarks. Enter the pertinent remarks such as packaging information (e.g., 200
rounds/case, 50 rounds/box).
Block 9 – Allowance. Enter the shipfill, mission, load, or cargo load allowance as listed in the official
allowance list.

NOTE
Block 9 should be completed only if this card is secured in a
classified area. Otherwise, do not complete block 9. A
separate stock record card will be maintained for each
allowance category.

Block 10 – 90% of Shipfill Allowance. Enter 90% of the applicable shipfill allowance. Block 10 is for
shipfill allowance only.
Block 11* – Annual Training Allocation. Enter the annual training allowance in accordance with
appropriate instruction.

NOTE
Blocks 10 and 11 should be completed only if this card is
secured in a classified area. Otherwise, do not complete
blocks 10 and 11.

Block 12 – Logistics Code. Enter the DODIC/NALC.

Block 13 – COG. Enter the cognizance symbol.
17-56
Block 14 – NIIN/Nomenclature. Enter the nomenclature and other information as desired, such as
FSC or NSN.
Block 15 – Material Control Code (MCC). Enter the MCC if the NALC or NIIN is a SLIT reportable
item (B, C, E, or K).
Block 16 – Activity Classification Code (ACC). Enter the ACC. For example, activity class DELTA for
Cargo Load Ammunition.
Block 17 – Department of Transportation (DOT) Hazard Class. Enter DOT Hazard Class.
Block 18 – NEW. Enter the net explosive weight (NEW) as shown in Ammunition, Unserviceable,
Suspended and Limited Use, NAVSUP P-801.
Block 19 – Stowage Location. For NALC Master Cards enter NALC MASTER or NIIN Master Cards
enter NIIN MASTER.
Block 20 – Coast Guard Hazard Class. Enter the Coast Guard Hazard Class.

Ammunition Serial/Location Card Preparation

The Ammunition Serial/Location Card, NAVSUP Form 1356 (8-85) (blue), shown in Figure 17-8, is
used for all items which serial number control is required.
Items requiring serial control were described previously. Ammunition items that have MCC of C are
serial number-controlled and the MCC of E are serial- and lot number-controlled.
These items will be recorded on the Ammunition Serial/Location Card. These cards should be filed by
NSN with the corresponding Ammunition Master Stock Record Card.
One Ammunition Serial/Location Card should be maintained for each torpedo, assembled ALM (as
well as selected components), surface missile systems (SMS), and selected components, that require
serialized tracking. The serial number of an assembled ALM or SMS is determined by the serial
number of the leading serialized component and will be reported regardless of the missile
configuration.
An explanation of the NAVSUP Form 1356 follows:
Block 1 – Registry/Serial Number. Record all torpedo registry numbers or missile serial numbers for
the NIIN indicated.
Block 2 – Maintenance Due Date (MDD). Record the MDD by year and month.
Block 3 – Ammunition Condition Code. Enter the C/C for the serial-numbered item at time of receipt.
Block 4 – Receipt. Enter activity (name, hull number, or UIC) from whom the material was received
and the Julian date on which material was received.
Block 5 – Issue/Transfer. Enter activity (name, hull number, or UIC) to whom the material was
transferred and the Julian date on which material was issued/transferred.
Block 6 – Transactions. Enter the type of transaction receipt, issue, expenditure, etc.
Block 6a – Type. Enter the appropriate type code as shown below:
C – Receipts and gains by inventory of material, with the exception of receipt FFT
material
D – Issues of material that result in a decrease of a reporting unit's assets but retain the
material in Navy stock with the one exception of issues to disposal

17-57
Figure 17-8 — Example Ammunition Serial/Location Card NAVSUP Form 1356.

E – Expenditure of material in support of combat operations or against a hostile target,

including ammunition jettisoned in order to land during a combat mission
F – Expenditure of material for training, including combat readiness assessment
exercises, operational readiness inspections and firepower demonstration
G – Expenditure of material for test and evaluation purposes
H – Expenditures of material for noncombat operational purposes such as:
x Execution of the assigned activity mission (i.e., search and rescue or contact
evaluation)
x Humanitarian or lifesaving missions
x Firings for which no training allocation is established (i.e., test primers, types
of pyrotechnics, and markers)
I – Expenditure due to actual disposal of material (e.g., destruction, deep-water dump);
column should only be used to report actual disposal of material; should NOT be used
17-58
 to report the transfer of material to another activity for disposal (latter should be reported
as an issue)
J – Expenditure of material due to loss by inventory
K – Expenditure of material due to transfer out of Navy Reporting System (e.g., transfer
to Air Force or foreign Governments)
Block 6b – Date. Enter the date expended for the type of expenditure indicated in Block 6a.
Block 7 – Other Actions. Use block 7 to indicate a change in condition code or record entries such as
RECLAS (Reclassification) and XFER (to emphasize item has been transferred).
Block 8 – Packaging – Remarks. Enter packing of material and any remarks as appropriate for the
item.
Block 9 – NEW. Enter the net explosive weight of the item.
Block 10 – Logistic Code. Enter the NALC of the item.
Block 11 – NIIN-Nomenclature. Enter the NIIN and nomenclature of the item.
Block 12 – Stowage Location. Enter the location where the material is stowed.
Block 13 – Coast Guard Hazard Class. Enter the Coast Guard Hazard Class of the material.

Ammunition Lot/Location Cards Preparation

The Ammunition Lot/Location Card, NAVSUP Form 1297 (7-85) (green), shown in Figure 17-9, will be
used for all items which are not serial or lot and serial reportable.
An explanation of the NAVSUP Form 1297 blocks follows:
Block 1 – Entry Date. Enter the five-digit Julian date on which the transaction occurs. The Julian date
consists of two elements: The last two digits of the calendar year and the numeric consecutive day of
the year, e.g., 99182 represents 1 July 1999.
Block 2 – Document Number. Enter the following information from the receipt document, issue
document, or outstanding requisition document as applicable.
Block 2a – Enter the service code and UIC
Block 2b – Enter the Julian date
Block 2c – Enter the serial number
Block 3 – Transactions. Enter the type of transaction (receipt, issue, expenditure).
Block 3a – Type. Enter the appropriate type code as shown below:
C – Receipts and gains by inventory of material, with the exception of receipt FFT
material
D – Issues of material that results in a decrease of a reporting unit's assets but retains
the material in Navy stock with the one exception of issues to disposal
E – Expenditures of material in support of combat operations or against a hostile target,
including ammunition jettisoned in order to land during a combat mission
F – Expenditure of material for training, including combat readiness assessment
exercises, operational readiness inspections and firepower demonstration
G – Expenditure of material for test and evaluation purposes

17-59
Figure 17-9 — Example Ammunition Lot/Location Card NAVSUP Form 1297.

H – Expenditures of material for noncombat operational purposes such as:

x Execution of the assigned activity mission (i.e., search and rescue or contact
evaluation)
x Humanitarian or lifesaving missions
x Firings for which no training allocation is established (i.e., test primers, types
of pyrotechnics, markers, offensive hand grenades, and saluting charges)
I – Expenditure due to actual disposal of material by reporting unit or shipment to a
nonreporting activity for disposal (e.g., destruction, deepwater dump, or ammunition
jettisoned during a noncombat operational mission); transaction code will be used when
DRO (document identifier ASJ, BGJ or BGD) is not required from LMS to perform
disposal action
J – Expenditure of material due to loss by inventory

17-60
 K – Expenditure of material due to transfer out of Navy Reporting System (e.g., transfer
to Air Force or foreign Governments)
P – Receipts of FFT material
R – Expenditure of material for fleet or higher headquarters directed exercises;
expenditure requires a decrease in the unexpended training allocation column if
charged against the main allocation; if charging another unit other than the main
allocation, insert the unit’s UIC to be charged
X – Changes in condition of material onboard
Block 3b – Quantity. Enter the quantity for the type of transaction indicated in block 3.
Block 4 – On-Hand Balances. Enter the on-hand balances for each condition onboard. All condition
material will be in block 4a. Blocks 4b, 4c, and 4d will be filled in with condition codes as appropriate
when needed. A second card (NAVSUP Form 1297) will be prepared when four conditions are
exceeded.
Block 5 – Consignor/Consignee. Enter the name of the shore activity or operating unit to which the
issue was made or from which the item component was received.
Block 6 – Remarks. Use to record applicable NARs or other pertinent information.
Block 7 – Packaging/Remarks. Enter any amplifying remarks such as packaging or NAR serial
number and message DTG.
Block 8 – NEW. Enter the net explosive weight of item.
Block 9 – Logistics Code. Enter the NALC of item.
Block 10 – NIIN/Nomenclature. Enter the NIIN and nomenclature of item.
Block 11 – Lot Number. Enter the lot number of item.
Block 12 – Stowage Location. Enter the location where item is stored.
Block 13 – C.G. Hazard Class. Enter the Coast Guard hazard class for item.

Standard Stock Point Ammunition Inspection Requirements for Receipt, Storage,

and Issue of Naval Ammunition
The development and maintenance of standard and efficient inspection procedures contributes to
ordnance industrial base productivity and maximizes the utilization of limited resources. In addition,
adherence to these standard and validated procedures contributes to safe storage and improved
asset visibility.
The NAVSUP P-805 provides the mandatory standards by which ammunition safety, security,
material condition, and status accuracy are controlled during the operation of receipt, storage, and
issue processes at ammunition handling and storage ashore activities. These requirements apply to
all Navy and Marine Corps ordnance ashore support activities that perform receipt storage or issue of
Navy ordnance and naval and MCAS ammunition.
Included are activities performing manufacturing, maintenance, contractual acceptance, certification,
quality evaluation, and engineering evaluation of ammunition.
The NAVSUP P-805 provides color photographic visual aids to assure consistency in the inspection
and segregation process.
Marine Corps and Coast Guard operating activities should follow the appropriate provisions of the
NAVSUP P-724 as directed by their applicable command authority.
17-61
Ammunition C/Cs that are required to segment and identify the physical condition of ammunition to be
utilized during all stock point receipt, storage, and issue sentencing operations are described in
NAVSUP P-805.
Ammunition D/Cs that are required to complement and/or supplement C/Cs by identifying specific
reasons for C/C assignment and/or identifying specific defects or conditions to be utilized during all
stock point receipt, storage, and issue sentencing operations are described in NAVSUP P-805.

Standard Stock Point Ammunition Inspection Requirements for Segregation

Sentencing of Naval Ammunition
NAVSUP P-805 provides the mandatory standard inspection criteria and sentencing requirements, to
be applied during segregation of 0T COG, 2E COG and 2T COG ammunition, by which ammunition
safety, security, material condition, and status accuracy are controlled during the operation of
segregation processing at ammunition handling and storage ashore activities. These requirements
apply to all Navy ordnance and naval and MCAS stock points that perform segregation of Navy and
Marine Corps ammunition.

NAVSUP Ammunition Sentencing Publications

NAVSUP P-724 promulgates in-service management and logistics policy and procedures for
conventional ordnance distribution and stockpile management processes within the Navy and for
Marine Corps ground ammunition (0T COG) held or processed at Navy activities. NAVSUP P-724
also provides the inventory management procedures necessary for achieving and maintaining
inventory accountability and accuracy within the OIS-W system and the OIS-MC.
Central to the implementation of NAVSUP P-724 is the need to maintain complete and accurate data
identifying the serviceability of all ammunition in inventory.
The NAVSUP Ammunition Sentencing Publications NAVSUP P-805 and appendices (Appendix A, B,
C, D, and E) are an extension of NAVSUP P-724 in that they provide a framework of procedural
requirements for identifying ammunition serviceability. In addition, the NAVSUP P-805 provides
critical data elements (i.e., ammunition C/Cs and D/Cs) for inventory tracking and reporting
ammunition serviceability through OIS-W/OIS-MC and the various ordnance management information
systems supporting OIS-W/OIS-MC.
NAVSUP P-805 establishes standard inspection criteria and sentencing requirements to be applied
during receipt, segregation, storage, and issue of Navy and Marine Corps conventional ammunition at
ammunition support activities (ashore) and by fleet deployable units operating ashore or afloat. These
requirements are intended to provide the standard by which ammunition safety, security, material
condition, and status accuracy can be efficiently maintained during retail supply and direct fleet
support.

Terms and Definitions

Personnel that perform fleet sentencing of ordnance need to be familiar with the following terms and
definitions:

Issue
Synonymous with transfer except that issue carries with it the connotation that when issued,
ammunition is being transferred for use/potential use. The issue process involves ammunition
handling (including palletization or unit loading, when required), inspection, and performing
Ammunition Distribution and Control (AD&C) procedures. For additional information on issue
inspection, consult the NAVSUP P-805.
17-62
In the context of this manual, issue includes the transfer of ammunition to operating units for
use/potential use as well as the transfer of serviceable, unserviceable, or suspended ammunition to
other activities.

Receipt
Receipt is the process of receiving ammunition. The receipt process involves ammunition handling,
inspection, and AD&C procedure performance, and applies to all ammunition received, whether
identified as serviceable, unserviceable or suspended by the shipping activity. Consult the NAVSUP
P-805 for additional information on receipt inspection.

Segregation
Segregation is the process of determining the current material condition of suspended-condition
unknown ammunition and separating it into acceptable groupings by type and configuration. For 0T,
2E, and 2T COG ammunition only, segregation is a separate and distinct process. For all other
ammunition, segregation actions are elements/components of maintenance processes.

Sentencing
Sentencing is the action of assigning C/C and ammunition D/C as a result of inspection, including the
application of NARs and specific direction from appropriate authority.

Storage
The process of providing a safe, secure, and protected supply in support of fleet operations and
production, maintenance, surveillance, and disposal processes. The storage process involves
ammunition handling, periodic inspection, and performing AD&C/Ammunition Stock Record Section
(ASRS) procedures.

Ammunition Sentencing
Items of ammunition—with but few exceptions—are expendable, not consumable items.
One effect of this distinction is that ammunition items continue to be a part of total inventory until they
no longer exist. Consumables are not expected to be returned to stock after they have been issued;
expendables are. So long as any item is a part of total inventory, its condition and status information
are necessary elements in the inventory record. Condition and status information is provided by
ammunition condition codes and defect codes.
The inventory record information is not static; the condition and status of ammunition changes.
Whether the result of environmental exposure, handling damage, malfunction, life limitations, or
management-decided reclassifications, it is far from certain that ammunition that is fully serviceable
today will be fully serviceable tomorrow. These expressions of reality are, collectively, the basis for
the ammunition sentencing publications; i.e., that ammunition must be inspected periodically and/or
as part of certain logistics evolutions in order to maintain correct and current material condition and
status information.
Safety, security, inventory accuracy, and economy dictate that the receipt inspection must be
performed at the earliest opportunity, and before any other processing. This is the keystone to
effective and efficient ammunition sentencing.
For any ammunition activity, the performance of receipt inspection is the first opportunity to ensure
that their ammunition inventory records are accurate.

17-63
Accuracy in these records means that activity personnel have the information they need to execute
safety requirements, e.g., to identify specific items of different storage compatibility and provide
special treatment for unsafe and potentially unsafe items.
Accuracy in these records means that activity personnel have the information they need to execute
security requirements, i.e., to identify items assigned different CIICs and apply more stringent criteria
and controls to the more sensitive items. In terms of inventory accuracy, the performance of a receipt
inspection is the only way to confirm that the ammunition reported as received is actually received.
The alternative, not performing receipt inspection, would be unacceptable even if there were
uniformly complete and accurate transaction reporting, transfer documentation, and physical item
identification compliance by the shipping activity for all ammunition received. It would be
unacceptable for two reasons.
x First, if a receipt inspection was not performed, any and all changes in condition or status that
occurred after release by the shipping activity, including changes occurring during the
subsequent receipt, would be unknown to the receiving activity
x Second, if a receipt inspection was not performed, arms ammunition and explosives (AA&E)
physical security would be significantly weakened; there would be no opportunity to determine
the quantity of items actually received
Economics are also a proper justification for receipt inspection performance. Making a determination
or verification of current condition and status at time of receipt and prior to any other processing
means that ammunition that does not need to undergo segregation processing is not suspended and
ammunition that does not require maintenance is not declared unserviceable.
The resulting reductions in segregation and maintenance costs are significant but they are
accompanied by even more benefits; readiness is improved and ammunition handling and
transportation evolutions are reduced.

ALL WEAPONS INFORMATION SYSTEM

All Weapons Information System (AWIS) supports the maintenance management of weapons and
their support equipment. AWIS is an information network subsystem of the Naval Aviation Logistic
Data Analysis (NALDA) Up-Line Information System (UIS). It supports the basic maintenance
doctrine for weapons and support equipment as prescribed by the Naval Ordnance Maintenance
Management Program (NOMMP). It will maximize the utilization and management of required
information resources of existing and planned capabilities of the various weapons information
systems.
The AWIS goal includes the optimization and integration of existing weapons information systems into
a single information system capable of responding to the weapon manager’s needs for weapon life
cycle management. AWIS uses the Navy network as the communication network. AWIS links
individual data and information systems located at field activities with defined procedures providing
access to data and information products that are stored and maintained at those activities.
The functional and resource sponsors for AWIS are within the office of the CNO. The Naval Air
Warfare Center Weapons Division (NAVAIRWARCENWPNDIV), Point Mugu, is designated as both
the Project Manager (PM) and central design activity for AWIS.

17-64
The functional components of AWIS consolidate the following information systems:

2E/8E Maintenance Cost Model

The 2E/8E Maintenance Cost Model is a Web application that provides maintenance managers,
Program Managers, Air (PMAs), and Assistant Program Managers, Logistics (APMLs) associated
with 2E/8E COG with the information to develop requirements and resource allocations for
maintenance of specific expendable ordnance control groups. The application also provides the
capability to assess alternate maintenance options in response to budget shortfalls and/or
supplements, resource capacity constraints at maintenance facilities, and other factors.

All Weapons Analysis and Reporting System

All Weapons Analysis and Reporting System (AWARS) provides for the collection, processing,
analysis, reporting, and modeling of performance, maintenance, logistics, and acquisition data.
AWARS maintains a life cycle history of serialized AURs and performs serialized configuration
accounting of each AUR.
Specific functions supported by AWARS include:
x Logistics support and maintenance performance assessments
x System reliability, maintainability, availability, and quality (RMA&Q)
x Configuration control
x Maintenance planning and management
x Deficiency report investigation and quality control
x Warranty requirements
x Weapon performance assessment
AWARS provides periodic standard reports, structured reports, on-line information, and data
exchange as required by supporting airborne weapons maintenance programs. The data collected
are divided into the following four systems:
x Production data
x Maintenance data
x Performance data
x Inventory management data

Aircraft Armament Equipment

Aircraft Armament Equipment (AAE) replaced the old paper system with a real-time inventory system.
Status of all assets is tracked so that operational availability is always known. AAE also tracks any
transfers and the status of availability. The AAE application provides the AAE community a method to
track and manage the AAE inventory. The application allows users to add and edit the AAE
inventories.
The application is comprised of two sections:
x Inventory–the user is allowed to add/edit the current inventory, change the status of the current
inventory, input issue/turn-in transfers, in-transit transfers, and fly-on/fly-off transfers

17-65
 x Reports–the user has access to nine reports

Automated Captive Carry Entry System

Automated Captive Carry Entry System (ACES) provides the ordnance community with a method to
track and manage missile captive carry. The application is a Web application and shipboard stand-
alone application used to capture and pass airborne weapons captive carry flight data to AWARS.
1. The Web version of the application validates the list of weapons (by type, serial number, and
NALC), the aircraft (by type and bureau number (BUNO)), the squadrons, and the users (by
squadron) that will be participating in the captive carry data collection effort automatically using
the core data maintenance system in AWIS.
2. The stand-alone application requires ship or station personnel to input a list of weapons (by
type, serial number, and NALC), the aircraft (by type and BUNO), the squadrons, and the
users (by squadron) that will be participating in the captive carry data collection effort. The
input function is performed by the ACES administrator. Entering the information into the
application results in creating the validation tables used by the data entry application.
Core Data Management System
Core Data Management System (CDMS) is an unclassified Web application that provides a
structured interface for viewing and maintaining data elements contained within the central repository.
Data elements include descriptive data and other elements reconciled from the OIS and FLIS
databases.

Engineering Management System

Engineering Management System (EMS) is a Web application that gives the naval community a
consistent way to manage and track surveillance and other engineering test projects. The system
allows users to create test projects, search for historical reports of complete projects, distribute
finalized test reports, and generate management reports.
The Firing Reporting System
The Firing Reporting System (FRS) is used by the fleet to report the unclassified results of
noncombat missile firings and unsuccessful combat missile firings for designated programs.
The FRS allows authorized users to prepare an unclassified Weapons System Firing Report (WSFR).
Creating an FRS on-line allows the user to utilize the item information and data relationships in the
AWIS core database.
FRS allows on-line searching for submitted firing reports via the Internet. Access to the FRS module
is through the AWIS Web site. All access requests will be processed through the common AWIS user
administration process.
FRS is a Web-based application for the creation, submittal, and search of WSFRs. Users are required
to use the FRS Web site to initiate and submit a WSFR. The user can also search for a specific firing
report or group of firing reports using a variety of search criteria.
The application provides on-line edits, pull down lists, and automatic inclusion of appropriate data
from the core database to facilitate preparation of a firing report. The on-line search feature allows
users to view a list of firing reports by ordnance system, BUNO, type, model, series, a range of dates,
impact result, or keywords in the report fields. The user can view the search results on the screen and
scroll down to a copy of the specific report.

17-66
Guns and Laser Inventory Tracking and Reporting System
The Guns and Laser Inventory Tracking and Reporting (GITR) system is a Web application that
provides the weapons community an automated way to track the location, quantity, and material
condition of the GITR inventory. The GITR system tool also provides real-time readiness reports.
NAVAIR has designated the NAVAIRWARCENWPNDIV as the central repository for electronic
storage of all shipboard gun inventory data.
GITR system user rights and profiles are constrained by program job responsibilities and location.
The GITR application resides on a secured Web site. A username and password can be obtained by
visiting the AWIS Web site. The GITR application is used by all Navy and Marine Corp aviation gun
activities.
GITR provides the gun community a method to track and manage gun inventory. The system allows
users to add and edit these inventories and create reports based on the inventory. The application is
comprised of two sections; reports and inventory.

Logbook Data Entry System

Logbook Data Entry system is a Web-based application that provides a method of capturing
maintenance information, operations, and tests performed, technical directives (TDs) applied, and
links to configuration data tracked via configuration summary forms (CSFs) in the AWARS system.
These logbook sheets are printed out and accompany the missile when transferred.

Targets Inventory and Performance Reporting System

Targets Inventory and Performance Reporting system (TPRS) is a Web application providing a
method of capturing real-time inventory and performance tracking of target assets by location fleet
wide. Inventory tracking and summarization is available by location showing quantities and material
readiness condition. Performance tracking captures target performance, Target
Auxiliary/Augmentation System (TA/AS) performance, shooter information, and includes reporting
weather conditions affecting target operations. The TPR provides an ad hoc query and fixed reports
for both inventory and performance data.

Configuration and Data Management Support System

The Configuration and Data Management Support system (CADMSS) was conceptually approved by
the Chief of Naval Material in May 1977, and provides an information system used for managing
engineering documentation and configuration baselines and for maintaining a history of engineering
changes and contract data deliverables.

Deficiency Reporting System

The Deficiency Reporting system (DRWEB) is utilized for failure, repair, and trend analysis on
hardware problems, performance deficiencies, and corrective actions throughout the life cycle of the
weapons. The DRWEB database is used for the output of the airborne weapons corrective action
program (AWCAP).

EXPLOSIVES SAFETY TRAINING PROGRAM COURSES

NAVSEA OP-5, Volume 1 provides information on the DON’s explosives safety training requirements.
Military personnel (active and reserve duty) assigned to positions involving responsibilities for
ammunition and explosives should attempt to complete the applicable explosives safety training.

17-67
Course locations are as follows:
x Defense Ammunition Center (DAC) McAlester, OK, DAC On-Site, or local activity
x DAC NMCI-compatible computer-based training (CBT)
x Naval Aviation Schools Command, NAS, Pensacola, FL
x Army Ordnance Munitions and Electronics Maintenance School, Marine Element, Redstone
Arsenal, AL; equivalent; or local instructor
x Navy Knowledge Online (NKO) computer based training
Eligibility requirements are based on actual duties being performed and not job title or paygrade.
For a list of current course descriptions, prerequisites, availability, special information, and periodicity,
see NAVSEA OP-5, Volume 1.

17-68
 End of Chapter 17
Ammunition Administration Ashore and Afloat
Review Questions
17-1. Which of the following databases is the single repository for worldwide status of Navy
expendable non-nuclear ordnance requirements, assets, production, expenditures, costs, and
technical inventory management data?

A. OIS-W
B. OIS-R
C. TAIMS
D. OAP

17-2. Ordnance information system-wholesale customers and users include Navy Munitions
Command, Office of the Chief of Naval Operations (OPNAV) Staff, Headquarters, United
States Marine Corps (HQ USMC), Acquisition/Program Managers and what other authorities?

A. Fleet commanders and type commanders

B. Naval Supply and Naval Engineering
C. Reconnaissance and Patrol Squadrons
D. Surface Force and Antisubmarine Warfare

17-3. What reporting system has capabilities of providing inventory information to the specific grid
location?

A. OIS-W
B. OIS-R
C. TAIMS
D. OAP

17-4. What statement describes the NAVSEA 30,000 series and fleet allowance?

A. CNO-approved full war allowance for shipfill, ship to shore rotational units, and shore
stations
B. Provisional allowance listing of an initial shipfill allowance of service ordnance prepared
and forwarded to the ship
C. An approved listing of ordnance carried as cargo for underway replenishment
D. Bombs, pyrotechnics, cartridge actuated devices, missiles, and torpedoes

17-5. What type of ammunition is cataloged as 8E COG?

A. Surface/Underwater ammunition
B. Torpedoes and components
C. Air-launched missiles
D. Surface-launched missiles

17-69
17-6. What type of allowance refers to the allowance of ammunition that is used for the ship's
permanently installed armament?

A. Shipfill
B. Mission load
C. Cargo load
D. Minimum mission

17-7. What statement describes the Notice of Ammunition Reclassification Program?

A. Policy and procedures for worldwide reclassification of potentially dangerous

ammunition and description of stockpile management procedures
B. Prediction of the next weapon component that requires intermediate- or depot-level
maintenance or testing
C. The capability for the reporting and control of ammunition assets by lot and/or serial
number
D. Type maintenance due code that indicates what type of maintenance action is due next
for an individual item

17-8. Which of the following document identifier codes is used for a requisition cancellation by the
requisitioner?

A. AC1
B. AO1
C. AO4
D. AM1

17-9. What statement describes the military standard requisitioning and issue procedures advice
code 5J?

A. Do not backorder. Substitute acceptable. Reject unfilled quantity not available for
delivery. Fill or kill at point of entry.
B. Do not backorder. Substitute acceptable. Issue total quantity requested or reject.
C. Use of nonstandard items in lieu of standard stock is certified necessary.
D. Release of planned requirement or reservation for field level repairable.

17-10. What total number of days prior to the required delivery date should you requisition mine
exercise training material from the mine assembly activity?

A. 45
B. 60
C. 90
D. 120

17-70
17-11. What number of days prior to an offload evolution should ships submit an unclassified offload
planning message to the NMC/OFFLOADING RECEIPT ACTIVITY listing all items?

A. 45
B. 60
C. 90
D. 120

17-12. What publication provides instructions to inspect, certify empty, and assign a condition code to
empty hazardous material containers?

A. NAVSUP P-801 or NAVSUP P-802

B. NAVSUP P-802 or NAVSUP P-803
C. NAVSUP P-803 or NAVSUP P-724
D. NAVSUP P-805 or NAVSUP P-807

17-13. By what means are ATRs transmitted by reporting activities?

A. Letter
B. Formatted message
C. Telephone fax
D. Disc-to-disc

17-14. Which of the following transaction codes are used for material expended for humanitarian or
lifesaving missions during peacetime natural disaster?

A. E
B. F
C. G
D. H

17-15. In an ammunition transaction reporting transaction line, what statement describes the purpose
of the four slashes (////) at the left margin?

A. Indicates the end of a transaction line

B. Indicates the ending balance
C. Indicates the end of ATR
D. Indicates remaining quantity

17-16. What information should be included on an ATR when reporting an ammunition item national
item identification number with a material condition code of B?

A. Quantity per lot number

B. Quantity per serial number
C. Quantity per lot and serial number
D. Total reported quantity

17-71
17-17. In what order should the Ammunition Master Stock Record Cards be filed?

A. Alpha/numeric sequence by DODIC/NALC

B. By the five-digit Julian date on which the transaction occurs
C. By the service code and unit identification code
D. By the type of transaction

17-18. What Naval Supply Systems Command Form identifies the Ammunition Master Stock Record
Card?

A. 1296
B. 1297
C. 1356
D. 1378

17-19. What publication establishes standard inspection criteria and sentencing requirements to be
applied during receipt, segregation, storage, and issue ammunition handling activities?

A. NAVAIR P-802
B. NAVSEA P-801
C. NAVSUP P-805
D. NAVSUP P-807

17-20. What publication provides color photographic visual aids supplementing Navy Supply Systems
Command Publication 805 to assure consistency in the inspection and segregation process?

A. NAVAIR P-802
B. NAVSEA P-801
C. NAVSUP P-805
D. NAVSUP P-807

17-21. What terms describes the process of determining the current material condition of suspended-
condition unknown ammunition and separating it into acceptable groupings by type and
configuration?

A. Receipt
B. Segregation
C. Storage
D. Issue

17-22. What statement describes the purpose of the Firing Reporting System?

A. To report unclassified results of noncombat missile firings and unsuccessful combat

missile firings for designated programs
B. To create test projects, search for historical reports of complete projects, and distribute
finalized test firing reports
C. Validates the list of weapons (by type, serial number, and NALC), and the aircraft (by
type and BUNO)
D. To provide the ordnance community a method to track and manage missile captive
carry

17-72
17-23. What system provides the gun community a method to track and manage gun inventory?

A. CRTS
B. CDMS
C. FRS
D. GITR

17-73
 APPENDIX I
GLOSSARY AND ACRONYMS
3-M—Ship’s Maintenance and Material Management
A/A—Air-to-air
A/G—Air-to-ground
AA&E—Armament, Ammunition, and Explosives
AAE—Aircraft armament equipment
AAP—Army ammunition plant
AARGM—Advanced Anti-Radiation Air-to-Ground Missile
AC—Alternating current/Augmenting charge
ACB—Armament control box
ACC—Aircraft controlling custodian/Activity classification code
ACES—Automated Captive Carry Entry System
ACI—Armament control indicator
ACM—Air combat maneuver
ACR—Ammunition condition report
AD&C—Ammunition distribution and control
ADC—Ammunition data card
ADP—Air data probe
ADVICE CODE—numeric-alpha character or alpha-alpha character and provided coded instructions
to supply sources when such data is considered essential supply action and entry in the narrative
form is not feasible.
AE—Ammunition and explosives
AFB—Airframe bulletin
AFD—Arm/fire device
AFG—Airfoil group
AFT—at, near, or back of the stern of a ship or the tail of an aircraft.
AFTER ENGINE TURNUP—time sequence prior to the launch phase of an aircraft when the aircrew
has completed the pre-taxi checklist.
AFTER LANDING/GROUND ABORT—time sequence after an aircraft has landed or aborted the
launch on the ground when the aircrew has completed the after landing checklist.
AGFS—Aircraft gun feed system
AGL—Above ground level
AGM—Air launched, surface attack, guided missile
AIM—Air intercept missile

AI-1
AIN—Ammunition information notice
AIP—Anti-surface warfare improvement program
AIR STABILIZER—a device used on torpedoes for stabilization and deceleration to accurately and
safely control the air trajectory and water entry; upon water entry, a release mechanism separates the
air stabilizer from the torpedo.
AIRBORNE STORE—tanks (fuel and spray), pods (refueling, photographic, etc.), targets, and all
similar items intended for carriage internally or externally by an aircraft; includes the racks, launchers,
adapters, and detachable pylons used for such carriage; applies to all items that are not normally
separated from the aircraft in flight.
AIRBORNE WEAPON—all missiles, rockets, bombs, mines, torpedoes, pyrotechnics, ammunition,
guns, gun pods, and all similar items intended for carriage by an aircraft; applies to items that are
normally separated from the aircraft in flight.
AIRCRAFT ARMAMENT SYSTEM—subsystem that, when interconnected, gives the aircraft its
airborne weapons/stores capability.
AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION—systems and components required to carry or deliver a specific
airborne weapon/store.
AIRCRAFT LOAD PLAN—a chart or form used to assign weapons to a particular aircraft/bomb
rack/station for loading.
AIS/TACTS—Airborne instrumentation system/Tactical Aircrew Combat Training System
AIU—Aircraft interface unit
AJ—Anti-jamming
ALM—Air-launched missile
AMHAZ—Ammunition and Hazardous
AMMO—Ammunition
AMMOLOGS—Ammunition Logistics System
AMRAAM—Advanced Medium-Range Air-to-Air Missile
AN/ALE—Army/Navy Air Launched Expendable
AOCC—Aviation Ordnance Control Center
AP—Armor piercing
APA—Appropriation purchase account
APAM—Antipersonnel/Antimaterial
API—Armor piercing incendiary
APKWS II—Advanced Precision Kill Weapon System II
APML—Assistant program manager for logistics
APS—Adjustable proximity sensor/Automated planning system
APU—Auxiliary power unit
ARMING—the action that changes ammunition from a safe condition to a state of readiness for
initiation.

AI-2
ARMING AREA—location where a weapon is changed from a safe condition to a state of readiness
for initiation when forward firing weapons are involved; the area ahead of the aircraft must be cleared
and maintained clear until completion of the launch of the aircraft.
ARMING TIME—in reference to fuzes, the amount of time or number of vane revolutions required for
the firing train to be aligned after the bomb is released or from the time of release until the bomb is
fully armed.
ARMING/RELEASE/EXTRACTOR WIRE—a wire inserted in the fuze or arming mechanism of a
weapon; the arming wire pulls out of the fuze or arming device when the bomb is dropped in the
armed mode, thus putting the bomb into the condition to explode when the bomb hits.
AS APPLICABLE—used in prefacing certain steps or procedures; means that if a step or procedure
has not been previously accomplished, accomplish the step or procedure at this point; this term may
also be used in prefacing a procedure that applies to only one weapon in a group of weapons or one
function in a group of functions; if it does not apply or has been previously accomplished, it may be
omitted.
ASE—Armament support equipment—includes all equipment whose primary function is to support
the installed aircraft systems and is used primarily by an aircraft intermediate maintenance
department or squadron.
ASP—Ammunition supply point
ASRS—Ammunition Stock Record Section
ASST—Anti-Ship Surveillance and Targeting
ASTE—Armament Systems Test Equipment
ASU—Ammunition storage unit
ASUW—Anti-surface warfare
ASW—Antisubmarine warfare
AT—Arming time
ATM—Air launched, training, guided missile
AT-PERS—High-explosive anti-tank/antipersonnel
ATR—Ammunition transaction report
AUR—All-Up-Round—complete assembly of a weapon normally shipped to the operating forces; the
weapon requires no assembly or functional checks before loading onto an aircraft for delivery to a
target.
AUTHORIZED—an item that has been approved by a responsible authority.
AVC—Avionics change
AWARS—All Weapons Analysis and Reporting System—provides for the collection, processing,
analysis, reporting, and modeling of performance, maintenance, logistics, and acquisition data.
AWB—Airborne weapons bulletin
AWC—Airborne weapon change
AWCAP—Airborne Weapons Corrective Action Program
AWG—American Wire Gauge

AI-3
AWIS—All Weapons Information System—supports the maintenance management of weapons and
their equipment; is an information network subsystem of the Naval Aviation Logistic Data Analysis
Up-Line Information System.
AWMCS—Aviation Weapons Movement Control Station
AWSE—Armament weapons support equipment—required on the ground; classified as either
common or peculiar and may be either avionics or nonavionics.
BASB—Breakaway suspension band
BASH—Bird and wildlife aircraft separation hazard
BD—Base detonating
BDU—Bomb dummy unit
BEFORE ENGINE TURNUP—time sequence prior to the launch evolution when the aircrew is
commencing general aircraft ground inspections and extends until the inspections are completed.
BFD—Battery firing device
BIT—Built-in-test
BLU—Bomb live unit
BRAVO FLAG—a red flag that is displayed at a facility when explosives and personnel are present.
BRU—Bomb rack unit
BSU—Bomb stabilizing unit
BUNO—Bureau number
C/C—Condition code
C/D—Class/Division
CAAA—Crane Army Ammunition Activity
CAD—Cartridge-actuated device—collectively represents and is synonymous with cartridges, aircraft
detonating cords, and cartridge associated hardware; CADs are explosive-loaded devices designed
to act as a gas generator or to provide a stroking action or a special purpose action; actuated devices
may be reusable, employing an expendable cartridge for design for action or may be a sealed unit
with a one-time function capability; the amount of explosive contained in these devices is normally
small.
CADMSS—Configuration and Data Management Support System
CARTRIDGE—a complete round of ammunition in which the primer, propelling charge, and projectile
or bullet are completely assembled to the cartridge case as fixed ammunition, or the primer and the
propelling charge are assembled in the cartridge case and closed by a friable plug.
CAS—Control actuation system/Center-aft section
CATM—Captive air training missile—used for pilot training in aerial target acquisition and aircraft
controls/displays.
CAUTION—an operating procedure, practice, or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in
damage to or destruction of equipment.
CAX—Combined arm exercise
CBU—Cluster bomb unit—consists of a number of bombs contained in a dispenser or clustering
device and suspended from a bomb rack; a CBU may function while on the rack or after release.
AI-4
CCA—Circuit card assembly
CCG—Computer control group
CCIP—Continuously computed impact point
CCSS—Commodity Command Standard System
CDMS—Core Data Management System—an unclassified Web application that provides a structured
interface for viewing and maintaining data elements contained within the central repository.
CDU—Control display unit
CERTIFICATION—a formal, documented declaration that an individual, by virtue of a management
review, has met all of the qualification requirements established to perform a task.
CG—Center-of-gravity
CHAFF—a radar reflective material used to deceive or counteract unfriendly radar or destructive
offensive ordnance.
CHECKLIST—an individual sequence of procedures bearing a title and constituting a part of a
publication designated as a checklist.
CIC—Commercial Intermodal Container/Content indicator code
CIG—Control interface group
CIIC—Controlled item inventory code
CMBRE—Common munitions built-in-test/reprogramming equipment—portable support equipment
that is used to initiate supported weapons built-in-test routines, obtain systems and munitions status,
reprogram munitions Operational Flight Program, and load mission planning and Global Positioning
System crypto keys.
CMDS—Countermeasure Dispensing System
CNO—Chief of Naval Operations
CNU—Container unit
CO—Commanding officer
CODR—Conventional Ordnance Deficiency Report
COG—Cognizance symbol—indicates the command, bureau, or office that has control over the
supply and/or distribution of the material.
COMLANTFLT—Commander, United States Atlantic Fleet Command
COMNAVAIRFORINST—Commander, Naval Air Force Instruction
COMPACFLT—Command, United States Pacific Fleet Command
COMUSNAVAF—Commander, United States Naval Forces Africa
COMUSNAVCENT—Commander, United States Naval Forces Central Command
COMUSNAVEUR—Commander, United States Naval Forces Europe Command
CONREP—Connected replenishment
CONUS—Within the continental United States
CONVENTIONAL WEAPONS—all nonnuclear weapons, excluding all biological weapons and
generally excludes chemical weapons except for existing smoke and incendiary agents and agents of
riot-control weapons.
AI-5
COSR—Conventional ordnance safety review
CRALTS—Common rack and launcher test set—an automatic/semiautomatic universal GO/NO-GO
tester for various aircraft-specific bomb racks, missile launchers, and other UUTs that have been
removed for maintenance verification or repair.
CS—Control section
CSAR—Combat search and rescue
CSF—Configuration summary forms
CSO—Combat systems officer
CTR—Centerline
CVER—Canted Vertical Ejector Rack
CVN—Nuclear aircraft carrier
CVW—Carrier air wing
D2D—Disk-to-disk
DAAS—Defense automated addressing system
DAC—Defense Ammunition Center
DATM—Dummy air training missile—ground training missile used to train ground personnel in missile
assembly/disassembly, uploading/downloading, and handling procedures.
DC—Direct current/Designator control
DCS—Digital Computer Set
DDA—Designated Disposition Authority
DDESB—Department of Defense explosives safety board
DDI—Digital display indicator
DEARMING AREA—area where a weapon is changed from a state of readiness for initiation to a
safe condition; when forward-firing weapons are involved, the area ahead of the aircraft must be
cleared and kept clear until the weapon-safing procedures are completed.
DECM—Defensive electronic countermeasures
DELAY—when the functioning time of a fuze is longer than 0.0005 second.
DELAY ARMING—in reference to fuzes, keeps a fuze in a safe condition until the bomb falls far
enough away from the aircraft (or long enough) to minimize the effects of a premature explosion.
DEMAND CODE—a mandatory entry of an alphabetic character to indicate to the management
element of a distribution system whether the demand is recurring or nonrecurring.
DEMIL—Demilitarization
DESIGNATED LOADING AREA—area where an operation that replenishes the prescribed airborne
stores, ammunition, bombs, and other armament items for an aircraft is conducted; when weapons
are handled in a rearming area, all fuzes and/or initiators shall remain safe and all gun chambers
clear; this operation may include fuzing (i.e., bombs) and stray voltage checks, as applicable.
DETONATOR—initiator designed to be set off by heat (flash), mechanical energy (stab or
percussion), or electrical energy to produce high-velocity shockwaves or brisance.

AI-6
DETONATOR-SAFE— in reference to fuzes, a condition in which the elements of the firing train are
not in the proper position for firing; the fuze remains in this condition until it is fully armed.
DFWP—Drug-Free Workplace Program
DIC—Document Identifier Code—provides a means to identify each document type to OIS-W and
further identify such data as to the intended purpose, usage, and operation desired.
DISA—Defense Information Systems Agency
DISTRIBUTION CODE—a two-part field that is contained in card column (cc) 54-56; the first part
indicates the activity that will be furnished 100 percent supply and shipment status on all priorities in
addition to the status in accordance with the M&S code entry in cc 7; the second part indicates the
COG and is significant only to the service initiating the requisition.
DLA—Defense Logistics Agency
DLA TS—DLA Transaction Services
DLISC—Defense Logistics Information Service Center
DLSC—Defense Logistics Support Center
DMLGB—Dual mode laser guided bomb
DoD—Department of Defense
DoDIC—Department of Defense Identification Code
DOLT—Date of last test
DON—Department of the Navy
DOT—Department of Transportation
DOWNLOADING—an operation that removes airborne weapons/stores from an aircraft.
DPF—Dispenser proximity fuze
DRMO—Defense reutilization and marketing office
DRO—Disposal Release Order
DRWEB—Deficiency Reporting System—utilized for failure, repair, and trend analysis on hardware
issues, performance deficiencies, and corrective actions throughout the life cycle of a weapon.
DSN—Defense Switched Network
DSS—Distribution Standard System
DST—Destructor
DSU—Doppler sensing unit
DTG—Date time group
DTRM—Dual thrust rocket module
DTTS—Defense Transportation Tracking System—a Department of Defense system that uses
satellite positioning and communications technology to monitor the in-transit movement of all
Department of Defense shipments of sensitive ammunition and explosives being transported in the
continental United States by commercial motor carriers.
DUAL MODE—a laser guided bomb with the addition of GPS functionality.
DUD—explosive ammunition that has failed to function.

AI-7
E/A—Electronic attack
EAD—East Asia Division
ECCM—Electronic counter-countermeasure
ECM—Electronic countermeasures/Earth covered magazine
ECSP—Electronic Command Signal Programmer
EEA—External evidence of arming—a means by which a fuze is physically determined to be in a safe
or armed condition.
EED—Electronic explosive device
EID—Electrically initiated device
ELECTRICAL FUZE—a device that has many characteristics of the mechanical fuze; an electrical
impulse is used to initiate an electrical fuze instead of the mechanical action of an arming vane
rotation.
EM—Electrician’s mate
EMCON—Emission control
EMD—Engineering, manufacturing, and development
EME—Electromagnetic environment
EMI—Electromagnetic interference/Electromagnetic interface
EMR—Electromagnetic radiation/Explosive Mishap Report
EMS—Engineering Management System
ENSURE—a word added to a manual or checklist procedure to emphasize and make certain that a
step or procedure is or has been accomplished.
ENT—Enter
EOD—Explosive ordnance disposal—personnel with special training and equipment who render
explosive ordnance (such as bombs, mines, projectiles, and booby traps) safe, make intelligence
reports on such ordnance, and supervise the safe removal thereof.
ESAD—Electronic safe-arm device
ESI—Explosive safety inspector
ESMP—Explosives safety management program
ESO—Explosives safety officer
ESQD—Explosives safety quantity-distance
ESSM—Evolved Sea Sparrow Missile
ESTM—Explosives Safety Technical Manual
EU—Electrical unit
EWO—Electronic warfare officer
F/A—Fighter/Attack
F/AD—Force/Activity designator
FAA—Federal aviation administration

AI-8
FAE—Fuel-air explosive
FAU—Fin actuator unit
FFAR—Folding-fin aircraft rocket
FFCS—Fuze function control set
FFT—For further transfer
FIN—a fixed or adjustable airfoil attached to a weapon to give the weapon directional stability.
FIUL—Fleet issue unit load
FLIR—Forward-looking infrared
FLIS—Federal Logistics Information System
FLTCDR—Fleet commander
FMU—Fuze munition unit
FOD—Foreign object damage
FORCE RETENTION GAUGE—a device used to functionally check a bomb rack’s nose and tail
arming solenoids.
FORWARD-FIRING WEAPONS—weapons, such as missiles, rockets, and guns, that are propelled
in a forward direction.
FOSAMS—Fleet Optical Scanning Ammunition Marking System
FOS-M—Fleet ordnance support model
FPB—Fast patrol boat
FRC—Fleet Readiness Center
FRP—Full rate production
FRS—Firing Reporting System—used by the fleet to report the unclassified results of noncombat
missile firings and unsuccessful combat missile firings for designated programs.
FSC—Federal supply classification
FST—Fleet support team
FSU—Field storage unit
FTB—Follow-through bomb
FUNCTIONING TIME—the time required for a fuze to detonate after impact, or a preset time.
FUND CODE—used to properly bill an activity for the material received.
FUZE—term used for the mechanical or electrical device that initiates the detonation of an explosive
at a desired time.
FWST—Fleet weapons support team
FZU—Fuzing unit
GBI—Gains by inventory—an increase in the asset position based on a physical inventory.
GBU—Guided bomb unit
GCG—Guidance control group
GCU—Gun control unit
AI-9
GEN-X—Generic expendable—a microwave transmitter/receiver utilizing state-of-the-art microwave
integrated circuits.
GEU—Guidance electronics unit
GHZ—Gigahertz
GITR—Gun Inventory, Tracking, And Reporting—a Web application that provides the weapons
community with an automated way to track the location, quantity, and material condition of the GITR
inventory.
GLIDE WEAPON—a weapon having no propulsion but contains a guidance control unit.
GND—Ground
GP—General purpose
GPS—Global Positioning System
GSA—General Services Administration
GSE—Ground support equipment
GSG—Guidance section group
GU—Guidance unit
GUIDED WEAPON—a weapon whose course may be altered in flight by a guidance control unit.
HACLC—Harpoon aircraft command launch computer—in the P-3 aircraft, provides power
application, controls, and displays for the Harpoon missile.
HARM—High-Speed Anti-Radiation Missile
HAZMAT—Hazardous material—the component of, or an item of, ammunition that is inherently
designed to produce the necessary energy for ignition, propulsion, detonation, fire, or smoke, thus
enabling the item to function; in addition, a material (corrosive, oxidizer, etc.) that is inherently
dangerous and capable of serious damage and therefore requires regulated handling to avoid
creating accidents in connection with its existence and use.
HBX—High blast explosives
HCU—Hand control unit
HE—High explosive
HEAT—High-Explosive Anti-Tank
HE-FRAG—High-explosive fragmentation
HEI—High-explosive incendiary
HEI-T—High-explosive incendiary tracer
HERO—Hazards of electromagnetic radiation to ordnance
HIPPAG—High pressure pure air generator
HOB—Height of burst
HOF—Height of function
HOMING, ACTIVE—target illumination is supplied by a component carried in a missile, such as a
radar transmitter; radar signals transmitted from the missile are reflected off of the target and back to
the receiver in the missile.

AI-10
HOMING, PASSIVE—the directing intelligence is received from the target; for example, the infrared
rays (such as the hot exhaust of jet aircraft) or radar signals (such as those transmitted by ground
radar installations).
HOMING, SEMIACTIVE—a missile receives its target illumination from an external source, such as a
transmitter carried in the launching aircraft; the receiver in the missile receives the signals reflected
off the target, computes the information, and sends electronic commands to the control section.
HOST ACTIVITY—for the purposes of explosives safety, the host activity is the property holder of a
Navy or Marine Corps activity whose mission directly involves or supports ammunition and/or
explosives operations.
HPACS—High Pressure Air Compressor System
HPT—High pressure test
HTP—Hard target penetrator
HTVSF—Hard target void sensing fuze
HUD—Head-up display
HUNG WEAPON—a weapon that accidentally remains attached to an aircraft after an attempt to
release it from the rack.
HYD—Hydraulic
IAW—In accordance with
IBD—Inhabited building distance
IBIT—Initiated built-in-test
ICM—Integrated countermeasures
ICMDS—Integrated countermeasures dispensing set
ICP—Inventory control point
IDECM—Integrated defensive electronic countermeasures
IF APPLICABLE—a phrase used to preface a step/procedure that, when required, must be
performed; when the step/procedure is not required, it may be omitted.
IFL—In-flight lock
IFORBL—In-flight operable bomb rack lock
IIR—Imaging infrared
IM—Insensitive munitions—munitions that reliably fulfill (specified) performance, readiness, and
operational requirements on demand, but minimize the probability of inadvertent initiation and severity
of subsequent collateral damage to the weapon platform (including personnel) when subjected to
unplanned stimuli.
IMER—Improved Multiple Ejector Rack
IMO—International Maritime Organization
INITIATOR—first device in a pyrotechnic or explosive assembly, squib, primer, or detonator.
INSTANTANEOUS—when the functioning time of a fuze is 0.0003 to 0.0005 second.
INSURV—Board of inspections and survey
INT—Interval
AI-11
INTERVALOMETER—an electrical or electromechanical device that controls the release or firing of
airborne weapons/stores at a specified interval or sequence.
IPB—Illustrated parts breakdown
IPG—Issue Priority Group
IR—Infrared—a portion of the electromagnetic spectrum whose wavelength/frequency falls between
visible light and microwave.
IRDS—Infrared detection set
ISD—Ignition safety device
ISIC—Immediate superior in command
ISO—International Standard Organization
ISOL—Isolation
ISR—Intelligence, surveillance, and reconnaissance
IT—In training
ITALD—Improved tactical air launched decoy
ITER—Improved Triple Ejector Rack
ITL—Intent-to-launch
JATO—Jet-assisted take-off
JDAM—Joint Direct Attack Munition
JETTISON—releasing of an airborne weapon or store by an emergency or secondary release
system.
JP—Jet propulsion
JSF—Joint Strike Fighter
JSOW—Joint Standoff Weapon
JVC—Jet vane control
KCAS—Knots calibrated air speed
LALS—Linkless ammunition loading system
LANYARD—a device (normally a strong strap, cloth, or wire) used to actuate an arming or safing
device on a weapons release.
LAO—Logistics assistance officer
LAU—Launch adapter unit (aircraft installed launcher)
LBI—Loss by inventory
LDAT—Low drag arm time
LDGP—Low drag, general purpose (bombs)
LDP—Low drag pylon
LDT—Load drill trainer
LEA—Launcher electronic assembly
LEMA—Linear electromechanical actuator
AI-12
LFORM—Landing force operational reserve material
LGB—Laser guided bomb
LGTR—Laser guided training round
LHA—Amphibious assault ship (general purpose)
LHD—Amphibious assault ship (multi-purpose)
LI—Left inboard
LJDAM—Laser JDAM
LLPL—Long last pulse logic
LMF—Language media format
LO—Left outboard
LOADING—an operation that installs airborne weapons or stores on or in an aircraft.
LOAL—Lock on after launch
LOCO—Low-collateral damage
LRIP—Low rate initial production
LSA—Laser switch assembly
LSC—Linear shaped charge
LSE—Logistics support equipment—consists of equipment used for packaging, bulk handling,
storage or stowage, and transportation of weapons and weapons components in the weapons
logistics cycle.
M&S—Media and Status Code—provides information indicating status reporting requirements on
MILSTRIP requisitions.
MAC—Metal augmentation charge
MACH—a measurement of sonic speed under standard atmospheric conditions; Mach 1 is about 766
miles per hour.
MAG—Marine Air Group
MAGAZINE—any building or structure, except an operating building, used for the storage of
ammunition and explosives.
MAGTF—Marine Air Ground Task Force
MAN—Manual
MANMED—Manual of the Medical Department
MAP—Military Assistance Program
MARCORSYSCOM—Marine Corps System Command
MAU—Munitions adapter unit/Munition auxiliary unit
MAWTS-1—Marine Aviation Weapons and Tactical Squadron One
MAY—used to indicate an acceptable, suggested, or permitted means of accomplishment.
MC—Mission computer
MCC—Material control code
AI-13
MCDS—Mission computing and display system—in the P-8 aircraft, manages the inventory,
monitoring, programming, presetting, selection, and release of all weapons and sonobuoys.
MCO—Marine Corps order/Major combat operation
MDD—Maintenance due date
MDF—Mission Data File
MDSU—Mobile diving and salvage unit
MECHANICAL FUZE—in its simplest form, a mechanical fuze is like the hammer and primer used to
fire a rifle or pistol; a mechanical force (e.g., a bomb impacting a target) drives a striker into a
sensitive detonator; the detonator ignites a train of explosives, eventually firing the main or filler
charge.
MEDEVAC—Medical evacuation
MET—Mine Exercise Training
MFST—Mobile fleet support team
MHE—Material handling equipment
MHU—Aerial stores (munitions) handling unit
MIL-L—Military lubrication standard
MIL-PRF—Military performance specification
MIL-STD—Military standard
MILSTRAP—Military Standard Transaction Reporting and Accounting Procedures
MILSTRIP—Military Standard Requisitioning and Issue Procedures
MIM—Maintenance instruction manual
MIPR—Military interdepartmental purchase request
MITL—Man-in-the-loop
MK—Mark
MLM—Marine location marker—launched from aircraft to provide day or night reference points for
marking the course of enemy submarines during antisubmarine warfare operations.
MLSF—Mobile logistics support force
MLS—Multi-level security
MLT—Moving land target
MMCS—Maverick missile control system—in the P-3 aircraft, provides the capability to individually
identify and track up to four separate targets with missiles loaded on stations 10, 11, 16, and 17.
MMT—Moving maritime target
MOD—Modification
MOMAG—Mobile mine assembly group
MOMAU—Mobile mine assembly unit
MOTT—Mobile ordnance training team
M-PACT—Marotta Pure Air Compression Technologies

AI-14
MPS—Maritime prepositioning ship
MRC—Maintenance requirement card
MRD—Missile restraint device
MRL—Master repairables list
MRO—Material release order
MSC—Military Sealift Command
MSL—Missile
MTV—Magnesium/Teflon/Viton
MULT—Multiple
MULTIMETER—a portable, multi-range, alternating current, direct current, volt-ohm meter used for
general electronic and electrical service; used to measure resistance and voltage in an electrical
circuit.
MWS—Missile warning set
NALC—Navy Ammunition Logistics Code
NALDA—Naval Aviation Logistic Data Analysis
NAMP—Naval Aviation Maintenance Program
NAR—Notice of Ammunition Reclassification—a notice advising stock points and ammunition
custodians of changes in the serviceability, status, or condition of ammunition, components, and
related material.
NAS—Naval air station
NATEC—Naval Air Technical Data and Engineering Command
NATM—Special air training missile—used for pilot training during fleet weapon training exercises.
NATO—North Atlantic Treaty Organization
NATOPS—Naval Air Training and Operating Procedures Standardization
NAV/C&C—Navigation/Command and control
NAVAIR—Naval Air Systems Command
NAVAIRWARCENWPNDIV—Naval Air Warfare Center Weapons Division
NAVAMMOLOGCEN—Naval Ammunition Logistics Support Center
NAVFACENGCOM—Naval Facilities Engineering Command
NAVMAG—Naval magazine
NAVMED—Naval Medicine
NAVRESFOR—Naval Reserve Force
NAVSEA—Naval Sea Systems Command
NAVSHIPS—Naval Ship System Command
NAVSO—Navy Staff Office
NAVSUP—Naval Supply Systems Command
NAVSUP GLS—NAVSUP Global Logistics Support
AI-15
NAVWEPSTA—Naval weapons station
NAWCAD—Naval Air Warfare Center Aircraft Division
NAWMU-1—Naval Airborne Weapons Maintenance Unit One
NCB—National Codification Bureau
NCEA—Non-combat expenditure allocation—the total of all Navy (including Marine Corps aviation)
non-nuclear ordnance items authorized for expenditure for training, testing, operations, and other
peacetime uses.
NETC—Naval Education and Training Command
NEW—Net explosives weight—the actual weight of explosive mixtures or compounds (including the
TNT equivalent of other energetic material), which is used in the determination of explosives limits
and ESQD arcs.
NFPA—National Fire Protection Association
NIIN—National item identification number
NiMH—Nickel metal hydride
NIPRNet—Non-Secure Internet Protocol Router Network
NLO—Navy liaison officer
NM—National match
NMC EAD—Naval Munitions Command East Asia Division
NOLSC—Naval Operational Logistics Support Center
NOMMP—Naval Ordnance Maintenance Management Program
NONDELAY—when the functioning time of a fuze is 0.0003 to 0.0005 second.
NOSSA—Naval Ordnance Safety and Security Activity
NOTE—an operating procedure, practice, or condition that is essential to highlight.
NPQ—Not physically qualified
NRFI—Not ready for issue
NSN—National stock number
NSSMS—NATO Sea Sparrow Missile System
NSWC—Naval Special Warfare Center
NTRP—Naval Tactical Reference Publication
NVD—Night vision device
NVG—Night vision goggles
NWCF—Navy Working Capital Fund
NWS—Naval weapons station
OA—Operational assembly
OAP—Ordnance assessment portfolio
OCONUS—Outside the continental United States
OFP—Operational flight program
AI-16
OHE—Ordnance handling equipment—specially designed mechanical equipment used for
assembling, transporting, lifting, positioning, rotating, or containing conventional weapons,
ammunition, explosives, and related components.
OHF—Overhead fire
OHO—Ordnance handling officer
OHSAT—Ordnance handling safety assistance team
OHV—Ordnance Handling Vehicle
OIC—Officer in charge
OIS-MC—Ordnance Information System-Marine Corps—the single repository for the worldwide status
of Marine Corps 0T cognizant expendable non-nuclear ordnance requirements, assets, production,
expenditures, costs, and technical inventory management data.
OIS-R—Ordnance Information System-Retail—an integrated system of application software designed
for retail ammunition asset management and reporting; used by all Navy and Marine Corps ashore
and afloat activities and contractors designated with Navy cognizance to locally manage ammunition
inventory and report to OIS-W.
OIS-W—Ordnance Information System-Wholesale—the single repository for the worldwide status of
Navy expendable non-nuclear ordnance; the system tracks requirements, assets, production,
expenditures, costs, and technical inventory management data, regardless of inventory management
or ownership responsibilities.
OJT—On-the-job training
OLI—Out-of-line
OMS—Ordnance Management System
OOD—Officer-of-the-deck
OP—Ordnance publication
OPLIFT—Opportune lift
OPNAV—Office of the Chief of Naval Operations
OTTO FUEL II—a stable, liquid monopropellant composed of a nitrate ester in a solution with a
desensitizing agent and a stabilizer; the propellant used for propulsion systems of the Mk 46 Mods,
Mk 50 Mods, and Mk 54 Mods torpedoes.
PAD—Propellant actuated device
PAGS—Pure air generating system
PARACHUTE PACK—a device used on mines to prevent excessive terminal velocities and reduce
water entry impact to protect the mine components from damage; upon water entry a release
mechanism (paddles or inertia weights) separates the parachute pack from the mine.
PARENT RACK—suspension and carrying units that are semi-permanently attached to the aircraft.
PASE—Preloaded accessory suspension equipment—a unit of accessory suspension equipment,
e.g., LAU-117 and LAU-118 missile launcher, which has been preloaded prior to the attachment of
the unit to the aircraft.
PAYLOAD—an element or part of a missile; is usually considered as the explosive charge and is
carried in the warhead of the missile.
PBX—Plastic bonded explosive
AI-17
PBXN—Plastic bonded explosive Navy
PD—Point detonating/Proficiency demonstration (QUAL/CERT)
PEP—Programmable entry panels
PGU—Projectile gun unit
PGW—Precision guided weapon
PHST—Packaging, handling, storage, and transportation
PLR—Periodic lot report
PMA—Program manager, air
PMIC—Periodic maintenance inspection card
PMS—Preventative maintenance system
POSTLOADING—an electrical, mechanical, or visual inspection of airborne weapons or stores
conducted after the completion of loading.
PQS—Personnel qualification system
PRELOADED—pertaining to the state of a weapon, dispenser, launcher, or rack that is normally
accomplished at an assembly area prior to loading onto an aircraft.
PRF—Pulse repetition frequency
PRI—Primary
PRIMER—an initiator designed to be set off by mechanical energy (percussion) or electrical energy to
produce a hot flame; may be used to initiate detonating or deflagrating composition.
PROJECT CODE—identifies requisitions, shipments, and related documentation to special projects,
operations, exercises, and maneuvers.
PROPER AUTHORITY—person or persons appointed or adapted to a particular situation who are
qualified to make determinations or control the situation (e.g., immediate supervisor).
PSEU—Proximity switch electronics unit
PSS—Propulsion steering section
PWB—Printed wiring board
PWP—Plasticized white phosphorus
PWR—Power
PWRS—Prepositioned war reserve stock
PYROTECHNICS—mixtures of chemical compounds that produce smoke or brilliant light in burning
used for signaling or for lighting up an area at night.
QA—Quality assurance
Q-D—Quantity-distance
QE—Quality evaluation
QRP—Qualifying recycling program
QUAL/CERT—Qualification/Certification
RAC—Rapid action change—issued to provide timely information of changes to manuals.

AI-18
RADHAZ—Radiation hazard
RC—Regional commander
RCS—Report Control Symbol
RDBMS—Relational database management system
RDD—Required delivery date
RDT&E—Research, development, test, and evaluation
REARMING AREA—area where an operation that replenishes the prescribed airborne
weapons/stores, ammunition, bombs, and other armament items for an aircraft is conducted; when
weapons are handled in a rearming area, all fuzes or initiators shall remain safe and all gun
chambers clear; these operations may include fuzing (e.g., bombs) and stray voltage checks as
applicable.
RECOMMENDED—procedures or equipment that has been verified and recommended for use over
certain other procedures or items of equipment.
RELEASE AND CONTROL SYSTEM CHECK—functional checks of an aircraft electrical/mechanical
conventional weapon release and/or control subsystem.
RELEASE WIRE—a single strand steel wire used to retain the torpedo breakaway bands in a
tensioned condition until torpedo release.
RESTRICTION—a limitation or prohibition of procedures, practices, conditions, or use of an item or
equipment that will endanger personnel; could result in damage, destruction, or failure of an item or
equipment, or improper use of an item.
REV—Revision
REXTORP—Recoverable exercise torpedo
RF—Radiofrequency
RFI—Ready-for-issue
RI—Right inboard
RIC—Routing Identifier Code—an address that either indicates the intended receipt of the document
or indicates the actual consignor on supply type release/receipt documents.
RIE—Requisition in English
RIM—Ship launched, aerial intercept, guided missile
RMA&Q—System reliability, maintainability, availability, and quality
RO—Right outboard
ROCKET—a weapon, normally unguided, that is propelled by the sustained reaction of a discharging
jet of gas against the container of gas.
ROLMS—Retail Ordnance Logistics Management System
RSL—Ready service locker
RSSI—Receipt, segregation, storage, and issue
RTM—Rate training manual
RTV—Room temperature vulcanization
S&A—Safety and arming
AI-19
SAASM—Selective availability anti-spoofing module
SAFETY CLIPS (FAHNESTOCK/DEXTER)—designed to prevent the premature or accidental
withdrawal of arming wires from a weapon.
SAFETY PIN—a mechanical device used to interrupt the normal action of an ordnance device.
SAL—Semiactive laser
SAPHEI—Semi-armor piercing high-explosive incendiary
SAR—Search and rescue
SAT—Safe air travel—the distance along the trajectory that a bomb travels from the releasing aircraft
in an unarmed condition.
SATS—Short airfield tactical site
SAW—Spring arming wire
SCAAIR—Standardized Conventional Ammunition Automated Inventory Record
SCG—Storage compatibility group
SCU—Station control unit
SCWDL—Strike common weapon data link—a Link 16 terminal designed to enable network enabled
weapon messages.
SDC—Signal data convertor
SDI—Serial data interface
SDS—Standard Depot System
SDV—SEAL delivery vehicle
SE—Support equipment
SEAL—Sea, air, and land
SEB—Support equipment bulletin
SEC—Support equipment change
SERVICE CODE—designed to accommodate service identity in MILSTRIP documentation.
SF—Standard form
SHALL—used to indicate a mandatory method of accomplishment
SHEAR-SAFE—a condition in which a fuze remains unarmed because its arming mechanism is
damaged or completely severed from the fuze body.
SHOLS—Single Hoist Ordnance Loading System
SHOULD—used to indicate a non-mandatory desire or preferred method of accomplishment.
SIGNAL CODE—a mandatory entry in card column (cc) 51 of a MILSTRIP requisition; serves a dual
purpose of designating the activity to which the material will be shipped and designating the activity to
which the material will be billed.
SIPRNet—Secret internet protocol router network
SIST—Serviceable in service time
SLAM-ER—Standoff Land Attack Missile-Expanded Response

AI-20
SLAM—Standoff Land Attack Missile
SLANT—also known as a solidus or virgule, implies that the nomenclature, terminology, or
procedural information is for one of several versions of a series of aircraft, weapons, or accessories.
SLC—Sonobuoy launch container
SLIT—Serial/Lot item tracking
SLPL—Short last pulse logic
SLT—Sonobuoy launch tube/Stationary land target
SM—Stockpile manager
SMCA—Single manager for conventional ammunition
SMEPS—Standard Missile Engineering Production System
SMS—Stores management system/Surface missile system
SMUG—Stores management upgrade
SNSR—Sensor
SOLAS—Safety of life at sea
SONOBUOY—an expendable sonar device dropped by an aircraft to detect submerged submarines,
which, when activated relays information to the aircraft by radio; a sonobuoy may be active or
nondirectional, or it may be passive directional or nondirectional.
SO—Safety observer
SOP—Standard operating procedure
SOPD—Standoff Outside Point Defense
SPDS—Secondary power distribution system
SPDS CDU—SPDS control display unit
SPECIALIZED STORES—stores that are not covered in other weapon categories; some examples of
specialized stores are electronic countermeasure decoy dispensers, chaff/flares, and external fuel
tanks.
SPECWARCOM—Special Warfare Command
SRA—Shop replaceable assembly
SRC—Security risk category
SRCH PWR—Search power
SRL—Sonobuoy rotary launcher
SSL—Single sonobuoy launcher
SSST—Supersonic sea skimming target
SST—Safe separation time
STA—Station
STATIC LINE—a device usually fabricated of nylon webbing and/or steel cable used to initiate an
action such as a parachute deployment on torpedoes, mines, and parachute flares.
STORES REL—Stores release

AI-21
STRAY VOLTAGE—an undesired voltage existing between two specified points of a weapon system
that is capable of producing a flow of current when a designated electrical measuring device is
connected between the two points.
SUBBASE—Submarine base
SUBROC—Submarine rocket
SUPSHIP—Shipbuilding, conversion, and repair
SUS—Signal underwater sound
SUU—Suspension underwing unit
SV/FLPS—Stray Voltage/Flight Payload Simulator—a portable load simulator used to count fire
pulses and test for stray voltage in the ALE-47 CMDS.
SV/IFLPS—SV/Improved FLPS
SVT—Software version tracking
SWCC—Special warfare combatant-craft crewmen
SWIT—Shipboard weapons integration team
SWL—Safe working load—the maximum static load (in pounds or kilograms) that can be lifted or
handled by a piece of handling equipment such as slings, forklift trucks, beams, and similar handling
equipment; the SWL shall be marked on the lifting equipment; the terms “SWL,” “capacity,” or “rated-
load” are considered synonymous.
SYSCOM—Systems command
T&E—Test and evaluation
TA/AS—Target ancillary/Ancillary systems
TACAIR—Tactical air
TACCO—Tactical coordinator
TACMAN—Tactical Manual
TAIMS—Tomahawk Asset Inventory Management System—an inventory control system that
supports the traditional inventory management functions, as well as functions unique to the
Tomahawk cruise missiles, required for the worldwide management and control of Tomahawk all-up-
round missiles.
TALD—Tactical Air Launched Decoy
TAMIS-R—Total Ammunition Management Information System-Redesigned
TAMMS—Total Ammunition Movement Management System
TCC—Type container code
TDC—Target designator control
TD—Target detector/Technical directive
TDD—Target detecting device
TEMP STOW—Temporary storage
TIR—Transaction item report
TIVS—Thermally initiated venting system

AI-22
TL—Team leader
TM—Team member
TMDC—Type maintenance due code—a code that indicates what type of maintenance action is due
next for an individual item.
TNT—Trinitrotoluene
TORP—Torpedo
TOW—Tube Launched Optically Tracked Wire Guided Missile
TP—Target practice/Training plan (QUAL/CERT)
TPDR—Technical publication deficiency report
TPR—Target performance report
TPRS—Target Inventory and Performance Reporting System
TP-T—Target practice-tracer
TTR—Tactical training range
TURNAROUND—the dearming or rearming procedures required between landing and takeoff to
ready an aircraft for flight.
TYCOM—Type commander
U/I—Unit of issue
UFCD—Up front control display
UHF—Ultrahigh frequency
UIC—Unit identification code
UIS—Up-Line Information System
UL—Underwriters Laboratory
UND—Urgency of need designator
UNEXPENDED WEAPONS—have not been subjected to attempt to fire or drop; presumed to be in a
normal operating condition and can be fired or jettisoned if necessary.
UNO—United Nations Organization
UNREP—Underway replenishment
USNS—United States Navy ship (civilian manned)
USSOCOM—United States Special Operations Command
UUT—Unit under test
VBSS—Visit, boarding, search, and seizure
VER—Vertical Ejector Rack
VERTREP—Vertical replenishment
VFA—Fixed wing fighter attack
VFS—Virtual Fleet Support
VIDS—Visual Information Display System

AI-23
VIDS/MAF—VIDS/Maintenance action form
VLIPS—Virtual Logistics Information Processing System—provides details on requisitions and can
track reports of excess material and the movement of those excesses to the destination disposal
activity.
VOLTAGE—electrical potential.
VT—Proximity/Variable time—the action that causes a fuze to detonate before impact when any
substantial object is detected at a predetermined distance from the fuze.
VTR—Video tape recorder
WAA—Weapons assembly area
WAM—Weapons assembly manual
WARHEAD—section of a weapon that carries the primary explosive charge.
WARNING—an operating procedure, practice, or condition that, if not correctly followed, could result
in personal injury or loss of life.
WAT—Wrap around test
WCU—Weapons control unit
WDU—Weapon derived uranium
WGU—Weapons guidance unit
WHE—Weapons handling equipment
WIP—Weapons insertion panel
WOW—Weight-on-wheels/Weight-off-wheels
WP—White phosphorous
WPN—Weapon
WPNSTA—Weapons station
WPU—Weapon processing unit
WRA—Weapon replaceable assembly
WRSA—War reserve stock for allies
WSAT—Weapon safety assistance team
WSE—Weapons support equipment—used to support explosive ordnance components or weapons;
divided into two categories, weapons handling equipment and weapons test equipment.
WSFR—Weapons System Firing Report
WTC—Work task code
WTE—Weapons Test Equipment
XMT—Transmit
X-POSITION—refers to the 45-degree position (from the vertical centerline of the weapon/store) of
the fins and wings.
ZRF—Zero-retention force

AI-24
 APPENDIX II
REFERENCES
NOTE
Although the following references were current when this NRTC was
published, their continued currency cannot be assured. When consulting these
references, keep in mind that they may have been revised to reflect new
technology or revised methods, practices, or procedures; therefore, you need
to ensure that you are studying the latest references.
If you find an incorrect or obsolete reference, please use the Rate Training
Manual User Update Form provided at the end of each chapter to contact the
CNATT Rate Training Manager.

Chapter 1
Airborne Weapons Assembly Manual Cluster Bombs Units Fleet Maintenance Activities, NAVAIR 11-
140-9, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, Change 4, 15 April 2015.
Airborne Weapons Assembly Manual Guided Bomb Units (GBUs), Fleet Maintenance Activities,
NAVAIR 11-140-10, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, Change 1, 15
May 2015.
Airborne Weapons Assembly Manual, Mk 80/BLU Series General Purpose Bombs, MK 77 Fire
Bombs, and Practice Bombs, NAVAIR 11-140-5, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command,
Patuxent River, MD, Change 2, 15 April 2015.
Description and Characteristics Airborne Bomb and Rocket Fuze Manual, NAVAIR 11-1F-2,
Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, Change 6, 15 August 2013.
Description Safety, Handling, and Compatibility Instructions Aircraft General Purpose Bombs, Fire
Bombs, Practice Bombs, and Components, NAVAIR 11-5A-17, Commander, Naval Air Systems
Command, Patuxent River, MD, Change 5, 15 August 2015.
Intermediate Maintenance (Weapon Station) JDAM GBU-31, GBU-32, GBU-38, and GBU-54 Series,
NAVAIR 11-5A-38, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, Change 3, 15
May 2015.
Naval Ordnance Management Policy (NOMP) Manual, OPNAV M-8000.16, Office of the Chief of
Naval Operations, Washington, DC, Change 2, 15 May 2015.

Chapter 2
Airborne Weapons Assembly Manual Aircraft Rocket Systems 2.75-Inch and 5.0-Inch Organizational,
Intermediate and Depot Maintenance Activities, NAVAIR 11-140-12, Commander, Naval Air Systems
Command, Patuxent River, MD, 14 March 2014.
Ammunition and Explosives Safety Afloat, NAVSEA OP 4, Eleventh Revision, Commander, Naval
Sea Systems Command, Washington, DC, 1 April 2012.
Description and Characteristics Airborne Bomb and Rocket Fuze Manual, NAVAIR 11-1F-2,
Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, Change 6, 15 August 2013.

AII-1
Naval Ordnance Management Policy (NOMP) Manual, OPNAV M-8000.16, Office of the Chief of
Naval Operations, Washington, DC, Change 2, 15 May 2015.
Operation and Intermediate Maintenance Instructions with Illustrated Parts Breakdown Rocket
Launcher Test Set AN/USM-715, NA 16-30USM-715-1, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command,
Patuxent River, MD, 1 November 2010.

Chapter 3
Airborne Weapons Assembly Manual Air-Launched Guided Missiles and Selected Vehicles Volume 1,
Air-Intercept Missiles (Tactical), NAVAIR 11-140-6.1, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command,
Patuxent River, MD, 1 September 2015.
Airborne Weapons Assembly Manual Air-Launched Guided Missiles and Selected Vehicles Volume 2,
Air-Ground Missiles (Tactical), NAVAIR 11-140-6.2, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command,
Patuxent River, MD, 1 June 2015.
Identification of Ammunition, NAVSEA SW010-AF-ORD-010/NAVAIR 11-1-117, Commander, Naval
Sea Systems Command, Washington, DC, and Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent
River, MD, Change C, 21 February 2003.
Intermediate Level Maintenance with Illustrated Parts Breakdown Aircraft Guided Missile Launcher
Model LAU-115C/A and Model LAU-115D/A, NAVAIR 11-75A-115, Commander, Naval Air Systems
Command, Patuxent River, MD, 1 March 2015.
Intermediate Level Maintenance with Illustrated Parts Breakdown Aircraft Guided Missile Launcher
Model LAU-116/A, LAU-116A/A and LAU-116B/A, NAVAIR 11-75A-116, Commander, Naval Air
Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, 1 September 2015.
Naval Ordnance Management Policy (NOMP) Manual, OPNAV M-8000.16, Office of the Chief of
Naval Operations, Washington, DC, Change 2, 15 May 2015.
Organizational and Intermediate Level Maintenance with Illustrated Parts Breakdown Aircraft Guided
Missile Launcher Model M272, NAVAIR 11-75A-272, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command,
Patuxent River, MD, 1 January 2010.
Organizational and Intermediate Level Maintenance with Illustrated Parts Breakdown Aircraft Guided
Missile Launcher Model M299, NAVAIR 11-75A-299, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command,
Patuxent River, MD, 1 July 2014.

Chapter 4
Maintenance Instructions with Illustrated Parts Breakdown Organizational and Intermediate Level,
Dispenser SUU-25F/A, NAVAIR 11-75AA-48, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent
River, MD, 12 November 2013.
Organizational and Intermediate Maintenance Airborne Weapons Assembly Manual Pyrotechnics and
Expendable Countermeasures, NAVAIR 11-140-7, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command,
Patuxent River, MD, 31 May 2015.
Pyrotechnic, Screening, Marking, and Countermeasure Devices, Description, Operation and
Maintenance, NAVSEA SW050-AB-MMA-010/NAVAIR 11-15-7.1, Fifth Revision, Commander, Naval
Sea Systems Command, Washington, DC, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent
River, MD, 26 September 2011.

AII-2
Chapter 5
Airborne Weapons/Stores Loading Manual Navy Model P-3 Aircraft, 01-75PAC-75, Commander,
Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, Change 1, 15 July 2015.
Description, Operation, Installation, Removal, and Trajectory Data for Mk 46/Mk 54 Torpedo Flight
Accessories, SW512-AO-ASY-010, Seventh Revision, Commander, Naval Sea Systems Command,
Washington, DC, 1 February 2008.
Mine, Underwater Mk 65 Mod’s 0, 1, and 3 Description and Procedures, SW551-A3-MMI-010, Sixth
Revision, Commander, Naval Sea Systems Command, Washington, DC, 1 July 2009.
Mines Mk 62 and Mk 63 Description, Assembly, and Test, SW551-A2-MMI-010, Sixth Revision,
Commander, Naval Sea Systems Command, Washington, DC, 1 July 2009.
Naval Ordnance Management Policy (NOMP) Manual, OPNAV M-8000.16, Office of the Chief of
Naval Operations, Washington, DC, Change 2, 15 May 2015.
Technical Manual for Otto Fuel II Safety, Storage, and Handling Instructions, NAVSEA S6340-AA-
MMA-010, Sixth Revision, Commander, Naval Sea Systems Command, Washington, DC, 28
February 2007.
Technical Manual for Recoverable Exercise Torpedo (REXTORP) MK 50, SW516-AB-MMO-
010/MK50 REXTORP, Third Revision, Commander, Naval Sea Systems Command, Washington, DC,
7 February 2003.

Chapter 6
Airborne Weapons/Stores Loading Manual Navy Model F/A-18A/B/C/D Aircraft 161353 and Up, A1-
F18AE-LWS-000, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, 1 November
2014.
Airborne Weapons/Stores Loading Manual Navy Model F/A-18E/F and EA-18G Aircraft, A1-F18EA-
LWS-000, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, 1 January 2014.
Ammunition for Navy 20-MM/25-MM Aircraft Guns Description, Characteristics, Safety, Maintenance
and Packaging, NAVAIR 11-1-119, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD,
1 September 2013.
Maintenance Instructions with Illustrated Parts Breakdown Intermediate Maintenance M61A1 20mm
Automatic Gun M61A2 20mm Automatic Gun, NAVAIR 11-95M61-1, Commander, Naval Air Systems
Command, Patuxent River, MD, Change 1, 1 September 2014.

Chapter 7
Airborne Weapons/Stores Loading Manual Navy Model F/A-18A/B/C/D Aircraft 161353 and Up, A1-
F18AE-LWS-000, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, 1 November
2014.
Airborne Weapons/Stores Loading Manual Navy Model F/A-18E/F and EA-18G Aircraft, A1-F18EA-
LWS-000, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, 1 January 2014.
Ammunition for Navy 20-MM/25-MM Aircraft Guns Description, Characteristics, Safety, Maintenance
and Packaging, NAVAIR 11-1-119, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD,
1 September 2013.
Intermediate Operation and Maintenance Instructions with Illustrated Parts Breakdown Linkless
Ammunition Loading System A/E32k-7A, NAVAIR 19-1-269, Commander, Naval Air Systems
Command, Patuxent River, MD, Change 2, 1 October 2013.

AII-3
Technical Manual Small Arms and Special Warfare Ammunition, NAVSEA SW010-AD-GTP-010, Fifth
Revision, Commander, Naval Sea Systems Command, Washington, DC, 25 March 2009.

Chapter 8
Airborne Weapons Assembly Manual Air-Launched Guided Missiles and Selected Vehicles Volume 1,
Air-Intercept Missiles (Tactical), NAVAIR 11-140-6.1, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command,
Patuxent River, MD, 1 September 2015.
Airborne Weapons/Stores Loading Manual Navy Model F/A-18A/B/C/D Aircraft 161353 and Up, A1-
F18AE-LWS-000, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, 1 November
2014.
Airborne Weapons/Stores Loading Manual Navy Model F/A-18E/F and EA-18G Aircraft, A1-F18EA-
LWS-000, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, 1 January 2014.
Maintenance Instructions with Illustrated Parts Breakdown Organizational Aerial Tow Target Banner
TDU-32A/B TDU-32B/B, NAVAIR 28-10A-23, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent
River, MD, 23 May 2013.

Chapter 9
Approved Handling Equipment For Weapons and Explosives, NAVSEA OP 2173, Volume 1, and
NAVAIR 19-100-1.1, Thirteenth Revision, Commander, Naval Sea Systems Command, Washington,
DC, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, 1 July 2015.
Approved Handling Equipment For Weapons and Explosives, NAVSEA OP 2173, Volume 2, and
NAVAIR 19-100-1.2, Thirteenth Revision, Commander, Naval Sea Systems Command, Washington,
DC, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, 1 July 2015.
Handling Ammunition and Explosives with Industrial Materials Handling Equipment (MHE), NAVSEA
SW023-AH-WHM-010, Seventh Revision, Commander, Naval Sea Systems Command, Washington,
DC, 1 October 2009.
Management of Materials Handling Equipment (MHE) and Shipboard Mobile Support Equipment
(SMSE), NAVSUP P-538, Sixth Revision, Commander, Naval Supply Systems Command,
Mechanicsburg, PA, 1 April 2012.
Naval Ordnance Management Policy (NOMP) Manual, OPNAV M-8000.16, Office of the Chief of
Naval Operations, Washington, DC, Change 2, 15 May 2015.

Chapter 10
Airborne Weapons/Stores Loading Manual Navy Model P-8A Aircraft, A1-P8AAA-LWS-000,
Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, 1 November 2015.
Electromagnetic Radiation Hazards (U) (Hazards to Ordnance) (U), NAVSEA OP 3565 and NAVAIR
16-1-529 Volume 2, Seventeenth Revision, Commander, Naval Sea Systems Command,
Washington, DC, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, 1 July 2008.
Intermediate Level Maintenance with Illustrated Parts Breakdown Ejector Unit Rack Assembly BRU-
32A/A Part Numbers J013400-527 1534AS5000 J013400-531 and BRU-32B/A Part Number
1534AS7000, NAVAIR 11-75A-26, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD,
1 March 2015.
Intermediate Level Maintenance with Illustrated Parts Breakdown Vertical Ejector Rack Assembly
BRU-33A/A Part Numbers 3036AS100 and J014000-541, NAVAIR 11-75A-27, Commander, Naval
Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, 1 October 2015.

AII-4
Maintenance Instructions with Illustrated Parts Breakdown Organizational and Intermediate Level,
Dispenser SUU-25F/A, NAVAIR 11-75AA-48, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent
River, MD, 12 November 2013.
Operation and Service Instructions, Organizational and Intermediate Level Maintenance with
Illustrated Parts Breakdown Bomb Rack Model BRU-14/A and BRU-15/A Part Number 549AS400-1
and 557AS500-1, NAVAIR 11-5E-18, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River,
MD, 1 June 2015.
Operation and Service Instructions, Organizational, Intermediate, and Depot Level Maintenance with
Illustrated Parts Breakdown AERO-1 Bomb Rack Adapter Assemblies Part Number 55A40D2-1 and
443AS202, NAVAIR 11-5E-17, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, 1
July 2010.
Operation and Service Instructions, Organizational, Intermediate, and Depot Level Maintenance with
Illustrated Parts Breakdown Bomb Rack Model BRU-12/A Part Number 531AS200-1 and Model BRU-
12A/A Part Number 531AS300-1, NAVAIR 11-5C-23, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command,
Patuxent River, MD, 1 July 2007.
Organizational and Intermediate Level Maintenance with Illustrated Parts Breakdown Improved
Multiple Ejector Rack (IMER) Model BRU-41/A Part Number 1348AS100 Improved Triple Ejector
Rack (ITER) Model BRU-42/A Part Number 1348AS500, NAVAIR 11-75A-603, Commander, Naval
Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, 1 September 2014.
Organizational and Intermediate Maintenance Airborne Weapons Assembly Manual Pyrotechnics and
Expendable Countermeasures, NAVAIR 11-140-7, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command,
Patuxent River, MD, 31 May 2015.

Chapter 11
Ammunition and Explosives Safety Afloat, NAVSEA OP 4, Eleventh Revision, Commander, Naval
Sea Systems Command, Washington, DC, 1 April 2012.
Description, Operation, and Maintenance Handbook Magazine Sprinkling Systems, S9522-AA-HBK-
010, Second Revision, Commander, Naval Sea Systems Command, Washington, DC, 30 March
2007.
Electromagnetic Radiation Hazards (U) (Hazards to Ordnance) (U), NAVSEA OP 3565 and NAVAIR
16-1-529 Volume 2, Seventeenth Revision, Commander, Naval Sea Systems Command,
Washington, DC, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, 1 July 2008.
Identification of Ammunition, NAVSEA SW010-AF-ORD-010/NAVAIR 11-1-117, Commander, Naval
Sea Systems Command, Washington, DC, and Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent
River, MD, Change C, 21 February 2003.
Naval Ships Technical Manual Chapter 772 Cargo and Weapons Elevators, S9086-ZN-STM-010/CH-
772R2, Third Revision, Commander, Naval Sea Systems Command, Washington, DC, 31 December
2000.
Navy Personnel Ammunition and Explosives Handling Qualification and Certification Program,
OPNAVINST 8023.24C, Office of the Chief of Naval Operations, Washington, DC, 17 October 2014.

Chapter 12
Ammunition and Explosives Safety Ashore for Contingencies, Combat Operations, Military
Operations Other Than War, and Associated Training, NAVSEA OP 5 Volume 3, Sixth Revision,
Commander, Naval Sea Systems Command, Washington, DC, 1 March 2007.

AII-5
Ammunition and Explosives Safety Ashore, NAVSEA OP 5, Volume 1, Seventh Revision,
Commander, Naval Sea Systems Command, Washington, DC, Change 9, 1 July 2010.
Department of Defense Standard Practice Ammunition Lot Numbering and Ammunition Data Card,
MIL-STD 1168, Department of Defense, Washington, DC, 10 June 1998.
Department of the Navy Physical Security Instruction for Conventional Arms, Ammunition, and
Explosives (AA&E), OPNAVINST 5530.13C, Chief of Naval Operations, Washington, DC, 26
September 2003.
Identification of Ammunition, NAVSEA SW010-AF-ORD-010/NAVAIR 11-1-117, Commander, Naval
Sea Systems Command, Washington, DC, and Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent
River, MD, Change C, 21 February 2003.
Motor Vehicle Driver and Shipping Inspector’s Manual for Ammunition, Explosives and Related
Hazardous Materials, NAVSEA SWO20-AF-HBK-010, Sixth Revision, Commander, Naval Sea
Systems Command, Washington, DC, 1 July 2009.

Chapter 13
Airborne Weapons Assembly Manual Aircraft Rocket Systems 2.75-Inch and 5.0-Inch Organizational,
Intermediate and Depot Maintenance Activities, NAVAIR 11-140-12, Commander, Naval Air Systems
Command, Patuxent River, MD, 14 March 2014.
Airborne Weapons Assembly Manual Cluster Bombs Units Fleet Maintenance Activities, NAVAIR 11-
140-9, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, Change 4, 15 April 2015.
Airborne Weapons Assembly Manual Guided Bomb Units (GBUs), Fleet Maintenance Activities,
NAVAIR 11-140-10, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, Change 1, 15
May 2015.
Airborne Weapons Assembly Manual, Mk 80/BLU Series General Purpose Bombs, MK 77 Fire
Bombs, and Practice Bombs, NAVAIR 11-140-5, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command,
Patuxent River, MD, Change 2, 15 April 2015.
Airborne Weapons/Stores Loading Manual Navy Model F/A-18A/B/C/D Aircraft 161353 and Up, A1-
F18AE-LWS-000, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, 1 November
2014.
Airborne Weapons/Stores Loading Manual Navy Model F/A-18E/F and EA-18G Aircraft, A1-F18EA-
LWS-000, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, 1 January 2014.
Maintenance Instructions with Illustrated Parts Breakdown Organizational and Intermediate Level,
Dispenser SUU-25F/A, NAVAIR 11-75AA-48, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent
River, MD, 12 November 2013.
NATOPS Conventional Weapons Handling Procedures Manual (Ashore), NAVAIR 00-80T-103,
Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, 1 November 2006.

Chapter 14
Airborne Weapons/Stores Loading Manual Navy Model F/A-18A/B/C/D Aircraft 161353 and Up, A1-
F18AE-LWS-000, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, 1 November
2014.
Airborne Weapons/Stores Loading Manual Navy Model F/A-18E/F and EA-18G Aircraft, A1-F18EA-
LWS-000, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, 1 January 2014.

AII-6
CVN NATOPS Manual, NAVAIR 00-80T-120, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent
River, MD, 1 March 2014.
LHA/LHD NATOPS Manual, NAVAIR 00-80T-106, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command,
Patuxent River, MD, 15 November 2013.

Chapter 15
Airborne Weapons/Stores Loading Manual Navy Model F/A-18A/B/C/D Aircraft 161353 and Up, A1-
F18AE-LWS-000, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, 1 November
2014.
Airborne Weapons/Stores Loading Manual Navy Model F/A-18E/F and EA-18G Aircraft, A1-F18EA-
LWS-000, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, 1 January 2014.
Airborne Weapons/Stores Loading Manual Navy Model MH-60R Helicopter, A1-H60RA-LWS-000,
Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, 1 December 2014.
Airborne Weapons/Stores Loading Manual Navy Model P-3 Aircraft, 01-75PAC-75, Commander,
Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, Change 1, 15 July 2015.
Airborne Weapons/Stores Loading Manual Navy Model P-8A Aircraft, A1-P8AAA-LWS-000,
Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, 1 November 2015.

Chapter 16
Airborne Weapons/Stores Loading Manual Navy Model F/A-18A/B/C/D Aircraft 161353 and Up, A1-
F18AE-LWS-000, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, 1 November
2014.
Airborne Weapons/Stores Loading Manual Navy Model F/A-18E/F and EA-18G Aircraft, A1-F18EA-
LWS-000, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, 1 January 2014.
Intermediate Maintenance with Illustrated Parts Breakdown Countermeasures Dispensing System
Test Set AN/ALM-291, NAVAIR 16-30ALM291-1, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command,
Patuxent River, MD, 1 February 2010.
Intermediate Maintenance with Illustrated Parts Breakdown, Gun Electrical Circuit Test Set A/E24T-
230, NAVAIR AT-120AC-S75-000, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD,
30 May 1996.
Maintenance Instructions with Illustrated Parts Breakdown Intermediate and Depot, Fuze Function
Control Test Set AN/AWM-42A, NAVAIR 16-30-AWM42-1, Commander, Naval Air Systems
Command, Patuxent River, MD, Change 1, 15 December 1986.
Naval Ordnance Management Policy (NOMP) Manual, OPNAV M-8000.16, Office of the Chief of
Naval Operations, Washington, DC, Change 2, 15 May 2015.
Organizational and Intermediate Maintenance Instructions with Illustrated Parts Breakdown
Countermeasures Chaff Dispensing Set Test Set Group AN/ALM-286(V),NAVAIR 16-30ALM286-1,
Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, Change 1, 1 December 2011.
Organizational and Intermediate Maintenance Instructions with Illustrated Parts Breakdown Firing
Circuit Test Set AN/AWM-102, NAVAIR 16-30AWM102-1, Commander, Naval Air Systems
Command, Patuxent River, MD, 1 September 2011.
Organizational and Intermediate Maintenance Instructions with Illustrated Parts Breakdown Test Set,
Countermeasures Dispensing Set AN/ALM-290, NAVAIR 16-30ALM290-1, Commander, Naval Air
Systems Command, Patuxent River, MD, 1 December 2013.

AII-7
Organizational Level Manual Test Set, Common Rack and Launcher A/E37T-35A and Adapter Set
Assemblies W21 – W70, NAVAIR 16-30AE37T-35-1, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command,
Patuxent River, MD, 1 February 2009.
Test Set, Stores Management Subsystem AN/AWM-103A Part Number 3673AS100-3 and
Interconnecting Groups, NA 16-30AWM-103-1, Commander, Naval Air Systems Command, Patuxent
River, MD, 15 September 2009.

Chapter 17
Conventional Ordnance Stockpile Management Policies and Procedures, NAVSUP P-724, Fifteenth
Revision, Commander, Naval Supply Systems Command, Mechanicsburg, PA, 30 April 2015.
MILSTRIP/MILSTRAP Desk Guide, NAVSUP P-409, Commander, Naval Supply Systems Command,
Mechanicsburg, PA, Change 7, 15 September 2007.
Naval Ordnance Management Policy (NOMP) Manual, OPNAV M-8000.16, Office of the Chief of
Naval Operations, Washington, DC, Change 2, 15 May 2015.
Naval Supply Procedures Volume I, Afloat Supply, NAVSUP P-485, Third Revision, Commander,
Naval Supply Systems Command, Mechanicsburg, PA, Change 6, 4 October 2005.
Naval Supply Procedures Volume II, Supply Appendices, NAVSUP P-485, Third Revision,
Commander, Naval Supply Systems Command, Mechanicsburg, PA, Change 7, 28 February 2005.

AII-8
 APPENDIX III
Answers to End of Chapter Questions
Chapter 1 – Bomb, Fuzes, and Associated Components

1-1. A 1-10. C 1-19. A

1-2. B 1-11. B 1-20. A
1-3. D 1-12. A 1-21. A
1-4. A 1-13. B 1-22. A
1-5. A 1-14. D 1-23. B
1-6. D 1-15. B 1-24. A
1-7. A 1-16. D 1-25. C
1-8. A 1-17. D 1-26. B
1-9. B 1-18. B 1-27. C

Chapter 2 – Aircraft Rockets and Rocket Launchers

2-1. D 2-7. C 2-13. A

2-2. A 2-8. B 2-14. A
2-3. C 2-9. D 2-15. D
2-4. D 2-10. D 2-16. D
2-5. D 2-11. B
2-6. C 2-12. B

AIII-1
Chapter 3 – Air-Launched Guided Missiles and Guided Missile
Launchers

3-1. A 3-9. D 3-17. B

3-2. D 3-10. C 3-18. A
3-3. A 3-11. A 3-19. C
3-4. C 3-12. D 3-20. C
3-5. B 3-13. C 3-21. B
3-6. D 3-14. A 3-22. C
3-7. A 3-15. C 3-23. D
3-8. B 3-16. C 3-24. D

Chapter 4 – Pyrotechnics

4-1. B 4-9. B 4-17. A

4-2. D 4-10. C 4-18. A
4-3. C 4-11. B 4-19. C
4-4. D 4-12. C 4-20. A
4-5. C 4-13. C 4-21. A
4-6. C 4-14. C 4-22. C
4-7. A 4-15. A
4-8. B 4-16. A

AIII-2
 Chapter 5 – Air-Laid Mines and Torpedoes

5-1. C 5-7. D 5-13. D

5-2. B 5-8. B 5-14. C
5-3. C 5-9. C 5-15. D
5-4. C 5-10. B 5-16. A
5-5. A 5-11. D 5-17. B
5-6. C 5-12. A 5-18. C

Chapter 6 – Aircraft Guns

6-1. B 6-10. B 6-19. C

6-2. A 6-11. D 6-20. A
6-3. C 6-12. A 6-21. D
6-4. C 6-13. D 6-22. B
6-5. C 6-14. C 6-23. C
6-6. C 6-15. D 6-24. B
6-7. D 6-16. C 6-25. A
6-8. A 6-17. D 6-26. C
6-9. C 6-18. D

AIII-3
 Chapter 7 – Ammunition Loading

7-1. D 7-7. A 7-13. C

7-2. C 7-8. C 7-14. D
7-3. B 7-9. B 7-15. B
7-4. B 7-10. C 7-16. D
7-5. B 7-11. D
7-6. A 7-12. B

Chapter 8 – Targets and Associated Equipment

8-1. A 8-6. A 8-11. A

8-2. B 8-7. B 8-12. D
8-3. A 8-8. 8-13. A
8-4. B 8-9. A 8-14. C
8-5. B 8-10. C

Chapter 9 – Ammunition Handling Equipment

9-1. C 9-10. B 9-19. A

9-2. C 9-11. B 9-20. C
9-3. B 9-12. C 9-21. C
9-4. D 9-13. A 9-22. B
9-5. D 9-14. A 9-23. C
9-6. A 9-15. D 9-24. B
9-7. B 9-16. A 9-25. B
9-8. A 9-17. B
9-9. D 9-18. A
AIII-4
Chapter 10 – Suspension, Arming, and Releasing Equipment

10-1. D 10-7. B 10-13. D

10-2. C 10-8. C 10-14. A
10-3. C 10-9. A 10-15. B
10-4. B 10-10. D 10-16. C
10-5. B 10-11. A 10-17. D
10-6. A 10-12. C

Chapter 11 – Ammunition Storage and Handling Afloat

11-1. A 11-9. A 11-17. B

11-2. A 11-10. B 11-18. B
11-3. A 11-11. C 11-19. B
11-4. C 11-12. D 11-20. B
11-5. A 11-13. B 11-21. C
11-6. B 11-14. A 11-22. D
11-7. D 11-15. C 11-23. B
11-8. A 11-16. A 11-24. D

AIII-5
Chapter 12 – Ammunition Storage and Handling Ashore

12-1. C 12-7. D 12-13. D

12-2. B 12-8. D 12-14. C
12-3. D 12-9. C 12-15. C
12-4. D 12-10. B 12-16. B
12-5. B 12-11. D 12-17. C
12-6. A 12-12. D

Chapter 13 – Weapons Assembly

13-1. A 13-7. D 13-13. C

13-2. B 13-8. B 13-14. D
13-3. A 13-9. C 13-15. C
13-4. B 13-10. A 13-16. A
13-5. B 13-11. A
13-6. B 13-12. C

Chapter 14 – Aircraft Loading and Unloading Procedures

14-1. C 14-6. C 14-11. C

14-2. A 14-7. D 14-12. B
14-3. B 14-8. A 14-13. A
14-4. C 14-9. C 14-14. C
14-5. C 14-10. C 14-15. D

AIII-6
 Chapter 15 – Aircraft Weapons Systems

15-1. D 15-6. D 15-11. D

15-2. D 15-7. B 15-12. D
15-3. C 15-8. C 15-13. A
15-4. D 15-9. B 15-14. C
15-5. B 15-10. A 15-15. B

Chapter 16 – Weapons Systems Test Equipment

16-1. C 16-5. C 16-9. B

16-2. A 16-6. C 16-10. A
16-3. B 16-7. C
16-4. B 16-8. D

Chapter 17 – Ammunition Administration Ashore and Afloat

17-1. A 17-9. C 17-17. A

17-2. A 17-10. A 17-18. A
17-3. B 17-11. A 17-19. C
17-4. A 17-12. D 17-20. D
17-5. C 17-13. B 17-21. B
17-6. A 17-14. D 17-22. A
17-7. A 17-15. C 17-23. D
17-8. A 17-16. A

AIII-7
 INDEX

A
A/A missile control systems, 15-2, 15-26
A/A missile trigger switch, 15-27
A/A weapon select switches, 15-26
A/E-24T-230 test set, 16-12
A/E-37T-35A common rack and launcher test set, 3-21, 16-17
A/F32K-1A bomb assembly stand, 9-7
A/G weapon control system, 15-4, 15-27
A/G weapon release switch, 15-28
A/M32K-4A rough terrain trailer, 9-31
A/S32K-1E weapon loader, 9-34
Accessory racks, 15-17
Adapter assembly, 6-15
ADK-598 transport adapter, 9-24
Administration and billeting areas, 12-20
ADU-299(series) missile launcher adapter, 3-46
ADU-405/E roller height adapter, 9-19
ADU-433A/E aft height adapter, 9-20
ADU-434A/E forward height adapter, 9-20
ADU-483/E skid adapter, 9-20
ADU-488/E wing, fin, and fuze adapter, 9-15
ADU-496A/E single store adapter, 4-21
ADU-511A/E adjustable weapons adapter, 5-22
ADU-514A/E small missile adapter, 5-22
ADU-566/E bracket adapter, 5-23
ADU-567/E wing/fin guard adapter, 9-23
ADU-699A/E sonobuoy modular carrier unit assembly adapter, 9-24
ADU-729/E nitrogen receiver adapter, 9-16
ADU-775-E transport adapter assembly, 9-25
ADU-800-E Tactical Air-Launched Decoy Forward Transport Cradle Adapter, 9-25
ADU-801/E transport adapter, 9-26
ADU-814/E Improved Tactical Air-Launched Decoy Aft Transport Cradle Adapter, 9-26
ADU-834/E sonobuoy modular carrier unit assembly adapter, 9-24
ADU-895/E interface adapter, 9-21
Advanced Precision Kill Weapons System II, 2-14, 13-71
Age and experience of explosive drivers, 12-31
Aerial targets, 8-5
AQM-37(series) missile target, 8-8
BQM-34S missile target, 8-7
BQM-74E missile target, 8-5
GQM-163A supersonic sea skimming target, 8-8
AERO 9C bomb skid adapter, 9-14
AERO 12C bomb skid, 9-13
AERO 39C bomb skid adapter, 9-14
AERO 51D munitions trailer, 9-32
Index-1
AERO 58A skid adapter, 9-16
AERO 64A soft-belt adapter, 9-17
AERO 64B soft-belt adapter, 9-15
AERO 71A skid adapter, 9-18
AERO 83A transport adapter, 9-19
Aft cockpit armament system controls and indicators, 15-13
AGM-114 Hellfire missile, 15-54
AIM-120 AMRAAM weapon loading, 14-18
Air termination systems, 12-25
Air-laid mines and torpedoes, 5-1
aircraft-laid mines, 5-10
aircraft-launched torpedo configurations, 5-6
Mk 46 torpedoes, 5-1
Mk 54 torpedoes, 5-4
operational aircraft mines, 5-14
OTTO fuel II, 5-9
safety precautions, 5-16
Air-launched decoy, 8-9
Air-launched guided missiles, 3-1
Air-launched guided missiles and guided missile launchers, 3-1
guided missile handling, 3-47
guided missile launchers, 3-31
missile classification, 3-2
missile components, 3-5
missile designation, 3-3
missile identification, 3-5
safety precautions, 3-49
service guided missiles, 3-9
Air-launched missile loading, 14-17
AIM-120 AMRAAM weapon loading, 14-18
Common PASE weapons, 14-17
LAU-115(series) launcher, 14-18
LAU-116(series) launcher, 14-18
LAU-127(series) launcher, 14-20
launcher loading on the LAU-116(series), 14-23
launcher loading on the LAU-127(series), 14-26
Airborne rocket assembly procedures, 2.75-inch, 13-73
Airborne rocket assembly procedures, 5.0-inch, 13-69
assembly of fuze to warhead or BBU-15/B adapter booster, 13-72
assembly of rocket components, 13-72
inspecting rocket components, 13-69
unpacking rocket components, 13-69
Airborne Weapons/Stores Loading Manual, 14-1
NATOPS manuals, 14-2
Aircraft armament configuration capabilities, 15-19, 15-31
Aircraft armament systems, 15-1, 15-44, 15-50
armament subsystems, 15-36, 15-45, 15-53
armament systems basic controls, 15-7, 15-20, 15-35
Aircraft bomb ammunition and associated components, 1-10
arming safety switch, 1-7
Index-2
 arming wire assemblies, 1-14
cluster bomb units, 1-23
conical fin, 1-17
electrical fuzes, 1-6
fin assemblies, 1-16, 13-9, 13-12
fuze charging circuit, 1-14
fuze wells, 1-13
general-purpose bombs and fin assemblies, 1-10
guided bomb units, 1-19
identification, 1-10
mines, 1-22
nose plugs, 1-14, 13-20
practice bombs, 1-26
proximity sensor, 1-8
shipping and storage containers, 1-26
shipping configuration, 1-13
suspension lugs, 1-14, 13-5
Aircraft controller grip, 15-11
Aircraft general-purpose bombs, 13-1
bomb assembly crew, 13-3
bomb assembly tools and equipment requirements, 13-1
general inspection and installation procedures, 13-6
preparation for use, 13-4
Aircraft gun ammunition, 7-1
M50 cartridge components and general description, 7-1
M50 configuration ammunition, 7-1
projectile gun unit cartridge component and general description, 7-6
projectile gun unit configuration ammunition, 7-6
Aircraft gun loading 20 mm, 14-27
GFK-21A/E32K-7 (LALS III) loading, hand crank/power drive tool, 14-28
LALS III loading preparation, 14-27
Aircraft gun system controls (F/A-18E/F), 15-30
A/A missile trigger switch, 15-30
A/A weapon select switch, 15-30
Aircraft guns, 6-1
GAU-16 .50 caliber aircraft machine gun, 6-20
GAU-17/A 7.62 mm aircraft machine gun, 6-22
GAU-21 .50 caliber aircraft gun system, 6-18
M61A1 and M61A2 automatic gun, 6-1
M240D 7.62 aircraft machine gun, 6-24
safety precautions, 6-26
Aircraft loading and unloading procedures, 14-1
airborne weapons/stores loading manual, 14-1
aircraft preparation and inspection, 14-10
bomb loading and unloading procedures, 14-10
dearming or rearming area (immediately after engine shut down), 14-32
grounding and application of electrical power, 14-11
postloading quality assurance inspection, 14-31
reaming or arming area (after engine turn up), 14-32
rearming area (before engine turn up), 14-32
Index-3
 safety precautions, 14-34
unloading procedures, 14-33
weapon inspection, 14-12
weapons handling procedures, 14-2
weapons loading, 14-12
Aircraft preparation and inspection, 14-10
Aircraft rocket launchers, 2-15
common components, 2-18
fairings, 2-18
intervalometer, 2-18
LAU-10(series), 2-20
LAU-61(series) and LAU-68(series) launchers, 2-19
mode selector switch, 2-18
RF/thermal barriers, 2-17
safety switch assembly, 2-18
shipping configuration, 2-16
Aircraft rockets, 2-1
Aircraft rockets and rocket launchers, 2-1
aircraft rocket launchers, 2-15
aircraft rockets, 2-1
principles of rocket propulsion, 2-2
rocket and rocket fuze terminology, 2-2
rocket components, 2-3
rocket safety precautions, 2-22
service rocket assemblies, 2-14
Aircraft weapons systems, 15-1
antisubmarine warfare weapons systems, 15-34
F/A-18A/B/C/D aircraft, 15-1
F/A-18E/F and E/A-18G aircraft, 15-20
MH-60 helicopter, 15-50
P-3 aircraft, 15-35
P-8 aircraft, 15-44
safety precautions, 15-57
Aircraft-laid mines, 5-10
classification, 5-11
mine components, 5-12
Aircraft-launched smoke and flame marking devices, 4-7
Mk 25 Mods 3 and 4 marine location marker, 4-7
Mk 58 Mod 1 marine location marker, 4-10
Aircraft-launched torpedo configurations, 5-4
Alarm systems, 11-19
Alcohol and drugs, 12-30
All Weapons Information System, 17-65
2E/8E maintenance cost model, 17-66
aircraft armament equipment, 17-66
all weapons analysis and reporting system, 17-66
automated captive carry entry system, 17-67
configuration and data management support system, 17-68
core management system, 17-67
deficiency reporting system, 17-68
Index-4
 engineering management system, 17-67
firing reporting system, 17-67
guns and laser inventory tracking and reporting system, 17-68
logbook data entry system, 17-68
targets inventory and performance reporting system, 17-68
Ammunition administration ashore and afloat, 17-1
All Weapons Information System, 17-65
ammunition requisitioning and turn-in procedures, 17-6
ammunition transaction reporting, 17-37
explosive safety training program courses, 17-68
Ordnance Information System, 17-1
Ammunition and explosives driver 12-hour training course, 12-31
Ammunition and explosives handling qualification and certification, 11-1
applicability, 11-2
certification, 11-4
maintenance of training records, 11-8
training devices and inert ordnance, 11-8
training documentation requirements, 11-6
training plan, 11-8
Ammunition and explosives staging area, 12-19
Ammunition and stowage inspection, 11-20
ammunition inspection, 11-21
magazine inspection, 11-21
Ammunition areas, 12-19
administration and billeting areas, 12-20
ammunition and explosives staging area, 12-19
ammunition renovation area, 12-20
captured enemy ammunition area, 12-20
demolition/disposal area, 12-20
point of embarkation/debarkation, 12-20
port areas, 12-20
segregation areas, 12-19
weapon assembly areas, 12-20
Ammunition handling, 11-23, 12-28
installed handling equipment, 11-24
weapons elevator maintenance and safety, 11-28
Ammunition handling equipment, 9-1
armament weapons support equipment (AWSE), 9-2
beams, 9-8
bomb hoists, 9-12
carriers, 9-5
hoisting bars, 9-7
loaders, 9-33
ordnance handling equipment (OHE), 9-3
pallets, 9-3
safety precautions for handling equipment, 9-34
skids, weapons transporters, and associated adapters, 9-13
slings, 9-9
stands, 9-6
trailers, 9-30
Index-5
 trucks, 9-26
Ammunition hazard symbols, 12-17
Ammunition identification, 12-2
ammunition lot number, 12-5
Department of Defense Identification Code (DoDIC) and Navy Ammunition Logistic Code (NALC),
12-4
drill ammunition, 12-2
inert ammunition, 12-2
lettering, 12-4
mark and modification designation, 12-4
marking, 12-4
non-service ammunition, 12-2
painting, 12-3
practice ammunition, 12-2
service ammunition, 12-2
Ammunition inspection, 11-21
Ammunition loading, 7-1
aircraft gun ammunition, 7-1
ammunition container M548, 7-11
linkless ammunition loading system A/E32K-7, 7-21
safety precautions, 7-28
small arms ammunition, 7-12
Ammunition lot number, 12-5
Ammunition lot/location cards preparation, 17-60
Ammunition master stock record card preparation, 17-55
Ammunition pallet crate, 9-5
Ammunition renovation area, 12-20
Ammunition requisitioning and turn-in procedures, 17-6
ammunition requisitioning procedures, 17-13
ammunition turn-in procedures, 17-31
requisition file maintenance, 17-31
requisitioning by fleet units, 17-30
terms and definitions, 17-7
Ammunition requisitioning procedures, 17-13
allowance development procedures, 17-13
ammunition MILSTRIP requisition and follow-up instructions, 17-15
ammunition MILSTRIP requisition cancellation, 17-28
ammunition MILSTRIP requisition follow-up instructions, 17-26
ammunition MILSTRIP requisition modification procedures, 17-27
ammunition MILSTRIP requisition status procedures, 17-27
ammunition requisition in English, 17-28
military standard requisitioning and issue procedures, 17-14
NAVSEA 30,000 series allowance change request procedures, 17-13
NAVSEA 30,000 series change request approval and processing, 17-14
preliminary requisition preparation requirements, 17-15
requesting of mine exercise training material, 17-30
requisition of cartridge actuated devices/propellant actuated devices, 17-30
Ammunition sentencing, 17-64
Ammunition serial/location card preparation, 17-58

Index-6
Ammunition shipping, 12-28
explosive driver, 12-29
Ammunition stock point issue procedures, 17-52
Ammunition stock point receipt procedures, 17-53
Ammunition stock recording, 17-54
Ammunition storage and handling afloat, 11-1
ammunition and explosives handling qualification and certification, 11-1
ammunition handling, 11-23
ammunition stowage, 11-14
hazards of electromagnetic radiation to ordnance, 11-31
qualification and certification guidelines, 11-9
safety precautions, 11-34
weapons movement, 11-29
Ammunition storage and handling ashore, 12-1
ammunition handling, 12-28
ammunition identification, 12-2
ammunition shipping, 12-28
ammunition storage and handling facilities of an advanced base, 12-19
ammunition storage ashore, 12-1
ammunition storage ashore for advanced bases, 12-19
class/divisions, 12-8
explosive safety training program, 12-31
fire divisions, 12-9
identification of facilities, 12-14
lightning protection systems, 12-25
magazine and magazine area inspections, 12-27
magazine and magazine area security, 12-27
magazine maintenance, storage, and handling requirements, 12-24
magazines, 12-5
personnel requirements, 12-24
safety precautions, 12-32
Ammunition storage and handling facilities of an advanced base, 12-19
ammunition areas, 12-19
ammunition storage facilities, 12-20
field storage units, 12-23
modular storage, 12-24
signs, 12-24
Ammunition storage ashore, 12-1
Ammunition storage ashore for advanced bases, 12-19
Ammunition storage facilities, 12-20
caves and tunnels, 12-21
conversion of shipping containers into earth-covered magazines, 12-21
existing building, 12-21
existing magazines, 12-21
shipping containers, 12-21
Ammunition stowage, 11-14
ammunition and stowage inspection, 11-20
ammunition stowage requirements, 11-18
ammunition stowage spaces, 11-15
environmental control systems, 11-8
Index-7
 exhaust vents, 11-8
magazine internal arrangement, 11-20
magazine security, 11-23
magazine temperature log, 11-22
sprinkler and alarm systems, 11-8
supply and exhaust ventilation, 11-8
Ammunition stowage spaces, 11-15
chemical magazines, 11-17
lockers, 11-17
missile magazines, 11-16
ready-service magazines, 11-16
ready-service magazines, lockers, and staging areas, 11-16
Ammunition transaction reporting, 17-37
ammunition sentencing, 17-64
ammunition stock point issue procedures, 17-52
ammunition stock point receipt procedures, 17-53
ATR format instructions manual preparation, 17-40
ATR message formatting, 17-38
manual ammunition stock recording procedures, 17-54
NAVSUP ammunition sentencing publications, 17-63
standard stock point ammunition inspection requirements for receipt, storage, and issue of naval
ammunition, 17-62
standard stock point ammunition inspection requirements for segregation sentencing of naval
ammunition, 17-63
Ammunition turn-in procedures, 17-31
return and control of reusable ammunition material details and non-reusable expendable
cartridges, 17-35
return of reusable ammunition details procedures, 17-35
ship offload planning procedures, 17-32
temporary storage offload, 17-36
turn-in of air-launch missile material, 17-31
turn-in procedures for cartridge cases, 17-36
AN/ALE-39 countermeasures dispensing system, 10-19, 15-18, 15-38
dispenser assembly, 10-21
magazine block and printed wiring board, 10-19
AN/ALE-47 countermeasures dispensing system, 10-22, 15-18, 15-31, 15-38, 15-47
AN/ALE-50A dispensing system, 15-31
AN/ALM-286 countermeasure chaff dispensing set, 16-2
AN/ALM-290 countermeasure dispenser test set, 16-2
AN/ALM-291 countermeasure dispenser test set, 16-3
AN/AWM-42A fuze function control test set, 16-4
AN/AWM-102 firing circuit test set, 16-5
AN/AWM-103A stores management subassembly test set, 16-6
electrical unit with case, 16-6
interconnecting groups and associated aircraft, 16-8
test set accessories, 16-7
wrap-around test adapter, 16-8
AN/AWW-13 advanced data link pod, 3-30

Index-8
AN/GYQ-79A common munitions built-in test (BIT)/reprogramming equipment (CAMBRE Plus) test
program set, 16-13
ADU-891(V)1/E computer test set adapter, 16-14
ADU-892/E computer test set adapter, 16-15
HRU-1128/U (W23) special purpose cable assembly, 16-16
MX-12307/GYQ-79 (W24 and W25 special purpose cable assembly), 16-16
AN/USM-715 rocket launcher test set, 3-21
Antisubmarine warfare weapons systems, 15-34
Antitank/Antipersonnel (AT/APERS) warhead, 2-7
AQM-37(series) missile target, 8-8
Area and target illuminating devices, 4-5
LUU-2B/B aircraft parachute flare, 4-5
LUU-19(series) aircraft parachute flare, 4-7
Armament computer, 15-7, 15-20
Armament override switch, 15-8, 15-21
Armament section, 3-8
fuzing, 3-8
payload, 3-8
safety and arming device, 3-8
target detectors, 3-8
Armament system basic controls, 15-7, 15-20
Armament system circuit breakers, 15-21
Armament weapons support equipment (AWSE), 9-2
armament support equipment (ASE), 9-2
logistics support equipment (LSE), 9-3
weapons support equipment (WSE), 9-3
Arming and dearming, 14-6
Arming safety switch Mk 122 Mod 0, 1-7, 13-7
Arming wire assemblies, 1-15
Assembly of rocket components, 13-72
fuze to BBU-15/B adapter booster assembly procedure, 13-72
fuze to warhead assembly procedures, 13-72
ATR format instructions manual preparation, 17-40
AT/SLIT reporting procedures, 17-51
ATR header line, 17-41
ATR subject line, 17-41
container tracking procedures, 17-50
identification of serial and lot number sources, 17-49
reference line, 17-41
SLIT identification, tracking, and reporting, 17-49
transaction lines, 17-47
ATR message formatting, 17-38
Automatic revocation of a Navy driver’s permit, 12-32

B
Beams, 9-8
Mk 18 Mod 1 handling beam, 9- 8
Mk 18 Mod 2 handling beam, 9-9
Mk 37 Mod 1 lift beam, 9-9
BDU-45(series) full scale practice bombs, 1-28
Index-9
BDU-59(series) laser guided training round, 1-29
BLU-91/B mine, 1-25
BLU-92/B mine, 1-25
Board chair, 11-9
Board chair responsibilities, 11-9
Board member responsibilities, 11-10
Board members, 11-9
Bomb assembly crew, 13-3
Bomb assembly general inspection and installation procedures, 13-6
arming safety switch, 13-7
assembly of conical fin to the bomb body, 13-9
assembly of BSU-85 and BSU-86 fins to GP bombs, 13-12
electronic tail fuze, 13-6
Bomb assembly preparation for use, 13-4
breakout, 13-4
inspection, 13-4
unpacking, 13-4
Bomb assembly tools and equipment requirements, 13-1
Bomb ejector rack, 15-17
Bomb ejector racks, 10-4
BRU-32(series) ejector unit rack assembly, 10-4
BRU-33(series) vertical ejector rack (VER) assembly, 10-6
BRU-41/A improved multiple ejector rack (IMER), 10-8
BRU-42/A improved triple ejector rack (ITER), 10-8
BRU-55(series) aircraft bomb ejector rack, 10-7
BRU-75/A bomb rack unit, 10-7, 15-48
BRU-76/A bomb rack unit, 10-7, 15-48
Bomb hoist loading, 14-13
Bomb hoists, 9-12
HLU-196D/E bomb hoisting unit, 9-12
HLU-288/E bomb hoist, 9-12
Bomb loading and unloading procedures, 14-10
Bomb racks, 10-1
AERO 1A/1B adapter assembly, 10-1
BRU-12/A and BRU-12A/A bomb rack, 10-2
BRU-14/A bomb rack, 10-3
BRU-15/A bomb rack, 10-4
Bombs, fuzes, and associated components, 1-1
aircraft bomb ammunition and associated components, 1-10
cluster bomb units, 1-23
electrical fuzes, 1-6
fuze terminology and basic fuze theory, 1-2
general-purpose bombs and fin assemblies, 1-10
guided bomb units, 1-19
mechanical fuzes, 1-4
mines, 1-22
practice bombs, 1-26
safety precautions, 1-30
shipping and storage containers, 1-26
BQM-34S missile target, 8-7
Index-10
BQM-74E missile target, 8-5
Breakout, 13-4
BRU-32(series) ejector unit rack assembly, 10-4
BRU-33(series) vertical ejector rack (VER) assembly, 10-6
BRU-41 preparation/weapons loading, 14-15
BRU-41/A improved multiple ejector rack (IMER), 10-8
adapter assembly, 10-8
BRU-41/A IMER and BRU-42/A ITER electrical operation, 10-13
cable assembly, 10-9
ejector unit assembly, 10-9
ejector unit mechanical operation, 10-11
electronic control unit, 10-9
hardware adapter kits, 10-13
IMER/ITER operational description, 10-11
BRU-42/A improved triple ejector rack (ITER), 10-8
BRU-55(series) aircraft bomb ejector rack, 10-7
BRU-75/A bomb rack, 10-7, 15-48
BRU-75/A bomb rack power switch, 15-46
BRU-76/A bomb rack, 10-7, 15-48
BSU-33(series), 1-17
BSU-85/B air inflatable retarder, 1-17
BSU-86/B bomb fin, 1-18

C
Cage/Uncage switch, 15-27, 15-28
Captured enemy ammunition area, 12-20
Carriers, 9-5
Mk 43 Mod 1 weapons carrier, 9-5
Mk 49 Mod 1 weapons carrier, 9-6
Mk 51 Mod 1 weapons carrier, 9-6
Cartridge components and general description, 7-1
cartridge case, 7-2
classification, 7-2
color coding, 7-5
identification, 7-5
lettering, 7-5
M220 target practice-tracer cartridge, 7-4
M254 dummy cartridge, 7-3
M51A1B1/M51A2 dummy cartridges, 7-3
M52A3B1 electric primer, 7-2
M54A1 high-pressure test cartridge, 7-4
M55A2 target practice cartridge, 7-4
M56A3 high-explosive incendiary cartridge, 7-4
M505A3 point detonating fuze, 7-3
projectiles, 7-3
propellant, 7-2
tracer, 7-3
Catenary (overhead wire) system, 12-26
CATMs, 3-2
Caves and tunnels, 12-21
Index-11
CBU-78C/B Gator, 1-24
CBU-99B/B, 1-23, 13-59
Certification procedures, 11-11
Chemical agent and ammunition hazard symbols, 12-17
Chemical magazines, 11-17
Chute assemblies, 6-15
Class/Divisions, 12-8
Cluster bomb units, 1-23
BLU-91/B mine, 1-25
BLU-92/B mine, 1-25
CBU-79C/B bomb cluster, 1-24
CBU-99B/B antitank bomb cluster and dispenser bomb stores suspension and releasing unit-
76C/B, 1-23
functional description, 1-26
Mk 7 Mods bomb dispenser, 1-24
Mk 118 Mod 0 and Mod 1 antitank bomblets, 1-25
SUU-58/B subsonic free-fall dispenser, 1-25
SUU-76C/B (PDU-5/B) dispenser bomb, 1-25
CNU-238/E multipurpose shipping and storage container, 1-26
CNU-319/E shipping and storage container, 1-26
CNU-595/E preparation and inspection, 13-77
CNU-595/E weapon removal, 13-80
Cockpit basic controls, 15-52
Common PASE weapons, 14-17
Computer control group installation, 13-30
MAU-169(series), MAU-209(series), and WCU-10(series) CCG final post-assembly inspection, 13-
38
MAU-169(series), MAU-209(series), and WCU-10(series) CCG preparation and inspection, 13-30
Conical fin, 1-17, 13-9
Conversion of shipping containers into earth-covered magazines, 12-21
Conveyor assembly, 6-15
Corbetta, 12-6
Countermeasure dispenser assembly, 15-47
CXU-3A/B, 4-24, 13-21
CXU-4/B, 4-24, 13-20

D
DATMs, 3-2
Dearming or rearming area (immediately after engine shut down), 14-32
Decoying devices, 4-11
infrared decoys, 4-11
radio frequency expendables active and passive, 4-20
Defensive countermeasure system, 15-38, 15-56
Defense transportation tracking system, 17-2
Delay arming, 1-3
Demolition/disposal area, 12-20
Department of Defense Identification Code (DODIC) and Navy Ammunition Logistic Code (NALC),
12-4, 17-8
Designator control switch, 15-28
Detonator safe, 1-3
Index-12
Diesel engine forklift truck, 9-27
Digital display indicator, 15-10, 15-13, 15-21, 15-24
Digital multimeter 77/BN, 16-1
Disciplinary action and penalties, 12-32
Dispensers and ejectors, 10-14
AN/ALE-39 countermeasures dispensing system, 10-19
AN/ALE-47 countermeasures dispensing system, 10-22
SUU-25F/A dispenser, 10-14
Down conductors, 12-26
Drill ammunition, 12-2
Driver liability, 12-32
automatic revocation of a navy driver’s permit, 12-32
disciplinary action and penalties, 12-32
reporting traffic violations or accidents, 12-32
suspension or revocation of a navy driver’s permit, 12-32
Drum unit assembly, 6-12
Drum unit, 6-12
DSU-33(series) proximity sensor, 1-8
DSU-38(series) proximity sensor, 1-8

E
Earth-covered magazines, 12-6
ECM control panel, 15-31
Electric forklift truck, 9-27
Electric forklift truck (reaching and tiering), 4,000-pound capacity, 9-28
Electric forklift truck, 4,000-pound capacity, 9-27
Electric-powered walkie-type pallet truck, 9-29
Electrical fuzes, 1-6
FMU-139(series), 1-5, 13-6, 13-20
FMU-143(series), 1-5
Electrical fuzing system, 15-29
Empty signs, 12-18
Engine throttle grips, 15-12
Entrance cover, 6-13
Entrance unit, 6-14
Environmental control systems, 11-18
Exhaust vents, 11-18
Existing building, 12-21
Existing magazines, 12-21
Exit cover, 6-13
Exit unit, 6-14
Explosive anchorage, 11-30
Explosive driver, 12-29
ability to read and understand regulations, 12-31
age and experience of explosive drivers, 12-31
alcohol and drugs, 12-30
medical examinations, 12-29
state operator’s license, 12-29
U.S. Government motor vehicle operator’s identification card, optional form 346, 12-30
Explosive safety quantity-distance requirements, 12-7
Index-13
Explosive safety training program, 12-31, 17-68
ammunition and explosives driver 12-hour training course, 12-31
driver liability, 12-32
Extremely insensitive explosive article (Class/Division 1.6), 12-10

F
F/A-18 gun system installation, 6-16
F/A-18A/B/C/D aircraft, 15-1
aft cockpit armament system controls and indicators, 15-13
aircraft armament systems, 15-1
armament system basic controls, 15-7
jettison system, 15-14
pilot cockpit armament system controls and indicators, 15-9
suspension and accessory equipment, 15-17
F/A-18A/B/C/D aircraft aft cockpit armament system controls and indicators, 15-13
digital display indicator, 15-13
left- and right-hand controllers, 15-14
master mode select pane/rear advisory and threat warning panel, 15-13
F/A-18A/B/C/D aircraft armament system basic controls, 15-7
armament computer, 15-7
armament override switch, 15-8
landing gear control panel, 15-8
mission computers, 15-8
F/A-18A/B/C/D aircraft armament systems, 15-1
air-to-air missile control systems, 15-2
air-to-ground weapon control systems, 15-4
M61A1/A2 20 mm gun system, 15-7
stores management system, 15-7
F/A-18A/B/C/D aircraft jettison system, 15-14
auxiliary release, 15-16
emergency jettison, 15-14
selective jettison, 15-15
F/A-18A/B/C/D aircraft pilot cockpit armament system controls and indicators, 15-9
aircraft controller grip, 15-11
digital display indicator, 15-10
engine throttle grips, 15-12
ground power control panel, 15-9
head-up display, 15-11
master arm control panel, 15-11
mission computer/hydraulic isolation panel, 15-10
F/A-18A/B/C/D aircraft suspension and accessory equipment, 15-17
accessory racks, 15-17
aircraft armament configuration capabilities, 15-19
AN/ALE-39 countermeasures dispensing system, 15-18
AN/ALE-47 countermeasures dispensing system 15-18
bomb ejector rack, 15-17
fuselage centerline pylon, 15-17
launchers, 15-18
wing pylon, 15-17

Index-14
F/A-18E/F and EA-18G aircraft, 15-20
A/A missile control systems, 15-26
A/G weapons control system, 15-27
aircraft armament configuration capabilities, 15-31
armament system basic controls, 15-20
electrical fuzing system, 15-29
gun system controls (F/A-18E/F), 15-30
integrated defensive countermeasures (IDECM) dispensing systems, 15-31
jettison system, 15-29
pilot cockpit armament system controls and indicators, 15-21
rear cockpit basic controls, 15-24
F/A-18E/F and EA-18G aircraft A/A missile control systems, 15-26
A/A missile trigger switch, 15-27
A/A weapon select switches, 15-26
cage/uncage switch, 15-27
IR COOL switch, 15-27
radar control switch, 15-27
WPN volume control, 15-27
F/A-18E/F and EA-18G aircraft A/G weapons control system, 15-27
A/G weapon release switch, 15-28
cage/uncage switch, 15-28
designator control switch, 15-28
HARM sequence/FLIR FOV/RAID switch, 15-28
HARM switch, 15-28
multifunction switch, 15-28
throttle designator control switch, 15-28
up front control display, 15-29
F/A-18E/F and EA-18G aircraft armament configuration capabilities, 15-31
F/A-18E/F and EA-18G aircraft armament system basic controls, 15-20
armament computer, 15-20
armament safety override switch, 15-21
armament system circuit breakers, 15-21
landing gear control panel, 15-21
mission computers, 15-21
signal data converter control, 15-21
F/A-18E/F and EA-18G aircraft electrical fuzing system, 15-29
F/A-18E/F and EA-18G aircraft integrated defensive countermeasures (IDECM) dispensing systems,
15-31
AN/ALE-47 dispensing system, 15-31
AN/ALE-50A dispensing system, 15-31
ECM control panel, 15-31
F/A-18E/F and EA-18G aircraft jettison system, 15-29
auxiliary jettison, 15-30
emergency jettison, 15-29
selective jettison, 15-29
F/A-18E/F and EA-18G aircraft pilot cockpit armament system controls and indicators, 15-21
digital display indicators, 15-21
head-up display, 15-24
master arm control panel, 15-24
up front control display, 15-22
Index-15
F/A-18E/F and EA-18G aircraft rear cockpit basic controls, 15-24
digital display indicators, 15-24
left- and right-hand controllers, 15-26
rear advisory and threat warning indicator panel, 15-24
Fairings, 2-18
Family groups of explosives and explosive devices, 11-14
Faraday type system and Faraday shield, 12-25
Field storage units, 12-23
organization of field storage units, 12-23
Fin assemblies, 1-16, 13-9
BSU-33(series), 1-17, 13-9
BSU-85/B air inflatable retarder, 1-17, 13-12
BSU-86/B bomb fin, 1-18, 13-12
conical fin, 1-17
in-flight selection, 1-18
principles of operation, 1-18
retarded mode, 1-18
unretarded mode, 1-18
Fin retainer assemblies, 3-35
Fire divisions, 12-9
extremely insensitive explosive article (Class/Division 1.6), 12-10
mass fire hazard materials (Class/Division 1.3), 12-9
mass-detonating hazard materials (Class/Division 1.1), 12-9
moderate fire hazard, no blast materials (Class/Division 1.4), 12-9
non-mass-detonating hazard, fragment-producing materials (Class/Division 1.2), 12-9
storage compatibility groups, 12-10
very insensitive substance (Class/Division 1.5), 12-10
Firefighting hazard identification, 12-16
chemical agent and ammunition hazard symbols, 12-17
empty signs, 12-18
fire hazard symbols, 12-16
posting of symbols, 12-18
Firing components, 5-10
acoustic, 5-10
magnetic, 5-10
pressure, 5-10
FMU-139(series) electronic bomb fuze, 1-6, 13-5, 13-19
FMU-140A/B dispenser proximity fuze, 1-9, 13-60
FMU-143(series) electric tail fuze, 1-6
FMU-167/B hard target void sensing fuze, 1-9
Forklift trucks, 9-26
diesel engine forklift truck, 9-27
electric forklift truck, 9-27
electric forklift truck (reaching and tiering), 4,000-pound capacity, 9-28
electric forklift truck, 4,000-pound capacity, 9-27
Formal training, 11-6
Forward fairing assembly, 3-35
Frequency of inspections, 12-28
Full-scale practice bombs, 1-27, 13-19
assembly, 13-19
Index-16
 BDU-45, 1-28
BDU-59(series) laser guided training round (LGTR), 1-29
CXU-4/B spotting charge, 13-20
electric/electronic tail fuzes, 13-20
Mk 4 and CXU-3 cartridge installation, 13-22
Mk 89 Mod 0 spotting charge adapter, 13-20
Mk 89 spotting charge installation, 13-22
OGIVE/MXU-735 nose plug, 13-20
Fuselage centerline pylon, 15-17
Fuze charging circuit, 1-14
Fuze terminology, 1-2
Fuze wells, 1-13
Fuzes, 1-2 through 1-10, 2-10
acceleration-deceleration fuzes, 2-11
basic fuze theory, 1-2
electrical fuzes, 1-3, 1-6
impact firing fuzes, 2-11
mechanical time fuzes, 2-11
mechanical fuzes, 1-2, 1-4
proximity fuzes, 2-12
rocket fuzes, 2-10
special safety features, 1-3
FZU-48/B initiator, 1-7
FZU-60/B initiator, 1-10
FZU-61/62(series) firing lanyard, 1-8
FZU-61/B firing lanyard, 1-8, 13-53

G
Gallery, 12-6
GAU-16 .50 caliber aircraft machine gun, 6-20
GAU-17/A 7.62 mm aircraft machine gun, 6-22
GAU-21 .50 caliber aircraft gun system, 6-18
GBU-10, GBU-12, and GBU-16, 1-19, 13-23
GBU-24(series), 1-20
GBU-51/B and GBU-52/B, 1-19, 13-23
General inspection requirements, 12-27
General-purpose (GP) bombs and fin assemblies, 1-10, 14-12
arming wire assemblies, 1-15
fin assemblies, 1-16
fuze charging circuit, 1-14
fuze wells, 1-13
nose plugs, 1-14
shipping configuration, 1-13
suspension lugs, 1-14
General-purpose (GP) bombs loading, 14-12
bomb hoist loading, 14-13
manual hoisting bar loading, 14-12
General-purpose (GP) warhead, 2-8
GFK-21A/E32K-7 (LALS III) loading, hand crank/power drive tool, 14-28
GQM-163A supersonic sea skimming target, 8-8
Index-17
Ground power control panel, 15-9
Grounding and application of electrical power, 14-11
Guidance and control section, 3-6
active, 3-7
passive, 3-7
semiactive, 3-7
Guided bomb units, 1-19, 13-23
computer control group installation, 13-30
forward adapter assembly installation, 13-29
GBU-10, GBU-12, and GBU-16, 1-19, 13-23
GBU-12F/B and GBU-52/B, 13-39
GBU-24(series), 1-20
GBU-51/B and GBU-52/B, 1-19, 13-23
Joint Direct Attack Munition (JDAM)/Laser JDAM(series), 1-20, 13-49
MXU-650 installation, 13-45
MXU-667, MXU-650 and MXU-651 airfoil group preparation and inspection, 13-23
WGU-53/B installation, 13-46
wing assembly installation, 13-27
Guided bomb units 10/12/16/51(series) (except GBU-12F/B) weapons assembly, 13-23
Guided missile handling, 3-47
Afloat, 3-48
Ashore, 3-48
Naval Munitions Command/Naval Weapons Station/Naval Airborne Weapons Maintenance Unit,
3-47
Guided missile launchers, 3-31
ADU-299(series) missile launcher adapter, 3-46
LAU-7(series), 3-32
LAU-115(series), 3-36
LAU-116(series), 3-38, 14-18
LAU-117(V) 2/A, 3-39
LAU-118(V) 1/A, 3-40
LAU-127(series), 3-41, 14-20
M272 Hellfire(series) missile launcher, 3-43
M279 Hellfire(series) missile launcher, 3-43
M299 Hellfire(series) missile launcher, 3-43, 15-55
Gun system controls (F/A-18E/F), 15-30

H
Hand-manipulated signaling devices, 4-1
Mk 79 Mod 0, 4-3
Mk 108 Mod 1, 4-4
Mk 124 Mod 0, 4-2
pyrotechnic pistols, 4-1
HARM sequence/FLIR FOV/RAID switch, 15-28
HARM switch, 15-28
Hazards of electromagnetic radiation to ordnance (HERO), 11-31
Head-up display, 15-11, 15-24
HERO emission control (EMCON) bill, 11-33
HERO ordnance classifications, 11-31
HERO safe ordnance, 11-32
Index-18
 HERO susceptible ordnance, 11-32
HERO unreliable ordnance, 11-32
HERO unsafe ordnance, 11-32
High-explosive fragmentation (HE-FRAG) warhead, 2-6
HLU-196D/E bomb hoisting unit, 9-12
HLU-288/E bomb hoist, 9-12
Hoisting bars, 9-7
HLU-256/E manual hoisting bar, 9-7
Hoists, 11-24
Housing assembly, 3-34
Hung and unexpended weapons, 14-10

I
Identification, 7-5
color coding, 7-5
lettering, 7-5
Identification of facilities, 12-14
firefighting hazard identification, 12-16
magazine designator, 12-14
Igniter, 2-4
In-flight selection, 1-18
Inert ammunition, 12-2
Informal training, 11-6
Infrared decoys, 4-11
MJU-27A/B decoy device, 4-12
MJU-32/B decoy device, 4-12
MJU-32A/B decoy device, 4-12
MJU-38/B decoy device, 4-12
MJU-38A/B decoy device, 4-12
MJU-49/B decoy device, 4-12
MJU-50/B IR countermeasure flare, 4-17
MJU-55/B decoy flare-device, 4-13
MJU-55A/B decoy flare-device, 4-13
MJU-57/B decoy flare, 4-14
MJU-57A/B decoy flare, 4-14
MJU-61/B decoy flare, 4-18
MJU-61A/B decoy flare, 4-18
MJU-64/B infrared countermeasure flare, 4-18
MJU-66/B infrared countermeasure decoy, 4-18
MJU-68/B infrared countermeasure flare, 4-19
MJU-69/B infrared countermeasure flare, 4-19
SM-875A/ALE flare simulator, 4-16
SM-875B/ALE flare simulator, 4-16
Inhibitor, 2-4
Inspecting rocket components, 13-69
Advanced Precision Kill Weapons System II, 13-71
fuze, 13-71
rocket motor, 13-71
warhead, 13-70

Index-19
Installed handling equipment, 11-24
hoists, 11-24
lower stage weapons elevators, 11-25
weapons elevators, 11-25
Integral system, 12-26
Integrated defensive countermeasures (IDECM) dispensing systems, 15-31
Intervalometer, 2-18
IR cool switch, 15-27

J
Jettison system, 15-14, 15-29
Joint direct attack ammunition (JDAM)/Laser JDAM(series), 1-20, 13-49
GBU-31(V)2(series) (Mk-84/BLU-117) weapons assembly, 13-49
Joint standoff weapon (JSOW), 3-18

K
Keyport, 12-6

L
LALS III loading preparation, 14-27
Landing gear control panel, 15-8, 15-21
Laser guided training round (LGTR), 1-29
LAU-7(series), 3-32
fin retainer assemblies, 3-35
forward fairing assembly, 3-35
housing assembly, 3-34
mechanism assembly, 3-35
nitrogen receiver assembly, 3-35
power supply, 3-35
pure air generating system, 3-36
snubber fitting, aft fairing assembly, and aft latch assembly, 3-35
umbilical hook support assembly, 3-35
LAU-10(series), 2-20
LAU-61(series) and LAU-68(series) launchers, 2-19
LAU-115(series), 3-36, 14-18
LAU-116(series), 3-38, 14-18, 14-23
LAU-117(V) 2/A, 3-39
LAU-118(V) 1/A, 3-40
LAU-127(series), 3-41, 14-20, 14-26
Launchers, 15-18
Left- and right-hand controllers, 15-14, 15-26
Lettering, 12-4
Lightning protection systems, 12-25
primary grounding systems, 12-25
secondary grounding systems, 12-26
Linkless ammunition loading system A/E32K-7, 7-21
Linkless ammunition loading system A/E32K-7 components, 7-22
ammunition loader, 7-22
ammunition replenisher, 7-23
GFU-24A/E32K-7 ammunition transfer system, 7-24
Index-20
 interchange loading assembly, 7-25
removable frame assembly, 7-25
table assembly, 7-25
Linkless ammunition loading system A/E32K-7 operation, 7-25
aircraft servicing, 7-26
replenishment mode, 7-25
stowage mode, 7-27
transport mode, 7-26
Loaders, 9-33
A/S32K-1E weapon loader, 9-33
Lockers, 11-17
Logistics support equipment (LSE), 9-3
Lower stage weapons elevators, 11-25
LUU-2B/B aircraft parachute flare, 4-5
components, 4-5
operation, 4-6
LUU-19(series) aircraft parachute flare, 4-7

M
M50 configuration ammunition, 7-1
M50 cartridge components and general description, 7-1
M61A1 and M61A2 20 mm automatic gun system, 15-7
M61A1 and M61A2 automatic gun, 6-1
ammunition handling and gun drive systems, 6-11
gun components, 6-4
gun drive and drum drive system, 6-16
gun gas purge system, 6-16
M61A1/A2 gun principles of operation, 6-7
M61A1/A2 gun systems installations, 6-16
M61A1/A2 gun system maintenance, 6-17
M61A1 and M61A2 automatic gun ammunition handling and gun drive systems, 6-11
adapter assembly, 6-15
chute assemblies, 6-15
conveyor assembly, 6-15
drum unit, 6-12
drum unit assembly, 6-12
entrance cover, 6-13
entrance unit, 6-14
exit cover, 6-13
exit unit, 6-14
scoop disk, 6-14
transfer unit, 6-14
transfer unit and adapter assembly, 6-14
M61A1 and M61A2 automatic gun components, 6-4
barrels, 6-4
breech-bolt assembly, 6-5
clearing sector assembly, 6-5
clearing solenoid assembly, 6-5
firing contact assembly, 6-5
guide bar, 6-5
Index-21
 lubricator assembly, 6-7
mid-barrel clamp assembly, 6-4
muzzle clamp assembly, 6-4
rear housing assembly, 6-6
recoil adapters, 6-5
rotor assembly, 6-5
M61A1 and M61A2 automatic gun principles of operation, 6-7
clearing cycle, 6-10
firing cycle, 6-7
M61A1 and M61A2 automatic gun system maintenance, 6-17
organizational maintenance, 6-17
intermediate maintenance, 6-18
M240D 7.62 aircraft machine gun, 6-24
M272 Hellfire(series) missile launcher, 3-43
M279 Hellfire(series) missile launcher, 3-43
M299 Hellfire(series) missile launcher, 3-43, 15-55
Magazine and magazine area inspections, 12-27
Magazine and magazine area security, 12-27
frequency of inspections, 12-28
general inspection requirements, 12-27
report of inspections, 12-28
temperature control considerations, 12-28
Magazine designator, 12-14
Magazine group number, 12-14
Magazine inspection, 11-21
Magazine internal arrangement, 11-20
Magazine maintenance, storage, and handling requirements, 12-24
Magazine security, 11-23
Magazine temperature log, 11-22
Magazine type and capacity letter(s), 12-14
Magazines, 12-5
explosive safety quantity-distance requirements, 12-7
types of magazines, 12-5
Magazines currently in Navy use, 12-6
corbetta, 12-6
earth-covered magazines, 12-6
gallery, 12-6
keyport, 12-6
open storage, 12-7
portable magazines, 12-7
ready service lockers, 12-6
ready service magazines, 12-6
reinforced, concrete, 12-7
temporary arch-type magazines, 12-6
triple-arch, 12-7
Maintenance due date (MDD), 17-9
Maintenance of training records, 11-8
Manual ammunition stock recording procedures, 17-54
ammunition lot/location cards preparation, 17-60
ammunition master stock record card preparation, 17-55
Index-22
 ammunition serial/location card preparation, 17-58
ammunition stock recording, 17-54
Manual hoisting bar loading, 14-12
Manual pallet truck, 9-29
Mark and modification designation, 12-4
Marking, 12-4
Mass fire hazard materials (Class/Division 1.3), 12-9
Mass-detonating hazard materials (Class/Division 1.1), 12-9
Mast system, 12-25
Master arm control panel, 15-11, 15-24
Master mode select pane/rear advisory and threat warning panel, 15-13
Mechanical fuzes, 1-4
functional description, 1-5
Mark 339 Mod 1, 1-4
physical description, 1-5
Mechanism assembly, 3-35
Medical examinations, 12-29
Medical standards and physical qualifications, 11-11
MH-60 helicopter, 15-50
aircraft armament system, 15-50
armament subsystems, 15-53
cockpit basic controls, 15-52
defensive countermeasure system, 15-56
jettison system, 15-55
sensor operator station basic controls, 15-52
MH-60 helicopter aircraft armament system, 15-50
armament system basic control, 15-51
data handling system, 15-51
disabling switch for armament safety circuit, 15-51
primary mission/flight computer, 15-51
processing interface units, 15-51
stores management system, 15-52
weight-on-wheels switch, 15-51
MH-60 helicopter armament subsystems, 15-53
AGM-114 Hellfire missile, 15-54
sonobuoy launch system, 15-53
torpedo release system, 15-53
MH-60 helicopter cockpit basic controls, 15-52
armament control indicator, 15-52
control indicators, 15-52
mission displays, 15-52
MH-60 helicopter defensive countermeasure system, 15-56
MH-60 helicopter jettison system, 15-55
MH-60 helicopter sensor operator station basic controls, 15-52
control indicator, 15-53
mission display, 15-52
MHU-126A/M munitions trailer, 9-32
MHU-191A/M munitions transporter, 9-16
MHU-202/M small munitions trailer, 9-33

Index-23
Mine components, 5-12
acoustic, 5-13
arming components, 5-13
auxiliary explosive devices, 5-12
booster, 5-12
explosive components, 5-12
firing components, 5-13
initiating system, 5-12
magnetic, 5-13
main charge, 5-12
mine case, 5-12
parachute packs, 5-14
pressure, 5-13
Mines, 1-22
Mk 62, 1-22
Mk 63, 1-22
Mk 65 Mods, 1-22
Missile classification, 3-2
CATMs, 3-2
DATMs, 3-2
NATMs, 3-2
PGWs, 3-2
range, 3-2
speed, 3-2
types of guided missiles, 3-2
Missile components, 3-5
armament section, 3-8
guidance and control section, 3-6
propulsion section, 3-9
Missile designation, 3-3
Missile identification, 3-5
Missile magazines, 11-16
Mission computer/hydraulic isolation panel, 15-10
Mission computers, 15-8, 15-21
MJU-27A/B decoy device, 4-12
MJU-32/B decoy device, 4-12
MJU-32A/B decoy device, 4-12
MJU-38/B decoy device, 4-12
MJU-38A/B decoy device, 4-12
MJU-49/B decoy device, 4-12
MJU-50/B IR countermeasure flare, 4-17
MJU-55/B decoy flare-device, 4-13
MJU-55A/B decoy flare-device, 4-13
MJU-57/B decoy flare, 4-14
MJU-57A/B decoy flare, 4-14
MJU-61/B decoy flare, 4-18
MJU-61A/B decoy flare, 4-18
MJU-64/B infrared countermeasure flare, 4-18
MJU-66/B infrared countermeasure decoy, 4-18
MJU-68/B infrared countermeasure flare, 4-19
Index-24
MJU-69/B infrared countermeasure flare, 4-19
Mk 3 Mod 0 pallet, 9-4
Mk 4 signal cartridge, 4-23, 13-22
Mk 7 Mods bomb dispenser, 1-24
Mk 12 Mod 1 pallet, 9-4
Mk 18 Mod 1 handling beam, 9- 8
Mk 18 Mod 2 handling beam, 9-9
Mk 25 Mods 3 and 4 marine location marker, 4-7
functional description 4-8
launching methods, 4-9
Mk 34 adapter kit, 4-9
physical description, 4-8
Mk 37 Mod 1 lift beam, 9-9
Mk 43 Mod 1 weapons carrier, 9-5
Mk 45 Mod 2 handlift truck, 9-30
Mk 46 torpedo configuration, 5-1
Mk 46 exercise configuration, 5-2
Mk 46 REXTORP configuration, 5-3
Mk 46 warshot configuration, 5-1
Mk 49 Mod 1 weapons carrier, 9-6
Mk 51 Mod 1 weapons carrier, 9-6
Mk 54 torpedo configuration, 5-4
Mk 54 exercise configuration, 5-4
Mk 54 REXTORP configuration, 5-5
Mk 54 warshot configuration, 5-4
Mk 58 Mod 1 marine location marker, 4-10
launching methods, 4-11
physical description, 4-10
Mk 62 mine, 1-22, 5-14
Mk 63 mine, 1-22, 5-15
Mk 65 Mods mine, 1-22, 5-16
Mk 76 Mod 5 practice bomb, 1-27
Mk 79 Mod 0, 4-3
Mk 85 Mod 1, Mk 86 Mod 1, Mk 87 Mod 1, and Mk 100 Mod 2 pallet slings, 9-9
Mk 89 Mod 0 Spotting charge adapter, 1-28, 13-20
Mk 105 Mod 0 hoisting sling, 9-11
Mk 108 Mod 1, 4-4
Mk 109 Mod 1 container lifting sling, 9-11
Mk 118 Mod 0 and Mod 1 Antitank bomblets, 1-25
Mk 122 Mod 0 arming safety switch, 1-7, 13-7
Mk 124 Mod 0, 4-2
Mk 339 Mod 1 mechanical time fuze, 1-4
functional description, 1-5
physical description, 1-5
Mode selector switch, 2-18
Moderate fire hazard, no blast materials (Class/Division 1.4), 12-9
Modular storage, 12-24
Motor tube, 2-4
Motors, 2-3
igniter, 2-4
Index-25
 inhibitors, 2-4
motor tube, 2-4
nozzle and fin assemblies, 2-5
propellants, 2-4
stabilizing rod, 2-4
Moving land targets, 8-11
Multifunction switch, 15-28
MXU-735 nose plug, 13-20

N
National item identification number (NIIN), 17-10
National stock number (NSN), 17-10
NATMs, 3-2
NATOPS manuals, 14-2
NAVSUP ammunition sentencing publications, 17-63
terms and definitions, 17-63
Navy ammunition logistics code (NALC), 17-10
Nitrogen receiver assembly, 3-35
Non-combat expenditure allocation (NCEA), 17-10
Non-mass-detonating hazard, fragment-producing materials (Class/Division 1.2), 12-9
Nonservice ammunition, 12-2
Nonservice missiles, 3-2
Nose plugs, 1-14
Notice of ammunition reclassification (NAR) program, 17-10
Nozzle and fin assembly, 2-5

O
OGIVE/MXU-735 nose plug, 13-20
OIS-R, 17-2
OIS-W, 17-1
On-the-job training, 11-6
Open storage, 12-7
Operational aircraft mines, 5-14
Mk 62, and 63 mines, 5-14
Mk 65 mine, 5-16
Ordnance certification, 11-4
certification and recertification, 11-4
decertification and revocation of certification, 11-4
initial certifications, 11-4
procedures, guidance, and requirements, 11-4
QUAL/CERT transfers, 11-4
Ordnance handling equipment (OHE), 9-3
Ordnance information system (OIS), 17-1
defense transportation tracking system, 17-2
fleet ordnance support model (FOS-M), 17-2
ordnance assessment portfolio, 17-2
ordnance information system-Marine Corps, 17-2
ordnance information system-retail/retail ordnance logistics management system, 17-2
ordnance information system-retail/retail ordnance logistics management system overview, 17-5
ordnance information system-wholesale, 17-1
Index-26
 ordnance information system-wholesale overview, 17-3
Tomahawk asset inventory management system, 17-2
Ordnance information system-retail/retail ordnance logistics management system overview, 17-5
OIS-R/ROLMS capabilities, 17-5
OIS-R/ROLMS system interfaces, 17-6
system customers and users, 17-6
Ordnance information system-wholesale overview, 17-3
information available in OIS-W, 17-3
OIS-W capabilities, 17-3
OIS-W system customers and users, 17-5
OIS-W system interfaces, 17-4
OTTO fuel II, 5-9

P
P-3 aircraft, 15-35
armament subsystems, 15-36
armament systems basic controls, 15-35
defensive countermeasures, 15-38
jettison system, 15-38
suspension and accessory equipment, 15-40
weapon system, 15-39
P-3 aircraft armament subsystems, 15-36
bomb baby system, 15-39
defensive countermeasures, 15-38
Harpoon system basic controls, 15-37
jettison system, 15-38
Maverick missile control system basic controls, 15-37
search store system, 15-39
torpedo system basic controls, 15-37
unpressurized system, 15-40
weapons system, 15-39
P-3 aircraft armament systems basic controls, 15-35
armament control box, 15-36
pilot armament control panel, 15-35
weapon release switches, 15-36
P-3 aircraft defensive countermeasures, 15-38
P-3 aircraft jettison system, 15-38
P-3 aircraft suspension and accessory equipment, 15-40
1,000/2,000-pound class store pylon assembly, 15-41
bomb bay pylon assemblies, 15-40
bomb bay stations, 15-42
primary pylon assembly, 15-40
wing stations, 15-43
P-8 aircraft, 15-44
aircraft armament system, 15-44
armament subsystems, 15-45
countermeasure dispenser assembly, 15-47
jettison system, 15-47
suspension and accessory equipment, 15-48

Index-27
P-8 aircraft armament subsystems, 15-45
BRU-75/A bomb rack power switch, 15-46
single sonobuoy launcher, 15-47
sonobuoy free fall chute, 15-47
sonobuoy launch system, 15-46
sonobuoy rotary launcher, 15-46
sonobuoy storage racks, 15-47
torpedo release system, 15-45
P-8 aircraft armament system, 15-44
mission computing and display system and crew workstations, 15-45
proximity switch electronics unit, 15-45
secondary power distribution system, 15-44
secondary power distribution system control display unit, 15-44
stores management system, 15-45
weapons control panel, 15-45
P-8 aircraft countermeasure dispenser assembly, 15-47
AN/ALE-47 countermeasure dispensing system, 15-47
P-8 aircraft jettison system, 15-47
jettison all switch, 15-48
jettison execute switch, 15-48
jettison external switch, 15-48
jettison select switch, 15-47
P-8 aircraft suspension and accessory equipment, 15-48
aircraft armament configuration capabilities, 15-49
BRU-75A, 15-48
BRU-76/A, 15-48
SUU-92/A wing pylon, 15-48
SUU-93/A forward fuselage pylon, 15-48
Painting, 12-3
Pallet trucks, 9-29
electric-powered walkie-type pallet truck, 9-29
manual pallet truck, 9-29
Pallets, 9-3
ammunition pallet crate, 9-5
Mk 3 Mod 0 pallet, 9-4
Mk 12 Mod 1 pallet, 9-4
standard four-way wood pallet, 9-3
Parachute packs, 5-11
Paveway III, 1-20
Personnel requirements, 12-24
PGWs, 3-2
Pier side, 11-30
Pilot cockpit armament system controls and indicators, 15-9, 15-21
Point of embarkation/debarkation, 12-20
Port areas, 12-20
Portable magazines, 12-7
Posting of symbols, 12-18
Postloading quality assurance inspection, 14-31
Power supply, 3-35
Practice ammunition, 12-2
Index-28
Practice bomb signal cartridges, 4-23
CXU-3A/B, 4-24
CXU-4/B, 4-24, 13-18
Mk 4 signal cartridge, 4-23
Practice bombs, 1-26, 13-16, 13-18, 14-15
BDU-59(series) laser guided training round, 1-29
BRU-41 preparation/weapons loading, 14-15
full scale practice bombs, 1-27, 13-19
subcaliber practice bombs, 1-27, 13-16
Primary grounding systems, 12-25
air termination systems, 12-25
catenary (overhead wire) system, 12-26
down conductors, 12-26
Faraday type system and Faraday shield, 12-25
integral system, 12-26
mast system, 12-25
Principles of fin assembly operation, 1-18
in-flight selection, 1-18
retarded mode, 1-18
unretarded mode, 1-18
Principles of rocket propulsion, 2-2
Projectile gun unit ammunition configuration, 7-6
Projectile gun unit cartridge component and general description, 7-6
cartridge case, 7-7
classification, 7-6
M52A3B1 electric primer, 7-7
projectiles, 7-8
PGU-27/B and PGU-27A/B target practice, 7-8
PGU-28/B and PGU-28A/B semi-armor-piercing high-explosive incendiary, 7-8
PGU-30/B and PGU-30A/B target practice-tracer, 7-8
tracer, 7-8
PGU-39/B dummy round, 7-10
PGU identification, 7-10
Propellant, 2-4, 7-2, 7-7
Propulsion section, 3-9
atmospheric jet propulsion system, 3-9
thermal jet propulsion system, 3-9
Proximity sensor, 1-8
DSU-33(series) proximity sensor, 1-8
DSU-38(series) proximity sensor, 1-8
FMU-140A/B dispenser proximity fuze, 1-9
Pure air generating system, 3-36
Pyrotechnic pistols, 4-1
Pyrotechnics, 4-1
aircraft-launched smoke and flame marking devices, 4-7
area and target illuminating devices, 4-5
decoying devices, 4-11
handling and safety precautions, 4-25
hand-manipulated signaling devices, 4-1
practice bomb signal cartridges, 4-23
Index-29
 Q
QUAL/CERT board membership and responsibilities, 11-9
board chair, 11-9
board chair responsibilities, 11-9
board member responsibilities, 11-10
board members, 11-9
Qualification and certification guidelines, 11-9
certification procedures, 11-11
family groups of explosives and explosive devices, 11-14
medical standards and physical qualifications, 11-11
revocation and decertification, 11-11
work task codes, 11-12
Qualification procedures, 11-10
Qualification standards and certification levels, 11-13
in training, 11-13
team leader, 11-14
team member, 11-13
quality assurance, 11-14
safety observer, 11-14
Quantity-distance (Q-D) requirements, 12-7

R
Radar control switch, 15-27
Radio frequency expendables active and passive, 4-20
RR-129/AL, 4-22
RR-129A/AL, 4-22
RR-144/AL, 4-22
RR-144A/AL, 4-22
RT-1489/ALE, 4-21
RT-1646/ALE(series), 4-21
Ready-service lockers, 12-6
Ready-service magazines, 11-16, 16-6
Ready-service magazines, lockers, and staging areas, 11-16
Reaming or arming area (after engine turn up), 14-32
Rear advisory and threat warning indicator panel, 15-24
Rear cockpit basic controls, 15-24
Rearming area (before engine turn up), 14-32
Record keeping and reporting, 8-11
target discrepancy book, 8-12
target logbooks, 8-12
target performance reports, 8-12
Reinforced, concrete, 12-7
Report of inspections, 12-28
Reporting traffic violations or accidents, 12-32
Requisition file maintenance, 17-31
requisition processing, 17-31
Requisitioning by fleet units, 17-30
stock levels, 17-30
requisitioning procedures for aircraft squadrons, 17-30

Index-30
Retarded mode, 1-18
Return and control of reusable ammunition material details and non-reusable expendable cartridges,
17-35
Return of reusable ammunition details procedures, 17-35
Revocation and decertification, 11-11
RF/Thermal barriers, 2-17
Rocket and rocket fuze terminology, 2-2
Rocket components, 2-3
Advanced Precision Kill Weapons System II (APKWS II), 2-14, 13-71
motor, 2-3, 13-71
nozzle and fin assembly, 2-5
warhead, 2-5, 13-70
fuzes, 2-10, 13-71
rocket assembly procedures, 2.75-inch, 13-73
rocket assembly procedures, 5.0-inch, 13-69
Rocket safety precautions, 2-22
ROLMS, 17-5
RR-129/AL, 4-22
RR-129A/AL, 4-22
RR-144/AL, 4-22
RR-144A/AL, 4-22
RT-1489/ALE, 4-21
RT-1646/ALE(series), 4-21

S
Safety switch assembly, 2-18
Scoop disk, 6-14
Secondary grounding systems, 12-26
Segregation areas, 12-19
Sensor operator station basic controls, 15-52
Serial/lot item tracking (SLIT), 17-11
Service ammunition, 12-2
Service guided missiles, 3-9
AGM-65(series), 3-23
AGM-84(series), 3-25, 13-80
AGM-88(series), 3-27
AGM-114(series), 3-28
AGM-154(series), 3-18
AIM-7(series), 3-9
AIM-9M(series), 3-11
AIM-9X(series), 3-13
AIM-120(series), 3-17, 14-17
Service rocket assemblies, 2-14
2.75-inch folding fin aircraft rocket, 2-15, 13-70
5.0-inch rocket, 2-15, 13-66
Shear safe, 1-2
Ship offload planning procedures, 17-32
Shipping and storing containers, 1-26, 12-21
CNU-238/E multipurpose shipping and storage container, 1-26
CNU-319/E shipping and storage container, 1-26
Index-31
Shipping configuration, 1-13, 2-16
Signal data converter control, 15-21
Signs, 12-24
Skids, weapons transporters, and associated adapters, 9-13
AERO 12C bomb skid, 9-13
MHU-191A/M munitions transporter, 9-16
Slings, 9-9
Mk 85 Mod 1, Mk 86 Mod 1, Mk 87 Mod 1, and Mk 100 Mod 2 pallet slings, 9-9
Mk 105 Mod 0 hoisting sling, 9-11
Mk 109 Mod 1 container lifting sling, 9-11
SM-875A/ALE flare simulator, 4-16
SM-875B/ALE flare simulator, 4-16
Small arms ammunition, 7-12
.50 caliber ammunition, 7-15
7.62 mm ammunition, 7-19
cartridge classification, 7-14
cartridges, 7-13
Small arms ammunition cartridge, 7-13
bullet, 7-14
case, 7-13
primer, 7-14
propellant, 7-13
Small arms ammunition cartridge classification, 7-14
armor-piercing, 7-14
armor-piercing incendiary cartridge, 7-14
armor-piercing incendiary-tracer (API-T) cartridge, 7-14
ball cartridges, 7-14
blank cartridge, 7-15
dummy cartridge, 7-15
grenade cartridge, 7-15
incendiary cartridge, 7-15
match cartridge, 7-15
spotter tracer cartridge, 7-15
tracer cartridges, 7-14
Small arms ammunition classification for .50 caliber, 7-15
closed loop link, 7-17
linked configuration, 7-17
M1 incendiary, 7-17
M1 tracer, 7-17
M2 armor-piercing, 7-16
M2 ball, 7-16
M2 link, 7-18
M8 armor-piercing incendiary, 7-16
M9 link, 7-18
M10 tracer, 7-17
M15A2 link, 7-18
M17 tracer, 7-17
M20 armor-piercing incendiary-tracer, 7-16
M33 ball, 7-16
open loop link, 7-17
Index-32
Small arms ammunition classification for 7.62 mm, 7-19
belts and clips, 7-21
M60 NATO test high-pressure, 7-20
M62 NATO tracer, 7-19
M63 NATO dummy, 7-20
M64 NATO grenade rifle, 7-20
M80 NATO ball, 7-19
M80E1 flash suppressed, 7-21
M82 NATO blank, 7-20
M118 NATO match/special ball, 7-20
M118 NATO special ball long range, 7-20
M276 dim tracer, 7-20
M993 armor-piercing, 7-21
NATO 5 round clips, 7-20
Snubber fitting, aft fairing assembly, and aft latch assembly, 3-35
Sprinkler and alarm systems, 11-18
alarm systems, 11-19
Stabilizing rod, 2-4
Standard four-way wood pallet, 9-3
Standard stock point ammunition inspection requirements for receipt, storage, and issue of naval
ammunition, 17-62
Standard stock point ammunition inspection requirements for segregation sentencing of naval
ammunition, 17-63
Standoff Land Attack Missile, 13-80
CNU-595/E preparation and inspection, 13-80
CNU-595/E weapon removal, 13-83
unpacking fins from shipping container, 13-86
Stands, 9-6
A/F32K-1A bomb assembly stand, 9-7
State operator’s license, 12-29
Storage compatibility groups, 12-10
group A, 12-10
group B, 12-10
group C, 12-10
group D, 12-11
group E, 12-11
group F, 12-11
group G, 12-11
group H, 12-11
group J, 12-11
group K, 12-12
group L, 12-12
group N, 12-12
group S, 12-12
Stores management system, 15-7
Subcaliber practice bombs, 1-27, 13-16
BDU-48 practice bomb, 1-27, 13-19
Mk 76 Mod 5 practice bomb, 1-27, 13-17
Supply and exhaust ventilation, 11-18
Suspension and accessory equipment, 15-17, 15-40, 15-48
Index-33
Suspension, arming, and releasing equipment, 10-1
bomb ejector racks, 10-4
bomb racks, 10-1
dispensers and ejectors, 10-14
Suspension lugs, 1-14
Suspension or revocation of a Navy driver’s permit, 12-32
SUU-25F/A dispenser, 10-14, 13-74
adapter kits, 13-74
arming mechanism, 10-17
breech, breech cap, and breech lead, 10-16
dispenser preparation, 13-76
downloading breech and downloading breech cap, 10-16
flare loading procedures, 13-78
forward and aft retaining lock, 10-17
functional description, 10-17
loading, 13-78
maintenance requirements, 10-19
manifold, 10-16
stepper switch, 10-16
SUU-58/B subsonic free-fall dispenser, 1-25
SUU-76C/B (PDU-5/B) dispenser bomb, 1-25
SUU-92/A wing pylon, 15-48
SUU-93/A forward fuselage pylon, 15-48

T
Targets and associated equipment, 8-1
aerial targets, 8-5
air-launched decoy, 8-9
moving land targets, 8-11
record keeping and reporting, 8-11
safety precautions, 8-13
targets, systems, and equipment, 8-1
Targets and associated equipment record keeping and reporting, 8-11
Target discrepancy book, 8-12
Target logbooks, 8-12
Target performance reporting system, 8-12
Targets, systems, and equipment, 8-1
tow targets, 8-2
towline and towline wire rope leader, 8-4
Temperature control considerations, 12-28
Temporary arch-type magazines, 12-6
Temporary storage offload, 17-36
Test equipment, 16-1
77BN digital multimeter, 16-1
A/E-24T-230 test set, 16-12
A/E-37T-35 common rack and launcher test set, 3-21, 16-17
AN/ALM-286 countermeasure chaff dispensing set, 16-2
AN/ALM-290 countermeasure dispenser test set, 16-2
AN/ALM-291 countermeasure dispenser test set, 16-3
AN/AWM-42A fuze function control test set, 16-4
Index-34
 AN/AWM-102 firing circuit test set, 16-5
AN/AWM-103A stores management subassembly test set, 16-6
AN/GYQ-79A common munitions built-in test (BIT)/reprogramming equipment (CAMBRE Plus)
test program set, 16-13
TTU-304/E, 16-12
Throttle designator control switch, 15-28
Torpedo air stabilizers, 5-6
Torpedo nose caps, 5-9
Torpedo propeller baffles, 5-8
Torpedo suspension bands, 5-7
Tow targets, 8-2
laser retro-reflectivity, 8-4
radar reflectivity, 8-3
Towline and towline wire rope leader, 8-4
11/64-inch-diameter armored towline, 8-4
3/8-inch-diameter towline wire rope leader, 8-4
Trailers, 9-30
A/M32K-4A rough terrain trailer, 9-31
AERO 51D munitions trailer, 9-32
MHU-126A/M munitions trailer, 9-32
MHU-202/M small munitions trailer, 9-33
Training devices and inert ordnance, 11-8
Training documentation requirements, 11-6
formal training, 11-6
informal training, 11-6
on-the-job training, 11-6
training, 11-6
Training plan, 11-8
Transfer of ammunition at sea, 11-30
Transfer unit, 6-14
Transfer unit and adapter assembly, 6-14
Triple-arch, 12-7
Trucks, 9-26
forklift trucks, 9-26
Mk 45 Mod 2 handlift truck, 9-30
pallet trucks, 9-29
TTU-304/E, 16-12
Turn-in of air-launch missile material, 17-31
Turn-in procedures for cartridge cases, 17-36
Types of guided missiles, 3-2
nonservice missiles, 3-2
service missile, 3-2
Types of magazines, 12-5

U
U.S. Government motor vehicle operator’s identification card, optional form 346, 12-30
Umbilical hook support assembly, 3-35
Unexpended weapons, 14-10
Unloading procedures, 14-33
Unpacking fins from shipping container, 13-86
Index-35
Unpacking rocket components, 13-69
Unretarded mode, 1-18
Up front control display, 15-22, 15-29

V
Very insensitive substance (Class/Division 1.5), 12-10

W
Warheads, 2-5
antitank/antipersonnel (AT/APERS) warhead, 2-7
flare warheads, 2-9
flechette warheads, 2-8
general-purpose (GP) warhead, 2-8
high-explosive fragmentation (HE-FRAG) warheads, 2-6
practice warheads, 2-10
smoke warheads, 2-9
Weapon assembly areas, 12-20
Weapons assembly, 13-1
2.75-inch airborne rocket assembly procedures, 13-73
5.0-inch airborne rocket assembly procedures, 13-69
aircraft general-purpose bombs, 13-1
flare dispenser, 13-74
full-scale practice bombs (BDU-45), 13-19
guided bomb units 10/12/16/51(series) (except GBU-12F/B) weapons assembly, 13-23
Join Direct Attack Munitions, 13-49
safety precautions, 13-86
Standoff Land Attack Missile, 13-80
subcaliber practice bombs, 13-16
weapon uncanning and inspection, 13-58
weapons assembly procedures, 13-1
Weapons elevator maintenance and safety, 11-28
Weapons elevators, 11-25
Weapons handling procedures, 14-2
arming and dearming, 14-6
hung and unexpended weapons, 14-10
weapons loading and downloading, 14-2
Weapons loading, 14-12
air-launched missile loading, 14-17
aircraft gun loading 20 mm, 14-27
general-purpose (gp) bombs, 14-12
practice bombs, 14-15
Weapons movement, 11-29
weapons movement in support of flight operations, 11-29
weapons onload and offload, 11-30
Weapons onload and offload, 11-30
explosive anchorage, 11-30
pier side, 11-30
transfer of ammunition at sea, 11-30
Weapons support equipment (WSE), 9-38

Index-36
Weapon uncanning and inspection, 13-55
CBU-99B/B procedures, 13-59
weapon final post-inspection, 13-65
weapon inspection, 13-59
Wing pylon, 15-17
Work task codes, 11-12
WTC 1 handling, 11-12
WTC 2 storage and stowage, 11-12
WTC 3 assembly and disassembly, 11-13
WTC 4 load and download, 11-13
WTC 5 arm and de-arm, 11-13
WTC 6 install and remove, 11-13
WTC 7 testing, 11-13
WPN volume control, 15-27

Index-37